Skip to main content

Full text of "Department of State bulletin"

See other formats 


liiiliiiilOilliillilfJlillH^^ 


ft 

f  5X3,  '  A 

THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 

BULLETIN 


APRIL  1,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  249— Publication  2094 


C 


ontents 


The  War  Page 

Participation  of  the  United  States  in  Emergency  Edu- 
cational and  Cultural  Rebuilding  of  the  War-Torn 

United  Nations , 299 

Censorship 300 

Third  Anniversary  of  Constitution  of  New  Government 

in  Yugoslavia 301 

Civil  Aviation 301 

The  Proclaimed  List:  Revision  VII      301 

Award  of  the  Medal  for  Merit 301 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

Conference  of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education  in  London .       302 

American  Republics 

Death  of  the  Ambassador  of  Peru : 

Statement  by  the  President 302 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 302 

Distinguished    Visitors    From    the    Other    American 

Republics 302 

The  Department 

Petroleum    Division:    Departmental    Order    1245    of 

March  27,  1944 303 

Aviation  Division:  Departmental  Order  1246  of  March 

28,  1944      303 

Appointment  of  Officers      304 

The  Foreign  Service 

Death  of  Clayson  W.  Aldridge 304 

Death  of  Theodore  C.  Weber 304 


[over] 


U.  S.  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  00CUMENT§ 

MAY   6  1944 


0 


07lienj5-CONTIMJED 


Treaty  Information  Page 

Lapse  of  Agreements  With  Haiti  and  the  Dominican 
Republic  Relating  to  Reciprocal  Concessions  in  the 

Haitian-Dominican  Commercial  Treaty 305 

Trade  Agreement  With  Iran 305 

Agreement  for  United  Nations  Rehef  and  Rehabilita- 
tion Administration 305 

Operation    of    Pan-American    Airways    Over    British 

Columbia 306 

Jurisdiction   Over   Criminal   Offenses   Committed   by 

Armed  Forces 306 

Inter-American  Institute  of  Agi'icultural  Sciences      .    .       306 

Publications 306 

Legislation 307 


The  War 


PARTICIPATION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  IN  EMERGENCY  EDUCATIONAL 
AND  CULTURAL  REBUILDING  OF  THE  WAR-TORN  UNITED  NATIONS 


[Released  to  the  press  March  31] 

War  is  destroying  the  educational  and  cultural 
organizations  of  the  countries  occupied  by  the 
enemy.  Universities,  schools,  libraries,  museums, 
and  scientific  laboratories  have  been  wrecked  or 
greatly  damaged.  Books  and  equipment  have 
been  stolen.  Retreating  Axis  armies  are  likely 
to  do  still  more  injury. 

Teachers,  students,  and  scientists  have  been  sin- 
gled out  for  special  persecution.  Many  have  been 
imprisoned,  dei^orted,  or  killed — particularly  those 
refusing  to  collaborate  with  the  enemy.  In  fact, 
the  enemy  is  deliberately  depriving  his  victims  of 
those  tools  of  intellectual  life  without  which  their 
recovery  is  impossible. 

Educational  disorganization  and  economic  and 
social  distress  are  connected,  one  intensifying  the 
other.  Increasingly  the  war-torn  countries  are 
likely  to  suffer  declines  of  their  standards  of  liv- 
ing and  health  to  critically  low  levels.  The  whole 
people  will  suffer,  but  in  a  special  degree  the  chil- 
dren. Such  conditions  unavoidably  tend  toward 
internal  disorder  and  external  difficulties  and  may 
create  new  threats  to  the  economic  stability  and 
political  security  of  the  world,  upon  which,  in  fact, 
depend  the  well-being  and  peace  of  the  American 
people. 

The  peoples  who  survive  this  ordeal  will  need 
help- — in  order  to  help  themselves.  They  are  fac- 
ing enormous  problems  in  rebuilding  educational 
and  cultural  life  without  essential  facilities  and 
without  adequate  trained  personnel.  Plans  for 
these  tasks  must  be  made  now  and  the  work  im- 
dertaken  as  soon  as  possible. 

Because  of  the  unprecedented  crisis  which  must 
be  faced  in  this  regard,  the  Department  of  State 
believes  that  the  participation  of  the  United  States 

581X65 — 44 1 


Government  in  an  international  program  for  the 
rebuilding  of  essential  educational  and  cultural 
facilities  of  the  war-torn  countries  in  the  period 
immediately  following  hostilities  is  an  important 
service  in  the  national  interest  and  in  the  interest 
of  international  security  and  that  steps  looking  to 
this  participation  should  be  taken. 

In  the  Department's  study  to  date  of  the  kind 
of  program  that  would  be  practicable  and  desir- 
able, certain  conclusions  have  already  become  clear. 
It  would  be  unwise  for  this  Government  to  un- 
dertake to  apply,  much  less  impose,  a  foreign  edu- 
cational program  or  system  in  any  liberated  coun- 
try or  to  develop  a  program  for  the  placement  of 
American  teachers  in  the  schools  of  these  coun- 
tries or  for  the  preparation  of  textbooks  in  the 
United  States  for  use  in  such  schools. 

In  order  to  help  the  war-torn  countries  to  help 
themselves  in  the  rebuilding  of  essential  educa- 
tional and  cultural  facilities,  the  Department  pro- 
jDoses  to  collaborate  for  the  time  being  with  the 
Conference  of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education  in 
London  and  to  cooperate  with  the  nations  repre- 
sented in  this  Conference,  with  the  other  United 
Nations,  and  with  the  nations  associated  with  the 
United  Nations  in  the  war  in  forming,  as  soon  as 
practicable,  a  United  Nations  organization  for 
educational  and  cultural  reconstruction.  It  recog- 
nizes that  a  significant  effort  has  already  been  made 
abroad  and  that  useful  work  has  been  begun  in  the 
shaping  of  an  emergency  program  to  meet  this 
need. 

This  program,  it  now  appears,  may  consist  of 
(1)  assistance  in  the  restocking  of  essential  edu- 
cational facilities,  especially  with  books  and  scien- 
tific and  other  teaching  aids,  (2)  assistance  in  the 
providing  of  opportunities  for  the  training  of  care- 

299 


300 


DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE    BULLETIN 


fully  selected  foreign  students  in  American  educa- 
tional institutions,  (3)  assistance  in  reestablishing 
essential  library  facilities,  and  (4)  assistance  in 
the  recovery  and  restoration  to  their  rightful  own- 
ers of  educational,  scientific,  artistic,  and  archival 
materials  looted  by  the  Axis  countries. 

In  this  program,  as  in  all  other  activities  in  edu- 
cational and  related  fields,  the  Department  will 
seek  the  advice  and  cooperation  of  other  agencies 
and  organizations,  both  governmental  and  private. 
It  will  attempt  to  operate  in  a  manner  equally  ad- 
vantageous to  all  the  countries  concerned.  This 
reciprocal  relationship  is  basic  in  any  sound  pro- 
gram of  educational  and  cultural  relations. 

This  statement  concerning  the  participation  of 
the  United  States  in  emergency  restoration  of  es- 
sential educational  and  cultural  facilities  of  the 
war-torn  United  Nations  deals  with  only  one  of  the 
important  educational  and  cultural  problems  in 
the  international  field  which  are  receiving  active 
consideration.  Also  of  very  great  significance  is 
the  long-range  furtherance  of  educational  and  cul- 
tural relations  among  nations.  The  Department 
wishes  increasing]}'  to  encourage  democratic  inter- 
national cooperation  in  developing  reciprocal  and 
desirable  educational  and  cultural  relations  among 
the  nations  and  peoples  of  the  world,  especially 
looking  toward  the  promotion  of  free  and  friendly 
intellectual  intercourse  among  them  in  the  interest 
of  international  peace  and  security. 

No  attempt  is  made  here  to  deal  with  the  im- 
portant questions  concerning  the  educational  and 
cultural  jDrograms  of  the  Axis  countries. 

CENSORSHIP 

The  Secretary  of  State  was  asked  on  March  27, 
1944  whether  he  would  comment  on  the  statement 
made  by  Governor  Dewey  in  his  addi-ess  on 
March  24  that  "when  we  find  the  State  Depart- 
ment requesting  the  British  censor  to  suppress  po- 
litical news  sent  to  American  papers  by  American 
correspondents  abroad,  it  begins  to  amount  to  a 
deliberate  and  dangerous  suppression  of  news  at 
home." 

The  Secretary  made  the  following  reply  to  this 
inquiry : 

"Governor  Dewey  is  100  percent  wrong  in  the 
accuracy  of  his  statement.     All  my  life  I  have  not 


only  talked  about  a  free  press,  I  have  fought  for  it. 
When  these  rumors  of  jjolitical  censorship  in  Eng- 
land started  in  November  1942  I  wrote  Bj'ron 
Price  and  cabled  Ambassador  Winant  to  tell  Mr. 
Eden  my  conviction  that  'fundamentally  the  long- 
range  interests  of  international  friendship  are  best 
served  by  permitting  the  people  of  any  country  to 
know  what  people  in  friendly  countries  are  think- 
ing and  saying  about  them,  however  unpleasant 
some  of  those  opinions  may  be.'  Both  Mr.  Price 
and  Mr.  Eden  expressed  full  agreement. 

"These  i-umors  cropped  up  again  while  I  was 
in  Florida  last  month,  and  Mr.  Stettinius  made 
unequivocally  clear  that  that  is  still  our  policy. 
His  statement  was  published  widely  at  the  time. 

"I  am  glad  to  see  a  press  dispatch  from  London 
yesterday  stating  that  the  British  Government 
fully  understands,  and  shares,  our  opposition  to 
political  censorshij)  and  our  conviction  that  plain 
speaking  is  more  healthful  than  suppression." 

[Released  to  the  press  March  28] 

At  the  Secretary  of  State's  press  conference 
March  28  a  correspondent  called  attention  to  an 
article  in  the  New  York  Times  from  London  which 
stated  that  the  London  office  took  no  exception  to 
Secretary  Hull's  statement  yesterday,  but  that 
there  had  been  repeated  instances  of  objections 
from  Washington  to  stories  by  American  corre- 
spondents about  diplomatic  developments  which 
had  been  passed  in  regular  routine  through  the 
British  censorship. 

Commenting  on  this  Secretary  Hull  said: 
"The  statement  I  gave  you  yesterday  is  entirely 
accurate.  We  have  never  requested  the  British 
for  any  kind  of  censorsliip  whatsoever  except  on 
grounds  of  military  security  or  for  the  safety  of 
high  officials  while  traveling.  There  seems  to  be  a 
confusion  between  the  censorship  of  news  in  the 
possession  of  the  press  and  the  avoidance  of  pre- 
mature disclosures  to  the  press  of  confidential  in- 
formation. The  disclosure  of  confidential  infor- 
mation is  a  matter  between  the  governments  con- 
ducting negotiations,  et  cetera,  and  upon  which 
there  is  usually  consultation  before  publication. 
We  ourselves  never  think  of  publishing  something 
in  that  connection  witliout  first  conferring  with 
the  other  government  and  having  an  agreement. 
That  is  a  matter  for  decisions  of  the  governments 
iind  not  a  matter  of  censorship. 


APRIL    1,    1944 


301 


"Where  there  has  occurred  in  the  past  premature 
disclosure  to  the  press  by  unauthorized  officials, 
usually  anonymous,  on  either  the  part  of  this  Gov- 
erinnent  or  the  British  Government,  each  Govern- 
ment has  customarily  called  the  attention  of  the 
other  Government  to  the  infringement  of  agree- 
ment between  the  two  Governments.  Any  such 
action  is  in  no  way  related  to  the  question  of  cen- 
sorship upon  which  our  position  is  unequivocal 
and  clear. 

"Any  claim  that  the  State  Department  has  re- 
quested the  British  censor  to  suppress  political 
news  is  therefore  entirely  wrong." 

THIRD   ANNIVERSARY   OF   CONSTITUTION 
OF  NEW  GOVERNMENT  IN  YUGOSLAVIA 

[Released  to  the  press  March  28] 

The  President  has  sent  the  following  message 
to  King  Peter  II  of  Yugoslavia,  now  in  London : 

March  27. 1944. 
Three  years  ago  today  the  Yugoslav  people  ral- 
lied to  begin  their  gallant  struggle  against  the 
forces  of  oppression  and  tyranny,  a  struggle  that 
has  become  epic  in  the  minds  and  hearts  of  Amer- 
icans. In  greeting  Your  Majesty  on  this  anni- 
versary I  extend  to  the  embattled  people  of  Yugo- 
slavia an  expression  of  America's  admiration  and 
friendship. 

Franklin  Delano  Roosevelt 

CIVIL  AVIATION 

[Released  to  the  press  March  31] 

Mr.  Adolf  A.  Berle,  Jr.,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
State,  and  Mr.  Edward  Warner,  Vice  Chairman 
of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  are  going  to 
London  for  an  exploratory  exchange  of  views  on 
civil  aviation  with  His  Majesty's  Government  in 
the  United  Kingdom  as  a  first  step  toward  pre- 
liminary international  discussion  this  summer. 

It  is  expected  that  a  group  composed  of  Mr. 
Joseph  C.  Grew,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Secretary 
of  State,  Mr.  L.  Welch  Pogue,  Chairman  of  the 
Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  Mr.  William  A.  M.  Bur- 
den, Assistant  Secretary  of  Commerce,  and  others 
will  conduct  similar  exploratory  conversations 
with  representatives  of  the  U.S.S.R.  in  Washing- 
ton within  the  next  fortnight. 


THE  PROCLAIMED  LIST:  REVISION  VII 

[Released  to  the  press  March  20] 

The  Secretary  of  State,  acting  in  conjunction 
with  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the  Attorney 
General,  the  Secretary  of  Commerce,  the  Admin- 
istrator of  the  Foreign  Economic  Administration, 
and  the  Coordinator  of  Inter-American  Affairs, 
pursuant  to  the  proclamation  by  the  President  of 
July  17,  1941  providing  for  the  Proclaimed  List 
of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals,  on  March  23,  1944 
issued  Revision  VII  of  the  Proclaimed  List.  Re- 
vision VII  supersedes  Revision  VI,  dated  October 
7,  1943,  and  consolidates  Revision  VI  with  its  six 
supplements. 

No  new  additions  to  or  deletions  from  the  Pro- 
claimed List  are  made  in  this  revision.  Certain 
minor  changes  in  the  spelling  of  names  listed  are 
made. 

Revision  VII  follows  the  listing  arrangement 
used  in  Revision  VI.  The  list  is  divided  into  two 
parts:  Part  I  relates  to  listings  in  the  American 
republics  and  part  II  to  listings  in  countries  other 
than  the  American  republics.  Revision  VII  con- 
tains a  total  of  1.5,061  listings,  of  which  10,146  are 
in  part  I  and  4,915  in  part  II. 

AWARD  OF  THE  MEDAL  FOR  MERIT 

[Released  to  the  press  March  28] 

The  President  has  awarded  the  Medal  for  Merit 
to  ^Ir.  John  C.  Garand,  head  engineer.  Ordnance 
Department,  U.S.  Ai-my,  and  to  Dr.  Albert  Hoyt 
Taylor,  chief  physicist.  Naval  Research  Labora- 
tory, for  exceptionally  meritorious  conduct  in  the 
performance  of  outstanding  services. 

The  citation  accompanying  the  award  of  the 
Medal  for  Merit  to  Mr.  Garand  reads  as  follows : 

"For  exceptionally  meritorious  conduct  in  the 
performance  of  outstanding  services  in  designing 
and  perfecting  the  United  States  Rifle  Caliber  .30, 
Ml.  Mr.  Garand  has  devoted  more  than  sixteen 
years,  i.e.,  from  1919  to  1936,  at  the  Springfield 
Armory,  Springfield,  Massachusetts,  developing 
this  rifle  with  great  initiative,  ceaseless  patience,, 
skill  and  technological  brilliance. 

"Mr.  Garand's  devotion  to  his  work  has  been 
complete  and  his  attitude  towards  his  accomplish- 


581165—44- 


302 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


merits  one  of  modesty  and  patriotic  unselfishness. 
The  United  States  Rifle  Caliber  .30,  Ml.  popularly 
known  as  the  Garand,  capable  of  100  rounds  a  min- 
ute, gives  a  single  Ml  rifle  platoon  today  more  fire 
power  than  an  entire  company  had  in  1918.  The 
father  of  this  rifle  has  rendered  an  exceptional 
service  to  his  country  and  contributed  conspicu- 
ously to  the  common  war  effort." 

Mr.  Garand  also  worked  on  the  improvement  of 
this  rifle  during  the  later  years  and  brought  it  to  a 
still  higher  state  of  perfection. 

The  citation  for  Dr.  Taylor  is  as  follows : 

"For  exceptionally  meritorious  conduct  in  the 
performance  of  outstanding  services  in  the  line  of 
his  profession  as  member  of  the  staff  of  the  Naval 
Research  Laboratory.  Undiscouraged  by  fre- 
quent handicaps,  Doctor  Taylor  labored  tirelessly 
in  a  course  of  intensive  research  and  experimenta- 
tion which  eventually  resulted  in  the  discovery 
and  development  of  radar.  His  foresight,  tech- 
nical skill,  and  steadfast  perseverance  contributed 
in  large  measure  to  the  timely  introduction  of  a 
scientific  device  which  has  yielded  the  United 
States  Navy  a  definite  advantage  over  her  enemies 
during  the  present  war." 

The  presentation  of  the  medals  was  made  by  the  - 
Secretary  of  State  as  chairman  of  the  Medal  for 
Merit  Board.     The  other  members  of  the  Board 
are  the  Secretary  of  War  and  the  Secretary  of  the 
Navy. 


American  Republics 


International  Conferences, 
Commissions,  Etc. 


CONFERENCE  OF  ALLIED  MINISTERS 
OF  EDUCATION  IN  LONDON 

[Released  to  the  press  April  1] 

The  Secretary  of  State  announced  on  April  1 
that  Dean  C.  Mildred  Thompson  of  Vassar  College 
had  been  appointed  a  member  of  the  American 
delegation  to  collaborate  with  the  Conference  of 
Allied  Ministers  of  Education  in  London. 


DEATH  OF  THE  AMBASSADOR  OF  PERU 
Statement  by  the  President 

[Released  to  the  press  April  1] 

I  am  deeply  shocked  and  grieved  at  the  news  of 
the  sudden  death  of  the  Ambassador  of  Peru,  Don 
Manuel  de  Freyre  y  Santander,  who  has  been  my 
'very  good  personal  friend  for  many  years. 

His  long  career  as  representative  of  Peru  in 
Washington  was  characterized  by  an  unusual  and 
sympathetic  understanding.  During  his  years 
here  he  represented  his  country  ably  and  effec- 
tively. 

I  join  with  his  many  friends  everywhere  in 
mourning  him. 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  April  1] 

I  have  just  called  at  the  Peruvian  Embassy 
where  I  presented  my  sincere  condolences  to  the 
family  and  to  the  staff  of  the  late  Peruvian  Am- 
bassador, His  Excellency  Don  Manuel  de  Freyre  y 
Santander.  The  death  of  Senor  de  Freyre  fills  me 
with  a  deep  sense  of  personal  loss.  He  was  a 
valued  friend  and  counselor. 

An  able  representative  of  Peru  to  the  United 
States,  like  his  father  before  him,  this  descendant 
of  one  of  the  Liberators  throughout  his  long  i-esi- 
dence  among  us — as  a  boy,  as  a  young  man,  and 
finally  as  the  distinguished  Dean  of  the  Diplo- 
matic Corps — contributed  greatly  to  the  good  rela- 
tions between  Peru  and  the  United  States. 

The  death  of  the  Peruvian  Ambassador  deprives 
his  country  of  a  public  servant  of  the  highest  order 
at  a  time  when  the  freedom-loving  people  through- 
out the  world  need  leaders  of  his  outstanding 
qualities. 

DISTINGUISHED  VISITORS  FROM  THE 
OTHER  AMERICAN  REPUBLICS 

[Released  to  the  press  March  28] 

The  Reverend  Roberto  Saboia  de  Medeiros,  S.J., 
of  Sao  Paulo,  Brazil,  has  arrived  in  Washington 


APRIL    1,    1944 


303 


as  a  guest  of  the  Department  of  State,  under  whose 
auspices  he  will  study  social  welfare  in  the  United 
States. 

Father  Saboia  de  Medeiros,  who  is  president  of 
the  Social  Action  Association  and  editor  of  the 
Social  Service  Review,  has  founded  clinics,  work- 
ers' clubs,  and  theatrical  groups,  and  is  planning 
schools  of  industrial  chemistry  and  business  man- 
agement to  train  young  Brazilians  for  the  expected 
industrialization  of  Brazil.  One  of  the  objects  of 
his  present  trip  is  to  recruit  in  the  United  States 
sevei'al  faculty  members  for  proposed  schools  of 
industrial  chemistry  and  business  education  at  Sao 
Paulo. 

Father  Saboia  de  Medeiros  believes  that  the 
material  strength  of  this  country  has  been  suffi- 
ciently emphasized  abroad  and  that  it  is  necessary 
now  to  bring  to  other  countries  a  knowledge  and 
understanding  of  the  ideals  which  have  motived 
this  country's  growth  and  brought  it  to  its  present 
position  in  the  world.  Consequently,  his  trip 
bears  a  dii'ect  relation  to  an  exposition  he  plans 
to  have  in  Sao  Paulo  of  books,  moving  pictures, 
exhibits,  and  other  materials  illustrative  of  the 
ideals  and  spirit  of  the  United  States. 


The  Department 


PETROLEUM  DIVISION 

Departmental  Order  1245  of  March  27,  1944  ' 

There  is  hereby  established  in  the  Office  of 
Economic  Affairs  a  Petroleum  Division  which  shall 
have  responsibility  for  the  initiation,  develop- 
ment and  coordination  of  policy  and  action  in  all 
matters  pertaining  to  petroleum  and  petroleum 
products  and,  within  that  scope,  responsibility  for 
liaison  with  intergovernmental  agencies  concerned 
with  international  problems  in  this  field  and  with 
the  Petroleum  Administration  for  War,  the  For- 
eign Economic  Administration  and  other  depart- 
ments and  agencies  which  are  or  may  hereafter  be 
concerned  with  petroleum  and  petroleum  products. 
Since  the  Department's  policy  with  regard  to 


petroleum  and  with  regard  to  other  commodities 
must  be  consistent,  it  is  important  that  this  Divi- 
sion collaborate  closely  with  the  Commodities 
Division.  Other  divisions  concerned  should  also 
be  consulted  as  occasion  may  arise. 

Mr.  Charles  B.  Rayner  is  temporarily  designated 
Acting  Chief  of  the  Petroleum  Division  in  addi- 
tion to  and  concurrent  with  his  duties  as  Adviser 
on  Petroleum  Policy  in  the  Office  of  Economic 
Affairs. 

Mr.  James  C.  Sappington  3d  is  designated  As- 
sistant Chief  of  the  Petroleum  Division. 

The  routing  symbol  of  the  Petroleum  Division 
is  PED. 

Departmental  Order  no.  1218  is  amended  ac- 
cordingly and  the  following  changes  are  made: 
Under  Office  of  Economic  Affairs  3.  Comoaodities 
Division  (a) ,-  delete  the  phrase  petroleum  and  pe- 
troleum products",  (d),  delete  the  phrase  "the 
Office  of  Petroleum  Administrator  for  War",  sec- 
ond paragraph,  delete  the  designation  of  Mr.  Sap- 
pington as  Assistant  Chief  .of  the  Commodities 
Division. 

CORDELL  HtJLL 

AVIATION  DIVISION 

Departmental  Order  1246  of  March  28,  1944 ' 

In  order  to  amplify  and  clarify  the  functions 
and  responsibilities  of  the  Aviation  Division  of  the 
Office  of  Transportation  and  Communications, 
page  10  of  Departmental  Order  No.  1218  of  Jan- 
uary 15,  1944,  which  set  forth  the  functions  and 
responsibilities  of  the  Aviation  Division,*  is 
amended  to  read  as  follows : 

1.  Aviation  Division. 

The  Aviation  Division  shall  have  responsibility 
for  initiating,  developing  and  coordinating  policy 
and  action  in  all  matters  pertaining  to : 

(a)  International  aviation,  including  the  de- 
velopment and  operation  of  airlines  and  air  trans- 
portation, the  acquisition  of  landing  rights  abroad, 
and  matters  relating  to  airports  and  airways. 


'  Effective  Mar.  24,  1&44. 

'  Buixehn  of  Jan.  15,  1944,  p.  53. 

'  Effective  Mar.  27,  1944. 

*  Bin-LETiN  of  Jan.  15, 1944,  p.  49. 


304 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


(b)  Discussions  with  foreign  countries  on  mat- 
ters relating  to  civil  aviation  and  the  drafting  of 
agreements  on  this  subject. 

(c)  Assembling  basic  material  and  otherwise 
preparing  for  international  aviation  conferences. 

(d)  Eepresentation  of  the  Department  on  the 
International  Technical  Committee  of  Aerial 
Legal  Experts  (CITEJA),  the  United  States  Na- 
tional Commission  of  the  Permanent  American 
Aeronautical  Commission  (CAPA)  and  other  in- 
ternational bodies  dealing  with  aeronautical 
affairs. 

(e)  Matters  of  policy  relating  to  international 
air  mail. 

(f)  Presentation  to  the  Munitions  Assignments 
Committee  (Air)  or  other  appropriate  allocation 
authorities  of  foreign  requests  for  aircraft  and 
collaboration  with  other  offices  and  divisions  of 
the  Department  and  of  other  Departments  and 
agencies  of  the  Government  concerned  in  the  ex- 
port of  aircraft. 

(g)  Training  of  foreign  aircraft  and  ground 
personnel  in  the  United  States  and  abroad,  includ- 
ing collaboration  and  coordination  with  the  Civil 
Aeronautics  Board,  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Admin- 
istration and  other  Departments  and  agencies  of 
the  Government  and  with  foreign  agencies  engaged 
in  like  activities. 

(h)  Obtaining  military  and  civil  flight  permits 
for  United  States  aircraft  proceeding  abroad  and 
for  foreign  aircraft  visiting  the  United  States  and 
its  possessions  on  request  of  diplomatic  missions 
accredited  to  the  United  States. 

(i)  Screening  of  non-military  requests  for 
travel  priorities  for  civilian  personnel  and  the 
presentation  of  these  requests  to  military  author- 
ities. 

(j)  Eepresentation  on  interdepartmental  com- 
mittees considering  problems  involving  aviation. 

(k)  Miscellaneous  matters  involving  aviation  in 
general  including  liaison  with  the  Department  of 
Commerce,  Civil  Aeronautics,  Civil  Aeronautics 
Administration,  the  War,  Navy,  and  Post  Office 
Departments,  Defense  Supplies  Corporation  and 
otlier  Departments  and  agencies  of  the  Govern- 
ment. 


In  carrying  out  these  functions  and  responsibil- 
ities, the  Aviation  Division  shall  work  in  close  co- 
operation with  all  other  interested  divisions  of  the 
Department. 

Mr.  Stokely  W.  Morgan  is  hereby  designated 
Chief  and  Mr.  Joe  D.  Walstrom  Assistant  Chief  of 
the  Aviation  Division.  Mr.  Stephen  Latchford 
will  continue  to  serve  as  Adviser  on  Air  Law  in 
this  Division. 

The  routing  symbol  of  the  Aviation  Division 
is  AD. 

CoRDEUL  Hull 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Order  1247  of  March  29, 1944, 
effective  March  27,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  Livingston  T.  Merchant  as  Chief  of 
the  Eastern  Hemisphere  Division. 

By  Departmental  Order  1248  of  March  29, 1944, 
effective  March  27,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  Walter  N.  Walmsley,  Jr.  as  Acting 
Chief  of  the  Division  of  River  Plate  Affairs,  in  ad- 
dition to  his  duties  as  Chief  of  the  Division  of 
Brazilian  Affairs. 


The  Foreign  Service 


DEATH  OF  CLAYSON  W.  ALDRIDGE 

[Released  to  the  press  April  1] 

The  Department  of  State  has  learned  with  regret 
of  the  death  of  Clayson  W.  Aldridge,  a  Foreign 
Service  officer,  who  entered  the  Foreign  Service 
March  20,  1925.  Mr.  Aldridge  died  at  the  Naval 
Hospital.  Corona.  Calif.,  on  March  30,  1944. 

DEATH  OF  THEODORE  C.  WEBER 

[Released  to  tbe  press  April  1] 

The  Department  of  State  has  learned  with  regret 
of  the  death  on  Marcli  30  of  Theodore  C.  Weber, 
a  Foreign  Service  officer,  who  entered  the  Foreign 
Service  March  23,  1942  and  was  appointed  vice 
consul  at  Ciudad  Trujillo,  Dominican  Republic, 
August  11.  1943. 


APRIL    1,     1944 


305 


Treaty  Information 


LAPSE  OF  AGREEMENTS  WITH  HAITI  AND 
THE  DOMINICAN  REPUBLIC  RELATING 
TO  RECIPROCAL  CONCESSIONS  IN  THE 
HAITIAN -DOMINICAN  COMMERCIAL 
TREATY 

[Released  to  the  press  March  27] 

In  notes  exchanged  between  the  United  States 
and  Haiti  and  the  United  States  and  the  Domini- 
can Republic  during  1942,  the  United  States  agreed 
not  to  claim  the  benefit  of  reductions  in  customs 
duties  granted  by  Haiti  and  the  Dominican  Re- 
public to  each  other  on  a  restricted  number  of 
products  specifically  provided  for  in  the  Haitian- 
Dominican  commercial  treaty  signed  on  August 
26,  1941. 

That  commercial  treaty  expired  on  March  24, 
1944  and  in  consequence  tliereof  the  above-men- 
tioned agreements  in  the  notes  exchanged  by  the 
United  States  and  Haiti  and  the  Dominican  Re- 
public automatically  lapsed  on  the  same  date. 
These  notes  were  exchanged  between  the  United 
States  and  Haiti  on  February  16  and  19  ^  and  on 
April  25,- 1942,  and  between  the  United  States  and 
the  Dominican  Republic  on  November  14, 1942.^ 

TRADE  AGREEMENT  WITH  IRAN 

[Released  to  the  press  March  31] 

On  March  31,  1944  the  President  proclaimed 
the  trade  agreement  between  the  United  States  and 
Iran,  with  an  accompanying  exchange  of  notes, 
signed  at  Washington  on  April  8,  1943. 

Article  XIV  of  the  agreement  provides  that  it 
shall  enter  into  force  on  the  thirtieth  day  following 
the  exchange  of  the  proclamation  of  the  President 
of  the  United  States  for  the  instrument  of  ratifica- 
tion of  the  Government  of  Iran.  Following  the 
exchange  of  the  proclamation  and  the  instrument 
of  ratification  the  President  will  issue  a  supple- 
mentary proclamation  setting  forth  the  date  of 
entry  into  force. 

The  English  text  of  the  agreement,  with  the  ac- 
companying exchange  of  notes,  was  made  public 
in  the  Department's  press  release  133  of  April  8, 


1913.     An  analysis  of  the  agreement  was  printed 
in  the  Buixetin  of  April  10,  1943,  p.  299. 

AGREEMENT  FOR  UNITED  NATIONS  RELIEF 
AND  REHABILITATION  ADMINISTRATION 

Notification.s  and  documents  relating  to  ap- 
proval or  ratification  of  the  Agreement  for  United 
Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration 
signed  in  Washington  on  'November  9,  1943,^  have 
been  received  by  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  of  America  as  follows : 

The  Ambassador  of  the  Dominican  Republic 
transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of  State,  with  a  note 
of  February  15, 1944,  the  instrument  of  ratification 
of  the  agreement  signed  by  the  President  of  the 
Dominican  Republic  on  January  24,  1944  and  two 
certified  copies  of  the  Gaceta  Oficial  No.  6016  of 
January  1,  1944,  in  which  is  published  Resolution 
457  of  the  National  Congress  approving  the 
agreement. 

The  Ambassador  of  El  Salvador  informed  the 
Secretary  of  State,  by  a  note  of  March  16,  1944, 
that  the  National  Legislative  Assembly  of  El 
Salvador  ratified  the  agreement  on  December  23, 
1943  and  that  the  decree  of  ratification  was  pub- 
lished in  the  Diario  Oficial  of  El  Salvador  on  Jan- 
uary 10,  1944. 

The  Minister  of  Ethiopia  transmitted  to  the 
Secretarj'  of  State,  with  a  communication  of  Feb- 
ruary 14, 1944,  the  instrument  of  ratification  of  the 
agreement  signed  by  the  Emperor  of  the  Imperial 
Ethiopian  Government  on  January  18,  1944. 

The  Ambassador  of  Honduras  informed  the  Sec- 
retary of  State,  by  a  note  of  January  27, 1944,  that 
(Ml  January  15,  1944  the  Executive  Power  of  Hon- 
duras promulgated  Decree  13  of  the  National  Con- 
gress of  Honduras  approving  the  agreement. 

The  Ambassador  of  Mexico  informed  the  Secre- 
tary of  State,  by  a  note  of  February  8,  1944,  that 
the  decree  of  the  Chamber  of  Senators  of  the  Con- 
gress of  the  United  Mexican  States  approving  the 
agreement  was  published  in  the  Diario  Ofxiial  of 
his  Government  on  January  7, 1944. 


'  Executive  Agreement  Series  238. 
-  Executive  Agreement  Series  252. 
^  Executive  Agreement  Series  274. 
■*  Executive  Agreement  Series  352. 


306 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


The  Secretary  of  Stiite  has  acknowledged  the  re- 
ceipt of  these  communications  and  has  informed 
the  other  governments  or  authorities  concerned  and 
the  Dii-ector  General  of  the  United  Nations  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Administration  of  the  ap- 
proval or  ratification  of  the  agreement  by  the 
above-mentioned  countries. 

On  March  28,  1944  the  President  approved  an 
act  entitled  "Joint  Resolution  To  enable  the  United 
States  to  participate  in  the  work  of  the  United 
Nations  relief  and  rehabilitation  organization" 
(Public  Law  267,  78th  Cong.).  The  law  author- 
izes appropriations  not  to  exceed  $1,350,000,000  for 
participation  by  the  United  States  in  the  work 
of  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation 
Administration. 

OPERATION  OF  PAN-AMERICAN  AIRWAYS 
OVER  BRITISH  COLUMBIA 

An  agreement  has  been  eilected  between  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  and  the  Government 
of  Canada,  by  an  exchange  of  notes  at  Ottawa 
dated  June  12, 1943  and  January  26, 1944,  whereby 
Canada  grants  permission  to  the  Pan-American 
Airways  system  to  operate,  for  a  period  of  six 
months  from  January  26,  1944,  over  British  Co- 
lumbia and  to  stop  at  Prince  George  for  refueling 
while  en  route  between  Seattle,  Wash.,  and  Juneau, 
Alaska.  The  authorization  ,  granted  under  the 
present  agreement  and  any  renewal  thereof  in  no 
way  commits  the  Canadian  Government  with  re- 
spect to  post-war  commercial  aviation  policy. 

JURISDICTION  OVER  CRIMINAL  OFFENSES 
COMMITTED  BY  ARIMED  FORCES 

An  agreement  regarding  jurisdiction  of  offenses 
committed  by  members  of  the  armed  forces  of  tlie 
United  States  in  Canada  has  been  effected  by  an 
exchange  of  notes  at  Ottawa  dated  December  27, 
1943,  February  10, 1944,  and  March  9, 1944  between 
the  United  States  and  Canada. 

Agreements  regarding  criminal  offenses  com- 
mitted by  members  of  armed  forces  have  also  been 
concluded  by  the  United  States  with  China,^ 
Egypt,  Great  Britain,^  and  India. 


INTER-AMERICAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

The  White  House  announced  ^  that  on  April  1, 
1944  the  President  transmitted  to  the  Senate,  with 
a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  consent  of  that 
body  to  ratification,  a  Convention  on  the  Inter- 
American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences, 
which  was  opened  for  signature  at  the  Pan  Amer- 
ican Union  on  January  15, 1944. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Plantatiou  Rubber  Investigations :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Nicaragua  Continuing  in 
Force  an  Agreement  of  January  11,  1941,  and  Text  of 
Agreement  of  January  11,  l'.)41 — Effected  by  excliange 
(if  notes  signed  at  Managua  June  23  and  26,  1943 ;  ef- 
fective July  1,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series  357. 
Publication  2085.     8  pp.     5f. 

HeaUii  and  Sanitation  Program:  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Colombia — Effected  by  ex- 
change of  notes  signed  at  Bogota  October  23,  1942. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  369.  Publication  2080.  5 
pp.     5^. 

The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals :  Re- 
vision VII,  March  23,  1944,  Proniulgated  Pursuant  to 
Proclamation  2497  of  the  President  of  July  17.  1941. 
Publication  20S1.     374  pp.     Free. 

Index  to  the  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  IX,  nos. 
210-235,  July  3-December  25,  1943.  Publication  2087. 
19  pp.     Free. 

Other  Government  Agencies 

■'Iran  in  1943",  by  John  A.  Calhoun,  Third  Secretary  and 
Vice  Consul  of  the  American  Legation  at  Tehran,  Iran. 

"Turkey  in  1943",  by  Earle  C.  Taylor,  Commercial  Attach^ 
of  the  American  Embassy  at  Ankara,  Turkey. 

"Canadian  Farm  Sentiment :  Today's  Dominant  Trends", 
by  Clifford  C.  Taylor,  Agricultural  Attache,  and  Irven 
M.  Eitrelm,  Third  Secretary  and  Vice  Consul  of  the 
American  Embassy  at  Ottavpa,  Canada. 

The  first  two  articles  listed  above  will  be  found 
in  the  April  1,  1944  issue  of  the  Department  of 


'  Executive  Agreement  Series  360. 
''Executive  Agreement  Series  355. 
'  White  House  press  release,  Apr.  1,  1944. 


APRIL    1,    1944  '  307 

Commerce  publication  entitled  Foreign  Commerce 
Weekly.  The  article  on  "Canadian  Farm  Senti- 
ment" will  be  found  in  the  April  8,  1944  issue  of 


Legislation 


that  periodical.     Copies   of   Foreign   Commerce  Amending  Section  323  of  the  NationaUty  Act  of  1940. 

Weekly  may  be  obtained  from  the  Superintendent  H.  Kept.  1310,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  2522.    [Favorable  re- 

of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  for  the  Ex^tension^f  Lend-Lease.    H.  Kept.  1316,  78th  Cong.,  on 

price  of  10  cents  each.  H.R.  4254.     [Favorable  report.]     12  pp. 


D.    S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICEi  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendeut  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office.  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents    -    -    -    -    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPEOVAL  OF  THE  DIRECTOR  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  THE  BUDGET 


/  UO  D,     I  rj  ^  ^ 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULLETIN 


fc 


APRIL  8,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  250— Publication  2099 


ontents 


The  War  Page 
The  Importance  of  International  Commerce  to  Pros- 
perity             311 

Accidental  Bombing  of  Schaffhausen 314 

Soviet  Statement  Regarding  Rumania 315 

Petroleum  Questions:  Preliminary  Discussions  by  the 

United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom 315 

Albania's   Struggle   for   Freedom:    Statement   by    the 

Department  of  State 315 

The   Proclaimed   List:    Cumulative   Supplement    1    to 

Revision  VII 315 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

The  International  Labor  Conference  at  Philado>Iphia: 

By  Otis  E.  Muliiken    . 316 

Inter- American  Commission  of  Women 325 

Europe 

Presentation  of  Letters  of  Credence  by  the  Minister  of 

the  Union  of  South  Africa 326 


American  Ri!publics 

Celebration  in  Chile  of  the  Day  of  the  Americas   .    .    .       327 
Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  Head  of  the  Municipal 

Library  of  Habana 327 

The  Far  East 

Return  From  China  of  United  States  Technical  Expert  .       327 

The  Department 

Financial  Matters:  Departmental  Order  1252  of  April 

1,  1944 328 

[over] 


U.  S.  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOl.. 

MAY  6  1944 


0 


OMteTlfS-CONTINUED 

The  Foreign  Service  Page 

Death  of  Edwin  Lowe  Neville 329 

Consular  Offices 329 

General 

Blair-Lee  House 329 

Treaty  Information 

Agreement  for  United  Nations  Kelief  and  Rehabilita- 
tion Administration 329 

Final  Act  of  International  Whalmg  Conference   ....  329 

Inter-American  Indian  Institute 330 

Renewal  of  Naval  Mission  Agreement  With  Peru   .    .    .  330 

Publications 330 

Legislation 331 


The  War 


THE  IMPORTANCE  OF  INTERNATIONAL  COMMERCE  TO  PROSPERITY 


[Released  to  the  press  April  2] 

The  text  of  a  broadcast  entitled  "The  Impor- 
tance of  International  Commerce  to  Prosperity", 
which  was  arranged  by  the  World  Wide  Broad- 
casting Foundation  and  which  was  given  by 
Mr.  Harry  C.  Hawkins,  Director  of  the  Office  of 
Economic  Affairs  of  the  Department  of  State,  over 
Station  WINX,  Washington,  D.C.,  April  2,  1944, 
follows : 

Announcer:  Plenty  of  jobs,  security,  perma- 
nent prosperity — these  are  the  things  we  want 
most  for  ourselves,  for  our  figliting  men  when 
they  return,  for  our  children,  after  we  have  won 
the  war.  Yet  the  United  States  could  not  long 
remain  an  island  of  prosperity  in  a  world  sea  of 
poverty. 

To  show  us  why  this  is  so,  this  week's  "Beyond 
Victory"  program,  brought  to  you  by  the  World 
Wide  Broadcasting  Foundation  of  Boston  and 
the  Carnegie  Endowment  for  International  Peace, 
calls  upon  one  of  the  leading  officials  of  the  United 
States  Department  of  State,  Mr.  Harry  C.  Haw- 
kins. For  many  years  Mr.  Hawkins  has  been 
working  closely  with  Secretary  Hull  in  carrying 
out  the  reciprocal-trade  agreements.  He  is  now 
the  Director  of  the  Office  of  Economic  Affairs  of 
the  State  Department. 

We  take  you  to  Washington,  where  Mr.  Haw- 
kins will  be  interviewed  by  Mr.  William  Harris. 

Harris:  Mr.  Hawkins — to  start  right  off  with 
a  hard  question — Do  you  think  that  after  the  war 
our  first  consideration  should  be  the  economic  wel- 
fai'e  of  other  countries,  bearing  in  mind  how  im- 
portant that  welfare  is  to  permanent  peace?  Or 
do  you  think  we  ought  to  concentrate  on  the  enor- 
mous problems  of  employment  and  production 
that  we're  going  to  have  right  here  at  home  ? 

58228& 44 1 


Hawkins:  Well,  Mr.  Harris,  if  we  had  to  make 
such  a  choice  that  would  be  a  hard  question.  How- 
ever, in  my  opinion  we  can  and  should  do  every- 
thing in  our  power  to  expand  employment  and 
production  here  in  the  United  States  after  the 
war.  And  at  the  same  time  we  can  and  should  help 
other  nations  to  expand  their  employment  and 
production.  If  we  do  that,  I  believe  we  will  have 
the  best  possible  basis  for  an  enduring  peace. 

Harris:  That  sounds  very  encouraging,  Mr. 
Hawkins — in  spite  of  that  ominous  "if".  But  how 
can  we  help  other  nations  expand  their  employ- 
ment and  production  ?  By  removing  all  our  tariff 
barriers  ? 

Hawkins:  Oh,  no.  That  would  be  too  drastic 
and  too  one-sided.  What  we  do  need  is  a  tariff 
and  foreign-trade  policy  that  will  call  for  inter- 
national cooperation  to  bring  about  a  substantial 
reduction  of  trade  barriers,  theirs  as  well  as  ours, 
in  the  real,  long-run  interests  of  all  countries. 

Harris:  And  if  we  don't  adopt  such  a  policy? 

Hawkins:  If  we  and  all  other  countries  don't 
consider  each  other's  long-run  trade  interests,  we'll 
all  soon  be  engaged  in  trade  warfare  as  we  have  in 
the  past,  and  all  our  hard  lessons  will  have  taught 
us  nothing. 

Harris  :  Well,  by  trade  warfare,  Mr.  Hawkins, 
do  you  mean  when  one  nation  discriminates  against 
another  by  refusing  to  admit  its  goods? 

Hawkins:  Not  necessarilj',  Mr.  Harris.  Trade 
warfare  doesn't  always  start  with  a  deliberately 
hostile  act;  it  doesn't  always  start  with  discrim- 
ination against  some  particular  nation;  and  it 
doesn't  always  mean  flatly  refusing  to  accept 
goods.  What  happens  more  often  is  that  a  coun- 
try imposes  high  tariffs  on  imports,  usually  in  an 
attempt  to  benefit  some  of  its  domestic  producers 
and  without  regard  to  how  the  tariff  is  going  to 

311 


312 

aflFect  foreign  producers  or  even  how  it's  going  to 
affect  its  own  export  interests  in  the  long  run. 
The  result  is  that  producers  in  other  countries  are 
deprived  of  outlets  for  their  products,  and  so  those 
countries  set  up  trade  barriers  of  their  own  against 
imports.  This  hits  still  other  countries  and  they 
in  turn  take  similar  action.  Some  countries  begin 
to  make  unfair  and  discriminatory  deals,  and  so 
unemployment  and  economic  sickness  begin  to 
spread  thi'oughout  the  world. 

Harris  :  And  that's  the  way  wars  are  caused. 
Hawkins:  That's  one  thing  that  can  contribute 
to  them.  We've  seen  that  when  a  country  gets 
starved  out  economically,  its  people  are  all  too 
ready  to  follow  the  first  dictator  who  may  rise  up 
and  promise  tliem  all  jobs.  Trade  conflict  breeds 
non-cooperation,  suspicion,  bitterness.  Nations 
which  are  economic  enemies  are  not  likely  to  re- 
main political  friends  for  long. 

Harris:  Well,  that's  a  grim  picture  you've 
painted,  but  I  know  enougli  about  international 
trade  to  realize  that  that's  just  what  has  happened 
sometimes  in  the  past.  Let's  all  earnestly  hope  it 
doesn't  happen  again. 

Hawkins:  It  is  with  that  hope  that  the  nations 
of  the  world — outside  the  Axis — have  been  turn- 
ing to  trade  cooperation,  to  giving  some  consid- 
eration to  the  other  fellow's  interests,  and  thereby 
looking  out  for  each  one's  own  ultimate  benefit. 

Harris:  Well,  exactly  what  does  that  mean  in 
terms  of  tariffs? 

Hawkins:  A  good  example  is  the  trade-agree- 
ments law  which  we  have  had  in  effect  since  1934. 
This  law  authorizes  the  President  to  negotiate  and 
conclude  with  other  comitries  reciprocal  agree- 
ments which  provide  for  reduction,  within  definite 
limits,  of  our  tariffs  which  unduly  hamper  their 
exports  to  us,  in  return  for  reductions  by  them  in 
their  trade  barriers  against  our  exports. 

Harris:  That  sounds  pretty  com23licated  to  me. 

Hawkins  :  Well,  some  aspects  of  it  are  technical, 
of  course,  but  let  me  give  you  an  example,  although 
it  is  far  too  simple  to  be  an  accurate  picture  of  all 
that  a  trade  agreement  is  and  how  it  is  made.  At 
one  time  the  United  States  had  a  high  tariff  on 
imports  of  Brazil  nuts.  Perhaps  our  imports  of 
these  nuts  were  not  very  important  in  our  whole 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 

national  economy,  but  they  were  very  important 
to  the  producers  in  Brazil,  and  our  tariff  limited 
their  sales  and  profits  in  this  country.  At  the  same 
time.  United  States  automobile  and  parts  manu- 
facturers wanted  to  sell  more  of  their  products  in 
Brazil,  but  the  Brazilian  tariff  on  such  articles  cut 
down  the  profits  or  limited  the  volume  of  such 
sales.  In  our  reciprocal-trade  agreement  with 
Brazil  we  reduced  our  tariff  on  Brazil  nuts,  while 
they  reduced  their  tariffs  on  automobiles  and 
parts. 

Harris:  I  can  see  how  that  kind  of  trade  co- 
operation would  make  for  better  feeling  between, 
countries  and  therefore  would  contribute  to  world  , 
peace.  But  will  trade  cooperation  help  solve  our 
own  post-war  problems  in  this  country?  After 
all,  we  can't  help  being  interested  in  our  own 
prosperity. 

Hawkins  :  That  is  just  what  I  am  talking  about. 
I  believe  that  we  must  look  at  post-war  trade  prob- 
lems realistically  and  not  sentimentally.  And 
from  a  purely  self-interested  point  of  view,  trade 
cooperation  will,  in  my  opinion,  help  us  a  great 
deal.  As  you  know,  we've  got  to  plan  on  enor- 
mously increased  production  in  this  comitry  after 
the  war,  and  the  American  domestic  market  can't 
absorb  all  that  production  indefinitely.  There 
won't  be  any  question  about  our  needing  gi'eatly 
increased  foreign  markets. 

Harris  :  And  I  sujDpose  American  producers  are 
well  aware  of  that? 

Hawkins:  Oh,  yes — very  well  aware.  Take 
agriculture,  for  example.  The  Farm  Bureau 
Federation  came  out  last  spring  with  the  statement 
that  if  farmers  are  to  maintain  their  production 
after  the  war,  their  export  outlets  absolutely  must 
be  restored. 

Harris:  That's  very  interesting.  I  shouldn't 
have  supposed  that  farmers  would  be  so  much  in- 
terested in  exports. 

Hawkins:  Certainly  they  are.  Many  people 
don't  realize,  Mr.  Harris,  that  about  half  of  all  this 
country's  exports  in  normal  times  have  been  agi'i- 
cultural  products.  In  fact,  more  than  half  of  one 
crop — cotton — has  been  sold  in  foreign  markets  in 
many  past  years.  Large  percentages  of  our  wheat, 
fruit,  tobacco,  and  corn  (when  it  has  been  trans- 


APRIL    8,    1944 


313 


formed  into  pork  and  lard)  are  exported  when 
tliere  are  foreign  markets  for  them. 

Harris:  Well,  I  confess  I  hadn't  realized  that 
agi'iculture  has  such  a  big  stake  in  exports.  I  do 
know  that  American  industry  is  talking  about  the 
necessity  for  large-scale  foreign  trade  if  business  is 
to  expand  after  the  war.  By  the  way,  how  about 
labor,  Mr.  Hawkins?  How  does  it  feel  about 
trade  cooperation  ? 

H.\WKiNS :  Many  labor  leaders  feel  the  same  way 
industry  and  agriculture  do.  Mr.  William  Green, 
president  of  the  A.  F.  of  L.,  has  urged  the  renewal 
of  the  trade-agreements  law  we  were  discussing 
just  now,  because  he  says  labor  is  determined  to 
assure  for  itself  a  security  based  upon  full  employ- 
ment in  an  expanding  industry  and  trade  which, 
in  turn,  require  foreign  markets. 

Harris  :  Then  I  gather  tliat  agriculture,  indus- 
try, and  labor  are  all  agreed  there  is  a  potential 
world  market  for  our  goods.  Can  you  give  us 
any  idea  as  to  how  much  of  a  market  that  might 
be,  Mr.  Hawkins? 

Hawkins  :  Well,  there  are  more  than  two  billion 
people  in  the  world  outside  the  United  States — 
and  they're  all  potential  customers  of  ours  if  we 
will  think  of  them  that  way.  Of  course,  only  a 
relatively  few  have  living  standards  and  purchas- 
ing power  comparable  to  our  own.  The  vast  ma- 
jority are  very  poor,  according  to  our  standards, 
and  individually  they  can  buy  very  little,  but  in  the 
aggregate  their  purchasing  power  is  enormous. 

Harris:  And  I  suppose  that  as  their  living 
standards  improve,  the  world  market  for  Ameri- 
can goods  will  expand,  too. 

Hawkins:  Certainly,  although  its  expansion 
will  depend  on  a  variety  of  things,  such  as  the 
investment  of  capital,  the  development  of  natural 
resources,  and  so  forth.  But  basic  to  everything 
else  is  the  ability  to  trade  in  their  products. 

Harris  :  Mr.  Hawkins,  why  do  people  often  seem 
more  enthusiastic  about  the  exporting  angle  of 
foreign  trade  than  about  the  importing  angle  ? 

Hawkins:  Well,  Mr.  Harris,  in  any  business 
deal  most  people  are  more  eager  to  sell  than  to 
buy.  However,  the  reason  a  person  wants  to  sell 
something  is  to  get  the  wherewithal  to  buy  other 
things  he  wants.    Countries  are  like  individuals 


in  that  respect.  The  United  States,  to  be  specific, 
can't  go  on  selling  its  products  abroad  indefinitely 
unless  it  accepts  the  products  of  other  countries  in 
return.  If  other  countries  can't  get  United  States 
dollars  by  selling  their  goods  in  the  United  States 
they  can't  buy  our  things. 

Harris  :  Some  people  are  afraid  of  flooding  our 
own  markets  with  cheap  imports  from  foreign 
countries  with  living  standards  lower  than  ours 
and  in  that  way  throwing  Americans  out  of  jobs 
or  cutting  their  wages  down  to  the  low  foreign 
levels.     AVhat  about  that  fear  ? 

Hawkins:  AVe  must  remember,  first,  that  com- 
petitive ability  depends  on  efficiency  of  production. 
Low  living  standards  and  low  wages  do  not  neces- 
sarily mean  efficient  production — in  fact,  misery 
and  efficiency  seldom  go  together.  Actually,  al- 
though many  of  our  industries  pny  the  highest 
wages  in  the  world,  their  efficiency  is  also  the  high- 
est in  the  world,  and  therefore  the  unit  cost  of 
their  product,  including  wages,  is  so  low  that  they 
can  compete  successfully  in  the  world  market 
wliere  wages  are  far  lower. 

Harris  :  However,  I  suppose  there  are  some  in- 
dustries which  really  do  benefit  from  high  pro- 
tective tariffs. 

Hawkins:  They  are  relatively  few.  A  promi- 
nent labor  economist  has  made  some  interesting 
studies  along  this  line.  He  found  that  of  45  mil- 
lion people  employed  in  this  country  in  1940,  only 
2  or  3  million  were  actually  jDroducing  goods 
which,  without  tariff  protection,  might  meet  seri- 
ous foreign  competition  in  the  domestic  market. 
The  vast  majority — 42  or  43  million  jDcople — are 
actually  harmed  by  excessive  tariffs  and  other 
trade  restrictions  and  would  gain  from  expansion 
of  both  our  import  and  our  exjDort  trade. 

Harris:  In  other  words,  a  minority  of  5  or  6 
percent  of  our  population  has  been  benefiting  from 
high  tariffs  at  the  expense  of  42  million  of  our 
people  and  their  families  who  would  be  better  off 
if  their  industries  had  more  foreign  markets !  It 
seems  to  me  that  you've  made  out  a  very  fine  case 
for  trade  cooperation,  Mr.  Hawkins,  and  you've 
also  made  the  same  point  for  international  eco- 
nomics which  our  guest  on  this  program,  Mr.  Paul 
Hoffman  of  the  Committee  for  Economic  Develop- 


314 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULMTIN 


ment,  made  last  -week  for  domestic  economics.  Mr. 
Hoffman  emphasized  that  many  of  our  economic 
ills  result  from  a  basic  sense  of  fear,  and  it  seems 
that  may  be  true  of  nations,  also. 

But  here's  one  thing  I'd  like  to  ask  you,  Mr. 
Hawkins.  I  know  industrialists  are  counting  on  a 
large  backed-up  demand  in  this  country  for  con- 
sumer goods  after  the  war.  In  some  cases  it  may 
be  months  or  years  before  that  demand  is  satisfied 
and  producers  can  turn  their  attention  to  foreign 
markets.  That  being  the  case,  is  there  any  very 
pressing  need  for  improving  our  trade  relations 


now! 


Hawkins  :  Yes,  we  would  benefit  by  improving 
them  as  soon  as  possible,  partly  because  of  the 
foreign-relief  programs  ahead  in  the  immediate 
post-war  period.  The  American  interest  con- 
cerned here  is  that  of  the  American  taxpayer,  who 
is  already  heavily  burdened  and  will  be  anxious  to 


keep  down  the  costs  of  these  programs.  He  will 
therefore  have  a  direct  interest  in  getting  the  war- 
impoverished  peoples  of  the  world  off  the  dole  and 
onto  a  pi'oductive  self-sustaining  basis  as  soon  as 
possible. 

All  that  I  have  said  comes  to  this,  Mr.  Harris. 
From  whatever  angle  we  view  the  post-war  situa- 
tion, trade  policies  of  nations,  particularly  indus- 
trial nations,  are  of  key  importance.  Our  farmers, 
our  manufacturers,  our  workers,  all  of  us  as  tax- 
payers and  consumers,  have  a  big  stake  in  an  ex- 
panding world  market.  And,  as  I  said  at  the 
beginning,  trade  policies  will  be  important  in  de- 
termining whether  this  time  we  win  and  main- 
tain the  peace. 

Harris  :  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hawkins.  Our  guest 
on  this  "Beyond  Victory"  program  has  been  Mr. 
Harry  C.  Hawkins,  Director  of  the  Office  of  Eco- 
nomic Affairs  of  the  Department  of  State. 


ACCIDENTAL  BOMBING  OF  SCHAFFHAUSEN 


[Released  to  the  press  April  3] 

The  Secretary  of  State  on  April  3,  1944  made 
the  following  statement  regarding  the  accidental 
bombing  by  American  planes  of  the  Swiss  city  of 
Schaffhausen  on  April  1 : 

"I  desire  to  express  my  own  and  all  Americans' 
deep  regret  over  the  tragic  bombing  by  American 
planes  of  the  Swiss  City  of  Schaffhausen  on 
April  1. 

"I  have  been  in  close  touch  with  the  Secretary 
of  War  regarding  this  matter,  and  he  tells  me 
investigations  which  he  has  so  far  been  able  to 
complete  indicate  that  in  the  course  of  operations 
against  the  Nazi  war  machine  a  group  of  our 
bombers,  due  to  a  chain  of  events  negating  the 
extensive  precautions  which  had  been  taken  to 
prevent  incidents  of  this  character,  mistakenly 
flew  over  and  bombed  Swiss  areas  located  on  the 
north  side  of  the  Rhine. 

"Secretary  Stimson  has  expressed  to  me  the  deep 
regret  which  he  and  the  American  air  forces  feel 
over  this  tragedy.  He  has  also  asked  me  to 
assure  the  Swiss  Government  that  every  precau- 


tion will  be  taken  to  prevent  in  so  far  as  is  humanly 
possible  the  repetition  of  this  unfortunate  event. 
General  Spaatz,  accompanied  by  Ambassador 
Winant,  has  already  called  on  the  Swiss  Charge 
d'Affaires  in  London  and  expressed  the  deep  re- 
gret of  himself  and  the  men  in  his  command  at  the 
accidental  bombing  of  Schaffliausen. 

"Naturally  this  Govermnent  will  make  appro- 
priate reparations  for  the  damage  resulting  from 
this  unfortunate  event  in  so  far  as  that  is  humanly 
l^ossible. 

"I  am  informing  the  Swiss  Minister  in  the  fore- 
going sense  and  am  instructing  the  American 
ilinister  in  Bern  to  do  likewise  with  the  Swiss 
Government." 

[Released  to  the  press  April  3] 

The  Secretary  of  State  has  received  the  follow- 
ing message,  dated  April  3,  1944,  from  the  Amer- 
ican Ambassador  in  London,  the  Honorable  John 
G.  Winant: 

"This  noon  General  Spaatz  and  I  called  at  the 
Swiss  Legation  and  expressed  to  Mr.  Girardet, 


APRIL    8,    1944 


315 


who  is  Charge  d'Affaires  in  the  absence  of  the 
Minister,  our  deep  regret  at  the  accidental  bomb- 
ing of  Schaffhausen  by  our  air  force.  General 
Spaatz  told  Mr.  Girardet  how  sincerely  sorry  our 
airmen  were  that  this  had  happened." 

SOVIET  STATEMENT  REGARDING 
RUMANIA 

[Released  to  the  press  April  3] 

In  answer  to  a  question  concerning  the  state- 
ment made  by  the  People's  Commissar  for  For- 
eign Affairs,  Mr.  V.  M.  Molotov,  regarding 
Rumania,  the  Secretary  of  State  said  on  April 
3,1944: 

"I  have  noted  with  considerable  interest  the 
statement  made  by  Mr.  M(jlotov  in  connection 
with  the  military  operations  now  being  conducted 
in  Rumania.  This  statement  makes  clear  to  the 
Rumanian  people  that  the  main  business  of  the 
armies  of  Soviet  Russia  is  to  defeat  the  enemy 
in  the  field.  The  political  assurances  which  the 
statement  contains  should  help  the  Rumanians 
to  see  that  their  own  ultimate  interests  require 
that  German  forces  be  driven  from  their  country." 

PETROLEUM  QUESTIONS 

Preliminary  Discussions  by  the  United  States  and 
the  United  Kingdom 

[Released  to  the  press  April  3] 

The  Department  of  State  announced,  on  March 
7,  1944,'  that  the  Governments  of  the  United 
States  and  the  United  Kingdom  would  undertake 
preliminary  and  exploratory  discussions  on  pe- 
troleum questions  and  that  these  discussions  would 
be,  in  tlie  first  instance,  on  an  expert  technical 
level. 

The  British  Government  is  announcing  that 
the  group  which  will  conduct  these  discussions 
on  its  behalf  and  which  is  about  to  depart  for 
Washington  is  headed  by  Sir  William  Brown, 
K.C.B.,  K.C.M.G.,  C.B.E.,  and  that  the  other 
members  are  Commodore  A.  W.  Clarke,  D.S.O., 
R.N.;  Sir  William  Fraser,  C.B.E.;  Sir  Frederick 

'  Bulletin  of  Mar.  11,  1944,  p.  238. 


Godber;  F.  Harner;  J.  H.  Le  Rougetel,  C.M.G., 
M.C.;  and  F.  C.  Starling,  C.B.E.  The  secretary 
of  the  British  group  will  hz  Mr.  V.  Butler. 

The  membership  of  the  expert  technical  group 
which  will  conduct  the  preliminary  exploratory 
discussions  for  the  United  States  Government  will 
be  announced  within  the  next  few  days. 

ALBANIA'S  STRUGGLE  FOR  FREEDOM 

Statement  by  the  Department  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  April  6] 

On  April  7,  1939 — Good  Friday — the  forces  of 
Fascism  struck  at  Albania  in  sudden  and  shame- 
less aggression,  and  Mussolini  proclaimed  its 
incorporation  into  Fascism's  so-called  empire.  Al- 
though the  fall  of  Mussolini  and  the  lifting  of 
the  Fascist  yoke  brought  not  freedom  but  Nazi 
occupation,  the  Albanian  people  have  not  since 
that  Good  Friday  five  years  ago  abandoned  their 
struggle  to  throw  out  the  invader  and  regain  their 
freedom. 

As  is  well  known,  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  never,  recognized  the  Fascist  annexation  of 
Albania.  Today  it  looks  to  the  Albanian  people 
to  unite  their  efforts  against  the  Nazi  enemy,  thus 
hastening  the  restoration  to  their  country  of  the 
freedom  they  so  ardently  desire. 

THE     PROCLAIMED     LIST:     CUMULATIVE 
SUPPLEMENT  1  TO  REVISION  VII 

[Released  to  the  press  April  8] 

The  Secretary  of  State,  acting  in  conjunction 
with  the  Acting  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the 
Attorney  General,  the  Secretary  of  Commerce, 
the  Administrator  of  the  Foreign  Economic  Ad- 
ministration, and  the  Acting  Coordinator  of 
Inter-American  Affairs,  on  April  8,  1944,  issued 
Cumulative  Supplement  1  to  Revision  VII  of  the 
Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals, 
promulgated  March  23,  1944. 

Part  I  of  Cumulative  Supplement  1  contains  69 
additional  listings  in  the  other  American  repub- 
lics and  83  deletions.  Part  II  contains  51  addi- 
tional listings  outside  the  American  republics  and 
17  deletions. 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


THE  INTERNATIONAL  LABOR  CONFERENCE  AT  PHILADELPHIA 

By  Otis  E.  Mulliken  "■ 


An  earlier  article^  describing  the  International 
Labor  Organization  concluded  by  posing  the 
question :  What  is  the  future  of  the  I.L.O.  ?  That 
question  will  be  answered  in  large  measure  by  the 
actions  taken  by  the  representatives  of  over  40  na- 
tions who  will  convene  in  Philadelphia  on  April 
20,  1944.  It  is  possible,  however,  by  an  examina- 
tion of  the  proposals  the  Office  has  suggested  for 
consideration  at  the  Conference  to  arrive  at  some 
tentative  conclusions. 

The  following  agenda  was  adopted  by  the  Gov- 
erning Body  at  its  meeting  in  London : 

I.  Future  policy,  program,  and  status  of  the 

International  Labor  Organization. 

II.  Kecommendations  to  the  United  Nations  for 

present  and  post-war  social  policy. 

III.  The  organization  of  employment  in  the 
transition  from  war  to  peace. 

IV.  Social  security :  principles,  and  problems 
arising  out  of  the  war. 

V.  Minimum    standards    of    social    policy    in 

dependent  territories. 

VI.  Reports  on  the  application  of  conventions 
(article  22  of  the  Constitution). 

VII.  Director's  report. 

In  connection  with  the  first  five  items  on  the 
agenda,  the  Office  has  prepared  reports  which  in- 
clude a  declaration  of  aims,  seventeen  suggested 
resolutions  and  recommendations,  and  one  draft 
convention.  This  article  is  concerned  with  a  brief 
description  of  the  principles  and  programs  con- 
tained in  these  proposals. 

It  is  not  intended  to  offer  any  critical  analysis 
or  discussion  of  the  proposals  but  simply  to  pro- 
vide for  the  readers  of  the  Bulletin  a  summary 
outline  of  the  subjects  to  be  discussed  at  Philadel- 
phia. The  language  of  the  recommendations 
themselves  or  of  the  Office  reports  is  frequently 
employed.  In  this  article  attention  will  be  di- 
316 


rected  primarily  toward  those  items  on  the  agenda 
which  bear  upon  the  future  policy  and  status  of 
the  I.L.O.  and  upon  its  recommended  solutions  for 
some  of  the  more  important  post-war  problems. 

I.  Future  Policy,  Program,  and  Status  of  the 
I.L.O. 

The  social  objectives  of  fr^e  peoples  find  sum- 
mary expression  in  the  Atlantic  Charter,^  espe- 
cially in  the  fifth  point  which  states  the  desire 
"to  bring  about  the  fullest  collaboration  between 
all  nations  in  the  economic  field  with  the  object  of 
securing,  for  all,  improved  labor  standards,  eco- 
nomic advancement  and  social  security".  At  the 
London  meeting  of  the  Governing  Body,  Mr. 
Bevin,  the  British  Minister  of  Labor  and  National 
Service,  referring  to  the  I.L.O.  said,  "I  look  upon 
it  as  the  body  whicli  will  be  charged  with  the  duty 
of  assisting  Governments  through  its  advice  to 
give  effect  to  Article  5  of  the  Atlantic  Charter". 
He  continued  to  state  later  that,  "This  at  once  con- 
stitutes an  opportunity  but  equally  a  responsi- 
bility for  the  International  Labor  Organization". 

The  Organization  has  accepted  this  charge  and 
the  first  item  on  the  agenda  is  a  solemn  declara- 
tion restating  the  aims  and  purposes  of  the  I.L.O. 
The  Office  has  proposed  a  draft  declaration  which 
summarizes  so  well  the  viewpoint  and  the  objec- 
tives of  tlie  Organization  that  it  is  reproduced 
here.  It  should  be  noted,  however,  that  this  is 
not  a  final  statement  of  aims  and  purposes  but 
a  draft  which  the  delegates  will  consider.  The 
proposed  declaration  reads  as  follows: 

"The  General  Conference  of  the  International 
Labour  Organisation,  meeting  in  its  Twenty-sixth 
Session  in  Philadelphia,  hereby  adopts,  this 


"  The  author  of  this  article  Is  Acting  Chief  of  the  Divi- 
sion (if  Labor  Relations,  Department  of  State. 
=  BTJLLjn-iN  of  Mar.  18,  1944,  p.  2.57. 
'  Executive  Agreement  Series  236. 


APRIL   S,    1944 


317 


day  of  in  the  year  nineteen  hundred  and 

forty-four,  the  present  Declaration  of  the  aims 
and  purposes  of  the  International  Labour  Organi- 
sation and  of  the  principles  which  should  inspire 
the  policy  of  its  Members. 

"The  Conference  reafBrms  the  fundamental 
principles  on  which  the  Organisation  is  based  and, 
in  particular,  that  labour  is  not  a  commodity ;  that 
freedom  of  expression  and  of  association  are  es- 
sential to  sustained  progress;  that  poverty  any- 
where constitutes  a  danger  to  prosperity  every- 
where, and  that  accordingly  the  war  against  want, 
while  it  requires  to  be  carried  on  with  unrelenting 
vigour  within  each  nation,  equally  requires  con- 
tinuous and  concerted  international  effort  in  which 
the  representatives  of  workers  and  employers,  en- 
joying equal  status  with  those  of  Governments, 
join  with  them  in  free  discussion  and  democratic 
decision  witli  a  view  to  the  promotion  of  the  com- 
mon welfare. 

"Believing  that  experience  has  fully  demon- 
strated the  truth  of  the  statement  in  the  Preamble 
to  the  Constitution  of  the  International  Labour 
Organisation  that  lasting  peace  can  be  established 
only  if  it  is  based  on  social  justice,  the  Conference 
affirms  that  all  human  beings,  irrespective  of  race, 
creed  or  sex,  have  the  right  to  pursue  both  their 
material  well-being  and  their  spiritual  develop- 
ment in  conditions  of  freedom  and  dignity,  of  eco- 
nomic security  and  equal  opportunity,  that  the 
attainment  of  the  conditions  in  which  this  shall 
be  possible  must  constitute  the  central  aim  of  na- 
tional and  international  policy,  and  that  all  poli- 
cies and  measures,  in  particular  those  of  an  eco- 
nomic and  financial  character,  must  be  judged  in 
this  light  and  accepted  only  in  so  far  as  they  may 
be  held  to  promote  and  not  to  hinder  the  achieve- 
ment of  this  fundamental  objective. 

"The  Conference  declares  that  it  is  accordingly 
a  responsibility  of  the  International  Labour  Or- 
ganisation to  scrutinise  all  international  economic 
and  financial  policies  and  measures  in  the  light  of 
this  fundamental  objective  and  that  in  discharging 
the  tasks  entrusted  to  it  the  International  Labour 
Organisation  may  consider  all  relevant  economic 
and  financial  factors  and  include  in  its  decisions 
and  recommendations  any  provisions  which  it  con- 
siders appropriate. 

582288 — 14— — 2 


"Amony  the  matters  to  which  urgent  attention 
should  be  given  by  the  International  Labour  Or- 
ganisation, the  Conference  attaches  special  im- 
portance to  the  following : 

"The  maintenance  of  full  employment  and  the 

raising  of  standards  of  living ; 
"The  employment  of  workers  in  the  occupations  in 
which  they  can  have  the  satisfaction  of  giving 
the  fullest  measure  of  their  skill  and  attain- 
ments and  make  their  greatest  contribution  to 
the  common  well-being  and,  as  a  means  to  the 
attainment  of  this  end,  the  provision  under  ade- 
quate guarantees  for  all  concerned  of  facilities 
for  training  and  the  transfer  of  labour,  includ- 
ing migration  for  employment  and  settlement; 
"The  application  of  policies  in  regard  to  wages 
and  earnings,  hours  and  other  conditions  of 
work  calculated  to  ensure  a  just  share  of  the 
fruits  of  progress  to  all,  and  the  assurance  of  a 
minimum  living  wage  to  all  in  need  of  such 
protection ; 
"The  effective  recognition  of  the  right  of  collective 
bargaining,  the  co-operation  of  management  and 
labour  in  the  continuous  improvement  of  pro- 
ductive efficiency,  and  the  collaboration  of  work- 
ers and  employers  in  the  initiation  and  applica- 
tion of  social  and  economic  measures; 
"The  extension  to  the  whole  population  of  social 
security  measures  providing  a  basic  income  in 
case  of  inability  to  work  or  to  obtain  work,  and 
providing  comprehensive  medical  care; 
"The  provision  of  adequate  protection  for  the  life 

and  health  of  workere  in  all  occupations; 
"Provision  for  child  welfare  and  maternity  pro- 
tection, and  the  provision  of  adequate  nutrition, 
housing  and  facilities  for  recreation  and  culture ; 
"The  assurance  of  equality  of  educational  and 
vocational  opportunity. 

"Confident  that  the  fuller  and  broader  utilisa- 
tion of  the  world's  productive  resources  necessary 
for  the  achievement  of  the  objectives  set  forth  in 
this  Declaration  can  be  secured  by  effective  inter- 
national and  national  action,  including  for  example 
measures  to  avoid  severe  economic  fluctuations,  to 
maintain  consumption  at  a  high  level,  to  ensure 
the  productive  investment  of  all  savings,  to  pro- 
mote the  economic  and  social  advancement  of  the 
less  developed  regions  of  the  world,  to   assure 


318 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


greater  stability  in  world  prices  of  primary  prod- 
iicts,  and  to  promote  a  high  and  steady  volume  of 
international  trade,  the  Conference  pledges  the 
full  co-operation  of  the  International  Labour  Or- 
ganisation with  such  international  bodies  as  may 
be  entrusted  with  a  share  of  the  responsibility  for 
this  great  task  and  for  the  promotion  of  the  health, 
education  and  well-being  of  all  peoples. 

"The  Conference  affirms  that  the  principles  set 
forth  in  this  Declaration  are  fully  applicable  to 
all  peoples  everywhere  and  that,  while  the  manner 
of  their  application  must  be  determined  with  due 
regard  to  the  stage  of  social  and  economic  develop- 
ment reached  by  each  people,  their  progressive 
application  to  peoples  who  are  still  dependent,  as 
well  as  to  those  who  have  already  achieved  self- 
government,  is  a  matter  of  concern  to  the  whole 
civilised  world." 

It  would  be  easy  to  comment  at  length  upon  the 
implications  and  significance  of  this  statement. 
A  few  remarks  must  suffice.  It  will  be  noted  that 
the  statement  affirms  the  indivisibility  of  the  pros- 
perity of  all  peoples  and  that  war  against  want 
requires  not  only  unrelenting  vigor  within  each 
nation  but  also  continuous  and  concerted  interna- 
tional action.  The  affirmation  that  the  attain- 
ment of  conditions  which  will  make  possible  ma- 
terial well-being  and  spiritual  development  in  con- 
ditions of  freedom  and  dignity,  economic  security, 
and  equal  opportunity  "must  constitute  the  central 
aim  of  national  and  international  policy"  repeats 
a  thought  expressed  by  President  Roosevelt  in  ad- 
dressing the  Conference  in  1941.  At  that  time 
he  said:  "We  have  learned  too  well  that  social 
problems  and  economic  problems  are  not  separate 
watertight  compartments  in  the  international  any 
more  than  in  the  national  sphere.  In  interna- 
tional as  in  national  affairs  economic  policy  can 
no  longer  be  an  end  in  itself.  It  is  merely  a  means 
for  achieving  social  objectives". 

The  stated  responsibility  of  the  Organization  to 
examine  economic  and  financial  policies  and  meas- 
ures in  the  light  of  the  social  objectives  should  also 
be  noted.  The  British  Foreign  Secretary,  Mr. 
Eden,  had  told  the  Governing  Body  in  December : 
"Your  Organization  will  no  doubt  scrutinize  plans 
for  economic  and  financial  reconstruction  from  the 
point  of  view  of  the  social  objectives  at  which  you 


aim,  and  in  doing  this  you  will  help  to  make  sure 
that  we  steadily  pursue  the  road  which  the  United 
Nations  have  chosen  to  travel". 

The  maintenance  of  full  employment  and  the 
raising  of  standards  of  living  are  listed  first  among 
the  matters  to  which  special  importance  is  at- 
tached. These  and  the  other  matters  listed  cover 
a  wide  range  of  necessary  activity,  and  the  Office 
recognizes  that  other  international  organizations 
are  likely  to  have  the  primary  responsibility  for 
the  necessary  international  action — ^lience,  it 
pledges  its  cooperation  to  these  other  agencies. 

The  I.L.O.  recognizes  that  the  functional  ap- 
proach to  the  problem  of  world  order  at  present 
being  followed  raises  directly  the  question  of  its 
relation  to  other  international  organizations.  It 
directs  attention  to  its  cooperative  activities  in 
the  past  and  points  out  that  it  has  been  the  con- 
sistent policy  of  the  Organization  to  establish 
close  collaboration  with  new  agencies  as  they  are 
established  and  to  offer  any  assistance  which  the 
experience  of  the  I.L.O.  may  be  able  to  contribute 
to  their  successful  development.  The  Office  states 
that  it  is  increasingly  acknowledged  that  what- 
ever functional  bodies  may  be  established  will 
have  to  be  effectively  coordinated  in  a  general 
pattern  of  international  economic  organization 
and  that  the  I.L.O.,  as  the  watchdog  of  those  who 
would  be  the  first  to  suffer  from  a  failure  to 
maintain  full  employment,  has  a  primary  interest 
in  the  achievement  of  harmonious  working  rela- 
tions between  all  the  constituent  functional  parts 
of  the  group  of  social  and  economic  institutions 
which  the  world's  needs  require.  At  the  same 
time  attention  is  directed  to  the  unique  position 
of  the  I.L.O.  as  a  tripartite  organization  and  its 
particular  competence  to  function  as  a  world  par- 
liament of  social  and  economic  affairs. 

Several  sections  of  the  second  resolution  pro- 
posed under  this  item  on  the  agenda  deal  with 
this  pi'oblem  of  the  relation  of  the  I.L.O.  to  other 
international  organizations.  These  sections  pro- 
vide that  the  Conference  and  the  Governing  Body 
may  invite  public  international  organizations  to 
send  representatives  to  participate  in  or  attend 
all  or  any  of  their  meetings  or  parts  thereof, 
without  vote,  on  such  conditions  as  they  may 
respectively  determine  and  that  the  Governing 


APRIL   8,    1944 


319 


Body  may  invite  such  organizations  to  be  repre- 
sented on  any  committee  or  at  any  regional,  tech- 
nical, or  special  conferences  convened  under  the 
auspices  of  the  I.L.O.  In  addition,  the  Govern- 
ing Body  may  enter  into  agreements  for  the  main- 
tenance of  joint  committees. 

It  is  recognized  that  the  decisions  of  the  Con- 
ference will  necessarily  constitute  only  a  starting- 
point  of  the  post-war  program  of  action  of  the 
Organization.  The  Office  in  report  I  outlines 
some  of  the  elements  out  of  which  an  adequate 
program  of  international  action  in  the  social  field 
can  be  evolved.  There  are  problems  of  the  organ- 
ization of  employment  which  involve  the  estab- 
lishment of  effective  i^ublic  employment  services, 
the  regular ization  of  employment,  provision  for 
disabled  workers,  training,  retraining,  and  voca- 
tional guidance.  Many  phases  of  social  insurance 
require  further  development.  Some  of  the  as- 
pects of  wage  policy  will  require  further  exam- 
ination. Not  only  are  there  such  questions  as 
the  method  of  wage  payment,  guaranteed  weekly 
wages,  the  principles  of  fixing  minimum  wages, 
but  it  is  suggested  that  there  might  be  inter- 
national fair-wages  clauses  in  connection  with 
projects  financed  by  international  loans. 

There  will  be  housing  problems  after  the  war 
involving  questions  of  minimum  standards  of  con- 
struction and  the  organization  and  financing  of 
housing  for  low-income  groups.  In  the  rebuilding 
of  factories,  attention  should  be  directed  to  condi- 
tions of  health,  safety,  and  well-being  for  the 
workers  who  will  be  employed  in  them.  Inter- 
national health  and  safety  standards  are  suggested 
and  the  formulation  of  model  safety  codes.  Much 
remains  to  be  done  in  the  field  of  industrial  health 
and  hygiene. 

Among  the  groups  of  workers  to  whom  special 
attention  should  be  directed  are  young  persons, 
women,  maritime  workers,  agricultural  workers, 
and  professional  workers.  Important  problems 
of  migration  and  settlement  are  certain  to  arise. 
In  addition  to  imjDroving  the  administration  of 
social  legislation,  labor  statistics — upon  which 
successful  administration  is  so  dependent — -must 
also  be  improved. 

To  carry  out  the  aims  of  the  I.L.O.  and  its  sug- 
gested future  pi-ogram  a  resolution  is  proposed 


to  provide  for  a  number  of  new  practices.  The 
sections  of  this  resolution  referring  to  relations 
with  other  international  organizations  have  been 
noted.  Although  it  is  not  possible  to  describe  all 
of  the  proposed  changes  in  machinery  and  pro- 
cedures, mention  may  be  made  of  two  of  the  more 
important  which  bear  on  the  future  development 
of  the  I.L.O. 

The  Organization  has  already  met  with  success 
in  experimenting  with  regional  action.  The  most 
successful  experiment  has  been  the  holding  of  the 
First  and  Second  Labor  Conferences  of  American 
States  in  Santiago,  Chile,  in  1936  and  in  Habana, 
Cuba,  in  1939.  The  Organization  has  long  been 
considering  holding  similar  conferences  in  the  Far 
East.  To  facilitate  this  type  of  activity  the  resolu- 
tion provides  that  the  Governing  Body  may  con- 
vene special  conferences  for  particular  regions,  for 
dependent  territories,  and  for  groups  of  territories 
confronted  with  common  or  comparable  social  or 
economic  problems  and  that  it  may  adopt  statutes 
defining  the  constitutional  powers  and  procedure 
of  regional  or  functional  bodies  designed  to  op- 
erate within  the  framework  of  the  I.L.O. 

The  reference  to  functional  bodies  ties  in  with 
a  proposal  recently  made  by  the  British  Govern- 
ment for  the  establislunent  by  the  I.L.O.  of  indus- 
trial committees  for  the  main  world  industries. 
This  proposal  and  the  desire  to  make  more  ade- 
quate provision  for  the  problems  of  special  groups 
of  workers  such  as  agricultural,  maritime,  and 
professional  workers  have  led  to  the  inclusion  in 
the  resolution  of  a  proposal  to  establish  such  spe- 
cial committees. 

The  balance  of  the  "Proposed  Resolution  Con- 
cerning the  Constitutional  Practice  of  the  Inter- 
national Labor  Organization"  comprises  a  number 
of  teclinical  and  procedural  pi'ovisions  which,  al- 
though important,  are  of  less  general  interest  and 
will  be  passed  over  m  this  resume.  Similarly,  only 
the  titles  of  the  other  three  resolutions  suggested 
under  the  first  item  of  the  agenda  will  be  men- 
tioned. They  are :  "Proposed  Resolution  Concern- 
ing the  Inclusion  in  New  or  Revised  National  Con- 
stitutions of  Provision  for  the  Consideration  by 
Legislative  Authorities  of  the  Decisions  of  the 
International  Labour  Conference",  "Proposed 
Resolution  Concerning  Facilities  for  the  Efficient 


320 

Discharge  of  the  Kesponsibilities  Entrusted  to  the 
International  Labour  Organisation",  and  "Pro- 
posed Resolution  Concerning  the  Place  of  the  Next 
Session  of  the  International  Labour  Conference". 

II.  Recommendations  to  the  United  Nations  for 
Present  and  Post-war  Social  Policy 

The  second  item  on  the  agenda  affords  the  Con- 
ference an  opportunity  to  assist  the  United  Na- 
tions in  amplifying  their  social  aims  and  to  offer 
suggestions  for  the  solution  of  the  many  social 
problems  which  remain  before  us  in  the  war  and 
which  will  face  us  in  the  post-war  period.  The 
Office  suggests  four  resolutions  for  the  considera- 
tion of  the  Conference.  The  first  is  concerned 
with  the  economic  policies  for  the  attainment  of 
social  objectives,  the  second  with  the  social  pro- 
visions in  the  peace  settlement,  the  third  with  the 
government  and  administration  by  the  United 
Nations  of  Germany  and  other  totalitarian  coun- 
tries in  Europe,  and  the  fourth  with  measures 
for  the  protection  of  transferred  foreign  workers 
and  of  foreign  workers'  organizations. 

The  first  subject  on  which  the  I.L.O.  proposes  to 
make  recommendations  to  the  United  Nations  is 
the  economic  policy  for  the  attainment  of  social 
objectives.  The  jiroposed  resolution  is  divided  into 
two  parts:  international  policy  and  national 
policy. 

The  Conference  proposes  to  welcome  the  creation 
of  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation 
Administration  and  to  urge  all  states  concerned  to 
cooperate  actively  in  the  tasks  entrusted  to  it.  It 
is  also  proposed  to  urge  the  setting  up  of  a  per- 
manent international  organization,  of  the  type  pro- 
vided for  in  resolution  II  of  the  Final  Act  of  the 
United  Nations  Conference  on  Food  and  Agricul- 
ture, in  an  effort  to  raise  the  level  of  nutrition  and 
improve  the  efficiency  of  agricultural  production 
and  distribution. 

For  varying  periods  after  the  termination  of 
hostilities  many  essential  commodities  and  trans- 
port facilities  will  be  in  short  supply  and  inter- 
national arrangements  will  be  needed  to  insure  a 
fair  allocation  of  available  supplies  and  to  prevent 
excessive  price  movements;  it  is  therefore  recom- 
.  mended  that  the  Governments  of  the  United  Na- 
tions continue  in  operation,  for  such  periods  as 
serious  shortages  may  persist,  the  existing  ma- 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE  BtTLLETIN 

chinery  of  international  coordination  and  control. 
In  recognition  of  the  fact  that  a  satisfactory 
international  monetary  system  is  essential  to  the 
full  development  of  economic  relations  between 
nations  and  consequently  to  the  raising  of  stand- 
ards of  living,  approval  is  given  to  the  establish- 
ment of  effective  international  machinery,  and  it 
is  urged  that  in  establishing  such  machinery  the 
authorities  be  required  to  have  regard  in  apply- 
ing their  policies  to  the  effect  of  their  decisions 
on  employment  and  living  standards.    Similarly, 
a  proposal  for  an  international  bank  of  reconstruc- 
tion and  development  is  approved,  and  it  is  sug- 
gested that  the  terms  of  all  contracts  for  develop- 
ment works  financed  by  loans  of  the  bank  should 
include  appropriate  provisions  regarding  the  wel- 
fare and  working  conditions  of  the  labor  employed. 
The  resolution  further  suggests  that  the  United 
Nations  should  take  vigorous  action  to  promote  the 
expansion  of  trade  by  elimination  of  all  forms  of 
discriminatory  treatment  in  international  com- 
merce and  the  reduction  of  tariffs  and  other  trade 
barriers  and  that  the  United  Nations  should  facil- 
itate the  coordination,  through  international  ma- 
chinery, of  the  commercial  policies  of  all  countries 
for  the  purpose  of  promoting  a  steady  expansion 
of   world  trade.     Consideration  should   also  be 
given  to  insuring  the  availability  to  all  purchas- 
ers of  adequate  supplies  of  essential  raw  materials 
and  foodstuffs  at  prices  which  afford  a  reasonable 
return  to  the  efficient  producer.     Consumers  as 
well  as  producers  should  be  represented  in  such 
international  arrangements,  and  workers  engaged 
in  the  production  of  such  goods  should  be  assured 
fair  remuneration,   satisfactory    working   condi- 
tions, and  adequate  social-security  protection. 

Specific  attention  is  directed  to  the  oil  prob- 
lem. The  resolution  states  that  the  United  Nations 
should  institute  international  arrangements  for 
the  development  of  the  world's  oil  resources  in  the 
interests  of  all  peof)Ies  on  a  basis  that  will  afford 
fair  compensation  to  producing  countries  and  fa- 
cilitate the  attainment  by  the  peoples  of  those 
countries  of  standards  of  social  and  economic  well- 
being  having  a  reasonable  relation  to  the  value  of 
their  contribution  to  the  world's  economy. 

In  connection  with  international  migration  the 
resolution  provides  that  the  United  Nations  should 
initiate  measures  to  facilitate,  by  the  provision  of 


APEIL   8,    1944 


321 


necessary  technical  and  financial  assistance,  regu- 
lated migration  of  labor  and  settlers  in  accordance 
with  the  economic  development  of  the  various 
countries. 

The  final  provision  with  respect  to  international 
policy  recognizes  the  existence  of  differences  of 
opinion  with  regard  to  the  advantages  and  disad- 
vantages of  international  industrial  agreements 
concerning  such  matters  as  patent  rights,  the  con- 
trol of  production,  and  the  allocation  of  markets. 
It  states,  however,  that  full  publicity  should  be 
given  to  the  existence  and  operation  of  such  agree- 
ments and  that  they  should  be  registered  with  an 
international  authority  to  which  full  information 
should  be  submitted. 

Simultaneously  with  consideration  of  the  inter- 
national policies  just  described,  there  should  be 
prepaz'ed  and  applied  national  policies  aiming  at 
full  employment,  social  security,  and  rising  stand- 
ards of  living.  Plans  should  be  made  for  the 
rapid  and  orderly  conversion  of  the  national  econ- 
omies from  wartime  to  peacetime  requirements. 
Continuation  of  price  control  and  rationing  may 
be  necessary  to  prevent  a  price  inflation  which 
would  be  followed  by  collapse  and  wide-spread 
unemployment.  The  productive  elBciency  of  the 
economic  system  should  be  promoted  by  encour- 
aging enterjjrise  and  technological  progress.  All 
appropriate  measures  should  be  taken  to  maintain 
a  high  and  steady  level  of  economic  activity  and 
employment  by  sustaining  the  volume  of  demand 
for  consumers'  goods  and  by  insuring  the  pro- 
ductive investment  of  all  savings. 

In  using  the  term  •peace  settlement  the  Office 
points  out  that  it  should  be  understood  in  its 
widest  interpretation  and  not  limited  to  the  politi- 
cal instrument  whereby  what  is  technically  a  state 
of  war  becomes  technically  a  state  of  peace. 
Eather,  the  term  is  applied  to  all  the  measures 
which  may  be  taken  between  some  or  all  of  the 
United  Nations  and  which  will  settle  the  condi- 
tions of  the  post-war  world.  Such  agreements 
may  be  general  in  scope  or  may  deal  only  with 
some  specific  problem,  possibly  purely  technical  or 
organizational.  The  meeting  in  Philadelphia 
might  itself  be  considered  one  of  a  series  of  such 
conferences. 


In  making'  recommendations  for  the  social  pro- 
visions of  the  peace  settlement,  the  Conference  will 
be  fulfilling  a  function  performed  by  the  Labor 
Commission  of  the  Peace  Conference  of  1919  which 
submitted  for  inclusion  in  the  Peace  Treaty  the 
Constitution  of  the  I.L.O.  and  in  particular  the 
general  principles  included  in  the  Preamble  and 
in  article  41.  Following  these  provisions  as  a 
model  the  Office  proposes  to  include  in  the  peace 
settlement  an  adaptation  of  the  statement  of  aims 
and  purposes  referred  to  above.  It  also  stipulates, 
as  a  provision  of  this  recommendation,  that  all 
arrangements  for  economic  cooperation  between 
any  of  the  United  Nations  should  be  framed  with 
due  regard  to  their  social  repercussions. 

In  connection  with  dependent  territories  it  is 
suggested  that  the  United  Nations  apply  the  prin- 
ciple that  all  policies  affecting  dependent  terri- 
tories shall  be  primarilj'  directed  to  the  well-being 
and  development  of  the  peoples  of  such  territories. 
It  is  also  suggested  that  the  Office  appoint  a  rep- 
resentative on  any  committee  which  may  be  en- 
trusted with  the  task  of  watching  over  the  appli- 
cation of  the  principle  of  international  account- 
ability. 

The  Office  suggests  that  in  any  negotiations  re- 
garding the  organization,  control,  and  operation 
of  merchant  shipping  and,  in  particular,  in  making 
arrangements  for  the  disposal  of  merchant  ship- 
ping, consideration  should  be  given  to  the  possi- 
bility of  including  stipulations  relating  to  the 
standard  of  accommodation  to  be  provided  for 
crews,  and  other  appropriate  matters.  Similarly, 
in  making  international  arrangements  concerning 

o  o  a 

transport  by  air,  land,  and  inland  waterway,  the 
United  Nations  should  have  due  regard  to  the  ef- 
fects of  such  arrangements  on  the  working  and 
living  conditions  of  the  persons  employed  in  such 
transport. 

Recognizing  the  possibility  of  territorial  read- 
justments following  the  war,  it  is  proposed  that 
provision  should  be  made  for  the  protection  of 
the  social-insurance  rights  of  the  people  affected 
and  that  any  arrangements  for  the  exchange  of 
populations  should  include  apijropriate  protec- 
tive provisions  for  the  working  populations  in- 
volved. 


322 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


A  very  interesting  and  suggestive  proposal  re- 
lates to  the  social  policy  to  be  applied  in  Germany 
and  totalitarian  countries  in  Europe  during  the 
period  of  military  occupation.  The  recommenda- 
tion states  that  the  first  task  of  the  occupying 
authority  will  probably  be  clearing  the  ground 
for  the  establishment  of  governmental  and  other 
institutions  based  upon  democratic  principles. 
Totalitarian  institutions  must  be  liquidated  and 
totalitarian  influences  removed.  The  German 
Labor  Front  should  be  abolislied,  and  persons  who 
were  conspicuously  and  actively  identified  with 
the  former  regime  should  be  eliminated  from  all 
posts  in  tlie  labor  and  social  administration  of  the 
country.  All  discrimination  in  the  field  of  social 
and  economic  legislation  and  administration  on 
grounds  of  race  or  religion  should  be  immediately 
abolislied.  Persons  who  have  been  imprisoned 
because  of  their  trade-union  activities  should  be 
released,  and  freedom  of  association  for  workers 
should  be  established. 

The  Office  recognizes  the  j^roblem  involved  in 
establishing  the  necessary  administrative  controls 
during  the  period  of  military  occupation  and 
recommends  the  appointment  of  a  United  Nations 
Labor  Commissioner.  This  man  would  be  re- 
sponsible for  the  administration  of  social  and 
labor  laws  and  regidations  including  those  con- 
cerning such  matters  as:  the  regulation  of  con- 
ditions of  employment,  determination  of  wage 
rates,  industrial  health  and  safety,  protection  of 
particular  categories  of  employed  persons,  free- 
dom of  association,  industrial  relations,  settlement 
of  labor  disputes,  employment  and  manpower 
problems,  vocational  training  and  guidance,  pro- 
vision for  unemployment,  social  insurance,  fac- 
tory inspection,  and  the  cooperative  movement. 
He  would  also  have  the  power  to  modify  existing 
laws  and  regulations  on  these  subjects  and  to 
promulgate  new  ones. 

To  assist  the  commissioner  an  advisory  board  of 
not  more  than  20  persons  would  be  established, 
chosen  to  include  representatives  of  the  workers 
of  the  country  and  other  persons  with  experience 
with  trade-union  organizations  to  be  appointed 
after  consultation  with  the  principal  international 
trade-union    organizations    and   the    trade-union 


movements  of  the  leading  United  Nations.  Pro- 
vision is  also  made  for  deputy  commissioners  and 
regional  advisory  boards. 

The  commissioner  should  give  every  reasonable 
facility  and  encouragement  to  tlie  reconstitution  of 
free  organizations  for  the  promotion  of  the  occu- 
pational and  economic  interests  of  the  workers. 
He  sliould  be  enabled  to  draw  upon  the  funds  of 
the  totalitarian  labor  organizations  to  assist  in 
this  jDurpose  and  to  continue  the  institutions  of 
social  value  wliich  jjrovided  for  the  recreational 
and  cultural  needs  of  the  workers.  The  social- 
insurance  system  should  be  continued  with  benefits 
paid  and  contributions  collected.  Tlxe  occupying 
autliority  should  pay  the  employer's  social-insur- 
ance contribution  for  the  M'orkers  it  employs. 

Special  attention  should  be  devoted  by  the  com- 
missioner to  the  adaptation  of  existing  institutions 
concerned  with  the  civic  or  vocational  training  of 
young  workers  and  for  the  organization  of  their 
recreation  and  spare-time  pursuits. 

Collective  bargaining  is  to  become  the  normal 
basis  for  the  determination  of  conditions  of  em- 
ployment at  the  earliest  possible  moment.  The 
commissioner  is  responsible  for  the  settlement  of 
industrial  disputes  and  grievances  and  for  pro- 
moting the  cooperation  of  the.  workers  with  the 
occupying  authorities. 

The  Office  recognizes  the  special  problems  of  the 
transferred  workers  now  in  Germany  and  suggests 
certain  safeguards  to  be  applied  pending  their 
repatriation  by  the  United  Nations  Relief  and 
Rehabilitation  Administration.  The  United  Na- 
tions Labor  Commissioner  should  take  all  possible 
steps  to  prevent  the  involuntary  unemployment 
of  foreign  workers  pending  their  repatriation. 
Their  dismissal  should  be  subject  to  the  approval 
of  his  representative  charged  with  responsibility 
for  protecting  their  interests  both  with  respect  to 
their  employment  and  their  feeding,  housing,  and 
so  on.  In  cases  where  it  is  impossible  to  assure 
continued  employment  of  foreign  workers,  they 
should  receive  their  full  wages  in  casli  and  kind 
at  tlie  cost  of  the  public  authority.  All  discrimi- 
nation against  foreign  workers  should  immediately 
be  abolished. 


APRIL    S,    1944 


332 


III.  The   Organization  of  Employment   in   the 
Transition  From  War  to  Peace 

It  is  not  surprising  to  find  that  employment 
problems  occupy  a  central  place  on  the  agenda  of 
the  Conference.  First,  there  is  the  growing  em- 
phasis in  current  thinking  on  the  importance  of 
full  employment;  seondly,  there  is  the  awareness 
that  tlie  post-war  period,  with  its  demobilization 
of  the  armed  forces  and  of  war  industries,  will 
present  many  difficult  problems  of  employment 
adjustment. 

The  Office  has  prepared  five  proposed  recom- 
mendations for  the  consideration  of  the  Con- 
ference.    The  first  of  these  states  that  the  pro- 

\  motion  of  full  employment  with  a  view  to  raising 
standards  of  living  throughout  the  world  is  a  pri- 
mary objective  of  the  I.L.O.    In  order  to  achieve 

I  full  employment  the  resolution  points  out  that 
economic  measures  providing  employment  oppor- 

I  tunities  must  be  supplemented  by  effective  organi- 
zation to  help  employers  secure  the  most  suitable 
workers  and  the  workers  to  find  the  most  suitable 
employment.  It  is  further  recognized  that  the 
character  and  magnitude  of  the  employment  ad- 
justments will  necessitate  special  action. 

In  view  of  these  problems,  the  Office  proceeds 
to  set  forth  in  some  detail  the  measures  which 
should  be  taken  by  each  nation.  The  importance 
of  collecting  in  advance  the  requisite  information 
on  the  employment  skills  of  the  persons  to  be 
demobilized  and  canvassing  the  probable  demands 
for  labor  is  stressed.  Attention  is  called  to  the 
need  of  coordinating  the  rate  of  demobilization 
with  the  opportunities  for  employment.  The  em- 
ployment problem  will  involve  not  only  the  de- 
mobilization of  the  armed  forces  but  also  the  re- 
conversion of  war  industries,  both  private  and 
government-owned.  There  is  need  for  cooperation 
between  workers'  and  employers'  organizations  in 
making  the  necessary  adjustments  and  for  co- 
operation of  both  workers  and  employers  in  using 
the  employment  service.  Vocational  guidance  and 
training  and  retraining  progi-ams  will  be  neces- 
sary. Just  as  during  the  war  pei'iod,  it  will  be  im- 
portant to  facilitate  the  geographic  mobility  of 
workers.  The  exigencies  of  war  have  made  it 
necessary  to  employ  large  numbers  of  young  people 


and  women.  The  provision  to  be  made  for  them 
as  war  production  terminates  will  constitute  a 
pressing  social  and  economic  problem.  Special  at- 
tention must  be  given  to  the  employment  of  dis- 
abled persons.  The  recommendation  offers  many 
constructive  suggestions  on  these  matters. 

For  the  effective  organization  of  employment 
an  efficient  public  employment  service  is  required. 
The  valuable  services  to  be  rendered  by  such  an 
organization  during  normal  periods  are  prac- 
tically indispensable  during  a  period  of  such  wide- 
spread employment  adjustments  as  we  face.  The 
second  recommendation  therefore  deals  with  the 
functions  of  an  employment  service! 

Experience  has  demonstrated  that  the  timing 
of  public  works  and  their  coordination  with  gen- 
eral industrial  activity  are  important  means  of 
reducing  industi'ial  fluctuations  and  stimulating 
economic  recovery  from  periods  of  depression.  A 
third  recommendation  deals  with  this  subject. 

As  will  be  noted  below,  the  I.L.O.  has  over  a 
period  of  many  years  given  attention  to  social- 
insurance  problems.  It  is  quite  natural  therefore 
that  in  a  fourth  recommendation  it  suggests  steps 
to  be  taken  in  connection  with  providing  income 
security  and  medical  care  for  persons  released 
from  the  armed  ser^aces  and  from  war  employ- 
ment. A  mustering-out  grant  is  suggested  and 
also  provision  for  unemployment  benefits  and  sick- 
ness-insurance rights  pending  the  absorption  of 
the  persons  affected  into  the  regular  social-insur- 
ance system. 

In  the  fiftli  recommendation  under  this  agenda 
item,  the  attention  of  the  members  is  called  to  the 
15  conventions  and  recommendations  on  these 
problems  adopted  by  preceding  Conferences. 

IV.  Social   Secunty:   Principles   and   Prohlems 
Arising  out  of  the  War 

Under  this  item  the  Office  proposes  the  consid- 
eration of  three  recommendations,  a  resolution, 
and  a  draft  convention — the  only  draft  convention^ 
proposed  for  consideration  at  the  Conference. 

The  recommendations  and  the  resolution  will  be 
considered  first.  The  first  of  the  recommenda- 
tions relates  to  income  security.  It  states  as  prin- 
ciples that  income-security  schemes  should  relieve 


324 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


want  and  prevent  destitution  by  restoi'ing,  up  to 
a  certain  level,  income  which  is  lost  by  reason  of 
inability  to  work  or  to  obtain  work  or  by  reason 
of  the  death  of  the  breadwinner.  Income  security 
should  be  organized,  as  far  as  possible,  on  the 
basis  of  social  insurance.  Provision  for  needs  not 
covered  by  social  insurance  should  be  met  by  social 
assistance.  The  contingencies  covered  by  social 
insurance  should  include  sickness,  maternity,  in- 
validity, old  age,  death  of  the  breadwinner,  unem- 
ployment, emergency  expenses,  and  employment 
injuries.  The  recommendation  sets  forth  certain 
standards  to  be  achieved  in  protection  against  each 
of  these  contingencies,  the  persons  to  be  covered, 
the  benefit  rates  and  contribution  conditions,  the 
distribution  of  the  costs,  and  standards  of  admin- 
istrative procedures.  Social  assistance  should  be 
provided  for  the  maintenance  of  children,  needy 
invalids,  aged  persons,  and  widows. 

The  second  recommendation  is  concerned  with 
medical  care.  It  provides  for  either  a  j^ublic 
medical-care  service  or  a  social-insurance  medical- 
care  service.  The  system  should  aim  at  covering 
all  members  of  the  community,  whether  or  not 
they  are  gainfully  employed,  and  should  be  coor- 
dinated with  general  health  services.  The  recom- 
mendation contains  provisions  for  assuring  the 
quality  of  medical  service,  financing,  supervising, 
and  administering  it. 

The  third  recommendation  is  also  included 
under  item  III  on  the  agenda  and  is  concerned 
with  income  seciu-ity  and  medical  care  for  persons 
discharged  from  the  armed  services  and  war  em- 
ployment. It  is  intended  to  assure  that  these  per- 
sons receive  this  protection  pending  their  entry 
into  insurable  employment. 

The  resolution  provides  that  the  members  of 
the  Organization  cooperate  by  making  their  social- 
insurance  experts  available  to  other  countries  and 
by  making  comparable  the  statistics  of  the  social- 
security  services. 

The  single  draft  convention  proposed  for  action 
by  the  Conference  is  entitled  "Proposed  Draft 
Convention  Concerning  the  Maintenance  of  the 
Pension  Eights  of  Displaced  Persons".  The  draft 
convention  contains  many  carefully  detailed  pro- 
visions, but  its  purpose  can  be  described  in  non- 
technical terms.    The  effect  of  the  proposed  con- 


vention would  be  to  maintain  the  social-insurance 
pension  rights  of  all  persons  displaced  during  the 
war  with  respect  to  the  pension  insurance  scheme 
to  which  they  were  subject  in  their  country  of 
residence.  Although  it  has  general  applicability 
it  is  designed  primarily  for  the  benefit  of  the 
workers  who  have  been  taken  from  their  native 
countries  for  employment  in  Germany.  It  would 
provide  for  the  transfer  from  Germany,  for  ex- 
ample, to  the  worker's  native  country,  of  the  social- 
insurance  contributions  which  may  be  considered 
to  have  been  deducted  from  his  wages  or  made  by 
the  employer  while  he  was  employed  in  Germany. 
In  effect  it  gives  the  worker  credit  in  the  social 
institutions  of  his  native  land  for  the  period  he 
was  unable  to  contribute  to  and  be  a  member  of 
those  institutions  because  of  his  employment  in 
a  foreign  country.  This  is  very  important  because 
social-insurance  benefits  are  usually  based  on  the 
period  of  contributions  and  their  amount. 

V.  Minirmim.  Standards  of  Social  Policy  in 
Dependent  Territories 

The  OiEce  has  prepared  a  proposed  recommen- 
dation containing  53  articles  covering  veiy  fully 
the  social  and  labor  problems  of  dependent  ter- 
ritories. 

The  statement  of  general  principles  in  part  I 
indicates  the  general  approach  to  these  problems. 
All  policies  affecting  dependent  territories  are  to 
be  primarily  directed  to  the  well-being  and  de- 
velopment of  the  peoples  of  such  territories.  In ' 
order  to  promote  economic  advancement,  thus 
laying  the  foundations  of  social  progress,  pro- 
vision should  be  made  for  financial  and  technical 
assistance  in  the  economic  development  of  the 
dependent  territories.  Development  funds  should 
be  created  to  assure  the  necessary  supply  of  capi- 
tal. Action  should  be  taken  to  establish  condi- 
tions of  trade  sufficient  for  the  maintenance  of 
reasonable  standards  of  living.  All  necessary 
steps  are  to  be  taken  to  promote  improvement  in 
such  fields  as  public  health,  housing,  nutrition, 
education,  the  welfare  of  children,  the  status  of 
women,  conditions  of  employment,  the  remunera- 
tion of  wage  earners  and  independent  producers, 
social  security,  standards  of  public  services,  and 
general  production.    Finally,  all  possible  steps 


APRIL    8,    1944 


325 


are  to  be  taken  to  associate  the  peoples  of  the 
dependent  territories  in  the  framing  and  execu- 
tion of  measures  of  social  progress  through  their 
own  appropriate  institutions. 

Each  member  of  the  Organization  is  to  take 
such  measures  as  are  within  its  competence  to 
promote  the  well-being  and  development  of  the 
peoples  of  the  dependent  territories  through  the 
application  of  the  general  principles  cited  above, 
and  each  member  who  is  responsible  for  any  de- 
pendent territory  is  to  take  the  necessary  steps 
to  secure  the  application  in  such  territory  of  the 
minimum  standards  iirovided  in  the  recommenda- 
tion. 

It  is  not  possible  here  to  provide  even  a  sum- 
mary description  of  these  many  standards.  The 
most  that  can  be  done  is  to  enumerate  the  subjects 
covered,  with  the  hope  that  this  will  convey  an 
impression  of  the  scope  of  the  standards.  The 
subjects  covered  include  slavery;  the  use  of 
opium;  forced  or  compulsory  labor;  the  recruit- 
ing of  workers;  contracts  of  employment;  the  use 
of  penal  sanctions;  the  employment  of  children 
and  young  persons;  the  employment  of  women; 
remuneration;  the  use  of  land;  health,  housing, 
and  social  security;  hours  and  holidays;  the  pro- 
hibition of  color  and  religious  bars;  inspection 
and  safety;  industrial  organization;  and  cooper- 
ative organizations. 

The  summary  description  of  the  recommenda- 
tions on  social  policy  for  dependent  territories 
concludes  this  outline  of  the  subjects  on  the  agenda 
for  the  Philadelphia  Conference.  The  question  of 
the  future  of  the  I.L.O.  was  raised  at  the  beginning 
of  this  article.  It  was  there  stated  that  the  an- 
swer must  rest  with  actions  taken  by  the  delegates. 
This  survey,  however,  may  have  indicated  the 
potentialities  of  the  I.L.O.  as  a  leader  in  guiding 
the  nations  to  the  achievement  of  the  social  ob- 
jectives which  are  so  important  to  the  future  peace 
and  security  of  the  world.  If  the  Conference  can 
formulate  wise  and  far-sighted  policies  on  the  sub- 
jects presented  for  its  consideration  and  can  es- 
tablish the  basis  of  international  understanding 
and  support  for  their  effectuation,  the  future  of 
the  I.L.O.  is  assured.  The  delegates  who  will 
gather  in  Philadelphia  on  April  20  meet  with  a 


most  important  duty  to  perform — not  alone  for 
the  Organization  and  for  the  United  Nations  but 
for  the  peoples  of  all  the  world. 

INTER-AMERICAN  COMMISSION  OF  WOMEN 

[Released  to  the  press  April  8] 

The  President  has  approved  the  appointment 
of  Miss  Mary  Cannon,  director  of  the  Latin  Amer- 
ican Division,  Women's  Bureau,  Department  of 
Labor,  as  the  representative  of  the  United  States 
of  America  on  the  Inter-American  Commission 
of  Women  to  succeed  Miss  Mary  N.  Winslow,  of 
AVashington,  who  has  recently  resigned.  Miss 
Winslow  had  served  in  this  capacity  since  Janu- 
ary 1939. 

The  Secretary  of  State  expressed  regret  that 
Miss  Winslow  no  longer  found  it  possible  to  con- 
tinue in  this  position,  and  in  accepting  her  resig- 
nation expressed  his  appreciation  of  her  diligent 
efforts  during  the  past  five  years  to  advance  the 
work  of  the  Commission  along  constructive  and 
practical  lines. 

The  Commission  was  originally  established  in 
accordance  with  a  resolution  of  the  Sixth  Inter- 
national Conference  of  American  States  in  1928 
as  an  autonomous  body  to  compile  and  assemble 
data  concerning  the  civil  and  political  rights  of 
women.  It  presented  reports  to  the  Seventh  Con- 
ference at  Montevideo  in  1933  and  to  the  Eighth 
Conference  at  Lima  in  1938.  The  Lima  Confer- 
ence recognized  the  important  part  that  women 
play  in  the  political  and  social  organization  of 
nations  and  considered  that  the  Commission 
should  be  made  an  integral  part  of  the  inter- Am- 
erican organization  in  an  advisory  capacity,  the 
members  to  be  appointed  by  their  respective  gov- 
ernments. 

Miss  Cannon,  as  director  of  the  Latin  American 
Division  of  the  Women's  Bureau,  an  official  agency 
representing  the  women  of  this  country,  is  thor- 
oughly familiar  with  the  questions  and  problems 
which  receive  the  attention  of  the  Commission. 
Miss  Cannon  has  a  wide  acquaintance  among  the 
women  of  the  other  American  republics  as  well  as 
a  thorough  first-hand  knowledge  of  conditions  in 
many  of  those  countries. 


326 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Europe 


PRESENTATION  OF  LETTERS  OF  CREDENCE 
BY  THE  MINISTER  OF  THE  UNION  OF 
SOUTH  AFRICA 

[Released  to  the  press  April  3] 

The  remarks  of  the  newly  appointed  Minister 
of  the  Union  of  South  Africa,  Dr.  S.  F.  N.  Gie, 
upon  the  occasion  of  the  presentation  of  liis  letters 
of  credence,  April  2, 19i4,  follow : 

Mr.  President, 

I  have  the  honor  to  present  to  you  the  letters  by 
which  His  Majesty  the  King  has  accredited  me  as 
Envoy  Extraordinary  and  Minister  Plenipoten- 
tiary of  the  Union  of  South  Africa  near  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
letters  of  recall  of  my  distinguished  predecessor, 
Mr.  Ralph  W.  Close. 

I  have  also  the  honor  to  convey  to  you  the 
friendly  greetings  of  Field  Marshal  Smuts. 

I  esteem  it  a  very  high  privilege  to  represent 
my  country  here  and  am  deeply  conscious  that 
brotherhood-in-arms  is  strongly  inspiring  and 
stimulating  the  happy  and  close  relations  long 
existing  between  our  two  countries. 

It  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  dwell  on  South 
Africa's  participation  in  the  war.  The  part  she 
has  played  and  is  playing  is  known,  and  Field 
Marshal  Smuts,  who  shapes  and  inspires  that  part, 
has  eloquently  underlined  how  decisive  it  has  been 
at  crucial  stages  of  the  gi-eat  conflict. 

The  most  powerful  pi'opelling  force  behind  our 
participation  is  probably  the  strong  democratic 
spirit  of  our  people.  Democracy  is  deeply  inbred 
in  them,  and  they  have  rallied  to  its  defense. 

A  special  word  of  grateful  appreciation  in  con- 
nection with  the  mobilization  of  our  material  re- 
sources for  the  war  is  appropriate  here.  Amer- 
ican industrial  supplies  have  to  a  very  important 
extent  rendered  possible  the  exceedingly  rapid 
growth  and  expansion  of  the  Union's  own  indus- 
trial war  effort. 

The  war  has  brought  South  Africa  closer  to 
America,  and  I  visualize  many  abiding  results, 


spiritual  and  material,  of  mutual  contacts  so  estab- 
lished. Not  least  among  them  may  prove  to  be 
enhanced  mutual  interest  and  understanding  in 
regard  to  American  and  South  African  problems. 

And  this  process  is  but  a  part  of  a  vastly  greater 
movement.  From  the  war,  wide  international  col- 
laboration has  gained  a  new  significance  as  a  fact 
and  a  goal. 

The  strong  and  fruitful  cooperation  within  that 
unique  and  vital  combination  of  sovereign  states, 
the  British  Commonwealth  of  Nations,  has  been 
strikingly  made  manifest,  and  as  Axis  aggression 
extended  the  conflict,  the  present  world-embracing 
collaboration  of  the  United  Nations  was  estab- 
lished. 

I  beg  your  kind  indulgence,  Sir,  when  I  continue 
to  speak  of  matters  long  foreseen  and  grasped  by 
you  and  about  which  you  have  uttered  many  wise 
words. 

The  evil  powers  that  we  oppose,  by  their  philoso- 
phies, policies,  and  acts,  have  made  abundantly 
clear  that  they  are  mortal  enemies  of  decent  rela- 
tions between  peoples.  Their  goal  is  domination. 
They  have  been  and  are  being  frustrated  by  the 
forces  they  have  challenged,  forces  of  national 
and  human  solidarity,  and  their  complete  defeat 
will  be  achieved  by  the  collaboration  of  the  United 
Nations. 

It  is  my  confident  hope  that  the  goal  of  coordi- 
nated international  collaboration  will  be  as  zeal- 
ously pursued  and  strongly  seeui'cd  after  the  war 
as  during  it.  One  would  have  ground  for  despair 
in  visualizing  the  future  if  one  could  not  cherish 
this  hope. 

With  such  feelings,  and  enormously  impressed 
by  the  great  American  republic's  prodigious  and 
still  mounting  contributions  to  our  common  war 
effort,  and  by  the  very  large  and  responsible  part 
it  will  be  called  upon  to  play  when  world  peace 
must  be  shaped  and  maintained,  I  assume  my  post 
here. 

I  am  sure,  Mr.  President,  that  I  can  rely  on  the 
same  cordial  cooperation  and  assistance  on  the 
part  of  the  administration  in  the  execution  of  my 
duties  as  was  so  readily  accorded  my  pi-edecessor. 

The  President's  reply  to  the  remarks  of  Dr. 
S.F.N.  Gie  follows: 


APRIL   8,    1944 


327 


Me.  Minister  : 

I  am  very  happy  to  welcome  you  to  Washington 
and  to  receive  from  your  hands  the  letters  by  which 
His  Majesty  the  King  has  accredited  you  Envoy 
Extraordinary  and  Minister  Plenipotentiary  of  the 
Union  of  South  Africa  to  the  United  States  in 
succession  to  the  Honorable  Ralph  W.  Close  whose 
letters  of  recall  you  have  just  handed  me. 

I  greatly  appreciate  the  friendly  greetings 
which  you  bring  to  me  from  the  people  of  the 
Union  of  South  Africa  and  from  their  great  and 
gallant  leader,  Field  Marshal  Smuts.  Under  his 
inspiring  leadership  the  Union  of  South  Africa 
has  made  and  is  making  a  heroic  contribution  to 
the  final  defeat  of  our  enemies.  Especially  great 
has  been  South  Africa's  role  in  the  driving  of  the 
enemy  from  the  whole  continent  of  Africa. 

Thus  to  the  common  ideals  and  traditions  which 
have  long  united  our  peoples  in  close  friendship 
has  now  been  added  a  comradeship-in-arms.  I 
am  confident  that  our  countries  and  the  nations 
associated  with  them  shall  march  forward  to- 
gether to  the  happy  day  of  victory  and  to  the 
challenging  tasks  that  lie  beyond. 

I  hope,  Mr.  Minister,  that  your  stay  in  Wash- 
ington may  be  a  pleasant  one,  and  I  wish  to  assure 
you  that  the  American  Government  will  endeavor 
to  help  you  in  every  way  to  carry  out  your  duties 
as  Minister. 


American  Republics 


CELEBRATION  IN  CHILE  OF  THE  DAY  OF 
THE  AMERICAS 

[Released  to  the  press  April  5] 

Congressmen  Pete  Jarman  of  Alabama  and 
Robert  Bruce  Chiperfield  of  Illinois  are  leaving  on 
the  evening  of  April  5,  1944  for  Miami  en  route 
to  Santiago,  Chile,  where  they  will  be  the  official 
delegates  of  the  House  of  Representatives  at  a 
legislative  session  to  be  held  by  the  Chilean  Cham- 
ber of  Deputies  in  Santiago  on  April  14  in 
celebration  of  the  Day  of  the  Americas.  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  legislative  bodies  of  the  other 


American  republics  will  also  attend  the  ceremony. 

On  their  southward  journey  the  congressmen 

will  make  brief  visits  to  Panama  and  Peru;  on 

their  return  trip  they  will  'also  visit  Colombia, 


Guatemala,  and  Mexico. 


VISIT  TO  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  THE 
HEAD  OF  THE  MUNICIPAL  LIBRARY  OF 
HABANA 

Dr.  Fermin  Peraza  y  Sarausa,  who  is  head  of 
the  municipal  library  of  Habana,  Cuba,  and  who 
has  edited  since  1937  a  bibliographical  annual  en- 
titled Anuario  Bibliogrdfico  Cubano^  has  arrived 
in  Washington  for  a  three  months'  visit  as  guest 
of  the  Department  of  State.  While  he  is  here 
he  will  act  as  visiting  consultant  in  Cuban  bibli- 
ograi^hy  of  the  Hispanic  Foundation  of  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress.  Dr.  Peraza  y  Sarausa's  visit 
to  the  United  States  is  the  result  of  the  first  of  a 
series  of  invitations  which  will  be  extended  to 
bibliographic  experts  from  the  other  American 
republics  to  act  successively  as  consultants  of  the 
Hispanic  Foundation. 


The  Far  East 


RETURN  FROM  CHINA  OF  UNITED  STATES 
TECHNICAL  EXPERT 

[  Released  to  the  press  April  4  ] 

Dr.  Ralph  W.  Phillips,  of  the  Department  of 
Agriculture,  who  was  released  to  the  Department 
of  State  for  service  in  China,  has  returned  to 
Washington.  He  was  in  China  for  nine  months 
as  a  technical  expert  under  the  Department's  cul- 
tural-relations program  and  during  that  time 
traveled  in  many  parts  of  west  China,  studying 
livestock-production  problems  and  advising  the 
Chinese  Ministries  of  Agriculture,  Communica- 
tions, and  War  on  their  animal-breeding  and  trans- 
portation problems.  During  the  return  trip  from 
China,  he  spent  two  months  at  the  request  of  the 
Government  of  India  studying  livestock-produc- 
tion problems  and  the  research  and  other  organiza- 
tions maintained  for  livestock-improvement  work 


328 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


in  that  country  and  making  recommendations  for 
the  improvement  of  that  work.  Dr.  Phillips  has 
returned  to  his  regular  position  in  the  Bureau  of 
Animal  Industry,  Department  of  Agriculture, 
where  he  is  in  charge  of  genetics  investigations. 


The  Department 


FINANCIAL  MATTERS 

Departmental  Order  1252  of  April  1,  1944  ^ 

Under  Departmental  Order  1218  of  January  15, 
1944.  the  Division  of  Financial  and  Monetary  Af- 
fairs, Office  of  Economic  Affairs,  is  responsible  for 
initiation,  development,  and  coordination  of  policy 
and  action  pertaining  to  international  financial 
and  monetary  matters.  Under  the  same  Order  the 
Liberated  Areas  Division,  Office  of  Wartime  Eco- 
nomic Aifairs,  is  responsible  for  the  initiation  and 
coordination  of  policy  and  action  in  all  wartime 
economic  matters  pertaining  to  enemy,  enemy- 
occupied,  and  liberated  areas.  In  order  to  concen- 
trate in  one  Division  responsibility  for  financial 
matters,  responsibility  for  these  matters  in  the 
above  areas  is  hei'eby  transferred  from  the  Liber- 
ated Areas  Division  to  the  Division  of  Financial 
and  Monetary  AlFairs.  The  relationships  between 
the  Division  of  Financial  and  Monetary  Aifairs 
and  the  Liberated  Areas  Division  and  the  Division 
of  World  Trade  Intelligence  are  hereby  redefined. 

Transfer  of  Functions  From  the  Liberated  Areas 
Division 
Departmental  Order  1218  is  hereby  amended  by 
the  transfer  of  functions  listed  in  section  (b)  of  the 
Liberated  Areas  Division  to  the  Division  of  Finan- 
cial and  Monetary  Affairs:  "(b)  fiscal  matters,  in- 
cluding banking  matters;  and  financial  and 
property  controls,  including  the  application  of 
Executive  Oi-der  no.  8389,  as  amended,  to  property 
located  in  the  United  States  of  governments  of 
those  areas  and  their  nationals,  and  questions  re- 
lating to  the  Alien  Property  Custodian  and  to  the 


'Effective  Mar.   30,  1944. 


property    control    measures     of    other     United 
Nations". 

Relations  With  the  Liberated  Areas  Division 

In  carrying  out  its  responsibilities,  the  Division 
of  Financial  and  Monetary'  Affairs  shall  work  in 
close  collaboration  with  the  Liberated  Areas  Divi- 
sion. The  Liberated  Areas  Division  continues  to 
be  resjjonsible  for  the  initiation  and  coordination 
of  policy  and  action  in  all  wartime  economic  mat- 
ters pertaining  to  enemy,  enemj^-occupied  and 
liberated  ai'eas,  except  those  matters  covered  in 
(b)  above.  The  area  representatives  in  this  Divi- 
sion will  be  the  focal  point  of  contact  regarding  all 
matters  in  the  area. 

Relations   With   the   Division   of   World   Trade 
Intelligence 

The  Division  of  World  Trade  Intelligence  shall 
have  primary  responsibility  for  the  initiation  and 
formulation  of  policy  and  for  action  with  respect 
to  the  application  and  administration  of  foreign 
funds  control  (Executive  Order  8389,  as  amended) 
except  with  respect  to  the  govermnents  or  nationals 
of  enemy,  enemy-occupied,  or  liberated  areas.  In 
carrying  out  its  responsibilities,  the  Division  of 
World  Trade  Intelligence  shall  consult  with  the 
Division  of  Financial  and  Monetary  Affairs  in  the 
formulation  of  policy  on  foreign  funds  control 
matters,  such  as  the  extension  of  controls  to  addi- 
tional countries,  the  lifting  or  relaxing  of  con- 
trols, modifications  of  control  through  general 
licenses  or  rulings,  and  arrangements  for  the  utili- 
zation of  the  funds  of  governments  or  their  official 
banks. 

The  Division  of  Financial  and  Monetary  Affairs 
shall  have  primary  responsibility  for  the  initia- 
tion and  formulation  of  policy  and  for  action  in 
matters  relating  to  the  application  of  foreign 
funds  control  measures  to  property  of  govern- 
ments or  nationals  of  enemy,  enemy-occupied  or 
liberated  areas.  The  Division  of  Financial  and 
Monetary  Affairs  shall  keep  the  Division  of  World 
Trade  Intelligence  informed  of  policy  develop- 
ments with  regard  to  these  matters.  As  policies 
become  established,  the  Division  of  World  Trade 
Intelligence  shall  assume  the  handling  of  individ- 
ual cases  within  the  framework  of  these  policies. 


APRIL   S,     1944 


329 


The  Division  of  Financial  and  Monetary  Affairs 
shall  also  have  primary  responsibility  for  policy 
and  action  in  cases  involving  the  control  of  im- 
ported securities  under  General  Ruling  5,  pur- 
suant to  Executive  Order  8389,  as  amended,  and 
in  matters  pertaining  to  the  servicing  of  dollar 
bonds.  Subject  to  the  foregoing  exceptions,  the 
Division  of  "World  Trade  Intelligence  shall 
handle  all  individual  freezing  cases  and  license 
applications. 

CoRDELL  Hull 


The  Foreign  Service 


DEATH  OF  EDWIN  LOWE  NEVILLE 

Tlie  Department  of  State  has  learned  with  regret 
of  the  death  on  April  7,  1944  in  Pasadena,  Cali- 
fornia, of  the  Honorable  Edwin  Lowe  Neville. 
Mr.  Neville,  who  entered  the  Foreign  Service  of 
the  United  States  as  a  student  interpreter  in  Japan 
in  1907,  served  at  Foreign  Service  posts  in  Korea, 
Switzerland,  and  Japan.  He  was  designated  an 
Expert  Assistant  at  the  Conference  on  the  Limita- 
tion of  Armament  in  Washington,  1921-22,  a  rep- 
resentative on  the  Advisory  Board  to  the  Federal 
Narcotics  Control  Board  in  1922,  and  a  delegate 
to  the  International  Narcotics  Conference  at 
Geneva  in  1924-2.5.  On  May  28,  1937  he  was  ap- 
pointed Minister  of  the  United  States  to  Siam. 
He  retired  from  the  Foreign  Service  in  1940. 

The  Secretary  of  State  has  sent  the  following 
telegram  to  Messrs.  Richard  and  Edwin  Neville, 
sons  of  Mr.  Neville : 

I  have  just  learned  with  deepest  regret  of  your 
father's  passing.  During  his  long  and  distin- 
guished career  as  a  public  servant,  he  endeared 
himself  to  all  who  knew  him  and  won  their  en- 
during respect.  Mrs.  Hull  and  I  send  you  both 
our  profound  sympathy. 

CoEDELL  Hull 

CONSULAR  OFFICES 

The  American  Vice  Consulate  at  Corumba, 
Brazil,  was  closed,  effective  March  31,  1944. 


General 


BLAIRLEE  HOUSE 

The  remodeling,  redecoration,  and  furnishing  of 
historic  Blair-Lee  House,  which  was  undertaken 
by  the  Public  Buildings  Administration  for  the 
Department  of  State,  has  been  completed.  The 
facilities  afforded  by  the  Blair-Lee  House,  which  is 
located  at  1653  Pennsylvania  Avenue,  across  from 
the  Department  of  State,  and  which  adjoins  the 
Blair  House,  will  enable  the  Department  to  make 
suitable  arrangements  for  the  accommodation  in 
Washington  of  distinguished  foreign  visitors,  such 
as  visiting  delegates  to  conferences,  holders  of 
travel  grants,  professors,  and  other  guests  of  the 
Government. 


Treaty  Information 


AGREEMENT  FOR  UNITED  NATIONS  RE- 
LIEF AND  REHABILITATION  ADMINIS- 
TRATION 

Haiti 

The  American  Charge  d'Affaires  ad  interim  at 
Port-au-Prince  transmitted  to  the  Department 
with  a  despatch  of  March  23,  1944  copies  of  Le 
Moniteuvoi  March  16, 1943  in  which  was  published 
decree  362  of  February  29,  1944  of  the  National 
Assembly  of  Haiti,  ratifying  the  Agreement  for 
United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Ad- 
ministration signed  at  AVashington  on  November 
9,  1943  (Executive  Agreement  Sei-ies  352). 

FINAL  ACT  OF  INTERNATIONAL  WHALING 
CONFERENCE 

The  American  Embassy  in  London  transmitted 
to  the  Department  of  State  with  a  despatch  of 
April  1,  1944  certified  copies  of  the  Final  Act  of 
the  International  Whaling  Conference  signed  at 
London  on  January  31,  1944  by  representatives  of 


330 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


the  Governments  of  the  United  States  of  America, 
the  Union  of  Soutli  Africa,  tlie  Commonwealth  of 
Australia,  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain 
and  Northern  Ireland,  Canada,  New  Zealand,  and 
Norway.  The  Conference  was  held  in  London  on 
January  4,  13,  19,  and  31,  1944. 


INTER-AMERICAN  INDIAN  INSTITUTE 

Dominican  Republic 

The  Mexican  Charge  d'Affaires  ad  interim  at 
Washington  informed  the  Secretary  of  State,  by  a 
note  of  March  27,  1944,  that  the  adherence  of  the 
Dominican  Republic  to  the  Convention  Providing 
for  the  Creation  of  an  Inter-American  Indian 
Institute,  opened  for  signature  from  November  1 
to  December  31, 1940,  was  registered  on  November 
11,  1943  with  the  Ministry  of  Foreign  Affairs  of 
Mexico  in  accordance  with  the  second  paragraph 
of  article  XVI  of  that  convention. 


RENEWAL  OF  NAVAL-MISSION  AGREEMENT 
WITH  PERU 

By  an  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington 
January  31,  February  9,  and  March  21  and  31, 
1944  an  agreement  was  effected  between  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  and  the  Government 
of  Peru  for  the  renewal  of  the  agreement  for  the 
assignment  of  a  United  States  Naval  Mission  to 
Peru  signed  at  Washington  on  July  31,  1940 
(Executive  Agreement  Series  177). 

The  Governments  of  the  United  States  and  Peru 
have  agreed  to  renew  the  agreement  of  1940  for  a 
period  of  four  years  from  July  31,  1944,  the  date 
of  termination  of  that  agreement.  The  agree- 
ment of  July  31,  1940  has  been  amended  by  the 
addition  of  the  following  article: 

The  members  of  this  Mission  are  permitted  and 
may  be  authorized  to  represent  the  United  States 
of  America  on  any  commission  and  in  any  other 
capacity  having  to  do  with  military  cooperation 
or  hemispheric  defense  without  prejudice  to  this 
Agreement,  during  the  present  war  emergency. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Foreign  Service  List,  January  31,  1944.  Publication  2079. 
iv,  132  pp.  Subscription,  500  a  year  (650  foreign)  ; 
single  copy,  200. 

Military  Mission :  Agreement  Between  the  United  States 
of  America  and  Iran — Signed  at  Tehran  November  27, 
1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series  361.  Publication 
20S4.     16  pp.     100. 

The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals :  Cumu- 
lative Supplement  No.  1,  April  7,  1944,  to  Revision  VII 
of  March  23,  1944.     Publication  2093.     16  pp.     Free. 

Other  Agencies 

Dairy  Industry  of  Honduras,  by  R.  E.  Hodgson  and  A.  C. 
Dahlberg.  Nov.  1943.  (Department  of  Agriculture, 
Bureau  of  Dairy  Industry.)  ii,  30  pp.,  processed.  Avail- 
able from  Bureau  of  Dairy  Industry. 

General  Censuses  and  Vital  Statistics  in  the  Americas : 
Annotated  Bibliography  of  Historical  Censuses  and  Cur- 
rent Vital  Statistics  of  the  Twenty-one  American  Re- 
publics, American  Sections  of  the  British  Commonwealth 
of  Nations,  American  Colonies  of  Denmark,  France,  and 
the  Netherlands,  and  American  Territories  and  Posses- 
sions of  the  United  States.  1943.  (Department  of  Com- 
merce, Bureau  of  the  Census.)  ix,  151  pp.,  6j(^  (avail- 
able from  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Govern- 
ment Printing  Office). 

Education  in  Cuba  [with  bibliography],  by  Severin  K. 
Turosienski.  1943.  (Federal  Security  Agency,  United 
States  Office  of  Education.)  vi,  90  pp.,  illus.,  20^  (avail- 
able from  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office). 

Nutrition  Problems  and  Programs  in  Latin  America  in 
1943,  by  Marjorie  M.  Heseltine.  1944.  (Department  of 
Labor,  Children's  Bureau.)  4  pp.  Available  from  Chil- 
dren's Bureau. 

Labor  Conditions  in  Latin  America.  1944.  (Department 
of  Labor,  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics,  Latin  American 
Series  16.)  ii,  13  pp.  Available  from  Bureau  of  Labor 
Statistics. 

Labor  Conditions  in  the  Netherlands,  by  Margaret  H. 
Schoenfeld  and  M.  Mead  Smith.  1944.  (Department 
of  Labor,  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics. )  i,  26  pp.  Avail- 
able from  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics. 

Bolivia,  Storehouse  of  Metals.  1944.  (Office  of  the  Co- 
ordinator of  Inter-American  Affairs.)  12  pp.,  illus. 
Available  from  CIAA. 

Preliminary  Bibliography  of  Colombia,  compiled  by  Ben- 
jamin Keen,  Guy  S.  M(5traux,  and  Bernard  J.   Siegel. 


APRIL    8,    1944 


331 


Dee.  1,  1943.  (Office  of  the  Coordinator  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs.)  ii,  60  pp.,  processed.  Available 
from  ClAA. 

Venezuela,  Land  of  Oil.  1944.  (Office  of  the  Coordinator 
of  Inter-American  Affairs.)  16  pp.,  illus.  Available 
from  CIAA. 

Price  Control  in  the  Republic  of  Colombia,  by  Ben  W. 
Lewis.  Jan.  1943.  [1944].  (Office  of  Price  Adminis- 
tration.) ii,  68  pp.,  processed.  Available  from  Office 
of  Price  Administration. 

Control  of  Production,  Distribution,  and  Consumption  in 
Norway.  Nov.  1943.  (Office  of  Price  Administration.) 
i,  17  pp.,  processed.  Available  from  Office  of  Pfice  Ad- 
ministration. 

Description  of  Thirty  Towns  in  Tucatdn,  Mexico  [with 
bibliography],  by  Morris  Sleggerda.  1943.  (Smith- 
sonian Institution,  American  Ethnology  Bureau.)  i, 
22  pp.     Available  from  Smithsonian  Institution. 


Legislation 


First  Deficiency  Appropriation  Act,  1944 :  An  Act  Making 
appropriations  to  supply  deficiencies  in  certain  appro- 
priations for  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  30,  1944,  and 
for  prior  fiscal  years,  to  provide  supplemental  appro- 
priations for  the  fi.scal  year  ending  June  30,  1944,  and 
for  other  purposes.  Approved  AprU  1,  1944.  [H.R. 
4346.]  Public  Law  279,  78th  Cong.  [Department  of 
State,  pp.  13,  26,  37,  and  40.]     40  pp. 

United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration : 
Joint  Resolution  To  enable  the  United  States  to  partici- 
pate in  the  work  of  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Re- 
habilitation Organization.  Approved  March  28,  1944. 
[H.J.  Res.  192.]     Public  Law  267,  78th  Cong.    7  pp. 


U.    S.  COVERSMENT   PRINTING  OFFICCi  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office.  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents     -     -     -     .     Subscription  price.  $2.75  a  year 


PUBLISHED    WEEKLY    WITH    THE    APPEOVAL    OF   THE    DIEECTOE    OF   THE    BUREAtJ   OF    THE    BUDGET 


9  3 J"  3.   ifii-io 
THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULL 


H 


■^  nn 


0 


riN 


APRIL  15,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  251— Publication  2102 


ontents 


The  War  Page 

Foreign  Policy  of  the  United  States  of  America :  Address 

by  the  Secretary  of  State    .    .    . 335 

Foreign  Affairs  of  the  United  States  in  Wartime  and 

After:  Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Long  .  .  .  342 
Adherence  by  Liberia  to  the  Dechiration  by  United 

Nations 346 

Petrolemn  Questions:  PreUminary  Discussions  by  the 

United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom 346 

Presentation   of   Soviet   Awards   to   Members   of   the 

American  Armed  Forces  and  Merchant  Marine .    .       347 

American  Republics 

Pan  American  Day:  Address  by  the  Secretary  of  State .        349 
Attempted  Assassination  of  President  of  Mexico   ...       351 

The  Far  East 

American  Aid  to  China  Since  1931 351 

The  Department 

Establishment  of  an  Industry  Branch  in  the  Commodi- 
ties Division  of  the  Office  of  Economic  Affahs: 
Departmental  Order  1254  of  April  10,  1944     ...       365 

Appointment  of  Officers 366 

Treaty  Information 

Declaration  by  United  Nations 366 

Regulation  of  Inter- American  Automotive  Traffic.    .    .       366 

Legislation 366 

Publications 367 


y.  §.  SUPEftlNTErtDEilT  OF  DOCUMEMTS 

MAY   6  1944 


The  War 


FOREIGN  POLICY  OF  THE  UNITED   STATES  OF  AMERICA 
Address   by  the   Secretary  of  State  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  April  9] 

I  want  to  talk  with  j'ou  this  evening  about 
the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States.  This 
is  not,  as  some  writers  assume,  a  mysterious 
game  carried  on  by  diplomats  with  other  diplomats 
in  foreign  offices  all  over  the  world.  It  is  for  us 
the  task  of  focusing  and  giving  effect  in  the  world 
outside  our  borders  to  the  will  of  135  million  people 
through  the  constitutional  processes  which  govern 
our  democracy.  For  this  reason  our  foreign  policy 
must  be  simple  and  direct  and  founded  upon  the 
interests  and  purposes  of  the  American  people. 
It  has  continuity  of  basic  objectives  because  it  is 
rooted  in  the  traditions  and  aspirations  of  our 
people.  It  must,  of  course,  be  applied  in  the  light 
of  experience  and  the  lessons  of  the  past. 

In  talking  about  foreign  policy  it  is  well  to  re- 
member, as  Justice  Hohnes  said,  that  a  page  of 
history  is  worth  a  volume  of  logic.  There  are 
three  outstanding  lessons  in  our  recent  history  to 
which  I  particularly  wish  to  draw  your  attention. 
In  the  first  place,  since  the  outbreak  of  the  present 
war  in  Europe,  we  and  those  nations  who  are  now 
our  allies  have  moved  from  relative  weakness  to 
strength.  In  the  second  place,  during  that  same 
period  we  in  this  country  have  moved  from  a  deep- 
seated  tendency  toward  separate  action  to  the 
knowledge  and  conviction  that  only  through  unity 
of  action  can  there  be  achieved  in  this  world  the 
results  which  are  essential  for  the  continuance  of 
free  peoples.  And,  thirdly,  we  have  moved  from  a 
careless  tolerance  of  evil  institutions  to  the  convic- 
tion that  free  governments  and  Nazi  and  Fascist 
governments  cannot  exist  together  in  this  world 
because  the  very  nature  of  the  latter  requires  them 
to  be  aggressors  and  the  very  nature  of  free  gov- 


ernments too  often  lays  them  open  to  treacherous 
and  well-laid  plans  of  attack. 

An  undei-standing  of  these  points  will  help  to 
clarify  the  polic}'  which  this  Government  has  been 
and  is  following. 

In  1940,  with  the  fall  of  France,  the  peoples  of 
the  free  world  awoke  with  horror  to  find  them- 
selves on  the  very  brink  of  defeat.  Only  Britain 
in  the  west  and  China  in  the  east  stood  between 
them  and  disaster,  and  the  space  on  which  they 
stood  was  narrow  and  precarious.  At  that  mo- 
ment the  free  nations  were  militarily  weak,  and 
their  enemies  and  potential  enemies  were  strong 
and  well  prepared.  Even  before  that  this  country 
had  begun  its  preparations  for  self-defense.  Soon 
thereafter  we  started  upon  the  long  hard  road  of 
mobilizing  our  great  natural  resources,  our  vast 
productive  potentialities,  and  our  reserves  of  man- 
power to  defend  ourselves  and  to  strengthen  those 
who  were  resisting  the  aggressors. 

This  was  a  major  decision  of  foreign  policy. 
Since  that  decision  was  made  we  have  moved  far 
from  the  former  position.  We  and  our  Allies  are 
attaining  a  strength  which  can  leave  no  doubt  as 
to  the  outcome.  That  outcome  is  far  from 
achieved.  There  are  desjaerate  periods  still  before 
us,  but  we  have  built  the  strength  which  we  sought 
iiud  we  need  only  to  maintain  the  will  to  use  it. 

This  decision  which  we  have  made  and  carried 
out  was  not  a  decision  to  make  a  mere  sporadic 
effort.  An  episode  is  not  a  policy.  The  American 
people  are  determined  to  press  forward  with  our 
Allies  to  the  defeat  of  our  enemies  and  the  de- 
struction of  the  Nazi  and  Fascist  systems  which 


'  Broadcast  over  the  network  of  the  Columbia  Broad- 
casting System.  Apr.  9,  1944. 

335 


336 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


plunged  us  into  the  war.  And  they  are  also  de- 
termined to  go  on,  after  the  victory,  with  our  Allies 
and  all  other  nations  which  desire  peace  and  free- 
dom to  establish  and  maintain  in  full  sti-ength  the 
institutions  without  which  peace  and  freedom  can- 
not be  an  enduring  reality.  We  cannot  move  in 
and  out  of  international  cooperation  and  in  and 
out  of  participation  in  the  responsibilities  of  a 
member  of  the  family  of  nations.  The  political, 
material,  and  spiritual  strength  of  the  free  and 
democratic  nations  not  only  is  greatly  dependent 
upon  the  strength  which  our  full  participation 
brings  to  the  common  effort  but,  as  we  now  know,  is 
a  vital  factor  in  our  own  strength.  As  it  is  with 
the  keystone  of  an  arch,  neither  the  keystone  nor 
the  arch  can  stand  alone. 

This  growth  of  our  strength  entails  consequences 
in  our  foreign  policy.  Let  us  look  first  at  our 
relations  with  the  neutral  nations. 

In  the  two  years  following  Pearl  Harbor,  while 
we  were  mustering  our  strength  and  helping  to 
restore  that  of  our  Allies,  our  relations  with  these 
neutral  nations  and  their  attitude  toward  our  ene- 
mies were  conditioned  by  the  position  in  which  we 
found  ourselves.  We  have  constantly  sought  to 
keep  before  them  what  they,  of  course,  know — 
that  upon  our  victory  hangs  their  very  existence 
and  freedom  as  independent  nations.  We  have 
sought  in  every  way  to  reduce  the  aid  which  their 
trade  with  the  enemy  gives  him  and  to  increase 
the  strength  which  we  might  draw  from  them. 
But  our  power  was  limited.  They  and  we  have 
continually  been  forced  to  accept  compromises 
which  we  certainly  would  not  have  chosen. 

That  period,  I  believe,  is  rapidly  drawing  to  a 
close.  It  is  clear  to  all  that  our  strength  and  that 
of  our  Allies  now  makes  only  one  outcome  of  this 
war  possible.  That  strength  now  makes  it  clear 
that  we  are  not  asking  these  neutral  nations  to 
expose  themselves  to  certain  destruction  when  we 
ask  them  not  to  prolong  the  war,  with  its  conse- 
quences of  suffering  and  death,  by  sending  aid  to 
the  enemy. 

We  can  no  longer  acquiesce  in  these  nations' 
drawing  upon  the  resources  of  the  allied  world 
when  they  at  the  same  time  contribute  to  the  death 
of  troops  whose  sacrifice  contributes  to  their  sal- 
vation as  well  as  ours.    We  have  scrupulously  re- 


spected the  sovereignty  of  these  nations;  and  we 
have  not  coerced,  nor  shall  we  coerce,  any  nation 
to  join  us  in  the  fight.  We  have  said  to  these  coun- 
tries that  it  is  no  longer  necessary  for  them  to  pur- 
chase protection  against  aggression  by  furnish- 
ing aid  to  our  enemy — whether  it  be  by  permitting 
official  German  agents  to  carry  on  their  activities 
of  espionage  against  the  Allies  within  neutral 
borders,  or  by  sending  to  Germany  the  essential 
ingredients  of  the  steel  which  kills  our  soldiers, 
or  by  permitting  highly  skilled  workers  and  fac- 
tories to  supply  products  which  can  no  longer 
issue  from  the  smoking  ruins  of  German  factories. 
We  ask  them  only,  but  with  insistence,  to  cease 
aiding  our  enemy. 

The  allied  strength  has  now  grown  to  the  point 
where  we  are  on  the  verge  of  great  events.  Of 
military  events  I  cannot  speak.  It  is  enough  that 
they  are  in  the  hands  of  men  who  have  the  com- 
plete trust  of  the  American  people.  We  await 
their  development  with  absolute  confidence.  But 
I  can  and  should  discuss  with  you  what  may 
happen  close  upon  the  heels  of  military  action. 

As  I  look  at  the  map  of  Europe,  certain  things 
seem  clear  to  me.  As  the  Nazis  go  down  to  defeat 
they  will  inevitably  leave  behind  them  in  Ger- 
many and  the  satellite  states  of  southeastern 
Europe  a  legacy  of  confusion.  It  is  essential  that 
we  and  our  Allies  establish  the  controls  necessary 
to  bring  order  out  of  this  chaos  as  rapidly  as  pos- 
sible and  do  everything  possible  to  prevent  its 
spread  to  the  German-occupied  countries  of  east- 
ern and  western  Europe  while  they  are  in  the 
throes  of  reestablishing  government  and  repair- 
ing the  most  brutal  ravages  of  the  war.  If  con- 
fusion should  spread  throughout  Europe  it  is  dif- 
ficult to  over-emphasize  the  seriousness  of  the 
disaster  that  may  follow.  Therefore,  for  us,  for 
the  world,  and  for  the  countries  concerned,  a 
stable  Europe  should  be  an  immediate  objective  of 
allied  policy. 

Stability  and  order  do  not  and  cannot  mean  re- 
action. Order  there  must  be  to  avoid  chaos.  But 
it  must  be  achieved  in  a  manner  which  will  give 
full  scope  to  men  and  women  who  look  forward, 
men  and  women  who  will  end  Fascism  and  all  its 
works  and  create  the  institutions  of  a  free  and 
democratic  way  of  life. 


APRIL    15,    1944 


337 


We  look  with  hope  and  with  deep  faith  to  a 
period  of  great  democratic  accomplishment  in 
Europe.  Liberation  from  the  German  yoke  will 
give  the  peoples  of  Europe  a  new  and  magnificent 
opportunity  to  fulfill  their  democratic  aspirations, 
both  in  building  democratic  political  institutions 
of  their  own  choice  and  in  acliieving  the  social  and 
economic  democracy  on  which  political  democracy 
must  rest.  It  is  important  to  our  national  interest 
to  encourage  tlie  establishment  in  Europe  of  strong 
and  progressive  popular  governments,  dedicated 
like  our  own  to  improving  the  social  welfare  of  the 
people  as  a  whole — governments  which  will  join 
the  common  effort  of  nations  in  creating  the  con- 
ditions of  lasting  peace  and  in  promoting  the  ex- 
pansion of  production,  employment,  and  the  ex- 
change and  consumption  of  goods,  which  are  the 
material  foundations  of  the  liberty  and  welfare  of 
all  peoples. 

It  is  hard  to  imagine  a  stable  Europe  if  there  is 
instability  in  its  component  parts,  of  which  France 
is  one  of  the  most  important.  What,  then,  is  our 
policy  toward  France?  Our  first  concern  is  to 
defeat  the  enemy,  drive  him  from  French  territory 
and  the  territory  of  all  the  adjacent  countries 
which  he  has  overrun.  To  do  this  the  supreme 
military  commander  must  have  unfettered  au- 
thority. But  we  have  no  purpose  or  wish  to  gov- 
ern France  or  to  administer  any  affairs  save  those 
which  are  necessary  for  military  operations 
against  the  enemy.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
that  civil  authority  in  France  should  be  exercised 
by  Frenchmen,  should  be  swiftly  established,  and 
should  operate  in  accordance  with  advanced  plan- 
ning as  fully  as  military  operations  will  permit. 
It  is  essential  that  the  material  foundations  of  the 
life  of  the  French  people  be  at  once  restored  or  re- 
sumed.   Only  in  this  way  can  stability  be  achieved. 

It  has  always  been  our  thought  in  planning  for 
this  end  that  we  should  look  to  Frenchmen  to  un- 
dertake civil  administration  and  assist  them  in 
that  task  without  compromising  in  any  way  the 
right  of  the  French  people  to  choose  the  ultimate 
form  and  personnel  of  the  government  which 
tliey  may  wish  to  establish.  That  must  be  left  to 
the  free  and  untrammeled  choice  of  the  French 
people. 


The  President  and  I  are  clear,  therefore,  as  to 
the  need,  from  the  outset,  of  French  civil  admin- 
istration— and  democratic  French  administra- 
tion— in  France.  We  are  disposed  to  see  the 
French  Committee  of  National  Liberation  exercise 
leadersliip  to  establish  law  and  order  under  the 
supervision  of  the  allied  commander  in  chief.  The 
Committee  has  given  public  assurance  that  it  does 
not  propose  to  perpetuate  its  authority.  On  the 
contrary,  it  has  given  assurance  that  it  wishes  at 
the  earliest  possible  date  to  have  the  French  people 
exercise  their  own  sovereign  will  in  accordance 
with  French  constitutional  processes.  The  Com- 
mittee is,  of  course,  not  the  government  of  France, 
and  we  cannot  recognize  it  as  such.  In  accordance 
with  this  understanding  of  mutual  purposes  the 
Committee  will  have  every  opportunity  to  under- 
take civil  administration  and  our  cooperation  and 
help  in  every  practicable  way  in  making  it  success- 
ful. It  has  been  a  symbol  of  the  spirit  of  France 
and  of  French  resistance.  We  have  fully  cooper- 
ated with  it  in  all  the  military  phases  of  the  war 
effort,  including  the  furnishing  of  arms  and  equip- 
ment to  the  French  armed  forces.  Our  central  and 
abiding  purpose  is  to  aid  the  French  people,  our 
oldest  friends,  in  providing  a  democratic,  compe- 
tent, and  French  administration  of  liberated 
French  territory. 

In  Italy  our  interests  are  likewise  in  assisting  in 
the  development  at  the  earliest  moment  of  a  free 
and  democratic  Italian  government.  As  I  said 
some  moments  ago,  we  have  learned  that  there  can- 
not be  any  compromise  with  Fascism — whether  in 
Italy  or  in  any  other  country.  It  must  always  be 
the  enemy,  and  it  must  be  our  determined  policy 
to  do  all  in  our  power  to  end  it.  Here  again, 
within  these  limits,  it  is  not  our  purpose  or  policy 
to  impose  the  ultimate  form  or  personnel  of  gov- 
ernment. Here  again  we  wish  to  give  every  op- 
portunity for  a  free  expression  of  a  free  Italy. 
We  had  hoped  that  before  this  enough  of  Italy 
would  have  been  freed  so  that  we  might  have  had 
at  least  a  preliminary  expression  of  that  will. 
Events  have  not  progressed  according  to  our  hopes. 

The  present  situation,  then,  is  this :  In  October 
1943  the  President,  Mr.  Churchill,  and  Marshal 
Stalin  accepted  the  active  cooperation  of  the 
Italian  Government  and  its  armed  forces  as  a  co- 


338 

belligerent  in  the  war  against  Germany  under  the 
supervision  of  an  Allied  Control  Commission. 
The  declaration  regarding  Italy  made  at  Moscow 
by  the  British,  Soviet,  and  American  Governments 
confirmed  the  policy  initiated  by  the  British  and 
American  Governments  that  the  Italian  Govern- 
ment shall  be  made  more  democratic  by  the  intro- 
duction of  representatives  of  those  sections  of  the 
Italian  people  who  have  alwaj's  opposed  Fascism ; 
that  all  institutions  and  organizations  created  by 
the  Fascist  regime  shall  be  suppressed;  that  all 
Fascists  or  pro-Fascist  elements  shall  be  removed 
from  the  administration  and  from  the  institutions 
and  organizations  of  a  public  character;  and  that 
democratic  organs  of  local  governments  shall  be 
created.  Finally,  it  recites  that  nothing  in  tlie 
declaration  should  operate  against  the  right  of  the 
Italian  people  "ultimately  to  choose  their  own 
form  of  government". 

■  This  policy  has  been  and  is  being  carried  out. 
Only  that  part  which  calls  for  the  introduction 
into  the  central  government  of  more  democratic 
elements  has  not  yet  been  put  into  effect.  This 
does  not  signify  any  change  in  the  clear  and  an- 
nounced policy.  Thus  far  it  has  been  thought  by 
those  chiefly  responsible  for  the  military  situation 
that  it  would  be  prejudiced  by  an  imposed  recon- 
struction of  the  government,  and  a  reconstruction 
by  agreement  has  not  yet  been  possible.  But  there 
is  already  promise  of  success  in  the  activities  of 
the  political  parties  which  are  currently  holding 
conferences  with  a  view  to  drawing  up  a  program 
for  the  political  reconstruction  of  their  country 
along  democratic  lines.  The  Permanent  Execu- 
tive Junta  is  seeking  a  solution  which  will  pro- 
vide for  the  cooperation  of  the  liberal  political 
groups  within  the  government.  Thus,  after  21 
years,  we  see  a  rebirth  of  political  consciousness 
and  activity  in  Italy,  which  jioints  the  way  to  the 
ultimate  free  expression  of  the  Italian  people  in 
the  choice  of  their  government. 

Wliat  I  have  said  related  to  some  of  the  most 
immediate  of  our  problems  and  the  effect  of  our 
policy  toward  them  as  we  and  our  Allies  have 
moved  from  a  position  of  weakness  to  one  of 
strength.  There  remain  the  more  far-reaching 
relations  between  us  and  our  Allies  in  dealing  with 
our  enemies  and  in  providing  for  future  peace, 
freedom  from  aggression,  and  opportunity  for  ex- 


DEPAKTMBNT   OF  STATE   BULLETIN 

panding  material  well-being.  Here  I  would  only 
mislead  you  if  I  spoke  of  definitive  solutions. 
These  require  the  slow,  hard  process,  essential  to 
enduring  and  accepted  solutions  among  free 
peoples,  of  full  discussion  with  our  Allies  and 
among  our  own  people.  But  such  discussion  is 
now  in  progress.  After  two  years  of  intensive 
study,  the  basis  upon  which  our  policy  must  be 
founded  is  soundly  established;  the  direction  is 
clear ;  and  the  general  methods  of  accomplishment 
aie  emerging. 

This  basis  of  policy  and  these  methods  rest  upon 
the  second  of  the  lessons  which  I  said  at  the  outset 
of  my  remarks  was  found  in  the  pages  of  our  re- 
cent history.  It  is  that  action  upon  these  matters 
cannot  be  separate  but  must  be  agreed  and  united 
action.  This  is  fundamental.  It  must  underlie  the 
entire  range  of  our  policy.  The  free  nations  have 
been  brought  to  the  very  brink  of  destruction  by 
allowing  themselves  to  be  separated  and  divided. 
If  any  lesson  has  ever  been  hammered  home  with 
blood  and  suffering,  that  one  has  been.  And  the 
lesson  is  not  yet  ended. 

However  difficult  the  road  may  be,  there  is  no 
hope  of  turning  victory  into  enduring  peace  unless 
the  real  interests  of  this  country,  the  British 
■Comn)onweaIth,  the  Soviet  Union,  and  China  are 
liannonized  and  unless  they  agree  and  act  together. 
Tliis  is  the  solid  framework  upon  which  all  future 
policy  and  international  organization  nuist  be  built. 
It  offers  the  fullest  opportunity  for  the  develop- 
ment of  institutions  in  which  all  free  nations  may 
participate  democratically,  thi-ough  which  a  reign 
of  law  and  morality  may  arise,  and  through  which 
the  material  interests  of  all  may  be  advanced.  But 
without  an  enduring  understanding  between  these 
four  nations  upon  their  fundamental  purposes,  in- 
terests, and  obligations  to  one  another,  all  organi- 
zations to  preserve  peace  are  creations  on  paper 
and  the  path  is  wide  open  again  for  the  rise  of  a 
new  aggressor. 

This  essential  understanding  and  unity  of  action 
among  the  four  nations  is  not  in  substitution  or 
derogation  of  unity  among  the  United  Nations. 
But  it  is  basic  to  all  organized  international  action 
because  ui^on  its  reality  depends  the  possibility  of 
enduring  peace  and  fi'ee  institutions  rather  than 
new  coalitions  and  a  new  pre-war  period.  Nor  do 
1  suggest  that  any  conclusions  of  these  four  na- 


ATHIL    15,    1944 


339 


tions  can  or  should  be  without  the  participation  of 
the  other  United  Nations.  I  am  stating  what  I 
believe  the  common  sense  of  my  fellow  countrymen 
and  all  men  will  recognize — that  for  these  powers 
to  become  divided  in  their  aims  and  fail  to  recog- 
nize and  harmonize  their  basic  interests  can  pro- 
duce only  disaster  and  that,  no  machinery,  as  such, 
can  produce  this  essential  harmony  and  unity. 

The  road  to  agreement  is  a  difficult  one,  as  any 
man  knows  who  has  ever  tried  to  get  two  other 
men,  or  a  city  council,  or  a  trade  gathering,  or  a 
legislative  body,  to  agree  upon  anything.  Agree- 
ment can  be  achieved  only  by  trying  to  understand 
the  other  fellow's  point  of  view  and  by  going  as  far 
as  possible  to  meet  it. 

Although  the  road  to  unity  of  purpose  and  ac- 
tion is  long  and  difficult  we  have  taken  long  strides 
upon  our  way.  The  Atlantic  Charter  was  pro- 
claimed by  the  President  and  the  Prime  Minister 
of  Great  Britain  in  August  1941.  Then,  by  the 
Declaration  of  the  United  Nations  of  January  1', 
1942,  these  nations  adopted  the  principles  of  the 
Atlantic  Charter,  agreed  to  devote  all  their  re- 
sources to  the  winning  of  the  war,  and  pledged 
themselves  not  to  conclude  a  separate  armistice  or 
peace  with  their  common  enemies. 

After  that  came  the  declaration  signed  at  Mos- 
cow on  October  30,  1913.  Here  the  four  nations 
who  are  carrying  and  must  carry  the  chief  burden 
of  defeating  their  enemies  renewed  their  determi- 
nation by  joint  action  to  aciiieve  this  end.  But 
they  went  further  than  this  and  pledged  coopera- 
tion with  one  another  to  establish  at  the  earliest 
practicable  date,  with  other  peace-loving  states,  an 
effective  international  organization  to  maintain 
peace  and  security,  which  in  principle  met  with 
overwhelming  non-partisan  approval  by  the  Con- 
gress in  the  Connally  and  Fulbright  resolutions. 

Further  steps  along  the  road  of  united  allied 
action  were  taken  at  the  conference  at  Cairo, 
where  the  President  and  Mr.  Churchill  met  with 
Ganeralissimo  Chiang  Kai-shek,  and  at  the  con- 
ference at  Tehran,  where  they  met  with  Marshal 
Stalin.  At  Tehran  the  three  Allies  fighting  in 
Europe  reached  complete  agreement  on  military 
plans  for  winning  the  war  and  made  plain  their 
determination  to  achieve  harmonious  action  in  the 
jjeriod  of  peace.  That  concert  among  the  Allies 
rests  on  broad  foundations  of  common  interests 


and  common  aspirations,  and  it  will  endure.  The' 
Tehran  declaration  made  it  clear  also  that  in  the 
tasks  of  peace  we  shall  welcome  the  cooperation 
and  active  participation  of  all  nations,  large  and 
small,  which  wish  to  enter  into  the  world  family  of 
democratic  nations. 

The  Cairo  declaration  as  to  the  Pacific  assured 
the  liquidation  of  Japan's  occupations  and  thefts 
of  territory  to  deprive  her  of  the  power  to  attack 
her  neighbors  again,  to  restore  Chinese  territories 
to  China,  and  freedom  to  the  people  of  Korea. 

No  one  knows  better  than  we  and  our  Allies  who 
iiave  signed  these  documents  that  they  did  not  and 
do  not  settle  all  questions  or  provide  a  formula  for 
the  settlement  of  all  questions  or  lay  down  a  de- 
tailed blueprint  for  the  future.  Any  man  of  ex- 
perience knows  that  an  attempt  to  do  this  would 
have  been  as  futile  as  it  would  have  been  foolish. 

There  has  been  discussion  recently  of  the  At- 
lantic Charter  and  of  its  application  to  various 
situations.  The  Charter  is  an  expression  of  funda- 
mental objectives  toward  which  we  and  our  Allies 
are  directing  our  policies.  It  states  that  the  na- 
tions accepting  it  are  not  fighting  for  the  sake  of 
aggrandizement,  territorial  or  otherwise.  It  lays 
down  the  common  principles  upon  which  rest  the 
hope  of  liberty,  economic  opportvinity,  peace,  and 
security  through  international  cooperation.  It  is 
not  a  code  of  law  from  which  detailed  answers  to 
every  question  can  be  distilled  by  painstaking 
analysis  of  its  words  and  phrases.  It  points  the 
direction  in  which  solutions  are  to  be  sought;  it 
does  not  give  solutions.  It  charts  the  course  upon 
which  we  are  embarked  and  shall  continue.  That 
course  includes  the  prevention  of  aggression  and 
the  establishment  of  world  security.  The  Charter 
certainly  does  not  prevent  any  steps,  including 
those  relating  to  enemy  states,  necessary  to  achieve 
these  objectives.  What  is  fundamental  are  the 
objectives  of  the  Charter  and  the  determination 
to  achieve  them. 

It  is  hardly  to  be  supposed  that  all  the  more 
than  30  boundary  questions  in  Europe  can  be  set- 
tled while  the  fighting  is  still  in  progress.  This 
does  not  mean  that  certain  questions  may  not  and 
should  not  in  the  meantime  be  settled  by  friendly 
conference  and  agreement.  We  are  at  all  times 
ready  to  further  an  understanding  and  settlement 
of  questions  which  may  arise  between  our  Allies, 


340 


DEPABTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


as  is  exemplified  by  our  offer  to  be  of  such  service 
to  Poland  and  the  Soviet  Union.  Our  offer  is  still 
open.  Our  policy  upon  these  matters,  as  upon  all 
others,  is  the  fundamental  necessity  for  agreed 
action  and  the  prevention  of  disunity  among  us. 

So  it  is  with  the  basic  conviction  that  we  must 
have  agreed  action  and  unity  of  action  that  we 
have  gone  to  work  upon  the  form  and  substance  of 
an  international  organization  to  maintain  peace 
and  prevent  aggression  and  upon  the  economic 
and  other  cooperative  arrangements  which  are 
necessary  in  order  that  we  maintain  our  position 
as  a  working  partner  with  other  free  nations.  All 
of  these  matters  are  in  different  stages  of  develop- 
ment. 

It  is  obvious,  of  course,  that  no  matter  how  bril- 
liant and  desirable  any  course  may  seem  it  is 
wholly  impracticable  and  impossible  unless  it  is  a 
course  which  finds  basic  accc])tance,  not  only  by 
our  Allies  but  by  the  people  of  this  country  and  by 
the  legislative  branch  of  this  Government,  which, 
under  our  Constitution,  shares  with  the  Executive 
power  and  responsibility  for  final  action. 

A  proposal  is  worse  than  useless  if  it  is  not  ac- 
ceptable to  those  nations  who  must  share  with  us 
the  responsibility  for  its  execution.  It  is  danger- 
ous for  us  and  misleading  to  them  if  in  the  final 
outcome  it  does  not  have  the  necessary  support  in 
this  country.  It  is,  therefore,  necessary  both 
abroad  and  at  home  not  to  proceed  by  presenting 
elaborate  proposals,  which  only  produce  diver- 
gence of  opinion  upon  details,  many  of  which  may 
be  immaterial.  The  only  practicable  coiu'se  is  to 
begin  by  obtaining  agreement,  first,  upon  broad 
principles,  setting  forth  direction  and  general 
policy.  We  must  then  go  on  to  explore  alterna- 
tive methods  and  finally  settle  upon  a  proposal 
■which  embodies  the  principal  elements  of  agree- 
ment and  leaves  to  future  experience  and  discus- 
sion those  matters  of  comparative  detail  which  at 
present  remain  in  the  realm  of  speculation. 

It  is  a  difficult  procedure  and  a  slow  procedure, 
as  the  time  wliich  has  been  required  to  work  out 
the  arrangements  for  such  a  universally  accepted 
objective  as  international  relief  makes  evident. 
It  is  a  procedure  in  which  misunderstanding,  the 
premature  hardening  of  positions,  and  unin- 
formed criticism  frequently  cause  months  of  de- 


lay and  endless  confusion,  sometimes  utter  frus- 
tration. It  is  a  procedure  in  which  the  people,  who 
are  sovereign,  must  not  only  educate  their  servants 
but  must  be  willing  to  be  educated  by  them. 

In  this  way  we  are  proceeding  with  the  matter 
of  an  international  organization  to  maintain  peace 
and  prevent  aggression.  Such  an  organization 
must  be  based  upon  firm  and  binding  obligations 
that  the  member  nations  will  not  use  force  against 
each  other  and  against  any  other  nation  except  in 
accordance  with  the  arrangements  made.  It  must 
provide  for  the  maintenance  of  adequate  forces  to 
preserve  pence  and  it  must  provide  the  institutions 
and  procedures  for  calling  this  force  into  action  to 
preserve  peace.  But  it  must  provide  more  than 
this.  It  must  provide  for  an  international  court 
for  the  development  and  application  of  law  to  the 
settlement  of  international  controversies  which 
fall  within  the  realm  of  law,  for  the  development 
of  machinery  for  adjusting  controversies  to  which 
the  field  of  law  has  not  yet  been  extended,  and  for 
other  institutions  for  the  development  of  new  rules 
to  keep  abreast  of  a  changing  world  with  new 
problems  and  new  interests. 

We  are  at  a  stage  where  much  of  the  work  of 
formulating  plans  for  the  organization  to  main- 
tain peace  has  been  accomplished.  It  is  right  and 
necessary  that  we  should  have  the  advice  and  help 
of  an  increasing  number  of  members  of  the  Con- 
gress. Accordingly,  I  have  requested  the  Chair- 
man of  the  Senate  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations 
to  designate  a  representative,  bipartisan  group  for 
'this  purpose.  Following  these  and  similar  dis- 
cussions with  members  of  the  House  of  Representa- 
tives, we  shall  be  in  a  position  to  go  forward  again 
with  other  nations  and,  upon  learning  their  views, 
be  able  to  submit  to  the  democratic  processes  of 
discussion  a  more  concrete  proposal. 

With  the  same  determination  to  achieve  agree- 
ment and  unity  we  talked  with  our  Allies  at  Tehran 
regarding  the  treatment  of  Nazi  Germany  and  with 
our  Allies  at  Cairo  regarding  the  treatment  which 
should  be  accorded  Japan.  In  the  formulation  of 
our  policy  toward  our  enemies  we  are  moved  both 
by  the  two  lessons  from  our  history  of  which  I 
have  spoken  and  by  the  third.  This  is  that  there 
can  be  no  compromise  with  Fascism  and  Nazism. 
It  must  go  everywhere.    Its  leaders,  its  insti- 


APRIL    15,    1944 


341 


tutions,  the  power  which  supports  it  must  go. 
They  can  expect  no  negotiated  peace,  no  compro- 
mise, no  opportunity  to  return.  Upon  that  this 
peoi:)le  and  this  Government  are  determined  and 
our  Allies  are  equally  determined.  We  have 
found  no  difference  of  opinion  among  our  Allies 
that  the  organization  and  purposes  of  the  Nazi 
state  and  its  Japanese  counterpart,  and  the  mili- 
tai-y  system  in  all  of  its  ramifications  upon  which 
thej'  rest,  are,  and  by  their  very  nature  must  be, 
directed  toward  conquest.  There  was  no  disagree- 
ment that  even  after  the  defeat  of  the  enemy  there 
will  be  no  security  unless  and  until  our  victory  is 
used  to  destroy  these  systems  to  their  very  founda- 
tion. The  action  which  must  be  taken  to  achieve 
these  ends  must  be,  as  I  have  said,  agreed  action. 
We  are  working  with  our  Allies  now  upon  these 
courses. 

The  conference  at  Moscow,  as  you  will  recall, 
established  the  European  Advisory  Commission, 
which  is  now  at  work  in  London  upon  the  treat- 
ment of  Germany.  Out  of  these  discussions  will 
come  back  to  the  governments  for  their  considera- 
tion proposals  for  concrete  action. 

Along  with  arrangements  by  which  nations  may 
be  secure  and  free  must  go  arrangements  by  which 
men  and  women  who  compose  those  nations  may 
live  and  have  the  opportunity  through  their  efforts 
to  improve  their  material  condition.  As  I  said 
earlier,  we  will  fail  indeed  if  we  win  a  victory  only 
to  let  the  free  peoples  of  this  world,  through  any 
absence  of  action  on  our  part,  sink  into  weakness 
and  despair. 

The  heart  of  the  matter  lies  in  action  which  will 
stimulate  and  expand  production  in  industry  and 
agriculture  and  free  international  commerce  from 
excessive  and  unreasonable  restrictions.  These  are 
the  essential  prerequisites  to  maintaining  and  im- 
proving the  standard  of  living  in  our  own  and  in 
all  countries.  Production  cannot  go  forward 
without  arrangements  to  provide  investment  capi- 
tal. Trade  cannot  be  conducted  without  stable  cur- 
rencies in  which  payments  can  be  promised  and 
made.  Trade  cannot  develop  unless  excessive 
barriers  in  the  form  of  tariffs,  preferences,  quotas, 
exchange  controls,  monopolies,  and  subsidies,  and 
others  are  reduced  or  eliminated.  It  needs  also 
agreed  arrangements  under  which  communication 

583484— 4t 2 


systems  between  nations  and  transport  by  air  and 
sea  can  develop.  And  much  of  all  this  will  miss  its 
mark  of  satisfying  human  needs  unless  we  take 
agreed  action  for  the  imj^rovement  of  labor  stand- 
ards and  standards  of  health  and  nutrition. 

I  shall  not  on  this  occasion  be  able  to  explain 
the  work  which  has  been  done — and  it  is  exten- 
sive— in  these  fields.  In  many  of  them  proposals 
are  far  advanced  toward  the  stage  of  discussion 
with  members  of  the  Congress  prior  to  formulation 
for  public  discussion. 

I  hope,  however,  that  I  have  been  able  in  some 
measure  to  bring  before  you  the  immensity  of  the 
task  which  lies  before  us  all,  the  nature  of  the  diffi- 
culties M'hich  are  involved,  and  the  conviction  and 
purpose  with  which  we  are  attacking  them.  Our 
foreign  policy  is  comprehensive,  is  stable,  and  is 
known  of  all  men.  As  the  President  has  said, 
neither  he  nor  I  have  made  or  will  make  any  secret 
agreement  or  commitment,  political  or  financial. 
The  officials  of  the  Government  have  not  been  un- 
mindful of  the  responsibility  resting  upon  them, 
nor  have  they  spared  either  energy  or  such  abili- 
ties as  they  possess  in  discharging  that  responsi- 
bility. 

May  I  close  with  a  word  as  to  the  responsibility 
which  rests  upon  us.  The  United  Nations  will  de- 
termine by  action  or  lack  of  action  whether  this 
world  will  be  visited  by  another  war  within  the 
next  20  or  25  years,  or  whether  policies  of  organ- 
ized peace  shall  guide  the  course  of  the  world.  We 
are  moving  closer  and  closer  to  the  hour  of  decision. 
Only  the  fullest  measure  of  wisdom,  unity,  and 
alertness  can  enable  us  to  meet  that  unprecedented 
responsibility. 

All  of  these  questions  of  foreign  policy  which,  as 
I  said  earlier,  is  the  matter  of  focusing  and  ex- 
pressing your  will  in  the  world  outside  our  bor- 
ders, are  difficult  and  often  involve  matters  of  con- 
troversy. Under  our  constitutional  system  the 
will  of  the  American  people  in  this  field  is  not 
effective  unless  it  is  united  will.  If  we  are  divided 
we  are  ineffective.  We  are  in  a  year  of  a  national 
election  in  which  it  is  easy  to  arouse  controversy 
on  almost  any  subject,  whether  or  not  the  subject  is 
an  issue  in  the  campaign.  You,  therefore,  as  well 
as  we  who  are  in  public  office,  bear  a  great  respon- 
sibility.   It  is  the  responsibility  of  avoiding  need- 


342 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


less  controversy  in  the  formulation  of  your  judg- 
ments. It  is  the  responsibility  for  sober  and  con- 
sidered thought  and  expression.  It  is  the  respon- 
sibility for  patience  both  with  our  Allies  and  with 
those  who  must  speak  for  you  with  them.    Once 


before  in  our  lifetime  we  fell  into  disunity  and 
became  ineffective  in  world  affairs  by  reason  of 
it.  Should  this  happen  again  it  will  be  a  tragedy 
to  you  and  to  your  children  and  to  the  world  for 
generations. 


FOREIGN  AFFAIRS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES   IN  WARTIME  AND  AFTER 
Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Long  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  April  12] 

It  is  with  a  solemn  understanding  of  the  sig- 
nificance of  this  meeting  and  of  the  forward-look- 
ing undertaking  of  this  post-war  forum  that  I 
address  this  gathering  tonight.  I  bring  the  best 
wishes  of  Secretary  Hull  and  give  expression  to 
his  hope  that  your  deliberations  will  be  highly 
productive — not  alone  in  the  nature  of  the  con- 
clusions to  which  you  may  come  but  in  the  success 
they  may  promise  for  the  realization  of  a  stable 
peace  and  for  a  better  world. 

It  is  a  jnatter  of  solid  encouragement  that  an 
organization  such  as  the  American  Federation  of 
Labor,  which  has  done  so  much  to  stimulate  the 
conscience  and  actions  of  mankind  in  behalf  of 
human  welfare  and  whicli  has  so  consistently 
recognized  that  the  human  element  is  not  a  simple 
matter  of  local  or  national  concern,  is  directing 
its  energies  toward  seeking  solutions  for  post-war 
problems. 

The  post-war  world  presents  in  prospect  many 
vistas  which  have  a  present  interest  and  which 
hold  forth  a  promise  of  political  stability  and  eco- 
nomic prosperity,  but  there  will  be  no  realization 
of  those  promises  unless  we  win  this  war — and 
win  it  comi^letely. 

Victory  in  this  war  cannot  be  reckoned  merely 
in  terms  of  a  successful  repulse  of  the  enemy. 
Our  victory  must  mean  complete  destruction  of 
Fascism  and  Nazism  and  the  obliteration  of  every 
vestige  of  the  vicious  movement  which  set  out  to 
destroy,  all  over  the  globe,  the  very  foundations 
of  freedom  and  democracy.  And  this  includes  the 
Axis  partner  Japan  and  its  brutal  attempts  at 
domination.  All  the  power  of  this  nation  is 
directed  to  that  end.  That  is  the  reason  the  full 
diplomatic  power  of  the  United  States  has  been 


and  must  remain  committed  to  support  in  every 
possible  way  the  armed  forces  in  attaining  their 
military  objectives,  to  the  end  that  the  enemy  may 
be  completely  overcojne  as  quickly  as  possible. 
Our  diplomatic  activity  is  to  be  judged  primarily 
by  the  standard  as  to  whether  it  will  be  of  maxi- 
mum effectiveness  in  winning  this  war  by  promot- 
ing Allied  cooperation  to  that  end.  Thereafter 
it  will  be  judged  by  the  measure  of  cooperation 
it  has  achieved  among  the  peacefully  inclined 
nations  of  the  world  and  the  success  it  may  achieve 
in  collaboration  with  them  in  laying  the  basis  for 
a  peace  of  political  security  and  economic  well- 
being. 

Of  fundamental  importance  in  such  an  under- 
taking as  the  waging  of  this  world-wide  war  is 
full  cooperation  among  our  Allies;  and  that  has 
been  a  primary  objective  of  the  wartime  foreign 
policy  of  the  United  States.  Through  our  diplo- 
matic activity  we  have  developed  a  very  close  and 
satisfying  cooperation  with  our  Allies  against  the 
connnon  eneniy.  That  does  not  mean  that  we 
have  each  seen  each  detail  with  the  same  eye  but 
it  does  mean  that  we  work  and  fight  in  unison, 
that  we  are  united  on  all-important  policy,  and 
that  we  are  all  determined  to  fight  it  through  to 
complete  victory. 

Occasional  instances  in  the  kaleidoscopic 
changes  of  events,  in  which  in  some  detail  there 
may  not  have  been  full  concert  of  action  between 
great  allies,  have  been  fully  discussed  in  public, 
while  the  continuing  coordination  and  cordial  co- 
operation in  the  common  effort,  which  is  the  basic 
fact,  is  frequently  overlooked  even  though  it  be 

'  Delivered  before  the  American  Federation  of  Labor 
Forum  on  Labor  and  the  Post-war  World,  New  York,  N.Y., 
Apr.  12,  1944. 


APRIL    15,    1944 


343 


essential  to  victory.  No  one  supposes  that  by  sign- 
ing  the  Atlantic  Charter,  the  Declaration  of  the 
United  Nations,  and  the  Moscow  Declaration  the 
signatories  disposed  of  all  the  details  of  their  mul- 
tiple relationships.  The  important  fact  is,  how- 
ever, that  they  are  in  harmony  as  to  their  general 
objectives  and  agreed  on  as  to  how  to  achieve  them. 
It  is  easy,  particularly  under  the  stress  and  worry 
of  wartime  conditions,  to  magnify  some  problems 
out  of  all  proportion  to  their  real  merit  in  relation 
to  the  attainment  of  military  success. 

We  are  approaching  the  time  when  the  Allied 
military  operations  against  Nazi  Germany  will 
bring  about  the  liberation  of  those  nations  which 
have  been  so  long  and  so  tragically  under  its  brutal 
domination.  We  shall  carry  with  us  into  those 
ravaged  territories  our  deep  and  abiding  interest 
in  the  restoration  of  individual  liberty;  of  popular 
institutions  of  government ;  of  freedom  of  worship, 
of  speech,  and  of  the  press;  of  right  of  assembly; 
and  of  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  free  peoples. 
In  keeping  with  the  provisions  of  the  Atlantic 
Charter  and  in  line  with  our  own  devotion  to 
democratic  principles  we  intend  to  take  no  action 
which  will  in  any  way  interfere  with  the  free  and 
untrammeled  choice  by  these  nations  of  the  offi- 
cials and  the  govei'nments  under  whose  authority 
they  wish  to  live.  We  will  not  permit  the  armed 
forces  of  this  country  to  be  used  for  the  support  of 
any  group  or  any  government  contrary  to  the  will 
of  the  people.  We  intend  to  do  everytliing  we  can 
toward  encouraging  and  assisting  these  liberated 
nations  to  shape  their  own  destinies  and  to  develop 
their  own  way  of  life.  We  intend  to  make  our 
contribution  toward  aiding  them  to  recover  from 
the  political,  moral,  and  economic  prostration  into 
which  they  have  been  plunged  by  the  ruthless 
enemy. 

For  effective  prosecution  of  the  war  there  is  need 
that  all  peoples  now  submerged  under  Axis  inva- 
sion use  all  their  energies  to  resist  the  invaders  and 
thus  speed  the  day  of  their  own  liberation.  Inter- 
nal political  controversies  inevitably  weaken  the 
war  effort.  We  have  consistently  urged  that  they 
not  be  permitted  to  impair  the  war  effort. 

Such  a  situation,  for  example,  has  existed  in 
Yugoslavia.  Even  beneath  the  heel  of  Axis  occu- 
pation that  country,  formed  of  many  races,  has 


fallen  into  divided  councils.  These  divisions  have 
seemed  to  us  tragic  in  themselves  and  calculated 
only  to  benefit  the  common  Nazi  enemy.  Our  pol- 
icy has  been  to  endeavor  to  bring  these  elements 
into  sufficient  harmony  so  that  they  can  make  a 
common  front  against  a  connnon  enemy.  We  are, 
meanwhile,  cooperating  in  furnishing  arras  and 
supplies  to  all  Yugoslavs  who  are  fighting  the 
Germans. 

A  similar  tragedy  almost  occurred  in  Greece. 
Happily  it  was  averted  by  common  effort  of  the 
Allies.  The  differences  have,  for  the  time  being, 
been  composed.  Political  questions  have  been  set 
aside  for  orderly  solution  when  time  permits,  and 
energies  are  pooled  for  the  common  struggle. 

Sometimes  the  objective  is  not  achieved.  Fin- 
land is  a  case  in  point.  Finland,  an  ally  of  Nazi 
Germany,  seems  unfortunately  to  be  choosing  a 
course  of  action  very  different  from  what  we  de- 
sire. We  have  made  every  effort  to  induce  Finland 
to  terminate  her  ill-chosen  association  with  Ger- 
many. We  have  emphasized  to  her  the  conse- 
quences which  must  flow  from  a  continued  partici- 
pation in  the  war  on  the  side  of  the  enemy.  We 
luive  repeatedly  made  clear  to  her  that  responsi- 
bility for  the  consequences  of  continuing  her  asso- 
ciation with  Nazi  Germany  must  rest  solely  on  the 
Finnish  Government,  just  as,  in  the  case  of  Ger- 
many's other  satellites,  the  responsibility  for  re- 
maining in  the  war  on  the  side  of  our  principal 
enemy  nuist  rest  solely  on  them. 

The  American  people  need  have  no  fear  that  the 
American  point  of  view  is  not  being  vigorously 
and  effectively  presented  on  every  occasion  where 
our  immediate  or  long-range  interests  are  involved. 
These  problems  ai'e  solved,  in  consultation  with 
our  Allies,  in  accord  with  the  controlling  purpose 
of  unity  in  the  war  effort  and  in  keeping  with  the 
fundamental  principles  of  democratic  philosophy. 

The  diplomatic  power  of  the  United  States  is  the 
servant  of  American  foreign  policy.  There  is  an 
inclination  to  confuse  the  two — but  they  should  be 
distinguished.  Diplomatic  activity  is  particular 
action  taken  in  the  application  of  foreign  policy  to 
a  specific  situation,  while  foreign  policy  itself  is 
general  in  character. 

American  foreign  policy  is  a  composite  of  many 
factors  and  influences.     The  principles  of  social 


344 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


justice,  individual  liberty,  orderly  democratic  gov- 
ernment, and  fair  play  which  compose  our  ]^x)litical 
philosophy  are  the  spirit  of  that  policy.  These  and 
other  principles  well  known  to  every  American  are 
part  of  our  foreign  policy  because  they  are  a  part 
of  America.  Whatever  else  it  contains,  it  must 
always  reflect  the  doctrines,  philosophies,  aspira- 
tions, and  practices  of  the  American  people. 

Our  success  in  the  working  out  of  these  princi- 
ples will,  of  course,  vary  with  time,  place,  and  the 
exigencies  of  military  necessity.  However,  this 
Government  will  give  representation  abroad  to  the 
ideals  of  America  and,  within  the  limits  of  the 
principle  of  self-determination,  encourage  demo- 
cratic practices  in  liberated  countries. 

I  have  emphasized  the  dominant  part  that  the 
war  and  its  winning  must  pluy  in  the  application 
of  our  current  foreign  policy.  But,  essential  as  is 
the  total  defeat  of  the  Axis,  that  is  not  and  can- 
not be  the  sole  great  objective.  There  are  two 
others  with  which  American  foreign  policy  must 
be  concerned — the  prevention  of  future  wars  and 
the  promotion  of  conditions  which  will  permit  our 
people  to  attain  the  greatest  possible  measure  of 
economic  well-being. 

I  should  like  to  speak  briefly  of  our  preparations 
for  the  future  in  these  two  broad  fields,  of  the 
establishment  of  an  effective  system  of  interna- 
tional peace  and  security,  and  of  the  creation  of 
conditions  and  agencies  for  the  propiotion  of 
economic  and  social  welfare. 

For  some  time  the  Department  of  State,  in 
cooperation  with  other  agencies  of  the  Govern- 
ment, in  collaboration  with  individual  members 
of  the  Congress,  and  in  consultation  with  indi- 
viduals of  experience  in  private  life,  has  been 
engaged  in  studying  these  questions  and  in  formu- 
lating the  bases  for  constructive  programs  of 
action. 

A  thorough  analysis  of  the  mistakes  of  the  un- 
happy past,  a  study  of  current  developments,  and 
an  examination  of  future  possibilities  have  led  us 
to  the  following  conclusions  as  regards  some  of 
the  basic  problems  involved  in  the  future  preven- 
tion of  aggression  and  war : 

1.  The  major  nations  together  with  the  other 
law-abiding  states  should  create  an  international 


organization  for  the  maintenance  of  peace  and 
security. 

2.  The  major  nations — and  in  due  course  all 
nations — should  pledge  themselves  not  to  use  force 
against  each  other  or  against  any  other  nation, 
except  on  the  basis  of  arrangements  made  in  con- 
nection with  such  an  international  organization. 

3.  Each  of  the  major  nations,  and  any  other 
nations  to  be  agreed  upon,  should  accept  special 
responsibility  for  maintaining  adequate  forces  and 
for  using  such  forces,  on  the  basis  of  arrangements 
made  in  connection  with  the  international  organi- 
zation, to  prevent  or  suppress  all  disturbances  of 
the  peace. 

Our  basic  thought  is  that  a  general  international 
organization  of  sovereign  nations,  having  for  its 
primary  objective  the  maintenance  of  peace  and 
security,  should  comj^rise  effective  agencies  and 
arrangements  for  the  pacific  settlement  of  inter- 
national controversies,  for  joint  use  of  force  to 
suppress  disturbances  of  the  peace,  and  for  foster- 
ing cooperative  effort  among  nations  for  the  pro- 
gressive improvement  of  the  general  welfare. 
The  organization  should  at  the  outset  provide  the 
indispensable  minimum  of  machinery  of  action 
and  should  be  expected  to  develop  and  grow  as 
time  goes  on  and  as  circumstances  may  indicate 
to  be  wise.  It  is  clear  that  there  must  be  some 
general  body  on  which  all  member  states  will  be 
equally  represented  to  serve  as  a  world  assembly 
of  nations.  There  must  be  a  court  of  international 
justice.  And  there  must  be  a  small  body  or  coun- 
cil, representative  of  the  large  and  small  nations, 
endowed  with  adequate  powers  and  means  to 
arrange  for  maintaining  the  peace. 

The  step  in  the  direction  of  creating  an  effective 
general  international  organization  was  taken  at 
Moscow.  The  four-nation  declaration  signed 
there  constitutes  a  solemn  declaration  of  intention 
on  the  part  of  the  four  major  countries  to  act  in 
common  for  the  preservation  of  peace  and  security 
and  to  take  the  lead  in  the  establishment  of  a 
permanent  international  organization  for  this 
basic  purpose.  The  next  step  had  to  be  a  joint 
examination  of  the  problems  involved  in  setting 
up  such  an  organization. 

Our  studies  in  preparation  for  discussion  with 
other  governmenis,  which  were  well  advanced  be- 


APRIL    15,    1944 


345 


fore  the  Moscow  Conference,  have  been  intensively 
carried  forward  since.  They  have  involved  a  care- 
ful examination  of  the  various  alternatives  with 
respect  to  the  structure,  powers,  and  procedures  of 
an  international  organization.  They  have  in- 
volved also  an  examination  of  our  constitutional 
processes  as  regards  participation  by  this  country 
in  the  creation  and  functioning  of  such  an  organi- 
zation, including  especially  the  providing  of  armed 
forces  for  international  action. 

The  next  step  involves  additional  conferences 
with  representatives  of  both  parties  in  the  Con- 
gress and  thereafter  a  full  exchange  of  views  with  / 
other  governments  and,  in  accordance  with  our 
constitutional  provisions,  discussions  at  home — 
all  looking  toward  an  agreed  proposal  for  an  ef- 
fective international  security  organization. 

At  the  same  time  our  thoughts  have  been  on 
the  other  related  question — that  of  economic 
security. 

International  cooperation  is  as  important  in  one 
field  as  in  the  other.  This  is  not  the  occasion  to 
undertake  an  extensive  discussion  of  the  broad 
question  of  economic  collaboration,  but  I  do  wish 
to  stress  the  need  for  collaboration  in  this  field 
as  well. 

Events  have  lifted  one  fundamental  aspect  out 
of  the  realm  of  speculation  and  controversy.  The 
economic  interdependence  of  nations  is  no  longer 
a  theory  but  a  well-substantiated  fact.  The  eco- 
nomic and  social  policies  of  one  nation  exercise  in- 
fluence on  the  economic  and  social  conditions  of 
other  countries.  This  phenomenon  of  interna- 
tional relations  leads  to  one  basic  conclusion :  na- 
tional and  international  economic  policies  should 
be  formulated  with  a  recognition  of  the  basic  and 
permanent  interests  of  all  peoples.  These  policies 
should  be  designed  to  promote,  as  widely  as  possi- 
ble, full  and  productive  employment  under  con- 
ditions favorable  to  the  physical  and  moral  well- 
being  of  the  worker. 

Under  present-day  conditions,  all  nations  are 
vitally  dependent  on  each  other  as  regards  their 
economic  and  social  well-being.  The  .state  of  em- 
ployment, distribution,  and  living  conditions  in 
our  country  and  in  every  other  country  are  mutu- 
ally interdependent.  Hence  the  welfare  of  every 
country  requires  the  greatest  practical  measure  of 


collaboration  between  nations  on  policies  affecting 
the  production,  distribution,  and  use  of  the  world's 
goods  and  resoui'fces.  I  need  hardly  underscore 
the  fact  that  no  group  has  a  larger  stake  in  both 
the  economic  and  social-security  aspects  of  post- 
war economic  cooperation  than  has  labor.  The 
reduction  of  the  barriers  to  an  expansion  of  mutu- 
ally profitable  trade  after  the  war  will  be  needed 
in  order  to  open  opportunities  for  work  for  mil- 
lions now  employed  in  war  production  and  millions 
now  serving  in  our  armed  forces. 

In  the  field  of  international  cooperation  dir'ectly 
affecting  the  interests  and  problems  of  labor,  we 
are  fortunate  in  already  having  an  international 
organization  with  25  years  of  experience — the 
International  Labor  Organization.  In  this  field 
we  do  not  have  to  wait  for  the  establishment  of  a 
suitable  vehicle. 

A  few  of  those  present  tonight,  working  and 
planning  with  others,  assumed  responsibility  in 
the  movement  which  led  to  its  establishment.  I 
refer  to  Mr.  William  Green,  Mr.  Matthew  Woll, 
and  to  Prof.  James  T.  Shotwell,  who  was  not  only 
collaborator  in  the  movement  but  its  historian  as 
well.  And  yet  another  in  that  group  also  here 
tonight  is  the  distinguished  Minister  of  Great 
Britain,  Mr.  Harold  Butler.  Without  the  unre- 
mitting labors  of  these  able  and  forward-looking 
men — always  remembering  as  one  of  the  leaders 
of  the  whole  group,  the  late  Samuel  Gompers — 
without  them  there  plight  not  be  an  I.L.O. 

But  there  is !  And  it  is  fitting  in  this  connection 
to  recall  that  one  of  the  most  important  steps — if 
not  the  most  important— which  this  country  took 
during  the  inter-war  period  toward  assuming  its 
rightful  place  as  an  active  member  of  organized 
international  society  was  taken  in  1934  when  Presi- 
dent Roosevelt,  pursuant  to  a  joint  resolution  of 
the  Congress,  accepted  membership  for  us  in  the 
I.L.O.  It  is  commonly  acknowledged  today  that 
the  establishment  of  that  organization  marked  one 
of  the  truly  significant  milestones  in  the  history  of 
a  social  progress. 

It  has  a  value  today  of  particular  importance, 
when  some  persons  are  skeptical  about  the  possibil- 
ities of  world  peace  through  international  organi- 
zation. I  suggest  that  such  persons  study  the 
history  of  the  I.L.O.     At  the  time  of  its  inception 


346 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


there  was  hunger,  miaery,  and  serious  disorder 
throughout  Europe.  President  Roosevelt,  refer- 
ring to  its  origin,  said  of  it  later,  "To  many  it  was 
a  wild  dream."  The  dream,  carrying  hope  to 
those  who  could  hope,  has  justified  the  confidence 
of  its  founders  and  become  an  outstanding  demon- 
stration of  the  effectiveness  of  men  of  many  na- 
tions, when  determined  to  do  so,  to  work  together 
for  the  good  of  all.  It  is  an  inspiration  to  those 
■who  believe  that  the  mind  and  heart  of  man  can 
solve  the  problems  of  mankind. 

ADHERENCE  BY  LIBERIA  TO  THE  DECLARA- 
TION BY  UNITED  NATIONS 

[Released  to  tbe  press  April  10] 

The  Liberian  Consul  General  in  New  York,  the 
Honorable  Walter  F.  Walker,  acting  on  behalf  of 
the  Government  of  Liberia,  signed  on  April  10, 
1944  in  the  Department  of  State  the  Declaration 
by  United  Nations.  The  texts  of  communications 
exchanged  between  Secretary  of  State  Hull  and  the 
Secretary  of  State  of  Liberia,  His  Excellency 
Gabriel  S.  Dennis,  regarding  Liberia's  adherence 
to  the  Declaration  follow: 

26th  February,  1944. 
Your  Excellency, 

The  Government  of  Liberia  declared  by  Procla- 
mation on  the  27th  day  of  January  1944,  a  state  of 
war  existing  between  Liberia  on  the  one  hand,  and 
Germany  and  Japan  on  the  other.  Motivated  by 
the  principles  of  human  freedom  and  the  right  of 
self-determination,  the  Government  subscribes  and 
endorses  the  purposes  and  principles  as  enunciated 
by,  and  embodied  in,  the  Joint  Declaration  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
Prime  Minister  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great 
Britain  and  Northern  Ireland,  dated  August  14, 
1941,  known  as  the  Atlantic  Charter,  and  adheres 
by  this  communication  to  the  Declaration  by 
L'nited  Nations,  dated  January  1,  1942. 

The  Honourable  Walter  F.  Walker,  Consul- 
General  of  Liberia  at  New  York  City,  has  been 
authorized  to  sign  the  above  mentioned  Decla- 
ration. 

Be  pleased  to  accept  [etc.] 

Gabriel  S.  Dennis 


April  6,  1944. 

I  have  received  your  communication  of  Feb- 
ruary 26,  1944,  stating  that  the  Government  of 
Liberia  declared  by  proclamation  on  January  27, 
1944  a  state  of  war  existing  between  Liberia  on  the 
one  hand  and  Germany  and  Japan  on  the  other; 
that  motivated  by  the  principles  of  human  freedom 
and  the  right  of  self-determination,  the  Govern- 
ment subscribes  to  and  endorses  the  purposes  and 
principles  of  the  Atlantic  Charter;  that  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Liberia  adheres  to  the  Declaration  by 
United  Nations  and  has  authorized  Walter  F. 
Walker,  Consul  General  at  New  York  City,  to  sign 
the  Declaration. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States,  as  de- 
pository for  the  Declaration,  is  gratified  to  wel- 
come Liberia  into  the  ranks  of  the  United  Nations. 
This  action  of  Liberia  brings  to  thirty-five  the 
number  of  L^nited  Nations,  all  of  which  have 
pledged  themselves  to  employ  their  full  resources 
in  the  struggle  for  victory  over  Hitlerism. 

Arrangements  are  being  made  for  Consul  Gen- 
eral Walker  to  sign  the  Declaration. 

Please  accept  [etc.] 

Cordell  Hull 

PETROLEUM  QUESTIONS 

Preliminary  Discussions  by  the  United  States 
and  the  United  Kingdom 

[Released  to  the  press  .\pril  11] 

The  group  of  experts  who  will  conduct  for  the 

Government  of  the  United  States  the  preliminary 

exploratory  discussions  with  tlie  Government  of 

the  United  Kingdom  on  oil  will  be  composed  of 

.the  following  persons: 

Mr.  Charles  Rayner,  Petroleum  Adviser,  Department  of 
State,  chairman 

Mr.  Ralph  K.  Davies,  Deputy  Petroleum  Administrator  for 
War,  i-ice  chairman 

Mr.  Paul  Ailing,  Deputy  Director,  Office  of  Near  Eastern 
and  African  Affair.s,  Department  of  State 

Mr.  Leroy  Stineliower,  Adviser,  Office  of  Economic  Affairs, 
Department  of  State 

Mr.  George  Walden,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Deputy  Pe- 
troleum Administrator  for  War 

Mr.  C.  S.  Snodgrass,  Director,  Foreign  Refining  Division, 
Petroleum  Administration  for  War 

Brig.  Gen.  Howard  Peckham,  War  Department 

Com.  A.  V.  Carter,  Navy  Department 


APRIL    15,    19  14 


347 


The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
7,  1944,^  tliat  these  discussions  would  take  place. 
The  membership  of  the  group  of  experts  who  will 
conduct  the  discussions  for  the  Government  of  the 
United  Kingdom  was  announced  on  April  3, 1944.- 

[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
13,  1944,  that  the  Senate's  Special  Committee  on 
Petroleum  will  be  kept  informed  regarding  the 
course  of  the  preliminary  exploratory  discussions 
with  the  United  Kingdom  on  oil  which  are  ex- 
pected to  begin  about  April  17. 

Moreover,  in  order  that  the  views  of  the  Ameri- 
can oil  industry  regarding  problems  that  may 
arise  in  the  discussions  may  be  taken  into  account, 
representatives  drawn  from  various  sections  of  the 
industry  have  been  invited  to  meet  with  the  group 
of  experts  who  will  conduct  the  oil  discussions  for 
the  United  States  Government.  In  this  connec- 
tion, invitations  have  been  issued  to  the  following 
persons : 

W.  R.  Boyd,  Washington,  D.C. 
John  A.  Brown,  New  York,  N.Y. 
H.  D.  Collier,  San  Francisco,  Calif. 
J.  Frank  Drake,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 
Orville  Harden,  New  York,  N.Y. 
George  A.  Hill,  Houston,  Tex. 
A.  Jacobson,  New  York,  N.Y. 
W.  Alton  Jones,  Los  Angele.s,  Calif. 
W.  S.  S.  Rodgers,  New  York,  N.Y. 
Ralph  T.  Zook,  Bradford,  Pa. 

PRESENTATION  OF  SOVIET  AWARDS  TO 
MEMBERS  OF  THE  AMERICAN  ARMED 
FORCES  AND  MERCHANT  MARINE 

[Released  to  the  press  .\pril  11] 

In  a  ceremony  held  on  April  11,  1944,  in  the 
Chinese  Room  of  the  Mayflower  Hotel  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  received  on  behalf  of  the  American 
Government  from  the  Ambassador  of  the  Union 
of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  Mr.  Andrei  A. 
Gromyko,  a  number  of  decorations  which  the 
Soviet  Government  has  awarded  to  members  of 
the  American  armed  forces  and  merchant  marine. 


"  Bulletin  of  Mar.  11,  1044,  p.  238. 
-  Bulletin  of  Apr.  8,  1044,  p.  31.5. 


There  follows  a  list  of  officers  and  men  receiving 
decorations. 

United  States  Army 

Obdeb  of  Suvorov,  first  degree 

Gen.  Dwight  D.  Eisenhower 
Order  of  Suvorov,  second  degree 

Lt.  Gen.  Carl  Spaatz 
Ordeh  of  Suvorov,  third  degree 

Maj.  Gen.  Frederick  L.  Anderson 

Lt.  Oil.  Samuel  g.  Graham,  Inf. 
Order  of  Kutuzov,  second  degree 

Lt.  Gen.  Ira  Eaker 
Order  of  Kutuzov,  third  degree 

Col.  Frederick  W.  Castle,  A.C. 

Lt.  Col.  William  O.  Darliy,  F.A. 
Order  op  .\lex.vnuer  Ne\'skt 

Maj.  William  T.  Boren,  A.C. 

Maj.  William  L.  Leverette,  A.C. 

1st  Lt.  William  W.  Kellogg,  C.E. 
OEDiai  OF  Pateiotio  War,  first  degree 

Brig.  Gen.  Curtis  E.  Hemay 

Col.  Arman  Peterson,  A.C. 

Staff  Sgt.  John  D.  Coffee,  Inf. 
Order  of  Patriotic  War,  second  degree 

Col.  Joseph  J.  Preston,  A.C. 

Col.  Russell  A.  Wilson,  A.C. 

1st  Lt.  David  M.  Williams,  A.C. 

Tech.  Sgt.  Edward  J.  Leary,  A.C. 

Cpl.  James  D.  Slaton,  Inf. 

Pfc.  Ramon  G.  Gutierrez,  Inf. 
Order  of  the  Red  Star 

Col.  Arthur  G.  Salisbury,  A.C. 

1st  Lt.  Edwin  F.  Gould,  F.A. 

Master  Sgt.  James  L.  Kemp,  S.C. 

Staff  Sgt.  James  R.  Fields,  A.C. 

Staff  Sgt.  Robert  D.  Sterevich,  A.C. 

Staff  Sgt.  Emery  B.  Hutchings,  A.C. 

Staff  Sgt.  William  A.  Krause,  A.C. 

United  States  Navy 

Order  of  Suvorov,  second  degree 

Rear  Admiral  Robert  C.  Giffen 
Order  of  Suvorov,  third  degree 

Capt.  Norman  C.  Gillette 
Order  of  Kutuzov,  first  degree 

Vice  Admiral  Henry  K.  Hewitt 
Order  of  Kutuzov,  second  degree 

Rear  Admiral  Harry  W.  Hill 
Ordbh  of  Kutuzov,  third  degree 

Capt.  Howard  E.  Orem 
Order  of  Albsander  Nevsky 

Capt.  Don  P.  Moon 
Order  of  Patriotic  War.  first  degree 

Lt.  Ralph  E.  Boticher 

Lt.  (j.  g. )  Jeremiah  E.  Mahoney 


348 


DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE   BULLETIN 


Oeder  of  Patmotic  War,  second  degree 

Hugh  P.  Wriglit,  gunner's  mate,  third  class 
Ward  L.  Gemnier,  lidntswain's  mate,  second  class 

Ordbk  of  the  Red  St^mi 
Lt.  Rufus  T.  Brum 
Lt.  John  Li.  Laird 
Lt.  (j.g.)  George  B.  Lennig 
George  J.  Norton,  gunner's  mate,  second  class 
Lloyd  R.  Weeks,  gunner's  mate,  third  class 
Albert  F.  Wohlers,  coxswain 

United  States  Merehant  Marine 

Red  Star  Awards 

Alexander  S.  Henry,  nraster  mariner 

Clyde  Neil  Andrews,  second  mate 

Edward  Michael  Fetherston,  third  mate 

Maurice  Breen,  purser 
Medal  for  Valob  Awards 

K.  V.  Johnson,  ordinary  seaman 

Frank  F.  Townsend,  chief  engineer 

J.  W.  Lintlom,  master  mariner 
Medal  for  Bravery  im  Action 

Harry  F.  Rjan,  master  mariner 

R.  E.  Hocken,  master  mariner 

Raymond  P.  Hi)lubfiwicz,  cadet-midshipman 

[Released  to  the  press  April  11] 

The  remarks  of  the  Soviet  Ambassador  at  the 
ceremony  for  the  presentation  of  Soviet  awards 
to  members  of  the  American  ai'med  forces  and 
merchant  marine  follow : 

Mr.  Secretary  :  I  am  vei'y  happy  to  present  to 
you  today  the  orders  and  medals  awarded  by  the 
Soviet  Government  to  members  of  the  armed 
forces  and  merchant  marine  of  the  United  States 
of  America.  The  Soviet  Government  presented 
these  decorations  to  26  representatives  of  the 
Army,  16  representatives  of  the  Navy,  and  10  rep- 
resentatives of  the  merchant  marine  of  the  United 
States  for  their  outstanding  services  in  the  strug- 
gle  against  our  common  enemy — Hitlerite  Ger- 
many. These  awards  furthermore  express  the 
friendly  feelings  of  the  Soviet  people  toward  the 
people  of  the  United  States. 

Both  our  countries  are  waging  the  struggle 
against  our  common  enemy,  Hitlerite  Germany, 
and  its  satellites  in  Europe.  For  almost  three 
years  the  Red  Ar.my  has  conducted  a  life-and- 
death  struggle  against  the  crafty  enemy.  Strain- 
ing all  its  forces  and  supjiorted  by  the  whole 
Soviet  people,  our  Army  not  only  stopped  the 


enemy  but  inflicted  a  number  of  serious  defeats 
upon  him  which  predetermined  the  inevitability 
of  his  final  i-out.  At  the  present  time  the  armies 
of  the  Soviet  Union  successfully  continue  ridding 
Soviet  soil  of  enemy  troops. 

Although  my  country  still  carries  the  main 
burden  of  military  efforts  and  sacrifices,  its  peoples 
mark  with  satisfaction  the  steadily  gi'owing  role 
and  importance  of  the  armed  forces  of  the  friendly 
American  people  in  this  struggle.  American 
troops,  and  troops  of  our  common  ally.  Great 
Britain,  have  struck  the  enemy  a  nmnber  of  serious 
blows  in  the  Mediterranean  theater  of  war  and  in 
the  south  of  Italy. 

American  fliers  have  been  and  are  successfully 
bombing  military  objectives  in  Fascist  Germany. 

I  am  particularly  haijpy  that  among  those  dec- 
orated by  my  Government  is  General  Eisenhower, 
who  receives  the  highest  award  of  the  Soviet 
Union — the  Order  of  Suvorov  of  the  First  Degree. 

I  am  much  pleased  also  that  those  receiving  high 
awards  include  such  outstanding  representatives 
of  the  armed  forces  of  the  United  States  as  Lieu- 
tenant General  Spaatz,  Lieutenant  General  Eaker, 
Vice  Admiral  Hewitt,  and  other  ranking  officers. 

I  have  good  reason  to  be  confident  that  the 
courage  and  skill  shown  in  the  past  by  those  who 
have  been  awarded  decorations  will  be  multiplied 
by  the  American  armed  forces  in  the  forthcoming 
decisive  battles  against  the  hated  enemy,  in  which 
American  officers,  soldiers,  and  seamen  will  dem- 
onstrate their  self-sacrifice  and  courage.  These 
battles  must  and  cannot  fail  to  lead  to  the  final  rout 
of  the  enemy  forces,  to  the  hastening  of  the  com- 
plete liberation  of  Europe  from  Hitlerite  bar- 
barism, to  the  elimination  of  the  fascist  menace 
forever.  The  peoples  of  our  two  countries,  and 
those  of  all  the  United  Nations,  have  no  doubts 
that  the  joint  efforts  of  the  Allies  will  bring  final 
defeat  to  the  enemy.  They  have  no  doubts  that 
victory  will  be  ours. 

Permit  me,  Mr.  Secretary,  on  behalf  of  my  Gov- 
ernment, to  convey  through  you  to  the  members 
of  the  United  States  Army,  Navy,  and  merchant 
marine  decorated  by  the  Soviet  Government  my 
sincere  congratulations  and  wishes  for  success  in 
tiieir  future  activities  in  the  struggle  against  the 
enemy. 


APRIL    15,    1944 


349 


The  remarks  of  the  Secretary  of  State  in  reply 
to  Ambassador  Gromyko  follow  : 

In  the  name  of  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  I  wish  to  express  to  you,  Mr.  Ambassador, 
and  to  your  Government  my  great  appreciation 
for  the  high  honor  shown  to  the  United  States  and 
to  the  members  of  its  Army,  Navy,  and  merchant 
marine  by  the  award  of  these  decorations.  I  also 
wish  to  thank  j-ou  for  the  friendly  sentiments 
which  3'ou  have  expressed. 

As  j'ou  know,  the  officers  and  men  to  whom  these 
decorations  are  destined  are  not  able  to  be  present 
today  because  they  are  on  active  duty  on  various 
fields  of  battle,  either  engaged  in  the  relentless 


struggle  against  our  common  enemy,  Nazi  Ger- 
many, or  carrying  on  that  no  less  important 
activity — the  transportation  of  supplies  to  our 
armies  and  to  those  of  our  Allies. 

These  men  will  receive  with  pride  and  gratitude 
the  honor  shown  them  by  the  Soviet  Government 
and  will  be  inspired  to  carry  on  with  increased 
vigor  their  contributions  to  our  final  victory. 

The  American  people,  I  am  sure,  greatly  ap- 
preciate this  tribute  to  the  bravery  and  ability  of 
our  officers  and  men  from  the  Soviet  Union,  whose 
armed  forces  are  daily  offering  an  inspiration  to  all 
freedom-loving  people  by  new  and  decisive 
victories. 


American  Republics 


PAN  AMERICAN  DAY 

Address  by  the  Secretary  of  State  ^  ' 


[Released  to  the  press  April  14] 

Pan  American  Day  is  an  important  anniversary 
to  the  nations  of  the  Americas.  We  meet  today 
to  honor  tliose  whose  vision  and  energy  established 
and  for  more  than  50  years  have  carried  forward 
the  Pan  American  Union  and  all  that  it  signifies. 
It  is  well  to  ask  ourselves  why  it  is  that  we  can 
meet  in  the  midst  of  the  greatest  war  of  history 
and  why  it  is  that  we  have  so  great  an  achieve- 
ment to  coimnemorate.  For  in  doing  so  we  may 
more  clearly  see  the  giiideposts  which  point  the 
true  direction  in  which  we  may  go  forward  to  new 
cooperation  among  ourselves  ajid  new  cooperation 
with  other  nations  of  the  earth. 

Inter-American  unity  was  not' brought  about  by 
force  and  is  not  based  upon  the  conception  of  a 
master  race  whose  mission  is  to  rule.  It  was  not 
produced  by  nations  witli  a  homogeneous  racial 
origin.  It  does  not  depend  upon  the  bonds  of  a 
common  language  or  a  culture  based  on  a  common 
literature  or  common  customs  and  habits. 

Were  these  the  only  sources  of  international 
unity  and  common  action,  the  future  for  the  world 
would  be  dark  indeed.    But  inter- American  miity 

583484 — 44 3 


proves  that  theie  are  other  sources  more  subtle  and 
even  stronger — ^sources  which  offer  hope  to  a  world 
which  can  find  no  hope  in  the  factors  which  I  have 
mentioned.  Our  unity  comes  from  a  passionate 
devotion  to  human  liberty  and  national  independ- 
ence which  is  so  strong  that  it  does  not  stop  with 
the  effort  of  each  jDCople  to  secure  liberty  for  itself 
but  goes  on  to  respect  as  no  less  valid  the  desire  of 
other  peoples  to  achieve  the  same  liberty  in  accord- 
ance with  their  own  traditions  and  historic  insti- 
tutions. Although  the  language  of  Bolivar  and 
San  Martin  was  different  from  that  of  Washing- 
ton and  Jefferson,  they  were  expressing  the  same 
purposes  and  principles,  and  they  led  their  coun- 
trymen along  tlie  same  i)aths.  These  are  the  paths 
along  which  inter- American  unity  has  developed, 
growing  ever  stionger  as  the  American  nations 
have  come  to  understand  one  another  and  to  have 
trust  and  confidence  in  one  another's  purposes  and 
to  work  together  for  purposes  so  identic  that  they 
produced,  not  division  and  jealousy,  but  unity  of 
thought  and  action. 


'  Delivered  before  the  Pan  American  Union,  Apr.  14, 1944. 


350 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


As  the  years  have  gone  on,  the  true  principles 
underlying  inter- American  unity  have  been  made 
more  specific  as  one  inter-American  conference 
has  followed  another.  In  the  years  between  the 
world  wars  the  trust  and  confidence  between  the 
American  nations  grew  ever  stronger  while  else- 
where the  growth  of  ambitions  of  conquest  by 
force  brought  division  and  fear.  It  is  the  com- 
mon pride  of  the  American  republics  and  the 
good  fortune  of  all  mankind  that  the  torch  of 
international  cooperation  has  burned  at  its  bright- 
est in  the  affairs  of  this  hemisphere  precisely  at  a 
time  when  it  was  being  blacked  out  elsewhere.  It 
is  natural  that  the  history  of  an  international 
association  which  has  endured  longer  than  any 
other  should  provide  encouraging  guidance  for 
the  future. 

At  the  Montevideo  Conference  in  1933  the  Amer- 
ican republics  aiBrmed  their  belief  in  certain 
essential  principles  upon  which  cooperation  be- 
tween nations  and  international  order  must  be 
based.  Ajxiong  them  was  the  principle  that  every 
nation,  large  and  small,  was  equal  before  the  law 
of  nations.  Another  was  the  right  of  every 
nation  to  develop  its  own  institutions,  free  from 
intervention  by  others.  We  already  see  the  be- 
ginning of  a  wider  application  of  these  basic  prin- 
ciples. They  were  stated  in  the  Atlantic  Charter, 
the  United  Nations  Declaration,  and  the  declara- 
tions made  at  Moscow.  Specifically,  it  was  agi-eed 
at  Moscow  that  membership  in  the  world  security 
organization  must  be  upon  the  basis  of  the  sov- 
ereign equality  of  all  nations,  weak  as  well  as 
strong,  and  the  right  of  every  nation  to  a  govern- 
ment of  its  own  choice. 

The  American  nations  spoke  with  a  united  voice 
at  Buenos  Aires  as  early  as  1936  and  Lima  in  1938 
of  the  dangers  to  world  peace  which  impended,  and 
took  united  action  to  defend  the  hemisphere 
against  them.  When  the  attack  came  many  of  the 
American  republics  immediately  sprang  to  the  de- 
fense of  the  hemisphere.  Shortly  after  the  con- 
ference at  Rio  de  Janeiro  others  took  the  same 
course.  This  chapter  in  our  American  history  will 
ever  be  a  gallant  and  glorious  one.  It  teaches  that 
unity  of  purpose,  a  common  and  passionate  devo- 
tion to  the  maintenance  of  freedom,  and  mutual 
trust  and  confidence  are  the  essential  elements  with- 
out which  no  amount  of  international  organization 


and  machinery  can  succeed.  But  it  also  teaches  us 
and  other  nations  that  international  organization 
and  machinery  are  necessary.  Successful  as  our 
common  action  has  been,  it  has  not  been  complete. 
And  it  took  time,  which  may  not  always  be  avail- 
able. Therefore,  we  learn  that  an  international 
organization,  whether  in  the  field  of  inter-Ameri- 
can cooperation  or  in  the  broader  field  of  world 
peace,  must  have  two  main  supports.  It  must 
gather  its  greatest  strength  from  the  rightness  and 
justness  of  the  principles  upon  which  it  is  founded 
and  the  mutual  trust  of  its  members.  It  must  also 
have  such  an  essential  framework  and  machinery 
and  such  an  acceptance  of  their  obligations  on  the 
part  of  its  members  as  will  enable  it  to  act  prompt- 
ly and  effectively  in  times  of  crisis. 

Another  guidepost  for  the  future  which  our 
common  experience  before  and  during  this  war  has 
raised  is  in  the  economic  field.  With  the  outbreak 
of  the  war  the  continent  mobilized  economically. 
The  extent  to  which  the  products  of  the  hemisphere 
have  contributed  to  the  growing  success  of  the  war 
against  Germany  and  Japan  cannot  be  overesti- 
mated. Millions  of  men  and  women  throughout 
the  hemisphere  are  devoting  themselves  unspar- 
ingly to  the  production  of  essential  materials  and 
to  the  forging  of  the  weapons  of  our  common  vic- 
tory. All  this  has  been  done  under  the  great 
handicaps  of  the  dislocations  produced  by  the  war. 

At  the  end  of  the  war  all  of  our  countrie's  will  be 
faced  by  problems  of  immense  gravity.  Out  of 
the  experience  of  our  association  in  peace  and  in 
war  we  have  learned  that  the  expansion  of  mate- 
rial well-being  can  only  come  with  an  expansion  of 
production  and  trade  and  hence  an  increase  in  con- 
sumption. We  have  learned  too  that  no  one  nation 
can  solve  its  problems  by  itself.  An  increase  in 
production  requires  financing,  a  wise  selection  of 
the  goods  to  be  produced,  and  wise  and  fair  com- 
mercial jjolicies  to  enable  goods  to  flow  to  their 
markets  and  necessary  purchases  to  be  made  in 
leturn.  All  of  this  requires  cooperative  effort  and 
the  creation  of  international  arrangements 
through  which  that  effort  may  have  concrete  ex- 
pression. But  it  requires  something  more  than 
this.  It  requires  the  respect  by  each  nation  for 
each  other  nation,  of  which  I  have  spoken,  in  the 
field  of  political  relations.  International  cooper- 
ation in  the  economic  field  is  the  opposite  of  eco- 


APRIL    15,    1944 


351 


nomic  imperialism,  by  which  one  country  seeks  to 
exploit  another.  It  is  also  the  opposite  of  eco- 
nomic nationalism,  by  which  each  nation  seeks  to 
live  unto  itself. 

We  citizens  of  this  hemisphere  have  great  oppor- 
tunities before  us.  The  community  of  action 
among  the  American  nations,  already  highly  de- 
veloped, will  at  the  end  of  the  war  be  indispensable 
in  the  advaHcement  of  our  economic  well-being 
and  in  the  establishment  of  an  international  organ- 
ization to  prevent  the  recurrence  of  world  wars. 
Together,  as  I  have  said,  we  foresaw,  pointed  out, 
and  prepared  against  the  dangers  of  war.  To- 
gether we  must  foresee  and  prepare  for  the  ever- 
greater  common  task  of  the  peace.  I  believe  that 
as  in  future  j-ears  men  of  the  Americas  meet  to 
commemorate  this  day  they  will  see  unfolded  be- 
fore their  eyes  ever-increasing  evidence  that  the 
path  along  which  inter- American  cooperation  has 
led  is  the  path  to  human  liberty  and  human 
welfare. 


ATTEMPTED  ASSASSINATION  OF 
PRESIDENT  OF  MEXICO 

[Released  to  the  press  AprU  11] 

The  following  messages,  dated  April  10,  1944, 
were  sent  by  President  Roosevelt  to  His  Excellency 
Manuel  Avila  Camacho,  President  of  Mexico,  and 
by  Secretary  of  State  Cordell  Hull  to  His  Excel- 
lency Ezequiel  Padilla,  Minister  for  Foreign 
Affairs  of  Mexico : 

I  have  been  deeply  shocked  by  the  news  of  the 
dastardly  attempt  made  on  your  life  today,  and  I 
sincerely  congi'atulate  you  on  the  most  fortunate 
outcome  of  this  unhappy  event. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


Please  convey  to  His  Excellency  President  Avila 
Camacho  my  deep  gratification  that  he  so  fortu- 
nately escaped  injury  in  the  outrageous  assault 
made  upon  him  today. 

Cordell  Hull 


The  Far  East 


AMERICAN  AID  TO  CHINA  SINCE   1931 


[Note:  The  following  article,  which  is  based  on  data 
contained  in  official  sources,  has  been  prepared  by  several 
officers  of  the  Department  of  State  in  an  effort  to  provide 
a  comprehensive  picture  of  the  various  forms  in  which 
American  assistance  has  been  rendered  to  China.] 

Introduction 

During  the  period  of  a  century  which  has  elapsed 
since  the  United  States  entered  into  treaty  rela- 
tions with  China,  the  United  States  has  consist- 
ently pursued  a  policy  of  friendly  helpfulness  to- 
ward that  country.  This  policy  was  conspicuously 
illustrated  in  the  efforts  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment to  avert  the  partitioning  of  China  at  the 
close  of  the  nineteenth  century,  when  Jolin  Hay 
circulated  to  the  powers  the  open-door  notes,  and 
m  the  initiative  taken  by  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment which  resulted  in  the  conclusion  of  the 
nine-power  treaty  of  February  6,  1922  containing 
provisions  designed  to  assure  the  peace,  integrity, 
and  stability  of  China.     The  policy  historically 


pursued  by  the  United  States  toward  China  has 
been  based  primarily  upon  so  broad  and  funda- 
mental an  interest  that  it  has  served  the  best  in- 
terests of  both  China  and  the  United  States. 

Since  the  Japanese  invasion  of  Manchuria  in 
September  1931  the  long  history  of  consistent 
American  aid  to  and  support  of  China  has  been 
given  fresh  manifestation  in  various  ways.  This 
assistance  may  be  discussed^ under  the  following 
heads :  Diplomatic  aid,  financial  aid,  lend-lease  as- 
sistance, military  aid,  technical  assistance,  Ameri- 
can Red  Cross  assistance,  and  assistance  by  private 
American  agencies. 

Diplomatic  Aid 

Japan's  occupation  of  Manchuria  in  1931  and 
her  subsequent  successive  course  of  aggression  in 
China  proper  constituted  clear  violations  of  the 
principles  of  policy  which  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment conceived  to  be  essential  for  the  mainte- 


352 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


nance  of  sound  international  relations.  Conse- 
quently the  United  States  Government  endeavored 
constantly,  consistently,  and  with  unremitting  ef- 
fort to  persuade  Japan  to  desist  from  her  policy 
of  aggression.  Whenever  the  occasion  for  such 
action  arose,  the  United  States  made  known  its 
unalterable  opposition  to  the  course  which  Japan 
was  pursuing. 

The    occupation    of    Manchuria    by    Japanese 
armed  forces  caused  the  United  States,  as  early  as 

1932,  to  express  its  views  w^ith  respect  to  develop- 
ments in  the  Far  East.  On  January  7,  1932 
identical  notes,  which  gave  expression  to  what  has 
since  been  called  the  doctrine  of  "non-recogni- 
tion", were  sent  to  the  Chinese  and  Japanese  Gov- 
ernments. It  was  stated  in  these  notes  that  the 
United  States  could  not  "admit  the  legality  of  any 
situation  de  fcwto  nor  does  it  intend  to  recognize 
any  treaty  or  agi'eement  entered  into  between  those 
Governments,  or  agents  thereof,  which  may  im- 
pair the  treaty  rights  of  the  United  States  or  its 
citizens  in  China,  including  those  which  relate 
to  the  sovereignty,  the  independence,  or  the  terri- 
torial and  administrative  integrity  of  the  Republic 
of  China,  or  to  the  international  policy  relative  to 
China,  commonly  known  as  the  open  door  policy ; 
and  that  it  does  not  intend  to  recognize  any  situa- 
tion, treaty  or  agreement  which  may  be  brought 
about  bj'  means  contrary  to  the  covenants  and 
obligations  of  the  Pact  of  Paris  of  August  27, 
1928,  to  which  Treaty  both  China  and  Japan,  as 
well  as  the  United  States,  are  pai'ties." 

Approximately  a  year  later,  on  February  2'5, 

1933,  after  the  League  of  Nations  had  completed 
a  study  of  the  controversy  between  Japan  and 
China  and  had  adopted  and  transmitted  to  the 
United  States  for  consideration  a  report  embody- 
ing a  number  of  conclusions  with  respect  thereto, 
the  Secretary  of  State  declared  in  a  communica- 
tion addressed  to  the  Secretary  General  of  the 
League:  "The  findings  of  fact  arrived  at  by  the 
League  and  the  understanding  of  the  facts  derived 
by  the  American  Government  from  reports  made 
to  it  by  its  own  representatives  are  in  substantial 
accord.  In  the  light  of  its  findings  of  fact,  the 
Assembly  of  the  League  has  formulated  a  meas- 
ured statement  of  conclusions.  With  those  con- 
clusions the  American  Government  is  in  general 
accord."    The  Secretary  of  State  added :  "In  their 


affirmations  respectively  of  the  principle  of  non- 
recognition  and  their  attitude  in  regard  thereto 
the  League  and  the  United  States  are  on  common 
gi'ound." 

During  the  period  from  1934  until  the  outbreak 
of  hostilities  between  Japan  and  China  in  the 
summer  of  1937  it  was  necessary  for  the  United 
States  Government  to  take  diplomatic  action  on 
a  number  of  occasions  in  an  effort  to  preserve  and 
protect  legitimate  American  interests  in  China 
and  to  support  the  fundamental  principles  of 
American  policies  in  dealing  with  foreign  nations. 

On  April  17,  1934,  Mr.  Amau,  Chief  of  the 
Bureau  of  Information  and  Intelligence  of  the 
Japanese  Foreign  Office,  issued  a  statement  which 
disclosed  the  China  policy  of  the  Japanese  Gov- 
ernment. This  statement,  which  became  known 
as  the  "xVmau  statement",  referred  to  "the  special 
position  of  Japan  in  her  relations  with  China", 
declared  that  "there  is  no  country  but  China  which 
is  in  a  position  to  share  with  Japan  the  responsi- 
bility for  the  maintenance  of  peace  in  East  Asia", 
and  asserted  Japan's  opposition  to  (1)  "any 
attempt  on  the  part  of  China  to  avail  herself  of 
the  influence  of  any  other  country  in  order  to 
resist  Japan",  (2)  "any  action  taken  by  China, 
calculated  to  play  one  power  against  another", 
(3)  "any  joint  operations  undertaken  by  foreign 
powers  even  in  the  name  of  technical  or  financial 
assistance",  and  (4)  any  action  which  might  tend 
to  strengthen  China  in  a  military  sense. 

On  April  28,  1934,  the  Secretary  of  State  in- 
structed the  American  Ambassador  at  Tokyo, 
Mr.  Grew,  to  deliver  an  aide-memoire  on  the  sub- 
ject to  the  Japanese  Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs. 
It  was  pointed  out  in  the  aide-memoire  that  the 
relations  of  the  United  States  with  China,  as  well 
as  with  other  countries,  were  governed  by  the 
generally  accepted  principles  of  international  law 
and  the  provisions  of  treaties  to  which  the  United 
States  was  a  party,  that  the  LTnited  States  had 
certain  rights  and  obligations  with  respect  to 
China,  and  that  treaties  could  be  lawfully  modi- 
fied or  terminated  "only  by  processes  pi'escribed  or 
recognized  or  agreed  upon  by  the  parties  to  them". 
It  was  further  stated:  "In  the  opinion  of  the 
American  people  and  the  American  Government, 
no  nation  can,  without  the  assent  of  the  other 
nations  concerned,  rightfully  endeavor  to  make 


APRIL    15,    1944 


353 


conclusive  its  will  in  situations  where  there  are 
involved  the  rights,  the  obligations  and  the  legiti- 
mate interests  of  other  sovereign  states." 

A  Japanese  military  demarche  in  north  China 
in  support  of  a  so-called  "movement  for  autonomy" 
in  that  region  induced  the  Secretary  of  State  to 
issue  to  the  press  on  December  5,  1935  a  further 
statement  with  respect  to  the  attitude  and  policy 
of  the  United  States.  The  Secretary  declared  that 
unusual  developments  in  any  region  of  China  were 
rightfully  and  necessarily  of  concern  not  only  to 
the  Government  and  people  of  China  but  to  all 
the  powers  which  had  interests  in  China,  for,  "in 
relations  with  China  and  in  China,  the  treaty 
rights  and  treaty  obligations  of  the  'treaty  powers' 
are  identical."  The  Secretary  reiterated  his  belief 
that  governments  and  peoples  must  keep  faith  in 
principles  and  pledges  and  that  in  international 
relations  there  must  be  agreements  and  respect  for 
agreements.  His  statement  concluded:  "This 
country  has  abiding  faith  in  the  fundamental 
principles  of  its  traditional  policy.  This  Govern- 
ment adheres  to  the  provisions  of  the  treaties  to 
which  it  is  a  party  and  continues  to  bespeak  respect 
by  all  nations  for  the  provisions  of  treaties  sol- 
emnly entered  into  for  the  purpose  of  facilitating 
and  regulating,  to  reciprocal  common  advantage, 
the  contacts  between  and  among  the  countries 
signatory." 

A  clash  between  Japanese  and  Chinese  forces 
which  occurred  near  Peiping  on  July  7,  1937 
marked  the  opening  of  the  wide-spread  armed 
conflict  that  has  raged  continuously  between  Japan 
and  China  since  that  time.  Reports  which  he  had 
received  regarding  the  action  of  July  7  caused  the 
Secretary  to  reiterate  yet  again  in  a  statement 
made  on  July  16,  1937  the  fundamental  principles 
of  American  foreign  policy.  Shortly  thereafter,  on 
July  21,  the  United  States  Government  offered  the 
Japanese  and  Chinese  Governments,  through  their 
respective  diplomatic  representatives  at  Wash- 
ington, its  good  offices.  These  efforts  were  of  no 
avail,  and  on  October  6,  1937  the  Department  of 
State  announced  that  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment had  been  "forced  to  the  conclusion  that  the 
action  of  Japan  in  China  is  inconsistent  with  the 
principles  which  should  govern  the  relationships 
between  nations  and  is  contrary  to  the  provisions 
of  the  nine-power  treaty  of  February  6,  1922,  re- 


garding principles  and  policies  to  be  followed  in 
matters  concerning  China,  and  to  those  of  the  Kel- 
logg-Briand  Pact  of  August  27,  1928." 

During  the  period  from  1937  to  December  7, 1941 
the  United  States  Government  undertook,  when- 
ever it  could  projjerly  take  action,  to  bring  about 
a  peaceful  solution  of  the  conflict  and  to  insure 
both  the  protection  of  American  lives  and  property 
and  the  observance  of  the  traditional  principles 
of  American  foreign  policy.  Mention  may  be 
made,  by  way  of  illustration,  of  certain  types  of 
United  States  activity. 

Efforts  were  made  during  this  period  by  the 
United  States  Government  to  prevent  the  indis- 
criminate bombing  of  civilian  populations  by 
Japanese  air  forces.  On  June  3,  1938,  for  ex- 
ample, the  Acting  Secretary  of  State,  Mr.  Welles, 
denounced  the  ruthless  bombing  of  unfortified  lo- 
calities which  had  caused  the  death  of  many  hun- 
dreds of  civilians  in  both  China  and  Spain.  On 
June  11,  1938  the  Secretary  of  State  deplored  the 
bombing  of  civilian  populations  from  the  air  and 
expressed  the  hope  that  American  manufacturers 
or  exporters  of  airplanes  and  airplane  parts  would 
not  sell  bombers  to  nations  which  would  use  them 
to  bomb  civilian  populations.  On  December  2, 
1939  the  President  declared  in  a  public  statement 
that  the  American  policy  of  discouraging  the  ex- 
port of  planes  to  countries  engaged  in  unprovoked 
bombing  and  machine-gunning  of  civilian  popula- 
tions from  the  air  would  apply  also  to  materials 
essential  to  airplane  manufacture ;  and  on  Decem- 
ber 20,  1939  the  Department  of  State  announced 
the  extension  of  the  policy  to  include  the  delivery 
of  the  technical  information  required  for  the  pro- 
duction of  high-quality  aviation  gasoline. 

Representations  were  made  to  the  Japanese  Gov- 
ernment in  an  effort  to  restrain  Japanese  agen- 
cies in  China  from  taking  action  which  menaced 
or  injured  American  lives,  property,  or  other  in- 
terests. On  October  6,  1938,  for  example,  there 
was  sent  to  the  Japanese  Government  a  compre- 
hensive note  enumerating  the  measures  taken  by 
Japanese  agencies  which  were  regarded  as  un- 
warranted, unlawful,  contrary  to  treaties,  or  in- 
consistent with  announced  policies  of  the  Japanese 
Government.  In  reply  to  this  note  the  Japanese 
Government  on  November  18,  after  referring  to  a 
"new  situation  fast  developing  in  East  Asia",  as- 


354 

serted  that  "any  attempt  to  apply  to  the  conditions 
of  today  and  tomorrow  inapplicable  ideas  and 
principles  of  the  past  neither  would  contribute 
toward  the  estabhshment  of  a  real  peace  in  East 
Asia  nor  solve  the  immediate  issues."  The  Japa- 
nese Government  subsequently  made  it  clear,  dur- 
ing conversations  held  in  Tokyo  between  officials 
of  the  Japanese  Foreign  Office  and  United  States 
diplomatic  representatives,  that  Japan  expected  to 
be  the  sole  arbiter  of  political  and  economic  devel- 
opments in  China.  In  the  light  of  these  develop- 
ments, the  United  States  Government  sent  to  the 
Japanese  Government  on  December  31, 1938  a  fur- 
ther communication  in  which  the  traditional 
principles  of  American  foreign  policy  were  re- 
asserted and  in  which  it  was  announced  that  the 
United  States  could  not  assent  to  any  impairment 
of  its  rights. 

As  the  conflict  in  China  became  more  wide- 
spread, Japanese  interference  with  American  com- 
mercial and  other  interests  in  China  increased. 
Consequently,  the  United  States  Government  in  a 
note  of  July  26,  1939  addressed  to  the  Japanese 
Ambassador  at  Washington  gave  notice,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Com- 
merce and  Navigation  of  February  21,  1911  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Japan,  of  its  desire 
that  the  treaty  be  terminated  and  its  expectation, 
since  the  required  notice  had  been  given,  that  the 
treaty  woukl  expire  six  months  thereafter.  It  was 
declared  in  the  note  tliat  this  action  was  taken 
"with  a  view  to  better  safeguarding  and  promoting 
American  interests  as  new  developments  require". 
The  treaty  was  permitted  to  lapse  on  January  26, 
1940,  and,  notwithstanding  repeated  Japarfese  re- 
quests for  the  conclusion  of  some  other  arrange- 
ment to  fill  this  gap,  no  other  arrangement  was 
concluded  between  the  two  countries. 

Early  in  1940  the  Japanese  established  at  Nan- 
king a  puppet  Chinese  government  under  Wang 
Ching-wei.  In  reply  to  an  inquiry  regarding  this 
action,  the  Secretary  of  State  dechired  on  March 
30,  1940,  "the  setting  up  of  a  new  regime  at  Nan- 
king has  the  appearance  of  a  further  step  in  a  pro- 
gi'am  of  one  country  by  armed  force  to  impose  its 
will  upon  a  neighboring  country  and  to  block  off 
»  a  large  area  of  the  world  from  normal  political  and 
economic  relationships  with  the  rest  of  the  world." 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 

The  Secretary  continued:  "Twelve  years  ago  the 
Goverment  of  the  United  States  recognized,  as  did 
other  governments,  the  National  Government  of 
the  Republic  of  China.  The  Government  of  the 
United  States  has  ample  reason  for  believing  that 
that  Government,  with  capital  now  at  Chungking, 
has  had  and  still  has  the  allegiance  and  support  of 
the  great  majority  of  the  Chinese  people.  The 
Government  of  the  United  States  of  course  con- 
tinues to  recognize  that  Government  as  the  Gov- 
ernment of  China."   . 

In  September  1940  Japan  took  steps  to  place  her 
armed  forces  in  position  to  attack  China  from 
French  Indochina.  On  September  4  Mr.  Hull 
made  mention  of  the  officially  declared  desires  of 
the  American  Government  and  several  other  gov- 
ernments, including  the  Japanese,  that  the  prin- 
ciple of  the  status  quo  be  preserved  in  the  Pacific, 
with  special  reference  to  the  Netherlands  Indies 
and  French  Indochina ;  he  then  remai-ked  that, 
should  events  confirm  reports  of  the  delivery  by 
Japanese  officials  of  an  ultimatum  to  the  local 
authorities  of  French  Indochina  calling  for  facili- 
ties for  the  passage  of  Japanese  troops  and  for  the 
use  of  bases,  the  effect  upon  public  opinion  in  the 
United  States  would  be  unfortunate.  Soon  there- 
after, developments  in  French  Indocliina  caused 
Mr.  Hull  to  say  on  September  23  that  it  appeared 
obvious  that  the  status  quo  in  Indochina  was  being 
upset  under  duress. 

In  an  endeavor  to  halt  the  course  of  develop- 
ments in  the  Far  East  and  to  establish  a  basis  for 
stability  and  progress  in  the  entire  Pacific  area, 
the  United  States  entered  into  discussions  with 
Japan  in  1941.  During  the  conversations,  which 
took  place  over  a  period  of  nine  months,  the  United 
States  took  into  account  not  only  its  own  legitimate 
interests  but  also  those  of  China,  Japan,  and  other 
countries.  When  questions  relating  to  the  legiti- 
mate rights  and  interests  of  other  countries  arose, 
the  United  States  Government  kept  in  appropriate 
contact  with  the  representatives  of  those  countries. 

During  the  conversations  the  United  States  con- 
sistently advocated  certain  fundamental  princi- 
ples which  should  govern  international  relations. 
These  were : 

The  principle  of  inviolability  of  territorial  in- 
tegrity and  sovereignty  of  all  nations; 


APRIL    15,    1944 


355 


The  principle  of  non-interference  in  the  internal 

affairs  of  other  countries; 
The  principle  of  ecpiality — including  equality  of 

commercial  opportunit_y  and  treatment;  and 
The    principle    of    reliance    upon    international 

cooi^eration  and  conciliation  for  the  pi'even- 

tion  and  pacific  settlement  of  controversies. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  steadfastly 
refused  to  consider  any  agreement  with  Japan 
under  the  teniis  of  which  Japan  would  be  permit- 
ted to  retain  Japanese  troops  in  China  or  which 
was  inconsistent  with  respect  for  China's  sover- 
eignty, independence,  and  territorial  integrity. 

The  conversations  were  temporarily  suspended 
by  the  United  States  in  July  1941,  because  in  that 
month  the  Japanese  began  sending  troops  and 
equipment  into  southern  Indochina.  The  United 
States  Government  also  adopted  measures  to  freeze 
Japanese  assets  in  this  country,  with  the  result 
that  trade  between  the  two  countries  practically 
ceased.  While  the  Japanese  Government  asserted 
that  the  move  into  Indochina  was  for  the  purpose 
of  bringing  the  China  "incident"  to  an  end,  the 
United  States  Government  refused  to  countenance 
or  give  assent  to  the  presence  of  any  Japanese 
troops  in  that  area. 

At  the  urgent  and  insistent  request  of  the  Jap- 
anese Government,  the  conversations  were  resumed 
during  the  following  month.  Finally,  after  sev- 
eral formulas  had  been  proposed  and  discussed,  the 
Japanese  Government  submitted  on  November  20, 
1941  a  narrow  proposal  which  inter  alia  called  for 
the  discontinuance  by  the  United  States  of  aid  to 
China.  It  contained,  however,  no  provision  for 
the  abandonment  by  Japan  of  her  warlike  aims 
or  operations.  The  proposal  obviously  offered  no 
basis  for  a  peaceful  settlement  or  even  for  a  tem- 
porary adjustment. 

In  an  effort  to  clarify  the  issues,  the  United 
States  Government  presented  to  the  Japanese  Gov- 
ernment on  November  26, 1941  a  clear-cut  plan  for 
a  broad  but  simple  settlement.  The  plan  con- 
tained the  following  and  other  proposals :  (1)  The 
Government  of  Japan  should  withdraw  all  mili- 
tary, naval,  air,  and  police  forces  from  China  and 
Indochina;  (2)  the  Governments  of  the  United 
States  and  Japan  would  pledge  not  to  support  any 
government  in  China  other  than  the  National  Gov- 


ernment of  the  Republic  of  China  with  capital 
tcAnporarily  at  Cliungking;  {?>)  the  two  Govern- 
ments would  pledge  to  relinquish  extraterritorial 
and  related  rights  in  China  and  to  endeavor  to 
obtain  the  agreement  of  other  governments  pos- 
sessing such  rights  to  give  up  those  rights. 

These  negotiations  were  abruptly  terminated  on 
December  7,  1941  by  the  Japanese  attack  on  Pearl 
Harbor. 

Mention  should  be  made  of  the  fact  that  during 
the  period  prior  to  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Japan  the  efforts  made 
by  the  United  States  to  aid  China  and  to  maintain 
its  traditional  foreign  policies  were  by  no  means 
confined  to  negotiations  with  Japan.  When,  for 
example,  reports  were  circulated  in  July  1940  that 
the  British  Government  planned  to  prohibit  tem- 
porarily the  movement  of  certain  commodities  over 
the  Burma  Road,  the  Secretary  of  State  declared 
on  July  16,  in  response  to  an  inquiry  on  the  subject, 
that  the  United  States  had  a  legitimate  interest  in 
the  keeping  open  of  arteries  of  commerce  in  every 
part  of  the  world  and  that,  as  a  consequence, 
"action  such  as  this,  if  taken,  .  .  .  would  constitute 
unwarranted  interpositions  of  obstacles  to  world 
trade". 

Since  the  outbreak  of  the  war  between  the  United 
States  and  Japan,  the  United  States  Government 
has  taken  a  number  of  important  steps  which  have 
had  the  effect  of  improving  China's  international 
position  and  prestige. 

On  October  9,  1942  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment took  the  initiative  in  approaching  the  Chi- 
nese Government  with  regard  to  the  negotiation  of 
a  treaty  providing  for  the  relinquishment  of  Amer- 
ican extraterritorial  rights  in  China  and  for  the 
settlement  of  related  questions.  A  treaty  accom- 
plishing these  objectives  was  signed  on  January  11, 
1943  and  became  effective  with  the  exchange  of  rat- 
ifications on  May  20,  1943.  This  treaty,  together 
with  a  similar  Sino-British  ti^eaty  which  was  ne- 
gotiated at  the  same  time,  was  hailed  by  Chinese 
leaders  as  restoring  China  to  a  position  of  equality 
with  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain. 

On  December  17,  1943  the  President  signed  an 
act,  which  had  been  passed  by  large  majorities  of 
both  Houses  of  Congress,  removing  long-standing 
legislative   discriminations   against   the   Chinese. 


356 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


The  act  repealed  the  Chinese  exclusion  laws,  estab- 
lished an  annual  Chinese  immigi'ation  quota,  and 
made  legally  admitted  Chinese  eligible  to  naturali- 
zation as  American  citizens.  The  enactment  of 
this  legislation  had  been  specifically  recommended 
by  the  President  in  order  to  "correct  a  historic  mis- 
take" and  give  "additional  proof  that  we  regard 
Cliina  not  only  as  a  partner  in  waging  war  but 
that  we  shall  regard  her  as  a  partner  in  days  of 
peace". 

In  conjunction  with  other  members  of  the  United 
Nations,  the  United  States  Government  has  also 
participated  in  other  actions  which  demonstrate 
its  desire  and  intention  to  treat  China  as  an  equal 
among  the  major  powers  and  to  contribute  to  the 
strengthening  of  the  Chinese  nation.  Among  the 
more  outstanding  examples  of  such  action  have 
been :  the  joint  four-nation  declaration  at  Moscow, 
which  recognized  the  right  and  responsibility  of 
China  to  participate  jointly  with  the  United 
States,  Great  Britain,  and  the  Soviet  Union  in  the 
prosecution  of  the  war,  the  organization  of  the 
peace,  and  the  establishment  of  machinery  for 
post-war  international  cooperation ;  the  joint  com- 
munique issued  at  Cairo  by  President  Roosevelt, 
Prime  Minister  Churchill,  and  Generalissimo 
Chiang  Kai-shek,  which  reaffirmed  the  recognition 
accorded  to  China  at  Moscow  and  pledged  the 
restoration  to  Cliina  of  Manchuria,  Formosa,  and 
the  Pescadores;  and  the  prominent  part  assigned 
to  Chinese  representatives  in  the  United  Nations 
Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration. 

Financial  Aid 

Boxer  Indemnity 

The  first  financial  obligation  of  importance  cre- 
ated between  the  Governments  of  China  and  the 
United  States  was  the  American  share  of  the  so- 
called  "Boxer  Indemnity"  imposed  upon  China 
by  the  Boxer  protocol  of  September  7,  1901  and 
its  supplemental  agreements.  Under  arrange- 
ments provided  through  congressional  action  in 
1908  and  1924,  the  United  States  followed  the 
practice  of  remitting  all  Boxer  payments  not  al- 
located to  legitimate  claimants;  and  those  remit- 
tances, which  were  earmarked  for  educational  pur- 
poses, became,  in  effect,  the  earliest  example  of 
financial  aid  to  China  on  the  part  of  the  United 


States  Government.  This  particular  kind  of  aid 
was  suspended  in  1939,  when  the  Chinese  Govern- 
ment notified  the  Secretary  of  State  that  it  was 
forced  to  suspend  payments  of  the  indemnity  be- 
cause of  financial  troubles.  The  United  States 
acquiesced  in  the  suspension  of  the  payments  and 
eventually,  on  January  11, 1943,  yielded  all  further 
claims  to  indemnity  payments. 

Loans  and  credits 

Although  private  American  citizens  and  Ameri- 
can banks  invested  money  in  the  numerous  Chinese 
bond  issues  floated  both  before  and  after  the  crea- 
tion of  the  Chinese  Republic,  no  United  States 
governmental  financial  aid  was  extended  to  China, 
except  for  the  Boxer  remissions,  until  September 
25,  1931.  On  that  date,  however,  the  Grain  Sta- 
bilization Board,  in  accordance  with  a  decision 
reached  by  the  Federal  Farm  Board,  concluded  a 
contract  with  the  Chinese  Government  for  the  sale 
to  China  on  credit  of  450,000  short  tons  of  Ameri- 
can wheat  and  wheat  flours  to  be  used  in  relief 
operations  necessitated  by  the  1931  Yangtze  flood. 
The  total  amount  of  the  obligation  incurred  by 
China  under  this  agreement  was  $9,212,826. 

On  May  29,  1933  negotiations  were  concluded 
between  the  Chinese  Government  and  the  Recon- 
struction Finance  Corporation  for  a  credit  of 
$50,000,000,  advanced  at  an  interest  rate  of  5  per- 
cent, to  be  used  for  the  purchase  of  American  cot- 
ton, wheat,  and  flour.  Of  the  total  amount,  ap- 
proximately $40,000,000  was  to  be  spent  on  cotton, 
$6,000,000  on  wheat,  and  at  least  $4,000,000  on  flour. 
This  credit  was  to  be  secured  by  a  first  charge  on 
certain  Chinese  taxes  and  by  junior  charges  on 
certain  other  taxes. 

By  a  modification  of  the  agreement  on  February 
23, 1934  the  size  of  the  cotton  credit  was  reduced  to 
$10,000,000.  The  original  sum  set  aside  for  flour 
was  also  too  high  for  the  Chinese,  and  only 
$1,105,385  of  it  was  actually  used.  Thus,  when  the 
Export-Import  Bank  took  over  the  administra- 
tion of  the  credit  in  1936,  the  total  amount  of  the 
$50,000,000  credit  actually  utilized  was  only 
$17,105,385. 

The  Export-Import  Bank,  to  which  had  been 
transferred  early  in  1936  the  administration  of  the 
Flood  Relief  Loan  of  1931  and  the  Cotton,  Wheat, 
and  Flour  Credit  of  1933,  announced  on  June  20, 


APRIL    15,    1944 


357 


1936  that  the  two  loans  had  been  consolidated  and 
that  payments  would  be  made  in  quarterly  instal- 
ments over  a  period  of  six  years.  The  consolida- 
tion note  was  secured  by  a  first  charge  on  China's 
internal  (consolidated)  taxes  and  on  the  5  percent 
flood-relief  customs  surtax. 

To  aid  the  Chinese  Government  in  financing  the 
purchase  of  railway  equipment  in  the  United 
States,  the  Export-Import  Bank  committed  itself 
on  May  4, 1937  to  furnish  up  to  $1,600,000  for  this 
purpose,  provided  the  amount  did  not  exceed  one 
half  of  the  promissory  notes  issued  by  the  Chinese 
Ministry  of  Railways  and  guaranteed  by  one  of  the 
government-supported  Chinese  banks.  Under  this 
commitment  the  Export-Import  Bank  actually 
disbursed  $733,200.  The  final  repayment  of  this 
credit  was  completed  by  the  Chinese  Government 
on  July  13, 1942. 

On  December  15,  1938  announcement  was  made 
of  the  extension  to  China  of  a  credit  under  the 
terms  of  which  the  Export-Import  Bank  would 
advance  $25,000,000  to  the  Universal  Trading  Cor- 
poration, a  Chinese-owned  American  corporation, 
which  would  use  the  funds  to  purchase  American 
agricultural  and  manufactured  products  for  ex- 
port to  China.  The  credits  were  to  be  repaid  from 
profits  derived  from  the  importation  and  sale  in  the 
United  States  of  Chinese  wood  (tung)  oil,  repay- 
ment to  be  guaranteed  by  the  Bank  of  China,  of 
which  the  Chinese  Government  controlled  approxi- 
mately half  the  stock.  Wliile,  according  to  the 
terms  of  a  contract  which  was  signed  on  February 
8,  1939,  the  entire  credit  was  to  be  repaid  by 
January  1, 1944,  the  Chinese  Government  was  able 
to  complete  the  repayment  on  March  31,  1942,  al- 
most two  years  ahead  of  schedule,  because  of  the 
funds  accruing  from  the  sale  in  the  United  States 
of  imported  wood  oil. 

It  should  be  noted  that,  although  the  wood-oil 
credit  was  commercial  in  character,  its  announce- 
ment on  December  15, 1938,  at  a  time  when,  in  the 
terms  of  Chinese  leaders,  China  was  facing  its 
"darkest  hour"  because  of  the  fall  of  Canton  and 
Hankow,  did  much  to  counteract  the  discouraging 
effect  of  military  developments. 

On  March  7, 1940,  just  prior  to  the  setting  up  of 
the  puppet  Wang  Ching-wei  regime  at  Nanking, 
the  Export-Import  Bank  allocated  $20,000,000  for 


credits  to  finance  exports  to  China.  These  credits 
were  to  be  handled  in  substantially  the  same  way 
as  those  provided  in  the  wood-oil  loan,  except  that 
China  was  to  pay  off  the  new  loan  with  profits  ac- 
cruing from  shipments  of  tin  to  the  United  States. 

In  September  1940  the  Chinese  Government  re- 
quested another  loan.  This  request  was  promptly 
met.  The  Federal  Loan  Agency  announced  on 
September  25,  1940  that  the  Export-Import  Bank 
had  authorized  credits  of  $25,000,000  to  the  Chi- 
nese Government,  with  repayment  guaranteed  by 
the  Central  Bank  of  China.  At  the  same  time  it 
was  announced  tliat  the  Metals  Reserve  Company 
had  agreed  to  buy  from  the  National  Resources 
Commission  of  China  $30,000,000  worth  of  tungs- 
ten, from  the  sale  of  which  the  new  credit  would 
be  paid. 

A  decision  on  the  part  of  the  Export-Import 
Bank  to  extend  a  further  loan  of  $50,000,000  to  the 
Central  Bank  of  China  was  announced  on  Decem- 
ber 1, 1940,  the  day  after  Japan  gave  formal  recog- 
nition to  the  Wang  Ching-wei  regime  as  the  "Na- 
tional Government  of  China"  and  concluded  a 
"treaty"  with  that  regime.  It  was  stipulated  that 
the  loan  should  be  repaid  from  the  profits  received 
by  the  Chinese  National  Resources  Commission 
from  the  sale  of  tin,  wolframite,  and  antimony  to 
the  Metals  Reserve  Company. 

American  aid  through  silver  purchases 

Prior  to  1933  China  was  normally  a  silver-im- 
porting country.  As  a  result,  however,  of  the  loss 
of  Manchuria,  whose  trade  had  yielded  an  export 
balance  to  China,  and  of  the  world  trend  away 
from  gold  standards,  which  tended  to  increase  the 
price  of  silver  and  other  commodities  as  well  as 
gold,  silver  began  to  leave  China.  The  loss  of  silver 
caused  a  decrease  in  the  amount  of  the  Chinese  cur- 
rency available  for  circulation,  thereby  hampering 
Chinese  trade  and  commerce,  and  a  reduction  in 
the  size  of  the  reserves  held  by  Chinese  banks,  with 
the  result  that  there  was  a  sharjj  contraction  of 
credit.  Although  the  Chinese  Government  placed 
an  export  tax  on  silver  in  an  effort  to  check  the  flow 
of  that  commodity  from  the  country,  this  action 
failed  to  have  any  beneficial  effect,  primarily  be- 
cause of  the  ease  with  which  smuggling  operations 
could  be  engaged  in. 


358 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


The  American  Silver  Purchase  Act  of  1934 
proved  to  be  a  blessing  to  China  for,  despite  the 
fact  that  it  created  serious  strains  on  the  Chinese 
economy  by  stimulating  tlie  export  of  silver  from 
China,  it  enabled  the  Chinese  Government  to  sell 
silver  at  a  good  price.  In  order  to  take  advantage 
of  tliis  condition  and  to  have  foreign  exchange  re- 
ceived from  the  sale  of  silver  accrue  to  the  benefit 
of  the  Government,  China  in  Xovember  1935  na- 
tionalized silver  and  decided  to  stabilize  the  yuan 
(tlie  Chinese  dollar)  in  terms  of  the  American  dol- 
lar and  the  British  pound  sterling.  In  the  same 
month  the  United  States,  acting  under  the  author- 
ity of  the  Silver  Purchase  Act,  concluded  an  agree- 
ment with  China  for  the  sale  to  the  United  States 
of  50,000,000  ounces  of  silver.  The  silver  was 
shipped  to  the  United  States  during  December  1935 
and  January  1936.  On  May  18,  193G  the  Secretary 
of  the  Treasury,  Mr.  Morgenthau,  announced  the 
conclusion  of  another  agreement  for  the  purchase 
of  a  similar  amount  of  silver  and  declared  that  tlie 
payment  for  the  silver  would  be  in  foreign  ex- 
change, thereby  assisting  the  Chinese  Government 
in  its  efforts  at  currency  stabilization. 

On  July  9,  1937  the  Treasury  Department 
announced  a  broadening  of  the  scope  of  these 
arrangements  under  whicli  the  Central  Bank  of 
China  could  obtain  dollar  exchange  for  stabiliza- 
tion purposes.  The  announcement  also  disclosed 
that  the  Treasury  would  sell  a  substantial  amount 
of  gold  to  the  Chinese  Government  and  would 
make  further  silver  purchases  in  order  to  assist 
China  in  buying  the  gold.  This  agreement  was 
renewed  in  July  1938  and  again  in  September  1938. 

By  the  end  of  1938  the  flow  of  silver  from  China 
had  almost  come  to  a  halt.  During  the  period 
1935-38  there  had  accrued  to  China,  as  a  result  of 
the  measures  taken  by  the  American  Government, 
foi-eign  exchange  to  an  amount  estimated  at  be- 
tween $300,000,000  and  $350,000,000.  Thus,  by 
the  end  of  the  period  of  heavy  silver  sales  by  China, 
the  United  States  was  actively  engaged  in  mone- 
tary support  of  the  Chinese  Government,  and 
China  had  sold  the  great  bulk  of  her  monetary 
silver. 

Despite  the  aid  China  received  from  the  United 
States  under  these  agreements,  and  despite  China's 
continued  effort  after  the  outbreak  of  the  conflict 


with  Japan  in  1937  to  stabilize  the  yuan,  currency 
stabilization  was  rendered  difficult  by  the  disrup- 
tion of  normal  trade  and  finance  and  by  the  Jap- 
anese occupation  of  key  areas  of  China.  Lacking 
control  of  all  the  areas  in  which  its  curi'ency  was 
used,  the  Chinese  Government  was  unable  effec- 
tively to  control  the  total  exports  and  imports  of 
the  country.  The  Japanese,  as  they  obtained 
Chinese  national  currency  in  occupied  areas,  pre- 
sented it  for  redemption  into  foreign  exchange, 
with  the  result  that  valuable  foreign  exchange  was 
gained  by  Japan  and  was  lost  by  China.  China 
was  finally  forced  to  suspend  operations  for  main- 
taining the  stability  of  the  yuan  and  to  allow 
exchange  rates  to  fall. 

Because  of  these  conditions  it  was  announced  on 
December  1,  1940  that  the  United  States  would 
extend  to  China  a  stabilization  loan  of  $50,000,000 
in  connection  with  a  credit  of  the  same  amount  to 
be  extended  by  the  Export -Import  Bank.  As  the 
details  of  the  stabilization  loan  had  to  be  worked 
out,  the  final  agreement,  dated  April  1,  1941,  was 
not  signed  until  April  25,  1941.  Under  the  terms 
of  this  agreement  the  United  States  Stabilization 
Fund  was  to  buy  Chinese  yuan  upon  the  request 
of  the  Central  Bank  of  China  to  the  amount  of 
$50,000,000,  and  the  Chinese  Government  banks 
were  to  contribute  $20,000,000  to  the  resources  of  a 
Stabilization  Board  to  be  established  under  the 
agreement. 

At  approximately  the  same  time  the  Chinese 
Government  concluded  a  similar  agreement  with 
Great  Britain  by  which  the  British  were  to  extend 
to  China  a  somewhat  smaller  stabilization  loan 
(£5,000,000)  to  be  administered  by  the  same 
Stabilization  Board.  Thus,  although  the  Sino- 
American  and  the  Sino-British  stabilization  agree- 
ments were  technically  distinct,  it  tiad  been  agreed 
that  all  stabilization  operations  were  to  be  carried 
on  by  a  single  Board  composed  of  five  members : 
three  Chinese,  one  British,  and  one  American. 

On  July  26,  1941,  only  a  few  months  after  the 
establishment  of  the  Stabilization  Board,  the 
United  States  issued  a  freezing  order  under  the 
terms  of  which  the  assets  of  China  and  Japan  in 
the  United  States  were  placed  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  the  United  States  Treasury.  Chinese 
funds  in  the  United  States  were  frozen,  at  the 


APRIL    15,    1944 


359 


request  of  the  Chinese  Government,  in  order  to 
safeguard  the  operations  of  the  new  Stabilization 
Board,  since  the  old  Anglo-Chinese  Stabilization 
Fund  had  lost  heavily  at  the  hands  of  Japanese 
speculators  in  Shanghai  who  had  been  able  to  make 
free  use  of  dollar  funds  in  the  United  States. 
After  the  freezing  order  took  effect  it  became  im- 
possible, despite  the  fact  that  China  had  neither 
military  nor  political  control  over  Chinese  assets  in 
the  United  States  or  in  the  occupied  regions  of 
China,  for  any  flight  of  capital  from  China  to  take 
place  and  for  any  Chinese  funds  to  be  out  of 
Chinese  jurisdiction.  According  to  reliable  re- 
ports, received  approximately  two  months  after 
the  issuance  of  the  freezing  order,  foreign-ex- 
change speculation  had  been  brought  to  a  virtual 
standstill. 

The  stabilization  operations  which  have  been 
carried  on  since  the  establishment  of  the  new  Chi- 
nese monetary  system  in  November  1935  have  cost 
the  American  and  British  Governments  many  mil- 
lions of  dollars  in  foreign  exchange  and  somewhat 
smaller  amounts  in  actual  losses. 

Loan  to  Chirm  of  $500JX)OfiOO  in  191^2 

On  January  31,  1942  the  President  addressed  to 
Congress  a  letter  in  which  he  declared :  "Respon- 
sible officials  both  of  this  Government  and  of  the 
Government  of  China  have  brought  to  my  atten- 
tion the  existence  of  urgent  need  for  the  immedi- 
ate extension  to  China  of  economic  and  financial 
assistance,  going  beyond  in  amount  and  different 
in  form  from  such  aid  as  Congress  has  already 
authorized.  I  believe  that  such  additional  as- 
sistance would  serve  to  strengthen  China's  posi- 
tion as  regards  both  her  internal  economy  and  her 
capacity  in  general  to  function  with  great  military 
effectiveness  in  our  common  effort."  Enclosed 
with  the  President's  letter  was  a  draft  of  a  joint 
resolution  which  the  President  urged  Congress  to 
pass  in  order  to  authorize  the  Secretary  of  the 
Treasury,  with  the  approval  of  the  President,  "to 
loan  or  extend  credit  or  give  other  financial  aid 
to  China  in  an  amount  not  to  exceed  in  the  aggre- 
gate $500,000,000".  The  joint  resolution  was 
promptly  passed  by  Congress  and  was  signed  by 
the  President  on  February  7,  1942.  Less  than  a 
week  later  the  money  to  implement  this  aid  was 
appropriated. 


Lend-Lease  Assistance 

On  May  6,  1941,  less  than  two  months  after  the 
approval  of  the  Lend-Lease  Act,  the  President,  in 
accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  act,  declared 
the  defense  of  China  to  be  vital  to  the  defense  of 
the  LTnited  States.  Mr.  Lauchlin  Currie,  who  had 
gone  to  China  in  January  1941  to  survey  that 
country's  needs,  and  other  Government  officials 
had  developed,  after  Mr.  Currie's  return  to  Wash- 
ington in  March  1941,  a  lend-lease  program  de- 
signed to  meet  the  emergency  needs  of  China.  The 
President's  action  on  May  6  made  it  possible  to  put 
that  program  into  effect. 

Lend-lease  aid  to  China  in  1941  was  aimed  par- 
ticularly at  improving  transport  over  the  Burma 
Road,  the  only  artery  through  which  goods  could 
flow  into  Cliina.  The  first  lend-lease  shipments 
to  China  consisted  primarily  of  trucks,  spare  parts, 
motor  fuel,  and  lubricants  for  use  on  the  Burma 
Road  and  material  for  the  development  of  the 
highway.  As  Chiang  Kai-shek  had  made  an  ur- 
gent request  of  Mr.  Currie  during  the  latter's  visit 
to  China  for  American  technical  trafiic  advisers  to 
survey  the  Burma  Road  and  to  make  recommenda- 
tions for  increasing  traffic  over  it,  a  mission  of 
American  traffic  experts,  headed  by  Mr.  Daniel 
Arnstein,  left  Washington  in  June  1941.  After 
this  mission  had  completed  its  study,  the  Chinese 
Government  undertook  a  number  of  measures  to 
improve  the  administration  of  the  road,  more  spare 
parts  and  repair  equipment  were  furnished  to 
China  under  lend-lease,  and  a  number  of  American 
technicians,  including  loatters,  dispatchers,  ter- 
minal managers,  shop  superintendents,  foremen, 
and  mechanics,  were  recruited  in  the  United  States 
and  sent  to  China  at  lend-lease  expense. 

Concurrently  the  Chinese  Government  was 
pushing  a  program  for  hard-surfacing  tlie  road. 
Chinese  laborers  laid  a  stone  base,  while  the  United 
States  contributed  to  the  project  by  furnishing  to 
China  in  the  form  of  lend-lease  aid  grading  equip- 
ment, earth-moving  equipment,  and  thousands  of 
tons  of  asphalt. 

Because  of  these  efforts  and  because  of  the  ar- 
rival of  large  numbers  of  American  trucks,  the 
tonnage  being  carried  over  the  Burma  Road  by 
October  and  November  1941  was  almost  four  times 
greater  than  it  had  been  during  the  early  months 


360 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


of  1941.  The  quantity  of  material  carried  each 
montli  had  increased  from  4,000  to  15,000  tons. 

During  1941  lend-lease  funds  to  the  amount  of 
$15,000,000  were  also  allocated  to  China  for  use  in 
connection  with  the  construction  of  a  railroad  from 
Burma  into  China  which  would  have  made  pos- 
sible a  great  increase  in  the  volume  of  supplies  be- 
ing transported  to  the  Chinese.  The  completion 
of  this  project  was  prevented,  however,  by  Japa- 
nese military  operations  in  Burma. 

The  fall  of  Burma  and  the  seizure  of  the  south- 
ern portion  of  the  Burma  Eoad  by  the  Japanese 
left  air  transport  as  the  only  effective  means  of 
getting  supplies  into  China.  Great  progress  has 
been  made,  particularly  during  the  past  year,  in 
the  development  of  the  air-transport  route  into 
China.  It  is  stated  in  this  connection  in  the  Four- 
teenth Report  to  Congress  on  Lewi-Lease  Opera- 
tions that  "In  the  last  tliree  months  of  1943,  more 
air  cargo  for  United  States  and  Chinese  forces  was 
carried  into  China  by  air  than  in  the  preceding 
nine  months  of  the  year.  In  the  month  of  De- 
cember alone,  twice  as  much  cargo  was  flown  into 
China  as  in  all  of  1942.  In  January  1944,  the  ton- 
nage of  goods  flown  into  China  was  fifteen  times 
that  of  January  1943 — and  the  monthly  toimage  is 
continuing  to  increase."  It  is  recorded  in  the  same 
report  that  the  total  value  of  lend-lease  supplies 
transferred  to  China  through  December  31,  1943 
amounted  to  $200,995,000,  of  which  $175,576,000 
represented  goods  and  $25,419,000  represented 
services  rendered;  and  that,  in  addition,  goods 
valued  at  $191,731,000  were  consigned  to  the  United 
States  commanding  general  in  the  India-China 
theater  for  transfer  to  China. 

Constant  efforts  have  also  been  made'  to  develop 
new  land  supply  routes.  At  the  present  time,  for 
example.  United  States  engineers  are  constructing 
the  new  Ledo  Road  across  upper  Burma. 

It  should  be  added  that  action  has  also  been 
taken  to  make  India  a  great  supply  base  for  opera- 
tions which  will  have  as  major  objectives  the  ex- 
pulsion of  the  Japanese  from  Burma  and  the  re- 
opening of  land  transportation  through  that  area 
for  supplies  for  China.  Stockpiles  of  material  for 
China  are  being  established  there  in  increasing 
quantities.    Raw  materials  and  machine  tools  are 


being  sent  in  order  to  augment  India's  productive 
capacity.  American  equipment  and  technical  as- 
sistance for  the  improvement  of  India's  port  facili- 
ties and  railway  transport  system  have  been  pro- 
vided on  an  extensive  scale  in  order  to  increase 
India's  capacity  to  handle  and  transport  supplies 
essential  to  the  United  Nations  war  effort,  includ- 
ing the  mounting  stores  of  material  that  await 
shipment  to  China  as  soon  as  new  transportation 
routes  are  opened. 

The  lend-lease  assistance  supplied  to — or  for  the 
future  benefit  of — China  since  the  cutting  of  the 
Burma  Road  has  been  increasingly  concerned  with 
military  aid.  Consequently,  no  hard-and-fast  dis- 
tinction call  be  made  between  lend-lease  assistance 
and  military  aid. 

Military  Aid 

In  1941  the  Division  of  Defense  Aid  Reports, 
China  Defense  Supplies  (the  official  agency  of  the 
Chinese  Government  handling  lend-lease  requisi- 
tions) ,  and  the  War  Depai'tment  developed  a  proj- 
ect under  lend-lease  for  equipping  and  training 
large  numbers  of  Chinese  forces.  Tlie  United 
States  Government  subsequently  organized  a  mili- 
tary mission,  which  was  led  by  Brigadier  General 
(now  Major  General)  Magruder  and  was  com- 
posed of  specialists  in  all  phases  of  modern  war- 
fare, to  advise  and  consult  with  Chinese  autliori- 
ties  regarding  the  use  of  defense  materials  that 
had  been  provided  to  them  in  connection  with  this 
project,  as  well  as  those  scheduled  for  future 
delivery.  The  mission,  which  arrived  in  China 
in  November  1941,  was  supported  by  lend-lease 
funds. 

Little  of  the  equipment  intended  for  China's 
ground  forces  under  this  program  ever  reached 
China,  but  the  United  States  was  more  successful 
in  furnishing  China  with  assistance  from  the  air. 
Colonel  (now  Major  General)  Claire  Chennault. 
who  had  been  serving  the  Chinese  Government  as 
a  special  technical  adviser  to  the  Chinese  Air  Force 
since  1937,  and  General  P.  T.  Mow  of  the  Chinese 
Air  Force  had  visited  Washington  in  November 
1940  on  a  mission  for  Generalissimo  Chiang  Kai- 
shek  in  an  effort  (1)  to  obtain  fighter  planes  and  to 
enlist  volunteer  American   airmen   to   fly  them 


APRIL   IS,    1044 


361 


against  the  Japanese  and  (2)  to  start  a  program 
for  building  a  strong  and  well-equipped  Chinese 
Air  Force. 

By  January  1941  Colonel  Chennault's  plan  to 
obtain  fighter  planes  and  American  pilots  had 
been  approved.  Arrangements  were  made  to  allot 
to  the  Chinese  Government  100  P-40  fighter  planes 
whicli  had  previously  been  allocated  for  delivery 
to  Great  Britain,  and  by  the  end  of  February  1941 
the  first  36  of  tlie  planes  had  been  shipped  from 
New  York.  Meanwhile  Colonel  Chennault,  with 
the  help  of  the  War  and  Navy  Departments,  suc- 
ceeded in  obtaining  the  services  of  100  veteran 
pilots  and  150  technicians  and  ground-crew  per- 
sonnel. Thus  there  was  formed  the  nucleus  for 
the  American  Volunteer  Group  (the  "Flying 
Tigers"),  which  was  formally  constituted  by  an 
order  issued  by  Chiang  Kai-shek  on  August  1, 1941 
and  which,  prior  to  its  disbandment  in  July  1942, 
provided  an  effective  air  defense  for  southwest 
China  and  rendered  invaluable  assistance  to  hard- 
pressed  Chinese  and  other  forces  in  Burma. 

The  outbreak  of  war  in  the  Pacific  created  an 
urgent  need  for  American  air  forces  in  the  India- 
China  theater.  Consequently,  the  Tenth  United 
States  Air  Force  was  organized  in  India  early  in 
1942,  and,  by  the  time  of  the  disbandment  of  the 
American  Volunteer  Group,  an  air  unit  of  the 
American  Army  had  been  established  in  China. 
The  air  unit  in  China,  which  was  commanded  by 
General  Chennault  and  which  included  among  its 
personnel  a  number  of  the  former  "Flying  Tigers", 
operated  as  a  part  of  the  Tenth  United  States  Air 
Force  until  March  10, 1943  when,  in  I'ecognition  of 
its  increasingly  important  role,  it  was  formally 
activated  as  the  Fourteenth  United  States  Air 
Force.  This  force  has  kept  control  of  the  air  over 
unoccupied  China,  has  engaged  in  constantly  ex- 
panding operations  against  the  Japanese,  has  ably 
performed  the  vital  mission  of  protecting  the  ter- 
minal bases  of  air  transport,  and  has  helped  the 
Chinese  create  one  of  the  most  efficient  aircraft- 
warning  systems  in  existence.  The  activities  of 
this  force  have  been  of  inestimable  value  in  helping 
to  maintain  China's  military  position  and  morale. 
The  Tenth  United  States  Air  Force  has  also  con- 
tinued to  give  effective,  although  less  direct,  aid 
to  Cliina. 


In  addition  to  furnishing  China  with  fighter 
planes  and  pilots,  the  United  States  took  steps  to 
put  into  effect  a  program  for  building  a  strong  and 
well-equipped  Chinese  Air  Force.  In  May  1941, 
shortly  after  China  was  declared  eligible  to  receive 
lend-lease  aid,  an  American  Air  Mission  headed  by 
Brigadier  General  Clagett,  Commander  of  the 
Philippine  Air  Force,  was  sent  to  China  to  survey 
the  situation.  Although  the  Mission's  report 
stressed  CMna's  critical  need  for  fighters  and 
bombers,  it  contained  the  recommendation  that  the 
first  action  taken  should  be  the  development  of  a 
progi-am  to  train  Chinese  pilots  and  mechanics,  as 
China  did  not  have  enough  men  trained  to  fly  or 
maintain  the  planes  that  were  needed. 

As  a  result  of  this  recommendation,  and  as  a  re- 
sult of  the  almost  insuperable  difficulties  that 
would  be  encountered  in  trying  to  establish  avia- 
tion training  centers  in  China,  there  was  developed 
a  program  for  using  lend-lease  funds  to  train  Chi- 
nese flyers  in  the  United  States.  Groups  of  Chi- 
nese pilots  have  since  that  time  taken  standard 
United  States  Army  Air  Corps  training  courses  in 
this  country,  at  Thunderbird  Field  in  Arizona. 
The  American  Army  has  also  undertaken  the  train- 
ing of  Chinese  aviation  personnel  in  India. 

The  program  for  training  Chinese  aviation  per- 
sonnel has  had  an  important  bearing  on  opera- 
tions against  the  Japanese.  In  November  1943 
announcement  was  made  of  the  formation  of  a 
Chinese-American  Composite  Wing  of  the  Chi- 
nese Air  Force.  This  wing,  under  the  command 
of  General  Chennault  is  composed  of  Chinese  and 
American  airmen  and  ground  units  and  is  equipped 
with  the  latest  type  of  P^O's  and  B-25's.  As  it 
is  intended  that  this  wing  shall  form  the  nucleus 
for  a  strong  Chinese  air  force,  it  has  been  an- 
nounced that,  as  the  Chinese  personnel  gain  ex- 
perience, the  American  jjersonnel  will  gradually 
be  withdrawn. 

Soon  after  the  entry  of  the  United  States  into 
the  war  there  was  established  an  American  Mili- 
tary Mission  to  China  under  Major  General  (now 
Lieutenant  General)  Stilwell.  General  Stilwell, 
who  was  also  Chief  of  Staff  to  Generalissimo 
Chiang  Kai-shek,  was  entrusted  with  the  duty  of 
representing  the  United  States  in  the  manifold  ac- 
tivities relating  to  our  military  interests  in  China. 


362 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


Under  the  direction  of  this  Mission  and  of  General 
Stilwell's  commnnd  in  India,  there  was  undertaken 
an  extensive  program  for  equipping  and  training 
Chinese  ground  foi'ces,  as  well  as  Chinese  air  units. 

At  camps  in  India  large  numbers  of  Chinese 
troops  have  been  equipped,  through  lend-lease, 
with  the  latest  tyi)es  of  American  weapons.  Amer- 
ican Army  officers  have  trained  them  in  the  use 
of  those  weapons  and  have  organized  them  into 
hard-hitting  triangular  divisions,  some  of  the  per- 
sonnel of  which  have  already  demonstrated  their 
combat  efficiency  in  operations  in  northern  Burma. 
This  program  has  provided  not  only  complete  tac- 
tical units  but  also  cadres  for  the  training  of 
Chinese  divisions  beyond  the  mountains  in  China 
proper. 

Since  April  1943  American  Army  officers,  each 
of  whom  is  a  specialist  in  some  phase  of  modern 
warfare,  have  also  been  operating  training  centers 
for  Chinese  officers  in  China.  A  field-artillery 
center,  for  example,  has  graduated  more  than  5,000 
officers;  an  infantry  center  has  graduated  more 
than  3,000.  American  officers  have  also  gone  into 
the  field  with  units  of  the  Chinese  Army  to  serve 
as  instructors,  advisers,  and  observers;  and  Amer- 
ican ordnance  officers,  with  the  assistance  of  Chi- 
nese mechanics,  liave  been  engaged  in  the  work  of 
restoring  worn  Chinese  equipment.  It  should  also 
be  mentioned  that  American  field-hospital  units 
have  been  sent  to  China  and  to  Northern  Burma 
to  aid  the  Chinese  armies  and  that  American  Army 
engineers  and  other  specialists  have  been  sent  to 
China  to  help  improve  communications  and  air- 
base  facilities. 

An  outstanding  form  of  military  aid  that  has 
been  rendered  to  China  has  been  the  contribution 
American  Army  forces  have  made  to  the  develop- 
ment and  improvement  of  transportation  facilities 
for  China.  After  the  Burma  Eoad  was  closed,  vir- 
tually all  the  supplies  destined  for  China  had  to  be 
transported  by  air  from  India.  Part  of  this  traffic 
has  been  carried  by  planes  operated  by  the  China 
National  Aviation  Corporation,  which  also  oper- 
ates several  important  air  routes  within  China. 
Included  in  this  company's  fleet  of  American 
planes  are  cargo  planes  which  have  been  furnished 
to  China  through  lend-lease  channels.  The  bulk 
of  the  supplies  which  are  flown  from  India  to 


China  are,  however,  transported  by  the  United 
States  Army  Air  Transport  Command. 

Since  April  8, 1942  the  United  States  Army  Air 
Transport  Command  has  operated  a  ferry  service 
over  the  towering  "hump"  of  the  Himalayas.  The 
moving  of  cargoes  by  this  route  has  been  accom- 
plished only  because  of  the  great  skill,  persever- 
ance, and  personal  daring  of  the  members  of  the 
Command.  The  transport  planes  which  shut- 
tle day  and  night  over  the  most  hazardous  terrain 
in  the  world  must  carry  not  only  the  greatest  pos- 
sible load  of  supplies  for  use  in  equipping  the  Chi- 
nese Army  and  in  building  and  defending  China's 
airdromes,  but  also  every  item  of  equipment  needed 
for  the  maintenance  and  expanding  operations  of 
the  Fourteenth  United  States  Air  Force  in  China. 
They  must  accommodate  a  constant  flow  of  mili- 
tary personnel,  and  on  return  trips  to  India  they 
are  loaded  with  important  Chinese  exports,  such 
as  tungsten,  for  the  use  of  China's  allies. 

A  C-87  transport  can  deliver  four  tons  of  100- 
octane  gasoline,  but  to  do  this  it  must  itself  use 
three  and  one-half  tons  of  the  precious  commodity. 
Before  the  bombers  comprising  a  heavy  bombard- 
.  ment  group  can  go  on  one  combat  flight,  they  must 
make  four  trips  over  the  "hump,"  as  they  must  pro- 
vide their  own  gasoline,  bombs,  and  replacement 
parts. 

Despite  the  tremendous  difficulties  which  have 
been  encountered,  and  despite  losses  of  men  and 
equipment  because  of  bad  weather  and  attacks  by 
Japanese  fighter  planes,  the  Air  Transport  Com- 
mand has  continued  to  deliver  the  goods  in  an 
increasingly  effective  manner.  Reference  has 
already  been  made  in  the  section  headed  "Lend- 
Lease  Assistance"  to  the  fact  that  in  December 
1943  twice  as  much  cargo  was  flown  into  China 
as  in  all  of  1942  and  that  the  tonnage  of  the  goods 
flown  into  China  during  January  1944  was  15  times 
greater  than  that  flown  in  during  January  1943. 

This  growth  in  the  volume  of  the  goods  that 
can  be  carried  is  the  result  of  determined  efforts  to 
improve  the  efficiency  and  to  expand  the  facilities 
of  the  service.  In  April  1942  the  Air  Transport 
Command  had  for  use  in  China  only  a  few  pilots, 
second-hand  two-engined  planes,  and  poor  air- 
field facilities.  Since  that  time  the  Command  has 
built   up    a   remarkable   organization   which   is 


APRIL    15,    1944- 


363 


equipped  with  a  great  fleet  of  transports  (includ- 
ing Army  f our-engined  Liberators) ,  which  has  an 
extensive  sj'stem  of  airfields  and  ground  facilities, 
and  which  is  said  to  employ  more  transport  pilots 
than  flew  in  the  United  States  at  any  time  before 
the  war.  General  Stilwell  has  recently  announced 
that,  with  a  view  to  providing  the  Fourteenth 
United  States  Air  Force  and  the  Chinese  armies 
with  enough  supplies  to  support  intensified  opera- 
tions against  the  Japanese,  new-type  planes,  capa- 
ble of  making  non-stop  flights  from  India's  west- 
coast  ports  to  China  and  of  carrying  much  larger 
loads  than  those  carried  by  the  transports  now  in 
operation,  will  be  placed  in  service  as  soon  as 
adequate  new  airfields,  now  being  constructed,  are 
ready. 

In  addition  to  increasing  the  air-transport 
facilities  between  India  and  China,  the  Axnerican 
Arm}'  is  cooperating  with  Chinese  forces  in  the 
construction  and  protection  against  Japanese 
attacks  of  the  new  Ledo  Road  to  China  through 
northern  Burma.  This  work  is  progressing  satis- 
factorily despite  extremely  unfavorable  weather 
conditions. 

While  detailed  information  with  regard  to  mili- 
tary supplies  thus  far  shipped  to  China  has  not 
yet  been  published,  some  idea  of  their  character 
may  be  gained  from  the  Fourteenth  Report  to  Con- 
gress on  Lend-Lease  Operations.  It  is  stated  in 
this  report  that  lend-lease  supplies  transferred  to 
Ciiina  through  December  31,  1943  included,  in  ad- 
dition to  industrial  items  valued  at  $28,952,000, 
munitions  totaling  $146,545,000  in  value.  These 
munitions  comprised,  in  the  descending  order  of 
tlieir  value,  aircraft  and  parts,  motor  vehicles  and 
parts,  ammunition,  ordnance,  and  watercraft  and 
parts.  During  the  same  period  there  were,  in  ad- 
dition, consigned  to-  the  United  States  command- 
ing general  in  the  India-China  theatre  for  transfer 
to  China  goods  valued  at  $191,731,000,  consisting 
of  ammunition,  tanks  and  parts,  ordnance,  motor 
vehicles,  and  miscellaneous  military  equipment. 
To  appraise  the  significance  of  these  figures,  one 
should  bear  in  mind  the  great  increase  in  the 
volume  of  supplies  sent  to  China  which  has  de- 
veloped only  within  recent  months. 

Some  assistance,  including  the  training  of  naval 
personnel  in  the  United  States,  has  also  been 
rendered  to  China  by  the  United  States  Navy. 


Of  greater  sigriificancie  than  the  action  that  has 
been  taken  thus  far  to  aid  China  in  a  military  way 
is  the  promise  which  has  been  made  regarding 
future  assistance  to  China.  The  United  States 
Government  stands  ready  to  supply  Chinese  armies 
with  the  needed  arms  and  equipment  as  rapidly  as 
the  opening  of  transportation  routes  permits.  The 
United  States  Government  has  repeatedly  stated, 
both  before  and  since  the  outbreak  of  war  in  the 
Pacific,  that  it  would  not  permit  the  conquest  of 
China  by  Japan.  The  United  States  Government 
has,  in  successive  declarations  of  war  aims,  clearly 
indicated  that  it  will  not  rest  until  Japan  has  been 
driven  from  the  territories  which  it  has  occupied 
by  force  and  is  rendered  incapable  of  future  ag- 
gression. The  armed  forces  and  resources  of  the  ■ 
United  States  are  pledged  to  the  accomplishment 
of  this  task. 

Technical  Assistance 

Cultural-relations  program  of  the  Department  of 
State 

In  January  1942  the  cultural-relations  program, 
which  had  previously  been  restricted  to  the  other 
American  republics,  was  extended  to  include 
China.  The  three  basic  activities  which  were  in- 
augurated at  that  time  were :  (1)  The  provision  of 
outstanding  technical  and  educational  specialists 
to  China;  (2)  the  extension  of  aid  to  Chinese  stu- 
dents in  the  United  States,  thus  augmenting 
China's  supply  of  skilled  technicians;  and  (3)  the 
furnishing  of  certain  urgently  needed  informa- 
tional materials  such  as  microfilms  of  scholarly  and 
scientific  articles  and  books,  and  documentary  and 
educational  motion  pictures.  A  grant  which  made 
it  possible  to  initiate  these  activities  was  obtained 
from  the  President's  Emergency  Fund. 

Since  January  1942  the  United  States  has,  at  the 
request  of  the  Chinese  Government,  sent  21  Ameri- 
can specialists  to  China  to  consult  with  and  advise 
Chinese  experts  regarding  problems  in  such  fields 
as  agriculture,  communications,  cooperatives,  en- 
gineering, health,  industry,  information,  and  river 
control.  They  have  already  done  much  useful 
work  in  their  respective  fields,  and  nine  of  them 
have  completed  their  assignments. 

Other  forms  of  aid  which  are  being  currently 
rendered  to  China  under  the  program  include: 
grants  for  tuition  and  living  expenses  to  some  200 


364 

Chinese  students  in  the  United  States ;  the  place- 
ment in  practical  training  in  this  country  of  ap- 
proximately 400  Chinese  students  who  have  com- 
pleted their  studies ;  the  monthly  transmission  to 
China  of  about  100,000  pages  of  scientific  and  tech- 
nical journals  in  microfilm  form  and  the  equipping 
with  projecting  apparatus  of  microfilm  libraries; 
the  preparation  of  Chinese  sound  tracks  for  Chi- 
nese non-theatrical  motion  pictures ;  and  the  meet- 
ing of  special  requests  from  Chinese  scholars  and 
scientists  for  technical  data.  The  Department  has 
also  defrayed  the  expenses  of  a  year's  visit  to  the 
United  States  for  six  professors  selected  by  the 
faculties  of  leading  Chinese  universities. 

Assistance  through  other  Government  agencies 

A  number  of  United  States  Government  agencies 
other  than  those  which  have  already  been  men- 
tioned in  this  article  have  furnished  to  the  Chi- 
nese Government  various  kinds  of  assistance. 
"While  limitations  of  space  and  security  prevent 
the  presentation  of  any  detailed  description  of  the 
activities  of  these  agencies,  the  following  examples 
may  serve  to  indicate  the  wide  range  of  subjects 
with  which  they  deal :  Board  of  Economic  War- 
fare personnel  have  rendered  valuable  teclvnical 
assistance  to  the  Chinese  Government  in  connec- 
tion with  transportation  and  other  problems ;  rep- 
resentatives of  the  Office  of  War  Information  have 
disseminated  in  China  news  and  literature  designed 
to  give  the  Chinese  people  a  picture  of  the  various 
phases  of  our  war  effort;  a  representative  of  the 
Department  of  the  Treasury  was  a  member  of  the 
Stabilization  Board  until  the  suspension  of  activ- 
ities; the  Library  of  Congress  has  permitted  rep- 
resentatives of  Chinese  libraries  and  universities  to 
select  books  for  their  institutions  from  the  Li- 
brary's reserves  of  duplicate  editions ;  and  several 
Government  agencies  have  aided  Chinese  sent  to 
this  country  in  their  efforts  to  obtain  technical 
training  in  fields  directly  or  indirectly  related  to 
China's  war  effort. 

American  Ked  Cross  Assistance 

The  American  Red  Cross,  which  began  to  send 
relief  materials  to  China  soon  after  that  country 
was  invaded  by  the  Japanese,  has  vigorously  per- 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 

sisted,  despite  many  difficulties,  in  its  efforts  to  aid 
China  in  every  possible  respect. 

In  October  1940  representatives  of  the  American 
Red  Cross  were  sent  to  China  in  order  to  supervise 
relief  activities.  They  established  general  areas  of 
operation  in  both  occupied  and  unoccupied  China 
and  directed  the  distribution  in  those  areas  of  large 
quantities  of  rice  and  medicinal  supplies.  While 
civilian-relief  operations  in  the  occupied  areas 
were  terminated  by  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Japan,  the  relief  work 
in  west  China  was  continued  on  an  extensive  scale. 

The  Japanese  occupation  of  Burma  and  inter-, 
ruption  of  land  communication  with  China  caused 
a  drastic  reduction  in  the  volume  of  the  shipments 
of  relief  materials  into  China.  While  the  Ameri- 
can Red  Cross  continued  to  send  to  India  consid- 
erable quantities  of  supplies,  especially  drugs  and 
medicines,  for  storage  in  warehouses  until  such 
time  as  they  could  be  flown  into  China,  the  cargo 
space  available  for  such  materials  in  transport 
planes  was  limited.  In  November  1943,  however, 
there  occurred  the  first  large-scale  movement  of 
American  Red  Cross  relief  materials  to  China  since 
the  closing  of  the  Burma  Road,  for  in  that  month 
15  plane-loads  of  medical  supplies  were  flown  from 
India  to  China.  It  was  announced  that  other  large 
shipments  were  to  follow. 

Despite  the  numerous  obstacles  which  impeded 
the  flow  of  relief  supplies  to  China,  the  value  of 
the  materials  which  the  American  Red  Cross  had 
succeeded  in  sending  to  China  had  reached  a  total 
of  $4,718,000  by  the  end  of  December  1943.  Of  this 
amount  $3,454,000  Avas  furnished  by  the  United 
States  Government  and  the  balance  was  furnished 
by  the  American  Red  Cross. 

Assistance  by  Private  American  Agencies 

While  this  article  is  concerned  primarily  with 
the  assistance  given  to  China  by  the  United  States 
Government,  no  discussion  of  American  aid  to 
China  would  be  complete  without  at  least  some 
reference  to  the  important  role  played  in  this  con- 
nection by  private  American  institutions.  There 
should  be  included  in  this  category  not  only  the 
large  number  of  organizations  which  have  been 
carrying  on   educational   and  medical   work  in 


APRIL    15,    11B44 


365 


China  for  a  long  time  but  also  the  many  new  or- 
ganizations which  have  been  established  for  the 
specific  purpose  of  meeting  China's  wartime  needs 
in  such  fields  as  education,  famine  relief,  and 
medicine. 

An  idea  of  the  impressive  proportions  of  the 
assistance  rendered  to  China  by  these  organiza- 
tions may  be  gained  by  citing  the  work  done  in  the 
past  by  only  one  of  them,  United  China  Relief. 
During  1942  United  China  Relief  raised  a  total 
of  $6,931,317  for  relief  purposes.  During  1943  the 
amount  raised  for  China  by  United  China  Relief 
direct  and  through  the  National  War  Fund  was 
$8,189,191. 


The  Department 


ESTABLISHMENT  OF  AN  INDUSTRY  BRANCH 
IN  THE  COMMODITIES  DIVISION  OF  THE 
OFFICE  OF  ECONOMIC  AFFAIRS 

Departmental  Order  1254  of  AprU  10,  1944  ^ 

The  policies  of  the  United  States  Government 
on  cartels  and  related  international  industrial  ar- 
rangements are  inseparable  aspects  of  United 
States  commercial  policy,  and  accordingly  are  of 
direct  concern  to  the  Department  of  State.  Dur- 
ing the  coming  periods  of  peace  settlement,  post- 
war adjustment,  industrial  rehabilitation,  and  re- 
vival of  international  trade,  cartel  problems  will  be 
a  major  concern  in  international  affairs. 

In  order  that  responsibility  for  the  Depart- 
ment's policy  and  action  on  all  matters  regarding 
international  industrial  arrangements  may  be 
clearly  fixed  and  properly  coordinated,  there  is 
hereby  established  an  Industry  Branch  in  the  Com- 
modities Division  of  the  Office  of  Economic  Af- 
fairs. Departmental  Order  1218  of  January  15, 
1944,  is  accordingly  amended. 

The'  Industry  Branch  shall  be  responsible  for 
initiation,  formulation,  and  coordination  of  policy 
and  action  on  all  cartel  and  related  international 
industrial  arrangements.  This  will  include  such 
activities  as : 


^  Effective  Apr.  17, 1944. 


(a)  Assembling  and  analyzing  basic  data  and 
information^,  and  preparing  background  and  policy 
studies  on  international  cartels,  inter-corporate 
relations  of  United  States  and  foreign  firms,  pat- 
ent and  other  market  regulating  agreements,  trade- 
marks and  trade  names,  intergovernmental  indus- 
trial agreements,  and  related  matters. 

(b)  Development  of  policies  and  programs  for 
controlling  cartels,  combines,  restrictive  patent 
agreements,  and  other  restrictive  international 
business  arrangements. 

(c)  Determination  and  promotion  of  standards 
for  intergovernmental  industrial  agreements  and 
of  the  forms  of  international  organization  required 
to  implement  such  standards  and  general  pro- 
grams. 

(d)  Development  of  data,  recommendations, 
and  policies,  in  collaboration  with  other  Divisions 
of  the  Department  and  other  interested  Federal 
agencies,  such  as  the  Department  of  Justice,  De- 
partment' of  Commerce,  Office  of  Strategic  Serv- 
ices, and  the  Foreign  Economic  Administration, 
for  use  in  international  discussions  and  negotia- 
tions regarding  international  cartel  matters. 

(e)  Formulation  of  policy  on  matters  of  inter- 
national industrial  arrangements  involved  in  the 
treatment  of  industry  in  enemy  and  ex-enemy 
countries  during  the  period  of  military  occupation. 

(f)  Review  of  policy  documents  pertaining  to 
foreign  industrial  arrangements  submitted  to  the 
Department  by  other  Federal  agencies  and  inter- 
departmental committees. 

( g)  Provision  of  a  central  source  of  current  in- 
formation for  other  Offices  of  the  Department  on 
cartels  and  related  aspects  of  international  indus- 
trial arrangements,  including  agreements  allocat- 
ing quotas  or  areas,  price-fixing  arrangements,  and 
patent  and  trade-mark  agreements. 

(h)  Provision  of  secretariat  (agenda,  support- 
ing documents,  and  minutes),  and  participation  in 
the  work  of  interdivisional  or  interdepartmental 
committees  concerned  with  problems  of  interna- 
tional industrial  organization. 

(i)  Review  of  legislative  proposals  and  discus- 
sions relating  to  foreign  contracts,  patents,  trade- 
marks, cartels,  etc. 

(j)  Policy  advice  to  Divisions  of  the  Depart- 
ment and  other  Federal  agencies  with  regard  to 


366 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


current  supply  arrangements  involving  industrial 
combines,  cartels,  and  similar  problems. 

In  carrying  out  these  responsibilities,  the  In- 
dustry Branch  of  the  Commodities  Division  shall 
work  in  close  collaboration  with  other  Divisions 
of  the  Department  whose  work  bears  upon  cartel 
questions,  particularly  the  Division  of  Financial 
and  Monetary  Affairs,  the  Division  of  Commercial 
Policy  and  other  Divisions  of  the  Office  of  Eco- 
nomic Affairs,  the  Liberated  Areas  Division  and 
other  Divisions  of  the  Office  of  Wartime  Economic 
Affairs,  and  the  Divisions  of  the  Office  of  Special 
Political  Affairs. 

The  Industry  Branch  shall  act  as  the  Depart- 
ment's liaison  with  the  Department  of  Justice  on 
any  matters  affecting  international  cartels  and  in- 
dustrial arrangements. 

CoRDELL  Hull 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Order  1255  of  April  13,  1944, 
effective  April  10,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  David  McK.  Key  as  Acting  Liaison 
Officer  with  responsibility  for  assisting  the  Sec- 
retary and  the  Under  Secretary  in  their  liaison 
with  the  War  and  Navy  Departments  and  such 
other  duties  as  may  be  assigned  to  him. 


Treaty  Information 


DECLARATION  BV  UNITED  NATIONS 

An  announcement  regarding  the  signature  of 
the  Declaration  by  United  Nations  for  Liberia 
by  the  Liberian  Consul  General  at  New  York,  the 
Honorable  Walter  F.  Walker,  and  the  text  of  a 
telegram  sent  by  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the 
Liberian  Secretary  of  State  concerning  the  adher- 
ence by  Liberia  to  the  Declaration  appear  in  this 
issue  of  the  Bulletin  under  the  heading  "The 
War". 

The  Declaration  by  United  Nations  (Executive 
Agreement  Series  236),  which  was  concluded  at 
Washington  on  January  1,  1942,  was  signed  by 
representatives  of  twenty-six  nations  on  that  date. 
Since  January  1, 1942  nine  additional  nations  have 


adhered  to  the  Declaration  and  their  respective 
representatives  have  signed  the  document. 

Representatives  of  the  following  nations  signed 
the  Declaration  by  United  Nations  on  January  1, 
1942: 


United  States  of  America 
United   Kingdom  of  Great 

Britain     and     Northern 

Ireland 
Union   of    Soviet    Socialist 

Republics 
China 
Australia 
Belgium 
Canada 
Costa  Rica 
Cuba 

Czechoslovakia 
Dominican  Republic 
El  Salvador 

The  following  nations  have  adhered  to  the 
Declaration  and  their  respective  representatives 
have  signed  the  document  since  January  1, 1942 : 

Bolivia 

Brazil 

Colombia 

Ethiopia 

Iran 


Greece 

Guatenrala 

Haiti 

Honduras 

India 

Luxembourg 

Netherlands 

New  Zsaland 

Nicaragua 

Norway 

Panama 

Poland 

Union  of  South  Africa 

Yugoslavia 


Iraq 
Liberia 
Mexico 

Commonwealth  of  the 
Philippines 


REGULATION  OF  INTER-AMERICAN 
AUTOMOTIVE  TRAFFIC 

The  White  House  announced  ^  that  on  April  12, 
1944  the  President  transmitted  to  the  Senate,  with 
a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  consent  of  that 
body  to  ratification,  a  Convention  on  the  Eegula- 
tion  of  Inter-American  Automotive  Traffic,  which 
was  opened  for  signature  at  the  Pan  American 
Union  on  December  15,  1943  and  signed  on  behalf 
of  the  United  States  on  December  31,  1943. 


Legislation 


The  Illinois  Waterway — Diversion  of  Water  from  Lake 
Michigan  :  Hearings  before  the  Committee  on  Rivers  and 
Harbors,  House  of  Representatives,  78th  Cong.,  1st 
sess.,  on  H.J.  Res.  148.  September  28,  November  9,  10, 
11,  1943.     vi,  270  pp. 


'  White  House  pre.ss  release,  Apr.  12,  1944. 


APRIL    15,    1944  ■  367 


Publications 


Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington 
March  3,  19-12.    Executive  Agreement  Series  370.    Pub- 
lication 2091.     5  pp.     5«(. 
Diplomatic  List,  April  1944.     Publication  209.5.     ii,  123  pp. 
Subscription,  $1  a  year ;  single  copy  10«(. 
Department  of  State  Counseling  ami  Guidance  for  the  Foreign  Student.     By 

William  H.  Dennis,  Division  of  Science,  Education,  and 
Mobilization  of  Productive  Resources  of  Brazil :  Agree-  Art,  Department  of  State.     Publication  2097.     ii,  8  pp. 

ment  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Brazil —  Free. 


0.  S.  GOVERHMtNT  rRINTINC  OFFICE:  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  PrintinR  Office,  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents   -    -   .   .    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THB  AFPHOVAL  OF  THE  DIBECTOn  OF  THE  BUBEAU  OF  THE  EDDGET 


^'Jr- 


^^" 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BU 


J 


J 


H 


1  rm 


J 


Tin 


c 


APRIL  22,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  252— Publication  2111 


ontents 


The  War  Pag» 

International  Stabilization  Plan 371 

Preservation  of  Rome  From  Destruction 371 

Petroleum  Questions:  Preliminary  Discussions  With  the 

United  Kingdom 372 

Status  of  Countries  in  Relation  to  the  War,  April  22, 

1944 373 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 
Twenty-sixth  International  Labor  Conference: 

jNlcssage  of  President  Roosevelt 382 

Message  of  the  Secretary  of  State 383 

Fifth  Pan  American  Conference  of  National  Directors 

of  Health 384 

First  West  Indian  Conference 384 

Europe 

Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  Governor  General  of 

the  Belgian  Congo 384 

American  Republics 

Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  President-Elect  of 

Costa  Rica 385 

Distinguished   Visitor  From   the  Other  American 

Republics  .    .    .    . 385 

Australasia 

Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  Prune  Minister  of 

Australia 385 

[over] 


U.  s.  suFERifrr:::::;;:  cr  r:.:j,\,j<Ki$ 
JUN  15  1^44 


0 


ontents-coNTmvED 

Publications  rage 

The  Fifteenth  Year  of  the  Department's  "New  Pubhca- 

tions  Program":  By  E.  Wilder  Spaulding  ....  385 
"Papers  Kehxting  to  the  Foreign  Relations  of  the  United 

States,  1929",  Vohimes  II  and  III 387 

The  Foreign  Service 

Embassy  Rank  for  Representation  Between  the  United 

States  and  Portugal 388 

Consular  Offices 388 

Treaty  Information 

Agreement  for  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilita- 
tion Admmistration 388 

Legislation 388 


U.    S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTINS  OFFICE:  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Piinting  Office.  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents     -     -     -     -     Subscription  price.  $2.75  a  year 

PDBLISHED    WEEKLY    WITH    THE    APPUOVAL    OF    THE    DIRECTOR    OF    THE    BDREAC    OF    THE    BUDGET 


The  War 


INTERNATIONAL  STABILIZATION  PLAN 


[Released  to  the  press  April  22] 

The  Secretary  of  State  made  the  following 
statement  on  April  22,  1944  concerning  the 
"progress  report"'  on  tlie  Treasury  Department's 
International  Stabilization  Plan  made  by  Secre- 
tary Morgenthau  to  seven  committees  of  the 
Senate  and  the  House  of  Representatives : 

"In  my  estimation,  vrorld  stabilization  of  cur- 
rencies and  promotion  of  fruitful  international 
investment,  wliich  are  basic  to  an  expansion  of 
mutually  beneficial  trade,  are  of  first  order  of 
importance  for  the  post-war  period.  We  liave  no 
way  of  knowing,  of  course,  how  far  away  victory 
may  be.  But  we  do  know  that  victory  will  come 
sooner  or  later;  and  when  it  does  we  will  be  faced 
with  the  most  difficult  international  reconstruc- 
tion job  in  the  history  of  the  world.  A  great  many 
things  will  tend  to  interfere  with  our  getting  on 
with  the  reconstruction  expeditiously — natural 
hurdles  that  we  have  no  control  over.  But  among 
the  greatest  difficulties  will  be  uncertainty  as  to 
tlie  stability  of  currencies  and  as  to  the  flow  of 
international  investment  for  jDost-war  reconstruc- 
tion and  development.  These  we  can  do  some- 
thing about — and  most  assuredly  should.    With- 


out solving  these  problems  we  shall  be  immensely 
handicapped  in  seeing  an  expansion  of  our  foreign 
trade  and  balanced  prosperity  for  our  nation. 

"Under  the  leadership  of  the  Treasury  Depart- 
ment, technicians  of  this  and  30  other  countries 
have  worked  out  a  set  of  basic  i^rinciples  with 
which  all  these  technicians  are  in  substantial 
agreement.  These  principles  constitute  a  frame- 
work within  which  a  plan  can  be  developed  with 
the  minimum  number  of  trappings  and  complica- 
tions— a  plan  that  will  help  bring  prospei'ity  to 
our  own  country  when  the  war  is  won. 

"No  government  is  yet  committed  to  any  defi- 
nite plan  or  even  to  these  principles.  It  is  my 
earnest  hope,  however,  that  Congress,  when  it  is 
called  upon  to  make  a  decision,  will  consider  the 
value  of  the  international  currency-stabilization 
and  investment  programs  as  essential  means  of 
strengthening  our  own  economy  here  at  home. 

"If  such  programs  can  be  put  into  operation  be- 
fore the  end  of  the  war,  we  will  save  much  time  in 
the  task  of  bringing  about  domestic  and  world- 
wide prosperity  when  hostilities  cease,  and  im- 
measurably strengthen  the  prospects  for  an  endur- 
ing peace." 


PRESERVATION  OF  ROME  FROM  DESTRUCTION 


[Keleased  to  the  press  April  19] 

The  text  of  a  communication  from  President 
Roosevelt  to  ilr.  de  Valera,  the  Irish  Prime  Minis- 
ter, is  printed  below.     This  message  was  trans- 


mitted  on   April   3   by   the   Secretary   of  Stat* 
through  the  Irish  Minister  in  Washington. 

"I  have  received  through  your  Minister  your 
recent    communication    concerning    the    danger 

371 


372 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


which  now  threatens  the  city  of  Rome.  I  share 
your  concern  for  the  preservation  of  that  ancient 
monument  of  our  common  civilization  and  faith. 
"It  is  well  known  that  American  military  au- 
thorities in  Italy  are  committed  to  a  policy  of 
avoiding  damage  to  religious  shrines  and  histori- 
cal monuments  to  the  extent  humanly  possible  in 
modern  warfare.  This  ajDplies  to  the  city  of  Rome 
as  well  as  to  other  parts  of  Italy  where  the  forces 
of  the  United  Nations  are  engaged  in  active  fight- 
ing. We  have  tried  scrupulously — often  at  con- 
siderable sacrifice — to  spare  religious  and  cultural 
monuments  and  we  shall  continue  to  do  so. 


"However,  in  addressing  an  appeal  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  to  preserve  Rome 
from  destruction,  you  are,  of  course,  aware  that 
the  Germans,  occupying  the  Italian  capital  by 
force,  are  using  to  the  limit  of  its  capacities  the 
communication  network  and  other  facilities  of 
Rome  to  further  a  purely  German  military  opera- 
tion. If  the  German  forces  were  not  entrenched 
in  Rome,  no  question  would  arise  concerning  the 
city's  preservation. 

''I  note  that  you  have  sent  a  similar  communica- 
tion to  the  German  Government.  The  fate  of 
Rome  rests  in  that  quarter." 


PETROLEUM  QUESTIONS 

Preliminary  Discussions   With  the  United  Kingdom 


[Released  to  the  press  April  19] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
13,  1944  that  ten  American  oil  officials  had  been 
invited  to  meet  with  the  group  of  experts  who  will 
conduct  for  the  United  States  Government  the 
preliminary  exploratory  oil  discussions  with  the 
Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  which  began 
April  18  in  Washington.  This  meeting  took 
place  in  Washington  last  week.  To  facilitate  the 
day-to-day  discussions  with  the  British  represen- 
tatives three  of  these  ten  oil-industry  officials,  Mr. 
John  A.  Brown,  Mr.  W.  S.  S.  Rodgers,  and  Mr.  A. 
Jacobsen,  have  been  requested  to  sit  as  advisers 
with  the  United  States  group  of  experts.  Addi- 
tional advisers  from  among  the  ten  oil-industry 
officials  announced  on  April  13  will  be  asked  to 
sit  with  the  American  expert  group  from  time  to 
time,  should  that  prove  desirable  in  the  light  of 
specific  problems  which  may  arise  in  the  course  of 
the  discussions. 

Mr.  James  C.  Sappington,  3d,  Assistant  Chief  of 
the  Petroleum   Division,   Department   of   State, 


has  been  designated  executive  secretary,  and  Mr. 
John  A.  Loftus,  also  of  the  Petroleum  Division, 
Department  of  State,  has  been  designated  record- 
ing secretary  of  the  United  States  group  of  experts. 

[neleased  to  the  press  April  21] 

The  preliminary  exploratory  discussions  on  pe- 
troleum which  were  begun  on  April  18,  1944  in 
Washington  between  groups  of  experts  represent- 
ing the  Governments  of  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom  are  progressing  satisfactorily  in 
their  initial  stage. 

The  discussions  are  proceeding  on  the  basis  of 
the  recognition  that  ample  petroleum  supplies 
available  in  international  trade  are  necessary  for 
the  security  and  prosperity  of  nations ;  that  for  the 
foreseeable  future  the  petroleum  resources  of  the 
woi'Id  are  adequate  to  assure  ample  supplies  for 
increasing  post-war  markets;  and  that  expanding 
world  demand  must  be  met  by  the  orderly  flow  of 
oil  from  the  various  producing  countries  of  the 
world. 


APRIL   22,    1944 


373 


STATUS  OF  COUNTRIES  IN  RELATION  TO  THE  WAR,  APRIL  22,  1944 

Compiled  iy  Katharine  Elizabeth  Crane 

[Any  coiTPctions  or  omissions  sliould  be  brought  to  the  attention 
of  Dr.  Crane  in  tlie  Division  of  Research  and  Puhlifation] 


I.  Countries  at  War  or  in  a  State  of  Severed 
Diplomatic  Relations 
II.  Signatories  of  the  Declaration  by  United 
Nations,  January  1,  1942,  and  Adherents 
to  the  Declaration 
III.  Countries  and  Authorities  Declared  Eligible 
for  Lend-Lease  Aid 


IV.  Governments  or  Authorities  Associated  With 

the  United  Nations  in  the  War 
V.  American  Republics  Signatories  of  Pledges 
of  Mutual  Aid  Against  Aggression 
VI.  Countries  in  a  State  of  Armistice  Relations 
VII.  Status  of  Countries  in  Relation  to  the  War 
(Summary) 


TABLE    I 

COUNTMES  AT  WAR  OE  IN  A  STATE  OF  SEVERED  DIPLOMATIC    ReI^TIONS 


The  table  which  appears  below  contains  an  indication  of 
the  countries  wliich  are  at  war  with  one  another  and  the 
countries  which  have  severed  diplomatic  relations  with  one 
another,  as  well  as  the  dates  of  the  declarations  of  war  or 
severances  of  diplomatic  relations.  The  table  includes  the 
names  of  only  such  countries  as  are  named  in  the  table 
of  contents  of  the  January  31,  1944  is.sue  of  the  Foreign 
Service  List,  published  by  the  Department  of  State.  Thus 
the  table  does  not  include  any  indication  of  declarations 
of  war  or  similar  actions  of  the  French  Committee  of 
National  Liberation,  the  Netherlands  Indies,  various  units 
of  the  British  colonial  empire,  the  governmental  author- 
ities in  control  of  Albania,  etc. 

The  table  is  intended  to  be  a  rough-and-ready  guide  but 
does  not  purport  to  be  definitive  from  the  point  of  view  of 
international  law.  The  term  Axis,  which  is  used  in  some 
declarations  of  war,  is  understood,  for  the  purposes  of  this 
table,  to  include  Germany,  Italy,  and  Japan  (signatories  of 
the  Tripartite  Pact  of  Sept.  27,  1940),. and  Bulgaria,  Hun- 
gary, and  Rumania  (adherents  to  the  Tripartite  Pact).  A 
few  questions  of  interpretation  have  been  settled  in  what 
appears  to  be  a  reasonable  manner,  as  indicated  in  the 
footnotes.  Extracts  from  official  declarations,  announce- 
ments, etc.,  with  respect  to  a  considerable  number  of  the 
states  of  war  and  states  of  severed  diplomatic  relations 
will  be  found  in  the  Department  of  State  Bulletin  of 
December  20,  1941  and  of  February  7  and  April  18,  1942. 

KET 

WAR     indicates  that  the  countries  are  at  war ; 

BEL     indicates  a  "state  of  belligerency"  ; 

sev  indicates  that  the  countries  are  in  a  state  of  sev- 
ered diplomatic  relations  (or  a  state  which 
appears  to  be  that  of  severed  diplomatic 
relations)  ; 
1  following  WAR,  BEL,  or  sev  indicates  that  the 
country  named  in  the  left-hand  column  declared 
war  against  (or  engaged  in  hostilities  against  or 
tooli  similar  action  which  api^ears  to  constitute 


a  state  of  war  against)  or  severed  diplomatic 
relations  with  (or  tooli  action  in  the  nature  of 
a  severance  of  diplomatic  relations  with)  the 
country  named  in  the  upper  row; 
u  indicates  that  tlie  country  in  the  upper  row  took 
corresponding  action  against  the  country  named 
in  the  left-hand  column. 
In  cases  in  which  both  1  and  u  appear,  they  are  given  in 

chronological  order. 
Letters  in  parentheses  refer  to  footnotes  at  the  end  of  the 
table. 

The  left-hand  column  contains  the  names  of  countries 
which  have  signed  or  adherdd  to  the  Declaration  by 
United  Nations  (in  CAPITAL  letters)  ;  which  have  de- 
clared war  against  one  or  more  of  the  Axis  countries  but 
have  not  adhered  to  the  Declaration  by  United  Nations ; 
or  which  are  in  a  state  of  severed  diplomatic  relations 
(or  a  state  which  appears  to  be  that  of  severed  diplomatic 
relations)  with  one  or  more  of  the  Axis  countries. 

The  upper  row  contains  the  names  of  countries  which 
are  at  war  with,  or  in  a  state  of  severed  diplomatic  rela- 
tions with,  one  or  more  of  the  countries  named  in  the 
left-hand  column. 

The  date  given  in  each  case  (except  the  dates  in  paren- 
theses) is  the  elfective  date  (or  what  appears  to  be  the 
effective  date)  of  the  action;  e.g.,  if  a  country  (or  its 
diplomatic  representative  at  Washington)  announced  on 
one  date  that  it  was  or  would  be  at  war  with  a  second 
country  as  of  another  date,  the  latter  date  is  given.  Dates 
in  parentheses,  however,  are  the  dates  of  the  announce- 
ments in  cases  in  which  the  effective  dates  are  not  speci- 
fled  in  tlie  announcements.  Where  two  dates  are  given, 
or  a  date  and  a  footnote  reference,  they  are  given  in 
order  corresponding  to  that  of  the  1  and  u.  It  may  be 
necessary  to  revise  certain  of  the  dates,  as  the  Department 
has  not  yet  received  the  exact  texts  of  all  relevant  offlcial 
documents  regarding  declarations  of  war  and  severances 
of  diiilomatic  relations. 


374 


DEPAETMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


TABLE  I— Continued 
CouNTEiES  AT  Wab  OR  IN  A  Statb  OF  SEVERED  DIPLOMATIC  RELATIONS — Continued 


AMERICA, 
UNITED 
STATES 
OF. 

Argentina 

AUSTRALIA 


BELGIUM- 

BOLIVIA... 
BRAZIL 


Bulgaria 


CANADA. 


Chile. 


CHINA. 


COLOMBIA. 

COSTA 

RICA. 
CUBA 


CZECHO- 
SLOVA- 
KIA. 

DOMINI- 
CAN  RE- 
PUBLIC. 

Ecuador 


Egypt. 


EL   SALVA- 
DOR. 
ETHIOPIA. 


WAR-ul 

(12/13/41) 
(6/5/42) 

sev-1 

(2/4/44) 
WAR-1 
1/6/42 

sev-ul 
(3/4/41) 

3/5/41 
WAR-1 


Denmark" 


sev-1 
(5/18/43) 


WAR-1 


sev-1 

1/5/42 


sev-u 
7/15/40 


Finland 


WAR-1 

12/8/41 

sev-1 
(6/29/41) 


WAR-1 

12/7/41 


WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 
(') 


sev-1 

1/5/42 


F'rance 


sev-u 

11/8/42 


sev-1 

(2/4/44) 


sev-u 
9/5/40 


sev-1 
(11/9/42) 

sev-1 

(5/18/43) 

sev-1 

8/1/43 


sev-1 

11/26/42 


sev-1 
(11/9/42) 


sev-1 

11/11/42 

C) 


sev-1 

(0 

sev-1 

11/13/42 


Germany 


WAR-ul 

12/11/41 
(12/11/41) 

sev-1 
1/26/44 
WAR-1 
(9/3/39) 


WAR- 

0 


ul 


WAR-1 

(0 
WAR-1 
(8/22/42) 
WAR-1 
9/10/39 

sev-1 
1/20/43 
WAR-1 
12/9/41 

midnight 

BEI^l 

(11/26/43) 

WAR-1 

12/11/41 
WAR-1 

12/11/41 
WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 

W 
WAR-1 

12/11/41 

sev-1 
1/29/42 

sev-1 
(9/3/39) 
WAR-1 
(12/12/41) 
WAR-1 
(12/1/42) 


Hungary 


WAR-ul 

(12/12/41) 
(6/5/42) 

sev-1 

(2/4/44) 
WAR-1 
12/8/41 

sev-1 
C) 

WAR-1 

(.0 

sev-u 

5/2/42 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-1 
(5/18/43) 


sev-1 

5/15/42 


WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 


sev-1 

12/15/41 


Italy 


WAR-ul 

12/11/41 
(12/11/41) 


WAR-1 
6/11/40 

WAR-1 

(11/23/40) 

WAR-1 

in 

WAR-1 

(8/22/42) 
WAR-1 
6/10/40 

sev-1 
1/20/43 
WAR-1 
12/9/41 

midnight 
sev-1 

12/19/41 
WAR-1 

12/11/41 
WAR-1 

12/11/41 
WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 

(') 
WAR-1 

12/11/41 

sev-1 

1/29/42 

sev-1 

6/12/40 

WAR-1 

(12/12/41) 

WAR-1 

(12/1/42) 


.lapan 


WAR-ul 

12/7/41 

(12/8/41) 

sev-1 

1/26/44 

WAR-lu 

12/8/41 

W 

WAR-1 

(12/20/41) 

WAR-1 

(0 

sev-1 

1/28/42 

WAR-Iu 

12/7/41 

{") 

sev-1 

1/20/43 

WAR-1 

(12/9/41 

midnight) 

sev-1 
(12/8/41) 
WAR-1 
12/8/41 
WAR-1 
12/9/41 
WAR-1 
(12/9/41) 

WAR-1 

12/8/41 

sev-1 

l/29/t2 

sev-1 

12/9/41 

WAR-1 

(12/8/41) 

WAR-1 

(12/1/42) 


Rumania 


WAR-ul 

(12/12/41) 
(6/5/42) 

sev-1 
(2/4/44) 
WAR-1 
12/8/41 

sev-1 
{') 

WAR-1 

« 

sev-u 

(3/6/42) 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-1 
(5/18/43) 


sev-1 
5/15/42 


WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 
(') 


sev-1 
12/15/41 


APRIL   22,    1944 


375 


TABLE  I— Continued 
Countries  at  War  or  in  a  State  of  Severed  Diplomatic  Relations — Continued 


Bulgaria 

Denmark" 

Finland 

France 

Germany 

Hungary 

Italy 

.Japan 

Rumania 

Thai- 
land 

France . 

WAR-1 

9/3/39 

WAR-u 

(4/6/41) 

WAR-1 

(12/11/41) 
WAR-1 

(12/12/41) 

WAR-1 

12/13/41 

WAR-u 

6/11/40 

WAR-ul 

(') 

10/28/40 

WAR-1 
(12/11/41) 

WAR-1 
(12/12/41) 

WAR-I 
12/13/41 

GREECE     .. 

WAR-u 

(*) 

sev-u 
(6/30/42) 

sev-I 
11/12/42 

sev-1 
11/10/42 

sev-I 

(11/13/42) 

sev-u 

(6/24/41) 

sev-1 
12/7/41 

WAR-1 

(12/9/41) 
WAR-1 
(12/8/41) 

WAR-1 

12/8/41 

sev-u 
(6/24/41) 

GUATEMA- 

LA. 
HAITI 

WAR-1 

(12/24/41) 

WAR-I 

(12/24/41) 

WAR-lu 

(12/24/41) 
12/24/41 

HON  D  U- 

RAS. 
INDIA  ("•)._ 

IRAN   

sev-I 
9/16/41 

WAR-I 

9/9/43 

WAR-I 

1/16/43 

midnight 

WAR-I 

(10/13/43) 

WAR-1 

(1/27/44) 

WAR-ul 

(") 
WAR-1 
5/22/42 
WAR-ul 

C) 
(5/10/40) 

WAR-1 
9/3/39 

WAR-1 
12/11/41 

WAR-ul 
4/8-9/40 
4/8-9/40 

(') 

WAR-1 

(12/12/41) 

sev-1 

1/28/42 

sev-1 
9/16/41 

sev-I 

9/18/41 

WAR-1 

1/16/43 

midnight 

sev-1 

4/13/42 

WAR-1 

1/16/43 

midnight 

sev-1 
9/16/41 

IRAQ 

sev-I 
(11/16/41) 

Italy 

LIBERIA... 

WAR-1 

(1/27/44) 
WAR-1 

(") 
WAR-1 
5/22/42 
WAR-1 

(12/8/41) 

WAR-1  u 

(12/8/41) 

C) 
WAR-1 
12/8/41 

(') 

sev-1 

(") 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-1 

1/28/42 

LUX  E  M- 

WAR-1 

(") 

sev-1 

12/20/41 

sev-ul 

(3/4/41) 
3/9/41 

WAR-1 

12/13/41 

WAR-1 

12/19/41 

sev-u 
9/5/40 
sev-1 
11/9/42 
sev-u 
9/5/40 

sev-I 

(11/17/42) 

sev-I 
(11/10/42) 

sev-u 
9/5/40 

sev-1 
(11/13/42) 

WAR-I 

sev-1 

12/19/41 

sev-1 

4/9/41 

W 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

WAR-1 
12/19/41 

WAR-1 

(") 
WAR-1 

5/22/42 
WAR-1 
12/11/41 

WAR-1 

6/11/40 

WAR-1 

12/11/41 

sev 
(') 

WAR-1 

(12/12/41) 

sev-1 

1/28/42 

WAR-1 

(") 
sev-1 

(°) 

sev-1 

2/11/41 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

WAR-ul 

12/19/41 

12/19/41 

sev-I 

w 

BOURG. 
MEXICO  .. 

NETHER- 
LANDS. 

NEW    ZEA- 

sev-ul 

5/10/40 

7/15/40 

C) 

sev-1 
(6/28/41) 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-1 
12/9/41 

WAR  1 

LAND. 
NICARA- 

1/25/42 

GUA. 
NORWAY... 

sev-u 
7/15/40 

sev-I 

(12/7/41) 

PANAMA     . 

Paraguay 

376 


DEPAKTMENT    OF    STATE   BULLETIN 


TABLE  I— Continued 

COUNTEIES  AT  WaR  OR  IN  A  STATE  OF  SEVERED  DIPLOMATIC  RELATIONS Continued 


Bulgaria 

Denmark" 

Finland 

France 

Germany 

Hungary 

Italy 

Japan 

Rumania 

Thai- 
land 

Peru 

sev-lu 
(1/26/43) 
(1/26/43) 

sev-1 
1/24/42 

sev-1 
1/24/42 

sev-1 
1/24/42 

PHILIP 

PINES, 
COMMON- 
WEALTH 
OF  THE. 
POLANDC") 

sev-ul 
(3/4/41) 
3/5/41 

sev-u 
6/24/41 

sev-u 
9/23/40 

WAR-u 
9/1/39 

scv-ul 
C) 

sev 
(0 

(") 

WAR-1 
6/11/40 

WAR-u 

6/22/41 

WAR-ul 
6/11/40 
6/11/40 
sev-1 
1/25/42 
sev-1 
12/31/41 
WAR-u 
(4/6/41) 

WAR-1 

12/11/41 

sev-1 
11/5/40 
C") 

Kingdom 
of. 
UNION    OF 

WAR-1 

12/13/41 

WAR-1 

12/8/41 

WAR 

(") 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-1 

4/23/42 

sev-u 
(6/30/41) 

sev-u 
(..) 

sev-1 

(5/12/43) 

WAR-1 

9/6/39 

WAR-u 

6/22/41 

WAR-1 
9/3/39 

sev-1 
1/25/42 

sev-1 

12/31/41 

WAR-u 

4/6/41 

WAR-1 

12/8/41 

WAR-u 

6/27/41 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

sev-u 

(5/4/42) 

WAR-lu 

12/8/41 

WAR-1 

12/8/41 

WAR-u 

6/22/41 

("■') 

WAR-1 

12/7/41 

WAR-1 

SOUTH 
AFRICA. 
UNION    OF 

sev-u 
(6/26/41) 

1/25/42 

SOVIET 
SOCIAL- 
IST    RE- 
PUBLICS 

("■). 
UNITED 

WAR-ul 
(12/13/41) 
12/13/41 

WAR-ul 

12/7/41 
(12/8/41) 

sev-1 
1/25/42 

sev-1 
12/31/41 
WAR-1 
12/7/41 

WAR-ul 

K  I  N  G  - 
DOM. 

1/25/42 
1/25/42 

VpTiPziipla 

YUGOSLA- 

WAR-ul 

(") 
4/6/41 

sev-1 

(8/22/41) 

sev-u 
8/22/41 

WAR-ul 

{") 
4/10/41 

sev-1 
5/9/41 

VIA. 

"  Although  the  name  of  Denmark  appears  in  the  upper 
row,  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  that  country  was  in- 
vaded by  the  Germans  on  Apr.  9,  1940,  and  since  that  date 
the  Government  of  Denmark  has  been  regarded  by  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  as  "a  government  which 
is  patently  acting  under  duress  and  which  is  in  no  sense 
a  free  agent"  (Department  of  State  Bulletin,  Apr.  19, 
1941,  p.  470). 

*  According  to  a  telegram  of  Dec.  17,  1941  from  the 
American  Legation  at  Stockholm  the  Japanese  Charge  at 
Stockholm  was  reported,  in  a  Stockholm  newspaper,  to 
have  stated  that  Japan  considered  itself  at  war  with 
Australia,  Canada,  New  Zealand,  and  the  Union  of  South 
Africa  as  well  as  with  the  United  States  and  Great 
Britain. 

"  Germany  invaded  Belgium,  Luxembourg,  and  the 
Netherlands   on   May   9-10,    1940.     No   record   has    beeu 


found  of  a  formal  declaration  of  war  between  Germany 
and  Belgium.  On  May  10,  1940,  however,  the  Belgian 
Government  declared  in  a  note  to  foreign  governments 
that  the  Belgian  Army  would  defend  Belgian  national 
territory  with  all  its  force.  On  Dec.  20,  1941  the  Belgian 
Ambassador  at  Washington  informed  the  Secretary  of 
State  of  a  Belgian  proclamation  that  war  "exists"  be- 
tween Belgium  and  Japan,  as  it  "already  exists  with  Ger- 
many and  Italy". 

•*  No  record  of  a  formal  severance  of  diplomatic  rela- 
tions has  been  found,  but  according  to  telegrams  from 
the  American  Minister  at  Budapest  the  Belgian  Minis- 
ter departed  on  Apr.  11,  1941  finder  instructions  from  his 
Government. 

"  According  to  a  telegram  from  the  American  Minister 
at  Bucharest  the  Belgian  Minister  departed  on  Feb.  14, 
1941.     A  despatch  of  Feb.  28,  1941  from  the  American 


APRIL    22,    1944 


377 


Minister  to  Rumania,  in  reporting  tlie  departure  of  tlie 
Belgian  Minister  from  Bucharest,  stated  that  the  Belgian 
Minister  indicated  that  this  was  not  a  "rupture"  of  rela- 
tions. The  note  by  which  the  Belgian  Minister  informed 
the  Rumanian  Government  of  his  approaching  departure 
explained  that  he  was  "called  to  other  functions".  He 
also  added  the  information  that,  after  his  departure,  the 
affairs  of  his  Legation  would  be  conducted  by  the  Minister 
of  the  United  States  until  other  disposition  was  made  by 
his  Government. 

I  A  telegram  of  Apr.  27,  1943  from  the  Minister  of  For- 
eign AITairs  of  Bolivia  to  the  Secretary  of  State  of  the 
United  States  reads  in  part  as  follows  (in  translation)  : 
"In  harmony  with  the  decree  issued  by  my  Government  on 
the  7th  day  of  the  current  month  and  year  declaring  a 
state  of  war  between  Bolivia  and  the  nations  of  the  Axis 
.  .  .  Bolivia  formally  adheres  by  means  of  this  communi- 
cation to  the  declaration  of  the  United  Nations".  On  Nov. 
26,  1943  the  Bolivian  Congress  approved  Bolivia's  adher- 
ence to  the  Declaration  by  United  Nations,  and  it  sanc- 
tioned the  Bolivian  decree  of  Apr.  7,  1943  by  which  a  state 
of  war  was  declared  to  exist  between  Bolivia  and  the  Axis 
powers.  A  Bolivian  decree  formally  declaring  that  Bo- 
livia is  at  war  with  the  Axis  powers  was  issued  on  Dec. 
4,  1943. 

^A  declaration  which  was  broadcast  from  London  on 
Dee.  9,  1941  by  the  Minister  of  State  in  the  Ministry  of 
Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Czechoslovak  Government  stated : 
"The  Czechoslovak  Government  proclaims  that  every 
country  waging  war  against  the  British  Empire  and  the 
Soviet  Union  or  against  the  United  States  of  America, 
becomes,  automatically,  and  with  all  the  relevant  impli- 
cations, an  enenJy  of  the  Czechoslovak  Republic". 
Czechoslovakia  is  indicated  in  the  table  as  being  at  war 
with  Bulgaria  and  Thailand,  although  neither  of  them 
was  at  war  with  the  British  Empire,  the  Soviet  Union,  or 
the  United  States  until  after  Dec.  9,  1941.  A  document 
dated  London,  Dee.  16,  1941,  and  described  in  a  note  of 
Oct.  20.  1943  from  the  Czechoslovak  Embassy  at  Wa.shing- 
ton  as  "the  official  text  of  the  Declaration  of  a  State  of 
War",  reads  In  part  as  follows :  "I  hereby  proclaim  that 
the  Czechoslovak  Republic  is  in  a  state  of  war  with  all 
countries  which  are  in  a  state  of  war  with  Great  Britain, 
the  Union  of  the  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  or  the  United 
States  of  America,  and  that  the  state  of  war  between  the 
Czechoslovak  Republic  on  one  side,  Germany  and  Hun- 
gary on  the  other,  has  been  in  existence  since  the  moment 
when  the  Governments  of  these  countries  committed  acts 
of  violence  against  the  security,  independence  and  terri- 
torial integrity  of  the  Republic". 

*  Dominican  official  representatives  in  France  were  re- 
called on  Nov.  11,  1942.  Relations  between  the  two  coun- 
tries are  considered  "virtually  broken". 

*  According  to  the  Jan.  7, 1942  issue  of  Progrds  Egyptien. 
the  Under  Secretary  of  the  Egyptian  Foreign  Office  said : 
"Strictly  speaking  a  rupture  of  diplomatic  relations  be- 
tween the  Egyptian  Government  and  the  Government  of 
Vichy  has  not  taken  place.  It  is  simply  an  interruption 
or  cessation  of  these  relations.  This  measure  aims  only 
at  the  official  representation  of  the  Government  of  Vichy, 

584452 — 44 2 


it  does  not  imply  any  modification  of  the  status  of  French 
nationals". 

'  Date  uncertain  ;  apparently  Mar.  5,  1942  or  earlier. 

*  Bulgaria  announced  on  Apr.  24,  1941  that  a  state  of 
war  existed  in  those  areas  of  Greece  and  Yugoslavia  occu- 
pied by  Bulgarian  troops. 

'  Italy  attacked  Greece  on  Oct.  28,  1940. 

"'  Separate  announcements,  to  accord  with  various  'ac- 
tions taken  by  the  United  Kingdom,  were  published  in  the 
Gazette  of  India.  Fur  example,  as  regards  Germany,  the 
announcement  reads  as  follows :  "I,  Victor  Alexander 
John,  Marquess  of  Linlithgow,  Governor-General  of  India 
and  cx-offioio  Vice-Admiral  therein,  being  satisfied  there- 
of by  information  received  by  me,  do  hereby  proclaim  that 
war  has  broken  out  between  His  Majesty  and  Germany". 

"  The  German  Minister  to  Luxembourg  informed  the 
Luxembourg  Foreign  Office  on  May  10,  1940  that  "the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Reich  is  forced  to  extend  to  Luxembourg 
territory  the  military  operations  started  upon".  The  Lux- 
embourg Government  has  on  various  occasions  indicated 
that  it  is  fighting  for  the  independence  of  the  country,  and 
in  a  note  of  Sept.  8,  1942  to  the  Secretary  of  State  the 
Minister  of  Luxembourg  at  Washington  stated  that  the 
Luxembourg  Government  considered  itself  in  a  state  of 
war  with  the  Axis  powers. 

°  A  statement  issued  by  the  Mexican  Foreign  Office  on 
Dec.  23, 1941  relating  to  the  declaration  of  war  by  Bulgaria, 
Hungary,  and  Rumania  against  the  United  States  reads  in 
part  as  follows  (in  translation)  :  "  .  .  .  the  Government 
of  Mexico  has  resolved  to  declare  its  diplomatic  relations 
with  those  nations  to  be  severed.  ...  As  regards  Ru- 
mania, it  may  be  said  that  Mexico  has  no  treaty  of  friend- 
ship with  that  country  nor  do  diplomatic  relations  with  it 
exist". 

"  In  a  note  of  Apr.  2,  1SM3  to  the  Department  of  State  the 
Netherlands  Ambassador  stated  that  the  severance  of  dip- 
lomatic relations  between  the  Netherlands  and  Denmark 
must  be  considered  to  have  become  effective  on  May  10, 

1940.  In  a  telegram  of  July  17,  1940  to  the  Department  of 
State  the  American  Legation  at  Copenhagen,  however,  re- 
ported that  the  Danish  Government  had  that  morning  con- 
firmed reports  of  the  recall  of  the  Danish  diplomatic 
representatives  from  Belgium,  the  Netherlands,  and  Nor- 
way. The  Danish  Foreign  Office  added  that  the  activities 
of  these  offices  had  ended  as  of  July  15. 

'  The  Netherlands  Charge  at  Budapest  informed  the  Hun- 
garian Foreign  Office  on  Apr.  9,  1941  that  he  had  been  in- 
structed by  his  Government  to  leave  Hungary.  Accord- 
ing to  a  note  of  Apr.  2,  1943  from  the  Netherlands  Ambas- 
sador at  Washington  to  the  Department  of  State,  the 
Netherlands  Charge  at  Budapest  left  Hungary  on  Apr.  9, 

1941,  and  the  Ambassador  informed  the  Department  that 
the  decision  of  the  Netherlands  Government  to  sever  diiv 
lomatic  relations  with  the  Hungarian  Government  was 
made  on  Apr.  8,  1941.  A  telegram  of  Apr.  11,  1941  from 
the  American  Legation  at  Budapest  to  the  Department 
stated  that  the  Netherlands  ChargC'  left  Budapest  for 
Moscow  at  noon  on  Apr.  11. 

"■  Nicaraguan  newspapers  of  Dec.  9,  1941  printed  a  mani- 
festo of  the  President  of  Nicaragua  declaring  that  the 


378 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Nicaraguan  Goveriiiueiit  "finds  itself  under  the  necessity 
of  considering  Nicaragua  in  a  state  of  war  'de  heclio"  with 
Japan  pending  the  legal  declaration  of  such  status  by  the 
National  Congress"  (translation).  On  the  same  date  the 
Nicaraguan  Congress  resolved  that  "From  the  eighth  day 
of  the  current  month  a  state  of  war  has  existed  between 
the  Republic  of  Nicaragua  and  the  Empire  of  Japan" 
(translation).  The  President  of  Nicaragua  signed  the 
resolution  on  Dec.  10.  The  American  Minister  at  Managua 
telegraphed  to  the  Department  on  Dec.  11  as  follows: 
"Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  informs  me  that  a  formal 
declaration  of  war  against  Japan  has  been  passed  by  Con- 
gress, has  been  signed  by  President  Somoza  and  is  in 
effect  today." 

'  Germany  attacked  Norway  on  the  night  of  Apr.  8-9, 
1940.  The  Apr.  26,  1940  issue  of  the  ReichsgesetsWatt, 
teil  1,  no.  74,  p.  677,  contains  a  decree  of  the  Fiihrer  for 
the  Exercising  of  Governmental  Authority  in  Norway, 
Apr.  24,  1940,  which  reads  as  follows  (in  translation)  : 
"The  Nygaardsvold  [I'remier  of  Norway]  Government 
through  its  proclamation  and  conduct,  as  well  as  the  mili- 
tary fighting  that  is  taking  place  as  a  result  of  its  will, 
has  created  a  state  of  war  between  Norway  and  the  Ger- 
man Reich".  In  an  undated  telegram  received  by  the 
Department  of  State  on  Apr.  9,  1940  at  12:04  a.m.,  the 
American  Minister  at  Oslo  (Mrs.  Harrinfan)  stated: 
"Foreign  Minister  informs  me  .  .  .  that  Norway  is 
at  war  with  Germany".  A  telegram  of  Apr.  11,  1940  from 
the  American  Legation  at  Stockholm  reported  that  Mrs. 
Harriman  had  .stated  in  a  telephone  conversation  at  3 :  30 
p.m.  "that  the  Norwegian  Foreign  Minister  had  told  her 
that  Norway  has  not  declared  war  on  Germany  but  at 
the  same  time  as  Norway  had  been  attacked  she  considers 
herself  at  war".  In  a  telegram  of  Apr.  29  the  American 
Legation  at  Stockholm  stated  that  a  declaration  issued 
by  the  Norwegian  Government  declared  that  the  "Nor- 
wegian Government  has  been  aware  of  this  state  of  war 
ever  since  night  between  April  eighth  and  ninth". 

'  No  record  of  a  formal  severance  of  diplomatic  relations 
has  been  found,  but  on  June  13,  1940  the  diplomatic  repre- 
sentative of  Norway  left  Rome. 

"  Date  uncertain ;  presumably  about  Dec.  9,  1941. 

'  No  record  of  a  formal  severance  of  diplomatic  relations 
has  been  found,  but  the  Norwegian  Minister  to  Rumania, 
who  was  also  accredited  to  Yugoslavia,  left  Bucharest  on 
Feb.  21,  1941  to  take  up  his  residence  at  Belgrade. 

"  On  Apr.  26,  1943  the  Soviet  Government  sent  to  the 
Polish  Embassy  at  Moscow  a  note,  dated  Apr.  2.5,  in  which 
it  announced  the  decision  "to  suspend  its  relations  with 
the  Polish  Government". 

'  German  troops  invaded  Poland  on  Sept.  1,  1939.  No 
record  of  a  formal  declaration  of  war  has  been  found, 
but  a  proclamation  issued  by  Hitler  to  the  German  armed 
forces  and  broadcast  on  Sept.  1,  1939  reads  in  part  as 
follows  (in  translation)  :  "The  Polish  State  has  refused 
the  peaceful  arrangement  of  neighborly  relations  striven 
for  by  me ;  instead  it  has  appealed  to  arms  ...  To  put 
an  end. to  these  mad  doings  no  other  means  are  left  me 
than  from  now  on  to  pit  force  against  force". 


''  In  a  note  of  Dec.  24, 1940  to  the  Hungarian  Government 
the  Polish  Minister  at  Budapest  referred  to  the  note  of 
Dec.  7,  1940  from  the  Hungarian  Government  requesting 
that  the  necessary  measures  be  taken  to  end  all  activities 
of  the  Polish  Legation  at  Budapest,  and  he  informed  the 
Hungarian  Government  that  he  had  consulted  his  Govern- 
ment and  had  received  pertinent  instructions  and  that 
the  Polish  Legation  at  Budapest  would  cease  its  activities 
on  Jan.  1,  1941. 

"  No  record  of  a  fornral  severance  of  diplomatic  relations 
has  been  found,  but  on  June  13,  1940  the  diplomatic 
representative  of  Poland  left  Rome.  On  June  13  the  Polish 
Ambassador  at  Washington  informed  an  officer  of  the 
Department  of  State  that  according  to  a  telegram  he 
had  received  from  his  Government  "the  relationship  be- 
tween the  Polish  and  the  Italian  Governments  would  be 
similar  to  that  between  the  British  and  the  French  Gov- 
ernments on  the  one  hand  and  the  Soviet  Government  on 
the  other  hand  during  the  recent  i)eriod  when  the  French 
and  the  British  Ambassadors  were  absent  from  their  posts 
at  Moscow". 

°*  The  departure  of  the  Polish  diplomatic  and  consular 
representatives  in  Rumania  was  characterized  in  the  Polish 
Embassy's  note  to  the  Foreign  Office  as  a  "suspension"  of 
Polish-Rumanian  relations. 

'■''About  February  1942  the  Italian  Legation  at  Jidda 
was  closed  at  the  request  of  the  Saudi  Arabian  Govern- 
ment but  with  the  explicit  statement  by  the  Saudi  Arabian 
Government  that  the  removal  of  the  Italian  Legation  per- 
sonnel did  not  constitute  a  rupture  of  diplomatic  relations. 

"  A  statement  of  the  Finnish  Government  to  the  press 
concerning  the  announcement  made  by  the  Prime  Minister 
of  Finland  in  the  session  of  the  Diet,  June  25,  1941,  reads 
as  follows  (in  translation  furnished  by  the  Finnish  Gov- 
ernment) :  "Prime  Minister  Rangell  made  a  review  of  the 
present  situation  and  the  facts  which  bad  led  to  it.  The 
Prime  Minister  stated  that  Finland  became  the  object  of 
an  aggression  from  the  part  of  the  Soviet  Union  on  the 
morning,  June  25th,  when  the  Soviet  Union  began  military 
operations  against  Finland,  on  account  of  which  Finland 
has  resorted  to  self-defense  with  all  military  means  in  her 
power. 

"Having  heard  this  the  Prime  Minister's  statement  the 
Diet  uuiinimously  gave  the  Government  their  full  votes 
of  confidence." 

''''  Rumania  attacked  certain  Soviet  territory  on  June 
-2,  1941  with  a  view  to  re-possessing  it.  No  record  of  a 
formal  declaration  of  war  has  been  found.  On  June  22 
General  Antonescu,  Chief  of  the  Rumanian  State,  issued 
a  proclamation  to  the  Rumanian  Army,  which  reads  in 
part  as  follows  (in  translation)  :  "Fight  for  the  liberation 
of  our  brothers  of  Bessarabia  and  Bucovina  .  .  .  Victory 
will  be  ours.  On  to  battle".  In  a  proclamation  to  the 
Nation  on  the  same  day  he  said  "I  call  you  to  battle  .  .  . 
The  holy  war  has  begun". 

"  On  July  5,  1940  the  American  Embassy  in  France 
reported  to  the  Department  of  State  that  orders  had  been 
.<ent  recalling  the  French  Charge  at  London.  In  a  telegram 
of  July  7,  1940  the  American  Embassy  at  London  informed 


APRIL    22,     1944 


379 


the  Department  of  State  (1)  that  the  French  Charge  on 
July  7  informally  advised  the  British  Foreign  Office  of 
the  severance  of  relations  and  (2)  that  on  July  8  the 
French  Chargt''  vcould  deliver  a  formal  note. 

"  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  are  declared  by  the  Yugoslav 
Government  to  have  participated  in  the  German  attack  of 
early  April  1941  upon  Yugoslavia.  Bulgaria  announced 
on  Apr.  24,  1941  that  a  state  of  war  existed  in  those  areas 
of  Greece  and  Yugoslavia  occupied  by  Bulgarian  troops. 
Admiral  Horthy's  command  of  Apr.  10,  1941  to  the  Hun- 
garian Army  reads  in  part  as  follows  (in  translation)  : 
"Duty  again  calls  us  to  hasten  to  help  such  of  our  Hun- 
garian blood  as  were  detached  from  us.  ...  Forward, 
to  the  thousand-year  frontier  to  the  south !" 

TABLE  II 

SlONATOBIES  OF  THE  DeCLAEATION  BY  UNITED  NATIONS,  JANU- 
ARY 1,  1942,  AND  Adherents  to  the  Declaration 

SIGNATORIES 


America,  United  States  of 

Australia 

Belgium 

Canada 

China 

Costa  Rica 

Cuba 

Czechoslovakia 

Dominican  Republic 

El  Salvador 

Greece 

Guatemala 

Haiti 

Honduras 


India 

Luxembourg 
Netherlands 
New  Zealand 
Nicaragua 
Norway 
Panama 
Poland 

Union  of  South  Africa 
Union  of  Soviet  So- 
cialist Republics 
United  Kingdom 
Yugoslavia 


ADHERENTS 


Country 


Bolivia 

Brazil 

Colombia 

Ethiopia 

Iran 

Iraq 

Liberia 

Mexico 

Philippines,   Common- 
wealth of  the. 


Date  of  notiflcation 
of  adherence 


Apr. 

Feb. 

Dec. 

July 

Sept. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

June 

June 


27,  1943 
8,  1943° 

22,  1943 

28,  1942 
10,1943' 
16,  1943 
26,  1944 

5,  1942 
10,  1943 


Date  on  which  an 
official  repre- 
sentative of  the 
country  affixed 
his  signature  to 
the  Declaration 


May 

Apr. 

Jan. 

Mar. 

Sept. 

Apr. 

Apr. 

June 

June 


5,  1943 
10,  1943 
17,  1944 

7,  1944 
14,  1943 
10,  1944 
10,  1944 
10,  1942 
14,  1942 


°  The  Brazilian  notification,  a  note  of  Feb.  8,  1943  from  the  Brazilian 
Ambassador  at  Washington  to  the  Secretary  of  State,  stated,  in  translation, 
".  .  .  by  act  of  the  6th  of  this  month  Brazil  declared  formal  adherence  to 
the  Declaration  of  the  United  Nations". 

'  The  Iranian  notification,  a  note  of  Sept.  10,  1943  from  the  Iranian  Min- 
ister at  Washington,  stated,  ".  .  .  by  act  of  the  9th  day  of  this  month 
Iran  declares  the  existence  of  a  state  of  war  with  Germany  and  formally 
adheres  to  the  Declaration  of  the  United  Nations". 


TABLE  III 

Countries  and  Authorities  Declaked  Euqible  for 
Lend-Lease  Aid 

The  following  list  of  countries  and  authorities  declared 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  to  be  eligible  for 
lend-lease  aid  is  reproduced  from  the  Report  to  Congress 
on  Lend-Lease  Operations  to  December  31,  1943  (H.  Doc. 
497,  78th  Cong.,  pp.  60-61).  The  dates  on  which  such 
eligibility  was  declared  are  also  given  from  the  same 
source. 


Argentina 

Australia 

Belgium 

Bolivia 

Brazil 

Canada 

Chile 

China 

Colombia 

Costa  Rica 

Cuba 

Czechoslovakia 

Dominican  Republic 

Ecuador 

Egypt 

El  Salvador 

Ethiopia 

French  Committee  of  National  Liber- 
ation." 

Greece 

Guatemala 

Haiti 

Honduras 

Iceland 

India 

Iran 

Iraq 

Liberia 

Mexico 

Netherlands 

New  Zealand 

Nicaragua 

Norway 

Panama 

Paraguay 

Peru 

Poland 

Saudi  Arabia 

South  Africa 

Turkey 

United  Kingdom 

Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  — 

Uruguay 

Venezuela 

Yugoslavia 


May  6 
Nov.  \l 
June  13 
May  6, 
May  6, 
Nov.  11 
May  6, 
May  6, 
May  6, 
May 
May 
Jan.  5 
May  6 
May  6 
Nov.  11 
May  6, 
Dec.  7 
Nov.  11 
Nov.  13 
Mar.  11 
May  6 
May  6, 
May  6 
July  1 
Nov.  11 
Mar.  10, 
Mav  1 
Mar.  10, 
May  6, 
Aug.  21 
Nov.  11 
May  6, 
June  4, 
May  6 
Mav  6 
MaV  6, 
Aug.  28, 
Feb.  18, 
Nov.  11 
Nov.  7, 
Mar.  11 
Nov.  7, 
Mav  6, 
May  6, 
Nov.  11 


1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1942 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1942 
1941 
1942 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1942 
1942 
1942 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1943 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 
1941 


»  "Territory  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the  French  National  Com- 
mittee  was  declared  eligible  to  receive  lend-lease  aid  on  November 
11,  1941,  .  .  .  French  North  and  West  Africa  were  declared  eli- 
gible to  receive  lend-lease  aid  on  November  13,  1942.  On  Septem- 
ber 25,  1943,  a  Lend-Lease  Modus  Vivendi  Agreement  governing 
lend-lease  aid  and  reciprocal  aid  was  entered  into  with  the  French 
Committee  of  Natioual  Liberation,  successor  to  the  French  Na- 
tional Committee  and  to  the  Haut  Commandenient  en  Chef  Civile 
et  Militaire  established  in  French  North  and  West  Africa  after  the 
events  of  November  19-42."      [Footnote  in  H.  Doc.  497.] 


380 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


TABLE  IV 

Governments  oe  Authokities  Associated  With  the 
United  Nations  in  the  Wae 

A  press  release  of  the  Department  of  State  which  was 
issued  on  June  11,  1&13  in  connection  with  the  publication 
of  the  Draft  Agreement  for  a  United  Nations  Relief  and 
Kehabilitation  Administration  listed  the  following  coun- 
tries as  "nations  associated  with  the  United  Nations  in 
this  war"  (Department  of  State  Bulletin,  June  12,  1943, 
p.  524)  : 


Chile 

Colombia  " 
Ecuador 
Egypt 


Iceland 
Iran  « 
Liberia  ° 
Paraguay 


Peru 

Uruguay 

Venezuela 


Official  representatives  at  the  United  Nations  Conference 
on  Food  and  Agriculture,  Hot  Springs,  Va.,  May  18- June  3, 
1943,  included  (a)  representatives  of  all  the  United  Na- 
tions, (b)  representatives  of  the  11  above-mentioned 
"nations  associated  with  the  United  Nations  in  this  war", 
(c)  representatives  of  the  French  Delegation,  and  (d)  the 
Honorable  Henrils  de  Kauffmann,  Danish  Minister  at 
Washington,  who  attended  in  response  to  an  Invitation  of 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  to  be  present  in  a 
personal  capacity. 

Representatives  of  groups  (a),  (b),and  (c)  listed  above, 
and  Mr.  de  Kauffmann,  were  "designated  by  the  United 
and  Associated  Nations  as  representatives"  on  the  United 
Nations  Interim  Commission  on  Food  and  Agriculture 
(Department  of  State  Bulletin,  July  17,  1943,  p.  34). 

The  Draft  Agreement  for  a  United  Nations  Relief  and 
Rehabilitation  Adnfinistration  referred  to  in  the  first 
paragraph  of  this  table  was  revised  as  a  result  of  study 
and  discussion  by  the  governments  concerned.  A  revised 
text  was  signed  on  Nov.  9,  1943  by  representatives  of  the 
governments  concerned  and  the  French  Committee  of 
National  Liberation.  The  agreement  begins  as  follows 
(Executive  Agreement  Series  352)  : 

"The  Governments  or  Authorities  whose  duly  authorized 
representatives  have  subscribed  hereto, 

"Being  United  Nations  or  being  associated  with  the 
United  Nations  in  this  war". 

TABLE  V 

Amerioan  Republics  Signatories  of  Pledges  of  MtrruAr 
Aid  Against  Aggression 

Pledges  of  mutual  aid  against  aggression,  of  hemisphere 
solidarity,  etc.,  have  been  undertaken  by  all  the  American 


republics  in  instruments  adopted  at  various  inter-Ameri- 
can conferences  and  meetings.  The  21  American  republics, 
all  of  which  have  broken  off  relations  with  or  have  de- 
clared war  against  the  Axis,  are  as  follows : 


America,  United 

States  of 
Argentina 
Bolivia 
Brazil 
Chile 
Colombia 
Costa  Rica 


Cuba 

Dominican  Re- 
public 
Ecuador 
El  Salvador 
Guatemala 
Haiti 
Honduras 

TABLE    VI 


Mexico 

Nicaragua 

Panama 

Paraguay 

Peru 

Uruguay 

Venezuela 


"  Colombia,  Iran,  and  Liberia  have  adhered  to  the  Declaration 
by  United  Nations  (see  table  I). 


Countries  in  a  State  of  Armistice  Relations 

France 

An  armistice  between  France  and  Germany  was  signed 
on  June  22,  1940,  6 :  50  p.m.,  German  summer  time.  Article 
XXIII  provided  that  the  armistice  "becomes  effective  as 
soon  as  the  French  Government  also  has  reached  an  agree- 
ment with  the  Italian  Government  regarding  cessation  of 
hostilities"  and  that  "Hostilities  will  be  stopped  six  hours 
after  the  moment  at  which  the  Italian  Government  has 
notified  the  German  Government  of  conclusion  of  its  agree- 
ment" (translation  transmitted  by  the  Associated  Press 
in  Berlin  and  published  in  certain  American  newspapers 
on  June  26,  1940). 

An  armistice  between  France  and  Italy  was  signed  on 
June  24,  1940,  7:15  p.m.,  Rome  time.  Article  XXV  pro- 
vided that  the  armistice  "will  become  effective  upon  sig- 
nature" and  that  "Hostilities  will  cease  .  .  .  six  hours 
from  the  moment  in  which  the  Italian  Government  com- 
municates to  the  German  Government  the  conclusion  of 
this  agreement"   (same  source). 

The  Italian  Government  notified  the  German  Govern- 
ment on  June  24,  1940,  7 :  35  p.m.,  Rome  time,  of  the  sign- 
ing of  the  French-Italian  armistice.  Hostilities  accord- 
ingly ceased  on  June  2.5, 1940, 1 :  35  a.m.,  Rome  time  (12  :  35 
a.m.,  EYench  time). 

Italy 

An  announcement  which  was  issued  by  the  Allied  head- 
quarters in  North  Africa  at  noon  on  September  S,  1943  and 
which  was  read  over  the  radio  by  General  Eisenhower 
beginning  at  noon  on  September  8,  1943  reads  in  part  as 
follows :  "Some  weeks  ago  the  Italian  Government  made 
an  approach  to  the  British  and  American  Governments 
with  a  view  to  concluding  an  armistice.  .  .  .  The  Ar- 
mistice was  signed  ...  on  September  third,  but  it  was 
agreed  .  .  .  that  the  Armistice  should  come  into  force 
at  a  moment  most  favorable  for  the  Allies,  .  .  .  That 
moment  has  now  arrived.     .  .  ." 


APRIL   22,    1944 


381 


TABLE   VII 
Status  of  Cotjntbibs  in  Relation  to  the  War  (Sdmmary) 


.3 

Ml 

"3 

a 

a 

CD 

Q 

73 

a 
S 

o 
o 

c 

t 

a 
O 

>> 

a 

bO 

c 

3 

W 

t— < 

a 
a 

1-5 

T3 

a 

03 

1 

a 

3 

s 

CO 

America,      United 
States  of 

H      U 
HL 

LU 

LU 
HLU 
H  LU 

LU 
AH  L 

LU 
HLU 
HLU 
HLU 

LU 

HLU 
AHL 
A       L 

H  LU 
LU 

w 
s 
w 

s 

s 
s 

s 

w 
s 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
s 
w 

B 

w 
w 
w 

w 
s 
s 
w 
w 

a 

w 
s 
w 

(S) 

s 

w 

s 

s 
w 

s 

a 

(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(a) 

S 
(a) 

S 

(a) 
(a) 
(a) 

(a) 

S 

S 

(a) 
(a) 

a 

W 

s 
w 
w 
w 
s 
w 
s 
w 
s 
w 
w 
w 

w 

s 
s 
w 
w 

w 
s 
w 

(S) 

(W) 

Argentina .. 

Australia 

Belgium 

"{i)" 

w 

s 

w 

Bolivia-       

Brazil 

s 
w 

s 

Canada   . _ 

w 

s 
s 
s 
s 

Chile 

s 

China     

Colombia.- 

Costa  Rica . 

w 

Cuba 

s 

(S) 

Czechoslovakia 

Dominican  Repub- 
lic  

(W) 

w 

w 

(W) 

Ecuador     ._ 

Egypt 

El  Salvador . 

s 

s 

(S) 

s 

s 

S 

Ethiopia ._ 

France .. 

s 

s 

French  Committee 
of  National  Lib- 
eration 

A       L 

LU 

HLU 

HLU 

HLU 

A      L 

LU 

LU 

LU 

Greece   ..     .   .   ._ 

(W) 

s 
s 
s 
s 

W 
W 
W 
W 

s 
w 

(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(a) 

s 
w 
w 
w 

s 

Guatemala 

Haiti 

w 

w 

Honduras __ 

Iceland 

India 

Iran 

(W) 

s 

(W) 

(S) 

(W) 

w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
s 
s 

(W) 

s 

(a) 
S 
(a) 

(W) 

s 
w 

(W) 

s 

(W) 

Iraq.      

s 

a 

Italy.. ... 

(S) 

(a) 

Liberia  .   ._ 

LU 

U 

HLU 

LU 

LU 

HLU 

LU 

HLU 

AHL 

AHL 

w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
w 
s 
w 
s 
s 

Luxembourg     

w 
s 
s 
w 
w 

s 
s 
s 
s 
s 
s 
s 

w 
s 
s 
w 
w 

(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(a) 
(S) 
(a) 
S 
S 

w 

(S) 

s 
w 
w 

(S) 

Mexico.-     

Netherlands 

New  Zealand 

Nicaragua.. 

(S) 

s 
w 

s 
w 

Norway  . .     

(S) 

s 

Panama 

Paraguay  .       

Peru 

s 

382 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


TABLE  VII— Continued 


c4 

"3 
pq 

-a 

a 

q 

a 
S 
"a 

S 

a 
2 

0 

a 

S3 
O 

CSS 

c 

3 

3 
1— ( 

a 
p. 

03 
1-5 

•a 
1 

PL, 

_o3 

'3 

o3 

a 

■a 
a 

'3 

03 

Philippines,   Com- 
monwealth      of 
the                                        U 

Poland LU 

S 

S 

S 

w 

(S) 

(S) 
(S) 

W 

(S) 

(S) 

Turkey L 

Union     of     South 

Africa LU 

Union     of    Soviet 
Socialist  Repub- 
lics                                   L  U 

w 
w 

(S) 

w 

w 
w 

S 

s 
s 
s 

w 

w 
w 

s 
s 
w 

w 

w 
w 

s 

w 

(a) 

(a) 
a 
S 
S 

(a) 

w 
w 

S 

s 
w 

(S) 

w 

w 
w 

W 

United  Kingdom..           L  U 
Uruguay AH  L 

W 

Yugoslavia LU 

(W) 

s 

s 

s 

A — Governments  or  authorities  associated  with  the  United  Nations  in  the 

war. 
a — In  a  state  of  armistice  relations. 
B— In  a  "state  of  beUigerency". 
H— American  republics,  signatories  of  pledges  of  hemisphere  solidarity, 

mutual  aid  against  aggression,  etc. 
L — Declared  eligible  for  lend-lease  aid;  i.  e.,  declared  to  be  a  country  or 

entity  the  defense  of  which  is  vital  to  the  defense  of  the  United  States. 


S— In  a  state  of  severed  diplomatic  relations  or  a  state  which  has  some  of 

the  characteristics  of  severed  diplomatic  relations. 
U— Signatory  of  or  adherent  to  the  Declaration  by  United  Nations. 
W — At  war,  either  by  formal  declaration  or  de  focio. 

Letters  enclosed  in  parentheses  indicate  that  the  situation  is  open  to  differ- 
ent interpretations;  for  details  see  table  I  and  the  footnotes  thereto. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  INTERNATIONAL  LABOR  CONFERENCE 

Message  of  President  Roosevelt  ^ 


To  THE  Members  of  the  International  Labor 
Conference:  I  send  you  greetings  and  a  warm 
welcome.  We  are  glad  to  liaA'e  you  in  the  United 
States.  It  is  a  privilege  to  welcome  on  our 
soil  for  the  third  time  a  general  conference  of  your 
great  organization.  The  Conference  that  opens 
today  is  most  significant  in  the  annals  of  inter- 
national gatherings.  The  mere  fact  that,  in  the 
tradition  of  the  founders  of  the  International 
Labor  Organization,  the  Conference  still  main- 
tains its  distinctive  democratic  tripartite  char- 
acter, is  in  itself  of  significance.  As  pai-t  of  the 
regular  constitutional  machinery  of  the  I.L.O.,  it 
also  testifies  to  the  vitality  of  one  of  the  few  inter- 
national organizations  which  have  continued  to 
function  throughout  the  war.     The  determination 


on  the  part  of  its  member  states  that  the  I.L.O. 
should  continue  its  activities  during  the  war  years 
is  evidence  of  the  indestructible  tenacity  of  the 
democratic  way  of  life.  As  representatives  of  the 
practical  affairs  of  these  nations — not  only  of  their 
governments  but  also  of  their  workers  and  em- 
ployers— you  have  come  together  to  make  plans 
and  recommendations  for  the  continuing  improve- 
ment of  labor  standards  and  for  raising  the  stand- 
ard of  living  of  the  world's  people. 

The  tasks  you  are  undertaking,  even  at  the 
moment  when  the  tide  of  war  is  mounting,  bear 
testimony  to  the  fact  that  the  welfare  of  the 

'  Read  to  the  opening  session  of  the  Conference  at 
Philadelphia,  Pa.,  Apr.  20,  1944,  by  Secretary  of  Labor 
Frances  Perkins. 


APRIL    22,     1944 


383 


world's  population  and  their  liberty  are  a  first 
and  an  ultimate  concern  of  those  dedicated  to  root 
out  from  this  earth  every  trace  of  Nazi  ideas  and 
Nazi  methods.  We  know  that  the  conditions  of  a 
lasting  peace  can  be  secured  only  through  soundly- 
organized  economic  institutions,  fortified  by  hu- 
mane labor  standards,  regular  employment,  and 
adequate  income  for  all  the  people.  Within  the 
field  of  your  activity  the  United  Nations  have  no 
need  to  extemporize  a  new  organization — the  ways 
and  means  for  obtaining  this  underwriting  of  a 
permanent  peace  are  among  the  items  on  the 
agenda  of  your  Conference.  In  your  recommenda- 
tions will  lie  the  foundation  of  those  agreements 
in  the  field  of  labor  and  social  standards  which 
must  be  part  of  any  permanent  international  ar- 
rangement for  a  decent  world.  The  Secretary  of 
State,  Cordell  Hull,  has  already  publicly  an- 
nounced that  the  Government  of  the  United  States 
is  now  working  on  plans  for  an  international 
organization  to  maintain  peace.  He  has  also  re- 
ferred to  the  "economic  and  other  cooperative  ar- 
rangements" which  must  be  made  in  order  that  the 
peoples  of  the  world  may  "have  the  opportunity 


through  their  own  efforts  to  improve  their  ma- 
terial condition".  As  part  of  these  plans  and  in- 
ternational arrangements,  I  see  in  the  I.  L.  O.  a 
permanent  instrument  of  representative  character 
for  the  formulation  of  international  policy  on 
matters  directlj'  affecting  the  welfare  of  labor  and 
for  international  collaboration  in  this  field. 

I  see  it  as  a  body  with  the  requisite  authority 
to  formulate  and  secure  the  adoption  of  those 
basic  minimum  standards  that  shall  apply 
throughout  the  world  to  the  conditions  of  employ- 
ment. As  part  of  these  arrangements,  also,  I  see 
in  the  I.  L.  O.  an  organization  which  shall  serve  the 
world  for  investigation  and  research,  for  discus- 
sion and  debate.  But  more  than  that — it  must  be 
the  agency  for  decision  and  for  action  on  those 
economic  and  social  matters  related  to  the  welfare 
of  working  people  which  are  practical  for  industry 
and  designed  to  enhance  the  opportunities  for  a 
good  life  for  peoples  the  world  over.  It  is  to  the 
I.  L.  O.  that  we  shall  look  as  the  official  interna- 
tional organization  where  ideas,  experience,  and 
movements  in  the  field  of  labor  and  social  develop- 
ment may  find  practical  and  effective  expression. 


Message  of  the   Secretary  of  State  ^ 


I  am  happy  to  extend  my  cordial  greetings  to 
the  twenty-sixth  session  of  the  International  Labor 
Conference. 

You  are  not  strangers  in  this  country.  Your 
first  session,  held  in  Washington  in  1919,  laid  his- 
toric foundations  for  your  work,  and  your  most 
recent  session,  in  New  York  in  1941,  expressed  the 
determination  of  free  peoples  the  world  over  to 
carry  this  war  on  to  victory  and  to  restore  and 
strengthen  the  liberty,  the  dignity,  and  the  inalien- 
able rights  of  man. 

You  are  meeting  in  a  city  in  which,  many  years 
ago,  our  forefathers  met  in  conference  to  pioneer 
these  fields.  From  their  debates  emerged  the 
Declaration  of  Independence  which  proclaimed 
the  self-evident  truths  that  all  men  are  created 
equal  and  endowed  by  their  Creator  with  the 
inalienable  rights  of  life,  liberty,  and  the  pursuit 
of  happiness.  A  few  years  later  in  another  con- 
ference in  Philadelphia  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States  was  framed  "to  establish  justice, 
insure  domestic  tranquility,  promote  the  general 


welfare  and  secure  the  blessings  of  liberty"  for 
themselves  and  their  posterity. 

Twenty-five  years  ago  the  same  "sentiments  of 
justice  and  humanity"  led  to  the  creation  of  the 
International  Labor  Organization.  Designed  to 
deal  with  those  labor  conditions  which  involve 
"such  injustice,  hardship  and  privation  .  .  . 
that  the  peace  and  harmony  of  the  world  are  im- 
perilled", the  International  Labor  Organization 
also  was  designed  as  a  great  pillar  in  the  arch  of 
peace  and  security.  It  too  proclaimed  the  need 
of  tranquility  and  the  promotion  of  the  common 
welfare.  Just  twenty-five  years  ago  this  month  a 
little  band  of  courageous  and  determined  men 
were  busy  organizing,  the  first  session  of  this  Con- 
ference, which  was  held  in  Washington  in  October 
1919. 

No  groups  have  larger  stakes  in  both  the 
economic  and  social  aspects  of  international  co- 
operation tha,n  those  represented  at  the  Inter- 


'  Sent  to  the  Conference  on  Apr.  21,  1M4. 


384 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


national  Labor  Conference.  We  are  fortunate 
indeed  to  have  the  machinery  of  a  well-established 
and  experienced  organization  to  facilitate  inter- 
national collaboration  in  mattei's  directly  aifecting 
the  interests  and  problems  of  employers  and 
workers.  The  agenda  of  your  present  session 
shows  both  how  far  you  have  progressed  and  how 
far  we  have  still  to  go. 

The  interdependence  of  nations,  to  which  this 
Conference  draws  dramatic  attention,  has  been 
driven  home  upon  us  with  increasing  force.  We 
have  learned  that  deep-seated  economic  and  social 
evils  cannot  be  cured  by  the  action  of  any  one 
country  alone.  Accordingly,  it  is  essential  that 
this  Conference  should  lay  down  a  program  which 
will  increase  still  further  the  effectiveness  of  the 
International  Labor  Organization  in  the  difficult 
days  to  come  and  to  assist  us  in  directing  national 
and  international  policies  to  the  advancement  of 
the  basic  and  permanent  interests  of  all  peoples. 

FIFTH  FAN  AMERICAN  CONFERENCE  OF 
NATIONAL  DIRECTORS  OF  HEALTH 

[Released  to  the  press  April  IS] 

The  President  has  approved  the  designation  of 
the  following  persons  to  represent  this  Government 
at  the  Fifth  Pan  American  Conference  of  National 
Directors  of  Health,  which  will  be  held  in  Wash- 
ington from  A)n-il  22  to  April  2&,  1944 : 

Surg.  Gen.  Thomas  Parran,  Public  Health  Service,  Federal 

Security  Agency,  chairman 
Senior  Surg.  R.  E.  Bodet,  Public  Health  Service,  Assistant 

Chief,  Foreign  Quarantine  Division 
Capt.  F.  J.  Carter,  Medical  Corps,  U.S.N.,  Chief,  Preventive 

Medicine  Division,  Bureau  of  Medicine  and  Surgery, 

Department  of  the  Navy 
Medical  Director  G.  L.  iJunnahoo,  Public  Health  Service, 

Chief,  Foreign  Quarantine  Division 
Brig.  Gen.  J.  S.  Simmons,  Medical  Corps,  U.S.A.,  Chief, 

Preventive  Medicine,  Office  of  the  Surgeon  General, 

Department  of  War 
Asst.  Surg.  Gen.  R.  C.  Williams,  Public  Health  Service, 

in  charge  of  Bureau  of  Medical  Services 

Among  the  topics  for  discussion  at  the  meeting 
are  wartime  and  post-war  prevention  of  the  inter- 
national spread  of  communicable  diseases,  the  ad- 
visability of  changing  the  present  international 
agreements  with  reference  to  problems  affecting 
quarantine  safeguards  and  sanitary  control  of  air 


navigation,  and  post-war  policies  affecting  inter- 
national health. 

FIRST  WEST  INDIAN  CONFERENCE 

[Released  to  the  press  .ipril  18] 

The  Anglo-American  Caribbean  Commission  an- 
nounced on  April  18,  1944,  through  the  State  De- 
partment, that  the  islands  of  St.  Thomas  and  St. 
John,  of  the  Virgin  Island  group  of  the  United 
States,  are  the  first  territories  represented  at  the 
recent  West  Indian  Conference  in  Barbados^  to 
accept  and  endorse  the  conference  report. 

Ten  colonies  and  territories  of  the  Caribbean 
region  were  represented  at  the  First  West  Indian 
Conference  held  March  21-30  at  Barbados,  Brit- 
ish West  Indies,  under  the  auspices  of  the  Anglo- 
American  Caribbean  Commission.  Delegates  and 
advisers  were  present  from  the  Bahamas,  Barba- 
dos, Leeward  Islands,  Windward  Islands,  Jamaica, 
Trinidad,  British  Guiana,  British  Honduras, 
Puerto  Rico,  and  the  Virgin  Islands  of  the  United 
States. 

Valdemar  A.  Hill,  chairman  of  the  joint  Munici- 
pal Council  of  St.  Thomas-St.  John,  and  delegate 
from  those  islands  to  the  West  Indian  Conference, 
introduced  the  resolution  into  the  Council,  which 
met  in  formal  session  on  April  13  and  endorsed 
the  Conference  report  by  unanimous  vote. 


Europe 


VISIT  TO  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  THE 
GOVERNOR  GENERAL  OF  THE  BELGIAN 
CONGO 

[Released  to  the  press  April  21] 

His  Excellency  Pierre  Ryckmans,  Governor 
General  of  the  Belgian  Congo,  arrived  in  Wash- 
ington April  21  and  will  remain  several  days  as 
the  guest  of  the  Government  at  the  Blair-Lee 
House. 

The  Honorable  Dean  Acheson,  Assistant 
Secretary  of  State,  gave  a  dinner  in  honor  of  Mr. 
Ryckmans  at  the  Carlton  Hotel,  the  evening  of 
the  twenty-first. 


'  Bulletin  of  Mar.  18,  1944,  p.  262. 


APRIL    22,    1944 


385 


American  Republics 


VISIT  TO   THE   UNITED   STATES   OF  THE 
PRESIDENT-ELECT  OF  COSTA  RICA 

The  President-elect  of  Costa  Rica,  His  Excel- 
lency Tedoro  Picudo,  accompanied  by  Seiiora  de 
Picado,  will  arrive  in  Washington  on  April  25, 
where  he  will  be  a  guest  of  the  Government  until 
his  dejiarture  on  April  27.  The  program  for  the 
visit  was  announced  by  the  Department  of  State 
in  a  press  release  (no.  143)  on  April  22. 

DISTINGUISHED  VISITOR  FROM  THE 
OTHER  AMERICAN  REPUBLICS 

Dr.  Manuel  Gonzalez-Montesinos,  who  is  pro- 
fessor of  comparative  literature  and  public-rela- 
tions officer  of  the  National  University  of  Mexico, 
has  arrived  in  Washington  as  the  guest  of  the  De- 
Iiartment  of  State.  He  plans  to  visit  Harvard, 
Yale,  Columbia,  the  University  of  California,  and 
probably  the  Universities  of  Chicago  and  Michi- 
gan. Dr.  Gonzalez-Montesinos  also  intends  to 
I'e-visit  the  Univei'sity  of  Texas,  where  he  has 
already  given  a  series  of  lectui'es  on  the  literary 
relationships  of  Spain  and  France  with  Mexico, 


in  order  to  do  research  in  the  Genaro  Garcia 
Library,  which  possesses  one  of  the  most  important 
Mexican  collections  in  existence. 


Australasia 


VISIT  TO   THE   UNITED   STATES   OF  THE 
PRIME  MINISTER  OF  AUSTRALIA 

[Released  to  the  press  April  20] 

The  Right  Honorable  John  Curtin,  Prime  Min- 
ister of  Australia,  and  Mrs.  Curtin  will  arrive  in 
Washington  on  Sunday,  April  23,  and  will  re- 
main several  days  as  the  guests  of  the  Govern- 
ment at  the  Blair  House. 

The  Prime  Minister's  party  is  made  up  as 
follows : 

The  Right  Honorable  John  Curtin,  Prime  Minister  of 
Australia 

Mrs.  Curtin 

Gen.  Sir  Tlionias  Rlamey,  Commander  in  Chief  of  A.M.F. 

Sir  Fredericli  Shedden.  Under  Secretary  of  War 

Mr.  F.  A.  McLauglilin,  Private  Secretary 

Mr.  D.  K.  Rodgers,  Press  Secretary 

Maj.  D.  H.  Dwyer,  Personal  Assistant  to  the  Commander 
in  Chief 

Mr.  S.  Landau,  Personal  Assistant  to  the  Secretary,  De- 
partment of  Defense 


Publications 


THE  FIFTEENTH  YEAR  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT'S  "NEW  PUBLICATIONS  PROGRAM" 

By  E.  Wilder  Spcmlding  ^ 


Fifteen  years  ago  the  Department  of  State  in- 
augurated a  ''new  i^ublications  program".  In 
spite  of  the  repudiation  of  the  Treaty  of  Versailles, 
this  Government's  interests  in  the  outside  world 
had  been  steadily  increasing.  The  interested 
public  and  officials  alike  were  beginning  to  urge 
that  it  was  the  Department's  responsibility  to  pro- 
vide a  really  adequate  printed  record  of  our  for- 
eign policies  that  would  be  readily  available  to  all 
who  chose  to  read  it.  Mimeographed  announce- 
ments and  occasional  pamphlets  were  not  enough. 


A  distinguished  group  of  scholars,  publicists,  and 
international  lawyers  came  to  Washington,  Con- 
gressional hearings  were  held,  generous  appro- 
priations were  granted  by  the  Congress,  and  the 
new  publications  progi-am  was  launched  vmder 
Dr.  Tyler  Dennett,  the  Historical  Adviser,  on 
October  1,  1929. 

The  program  envisioned  by  the  planners  of  1929 
was  intended  to  provide  basic  documentary  ma- 

"  The  author  of  this  article  is  Acting  Chief  of  the  Division 
of  Research  and  Publication. 


386 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


terial  in  permanent  and  systematic  form.  First 
and  foremost,  the  series  Foreign  Relations  of  the 
United  States,  which  was  lagging  sadly,  was  to  be 
brought  much  more  nearly  up  to  date.  Dr.  Hunter 
Miller  was  to "  do  a  momnnental  edition  of 
annotated  treaty  texts,  Treaties  and  Other  Inter'na- 
tional  Acts  of  the  United  States.  The  Depart- 
ment's press  releases  were  to  be  printed  each  week 
in  pamphlet  form.  Executive  agreements  of  the 
United  States  were  to  appear  in  a  series  paralleling 
the  ancient  Treaty  Series.  Documentation  on  in- 
ternational conferences  and  arbitrations  was  to 
be  brought  together  in  well-defined  series.  Other 
series  were  arranged  to  include  publications  re- 
garding the  several  geographic  areas  and  other 
subjects  like  immigration  and  maps.  The  work 
on  the  Statutes  at  Large  was  to  be  continued  in 
the  OfBce  of  the  Historical  Adviser  and  that  Office 
was  also  to  prepare  for  publication  the  old  records 
of  the  continental  territories  of  the  United  States. 

The  new  ijrogram  started  slowly.  In  1931  Dr. 
Miller  succeeded  Dr.  Dennett  as  Historical  Ad- 
viser, and  another  change  took  place  in  1933  when 
Dr.  Cyril  Wynne  and  his  new  Division  of  Research 
and  Publication  took  over  the  publishing  work. 
Those  men,  however,  never  lost  sight  of  the  broad 
objectives,  and  they  received  constant  support  and 
encouragement  from  committees  on  the  Depart- 
ment's publications  that  were  appointed  by  various 
professional  associations.  New  projects,  like  the 
splendid  Digest  of  Internatioiml  Law  prepared  by 
the  Legal  Adviser,  Green  H.  Hackworth,  were 
incorporated  into  the  program. 

The  past  publishing  year  represented  a  high 
point  in  the  fulfilment  of  the  plan  of  1929.  It 
was  doubtless  the  most  successful  year  in  the  his- 
tory of  State  Department  publishing.  Quantita- 
tively it  was  an  advance  over  all  previous  years  in 
spite  of  the  many  far-reaching  economies  necessi- 
tated by  the  war.  Mailing  lists  were  reduced, 
formats  were  cheapened,  and  non-essential  publi- 
cations were  eliminated  so  that  the  essential  print- 
ing could  continue.  But  most  significant  of  all 
was  the  fact  that  the  war  itself  made  it  important 
to  hasten  projects  already  under  way  and  to  in- 
augin-ate  new  ones.  The  volume  Peace  and  War, 
which  outlined  Secretary  Hull's  foreign  policies 
from  1931  to  Pearl  Harbor,  attracted  nation-wide 


attention,  was  translated  into  several  foreign  lan- 
guages, and  was  sold  in  tens  of  thousands.  Na- 
tional Socialism,  also  inspired  by  the  war,  was 
another  best-seller. 

Never  before  had  seven  Foreign  Relations  vol- 
umes been  published  within  a  year's  time.  There 
were  three  of  the  regular  annual  volimies — for 
1928  and  1929,  two  on  the  Paris  Peace  Conference, 
and  two  on  relations  with  Japan  from  1931  to  1941. 
Not  for  many  years  had  volumes  in  that  series  ap- 
peared with  papers  as  recent  as  the  correspondence 
printed  in  the  two  large  Japan  volumes.  The  year 
1943  saw  the  i^ublication  of  volumes  V,  VI,  and 
VII  of  Mr.  Hackworth's  Digest  of  International 
Law,  thus  completing  the  series  except  for  the 
index  volume  which  has  only  recently  been  sent  to 
press.  It  saw  the  completion  of  Dr.  Marjorie  M. 
Whiteman's  three-volume  Damages  in  Interna- 
tional Law.  A  sizeable  volume  on  Michigan  Terri- 
tory was  the  eleventh  in  the  Territorial  Papers 
series  which  is  edited  by  Dr.  Clarence  E.  Carter  in 
the  Division  of  Research  and  Publication.  Docu- 
ments on  the  Hot  Springs  Conference  on  Food  and 
Agriculture  and  on  the  Atlantic  City  Conference 
on  Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  appeared  in 
the  Conference  Series.  There  were  over  70  num- 
bers in  the  Executive  Agreement  Series. 

The  weekly  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  which 
succeeded  the  printed  Press  Releases  in  1939,  be- 
came increasingly  useful,  as  evidenced  by  a  i-ap- 
idly  growing  mailing  list,  to  other  Government 
agencies  interested  in  foreign  policy  and  came  to 
be  more  and  more  widely  recognized  by  writers  in 
the  field  as  the  authoritative  source  for  the  texts  of 
this  Government's  pronouncements  on  foreign 
policy.  The  Bulletin  now  contains  an  ever-in- 
creasing amount  of  data  especially  prepared  for 
publication  in  its  pages. 

The  Department  announced  on  April  16,  1944 
the  publication  of  the  second  and  third  Foreign 
Relations  volumes  for  1929.  Their  publication 
means  that  there  is  now  in  print  considerable  official 
documentation  on  American  foreign  policy  for 
every  year  since  1861 :  Foreign  Relations  for  the 
years  1861  through  1929,  the  printed  Press  Re- 
leases from  1929  to  1939,  and  the  Department  of 
State  Bulletin  from  1939  to  the  present.    Thus  the 


APRIL   22,    1944 


387 


Department  has,  to  that  extent,  now  filled  the  docu- 
mentary gap  between  the  past  and  the  present  of 
our  foreign  policies. 

It  was  a  disappointment  to  those  concerned  with 
the  publishing  program  that  all  of  the  1929 
Foreign  Relations  volumes  did  not  appear  in  1943. 
It  is  to  be  exi^ected,  however,  that  war  will  produce 
many  conditions  that  are  unfavorable  to  the 
maintenance  of  a  thoroughly  satisfactory  publi- 
cations schedule.  War  brings  shortages  in  per- 
sonnel, in  printing  fmids,  and  in  paper,  and  it 


produces  troublesome  delays  of  nlany  varieties. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  Department  of  State 
realizes,  as  evidenced  by  the  recent  formation  of 
the  Office  of  Public  Information  of  which  the 
Division  of  Kesearch  and  Publication  is  a  part, 
that  a  continuously  expanding  information  policy 
is  one  of  its  primary  responsibilities  in  these 
critical  times,  and  there  is  therefore  reason  to  hope 
that  the  year  1943  will  not  too  long  remain  the 
high  point  in  the  Department's  publisliing 
program. 


'PAPERS  RELATING  TO  THE  FOREIGN  RELATIONS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,   1929' 

VOLUMES  II  AND  HI 


[Released  to  the  press  April  16] 

The  Department  of  State  released  on  April  16 
the  second  and  third  of  three  volumes  ^  containing 
a  documentary  record  of  American  diplomacy  for 
the  year  1929.  The  volumes  now  released  contain 
nearly  two  thousand  pages  of  documents  ar- 
ranged under  the  following  country  headings : 

Volume  II :  Belgium,  Bulgaria,  Canada,  Chile, 
China,  Colombia,  Cuba,  Denmark,  Egypt,  Estonia, 
Ethiopia,  France,  and  Germany. 

Volume  III :  Great  Britain,  Greece,  Guatemala, 
Haiti,  Honduras,  Hungary,  Irish  Free  State, 
Japan,  Latvia,  Liberia,  Luxembourg,  Mexico, 
Morocco,  Xetherlands,  Nicaragua,  Norway, 
Panama,  Persia,  Portugal,  Rumania,  Siam,  Spain, 
Turkey,  Union  of  South  Africa,  Venezuela,  and 
Yugoslavia. 

A  dozen  different  topics  are  treated  in  the  sedi- 
tion on  Canada,  the  common  frontier  giving  rise 
to  questions  relating  to  liquor  smuggling,  fisheries, 
apportionment  of  waters,  inland  navigation,  air- 
craft, and  radio. 

The  China  section  comprises  more  than  two 
thirds  of  volume  II  because  of  the  extensive  corre- 
spondence with  respect  to  problems  relating  to 
continued  civil  war,  extraterritoriality,  and  the 
Sino-Soviet  dispute  over  the  control  of  the  Chinese 
Eastern  Railway.  In  respect  to  the  last  of  these 
issues,  the  Kellogg-Briand  pact  for  the  renunci- 
ation of  war  was  invoked  bv  the  United  States. 


'  For  release  of  volume  I,  see  BuiXETriN  of  Dec.  18,  1943, 
p.  433. 


Documents  in  the  section  on  Germany  deal  for 
the  most  part  with  the  Young  plan  for  repara- 
tions and  with  payments  owed  by  Germany  for 
the  costs  of  the  American  army  of  occupation  and 
other  claims.  The  American  Government  still 
held  to  its  policy  of  complete  separation  of  Allied 
debts  owed  to  the  United  States  from  reparation 
payments  sought  from  Germany. 

Volume  III  opens  with  reports  on  the  visit  to 
Washington  of  the  British  Prime  Minister,  Ram- 
say MacDonald.  Conferences  at  the  Rapidan 
camp  and  in  Washington  considered  questions  of 
prohibition  enforcement,  freedom  of  the  seas, 
amendment  of  the  Kellogg  pact,  and  naval  mat- 
ters. Another  topic  of  interest  in  the  section  on 
Great  Britain  is  that  of  the  protection  of  Ameri- 
can lives  and  property  endangered  by  riots  in 
Palestine. 

The  section  on  Japan  shows  the  difficulty  of 
securing  ratification  by  that  nation  of  the  Kel- 
logg-Briand pact  because  of  the  fact  that  the  com- 
mitments were  made  by  the  several  governments 
"in  the  names  of  their  respective  peoples".  Final 
ratification  was  made  with  the  declaration  by  the 
Imperial  Government  that  this  phrase  "viewed  in 
the  light  of  the  provisions  of  the  Imperial  Consti- 
tution, is  understood  to  be  inapplicable  in  so  far 
as  Japan  is  concerned."  Another  group  of  docu- 
ments relating  to  Japan  tells  of  Japanese  objec- 
tion to  visits  by  American  naval  vessels  to  un- 
opened ports  in  the  islands  under  mandate  to 
Japan. 

Other  subjects  presented  in  these  volumes  cover 
a  wide  range  of  political,  economic,  and  legal  prob- 


388 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


lems  of  which  the  protection  of  motion-picture 
rights  in  France,  rectification  of  the  Eio  Grande 
boundary  between  the  United  States  and  Mexico, 
reservation  of  American  rights  in  Morocco,  iVmer- 
ican  interest  in  the  oil  fields  of  the  Netherlands 
East  Indies,  assistance  in  the  supervision  of  elec- 
tions in  Nicaragua,  treaty  relations  with  Panama, 
the  question  of  compensation  for  American  prop- 
erty taken  by  the  Spanish  Petroleum  Monopoly, 
and  the  establishment  of  direct  diplomatic  rela- 
tions between  the  United  States  and  the  Union  of 
South  Africa  are  only  a  few  examples. 

The  volumes  described  above  will  be  available 
to  the  public  shortly  and  may  be  purchased  from 
the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Govermnent 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  The  price 
for  volume  II  (cxxxix,  1132  pp.)  is  $2.50  and  for 
volume  III  (cxiii,  885  pp.)  is  $2. 


The  following  publication  has  also  been  released 
by  the  Department  : 

Foreign  Policy  of  the  United  States  of  America :  Address 
by  Cordell  Hull,  Secretary  of  State,  over  the  network 
of  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System  April  9,  1944. 
Publication  2096.     16  pp.     50. 


Legislation 


Extension  of  Lend-Lease  Act : 

Hearings   Before   the   Committee   on   Foreign   Affairs, 
House  of   Representatives,   78th   Cong.,   2d   sess.,   on 
H.R.  4254.     March  1,  2,  3,  7,  8,  and  9,  1944.     [State- 
ment of  Under  Secretary  of  State  Stettinius,  pp.  31--41 ; 
statement  of  Assistant   Secretary  of  State  Aeheson, 
pp.  119-141.]     iv,  281  pp. 
Index  of  Testimony  During  Hearings  Before  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Affairs,  Hou.se  of  Representatives, 
78th  Cong.,  2d  sess.,  on  H.R.  4251.     ii,  6  pp. 
Foreign    Policy   of   the   United    States:    Address   of   the 
Honorable  Cordell  Hull,   Secretary  of  State,  delivered 
April  9,  1944  over  the  radio  network  of  the  Columbia 
Broadcasting  System.     S.  Doc.  181,  78th  Cong,     ii,  9  pp. 
Investigation  of  Political,  Economic,  and  Social  Conditions 
in  Puerto  R'ico :  Appendix  to  Hearings  Before  the  Sub- 
committee of  the  Committee  on  Insular  Affairs,  House 
of  Representatives,  78th  Cong.,  1st  sess.,   pursuant  to 
H.  Res.  150.     vi,  538  pp. 
Requesting  Certain  Information  From  the  President.    H. 
Rept.  1361,  7Sth  Cong.,  on  H.  Con.  Res.  77.     [Adverse 
report]     1  p. 


The  Foreign  Service 


EMBASSY  RANK  FOR  REPRESENTATION 
BETWEEN  THE  UNITED  STATES  AND 
PORTUGAL 

[Released  to  the  press  April  21] 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  of  Amer- 
ica, having  in  mind  the  character  and  the  grow- 
ing importance  of  relations  between  the  two  coun- 
tries, has  expressed  the  intention  of  raising  its 
legation  in  Lisbon  to  the  rank  of  embassy  and  has 
expressed  at  the  same  time  the  hope  that  the 
Portuguese  Government  would  accredit  a  repre- 
sentative from  Portugal  at  Washington  with  equal 
rank. 

The  Portuguese  Government,  having  taken  note 
of  this  contemplated  action  with  the  greatest  pleas- 
ure, has  expressed  its  appreciation  to  the  American 
Government  for  its  initiative  and  has  declared  it- 
self readily  willing  to  reciprocate. 

Accordingly,  the  two  Governments  have  agreed 
to  raise  their  respective  legations  at  Washington 
and  Lisbon  to  embassies. 

CONSULAR  OFFICES 

The  Department  of  State  has  been  informed  of 
the  closing  of  the  American  Vice  Consulate  at 
Osorno,  Chile,  effective  March  31,  1944,  and  the 
establishment  of  American  consulates  at  San 
Sebastian,  Spain,  and  Grenada,  British  West 
Indies,  effective  April  5  and  6, 1944,  respectively. 


Treaty  Information 


AGREEMENT  FOR  UNITED  NATIONS  RELIEF 
AND  REHABILITATION  ADMINISTRATION 

The  Ambassador  of  Mexico  transmitted  to  the 
Secretary  of  State,  with  a  note  of  April  3,  1944, 
an  authenticated  copy  of  the  decree  published  in 
the  Diario  Oficial  of  the  United  Mexican  States  on 
March  22,  1944,  promulgating  the  Agreement  for 
United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Admin- 
istration signed  in  Washington  on  November  9, 
1943. 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


^\^ 


I 


J 


H 


1   r 


I 


1 


APRIL  29,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  253— Publication  2114 


C< 


ontents 


The  War  p.,ge 
Economic     Foreign     Policy:  Address     by    Harry     C. 

Hawkins 39 1 

Visitof  the  Under  Secretary  of  State  to  London   ....  395 
General 

Death  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy: 

Statement  by  the  President 396 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 396 

Proclamation  by  the  Secretary  of  State 396 

Economic  Affairs 

Changes  in  Certain  Turkish  Import  Duties 397 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 
Fifth  Pan  American  Conference  of  National  Directors  of 

Health:  Remarks  of  Assistant  Secretary  Berle  .    .       398 

The  Department 

Treaty  Section  Organized  in  the  Division  of  Research 

and  Publication 399 

Appointment  of  Officers 400 

Treaty  InforxMation 

Inter-American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences  .    .    .  400 

Protocol  on  Pelagic  Whaling 400 

Commercial"Modus  Vivendi",  Canada  and  Venezuela  .  400 

Exchange  of  Publications,  Ecuador  and  Panama   ...  401 

[over] 


•J.  S.  £: 


0 


OTltSIl  ^5— CONTINUED 

The  Foreign  Service  ^i^ee 

Consular  Offices 401 

American  Republics 

Appointment   of  Special  Representative  to  Inaugura- 
tion of  President  of  Costa  Rica 401 

Publications 401 

Legislation 402 


The  War 


ECONOMIC  FOREIGN  POLICY 

Address  by  Harry  C.  Hawkins  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  April  25] 

My  remarks  this  evening  will  relate  mainly  to 
the  subject  of  economic  foreign  policy.  This  is  a 
subject  in  which  this  organization  has  long  shown 
a  highly  intelligent  and  constructive  interest. 
The  most  important  instrument  of  that  policy  for 
some  years  has  been  the  reciprocal-trade-agree- 
ments program  carried  on  under  the  authority  of 
the  Trade  Agreements  Act  of  1934.  This  pro- 
gram has  been  consistently  and  effectively  sup- 
ported by  the  Federation  and  its  member  organ- 
izations. As  recently  as  1943,  when  the  Trade 
Agreements  Act  was  before  Congress,  Mrs.  Har- 
vey W.  Wiley  appeared  before  the  Ways  and 
Means  Committee  to  favor  renewal  of  the  act  and 
to  present  a  most  excellent  statement  from  your 
President,  Mrs.  John  L.  Whitehurst. 


The  problems  of  economic  policy  in  the  future 
will  in  many  ways  be  different  from  those  we  have 
had  to  deal  with  in  the  past.  The  world  is  under- 
going a  tremendous  upheaval  that  will  ci'eate  eco- 
nomic, social,  and  political  problems  of  great 
variety  and  extreme  difficulty  for  many  years  to 
come. 

For  the  present  and  immediate  future,  of  course, 
all  problems  cluster  around  the  central  one  of 
winning  the  war.  All  considerations  of  foreign 
and  domestic  policy  must  be  subordinated  to  those 
bearing  upon  the  central  problem  of  bringing  the 
war  to  a  successful  conclusion. 

For  the  future,  the  primary  objective  of  for- 
eign policy  must  be  the  preservation  of  the  peace 
we  are  now  fighting  to  attain. 


War  is  the  common  source  of  most  of  the  diffi- 
culties we  faced  before  the  present  conflict  and  of 
those  we  will  have  to  face  when  these  hostilities 
end.  A  major  part  of  the  economic  dislocations 
and  social  unrest  that  characterized  the  troubled 
20  years  prior  to  the  outbreak  of  the  present  war 
were  the  direct  outgrowth  of  the  first  world  war. 
We  were  still  wrestling  with  these  problems  when 
the  second  world  war  broke  upon  us.  The  pres- 
ent conflict  will  pile  new  problems  and  difficulties 
upon  the  old  ones.  A  third  world  war  would  find 
us  still  trying  to  recover  from  the  first  and  the 
second  and  might  well  create  dislocations  and 
problems  with  which  we  could  not  cope.  Viewed 
in  broad  perspective,  our  civilization  during  the 
last  30  years  seems  to  have  taken  a  decidedly  down- 
ward course.  If  we  do  not  succeed  in  preventing 
a  third  world  war  this  cumulative  trend  may  well 
become  a  nose-dive  from  which  we  cannot  pull 
out. 

Therefore,  the  major  problem  of  foreign  policy 
for  the  post-war  world  will  be  to  prevent  the  recur- 
rence of  war;  to  kill  the  evil  parent  of  the  brood 
of  troubles  that  beset  mankind. 

Obviously  there  is  no  single,  simple  formula  for 
implementing  this  major  policy.  Our  policies  in 
many  fields  must  be  made  to  contribute  har- 
moniously to  this  end.  They  must  support  and 
not  conflict  with  each  other.  They  must  be  woven 
together,  so  to  speak,  in  an  orderly  pattern  for 
peace. 


'  Delivered  at  the  03d  annual  meeting  of  the  General 
Federation  of  Women's  Clubs,  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  Apr.  25,  1944. 
Mr.  Hawkins  is  the  Director  of  the  Office  of  Economic 
Affairs  of  the  Department  of  State. 

891 


392 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


There  are  two  main  parts  of  this  broad  pattern, 
or,  to  change  the  metaphor,  two  main  supporting 
elements  for  the  peace  structure.  The  first  of 
these  is  a  carefully  devised  system  of  security,  the 
essential  feature  of  which  is  a  suitable  arrange- 
ment whereby  the  law-abiding  nations  will  unite 
to  curb  outlaw  elements  in  the  society  of  nations. 
The  second  is  the  creation  of  a  better  world  eco- 
nomic order,  the  essential  purposes  of  which  are 
to  eliminate  the  economic  causes  of  international 
friction  and  to  reduce  the  poverty  and  distress 
which  gangster  elements  in  any  nation  can  so 
effectively  exploit  to  build  up  their  own  strength. 

The  problem  of  buikling  the  peace  structure  is 
like  that  of  building  a  bridge.  There  must  be 
solid  support  at  both  ends.  No  matter  how  well 
constructed  the  support  nu\y  be  at  one  end,  there 
can  be  no  bridge  unless  there  is  solid  support  at 
the  other. 

In  considering  the  problem  of  how  to  create  an 
enduring  peace  it  is  important  that  we  all  bear 
carefully  in  mind  a  further  essential  fact.  This 
fact  is  that  neither  a  system  of  collective  security 
nor  a  sound  economic  system  can  work  effectively 
without  the  other. 

A  world  in  which  each  nation  is  compelled  to 
rely  solely  on  itself  for  its  own  security  cannot  be 
a  prosperous  world.  In  such  a  world  the  people 
of  each  country  would  have  to  bear  a  very  heavy 
burden  of  armaments.  Moreover,  as  happened  in 
the  period  between  the  wars,  each  nation  would 
inevitably  tend  to  subordinate  sound  economic 
considerations  to  measures  designed  to  promote 
security.  Each  would  tend  to  seek  national  eco- 
nomic self-sufficiency  for  security  reasons,  at  great 
sacrifice  to  the  economic  welfare  of  its  own  people 
and  those  of  other  nations. 

A  sound  economic  order,  therefore,  depends 
upon  the  creation  of  a  security  system.  But  the 
reverse  is  also  true:  a  collective  security  system 
depends  upon  the  creation  of  a  sound  economic 
order.  The  security  system  would  break  down  if 
economic  conditions  became  too  bad.  Obviously 
the  successful  operation  of  such  a  system  will 
depend  much  more  upon  the  readiness  to  use  force 
against  outlaw  nations  than  upon  the  actual  use 


of  it.  If  economic  conditions  became  so  bad  that 
desperate  people  were  frecjuently  turning  to  fol- 
low leaders  of  the  gangster  sort,  force  would  have 
to  be  employed  so  often  as  to  create  a  virtually 
constant  state  of  war.  A  community  in  which 
the  police  are  constantly  engaged  in  gun-fights 
with  outlaw  elements  is  not  a  peaceful  community. 

II 

In  considering  our  economic  foreign  policies, 
therefore,  we  must  remember  that  they  are  part  of 
our  general  foreign  policy;  that  they  must  serve 
not  onljr  economic  ends  but  must  supplement  other 
foreign  policies,  all  in  the  interest  of  attaining  our 
major  objective  of  creating  an  enduring  peace. 

We  must  also  remember  that  each  plan  or  policy 
for  improving  economic  conditions  must  supple- 
ment rather  than  conflict  with  other  economic 
plans  and  measures;  in  brief,  that  our  economic 
foreign  policy  must  make  a  harmonious  pattern. 

The  most  basic  need  in  the  post-war  world  will 
be  the  expansion  of  international  trade.  This  is  a 
basic  and  indispensable  requirement.  Most  plans 
for  creating  better  economic  conditions  in  the  post- 
war world  have,  or  should  have,  this  as  one  of  their 
primary  objects. 

Policies  relating  to  the  creation  and  improve- 
ment of  shipping  and  aviation  services  must  keep 
in  view  the  fact  that  these  transportation  indus- 
tries are  the  servants  of  trade  and  that  the  maxi- 
mum expansion  of  international  trade  requires  the 
efficient  service  and  low  cost  that  tends  to  result 
from  competition. 

Internal  measures  which  contribute  to  main- 
taining a  high  and  steady  level  of  employment  are 
of  interest  to  other  nations  because  of  the  effect  on 
international  trade.  A  high  and  steady  level  of 
productive  employment  in  any  country  is  of  bene- 
fit to  others  because  it  means  the  maintenance  of  a 
high  and  steady  level  of  purchasing  power  for 
foreign  goods  and  is,  therefore,  a  highly  impor- 
tant factor  in  maintaining  a  flourishing  interna- 
tional trade. 

Measures  which  will  facilitate  employment  of 
investment  capital  by  nations  that  have  it,  in  de- 
veloping the  resources  and  industries  on  a  sound 


APRIL    29,    1944 


393 


basis  of  countries  wliere  it  is  needed,  bring  about 
an  increase  in  living  standards  in  the  countries 
wliere  tlie  funds  are  invested.  Such  investment  is 
important  from  an  international  point  of  view 
because  it  increases  purchasing  power  for  foreign 
goods  and  i-esults  in  an  increase  in  international 
trade,  which  is  the  only  way  in  wliich  the  invest- 
ing country  and  the  woild  at  large  can  fully  share 
in  tlie  wealth  whicli  sucli  funds  create. 

Measures  for  the  stabilization  of  currencies  must 
have  as  a  primary  object  the  creation  of  conditions 
under  which  trade  between  nations  can  better 
flourish.  Such  measures  are  essential  for  this  pur- 
pose and  are  an  indispensable  part  of  the  post-war 
economic  pattern. 

Obviously  it  would  make  little  sense  for  govern- 
ments with  one  hand  to  go  to  such  pains  to  create 
these  facilities  and  conditions  with  a  view  to  caus- 
ing international  trade  to  expand  and  with  the 
other  hand  to  erect  trade  barriers  for  the  purpose 
of  destroying  it.  An  indispensable  part  of  the 
pattern,  therefore,  is  positive  and  vigorous  action 
by  governments  to  bring  about  a  reduction  of  the 
barriers  to  trade  by  which  they  have  sought  to 
stifle  it.  If  not  prevented  by  restrictive  govern- 
ment action  millions  of  producers  and  traders 
throughout  the  world  would  spontaneously  de- 
velop a  thriving  international  trade  which  would 
not  only  serve  their  own  interests  but  would  create 
incieased  employment  and  raise  living  standards 
throughout  the  world. 

There  is  a  further  reason  why  governments  must 
refrain  after  the  war  from  the  kind  of  trade  war- 
fare in  which  they  previously  indulged.  Not  only 
do  high  tariffs  and  other  such  impediments  to 
trade  nullify  all  other  measures  for  promoting  it, 
but  deliberately  destructive  measures  of  this  sort 
are  highly  provocative  and  create  friction  and  ill- 
feeling  such  as  a  mere  failure  to  take  positive 
trade-promotion  measures  would  not.  When  a 
government,  under  pressure  from  special  interests 
within  the  coimtr}',  raises  uni'easonable  or  exces- 
sive tariffs  or  other  restrictions  against  imports 
in  order  to  slielter  the  special  interests  concerned 
from  foreign  competition,  it  not  only  injures  its 
own  consumers  and  expoil  interests  but  strikes  a 


devastating  blow  at  the  vital  interests  of  countries 
whose  goods  are  shut  out.  Such  trade  restrictions 
create  unemployment  and  the  necessity  for  pain- 
ful internal  economic  adjustments  in  the  coun- 
tries whose  trade  is  cut  down.  They  provoke 
retaliation  and  recrimination.  They  create  a  sit- 
uation in  which  a  spirit  of  international  coopera- 
tion cannot  develop,  and  a  spirit  of  cooperation  is 
the  verj'  cement  wliich  must  hold  together  any 
world  organization  that  may  be  established  for 
the  preservation  of  the  peace. 

It  may  be  asked  what  it  is  going  to  cost  us  to 
cooperate  with  other  nations  in  bringing  about  an 
expansion  of  trade.  The  answer  is  that  we,  like 
other  countries,  would  not  lose  but,  on  the  con- 
trary, would  gain  enormously  by  it. 

Foreign  trade  has  always  been  important  to  us 
and  will  be  even  more  so  after  the  war.  The  great 
expansion  of  production  as  a  result  of  the  war  and 
the  further  expansion  of  which  we  are  capable, 
creates  a  need  for  wide  and  expanding  markets, 
and  the  export  of  our  surplus  production  will 
provide  the  means  of  obtaining  from  abroad  the 
many  thin,gs  we  lack  and  help  to  supply  new  defi- 
ciencies resulting  from  the  depletion  of  our 
resources  by  the  war.  An  expanding  market  of 
world-wide  scope,  therefore,  means  expanding 
pros]:)erity  in  this  country,  as  it  does  in  others. 

Nor  do  I  believe  there  is  ground  for  the  fear 
sometimes  expressed  that  because  of  the  low  wages 
and  living-  standards  prevailing  in  many  parts  of 
tlie  world  we  will  not  be  able  to  compete  in  the 
world  market.  The  United  States  has  a  mature 
and  highly  develop-ed  economy.  This  country  is 
known  throughout  the  world  for  the  efficiency  of 
its  labor,  for  its  managerial  skill,  its  inventive 
genius,  and  the  quality  and  utility  of  its  products. 
The  economic  giant  of  private  enterprise  here 
today  recognizes  that  it  does  not  need  to  cower 
behind  tariff'  barricades  in  quaking  fear  of  foreign 
competition. 

Ill 

The  need  for  international  action  on  the  trade- 
barrier  problem  is  self-evident.  Finding  an  ade- 
quate solution  will,  however,  Ije  far  from  easy,  if 


394 


DEPAKTMENT   OF  STATE   BULLETTNl 


past  experience  is  any  guide.  Indeed,  the  trade- 
barrier  problem  may  well  be  one  of  the  rocks  on 
which  the  post-war  peace  effort  might  founder. 

It  is  highly  important,  therefore,  that  we  make 
a  most  thoughtful  analysis  of  the  situation  with 
which  we  will  have  to  deal  when  the  war  is  over  and 
carefully  make  the  best  plans  we  can  to  meet  it. 

There  will  be  a  considerable  period  of  time  after 
hostilities  cease  during  which  the  world  will  still 
be  shaken  by  the  gradually  subsiding  convulsions 
of  war.  There  will  be  a  period  of  transition 
from  war  to  peace,  a  period  during  which  the  daily 
economic  problems  to  be  dealt  with  will  be  of  an 
emergency  character  such  as  those  with  which  we 
have  had  to  deal  during  the  war.  There  will  be 
the  necessity  of  providing  relief  for  the  starving 
and  impoverished  peoples  in  the  areas  devastated 
by  the  war  or  looted  by  the  enemy.  There  will  be 
shortages  of  shipping,  scarcities  of  many  prod- 
ucts, and  surpluses  of  others.  Government  con- 
trols which  were  necessary  during  the  war  will 
have  to  be  maintained  for  a  considerable  period  of 
time. 

Obviously  it  would  not  be  realistic  during  such 
a  period  to  expect  governments  to  relax  their  con- 
trol and  regulation  of  trade  and  to  give  free  play 
to  those  ever-present  forces  of  private  enterprise 
which  cause  trade  spontaneously  to  expand. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  cannot  postpone  action 
until  the  transition  period  laas  ended  and  until 
conditions  which  will  come  to  be  regarded  as  nor- 
mal shall  have  been  established.  It  would  be 
fatal  to  the  attainment  of  the  ends  in  view  to  let 
matters  drift  at  such  a  time. 

To  a  greater  extent  than  in  any  other  period  in 
history  systems  of  production  throughout  the 
world  will  be  in  a  fluid  state. 

In  Europe  the  economic  system  will  have  been 
so  completely  disrupted  that  reconstruction  will 
consist  almost  in  starting  anew  to  create  an  eco- 
nomic order. 

In  the  United  States  and  in  most  other  countries, 
there  has  been  a  similar  though,  in  most  cases,  a 
less  extreme  upheaval.  Industries  have  been  con- 
verted from  peacetime  to  wartime  production  and 
when  hostilities  end  there  will  be  an  almost  uni- 
versal problem  of  reconversion  to  peacetime  pro- 


duction. Businessmen  will  realize  that  the  condi- 
tions under  which  they  carried  on  their  operations 
prior  to  the  war  will  no  longer  exist ;  that  tlie  size 
and  character  of  their  market  may  have  radically 
altered;  that  there  are  new  problems  of  raw- 
material  sui:)ply;  and  in  general  that  the  condi- 
tions under  which  they  formerly  carried  on  their 
peacetime  operations  have  been  radically  changed 
as  a  consequence  of  war. 

Moreover,  to  a  larger  extent  than  ever  before, 
producers  will  be  in  a  position  to  adjust  them- 
selves to  whatever  national  trade  and  other  policies 
may  have  been  adopted.  In  fact,  so  far  as  possi- 
ble, they  will  want  to  know  what  those  policies  are 
going  to  be.  The  sooner,  therefore,  that  basic 
national  policies  can  be  established,  the  better  will 
business  and  all  other  interests  be  able  to  orient 
themselves  in  the  post-war  world. 

There  is  a  further  reason  for  the  early  formula- 
tion of  national  policy  and  plans  of  action  with 
respect  to  international  barriers  to  peacetime 
trade.  There  is  nothing  clearer  from  experience 
than  the  fact  that  it  will  be  fatal  if  matters  are 
allowed  to  drift.  There  is  an  inherent  tendency 
of  tariffs  and  other  trade  barriers  to  rise  in  re- 
sponse to  the  proddings  of  well-organized  special 
interests.  The  gains  to  such  interests  seem  tangi- 
ble and  obvious,  and  the  losses  to  consumer  and 
export  interests,  though  serious,  are  much  less  ob- 
vious. There  is  also  a  stubborn  inherent  resist- 
ance to  reduction,  once  such  barriers  have  been 
established. 

If  vigorous  measures  are  not  taken  to  bring 
about  the  removal  or  mitigation  of  government 
controls  as  soon  as  the  need  for  them  is  past  it  is 
almost  inevitable  that,  while  many  unpopular 
controls  will  in  due  course  be  abandoned,  those 
which  stifle  foreign  competition  would  be  likely 
to  be  maintained  indefinitely  and  increased. 

These  coiisiderations  lead  to  the  conclusion 
that  plans  should  be  made  for  attacking  the  trade- 
barrier  problem  immediately  upon  termination  of 
hostilities,  or  even  earlier,  if  jsracticable. 

Such  plans  should  have  in  view  international 
commitments  whereby  wartime  restrictions  on  in- 
ternational trade  will  be  relaxed  as  the  emergency 
need  for  them  passes.     Tliis  will  at  least  prevent 


APRIL   29,    1944 


395 


wartime  restrictions  on  trade  from  being  con- 
tinued indefinitely  into  the  post-war  period,  if  not 
permanently. 

Sucli  action  will  not,  iiowever,  be  enough.  Cer- 
tainl}'  no  one  familiar  with  the  barb-wire  en- 
tanglements which  obstructed  international  trade 
in  the  period  prior  to  the  war  would  be  content 
to  see  the  commercial  policy  of  nations  revert  to 
what  it  was  during  that  period.  Plans  for  dealing 
with  the  trade-barrier  i^roblem  should,  therefore, 
include  international  commitments  and  arrange- 
ments whereby  pre-war  tariffs  and  other  barriers 
to  trade  throughout  the  world  would  be  reduced 
under  suitable  safeguards  as  the  period  of  transi- 
tion proceeds  and  the  acute  problems  of  that  period 
give  way  to  more  chronic  ones.  AVe  need,  in  brief, 
to  lay  down  in  advance  the  plan  for  a  new  eco- 
nomic order  in  tlie  world  and  get  the  nations  of  the 
world  committed  to  it  at  the  earliest  practicable 
date. 

As  I  have  already  said,  no  one  familiar  with 
this  problem  can  have  any  illusions  regarding  the 
formidable  difficulties  it  presents.  It  may  well  be 
that  the  old  forces  which  asserted  themselves  not 
long  after  the  last  war  will  assert  themselves  again 
after  this  one.  It  may  well  be  that  important 
countries  will  again  take  steps  to  shut  out  imports 
from  their  former  allies;  that  nation  will  again 
strike  at  the  vital  economic  interests  of  nation  and 
re-create  the  state  of  trade  warfare  and  interna- 
tional economic  anarchy  that  developed  after  the 
last  war. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  hope  in  the  possi- 
bility that  we  may  have  learned  from  experience. 
Certainly  our  armed  forces  who  have  been  exposed 
to  the  hazards  and  horrors  of  this  conflict,  and 
those  at  home  who  have  suffered  the  bereavements 
of  war,  are  not  likely  to  be  complacent  with  na- 
tional policies  that  permit  us  to  drift  in  a  direction 
which  can  only  lead  to  a  repetition  not  many  years 
hence  of  what  they  are  now  going  through. 

At  least  that  ought  to  be  true,  provided,  and 
always  provided,  that  the  individual  citizen  un- 
derstands the  true  implications  of  such  policies. 
It  is  the  opportunity  and  responsibility  of  organi- 
zations such  as  the  General  Federation  of  Women's 
Clubs  to  continue  to  play  a  highly  important  role 


in  the  task  of  creating  a  secure  and  prosperous 
nation  in  a  world  of  peace  and  plenty. 

VISIT  OF  THE  UNDER  SECRETARY  OF 
STATE  TO  LONDON 

[Released  to  the  press  April  29] 

The  following  statement  has  been  issued  in  Lon- 
don jointly  by  Foreign  Secretary  Eden  and  Under 
Secretary  of  State  Stettinius : 

"Mr.  Stettinius,  Under  Secretary  of  State,  and 
a  delegation  composed  of  senior  representatives 
of  the  United  States  Government  have  been  visit- 
ing this  country  during  the  past  three  weeks  on 
behalf  of  Mr.  Cordell  Hull,  United  States  Secre- 
tary of  State,  for  informal  and  exploratory  ex- 
changes of  views.  Their  visit  has  afforded  His 
Majesty's  Government  in  the  United  Kingdom  a 
welcome  opportunity  to  repay  courtesies  extended 
to  the  Secretary  of  State  for  Foreign  Affairs  and 
other  members  of  the  Foreign  Office  on  their  visits 
to  Washington  in  the  recent  past. 

"During  their  stay  Mr.  Stettinius  and  his  party 
have  had  an  informal  discussion  covering  the  very 
wide  fields  in  which  the  two  countries  are  col- 
laborating so  closely  in  the  prosecution  of  the  war. 
They  have  had  conversations  with  the  Prime  Min- 
ister and  the  Foreign  Secretary  as  well  as  with 
numerous  other  Ministers  and  with  officials.  The 
discussions  have  covered  important  current  ques- 
tions and  others  that  will  become  of  importance 
as  hostilities  draw  to  a  close  and  also  long-range 
questions  in  connection  with  the  post-war  period. 

"In  all  fields  the  discussions  have  revealed  a  very 
large  measure  of  common  ground.  The  talks  have 
been  of  great  assistance  in  the  task  of  coordinating 
policies,  and  all  those  concerned  in  both  Govern- 
ments have  expressed  great  satisfaction  with  the 
results. 

"During  the  period  of  the  talks  opportunities 
have  been  taken  to  keep  the  Soviet  and  Chinese 
Governments  informed  as  to  the  course  of  the 
discussions. 

"Mr.  Stettinius  has  particularly  expressed  on  be- 
half of  himself  and  members  of  his  mission  great 
appreciation  of  their  warm,  friendly  reception 
and  of  the  frank  cooperation  they  have  received 
from  all  quarters." 


General 


DEATH  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  THE  NAVY 


Statement  by  the  President 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  April  2n] 

I  announce  to  the  nation  at  war  the  sudden 
passing  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  Frank  Knox. 
It  is  a  heavy  loss  to  us  and  to  me  especially,  who 
had  come  to  lean  on  him  increasingly. 

He  has  clone  much  for  his  country ;  he  has  helped 
greatly  in  our  defense  and  in  making  victoi'y 
certain. 

Finally,  I  like  to  think  of  his  bigness  and  his 
loyalty.  Truly  he  put  his  country  first.  We  shall 
greatly  miss  his  ability  and  his  friendship. 

Franklin  D  Eoose^-elt 


Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  Stale 

[Released  to  the  press  April  28] 

It  is  with  a  deejD  sense  of  grief  that  I  have 
learned  of  the  passing  of  our  distinguished  Secre- 
tary of  the  Navy,  Colonel  Knox.  I  shall  always 
cherish  my  close  association  and  abiding  friend- 
ship with  him  over  many  years. 

In  his  chosen  profession  of  journalism  he  leaves 
a  record  of  outstanding  accomplishment  and 
achievement.  Twice  during  his  lifetime  he  bore 
ai-ms  in  defense  of  our  countr}',  and  in  its  servic:e 
he  has  truly  given  his  life  in  the  desperate  struggle 
which  has  engulfed  the  world.  To  his  last  high 
office  he  brought  sujaerb  qualities  of  leadership, 
vision,  and  driving  energy,  which  have  been  re- 
flected in  the  glorious  records  of  our  armed  forces. 
396 


He  was  a  man  of  highest  character  and  ideals,  and 
his  passing  is  a  grievous  blow  to  the  country  and 
to  all  nations  and  peoples  associated  with  us  in 
the  war. 


Proclamation  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  April  28] 

To  THE  People  of  the  UNrrEo  States: 

Frank  Knox,  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  died  in  the 
city  of  Washington  on  the  afternoon  of  Friday, 
April  twenty-eighth,  at  eight  minutes  after  one 
o'clock. 

The  death  of  this  distinguished  member  of  the 
President's  Cabinet  comes  as  a  great  sliock  and  a 
great  sorrow  to  his  friends  and  as  a  national  be- 
reavement to  the  Government  and  people  of  the 
United  States. 

Mr.  Knox  served  with  honor  in  the  armed  forces 
of  the  United  States  during  the  Spanish-Amer- 
ican War  and  the  World  War,  and  was  publisher 
of  the  Chicago  Daily  News  when  appointed  Sec- 
retary of  the  Navy  on  July  11,  1940. 

As  a  mark  of  respect  to  the  memory  of  Secre- 
tary Knox,  the  President  directs  that  the  national 
flag  be  displayed  at  half  st;\if  on  all  public  build- 
ings in  the  city  of  Washington  until  the  inter- 
ment shall  have  taken  place. 

By  direction  of  the  President, 

CoRDELL  Hull, 

-p,  o  /Seo-efan/  of  State 

JjErARTJIENT  OF  StATE,  "^      ' 

Washington,  April  28,  19J^. 


APRIL    29,    1944 


397 


E 


conomic 


Affa 


lis 


CHANGES  IN  CERTAIN  TURKISH  IMPORT 
DUTIES 

[  Released  to  the  press  April  28) 

In  a  note  dated  April  22.  194-4,  from  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  to  the  Turkish  Ambassador  in  Wasii- 
iiiflton,  replying  to  a  note  from  the  latter  dated 
April  14,  1944,  the  Government  of  the  United 
States,  pursuant  to  article  I  of  the  trade  agree- 
ment between  the  United  States  and  Turkey, 
signed  April  1,  1939,  has  agreed  to  accept  certain 
proposed  reductions  in  Turkish  import  duties  as 
satisfactory  compensation  for  certain  proposed 
increases  in  Turkish  import  duties  on  products 
listed  in  schedule  I  of  the  trade  agreement. 

The  duty  changes  involved  are  as  follows:  the 
duty  on  heavy  mineral  oils,  Turkish  tariff  no. 
695-D,  and  their  residues  comprising  machine  oil, 
mazout  oil,  motorine  and  other  such  combustibles, 
which  in  schedule  I  of  the  trade  agreement  is  0.95 
piastre  per  kilo,  will  be  increased  to  2.75  piastres 
per  kilo,  and  the  duty  on  kerosene,  Turkish  tariff 
no.  695-C,  which  is  6  piastres  per  kilo,  will  be 
reduced  to  3.3  piastres  per  kilo. 

The  texts  of  the  notes  are  as  follows : 

The  Turkish  Amiassadoi'  to  the  Secretary  of  State 

I  have  the  honor  to  refer  to  the  trade  agreement 
between  the  Reiiublic  of  Turkey  and  the  United 
States  of  America  signed  at  Ankara,  April  1, 1939, 
Article  I  of  which  reads  as  follows : 

"Natural  or  manufactured  products  originating 
in  the  United  States  of  America,  eiuunerated  and 
described  in  Schedule  I  annexed  to  this  Agreement, 
shall,  on  their  importation  into  the  territory  of  the 
Turkish  Republic,  be  accorded  the  tariff  reduc- 
tions provided  for  in  the  said  Schedule. 

"In  the  event  that  the  Government  of  the  Turk- 
ish Republic  should  increase  the  duties  provided 
for  in  the  said  Schedule,  such  increased  duties  shall 
not  be  applied  to  the  said  products  until  two 
months  after  the  date  of  their  promulgation. 

585610—44 2 


"If  before  the  expiration  of  the  aforesaid  period 
of  two  months  an  agreement  between  the  two  Gov- 
ernments has  not  been  reached  with  respect  to 
such  compensatory  modifications  of  this  Agree- 
ment as  may  be  deemed  appropriate,  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  of  America  shall  be  free 
within  fifteen  days  after  the  date  of  the  applica- 
tion of  such  increased  duties  to  terminate  this 
Agreement  in  its  entirety  on  thirty  days'  written 
notice." 

The  duty  on  heavy  mineral  oils,  Turkish  tariff 
no.  695-D,  and  their  residues,  comprising  machine 
oil,  mazout,  motorine,  and  other  such  combustibles, 
as  provided  in  Schedule  I  of  the  trade  agreement, 
is  0.95  piastre  per  kilo,  while  the  duty  on  kero- 
sene, tariff  no.  G95-C,  is  6  piastres  per  kilo. 

During  recent  years  the  quality  of  motorine  has 
been  greatly  improved  so  as  to  make  it  desirable  to 
apply  the  same  duties  to  motorine  as  to  kerosene. 
To  raise  the  duty  on  motorine  to  the  level  exist- 
ing for  kerosene  would  necessitate  raising  the  price 
of  motorine  to  such  height  as  would  cause  harmful 
repercussions.  Therefore,  in  accordance  with  the 
terms  of  Article  I  of  the  trade  agreement,  the 
Turkish  Government  contemplates  reducing  the 
duty  on  tariff  no.  G95-C  to  3.30  piastres  per  kilo 
while  raising  that  on  tariff  no.  G95-D  to  2.75 
piastres  per  kilo  (which  with  the  existing  excise 
tax  on  motorine  of  0.55  piastre  per  kilo  would 
amount  to  3.30  piastres  per  kilo.) 

In  view  of  these  circumstances,  I  have  the  honor 
to  inquire  whether  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  would  have  any  objection  to  these  contem- 
plated changes  as  described  above. 

Accept  [etc.] 

The  Secretanj  of  State  to  the  Turkish  Anibaiiiiador 

I  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of 
Your  Excellency's  note  of  April  14, 1944,  referring 
to  Article  I  of  the  trade  agreement  between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  the  Republic  of 
Turkey,  and  explaining  the  desire  of  the  Turkish 
Government  to  increase  the  duty  on  tariff  no. 
695-D  from  0.95  piastres  per  kilo,  as  provided  in 


398 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE    BULLETESIi 


Schedule  I  of  the  trade  agreement,  to  2.75  piastres 
per  kilo  and  at  the  same  time,  in  accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  Article  I  of  the  trade  agreement, 
to  reduce  the  duty  on  tariff  no.  695-C  from  6.00 
piastres  per  kilo  to  3.30  piastres  per  kilo. 


In  view  of  the  circumstances  described  in  Your 
Excellency's  note  I  have  the  honor  to  reply  that 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  does  not 
object  to  tlie  above  mentioned  duty  changes. 

Accept  [etc.] 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


FIFTH  PAN  AMERICAN  CONFERENCE  OF  NATIONAL  DIRECTORS  OF  HEALTH 

Remarks  of  Assistant  Secretary  Berle  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  April  24] 

Mr.  Director  and  Gentlemen:  A  meeting,  in 
wartime,  of  the  National  Directors  of  Health  of 
the  American  republics  is  not  a  diversion  from  the 
war  effort.  Eather  it  is  a  recognition  of  certain 
outstanding  necessities  of  statesmanship. 

The  entire  world  is  now  spending  life  and 
health  in  a  huge  war.  It  has  already  sustained 
great  direct  losses  through  death,  wounds,  and 
disease  suffered  on  the  field  of  battle.  The  indi- 
rect losses  are  far  greater.  Uncounted  millions 
of  men,  women,  and  children  have  died  and  are 
dying  from  starvation,  exposure,  and  pestilence. 
The  living,  in  great  parts  of  the  earth,  are  so 
weakened  that  they  can  fall  an  easy  prey  to  sick- 
ness or  become  unable  to  sustain  the  struggle  for 
life  which  lies  ahead. 

From  this  danger  none  of  us  are  exempt.  The 
Western  Hemisphere  up  to  now  has  not  met  the 
same  hardships  which  affect  the  continents  of 
Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  This  is  because  the 
theaters  of  direct  fighting  have  been  on  the  other 
side  of  the  world.  But  we  cannot  rely  on  this 
for  safety ;  germs  and  infections  can  travel  where 
no  enemy  shot  or  plane  can  penetrate.  The  job 
of  maintaining  public  health  when  armies  shuttle 
back  and  forth  across  the  oceans  and  when  fleets 
of  planes  bridge  the  seas  in  a  few  hours,  will 
be  met  only  by  unceasing  energy  and  unceasing 
industry. 

The  American  world  looks  to  you  and  to  your 
associates  to  defend  it  from  the  diseases  of  war. 
If  you  succeed  you  will  stand  high  in  the  ranks 
of  men  who  well  served  their  countries  in  this 


difficult  time.  If  you  fail  the  responsibility  will 
be  very  great.  For  that  reason  the  emphasis  must 
be  less  on  the  words  we  say  here  than  on  the  work 
we  do  when  we  get  home. 

But,  though  the  task  of  the  defense  of  national 
health  is  very  great,  you  are  charged  with  an  even 
greater  work.  That  is  the  improvement  of  human 
material  upon  which  the  statesmen  and  even  the 
civilization  of  the  future  must  be  based.  Nations 
are  now  judged  not  merely  by  their  military 
might,  but  their  economic  abilit}^  They  are 
judged  by  the  health  and  strength  of  their  people. 
The  rate  of  tuberculosis  among  chil<h-en  is  as  care- 
fully watched  as  the  size  or  equipment  of  its  army. 
The  ability  to  stamp  out  malaria  and  hookworm  is 
a  greater  national  asset  than  the  modern  equip- 
ment of  guns,  planes,  and  parachutes. 

This  is  particularly  true  of  the  Americas. 
Here  are  adequate  resources  on  which  to  found 
great  civilizations.  But  they  can  only  be  organ- 
ized and  developed  by  healthy,  energetic,  and 
industrious  men.  This  human  material  is  in  .your 
keeping.  The  time  will  come  when  the  history 
books  pay  as  much  attention  to  the  successes  and 
actual  operations  of  public  health  as  they  do  to  the 
actions  and  successes  of  politicians  and  generals. 

This  is  an  opportunity  for  all  of  you  which  I 
l^ersonally  envy.  The  man  who  is  able  to  say  at 
the  end  of  his  public  service  that  he  has  improved 
the  health  of  his  country,  and  particularly  of  its 
children,  can  rest  assured  that  he  has  affected  his- 


'  Delivered  at  the  opening  session   of  the  Conference 
held  at  the  Pan  American  Union  Building  on  Apr.  24, 1944. 


APRIL   29,    1944 


399 


tory  as  much,  if  not  more,  than  any  other  public 
servant  of  his  time. 

I  like  to  think  that  the  work  j'ou  are  doing  has  a 
particular  American  quality.  In  national  thought 
the  Americas  have  preserved  one  quality  which  is 
distinctly  their  own.  They  are  thinking  of  indi- 
vidual men  and  women.  They  think  of  John 
Smith,  and  Juan  Pablo,  and  Joao  Suarez,  and 
Jean  Le  Maitre,  and  of  their  wives  and  their  chil- 
dren. As  countries  and  as  a  Hemisphere  we  are 
interested  in  people.  Every  one  of  them  means 
something  to  us.  The  misfortune  of  illness  or 
sadness  of  any  one  of  them  is  a  misfortune  to  all 
of  us.     We  believe  in  the  dignity  of  human  life 


and  of  human  personality,  and  for  that  reason  no 
national  government,  and  no  inter-American  con- 
ference, can  forget  that  responsibility  for  individ- 
ual life  and  happiness. 

Eecognizing  this  high  duty  and  heavy  respon- 
sibility which  rest  upon  you,  let  me,  on  behalf  of 
the  Government  of  the  United  States,  welcome  you 
to  this,  your  fifth  conference.  May  your  delib- 
erations be  wise;  and  may  there  come  from  it 
increased  resolution  and  determination  to  go  back 
to  your  various  countries  and  to  do,  in  sweat  and 
toil,  the  work  which  justifies  the  happy  name 
which  has  been  given  our  part  of  the  world  as  the 
Continent  of  Hope. 


The  Department 


TREATY  SECTION  ORGANIZED  IN  THE  DIVISION   OF  RESEARCH  AND  PUBLICATION 


Probably  at  no  other  time  in  world  history  has 
so  much  attention  been  focused  on  the  making  of 
international  agreements — agreements  Avhich  will 
insure  enduring  peace,  agreements  which  will 
promote  ecpnomic,  political,  and  social  under- 
standing and  cooperation  among  all  nations.  And 
probably  at  no  other  time  in  world  history  has  it 
been  so  imperative  that  the  officials  of  the  Govern- 
ment entrusted  with  the  conduct  of  its  foreign 
affairs  have  authoritative  information  and  com- 
petent assistance  in  every  respect  on  treaty 
matters. 

It  is  to  meet  this  need  for  a  repository  of  treaty 
information  and  a  corps  of  technical  experts  on 
treaty  matters  that  a  Treaty  Section  is  being  or- 
ganized in  the  Division  of  Research  and  Publica- 
tion. Under  Departmental  Order  1218  of  Janu- 
ary 15, 1941  the  Division  of  Research  and  Publica- 
tion and  the  Legal  Adviser's  office  are  assigned 
certain  responsibilities  in  carrying  out  the  func- 
tions of  the  former  Treaty  Division.  Those  as- 
signed the  Division  of  Research  and  Publication 
are  as  follows:  ".  .  .  collection,  compilation 
and  maintenance  of  information  pertaining  to 
treaties  and  other  international  agreements,  the 


performance  of  research  and  the  furnishing  of 
information  and  advice,  other  than  of  a  legal  char- 
acter, with  respect  to  the  provisions  of  such  exist- 
ing or  proposed  instruments;  procedural  matters, 
including  the  preparation  of  full  powers,  ratifi- 
cations, proclamations  and  protocols,  and  matters 
related  to  the  signing,  ratification,  proclamation 
and  registration  of  treaties  and  other  international 
agreements  (except  with  respect  to  proclamations 
of  trade  agreements,  which  shall  be  handled  in 
the  Division  of  Commercial  Policy) ;  and  custody 
of  the  originals  of  treaties  and  other  international 
agreements    ...     " 

Mr.  Bryton  Barron,  a  former  Rhodes  scholar 
and  Assistant  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Research 
and  Publication,  has  been  appointed  Chief  of  the 
Treaty  Section.  Mr.  Charles  I.  Bevans  and  Mr. 
William  V.  "Wliittington,  both  veteran  members 
of  the  former  Treaty  Division,  have  been  desig- 
nated Assistant  Chiefs,  and  additional  personnel 
is  being  provided  to  meet  the  needs  of  the  situation. 

It  is  intended  that  the  Treaty  Section  shall  be- 
come as  useful  as  possible  to  officers  of  the  Depart- 
ment who  are  concerned  with  the  negotiation  and 
drafting  of  treaties  and  other  international  agree- 


400 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


nients,  ijarticularly  with  reference  to  background 
information,  substance,  style,  and  procedure. 
Through  the  maintenance  of  authoritative  up-to- 
date  records  on  the  status  of  existing  treaties  and 
other  international  agreements  between  the  United 
States  and  other  countries,  as  well  as  between  for- 
eign countries,  through  the  publication  of  current 
treaty  information  in  the  Department  of  State 
Bulletin,  and  through  making  readily  available 
in  printed  form  true  copies  of  treaties  and  other 
international  agreements  in  the  Treaty  Series  and 
Executive  Agreement  Series*  there  will  be  a  con- 
tinuance and  expansion  of  services  which  the  new 
Section  may  render  in  an  informational  capacity 
to  the  Department,  other  Government  agencies, 
members  of  Congress,  and  the  public  in  general. 
The  organization  of  the  Treaty  Section  is 
planned  not  only  with  a  view  to  meeting  current 
requirements  for  authoritative  information  and 
expert  assistance  on  treaty  matters  but  also  to 
meeting  the  demands  that  will  be  made  of  the 
Section  in  connection  with  the  making  of  post- 
war settlements. 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Order  1256  of  April  25,  1944, 
effective  April  24,  1944,  the  Seci-etary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  Kobert  E.  Ward  as  Acting  Chief 
of  the  Division  of  Departmental  Personnel. 

By  Departmental  Order  1259  of  April  26,  1944, 
effective  April  25,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  John  Peurifoy  as  Executive  Officer 
of  the  Office  of  Pul)lic  Information. 

By  Departmental  Order  1260  of  April  26,  1944, 
effective  April  25,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  James  H.  Wright  as  Assistant  to 
the  Director  of  the  Office  of  American  Republic 
Affairs. 

By  Departmental  Order  1261  of  April  27,  1944, 
effective  May  1, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  Alger  Hiss  as  Special  Assistant  to  the 
Director  of  the  Office  of  Special  Political  Affairs. 

By  Departmental  Order  1262  of  April  27,  1944, 
effective  May  1, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  George  A.  Gordon  as  Special  Assistant 
to  the  Secretary;  Mr.  Frederick  B.  Lyon  as  Chief 


of  the  Division  of  Foreign  Activity  Correlation; 
and  Mr.  Fletcher  Warren  as  Executive  Assistant 
to  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  State,  Mr.  Berle. 


Treaty  Information 


INTER-AMERICAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

Uniguay 

The  Director  General  of  the  Pan  American 
LTnion  informed  the  Secretary  of  State,  by  a  let- 
ter of  April  21,  1944,  that  the  Convention  on  the 
Inter-American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sci- 
ences, which  was  opened  for  signature  at  the  Pan 
American  L^nion  on  January  15,  1944,  was  signed 
for  Uruguay  on  April  17,  1944. 

PROTOCOL  ON  PELAGIC  WHALING 

Norii:ay 

The  American  Embassy  in  London  transmitted 
to  the  Department  of  State,  with  a  despatch  of 
April  15,  1944,  a  copy  of  a  note  of  April  12,  1944 
from  the  British  Foreign  Office,  in,  which  the 
Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  informs  the 
Government  of  the  United  States,  in  accordance 
with  article  7  of  the  protocol  on  pelagic  whaling 
signed  at  London  on  February  7,  1944,  of  the 
deposit  in  the  archives  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  Kingdom,  on  March  31,  1944,  of  the  in- 
strument of  ratification  of  that  protocol  by  the 
Government  of  Norway.  According  to  the  De- 
jiartment's  information,  Norway  is  the  first  of  the 
governments  which  signed  the  protocol  to  deposit 
its  instrument  of  ratification. 

COMMERCIAL  "MODUS  VIVENDI", 
CANADA  AND  VENEZUELA 

The  American  Embassy  at  Caracas  informed 
the  Department,  by  a  despatch  of  April  15,  1944, 
of  the  further  renewal,  without  modifications,  for 
a  period  of  one  year,  or  until  April  9,  1945,  of  the 
modus  Vivendi  governing  commercial  relations  be- 
tween Canada  and  Venezuela  which  was  concluded 


APRIL    2  9,    1044 


401 


at  Caraciis  on  March  26, 1941.  The  renewal  was  ef- 
fected by  an  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Caracas 
on  April  8.  1944  by  the  British  Minister  to  Vene- 
zuela and  the  Venezuelan  Minister  for  Foreign 
Affairs. 

EXCHANGE  OF  PUBLICATIONS, 
ECUADOR  AND  PANAMA 

The  American  Embassy  in  Quito  transmitted  to 
the  Department,  with  a  despatch  of  March  1, 1944, 
a  copy  of  an  agreement  between  Ecuador  and  Pan- 
ama providing  for  the  exchange  of  official  and 
literary  publications,  signed  at  Panama  on  Janu- 
ary 12,  1944,  as  published  in  the  monthly  bulletin 
of  the  Ecuadoran  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs, 
dated  February  25, 1944.  The  agreement  also  pro- 
vides that  the  Governments  of  each  country  recom- 
mend that  the  primary  and  normal  schools  of  each 
Government  study  the  history,  physical  geogra- 
phy, and  cultural  life  of  the  other  contracting 
party.  The  agreement  provides  that  it  will  be- 
come effective  immediately  upon  approval  by  both 
Governments  and  that  it  may  be  terminated  only 
when  one  of  the  Governments  denounces  it  upon  a 
notice  of  one  year. 

TREATY  SECTION  IN  THE  DEPARTMENT 

An  article  entitled  "Treaty  Section  Organized  in 
the  Division  of  Research  and  Publication"  appears 
in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  under  the  heading 
'•The  Department". 


The  Foreign  Service 


CONSULAR  OFFICES 

The  American  Consulate  at  Hull,  England,  was 
reestablished,  effective  April  21,  1944. 

The  American  Vice  Consulate  at  Ciudad 
Bolivar,  Venezuela,  was  closed,  efl'ective  April  26, 
1944. 


American  Republics 


APPOINTMENT  OF  SPECIAL  REPRESENTA- 
TIVE TO  INAUGURATION  OF  PRESIDENT 
OF  COSTA  RICA 

[Released  to  Uie  press  April  20] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
26  that  President  Roosevelt  has  appointed  the 
Honorable  Spruille  Braden,  American  Ambassa- 
dor to  Cuba,  as  Special  Representative  with  the 
rank  of  Ambassador  Extraordinary  and  Plenipo- 
tentiary to  the  inauguration  on  May  8,  1944  of 
Sefior  Teodoro  Picado  as  President  of  Costa  Rica. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Jurisdiction  Over  Criminal  Offenses  Committed  by  the 
Armed  Forces  of  tlie  United  States  in  Egyiat :  Agreement 
Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Egypt  and 
Proces-Verbal — Agreement  effected  by  excliauges  of 
notes  signed  at  Cairo  Marcli  2,  1943 ;  effective  JIarcb  2, 

1943.  Executive   Agreement    Series    356.     Publication 
2090.     17  pp.     10«f. 

Project  To  Increase  the  Production  of  Rubber  in  Brazil : 
Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
Brazil — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Wash- 
ington March  3,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  371. 
Publication  2098.     5  pp.     5^. 

Foreign  Consular  Oflices  in  the  United  States.     March  1, 

1944.  Publication  2092.     iv,  49  pp.     15^. 

The  Importance  of  International  Commerce  to  Prosperity. 
Radio  broadcast  by  Harry  C.  Hawkins.  Publication 
2104.     Commercial  Policy  Series  74.     8  pp.     54. 

Other  Government  Agencies 

"Brazil's  Market  for  Medicinals",  by  F.  C.  Fornes,  .Jr., 
Consul,  and  R.  E.  Hoverter,  Economic  Analyst,  of  the 
American  Conisulate  General  at  Sao  Paulo,  Brazil. 

"Sweden's  Expanding  Pharmaceutical  Industry",  based  on 
a  rejxirt  prepared  by  Grant  Olson,  Attache  of  the  Amer- 
ican Legation  at  Stockholm,  Sweden. 


402 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETENl 


The  first  article  listed  under  "Other  Govern- 
ment Agencies"  will  be  found  in  the  April  29, 1944 
issue  of  the  Department  of  Commerce  publication 
entitled  Foreign  Commerce  Weekly.  The  second 
article  will  be  found  in  the  May  6,  1944  issue  of 
that  periodical.  Copies  of  Foreign  Commerce 
Weekly  may  be  obtained  from  the  Superintendent 
of  Documents.  Government  Printing  Office,  for 
the  price  of  10  cents  each. 


Legislation 


Investigation  of  Political,  Economic,  and  Social  Conditions 

in  Puerto  Rico : 
Hearings  Before  the  Suljcommittee  of  the  Committee  on 

Insular  Affairs,  House  of  Representatives,  78th  Cong., 

2d  sess.,  on  H.  Res.  159.     March  3  and  4,  1944.     11, 

52  pp. 
H.  Rept.  1399,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.  Ees.  159.     [Favorable 

report.]     17  pp. 


O.    S.  GOVERNMENT   PRINTING  OFFICE)  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printinp;  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents   -    -   .    .    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPROVAL  OF  THE  DIEECTOB  OF  THE  BUBEIAU  OF  THB  BUDGET 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULL 


rm 


TIN 

MAY  6,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  254— Publication  2120 


0 


ontents 


The  War  p^^^ 

Some  Economic  Weapons  in  Total  Warfare:  Address  by 

Francis  H.  Russell  at  Annual  Meetmg  of  American 

Drug  Manufacturers  Association 405 

Petroleum  Questions:  Conclusion  of  Discussions  With 

the  United  Kingdom 411 

Agreement  With  Spain  on  Certain  Outstanding  Issues  .  412 
The   Proclaimed   List:  Cumulative   Supplement   2   to 

Revision  VII 412 

National  Anniversary  of  Poland 412 

Exchange  of  American  and  German  Nationals  ....  413 
Status  of  Countries  in  Relation  to  the  War,  April  22, 

1944:  Corrigenda 413 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

Conference  of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education  in  London .  413 
First  Conference   of  Commissions  of  Inter-American 

Development 415 

American  Republics 

Fellowships  in  Public  Administration  for  Representa- 
tives From  the  Other  American  Republics  ....       416 
Visit  of  Colombian  Museum  Director 416 

Near  East 

Birthday  of  the  King  of  Iraq 416 

[over] 


U.  S.  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

JUN  15  1944 


0 


OntGTl  tS—CONTlN  U  ED 

The  Department  Page 

Principles  and  Policies  of  Departmental  Personnel 
Administration:  Departmental  Order  1272  of  May 

3,  1944 417 

Protection  and  Promotion  of  American  Commercial  and 
Agricultural  Interests  in  Foreign  Coimtries:  De- 
partmental Order  1264  of  April  28,  1944 420 

Appointment  of  Officers 420 

The  Foreign  Service 

Confirmations 420 

Consular  OflBces 420 

Treaty  Information 

Granting  of  Plenipotentiary  Powers  in  the  Field  of 
Foreign  Relations  to  Each  of  the  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics 421 

Exchange  of  Publications,  United  States  and  Guate- 
mala           422 

Regulation  of  Inter- American  Automotive  Traffic.    .    .       422 

Publications 422 

Legislation 422 


The  War 


SOME  ECONOMIC  WEAPONS  IN  TOTAL  WARFARE 

Address  by  Francis  H.  Russell  at  Annual  Meeting  of  American  Drug  Manufacturers  Association 


[Released  to  the  press  May  4] 

This  conference  has  been  considering  ways  in 
which  a  great  American  industry  whicli  is  de- 
voted to  combating  lauman  ills  can  most  effec- 
tively extend  the  capacity  for  human  happiness 
both  in  this  country  and  abroad.  In  tlie  subject 
which  I  have  been  asked  to  discuss  with  you  we 
sliall  be  faced  with  the  opposite  of  tliat  picture. 
We  sliall  see  how  Axis  industries  were  converted 
into  wide-spread  and  powerful  instruments  of 
aggression  and  became  integral  parts  of  the  Axis 
war-macliine.  If  some  bit  of  evidence  were  wanted 
that  we  are  in  a  total  conflict  with  an  enemy  wlio 
has  converted  to  the  ends  of  war  even  the  most 
humanitarian  pliases  of  life  it  could  be  found  in 
the  striking  contrast  afforded  by  the  topics  of 
discussion  of  this  conference.  Foreign  trade  can 
be  and,  in  a  world  devoted  to  peace,  is  a  force 
making  for  mutual  prosperity,  international  co- 
liesion  and  understanding.  Like  many  anotlier  in- 
strument of  peace,  it  can  also  become  a  menacing 
weapon  of  war. 

As  week  follows  week  and  Allied  victories 
mount,  it  becomes  increasingly,  and  comfortably, 
difficult  to  recall  the  narrow  margin  that  at  one 
time  stood  between  the  democratic  nations  and  de- 
feat. The  reason  for  the  narrowness  of  this  escape 
from  world  slavery  is  not  hard  to  find.  In  a 
very  real  sense  the  German  nation  has  been  moving 
toward  this  war  for  decades.  Its  philosophers  and 
writers  have  been  conditioning  the  German  people 
in  the  concepts  of  racial  supremacy.  Its  Army  has 
pushed  military  science  to  its  utmost  limits.     Its 

^  Delivered  at  Hot  Springs,  Va.,  May  4,  1944.  Mr.  Rus- 
sell is  Chief  of  the  Division  of  World  Trade  Intelligence, 
Department  of  State,  and  chairman  of  the  Interdepart- 
mental Committee  on  the  Proclaimed  List. 


rulers  have  impressed  on  the  people  a  blind  sub- 
servience to  the  state.  Its  psychologists  have  con- 
ducted studies  into  tlie  most  efficient  use  of  propa- 
ganda for  the  purpose  of  confusing,  friglitening, 
hilling,  and  otherwise  subverting  and  affecting  the 
conduct  of  other  peoples.  Its  econonaists  and  busi- 
nessmen have  exploited  all  the  means  by  which 
ambitions  of  world  domination  could  be  furthered 
by  German  economy  at  home  and  abroad. 

Of  these  various  theaters  of  warfare,  perhaps 
the  one  that  was  most  successfully  hidden  from  the 
world  was  the  Nazi  campaign  of  economic  aggres- 
sion. It  is  about  some  of  the  features  of  that 
campaign  and  the  action  taken  by  the  Allied  gov- 
ernments to  meet  and  overcome  it  that  I  would 
like  to  speak  to  you. 

When  the  Nazi  party  came  to  power,  one  of 
the  first  things  that  its  leaders  did,  coincident 
with  the  building  of  its  powerful  forces,  its 
spreading  of  moral  confusion  and  mass  lies,  and 
its  campaign  of  diplomatic  intimidation,  was  to 
proceed  systematically  to  apply  well-prepared 
plans  for  converting  Germany's  vast  foreign 
commerce  and  finance  structure  into  a  weapon 
of  aggression.  From  its  inception  the  Nazi 
regime  in  Germany  waged  undeclared  and  total 
economic  warfare  throughout  the  world.  To- 
gether with  their  Fascist  and  Japanese  partners, 
they  carried  out  an  economic  penetration  the 
ultimate  aim  of  which  was  not  mutually  profitable 
trade  but  the  subjugation  of  the  national  economy 
of  entire  countries  to  Axis  purposes.  The  thor- 
oughness of  the  Nazis  in  turning  their  foreign 
trade  into  a  weapon  of  war  was  typical  of  their 
genius  for  prostituting  education,  religion,  litera- 
ture, art,  the  press,  and  the  radio  to  their  self- 
aggrandizing  aims. 

405 


406 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE    BULLETIN 


There  thus  came  into  existence  a  partnership 
of  the  political,  military,  and  industrial  factions 
of  the  German  nation.  Each  of  these  elements 
was  essential  for  carrying  out  the  plan  of  world 
conquest.  The  Nazi  party  directed  the  nation's 
politics,  carried  on  the  necessary  propaganda, 
and  suppressed  all  opposition.  The  Army  built 
up  what  was  then  the  world's  most  powerful  mili- 
tary machine.  German  industry  went  to  work  to 
build  up  a  solid  economic  support. 

German  industrial  enteri^rises  like  I.  G.  Farben 
were  manipulated  in  such  a  manner  as  to  obtain 
for  the  Nazi  party  the  greatest  influence  beyond 
the  borders  of  Germany.  This  single  concern 
which  I  have  mentioned  employed  an  army  of 
•some  300,000  workers  and  had  scientific  research 
facilities  employing  upwards  of  10,000  chemists 
and  other  trained  scientists.  Backed  as  it  was 
by  the  Nazi  party,  it  was  probably  unmatched  in 
sheer  economic  power  by  any  other  single  indus- 
trial enterprise  in  the  world.  Other  German  in- 
dustries were  similarly  concentrated,  or  "ration- 
alized", and  backed  by  the  party  organization. 
The  lives  and  business  activities  of  German  na- 
tionals and  supporters  abroad  were  organized  and 
directed  to  the  single  purpose  of  Nazi  world 
domination.  Branches  and  subsidiaries  were 
built  up  in  almost  all  countries  of  the  world. 
German  export  trade  was  pushed  to  the  limit  to 
obtain  the  much-needed  foreign  exchange.  Ger- 
man firms  were  brought  into  a  dominant  position 
in  important  international  cartels,  patent  pools, 
syndicates,  and  other  monopolistic  and  restrictive 
arrangements  so  that  their  influence  was  pyra- 
mided. This  program  was  furthered  by  care- 
fully directed  and  unlimited  bribery  and,  where 
necessary,  by  force  or  threat  of  force. 

Grerman  foreign  business  representatives  were 
encouraged  to  acquire  local  citizenship  and,  by 
carrying  on  their  subversive  activities  clandes- 
tinely as  "loyal  citizens"  of  the  foreign  country 
so  long  as  caution  required,  they  were  in  a  position 
to  emerge  in  their  true  colors  whenever  shifting 
political  or  military  conditions  rendered  it  expedi- 
ent. And  on  the  other  hand,  when  Germany's 
official  relations  with  a  foreign  coimtry  were 
broken  oif ,  resulting  in  the  enforced  departure  of 
the  official  German  foreign-service  representatives, 
the  trained  German  business  representatives  re- 


mained at  their  posts  abroad  and  carried  on  the 

activities  of  the  official  representatives  unofficially, 
thus  enabling  the  Nazi  regime  to  maintain  at  least 
some  sort  of  contact  with  the  foreign  country  from 
which  it  would  otherwise  be  completely  cut  off. 

German  banks  abroad  were  not  mere  financial 
institutions.  They  were  in  actuality  the  treas- 
urer and  financial  backer  of  the  local  Nazi  party. 
They  received  party  contributions,  supervised 
party  expenditures,  received  party  funds  from 
Germany  under  various  guises,  and  juggled  the 
deposits  among  nmnerous  accounts. 

German  firms  assisted  in  the  collection  of  "do- 
nations" to  the  Nazi  party  funds.  These  collec- 
tions were  frequently  regulated  by  a  compulsory 
quota  sj'Stem,  sometimes  10  percent  or  higher  of 
the  person's  or  firm's  income,  and  when  the  indi- 
viduals were  reluctant  to  make  these  contributions 
the  Nazi  organization  did  not  hesitate  to  threaten 
retaliation  upon  relatives  in  Germany. 

The  work  which  this  great  foreign  organization 
of  Axis  industry  carried  out  was  manifold.  It 
included  espionage,  political  pressure,  the  plan- 
ning of  sabotage  activities,  the  disposition  of  cur- 
rency and  securities  looted  in  the  occupied 
countries,  the  smuggling  of  precious  war  materials 
to  Germany,  the  collection  and  transmission  of  in- 
formation concerning  ships  and  ship  movements 
and  war  plans  of  the  United  Nations,  arrange- 
ments for  secret  German  submarine  bases,  the 
organization  of  a  "chain"  for  German  intelligence 
to  leave  the  United  States  and  other  Allied  coun- 
tries, the  hiding  of  escaped  Nazi  seamen,  and  the 
maintenance  of  clandestine  wireless  stations  for 
direct  communication  with  Germany  and  the  other 
Axis  powers.  The  program  which  the  world-wide 
network  of  Axis  firms  made  jDOssible  included  also 
the  dissemination  of  vicious  attacks  against  the 
United  Nations  and  other  types  of  propaganda; 
the  magnifying  of  any  incipient  anti-Allied  senti- 
ment in  the  hope  of  swinging  neutral  countries 
into  the  Axis  camp ;  the  prevention  of  economic  co- 
operation by  neutral  countries  with  the  Allies;  the 
subsidizing  of  newspapers,  radio  stations,  and 
other  media  of  propaganda ;  the  fostering  of  local 
Nazi  political  and  semi-military  organizations 
which  were  divided  into  the  typical  blocks,  sectors, 
and  cells  and  were  subject  to  the  direction  of  a 
Nazi  chief  in  the  local  German  Embassy ;  the  pro- 


MAY    0,    1944 


407 


motion  of  Nazi  schools,  Nazi  labor  fronts,  Nazi 
youth,  women's  and  athletic  organizations,  and 
other  devices  for  promoting  the  Nazification  of 
foreign  communities ;  the  fostering  of  native  Nazi 
and  Fascist  movements ;  the  impressing  upon  the 
neutral  countries  of  the  magnitude  of  German 
military  victories  and  the  fear  of  the  consequences 
of  non-coopei-ation ;  the  establishment  of  a  close 
liaison  between  the  German  Army  and  tlie  armies 
of  small  neutral  countries :  these  and  other  activi- 
ties were  directed  at  the  heart  of  the  United 
Nations  war  effort,  and  the  defense  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere.    These  subvei'sive  measures  were  car- 
ried on  behind  a  show  of  ordinary  business  and 
social  activity.     Nearly  all  of  the  persons  involved 
in  them  were  able  to  mask  their  true  activities 
through  their  connections  with  Axis  commercial 
firms.     Special  concessions  were  given  to  local 
firms  that  cooperated  and  others  were  induced  by 
threats  and  promises  to  become  subservient  to  the 
Nazi  organization  and  to  take  part  in  its  program. 
Now  what  was  the  goal  of  all  this  vast  en- 
deavor ?     The  stakes,  we  may  be  sure,  were  at  least 
commensurate  to  the  effort.    They  were  twofold : 
First,  in  those  countries  in  Europe  which  were  to 
be  permitted  by  the  Nazis  to  remain  neutral  the 
object  was  to  assure  the  greatest  possible  contribu- 
tion by  their  economy  to  that  of  Germany's.    Neu- 
tral factories,  mines,  and  banks  were  to  be  induced 
to  contribute  as  largely  as  possible  to  Axis  war 
needs.    Secondly,  the  Axis  objective  in  the  West- 
ern Hemisphere,  in  addition  to  the  one  which  I 
have  just  mentioned,  was  to  bring  about  if  pos- 
sible a  policy  of  positive  cooperation  by  some  of 
the  other  American  republics  with  the  Axis  coun- 
tries, or,  if  that  was  not  possible,  to  secure  a  thor- 
oughly detached  neutrality  on  the  part  of  these 
countries  so  that  this  immense  area  with  its  120 
million  people  and  enormous  resources  of  min- 
erals, food,  and  other  products,  occupying  a  stra- 
tegic military  position,  would  be  dissuaded  from 
any  cooperation  with  the  democratic  powers  and 
would  be  ripe  for  aggression  when  the  conquest 
of  Europe  had  been  completed. 

This  was  the  strategy  and  these  were  the  tac- 
tics which  were  employed  by  the  Axis  nations  in 
this  sector  of  their  economic  warfare.  It  was 
against  an  attack  of  this  nature  that  this  Gov- 
ernment and  others  against  whom  it  was  directed 


had  to  devise  adequate  countermeasures. 

One  of  the  principal  weapons  that  was  used  by 
this  Government  was  the  Proclaimed  List,  which 
was  established  by  proclamation  of  the  President 
on  July  17,  1941.  You  will  note  that  this  was 
prior  to  Pearl  Harbor.  It  was  adopted  at  that 
time  as  a  measure  of  national  defense  following 
the  declaration  of  the  existence  of  an  unlimited 
national  emergency  by  the  President  on  May  27, 
1941.  The  disastrous  experience  of  the  nations 
in  Europe  and  Asia  which  had  been  overrun  by 
the  Axis  armies  had  made  it  abundantly  clear 
that  it  was  suicidal  to  temporize  further  with 
Axis  pre-military  acts  of  penetration  and  aggres- 
sion. 

Tliere  are  now  included  in  the  Proclaimed  List 
some  15,000  persons  and  fii-ms  located  in  the  20 
other  American  republics,  the  5  neutral  European 
countries  ( Spain,  Portugal,  Switzerland,  Sweden, 
and  Liechtenstein)  and  their  possessions  in  Africa 
and  the  Far  East,  and  4  Near  Eastern  coun- 
tries (Morocco,  Turkey,  Iran,  and  Iraq).  It  is 
believed  that  at  the  present  time,  at  least  in  so  far 
as  the  other  American  republics  are  concerned, 
the  Proclaimed  List  includes  all  important  per- 
sons or  firms  that  have  been  operating  on  behalf 
of  the  totalitarian  powers  or  against  the  security 
of  this  hemisphere.  Names  on  the  List  vary  from 
some  of  the  largest  industrial,  commercial,  and 
financial  entities  in  the  respective  countries  to 
lesser  firms  and  persons  who  have  been  willing  to 
assist  Proclaimed  List  nationals  in  circumvent- 
ing the  List  by  cloaking.  It  has  been  the  policy  of 
the  Proclaimed  List  authorities  to  strike  wher- 
ever they  found  the  Axis  at  work — at  manufac- 
turers and  dealers  in  drugs,  electrical  goods, 
hardware,  chemicals,  banks,  insurance  companies, 
railroads,  mines — in  fact  firms  in  every  field  of 
activity  upon  which  the  Axis  drew  for  support. 
The  List  includes  Axis-subsidized  newspapers, 
radio  stations,  and  motion-picture  houses.  This 
Government  has  scrupulously  avoided  infringing 
upon  freedom  of  expression  in  other  countries, 
but  when  newspapers  and  other  media  of  ex- 
pression cease  to  be  free  media  of  expression  and 
become  merely  instruments  of  propaganda  sub- 
sidized by  the  Axis  governments,  listing  action 
is  taken  in  order  to  deprive  them  of  newsprint 
and  necessary  equipment. 


408 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


The  inclusion  of  a  name  in  the  Proclaimed  List 
immediately  sets  in  motion  the  entii-e  machinery 
of  United  States  economic-warfare  sanctions.  The 
Treasury  Department  freezes  all  assets  a  firm  may 
possess  in  this  countiy,  and  all  movements  of  funds 
of  such  firms  in  any  of  our  15,000  banks  are  stopped. 
The  Foreign  Economic  Administration  denies  ex- 
port licenses  and  other  economic  facilities  to  listed 
firms.  Customs  officials  are  notified  to  intercept 
goods  on  dock  or  in  transit.  Any  American  con- 
cerns who  are  known  to  have  contractual  relations 
with  a  Proclaimed  List  national  are  advised  of  the 
listing  action  by  the  Department  of  Commerce. 
The  Office  of  Censorship  monitors  all  communica- 
tions relating  to  listed  firms.  They  are,  in  brief, 
denied  all  trade  and  facilities  which  this  Govern- 
ment is  in  a  position  to  control,  a  substantial  pen- 
alty under  the  conditions  of  wartime  international 
trade. 

The  Proclaimed  List  has  an  effectiveness,  how- 
ever, far  beyond  that  which  results  from  these  sanc- 
tions. Listing  also  results  in  invoking  all  of  the 
sanctions  of  the  European  blockade,  and  the  Pro- 
claimed List  is  also,  as  I  shall  point  out  shortly, 
the  basis  of  many  controls  which  are  enforced  by 
other  governments.  Beyond  that  it  has  received 
the  support  of  the  business  community  and  gen- 
eral public  in  countries  where  the  firms  are  located, 
so  that  persons  and  firms  on  the  Proclaimed  List 
are  regarded  in  their  communities  as  enemies  of 
the  democratic  cause  and  are  the  object  of  business 
and  social  ostracism.  And  the  overhanging  threat 
of  the  possible  application  of  all  these  sanctions 
has  had  the  effect  of  preventing  many  thousands  of 
persons  and  firms  from  engaging  in  unfriendly 
activities  who  might  otherwise  have  succumbed  to 
the  threats  or  blandishments  of  the  Axis. 

The  Axis  governments  have  adopted  a  multi- 
tude of  stratagems  and  have  drawn  upon  all  of 
their  organizational  facilities  to  combat  the  effec- 
tiveness of  the  Proclaimed  List  and  to  save  some- 
thing of  their  economic  basis  of  subversive  activ- 
ities in  South  America.  Cloaking-rings  were  estab- 
lished, spurious  transfers  of  ownership  were  made, 
and  political  pressure,  threats  of  retaliation,  and 
promises  of  post-war  privileges  in  the  event  of  an 
Axis  victory  were  resorted  to.  Nevertheless,  the 
result  has  been  that  the  vast  majority  of  the  10,000 
or  more  firms  or  persons  on  the  Proclaimed  List 


in  the  other  American  republics  have  been  neutral- 
ized as  far  as  contributing  to  the  Axis  cause  is 
concerned.  Many  of  them  have  been  completely 
eliminated  from  business,  others  have  been  satis- 
factorily reorganized  or  have  given  undertakings 
of  future  good  conduct,  others  have  been  placed 
under  governmental  surveillance  or  have  otherwise 
been  reduced  to  impotence.  It  should  be  borne  in 
mind  that  it  has  not  been  our  objective  to  eliminate 
completely  from  economic  activity  all  persons  and 
firms  on  the  Proclaimed  List.  That  has  been  our 
objective  with  respect  to  the  Axis  spearhead  firms, 
such  firms  as  I.  G.  Farben,  Ferrostahl,  Tubos  Man- 
nesmann,  Mitsui  and  Mitsubishi,  Siemens  Schu- 
ckert,  and  other  Axis  concerns  that  were  part  and 
parcel  of  the  Axis  war-machine.  The  great  major- 
ity of  these  and  other  spearhead  firms  have  been 
put  out  of  business  in  the  countries  of  this  hemi- 
sphere with,  of  course,  the  notable  exception  of 
one  country. 

In  the  neutral  countries  of  Europe  all  available 
sanctions  have  been  used  to  prevent  so  far  as  possi- 
ble a  substantial  utilization  by  the  Nazi  war- 
machine  of  the  productive  resources  and  other  fa- 
cilities located  in  those  countries.  The  threat  of 
listing  has  had  an  increasingly  potent  effect,  and 
the  results  of  this  program  in  depriving  the  Axis 
of  goods  and  facilities  which  they  might  other- 
wise have  received  have  been  very  considerable. 
Not  only  has  it  tended  to  sustain  the  full  effect  of 
our  bombing  of  German  factories,  since  many  neu- 
tral factories  have  been  unwilling  to  incur  the 
danger  of  our  sanctions  by  helping  the  Germans 
to  make  up  their  loss  in  production  through  pur- 
chases in  neutral  countries,  but  it  has  deprived  the 
Axis  of  many  of  the  raw  materials  which  they  had 
to  import  from  neutral  countries  in  order  to  keep 
their  factories  running  and  has  brought  home  to 
the  Germans  in  many  ways  the  fact  that  the  noose 
of  economic  strangulation  was  being  drawn  tighter 
and  tighter. 

Because  of  the  rigorous  consequences  that  result 
to  persons  and  firms  included  in  the  Proclaimed 
List,  this  Government  has  taken  steps  to  assure  that 
so  far  as  possible  these  consequences  fall  solely  on 
persons  or  firms  who  are  identified  with  or  have 
given  assistance  to  the  Axis.  It  has  endeavored 
to  be  scrupulously  careful  and  fair  in  reaching 
decisions  on  the  inclusion  or  removal  of  names  on 


MAY   6,    1944 


409 


tlie  Proclaimed  List.  Under  the  President's  proc- 
lamation of  July  17,  1941,  establishing  the  Pro- 
claimed List,  no  name  may  be  added  to  or  removed 
from  the  List  without  the  unanimous  approval  of 
six  governmental  departments  and  agencies:  the 
Department  of  State,  the  Treasury  Department, 
the  Department  of  Justice,  the  Department  of 
Commerce,  the  Foreign  Economic  Administration, 
and  the  Coordinator  of  Inter-American  Affairs. 
Every  case  is  considered  by  these  agencies  on  the 
basis  of  all  available  information,  and  no  action 
is  taken  on  any  case  unless  the  reliability  of  the 
information  has  been  vouched  for  by  an  official 
agency  of  this  Government.  Full  reports  with 
respect  to  every  name  are  furnished  to  the  Inter- 
departmental Committee  on  the  Proclaimed  List 
by  the  Division  of  World  Trade  Intelligence  of  the 
State  Department,  which  draws  upon  the  Foreign 
Service  and  many  other  sources  for  its  files  relat- 
ing to  some  500,000  firms  and  persons  in  foreign 
countries. 

The  authorities  charged  with  the  administra- 
tion of  the  Proclaimed  List  have  borne  in  mind 
that  the  List  is  not,  of  course,  an  end  in  itself.  It 
has  been  but  one  of  the  weapons  for  hitting  at  the 
might  and  power  of  the  Axis.  It  has  been  used 
whenever  that  end  would  be  served;  it  has  not 
been  used  when  other  courses  of  action  would  con- 
tribute more  effectively  to  the  fight  against  the 
Axis ;  and  it  has  not  been  used  for  any  other  pur- 
pose than  the  winning  of  the  war.  This  means 
that  in  i-are  cases,  for  instance,  where  the  neutral 
subsidiaries  of  firms  having  their  main  houses  in 
enemy  territory  could  be  removed  from  enemy 
control  and  were  willing  to  cooperate  by  making 
their  resources  and  facilities  available  to  the  Al- 
lies, thus  depriving  the  Axis  of  them,  this  Gov- 
ernment has,  under  proper  controls,  accepted 
those  benefits  and  has  not  insisted  on  making  the 
resources  of  the  firm  available  to  the  Axis  camp. 
It  also  means  that  the  Proclaimed  List  authori- 
ties have  been  scrupulously  intent  on  not  permit- 
ting the  List  to  be  used  under  any  circumstance? 
to  promote  the  commercial  interests  of  this  coun- 
try or  to  enforce  any  policies  of  this  Government 
that  were  not  connected  with  the  war  effort.  It 
has  been  recognized  that  to  do-  so  would  weaken 
the  prestige  of  the  List  and  greatly  lessen  its 
effectiveness  as  an  instrument  of  war. 


No  persons  have  been  included  in  the  Pro- 
claimed List  merely  because  of  their  nationality 
or  extraction.  Inclusion  in  the  List  is  based  ex- 
clusively upon  evidence  of  enemy  control,  par- 
ticipation in  Axis  activities,  Nazi  party  affiliation, 
contribution  to  Axis  funds,  distribution  of  prop- 
aganda, participation  in  evasion  of  Allied  con- 
trols, and  other  specific  inimical  activities.  It  has 
been  recognized  that  there  are  persons  of  Italian 
and  German  nationality  or  extraction  in  the  coun- 
tries to  which  the  Proclaimed  List  applies  who 
have  consistently  and  sincerely  refused  to  have 
anything  whatsoever  to  do  with  pro-Axis  ele- 
ments or  activities.  These  people  have  had  noth- 
ing to  fear  from  the  Proclaimed  List.  On  the 
other  hand,  there  have  been  persons  and  firms 
who  while  not  themselves  directly  identified  with 
Axis  subversive  activities  nevertheless  contrib- 
uted to  the  support  of  such  activities  by  acting  as 
"cloaks"  for  pro-Axis  persons  and  fii-ms  in  effect- 
ing commercial  and  financial  transactions.  With 
regard  to  such  persons  this  Government,  pursu- 
ant to  its  fixed  policy  of  non-intervention  in  the 
internal  affairs  of  other  countries,  has  scrupu- 
lously respected  the  right  of  such  persons  to  deal 
with  whomever  they  choose,  but  it  has  in  turn  ex- 
ercised its  right  to  determine  whether  under  the 
existing  conditions  it  could  permit  its  own  citi- 
zens to  trade  with  persons  and  firms  abroad  who, 
for  their  own  reasons,  chose  to  traffic  with  and 
thereby  assist  our  enemies  in  their  avowed  pur- 
pose of  destroying  this  nation  and  its  democratic 
principles.  It  has  gone  on  the  principle  that  a 
nation  which  respects  the  rights  of  others  because 
it  respects  its  own  responsibilities  and  rights  can- 
not permit  its  own  trade  to  jeopardize  indirectly 
the  victory  which  it  is  at  the  same  time  asking  its 
citizens  to  achieve  with  their  very  lives. 

The  Proclaimed  List  authorities  have,  moreover, 
been  quick  to  correct  the  few  inevitable  mistakes 
which  occur  in  an  operation  such  as  the  Pro- 
claimed List.  They  have  been  ready  and  anxious 
to  reconsider  any  case  where  the  reasons  which 
led  to  inclusion  in  the  Proclaimed  List  have  been 
sincerely  and  effectively  corrected  or  eliminated 
by  the  persons  or  firms  concerned.  It  is  a  matter 
of  considerable  satisfaction  that  in  the  great  ma- 
jority of  cases  which  have  been  removed  from  the 
List  the  action  was  based  on  appropriate  correc- 


410 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


tive  measures  taken  by  the  firms  or  the  govern- 
ment involved. 

But  the  Prochiimed  List,  effective  as  it  has  been, 
could  not  alone  have  achieved  the  whole  goal  of 
eliminating  or  neutralizing  Axis  economic  pene- 
tration in  the  Western  Hemisphere.  This  end 
has  been  substantially  achieved  because  the  Pro- 
claimed List  has  been  used  in  unison  with  other 
measures.  The  agencies  charged  with  the  mainte- 
nance of  the  Proclaimed  List  have  acted  in  close 
cooperation  with  the  British  authorities  in  charge 
of  the  British  Statutory  List  so  that  the  Axis 
firms  have  not  been  able  to  play  one  of  us  against 
the  other  although  they  have  frequently  tried  to 
do  so. 

Another  great  weapon  that  has  been  used  in 
combating  the  economic  war-machine,  in  so  far 
as  its  operations  in  the  Western  Hemisphere  are 
concerned,  has  been  the  structure  of  local  controls 
which  have  been  enacted  and  applied  by  most  of 
the  other  American  republics  carrying  out  the  res- 
olutions and  recommendations  agreed  upon  by  all 
of  the  American  republics  at  several  inter- Amer- 
ican conferences.  The  principal  conferences 
which  dealt  with  this  problem  were  the  meeting 
of  the  Ministers  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Amer- 
ican republics  at  Habana  in  July  1940;  another 
meeting  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  in  January  1942;  and 
the  Inter- American  Conference  on  Systems  of  Eco- 
nomic and  Financial  Controls  at  Washington  in 
July  1942. 

These  conferences  recommended  the  immediate 
adoption  by  all  of  the  American  republics  of  any 
measures  necessary  to  break  off  all  commercial 
and  financial  intercourse  with  the  Axis  nations 
and  to  eliminate  through  vesting,  forced  sale,  liq- 
uidation, intervention,  blocking,  or  other  con- 
trols all  other  financial  and  commercial  activities 
prejudicial  to  the  security  of  the  American 
countries. 

In  most  of  the  other  American  republics,  con- 
trols pursuant  to  these  resolutions  have  been  en- 
acted and  put  into  effect.  As  a  result.  Axis  drug, 
metal  and  electrical  houses,  coffee  and  quinine 
fincas^  Axis-controlled  railroads,  airways,  banks, 
insurance,  chemical,  and  other  companies,  and 
many  hundreds  of  other  Nazi,  Fascist,  and  Jap- 
anese business  enterprises  that  were  supporting  the 
Axis  cause  have  been  completely  eliminated  or  re- 


organized or  placed  under  such  controls  that  they 
can  no  longer  assist  the  enemy. 

In  the  case  of  those  countries  that  have  carried 
out  the  resolutions  of  the  Rio  and  Washington 
conferences  the  controls  which  have  been  estab- 
lished have  in  most  cases  been  coordinated  with 
this  Government's  Proclaimed  List.  As  the  com- 
bined effect  of  the  Proclaimed  List  controls  and 
the  local  governmental  controls  has  operated  to 
eliminate  or  place  in  satisfactory  hands  firms  that 
were  on  the  Proclaimed  List,  such  names  have  been 
deleted.  Thus  local  firms  that  have  been  satisfac- 
torily I'eorganized,  subjected  to  intervention  or 
other  surveillance,  or  which  have  given  satisfactory 
undertakings  to  this  Government  or  to  the  local 
government  have  been  restored  to  participation 
in  the  local  economy.  In  this  way  it  has  been  pos- 
sible to  give  full  recognition  both  to  our  war  ob- 
jectives of  combating  the  Axis  war-machine  in  all 
of  its  manifestations  and  also  to  local  economic 
needs.  Where  the  results  of  listing  have  denied 
to  a  country  the  services  of  an  essential  firm  this 
Government  has  been  active  in  taking  steps  to 
assure  a  meeting  of  local  economic  needs  in  so  far 
as  possible  from  United  States  or  other  available 
friendly  sources.  This  system  of  consultation  and 
reciprocal  collaboration  has  been  an  outstanding 
example  of  inter- American  cooperation. 

It  has  apparently  been  assumed  by  some  of  the 
firms  that  have  cooperated  with  the  Axis  that  the 
Proclaimed  List  and  the  sanctions  which  are  based 
upon  it  will  terminate  with  the  cessation  of  hos- 
tilities in  Europe  and  that  listed  firms  and  indi- 
viduals will  then  be  restored  to  normal  trade 
facilities.  There  is  no  basis  for  such  an  assump- 
tion. It  need  not  be  stated  that  this  Government 
does  not  consider  the  Proclaimed  List  as  an  ap- 
propriate part  of  the  type  of  normal  peacetime 
trade  policies  which  it  hopes  eventually  will  be 
established.  It  is  clear,  however,  that  there  will 
inevitably  be  a  transition  period  from  war  to 
peacetime  conditions  and  that  the  List  cannot  be 
withdrawn  upon  the  termination  of  armed  con- 
flict. In  view  of  the  total  character  of  the  present 
conflict  and  its  vast  impact  upon  commerce  it  will 
necessarily  take  time  to  effect  adjustments  of  eco- 
nomic-warfare controls.  Such  adjustments  will 
be  carried  out  with  regard  to  specific  circum- 
stances.   The  problem  of  eliminating  economic- 


MAY    6,    1944 


411 


warfare  controls,  and  in  particular  the  Proclaimed 
List,  is  believed  in  general  to  be  capable  of  prompt 
solution  in  regions  far  removed  from  tlie  scene  of 
conflict  where  the  spearheads  of  Axis  aggression 
have  been  eliminated.  The  withdrawal  of  such 
controls  may  be  expected  to  be  slower  with  respect 
to  areas  adjacent  to  the  scene  of  conflict  and  par- 
ticularly with  respect  to  nationals  of,  or  residents 
in,  neutral  countries  who  have  engaged,  or  who 
may  engage,  actively  in  equipping  or  servicing  the 
military  machine  of  the  enemy — which  the  Allied 
governments  are  deterniined  to  destroy — or  who 
have  rendered  other  important  aid  to  the  enemy. 
What  I  have  said  has  necessarily  been  in  the 
nature  of  a  very  general  outline.  It  has  not  been 
possible  to  give  you  very  much  of  the  color  of  this 
phase  of  the  war  effort  nor  to  describe  any  of  the 
multitude  of  individual  battles  that  have  been 
fought.  It  will  be  clear,  however,  that  the  enemy 
has  been  fairly  effectively  dealt  with  in  one  more 
sector  of  the  war.  It  will  have  been  clear  also 
that  this  success  has  been  due  to  a  cooperative 
effort  which  has  received  the  participation  not 
only  of  the  various  interested  departments  of  this 
Government  and  of  American  business  but  of  the 
British  Government  and  our  other  Allies,  the 
governments  of  virtually  all  of  the  other  Amer- 
ican republics,  and  of  pro-democratic  businessmen 
and  people  generally  in  widely  scattered  sections 
of  the  world. 


PETROLEUM  QUESTIONS 

Conclusion  of  Discussions  With  the 
United  Kingdom 

[Released  to  the  press  May  3] 

Tlie  preliminary  exploratory  discussions  on 
petroleum  between  groups  of  experts  representing 
the  Governments  of  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom,  which  began  in  Washington  on 
April  18,  were  concluded  in  a  joint  session  held  on 
May  3. 

In  a  spirit  of  understanding  and  cooperation 
the  two  groups  explored  the  full  range  of  both 
countries'  interest  in  petroleum  on  the  basis  of 
broad  principles  looking  to  the  orderly  long- 
range  development  of  abundant  oil  supplies.    The 

586349—44 2 


two  groups  are  now  reporting  the  results  of  these 
discussions  to  their  Governments. 

After  the  full  discussion  of  broad  principles 
the  two  groups  reviewed  various  specific  matters 
of  mutual  interest  relating  to  the  production,  dis- 
tribution, and  transportation  of  oil.  These 
specific  matters  included  jjending  problems  affect- 
ing the  oil  operations  abroad  of  the  American  and 
British  oil  industry;  questions  relating  to  oil 
production,  particularly  in  the  Middle  East;  the 
proposed  trans-Arabian  pipeline;  and  the  Iraq 
Petroleum  Company's  project  for  an  additional 
pipeline  from  Kirkuk,  Iraq,  to  Haifa.  The 
groups  shared  the  view  that  the  peacetime  inter- 
governmental aspects  of  such  matters  should  be 
resolved,  as  between  the  two  Governments,  within 
the  framework  of  the  broad  principles  which  had 
been  discussed. 

In  issuing  the  foregoing  announcement,  which 
also  is  being  made  in  London,  it  is  pointed  out 
that  the  United  States  group  was  composed  of 
representatives  of  the  Departments  of  State,  War, 
and  Navy  and  the  Petroleum  Administration  for 
War.  Ten  officials  of  the  American  oil  industry 
were  invited  to  present  their  views  in  connection 
with  the  discussions.^  Three  of  these  officials,  Mr. 
John  A.  Brown,  Mr.  W.  S.  S.  Rodgers,  and  Mr.  A. 
Jacobsen,  attended  the  discussions  as  advisers  to 
the  United  States  group  of  experts.^ 

The  report  of  the  United  States  group  of  ex- 
perts will  be  considered  by  the  Cabinet  committee 
appointed  by  the  President  for  that  purpose  of 
which  Secretary  Hull  is  Chairman.  On  March  7, 
1944  the  State  Department  announced  ^  that,  in 
addition  to  Secretary  Hull,  this  committee  con- 
sisted of  Secretary  Ickes,  Vice  Chairman ;  Acting 
Secretary  of  the  Navy  Forrestal;  Under  Secre- 
tary of  War  Patterson;  Mr.  Charles  E.  Wilson, 
Vice  Chairman  of  the  War  Production  Board; 
and  Mr.  Charles  Rayner,  Petroleum  Adviser,  De- 
partment of  State.  Since  that  time  Mr.  Leo 
Crowley,  Director  of  the  Foreign  Economic  Ad- 
ministration, and  Mr.  Ralph  K.  Davies,  Deputy 
Petroleum  Administrator  for  War,  have  been 
included  on  this  committee. 


"  F.iXLETiN  of  Apr.  15,  1944,  p.  346. 
'  Botletin  of  Apr.  22,  1944,  p.  372. 
"  BuiiETiN  of  Mar.  11,  1944,  p.  238. 


412 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


AGREEMENT  WITH  SPAIN  ON  CERTAIN 
OUTSTANDING  ISSUES 

[Released  to  the  press  May  2] 

After  a  protracted  period  of  negotiation  with 
the  Si^anish  Government,  the  American  and  Brit- 
ish Governments  have  received  assurances  from 
the  Spanish  Government  which  permit  a  settle- 
ment of  certain  outstanding  issues. 

The  Spanish  Government  has  agreed  to  expel 
designated  Axis  agents  from  Tangier,  the  Span- 
ish Zone  in  North  Africa,  and  from  the  Spanish 
mainhind.  It  has  agreed  to  the  closing  of  the 
German  Consulate  and  other  Axis  agencies  in 
Tangier.  It  has  agreed  to  the  release  of  certain 
Italian  conunercial  ships  now  interned  in  Spanish 
waters  and  to  the  submission  to  arbitration  of  the 
question  of  releasing  Italian  warships  likewise 
interned  in  Spanish  waters.  It  has  withdrawn  all 
Spanish  military  forces  from  the  eastern  front. 
It  has  maintained  a  complete  embargo  on  exports 
of  wolfram  since  February  1,  1944,  at  which  time 
bulk  petroleum  shipments  were  suspended,  and 
has  now  agreed  for  the  remainder  of  the  year  to 
impose  a  drastic  curtailment  of  wolfram  exports 
to  Germany. 

One  of  our  objectives  in  these  negotiations  was 
to  continue  to  deprive  Germany  of  Spanish 
wolfram.  Although  agreement  was  reached  on 
a  basis  less  than  a  total  embargo  of  wolfram  ship- 
ments, this  action  was  taken  to  obtain  immediate 
settlement  on  the  urgent  request  of  the  British 
Government.  Under  the  curtailed  program  not 
more  than  20  tons  of  wolfram  may  be  exported  to 
Germany  from  Spain  in  each  of  the  months  May 
and  June.  Thereafter  for  the  remainder  of  the 
year,  if  as  a  practical  matter  they  can  be  made, 
exports  may  not  exceed  40  tons  per  montli.  It  is 
improbable  that  any  of  this  can  be  utilized  in 
military  products  during  this  year. 

In  view  of  the  foregoing  negotiations,  permis- 
sion will  now  be  given  for  the  renewal  of  bulk 
petroleum  loadings  by  Spanish  tankers  in  the 
Caribbean  and  the  lifting  from  the  United  States 
ports  of  minor  quantities  of  packaged  petroleum 
products  in  accordance  with  the  controlled  pro- 
gram in  operation  prior  to  the  suspension  of  such 
loadings. 


THE  PROCLAIMED  LIST:   CUMULATIVE 
SUPPLEMENT  2  TO  REVISION  VII 

[Released  to  the  press  May  6] 

The  Secretary  of  State,  acting  in  conjunction 
with  the  Acting  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the 
Attorney  General,  the  Secretary  of  Commerce, 
the  Administrator  of  the  Foreign  Economic  Ad- 
ministration, and  the  Coordinator  of  Inter- Amer- 
ican Affairs,  issued  on  May  6,  1944  Cumulative 
Supplement  2  to  Revision  VII  of  the  Proclaimed 
List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals,  promulgated 
March  23,  1944. 

Part  I  of  Cumulative  Supplement  2  contains  33 
additional  listings  in  the  other  American  republics 
and  103  deletions.  Part  II  contains  93  additional 
listings  outside  the  American  republics  and  18 
deletions. 

With  the  issuance  of  this  Supplement  the  Pro- 
claimed List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals  has 
been  extended  to  include  certain  cases  in  Ireland 
(fiire). 


NATIONAL  ANNIVERSARY  OF  POLAND 

[Released  to  the  press  May  2] 

The  text  of  a  telegram  sent  by  the  President  of 
the  United  States  to  His  Excellency  Wladyslaw 
Raczkiewicz,  President  of  Poland,  upon  the  oc- 
casion of  the  national  anniversary  of  Poland, 
follows : 

Mat  3,  1944. 
On  the  occasion  of  the  National  Anniversary  of 
Poland,  I  take  great  pleasure  in  sending  to  the 
Polish  people  through  you  my  greetings  and  best 
wishes  in  which  I  am  joined  by  the  people  of  the 
United  States.  It  is  fitting  to  recall  in  this  fateful 
fifth  year  of  the  war  that  it  was  Poland  who  first 
defied  the  Nazi  hordes.  The  continued  resistance 
of  the  Polish  people  against  their  Nazi  oppressors 
is  an  inspiration  to  all.  The  relentless  struggle 
being  carried  on  by  the  United  Nations  will  hasten 
victory  and  the  liberation  of  all  freedom  loving 
peoples. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


MAY    6,    1944 


413 


EXCHANGE    OF   AMERICAN   AND   GERMAN 
NATIONALS 

[Released  to  the  press  May  1] 

The  Department  of  State  and  the  War  Depart- 
ment announced  on  May  1  that  the  motorship 
Gripshohn  is  expected  to  leave  New  York  on  or 
about  May  2  to  carry  out  a  further  exchange  with 
Germany  of  seriously  sick  and  seriously  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  who  are  found  to  be  entitled  to 
repatriation  under  the  terms  of  the  Geneva  Prison- 
ers of  War  Convention,  and  of  surplus  protected 
personnel  entitled  to  repatriation  under  the  terms 
of  the  Geneva  Red  Cross  Convention.  It  has  been 
agreed  the  repatriables  of  each  side  will  be  ex- 
changed at  Barcelona  on  or  about  May  17.  The 
Spanish  Government  has  been  asked  to  cooperate 
by  lending  its  facilities  for  the  exchange.  The 
Gripshohn  is  expected  to  return  to  New  York  in 
early  June  with  American  repatriates.  The  vessel 
will  travel  both  ways  under  safe-conducts  of  all 
belligerents. 

The  names  of  the  prospective  American  repa- 
triates are  not  yet  known,  and  it  will  not  be 
possible  to  determine  their  identity  until  after  the 
Gripsholm  has  sailed  from  Barcelona.  Every  ef- 
fort will  be  made  to  dispatch  notification  to  the 


next  of  kin  at  the  earliest  moment  after  the  identity 
of  each  repatriate  has  been  established  beyond 
possibility  of  doubt. 

STATUS  OF  COUNTRIES  IN  RELATION  TO 
THE  WAR,  APRIL  22,  1944 

Corrigenda 

BtJLLirriN  of  April  22,  1944 : 

Page  375:  Under  the  box  heading  "France", 
insert  opposite  Italy  in  place  of  the  leaders  the 
following : 

WAR-1 
6/11/40 

Under  the  box  heading  "Japan",  take  out  the 
parentheses  around  the  date  opposite  Guatemala. 
It  should  read  "12/9/41". 

Page  379:  In  table  II  under  "Adherents" 
change  the  date  in  the  second  column  opposite 
Philippines  from  "June  10,  1943"  to  "June  10, 
1942" ;  in  the  last  colvmin  opposite  Iraq  change  the 
date  from  "Apr.  10,  1944"  to  "Apr.  10,  1943"  and 
that  ojjposite  Mexico  from  "June  10,  1942"  to 
"June  14,  1942". 

Page  380:  The  last  three  words  in  the  foot- 
note should  read  "  (see  table  II ) ". 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


CONFERENCE  OF  ALLIED  MINISTERS  OF  EDUCATION  IN  LONDON 


ineleased  to  the  press  May  3] 

The  Secretary  of  State  announced  on  May  3 
that  Congressman  J.  William  Fulbright,  chair- 
man of  the  American  Delegation  to  the  Confer- 
ence of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education  in  London, 
has  returned  to  this  country  with  three  other 
members — the  Honorable  Archibald  MacLeish, 
Librarian  of  Congress;  John  W.  Studebaker, 
United  States  Commissioner  of  Education;  and 
Dean  C.  Mildred  Thompson  of  Vassar  College. 
The  delegation  has  been  at  work  in  London  for 
the  past  month. 

"The  discussions  of  the  delegation  with  repre- 
sentatives of  other  nations",  Congressman  Ful- 


bright stated,  "were  based  on  the  proposition 
that  free  and  unrestricted  interchange  between 
the  peoples  of  the  world  of  ideas  and  knowledge 
and  unrestricted  education  are  essential  to  the 
preservation  of  security  and  peace." 

The  delegation  brought  back  an  encouraging 
report  of  progress  being  made  by  the  interested 
nations  toward  a  cooperative  approach  to  the  re- 
establishment  of  essential  educational  and  cul- 
tural facilities  upon  an  emergency  basis. 

The  discussions  of  the  Conference,  the  mem- 
bers of  the  delegation  reported,  made  clear  the 
threat  to  civilization  created  by  the  cold-blooded 
and  considered  destruction  by  the  Axis  of  the  edu- 


414 


DEPAKTMENT    OF   STATE    BULLETIN 


cational  and  cultural  resources  of  great  parts  of 
the  continents  of  Europe  and  Asia;  the  murder 
of  teachers,  artists,  scientists,  and  intellectual 
leaders;  the  burning  of  books;  the  pillaging  and 
mutilation  of  works  of  art ;  the  rifling  of  archives ; 
and  the  theft  of  scientific  apparatus. 

The  American  delegation  collaborated  with  the 
Conference  on  two  main  tasks:  First,  in  drafting 
a  tentative  plan  for  a  United  Nations  agency  for 
educational  and  cultural  reconstruction ;  and  sec- 
ondly, in  ascertaining  the  essential  emergency 
needs  of  the  war-devastated  Allied  countries  to 
reestablish  educational  services. 

The  tentative  plan  for  a  United  Nations  agency 
for  educational  and  cultural  reconstruction  was 
fonnulated  at  open  meetings  presided  over  by 
Congressman  Fulbright  and  was  then  accepted  by 
the  Conference  for  informal  submission  to  the 
United  Nations  and  Associated  Nations  for  study 
and  comment. 

The  tentative  plan  brought  back  by  the  delega- 
tion will  be  studied  by  the  interested  agencies  of 
this  Government  and  be  made  the  subject  of  dis- 
cussions with  members  of  Congress  for  the  pur- 
pose of  furnishing  the  Conference  with  the  views 
of  the  United  States  Government  concerning  the 
proposed  United  Nations  agency. 

Two  members  of  the  delegation.  Dr.  Grayson 
N.  Kefauver  and  Dr.  Ralph  E.  Turner,  both  of 
the  Department  of  State,  are  continuing  in  Lon- 
don to  complete  the  gathering  of  full  factual  in- 
formation regarding  emergency  basic  needs  for 
reestablishing  essential  educational  and  cultural 
facilities  in  Allied  liberated  areas. 

The  progress  made  at  the  London  meeting  is 
another  important  step  in  the  direction  of  laying 
the  foundations  for  international  cooperation  in 
the  future. 

The  following  memorandum  was  issued  to  the 
press  on  April  20,  1944  by  the  Secretariat  of  the 
Conference  of  Ministers  of  Education  of  Allied 
Governments : 

"A  tentative  draft  constitution  for  a  United 
Nations  Organization  for  Educational  and  Cul- 
tural Reconstruction  was  accepted  by  the  Confer- 
ence of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education  yesterday, 
19th  April.  It  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Allied 
and  Associated  Governments,  and  if  adopted  by 


them  it  will  permit  joint  efforts  in  this  field  in  line 
with  parallel  work  already  being  developed  by  the 
Food  Conference  and  UNRRA.  General  accept- 
ance of  the  creation  of  an  international  organiza- 
tion to  undertake  cooperatively  the  vitally  im- 
portant work  of  restoring  the  educational  and 
cultural  heritages  of  war-torn  countries  would 
carry  the  United  Nations  past  another  important 
station  on  the  road  toward  lasting  peace. 

"The  wisdom  of  building  an  international 
structure  piece  by  piece  on  sound  foundations  is 
recognized  clearly  today.  The  projected  Organi- 
zation for  Educational  and  Cultural  Reconstruc- 
tion would  direct  its  activities  at  first  to  the  emer- 
gency woi'k  of  restoring  the  educational  systems 
and  the  cultural  institutions  destroyed  by  the  Axis 
powers.  It  is  believed  that  the  projected  organi- 
zation would  gain  experience  in  performing  these 
emergency  tasks  which  would  create  a  basis  for 
lasting  international  cooperation  in  educational 
and  cultural  fields. 

"The  proposed  constitution  was  drafted  at  two 
Open  Meetings  convened  by  the  Conference  of 
Allied  Ministers  of  Education  and  the  American 
Education  Delegation,  headed  by  Congressman 
Fulbright,  which  came  to  London  earlj'  this 
month  to  work  out  plans  for  American  collab- 
oration with  the  Conference.  The  meetings  were 
attended  by  representatives  of  all  member  and  ob- 
server states  currently  interested  in  the  Confer- 
ence and  were  presided  over  by  Congressman 
Fulbright.  The  device  of  holding  Open  Meet- 
ings enabled  all  representatives  present  to  par- 
ticipate fully,  equally,  and  without  prejudice  to 
their  positions  in  the  Conference.  The  Consti- 
tution is  both  broad  enough  and  flexible  enough  to 
enable  the  projected  organization  to  deal'  vigor- 
ously and  successfully  with  the  problems  of  edu- 
cational and  cultural  reconstruction. 

"The  need  for  the  proposed  organization  is 
stated  in  the  Preamble  of  the  jDroposed  Constitu- 
tion which  says  in  part :  'To  deprive  any  part  of 
the  interdependent  modem  world  of  the  cultural 
resources,  human  and  material,  through  which  its 
children  are  trained  and  its  people  informed,  is  to 
destroy  to  that  extent  the  common  knowledge  and 
the  mutual  understanding  upon  which  the  peace 
of  the  world  and  its  security  must  rest.' 


I 


I 


MAY    6,    1944 


415 


"The  text  of  the  tentative  draft  Constitution 
consists  of  seven  sections.  The  first  contains  a 
statement  of  the  underlying  reasons  why  inter- 
national cooperation  in  educational  reconstruc- 
tion should  be  attempted. 

"The  second  defines  the  functions  of  the  pro- 
jected organization  in  terms  which  should  permit 
it  to  work  effectively  in  the  fields  of  educational 
and  cultural  rehabilitation  and  reconstruction 
and  to  develojj  ultimately  into  a  permanent  body 
with  broader  activities. 

''Section  three  declares  that  membership  shall 
be  open  to  all  the  United  Nations  and  Associated 
Nations  and  to  such  other  nations  as  shall  be  ac- 
cepted by  the  Assembly,  upon  application  thereto, 
after  the  cessation  of  hostilities  with  the  Axis. 

"Section  four,  which  lists  the  agencies  of  the 
proposed  organization,  provides  for  an  Assembly 
with  equal  representation  and  votes  for  all  mem- 
ber states,  and  Executive  Board  to  be  elected  by 
the  Assembly  and  an  International  Secretariat. 

"The  fifth,  or  financial  section,  states  that  ad- 
ministrative expenses  shall  be  shared  by  the  mem- 
ber nations  on  a  basis  to  be  agreed  by  the  As- 
sembly. It  also  provides  for  the  creation  of  an 
Emergency  Rehabilitation  Fund  controlled  by  an 
Emergency  Rehabilitation  Fund  Committee.  Na- 
tional contributions  to  the  Rehabilitation  Fund 
will  be  fixed  by  the  Committee  subject  to  the  ap- 
proval of  each  contributing  nation,  and  the  Com- 
mittee will  also  make  allocations  from  the  Fund. 
The  Committee  will  consist  of  representatives  of 
the  three  States  making  the  largest  contributions 
for  administrative  expenses  and  three  members 
elected  by  the  Executive  Board. 

"Section  six  contains  provisions  relating  to 
ratification,  amendment,  and  interpretation  which 
follow  closely  those  in  the  statutes  of  other  inter- 
national bodies. 

"Section  seven  contains  provisions  requiring 
member  nations  to  supply  information  about  edu- 
cation and  cultural  matters,  defining  the  legal 
status  of  the  organization  and  its  staff,  providing 
for  cooperation  between  the  organization  and  exist- 
ing international  organizations  in  the  educational 
and  cultural  fields,  and  governing  the  relationship 
of  the  organization  to  any  agency  for  coordinat- 
ing public  international  organizations." 


FIRST  CONFERENCE  OF  COMMISSIONS  OF 
INTER-AMERICAN  DEVELOPMENT 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  Inter-American  Development  Com- 
mission May  2] 

The  program  for  the  First  Conference  of  Com- 
missions of  Inter-American  Development,  to  be 
held  in  New  York  May  9  to  18,  was  announced  May 
2  by  Nelson  A.  Rockefeller,  chairman  of  the  In- 
ter-American Development  Commission. 

The  Conference  will  bring  to  the  United  States 
many  prominent  businessmen  from  the  other 
American  republics  for  discussion  of  measures  for 
further  development  of  the  natural  resources  of 
the  Americas. 

The  Inter- American  Development  Commission 
and  the  21  commissions  in  the  American  re- 
publics were  organized  under  government  spon- 
sorship, with  membership  consisting  of  business- 
men representative  of  commerce,  industry,  and 
finance.  They  are  channels  for  collaboration  be- 
tween government  and  business  in  economic  de- 
velopment. Established  in  wartime,  the  commis- 
sions have  aided  the  mobilization  of  hemisphere 
economic  resources  for  the  wai-  effort. 

The  agenda  of  the  Conference  is  organized  un- 
der two  sections:  (1)  Economic  Development  and 
Investments  and  (2)  International  Trade  and 
Transportation.  Specific  topics  of  the  agenda 
follow : 


Section  I.     Economic  Development  and 

Investments 

Subjects:  Analysis  of  the  pertinent  parts  of  re- 
ports presented  by  the  national  commissions  and 
discussions  of  the  following  subjects  so  far  as  they 
pertain  to  a  consideration  of  the  basic  objective 
above:  Full  utilization  of  natural  resources,  eco- 
nomic stability,  currency  stabilization,  establish- 
ment of  new  industries,  instruments  for  economic 
development,  technical  assistance,  levels  of  living, 
debt  services,  credit  facilities,  equitable  credit 
terms,  equality  of  treatment  of  foreign  invest- 
ments, taxation,  methods  of  investment,  govern- 
ment operations,  and  private  enterprises. 


416 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE    BULLETIN. 


Section  II.     International  Trade  and 
Transportation 

Subjects:  Analysis  of  the  pertinent  parts  of  the 
reports  presented  by  the  national  commissions  and 
discussion  of  the  following  subjects  so  far  as  they 
pertain  to  a  consideration  of  the  basic  objectives 
above:  Trade  barriers  (tariffs,  quotas,  exchange 
control,  export  taxes,  State  trading),  customs 
unions  and  preferences,  commodity  policies  (in- 
ternational agreements,  subsidies) ,  monopolies  and 
cartels,  transportation  facilities  and  services,  rate 
policies,  equality  in  protection  from  risks,  na- 
tional merchant  marines,  and  tourist  trade. 


American  Republics 


FELLOWSHIPS  IN  PUBLIC  ADMINISTRATION 
FOR  REPRESENTATIVES  FROM  THE 
OTHER  AMERICAN  REPUBLICS 

The  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  has 
issued,  pursuant  to  statutory  authority  and  official 
recommendations  and  subject  to  appropriations 
available,  regulations  with  respect  to  fellowships 
in  public  administration  which  will  be  awarded 
to  qualified  applicants  from  the  other  American 
republics.  The  fellowships,  which  will  be  awarded 
by  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  with 
the  ajiproval  of  the  Secretary  of  State,  will  be  of 
the  intem-training  and  training-in-research  type 
and  may  include  advance  univei'sity  instruction  at 
colleges  and  univei-sities  and  practical  training  and 
observation  in  Government  departments  and  agen- 
cies. Each  application  shall  be  transmitted  to  the 
Secretary  of  State  by  the  government  of  the  Amer- 
ican republic  of  which  the  applicant  is  a  citizen 
through  the  American  diplomatic  mission  accred- 
ited to  that  government. 

Each  applicant  awarded  a  fellowship  may  be 
granted,  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Director 
of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget,  monthly  allowances 
for  quarters  and  subsistence  during  the  entire 
period  spent  in  the  United  States,  or  its  terri- 
tories or  possessions;  certain  transportation  ex- 
penses; a  per  diem  in  lieu  of  subsistence  while  in 
travel  status   (except  that  no  per  diem  will  be 


allowed  concurrently  with  monthly  allowances) ; 
and  other  expenses.  Each  applicant  shall  submit 
written  reports  of  progress  in  studies  and  reseacch 
at  such  intervals  as  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of 
the  Budget  may  direct. 

Fellowships  may  be  awarded  for  periods  not  ex- 
ceeding 12  months  of  actual  study  and  research 
and  may  be  extended  for  not  exceeding  the  same 
periods.  Fellowships  may  be  canceled  for  cause 
by  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget,  with 
the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  State. 

The  full  text  of  the  regulations  appears  in  the 
Federal  Register  of  May  6,  1944,  page  4799. 

VISIT  OF  COLOMBIAN  MUSEUM 
DIRECTOR 

Seiiorita  Teresa  Cuervo  Borda,  Director  of  Casa 
Colonial,  the  national  museum  of  colonial  art  and 
history  at  Bogota,  Colombia,  has  arrived  in  Wash- 
ington as  a  guest  of  the  Department  of  State. 
She  plans  to  visit  not  only  archives,  libraries,  and 
museums  in  the  national  capital  and  other  areas 
of  the  United  States  but  also  to  observe  what  has 
been  done  in  such  colonial  restorations  as  those  at 
Williamsburg,  Virginia,  for  the  Casa  Colonial, 
in  addition  to  being  a  national  museum,  is  a  mas- 
terpiece of  the  restoration  of  an  early  Spanish 
colonial  house. 


Near  East 


BIRTHDAY  OF  THE  KING  OF  IRAQ 

[Released  to  the  press  May  2] 

The  President  has  sent  the  following  message  to 
His  Highness  Prince  Abdul  Ilah,  Regent  of  the 
Kingdom  of  Iraq,  on  the  occasion  of  the  birthday 
of  the  King  of  Iraq : 

May  2,  1944. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  express  to  His 
Majesty  King  Faisal  II  my  sincere  good  wishes 
on  this  anniversary  of  his  birth  and  to  convey  to 
the  people  of  Iraq  the  greetings  of  the  people  of 
the  United  States  on  this  happy  occasion. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


The  Department 


PRINCIPLES  AND  POLICIES  OF  DEPARTMENTAL  PERSONNEL  ADMINISTRATION 


Departmental  Order  1272  of  May  3,  1944  ' 


Purpose  and  Authority.  The  purpose  of  the 
present  order,  issued  under  R.S.  161  (5  U.S.C.  22), 
is  to  set  forth  tlie  principles  and  policies  which 
are  to  govern  the  inauguration  of  the  new  person- 
nel program  under  Departmental  Order  1218  as 
amended. 

The  Department  of  State  exists  to  serve  the 
public  interest  within  the  framework  established 
by  the  Constitution,  by  statute,  and  by  regulation. 
The  Department  has  the  major  responsibility,  un- 
der the  President,  for  determining  the  foreign 
policy  of  the  United  States  Government  and  for 
conducting  its  foreign  relations. 

The  observance  of  the  principles  and  policies 
outlined  herein  is  fundamental  to  fulfilling  the 
Department's  responsibilities.  The  best  interests 
of  all  will  be  served  by  the  improvement  of  De- 
partmental standards  for  discharging  these  re- 
sponsibilities and  by  giving  due  recognition  to 
each  employee's  effort. 

Since  it  is  the  practice  of  the  Department  to  call 
in  Foreign  Service  officers  to  supplement  the  reg- 
ular staff  of  the  Department,  it  is  incumbent  upon 
these  ofScere,  while  on  duty  in  the  Department,  to 
subscribe  to  the  principles  and  policies  outlined 
below. 

Fundamental,  Principles 

1.  Tlie  Department  recognizes  as  a  fundamental 
requirement  of  effective  operation,  the  need  for 
and  the  importance  of  establishing  and  maintain- 
ing mutually  satisfactory  and  effective  working 
relationships  among  all  employees.  The  Depart- 
ment realizes  that  its  responsibilities  will  be  per- 
formed most  ably  if  all  its  employees  understand 
the  importance  of  their  work  and  identify  them- 
selves with  it.  It  is  the  responsibility  of  each 
administrative  official  to  organize  his  work  so 

'  Effective  May  3,  1944. 


that  every  member  of  his  staff  will  feel  the  chal- 
lenge of  contributing  to  his  full  capacity  in  the 
task  to  be  done. 

2.  It  is  the  primary  objective  of  the  Depart- 
ment's program  of  personnel  administration  to 
recruit,  develop,  and  maintain  a  staff  of  qualified, 
efficient,  and  well-adjusted  workers  and  to  encour- 
age the  maximum  use  of  their  skills  and  abilities. 
This  may  be  acconqDlished  principally  through 
the  proper  selection,  placement,  upgrading,  su- 
pervision, training,  and  remuneration  of  em- 
ployees and  througli  the  maintenance  of  proper 
working  conditions. 

3.  The  Department  recognizes  that  the  indi- 
vidual employee's  rights  and  interests  with  refer- 
ence to  his  position  are  based, upon  his  ability 
and  performance  without  discrimination  or  prej- 
udice. He  is  entitled  to  fair  treatment  by  his  su- 
pervisors, equitable  compensation  for  his  services, 
and  deserved  consideration  for  his  advancement 
within  the  Department. 

4.  The  Department  intends  to  create  and  main- 
tain an  environment  for  work  which  will  en- 
courage employees  to  grow  and  foster  a  high 
degree  of  effort  and  productivity.  It  is  essential 
that  all  officials  in  administrative  or  supervisory 
positions  clearly  understand  and  apply  the  major 
principles  and  policies  of  deptirtmental  personnel 
administration  in  the  interest  of  high  morale. 

POUCIES 

1.  Appointment.  The  Department  selects  its 
staff  on  the  basis  of  merit,  without  discrimination. 
The  selection  of  candidates  is  based  on  the  re- 
quirements of  the  position,  ability,  skill,  training, 
experience,  character,  and  physical  fitness.  AH 
appointments  are  made  in  accordance  with  ap- 
plicable Civil  Service  laws  and  regulations. 

2.  Placement  and  Transfer,  (a)  Employees 
are  placed  in  positions  for  which  they  are  equipped 

417 


418 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STAT'E    BULLETIN 


by  experience,  training,  and  physical  fitness. 
Physical  fitness  is  considered  an  important  factor 
in  the  selection  of  each  employee.  It  is  the  aim 
of  the  Department  to  make  the  best  possible  use  of 
the  skills  and  abilities  of  employees  at  all  levels. 
If  the  initial  placement  does  not  engage  the  full 
capacities  of  employees,  consistent  with  the  De- 
p-artment's  requirements  and  efficiency,  steps  will 
be  taken  to  transfer  them  to  positions  more  com- 
mensurate with  their  capacities.  Administrative 
and  supervisory  personnel  have  a  responsibility 
to  assist  in  making  such  adjustments. 

(b)  It  will  be  the  policy  to  make  inter-division 
transfers  wherever  necessary  in  the  best  interest 
of  the  Department's  work.  In  order  to  avoid 
dislocation  in  operations  within  the  division  con- 
cerned, it  is  the  obligation  of  each  supervisor  so  to 
train  emp]o3'ees  and  organize  the  flow  of  his  work 
as  to  facilitate  the  release  of  efficient  employees 
for  upgrading  elsewhere  in  the  Department. 

3.  ProTnotion  From  Within,  (a)  In  order  to 
encourage  the  development  of  careers  in  the  De- 
partment, the  policy  of  promotion  from  within 
will  be  observed.  Promotions  are  made  on  the 
basis  of  competency  on  the  present  job  and  ability 
to  assume  and  discharge  efficiently  greater  respon- 
sibilities. Ability  of  the  individual  to  work  har- 
moniously and  effectively  with  fellow  employees 
and  to  contribute  to  the  improvement  of  methods 
and  procedures,  are  factors  in  advancement  to 
more  responsible  duties.  Each  administrator  and 
supervisor  should  be  alert  to  and  should  assist  in 
the  development  of  a  high  degree  of  efficiency  in 
the  employees  whose  work  he  directs. 

(b)  In  filling  vacancies,  consideration  will  be 
given  first  to  proficient  employees  within  the 
immediate  section,  then  within  the  division,  and, 
finally  elsewhere  within  the  Department.  If 
other  considerations  are  equal,  length  of  service 
may  be  a  determining  factor  in  promotions.  If 
qualified  employees  are  not  available,  the  Depart- 
ment will  make  appointments  from  outside  when 
it  is  deemed  to  be  in  its  best  interest. 

(c)  It  is  the  intention  of  the  Department  to 
recognize  the  efforts  of  its  employees  to  raise 
their  qualifications  for  service.  It  is  incumbent 
upon  every  employee  to  inform  his  supervisor  and 
the  Division  of  Departmental  Personnel  of  addi- 


tional qualifications  acquired  through  study  or 
other  means  of  self-development.  Adequate 
records  of  experience,  training,  and  performance 
will  be  maintained  for  each  employee  as  a  method 
of  carrying  out  this  policy. 

4.  Classifcation  of  Positio-ns.  It  is  the  policy  of 
the  Department  to  make  equitable  payment  for 
the  work  performed.  This  means  that  positions 
will  be  properly  classified  and  graded  on  the  basis 
of  duties  and  responsibilities,  in  accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  the  Classification  Act  of  1923  as 
amended. 

5.  Service  Ratings.  Service  ratings  for  all  Fed- 
eral employees  are  prescribed  by  law.  Tlie  de- 
velopment of  sound  standards  of  performance 
is  an  inherent  part  of  each  supervisor's  re- 
sponsibility, and  he  is  called  upon  to  appraise 
objectively  and  continuously  the  individual  per- 
formance of  his  subordinates  on  the  basis  of  such 
standards.  This  appraisal  is  one  of  the  factors  in 
determining  the  advancement  or  retention  of 
employees  and  provides  the  basis  for  promotion 
under  the  Mead-Ramspeck  Act  of  August  1,  1941. 

6.  Overtime,  (a)  It  is  the  policy  of  the  Depart- 
ment to  perform  its  day-to-day  functions  within 
the  prescribed  work-week,  and  supervisors  have 
the  responsibility  to  organize  their  work  so  that 
this  policy  may  be  observed.  Voluntary  overtime 
of  employees  in  order  to  meet  abnormal  pressures 
of  work  will  be  considered  by  the  Department  as  ?. 
factor  in  giving  due  recognition  for  service. 

(b)  When  emergencies  require  the  Department 
to  direct  employees  to  work  beyond  the  normal 
work  day,  they  shall  be  duly  compensated.  Over- 
time compensation  for  such  work  may  be  given, 
or  compensatory  leave  in  lieu  thereof.  % 

7.  Leave.  The   Department  favors  the  intelli-      j 
gent  use  of  annual  leave  for  the  purpose  of  rest, 
recreation,  and  recuperation  as  a  benefit  to  both 
the  employee  and  the  Department.     The  period 

of  continuous  leave  must  be  determined  as  a 
matter  of  administrative  discretion,  in  the  light 
of  the  urgency  of  the  work  of  the  employee. 

8.  Separations,  (a)  Continued  employment  by     J 
the  Department  requires  that  employees  render 
honest,  efficient,  and  loyal  service.    It  is  the  policy 

of  the  Department  to  terminate  appointments 
when  such  separation  will  promote  the  efficiency 


MAY    6,    1944 


419 


of  the  service.  This  will  be  done  in  accordance 
with  Civil  Service  procedure.  Employees  whose 
appointments  must  be  terminated  for  any  cause 
whatsoever  will  be  accorded  a  fair  hearing  by  the 
Department  under  procedures  already  in  effect. 
They  will  also  be  informed  of  their  right  to  appeal 
to  the  Civil  Service  Commission  and,  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  Commission,  to  have  their  names 
placed  on  reemployment  lists. 

(b)  Wlien  a  reduction  of  force  is  necessary, 
employees  will  be  retained  on  the  basis  of  merit, 
with  due  allowance  for  length  of  service  and  other 
considerations  prescribed  by  Civil  Service  regula- 
tions. Since  service  ratings  are  the  criteria  of 
merit,  the  Department  expects  all  supervisors  to 
make  accurate  evaluations  of  employees. 

9.  Traming.  The  Department  considers  it  a 
responsibility  of  management  to  train  the  staff 
as  a  means  of  increasing  efficiency.  It  is  a  major 
responsibility  of  every  supervisor  to  see  that  each 
employee  under  his  supervision  is  instructed  in  his 
duties  and  in  the  best  methods  of  performing  them. 
The  Department  will  assist  employees  to  attain 
the  required  level  of  performance  through  train- 
ing programs  administered  within  a  division  or, 
where  circumstances  warrant,  on  a  Department- 
wide  basis.  Such  programs  are  designed  to  im- 
prove work  practices  and  processes  at  all  levels. 

10.  Supervisory-Employee  Conferences.  The 
Department  recognizes  that  frequent  consultations 
between  employees  and  their  supervisors  are  essen- 
tial to  good  working  relationships.  All  super- 
visors will  be  encouraged  to  develop  a  program  of 
supervisory-employee  conferences  and  to  acquire 
the  technique  of  securing  group  participation 
through  the  conference  method.  These  conferences 
will  provide  a  medium  for  the  exchange  of  infor- 
mation and  constructive  ideas  and  for  the  develop- 
ment of  leadership  among  employees.  When  prop- 
erly conducted,  they  will  contribute  to  the  develop- 
ment of  high  morale  and  to  the  stimulation  of  a 
growing  interest  in  the  Department's  methods  of 
operation. 

11.  Employee  Suggestions.  It  will  be  the  policy 
of  the  Department  to  encourage  suggestions  for 
improving  the  policies,  the  methods  and  proce- 
dures, the  working  conditions,  and  other  phases 
of  employment.     Employees  should  feel  free  to 


make  suggestions  to  their  immediate  supervisors 
or  to  higher  officials  of  the  Department.  The  effec- 
tive carrying  out  of  the  Department's  responsibil- 
ities requires  full  employee  participation  in  the 
conduct  of  its  affairs.  An  employee-suggestion 
system  will  be  established,  by  means  of  which 
employee  suggestions  will  be  given  proper  con- 
sideration. 

12.  Oounseling.  The  Depailment  will  provide 
an  adequate  and  competent  counseling  service  for 
its  employees.  This  service  will  assist  individual 
employees  to  solve  the  problems  arising  in  their 
work  and  employment  relations,  as  well  as  those 
of  a  more  personal  character. 

13.  Grievances.  The  Department  will  see  that 
all  employees  are  fairly  treated  in  every  respect. 
To  this  end  supervisors  are  encouraged  to  use  every 
available  means  to  aid  in  solving  the  problems  of 
their  employees.  Where  an  adjustment  between 
supervisor  and  employee  does  not  seem  possible, 
the  Counseling  Service  is  available  for  consulta- 
tion and  guidance.  If  the  problem  cannot  be  sat- 
isfactorily adjusted  through  these  channels,  em- 
ployees may  avail  themselves  of  the  procedure  es- 
tablished by  the  Department  for  the  hearing  of 
grievances.  Employees  are  assured  complete  free- 
dom in  presenting  grievances,  without  fear  of  re- 
prisal or  discrimination.  The  Department  empha- 
sizes the  responsibility  of  all  officials  to  cooperate 
in  the  observance  of  this  policy. 

14.  Health  and,  Safety.  The  Department  will 
provide  an  adequate  program  for  the  health  and 
safety  of  its  employees.  The  purpose  of  this  pro- 
gram will  be  to  maintain  the  health  and  well-being 
of  every  employee,  which  will  automatically  in- 
crease efficiency  and  productivity,  thus  reducing 
absenteeism.  In  addition  to  first-aid  care  for  the 
sick  and  injured  the  program  will  cover  such 
matters  as  personal  hygiene,  nutrition,  safe  and 
sanitary  working  conditions,  and  related  subjects. 

15.  Employee  Organizations.  Organizations  of 
government  employees  have  a  logical  place  in  gov- 
ernment affairs.  The  Department  subscribes  to 
the  belief  that  its  employees  have  a  right  to  join 
or  refrain  from  joining  employee  organizations. 
Any  choice  made  in  this  matter  will  be  without 
interference,  coercion,  restraint,  fear  of  discrimi- 
nation or  reprisal. 


420 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIOSr 


16.  Employee  Services.  The  Department  real- 
izes that  the  personal  adjustment  of  its  employ- 
ees to  life  in  the  community  has  an  important 
bearing  on  their  attitude  toward  their  work  and 
the  satisfaction  they  derive  therefrom.  Employ- 
ees may  be  assisted  in  becoming  happily  inte- 
grated into  the  community  through  help  regard- 
ing housing,  transportation,  financial  matters, 
health,  recreation,  and  other  individual  interests. 
Staff  members  will  cooperate  with  employees  in 
organizing  and  promoting  cultural,  recreational, 
and  educational  activities. 

11 .  Supervisory  Responsibilities,  (a)  The  De- 
partment believes  that  high  morale  among  its 
employees  is  fundamental  to  the  successful  carry- 
ing out  of  its  functions.  Supervisors  are  key  peo- 
ple in  the  Department  and  the  creation  and  main- 
tenance of  high  morale  in  their  units  is  their  im- 
mediate responsibility.  The  methods  of  organiz- 
ing and  administering  their  work  should  include 
continuous  instruction  of  the  employees  in  the 
techniques  of  their  work,  enlistment  of  their  in- 
terest in  proficiency,  and  recognition  of  their 
wholehearted  endeavor. 

(b)  It  will  be  the  policy  of  the  Department  to 
instruct  supervisors  in  the  proper  application  of 
these  principles  and  policies. 


The  Division  of  Departmental  Personnel  has 
the  responsibility  for  assisting  operating  officials 
in  the  establishment  and  maintenance  of  a  pro- 
gressive personnel  program  designed  to  stimu- 
late employees  so  that  their  efforts  will  result  in 
satisfaction  to  themselves,  credit  to  the  Depart- 
ment, and  benefit  to  the  nation. 

CORDELL   HtILL 

PROTECTION  AND  PROMOTION  OF  AMERI- 
CAN COMMERCIAL  AND  AGRICULTURAL 
INTERESTS   IN   FOREIGN   COUNTRIES 

Departmental  Order  1264  of  April  28,  1944  ' 

Mr.  Homer  S.  Fox  is  hereby  designated  Con- 
sultant on  Foreign  Trade  Protection  and  Pro- 
motion in  the  Division  of  Commercial  Policy. 

'Effective  Apr.  28,   1944. 

"  Press  Releases,  May  IS,  1939,  p.  395. 


The  Consultant  on  Foreign  Trade  Protection  and 
Promotion  shall  have  responsibility  for  develop- 
ing jjlans  and  advising  the  Chief  of  the  Division 
of  Commercial  Policy  with  respect  to  the  protec- 
tion and  promotion  of  American  commercial  and 
agricultural  intei'ests  in  foreign  countries  and  un- 
der the  general  supervision  of  the  Chief  of  the 
Division  of  Commercial  F'olicy,  for  the  execution 
of  the  functions  relative  to  tlie  protection  and  pro- 
motion of  American  commercial  and  agricultural 
interests  abroad,  which  were  transferred  to  the 
Department  of  State  by  Reorganization  Plan  No. 
11,^  and  responsibility  with  respect  to  which  was 
placed  in  the  Division  of  Commercial  Policy  by 
Departmental  Order  1218  of  January  15,  1944. 

CoRDELL  Hull 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Order  1265  of  May  1,  1944, 
effective  May  1,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  des- 
ignated Mr.  Stanley  K.  Hornbeck  as  Special  As- 
sistant to  the  Secretary. 

By  Departmental  Order  1266  of  May  1,  1944, 
effective  May  1,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  des- 
ignated Mr.  Joseph  C.  Grew  as  Director  of  the 
Office  of  Far  Eastern  Affairs. 

By  Departmental  Order  1268  of  May  2,  1944, 
effective  May  2,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  des- 
ignated Mr.  John  M.  Cabot  as  Acting  Chief  tem- 
porarily of  the  Division  of  Caribbean  and  Cen- 
tral Ajnerican  Affairs. 


The  Foreign  Service 


CONFIRMATIONS 

On  May  3,  1944  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nom- 
ination of  S.  Pinkney  Tuck  to  be  American  Min-  ■ 
ister  to  Egypt  and  R.  Henry  Norweb  to  be  Ameri-  f 
can  Ambassador  to  Portugal. 

CONSULAR  OFFICES 

The  American  Vice  Consulate  at  Manta,  Ecua- 
dor, was  closed,  effective  April  29, 1944. 


Treaty  Information 


GRANTING  OF  PLENIPOTENTIARY  POWERS   IN  THE  FIELD  OF  FOREIGN  RELATIONS 
TO  EACH  OF  THE  SOVIET   SOCIALIST  REPUBLICS 


Under  provisions  of  the  law  adopted  by  the 
Supreme  Soviet  of  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics  on  February  1,  1944,  each  Soviet  Re- 
public has  the  right  to  enter  into  direct  relations 
with  foreign  states  and  to  conclude  agreements 
with  them. 

A  translation  of  the  law  and  a  translation  of  a 
circular  note  of  February  11, 1944  from  the  Soviet 
Foreign  Office  concerning  the  reorganization  of 
the  People's  Connnissariat  for  Foreign  Affairs, 
with  which  the  law  was  enclosed,  were  transmitted 
to  the  Department  of  State  with  a  despatch  of 
February  15,  1944  from  the  American  Embassy  at 
Moscow. 

The  circular  note  reads  in  part  as  follows 
(translation)  : 

"With  a  view  to  expanding  international  rela- 
tions and  to  strengthening  the  collaboration  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  with  other 
states,  and  in  view  of  the  growing  need  of  the 
Soviet  Republics  for  establishing  direct  relations 
with  foreign  states,  the  new  Law  provides  that 
each  Soviet  Republic  has  the  right  to  enter  into 
direct  relations  with  foreign  states,  to  conclude 
agreements  with  them  and  to  exchange  diplomatic 
and  consular  representatives.  The  Law  of  Feb- 
ruary 1, 1944,  introduces  appropriate  amendments 
into  the  present  Constitution  of  the  Union  of  So- 
viet Socialist  Republics  of  December  5,  1936." 

A  translation  of  the  text  of  the  law  follows : 

The  Law  foe  the  Granting  to  the  Union  Re- 
puBiiics  OF  Plenipotentiary  Powers  in  the 
Field  of  Foreign  Relations  and  for  the  Cor- 
responding Reorganization  of  the  People's 
Commissariat  for  Foreign  Affairs  From  an 
All-Union  to  a  Union-Republican  People's 
Commissariat. 

With  a  view  to  extending  international  relations 
and  to  strengthening  the  collaboration  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  with  other 
states  and  in  view  of  the  growing  need  of  the 


Union  Repubhcs  to  establish  direct  relations  with 
foreign  states,  the  Supreme  Soviet  of  the  Union 
of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  resolves: 

1.  To  provide  that  the  Union  Republics  may 
enter  into  direct  relations  with  foreign  states  and 
conclude  agreements  with  them. 

2.  To  include  in  the  Constitution  of  the 
U.  S.  S.  R.  the  following  amendments : 

(a).  Add  to  Article  14  point  "a"  of  the  Con- 
stitution of  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  after  the  words  "repre- 
sentation of  the  Union  in  international  relations, 
conclusion  and  ratification  of  treaties"  the  words 
"the  establishment  of  the  general  form  of  mutual 
relations  of  the  Union  Republics  with  foreign 
states"  whereby  this  point  will  read  as  follows: 

" (a) .  Representation  of  the  Union  in  inter- 
national relations,  conclusion  and  ratification 
of  treaties  with  other  states,  and  the  establish- 
ment of  the  general  form  of  mutual  relations 
of  the  Union  Republics  with  foreign  states." 

(b).  Add  to  the  Constitution  of  the  U.  S.  S.  R. 
Article  18-a  with  the  following  content : 

"Article  18-a.  Each  Union  Republic  has 
the  right  to  enter  into  direct  relations  with 
foreign  states,  to  conclude  agreements  with 
them  and  to  exchange  diplomatic  and  consular 
representatives." 

(c).  Add  to  Article  60  of  the  Constitution  of 
the  U.  S.  S.  E.  point  "e"  with  the  following  con- 
tent : 

"(e).  Establishes  representation  of  the 
Union  Republic  in  international  relations." 

3.  To  reorganize  the  People's  Commissariat  for 
Foreign  Affairs  from  an  All-Union  to  a  Union- 
Republican  People's  Commissariat. 

President  of  the  Presidium  of  the  Supreme  So- 
viet of  the  U.  S.  S.  R.,  M.  Kalinin. 

Secretary  of  the  Presidium  of  the  Supreme  So- 
viet of  the  U.  S.  S.  R.,  A.  Gorkin. 

Moscow,  Kremlin,  February  1,  19^^. 

421 


422 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE   BtTLLETIK 


EXCHANGE  OF  PUBLICATIONS, 
UNITED  STATES  AND  GUATEMALA 

The  American  Ambassador  to  Guatemala  trans- 
mitted to  the  Secretary  of  State,  with  a  despatch 
dated  April  24,  1944,  an  agreement  between  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  and  the  Govern- 
ment of  Guatemala  for  the  exchange  of  official 
publications.  The  agreement,  which  was  con- 
cluded by  an  exchange  of  notes  dated  March  23, 
1944  and  April  13,  1944,  became  effective  on 
March  23, 1944. 

Lists  of  official  publications  to  be  exchanged 
accompanied  each  note.  Under  the  terms  of  the 
agreement,  each  Government  agrees  to  furnish  to 
the  other  Government,  without  the  necessity  of 
subsequent  negotiation,  new  and  important  pub- 
lications which  may  be  initiated  in  the  future. 
The  official  exchange  office  for  the  transmission 
of  the  publications  on  the  part  of  the  United 
States  is  the  Smithsonian  Institution;  the  official 
exchange  office  on  the  part  of  Guatemala  is 
the  Tipogi-afia  Nacional.  The  publications  ex- 
changed will  be  received  for  the  United  States  by 
the  Library  of  Congress  and  for  Guatemala  by  tiie 
Biblioteca  Nacional  de  Guatemala.  Each  Govern- 
ment agrees  to  bear  postal,  railroad,  steamship, 
and  other  charges  arisin,g  in  its  own  territory  and 
to  expedite  the  shipments  so  far  as  possible. 

REGULATION  OF  INTER-AMERICAN 
AUTOMOTIVE  TRAFFIC 

Honduras 

The  Director  General  of  the  Pan  American 
Union,  by  a  letter  of  May  2,  1944,  informed  the 
Secretary  of  State  that  on  April  24,  1944  His 
Excellency  the  Ambassador  of  Honduras  in  the 
United  States,  Seiior  Dr.  Don  Julian  R.  Caceres, 
signed,  in  the  name  of  his  Government,  the  Con- 
vention on  the  Kegulation  of  Inter-American 
Automotive  Traffic,  which  was  deposited  with  the 
Pan  American  Union  and  opened  for  signature  on 
December  15, 1943. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Temporary  Raising  of  Level  of  Lake  St.  Francis  During 
Low-Water  Periods:  Agreement  Between  the  United 
States  of  America  and  Canada  Continuing  In  Effect 
the  Agreement  of  November  10,  1941  as  Continued  by 
the  Agreement  of  October  5  and  9,  1942 — Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington  October  5  and 
9,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series  377.  Publication 
2101.    2  pp.    5<;. 

Haitian  Finances:  Supplementary  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Haiti — Signed  at  Port-au- 
Prince  August  28,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series 
378.    Publication  2107.    2  pp.    5(f. 

Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Ecuador — Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington  February  24, 
1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  379.  Publication 
2109.    3  pp.    5^. 

The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals:  Cumu- 
lative Supplement  No.  2,  May  5,  1944,  to  Revision  VII 
of  March  23,  1944.    Publication  2113.    25  pp.    Free. 


Legislation 


Supplemental  Estimate — Department  of  State:  Commu- 
nication from  the  President  of  the  United  States  trans- 
mitting supplemental  estimate  of  appropriation  for  the 
Department  of  State,  fiscal  year  1945,  amounting  to 
$.50,000,  in  the  form  of  an  amendment  to  the  budget 
for  said  fiscal  year.     S.  Doc.  186,  78th  Cong.  2  pp. 

Estimate  of  Appropriation  To  Enable  the  United  States 
To  Participate  in  the  Work  of  the  United  Nations  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Administration :  Communication 
from  the  President  of  the  United  States  transmitting  an 
estimate  of  appropriation  to  enable  the  United  States 
to  participate  in  the  work  of  the  United  Nations  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Administration,  as  authorized  by  the 
act  of  March  28,  1944  (Public  Law  267),  in  the  amount 
of  $450,000,000,  and  a  proposed  provision  authorizing 
the  disposition  or  expenditure  by  the  President  of  sup- 
plies, services,  or  funds  available  under  the  act  of  March 
11,  1041  (22  U.  S.  C.  411^19),  in  the  amount  of 
$3.50,000,000.     H.  Doc.  572,  78th  Cong.     5  pp. 


0.   f.  «OVERNHENT  PRINTING  OFFICE,  1>44 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office.  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents    -    -   -    -    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 


PtTBLISHBD  W&BKLY  WITH  THE  APPBOTAL  OF  THK  DIRBCTOB  OF  THE  BUBDAU  OF  THS  BCDQBT 


'i'ii  ■ 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 

BULLETIN 


c 


MAY  13,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  255— Publication  2125 


ontents 


The   WaB  Page 

Declaration  by  the  Airferiean,  British,  and  Soviet  Gov- 
ernments Regarding  the  Four  Axis  Satellites  .  .  .      425 

InteknationaJj  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

First  Conference  of  Commissions  of  Inter-American 
Development : 

Message  of  President  Eoosevelt 426 

Message  of  the  Secretaiy  of  State 426 

Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle :  A  Challenging 

Opportunity 427 

General 

Cultural-Cooperation  Program  of  the  Department  of 

State :  Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Shaw  ....      429 

American  Republics 

Visit  of  Peruvian  Architect 435 

Visit  of  Director  of  Mexican  Institute  of  Tropical  Medi- 
cine        435 

Visit  of  Haitian  Physician  and  Engineer 435 

The  Department 

Systematizing  Departmental  Orders  and  Other  Issu- 
ances :  Departmental  Order  1269  of  May  3,  1944  .      436 
Establisliment  of  Division  of  American  Republics  Anal- 
ysis and   Liaison:   Departmental   Order    1271   of 

May  3, 1944 443 

Appointment  of  Officers 444 

[oveb] 


U.  S.  SUPERlWEiCEKT  Of  DOCUMENT^ 

JUAI 15  1944 


0 


OMieAliS-CONTINUED 

Treaty  Information  Page 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Agreements:  Proce- 
dure, Formalities,  and  the  Information  Facilities  of 
the  Department  of  State :  By  William  V.  Whitting- 

ton 445 

Additional  Diversion  of  Waters  of  the  Niagara  River 

for  Power  Purposes 455 

Mutual-Aid    Agreeement,    Canada    and    the    French 

Committee  of  National  Liberation 456 

Treaty  Between  Canada  and  China  for  the  Relinquish- 
ment of  Extraterritorial  Rights  in  China 458 

Inter- American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences  .  .  .      461 

Protocol  on  Pelagic  Whaling 461 

Agi'eement  for  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilita- 
tion Administration 461 

The  Foreign  Service 461 

Legislation 461 

pubucations 4^ 


The  War 


DECLARATION  BY  THE  AMERICAN,   BRITISH,  AND  SOVIET  GOVERNMENTS 
REGARDING  THE  FOUR   AXIS  SATELLITES 


[Released  to  the  press  May  12] 

Through  the  fateful  policy  of  their  leadei-s,  the 
people  of  Hungary  are  suffering  the  humiliation 
of  German  occupation.  Rumania  is  still  bound 
to  the  Xazis  in  a  war  now  bringing  devastation 
to  its  own  people.  The  Governments  of  Bulgaria 
and  Finland  have  placed  their  countries  in  the 
service  of  Germany  and  remain  in  the  war  at  Ger- 
many's side. 

The  Governments  of  Great  Britain,  the  Soviet 
Union,  and  the  United  States  think  it  right  that 
these  peoples  should  realize  the  following  facts : 

1.  The  Axis  satellites,  Hungary,  Rumania,  Bul- 
garia, and  Finland,  despite  their  realization  of  the 
inevitability  of  a  crushing  Nazi  defeat  and  their 
desire  to  get  out  of  the  war  are  by  their  present 
policies  and  attitudes  contributing  materially  to 
the  strength  of  the  German  war-machine. 


2.  These  nations  still  have  it  within  their  power, 
by  withdrawing  from  the  war  and  ceasing  their 
collaboration  with  Germany  and  by  resisting  the 
forces  of  Nazism  by  every  possible  means,  to 
shorten  the  European  struggle,  diminish  their  own 
ultimate  sacrifices,  and  contribute  to  the  Allied 
victory. 

3.  While  these  nations  cannot  escape  their  re- 
sponsibility for  having  participated  in  the  war 
at  the  side  of  Nazi  Germany,  the  longer  they  con- 
tinue at  war  in  collaboration  with  Germany  the 
more  disastrous  will  be  the  consequences  to  them 
and  the  more  rigorous  will  be  the  terms  which  will 
be  imposed  upon  them. 

4.  These  nations  ifiust  therefore  decide  now 
whether  they  intend  to  persist  in  their  present 
hopeless  and  calamitous  policy  of  opposing  the 
inevitable  Allied  victoiy,  while  there  is  yet  time 
for  them  to  contribute  to  that  victory. 


425 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


FIRST  CONFERENCE  OF  COMMISSIONS   OF  INTER-AMERICAN  DEVELOPMENT 

Message  of  President  Roosevelt  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  9] 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  extend  a  very  warm 
greeting  to  the  delegates  of  the  First  Conference 
of  Commissions  of  Inter- American  Development. 

The  Americas,  through  joint  action  based  upon 
the  principles  agreed  upon  at  the  Pan  American 
meetings,  have  mobilized  their  resources  against 
the  common  enemy.  They  are  patrolling  hemi- 
sphere waters,  strengthening  military  bases,  sup- 
plying great  quantities  of  strategic  materials. 
These  are  all  playing  a  notable  part  in  the  ever- 
rising  strength  of  the  Unit«d  Nations'  fighting 
forces. 

But  many  tasks  requiring  joint  effort  among  the 
Americas  remain.  One  of  the  most  important 
immediate  jobs  is  preparation  for  the  time  when  we 
will  have  to  readjust  our  economies  after  war  pro- 
duction has  passed  its  peak.  How  well  we  succeed 
in  making  a  smooth  transition  from  war  to  peace 


will  depend  in  large  part  upon  how  we  prepare 
now. 

The  Inter- American  Development  Commission, 
and  the  21  individual  country  commissions,  consti- 
tute one  of  the  invaluable  mechanisms  which  the 
Americas  have  created  for  mutually  beneficial  co- 
operation. The  delegates  to  this  conference  have 
an  important  function  in  preparing  for  the  future 
as  well  as  aiding  the  wartime  mobilization  of  hemi- 
sphere resources.  This  Conference  and  the  com- 
missions provide  a  particularly  effective  channel 
for  the  direct  participation  by  private  business  in 
hemisphere  economic  progress. 

This  Conference  is  building  upon  a  strong  foun- 
dation— cooperation,  equality,  and  opportunity — 
which  we  together  have  laid  through  the  years. 
Inter-American  cooperation  has  been  tested  in 
peace  and  in  war,  and  today  is  preparing  for  the 
readjustment  period  ahead  of  us. 


Message  of  the  Secretary  of  State  ' 


[Released  to  the  press  May  10] 

I  am  most  happy  to  have  this  opportunity  of  ex- 
tending a  message  of  greeting  to  the  Conference  of 
Commissions  of  Inter- American  Development  and 
of  wishing  it  full  success  in  its  deliberations. 

Although  the  present  circumstances  demand  that 
our  energies  be  devoted  primarily  to  the  prosecu- 
tion of  the  war,  it  is  also  important  that  plans  be 
outlined  now  for  post-war  economic  development. 
In  the  formulation  of  such  plans  it  is  highly  de- 
sirable that  representatives  of  private  business  and 
financial  interests  in  the  American  republics  con- 
sult together  on  important  issues  and  make  known 
their  views  to  the  govermnents  and  to  the  public 
generally. 

426 


The  Conference  of  the  Inter- American  Develop- 
ment Commissions,  therefore,  has  an  excellent  op- 
portunity for  constructive  accomplishment.  The 
exchange  of  opinions  based  on  national  points  of 
view  can  be  most  helpful  in  arriving  at  a  mutually 
satisfactory  understanding  on  many  important 
questions.  This  should  permit  agreement  on 
broad  principles  which  will  serve  as  a  basis  for 
specific  programs.  Such  exchanges  of  views  can 
also  facilitate  the  coordination  of  national  pro- 
grams in  an  effective  manner. 


'  Read  at  the  opening  session  of  the  Conference  in  New 
York,  N.  Y.,  May  9,  1944. 

^  Read  at  the  opening  plenary  session  of  the  Conference, 
May  10,  1944. 


MAY    13,    1944 


427 


Concentration  upon  the  number  and  complexity 
of  post-war  economic  problems,  serious  as  these 
will  be,  perliaps  tends  to  create  a  state  of  mind 
which  reflects  an  undue  caution  concerning  the  fu- 
ture. This  Conference,  with  the  strength  and 
vitality  of  private  initiative  behind  its  work,  can 
provide  a  bold  and  vigorous  leadership  in  direct- 
ing plans,  thoughts,  and  hopes  to  the  almost  un- 


limited' opportunities  and  possibilities  for  eco- 
nomic progress  in  the  years  of  peace  to  come.  Ex- 
panded production  and  trade,  based  on  sound  and 
liberal  principles,  bringing  more  goods  and  serv- 
ices to  more  people — these  are  goals  worthy  of  the 
best  efforts  of  all  of  us.  I  feel  certain  that  the  Con- 
ference will  chart  a  straight  course  toward  those 
objectives. 


Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle  ^ 
A  Ch^vllenging  Opportunity 


[Released  to  the  press  May  13] 

Mr.  Chairman  and  Gentlemen  :  During  your 
meetings  you  have  been  taking  counsel  as  to  prac- 
■  tical  ways  and  means  of  safeguarding  and  in- 
creasing the  prosperity  of  the  countries  in  North 
and  South  America.  You  have  considered  the 
Western  Hemisphere  as  a  whole.  You  have  been 
right  in  doing  this. 

The  American  nations  have  a  common  destiny. 
They  are  locked  together  by  ties  of  friendship  and 
by  ties  of  self-interest.  It  is  clear  that  the  founda- 
tion of  the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States 
must  be  the  policy  of  the  good  neighbor ;  and  that 
while  we  hope  this  will  become  world-wide,  it  will 
always  be  applied  to  the  American  group  of  coun- 
tries. So  far  as  the  United  States  is  concerned, 
no  policy  can  be  sound  unless  it  takes  account  of 
this  basic  reality. 

Your  plan  has  been  to  provide  greater  develop- 
ment for  the  Americas  by  setting  up  industries 
where  possible  in  the  other  American  republics. 
In  time,  if  you  are  fully  successful,  no  country  will 
be  limited  to  agriculture  or  mining;  but  all  will 
have  as  great  a  measure  of  factory  and  industrial 
life  as  they  find  it  to  their  advantage  to  have. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  the  United  States  this 
is  thoroughly  sound.  We  have  long  since  escaped 
from  the  idea  that  some  countries  were  merely  beds 
of  raw  materials  or  agricultural  production,  to  be 
exploited  for  the  benefit  of  foreign  manufacturers. 
We  have  come  to  that  conclusion  partly  because  it 
was  morally  wrong.  It  is  simply  not  right  for 
some  countries  to  expect  to  maintain  the  high 


prosperity  which  can  come  with  industry  by  ex- 
ploiting the  inability  of  other  countries  to  create 
and  support  industries  for  themselves.  But  we 
have  also  learned  that  the  self-interest  of  the 
United  States,  as  a  manufacturing  country,  is  best 
served  by  the  growth  of  industry  elsewhere.  Our 
best  customers  have  been  industrialized  countries. 
Wliat  we  lose  in  competitive  industry  we  more 
than  make  up  in  markets  occasioned  by  the  in- 
crease in  wages  and  the  growing  prosperity  of  the 
countries  which  improve  their  economic  life. 

In  general,  we  will  explore  the  possibilities  for 
accomplishing  this  growth  of  industry  in  the 
American  republics  through  private  enterprise. 
This  is  as  it  should  be,  since  America  is  a  con- 
tinent of  private  enterprise.  But  it  is  appropriate 
to  realize  fully  the  contract  with  society  which 
private  enterprise  is  assuming.  In  these  days, 
private  investment  and  private  enterprise  take 
on  obligations  not  only  to  their  investors  and 
owners  but  also  to  their  labor  and  to  society.  This 
is  especially  true  in  the  American  republics,  where 
the  growth  of  industry  will  change  certain  civi- 
lizations from  the  old  course  of  an  agricultural 
society. 

An  enterprise  today  is  expected  to  give  substan- 
tially continuous  employment.  It  seems  probable 
that  this  obligation  will  be  stressed  in  countries 
which  turn  from  agriculture  to  industry,  because 
land  at  least  furnished  shelter  and  food — even  at 
a  low  standard — to  the  people  on  it  at  all  times. 


'  Delivered  in  New  York,  N.Y.,  May  13,  1944. 


428 

A  factory  which  pays  relatively  high  wages  for 
certain  periods,  drawing  men  away  from  the  land, 
will  not  be  considered  successful  if  it  throws  those 
men  out  on  the  street  at  intervals,  leaving  them  to 
charity  or  starvation.  We  are  just  beginning  to 
learn  this  in  the  United  States,  for  the  obliga- 
tions are  beginning  to  be  asserted  against  private 
enterprise  here  just  as  they  ai-e  elsewhere. 

And  where  any  area  becomes  industrialized  you 
will  find  that  private  enterprise,  or  private  enter- 
prise and  the  state  working  together,  are  expected 
to  provide  general  employment  for  the  population 
which  must  find  its  livelihood  in  that  area.  This, 
too,  is  an  obligation  which  is  being  brought  home 
to  the  United  States  as  well  as  to  other  Ajmerican 
republics.  This  is  partly  due  to  our  experience 
after  the  last  war.  Our  returning  soldiers,  on 
discharge  from  the  Army,  will  not  be  content  to 
sell  apples;  and  I  think  it  unlikely  that  British 
soldiers  on  discharge  will  walk  up  and  down  the 
streets  with  blankets  asking  for  coppers,  as  hap- 
pened in  some  English  cities  after  the  last  war. 
Neither  does  it  seem  likely  that  the  people  of  any 
country  will  stay  quiet  if  there  are  on  the  one 
hand  material  resources  and  the  machinery  to 
make  needed  goods  out  of  them,  both  lying  idle 
while  unemployed  people  unsuccessfully  seek 
work. 

Both  investment  and  private  enterprise  have  to 
take  account  of  these  social  demands  and  make 
their  plans  accordingly.  Plans  can  be  made  which 
will  take  account  of  these  conditions,  and  we  will 
arrange  to  make  them. 

These  demands  can  be  met.  But  the  best  brains 
and  the  best  planning  and  the  best  management 
in  the  hemisphere  will  be  needed. 

When  industry  is  entering  a  new  area,  experi- 
ence shows  that  it  has  to  do  a  number  of  things. 
It  has  to  provide  training  for  workers  who  until 
now  have  not  had  a  chance  to  learn  modern  skills. 
It  has  to  offer  opportunity  to  capable  people  to 
make  progress  in  the  organization  and  in  the 
industry.  This  means  opportunity  for  better 
technical  education.  Not  infrequently  it  means 
assistance  at  the  lowest  levels :  provision  for  better 
health,  provision  for  better  feeding,  provision  for 
better  living  conditions. 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 

You  cannot  operate  a  sound  industrial  plant  on 
the  peon  system.  Ultimately,  sound  and  healthy 
industrialization  means  the  end  of  the  peon  sys- 
tem— and  that  is  just  what  it  ought  to  mean. 

Private  enterprise  and  private  investment  in 
the  hemisphere,  looked  at  against  this  back- 
ground, thus  widens  its  horizon.  It  has  to  pro- 
vide steady  work  for  the  people  who  work  for 
it — and  that  means  planning,  scheduling  of  pro- 
duction, leveling  off  the  peaks  and  valleys  of 
production.  It  ought  to  mean  also  reasonable 
unemployment-compensation  arrangements  to  take 
care  of  those  interruptions  which  cannot  be  fore- 
seen or  provided  against,  either  by  direct  compen- 
sation or  by  bracketing  industrial  employment 
with  a  certain  amount  of  agricultural  resources. 

It  means  planning  for  workers'  health,  and  that 
in  turn  means  working  with  the  public-health  au- 
thorities in  the  country  in  which  the  enterprise 
is  situated. 

It  means  working  with  the  education  systems 
of  the  area  in  which  the  enterprise  is  at  work. 
The  workers  who  are  becoming  trained  will  want 
better  training  for  their  children. 

It  means  that  the  enterprise  must  take  a  vivid 
interest  in  the  supply  and  cost  of  food  and  of  the 
necessities  of  life.  The  managers  of  the  enter- 
prise in  the  coming  generation  ought  to  be  the 
first  line  of  defense  against  exploitation  by  prof- 
iteers in  food  or  medical  supplies  or  other  eco- 
nomic necessities.  All  this  is  part  of  the  process 
of  progressive  raising  of  living  standards.  It  is 
part  of  the  everyday  work  of  a  modern  industrial 
enterprise. 

It  is  particularly  welcome  to  know  that  you 
who  are  businessmen  have  endeavored  to  tackle 
this  problem  on  the  theory  that  ownership  of  the 
enterprises  you  project  shall  be  in  part,  if  not  in 
whole,  in  the  country  where  the  enterprise  is 
located.  We  ai'e  progi'essively  learning  that  no 
enterprise  is  sound  unless  it  returns  to  the  country 
in  which  it  is,  in  one  form  or  another,  as  much  as 
it  takes  out.  There  is  at  present  no  reason  why 
this  should  not  be  brought  about.  In  older  days 
we  used  to  say  that  the  countries  of  America  out- 
side of  the  United  States  and  Canada  lacked 
capital.    This  is  no  longer  true.    At  present  it  is 


MAY    13,    1944 


429 


far  more  difficult  to  find  management  than  to  find 
money;  and  the  problem  of  most  of  the  Amer- 
icas is  to  make  effective  use  of  the  capital  which  it 
has  accumulated  as  a  result  of  the  war.  If  this 
is  done,  there  ought  to  be  no  difficulty  in  coopera- 
tion between  the  technicians  of  the  United  States 
and  the  enterprises  of  the  other  American  re- 
publics, which  will  be  mutually  beneficial  to 
both. 

In  the  Americas,  no  one  can  prevent  our  prog- 
ress except  ourselves.  We  have  the  resources,  we 
have  the  technical  ability,  we  have  the  capital, 
and,  God  knows,  we  have  the  need  for  goods.    We 


have  a  challenging  opportunity  to  enter  a  stage 
of  development  more  promising  to  the  men  and 
women  of  our  countries,  of  all  walks  of  life,  than 
l^erhaps  the  world  has  even  seen.  We  shall  need 
to  find  new  methods  in  economics  and  finance  as 
modern  as  the  new  methods  which  we  have  de- 
veloped in  engineering,  in  chemistry,  and  in  pro- 
duction. We  shall  undoubtedly  need  greater 
development  in  the  art  of  government  and  in 
bringing  together  the  resources  of  public  and  pri- 
vate organization.  The  work  is  fundamental. 
From  the  conditions  so  created,  countries  can 
build  anew. 


General 


CULTURAL-COOPERATION  PROGRAM  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE 


Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Shaw  ' 


[Released  to  the  press  May  8] 

Six  years  ago — in  1938 — a  separate  division  to 
handle  international  cultural  relations  was  estab- 
lished in  the  Department  of  State.  This  action 
was  but  a  tardy  recognition  in  terms  of  organi- 
zation of  the  fact  that  such  relations  are  of  essen- 
tial importance  to  all  men,  regardless  of  country, 
race,  creed,  or  economic  status.  Certainly  it  would 
be  misleading  to  suggest  that  governments  have 
only  recently  interested  themselves  in  promoting 
and  facilitating  the  international  exchange  of 
knowledge,  skills,  and  the  arts. 

Tlie  scholars  of  your  university  are  better  able 
than  I  to  trace  the  history  of  cultural  relations, 
but  I  suspect  that  the  history  of  the  subject  is 
nothing  less  than  the  story  of  mankind.  One  of 
the  best  known  of  the  early  cultural-exchange  ven- 
tures of  modern  history  is  to  be  found  in  the  story 
of  Marco  Polo  and  his  father,  Nicolo  Polo.  The 
accounts  of  their  travels  tell  us  that  on  Nicolo 
Polo's  first  visit  to  Kublai  Khan,  that  renowned 
ruler  requested  Nicolo  to  return  on  a  second  mis- 
sion with  a  hundred  able  teachers  of  the  liberal 
arts  and  religion.     Unfortunately,  as  we  know, 


this  particular  exchange  of  learned  men  was  not 
carried  out,  but  on  the  return  visit  to  Kublai 
Khan's  court  Nicolo  did  take  with  him  his  son, 
Marco  Polo.  The  following  brief  excerpt  from  a 
history  of  the  travelers  indicates  that  Marco  Polo 
thoroughly  understood  the  work  of  a  cultural-rela- 
tions attache  in  the  sense  in  which  we  use  that  term 
today.    I  quote: 

"Mark,  during  his  stay  at  court,  had  observed 
the  Khan's  delight  in  hearing  of  strange  coun- 
tries, their  marvels,  manners,  and  oddities,  and 
had  heard  his  majesty's  frank  expressions  of  dis- 
gust at  the  stupidity  of  his  commissioners  when 
they  could  speak  of  nothing  but  the  official  busi- 
ness on  which  they  had  been  sent.  Profiting  by 
these  observations,  he  took  care  to  store  his  mem- 
ory or  his  notebooks  with  all  curious  facts  that 
wei-e  likely  to  interest  Kublai,  and  related  them 
with  vivacity  on  his  return  to  Court." 

It  is  worth  noting,  moreover,  that  Marco  Polo's 
success  seems  in  large  measure  to  have  been  due 


^  Delivered  at  the  Loyola  University  Forum,  New  Or- 
leans, La.,  May  8,  1944, 


430 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


to  his  appreciation  of  the  basic  principle  that  in 
sound  international  cultural  relations  there  must 
be  reciprocity.  We,  like  him,  must  be  always  on 
the  alert  to  know  the  other  person's  way  of  life 
as  well  as  to  make  our  own  way  known  to  these 
others.  A  well -conceived  and  effectively  admin- 
istered cultural-relations  program  must  in  the 
long  run  be  genuinely  cooperative.  The  simple 
words  "give  and  take"  are  words  of  practical 
wisdom  in  this  field  of  work. 

The  interest  of  our  Government  in  the  develop- 
ment of  cooperative  cultural  exchanges  with  other 
nations  is  motivated  neither  by  sentimental  nor 
by  sinister  purposes.  It  is  based  simply  on  a  clear 
recognition  that  the  daily  processes  of  living  and 
of  living  spiritually  and  intellectually  are  the 
common — indeed  the  commonest — interest  of  all 
mankind.  And,  after  all,  international  relations 
in  the  last  analysis  consist  of  dealings,  whether 
diplomatic,  commercial,  or,  for  want  of  a  better 
word,  "cultural",  in  matters  which  are  of  common 
interest  to  men  of  all  nations. 

We  hear  a  great  deal  today  to  the  effect  that 
this  war  is  a  "people's  war"  and  that  it  must  be 
followed  by  a  "people's  peace".  A  vitally  im- 
portant idea  is  permeating  international  affairs 
when  men  begin  to  speak  in  terms  of  a  people's 
war  and  a  people's  peace.  That  idea,  of  course, 
is  a  real  belief  in  the  worth  of  the  individual 
human  being  entirely  irrespective  of  nationality, 
race,  creed,  or  economic  status.  It  is  an  important 
idea  for  many  reasons,  but  for  us  it  is  all  impor- 
tant because  it  represents  the  central  core  of  faith 
around  which  our  country  and  indeed  all  free 
countries  have  built  their  institutions  and  their 
very  lives.  In  the  connection  we  are  dealing  with 
in  this  talk  it  represents  a  conviction  that  necessary 
as  governments  are  they  alone  cannot  win  this  war 
and  they  alone  cannot  make  or  maintain  a  secure 
and  a  fruitful  peace.  This  is  the  faith  stated  in 
simplest  terms  which  is  at  the  heart  of  our  inter- 
national cultural-relations  program. 

I  am  going  to  examine  the  concept  of  cultural 
relations  with  you  today  in  terms  of  the  tangible 
things  which  make  up  our  cultural-cooperation 
program.  First,  however,  it  will  be  helpful  to 
clear  away  a  basic  misconception  which  carica- 
tures this  whole  subject.     The  worst  of  several 


misconceptions  with  which  we  have  to  deal  is  the 
misunderstanding  created  in  some  people's  minds 
by  the  very  term  "cultural  relations".  Sometime 
in  our  past  history  the  word  "cultural"  became 
associated  somehow  with  a  privileged,  an  esoteric, 
a  relatively  idle  and  unproductive  group  in  our 
society.  I  do  not  need  to  enter  into  a  lengthy 
description  of  the  group  to  which  I  refer. 
Among  other  attributes  it  was  considered  to  have 
the  characteristic  of  putting  on  "false  airs". 
Now,  the  putting  on  of  false  airs  is  the  last  thing 
which  ought  to  be  associated  with  a  man  or  woman 
of  culture,  but  at  least  some  members  of  the  group 
to  which  I  am  referring  decided  that  their  in- 
adequacies would  be  best  hidden  by  making  over- 
much of  that  which  they  entirely  lacked,  namely, 
a  serious  and  a  creative  concern  with  things  of  the 
mind.  That  is  how  the  word  "culture"  got  a  bad 
name.  The  answer  to  this  misunderstanding  is 
not  to  turn  good  words  over  to  bad  company,  but 
rather  to  turn  the  bad  company  out.  There  is  no 
place  in  the  cultural-relations  program  of  this 
Government  for  the  dilettante. 

Let  me  mention  another  misconception.  Our 
cultural-relations  program  includes  the  fine  arts, 
and  it  is  right  that  it  should  do  so.  But  I  want 
to  make  it  clear  that  the  words  "culture"  and  "cul- 
tural" as  we  use  them  are  not  at  all  restricted  to 
the  fine  arts,  important  as  they  undoubtedly  are. 
We  use  these  terms  to  cover  the  entire  range  of 
knowledge — technical  and  otherwise — that  knowl- 
edge in  which  men  have  a  common  stake  and 
which  in  one  way  or  another  can  advantageously 
be  shared  cooperatively. 

So  much  for  the  general  principles,  the  philos- 
ophy which  we  have  applied  and  which  we  propose 
to  continue  applying  in  the  field  of  international 
cuhural  relations.    I  want  now  to  tell  you  of  some 
of  the  specific  things  we  have  actually  done.    They 
have  fallen  into  certain  categories:  the  exchange 
of  professors  and  students ;  travel  grants  to  leaders    1 
of  science,  education,  and  the  professions;  assist-    " 
ance  in  the  maintenance  of  libraries  and  the  trans- 
lation of  books;  encouragement  of  cultural  insti-    J 
tutes;  and  the  use  of  motion  pictures  and  radio.       ™ 

Under  our  program  23  professors  have  been 
exchanged  between  the  United  States  and  other 
republics  in  the  Western  Hemisphere.    Last  year, 


MAY    13,    1944 


431 


for  instance,  the  National  University  of  Mexico 
expressed  interest  in  receiving  from  the  United 
States  a  professor  who  could  teach  English  as  a 
foreign  language.  Dr.  Albert  Markwardt  of  the 
University  of  Michigan  was  given  this  assignment 
and  was  made  Director  of  the  English  Language 
Institute  in  Mexico  City,  which  specializes  in  the 
training  of  English  teachers  for  the  Mexican  pub- 
lic schools.  Similarly  the  Venezuelan  language 
specialist,  Mariano  Picon-Salas,  was  brought  to 
Columbia  University  to  teach  in  the  Romance  Lan- 
guage Department.  Thus  the  current  of  inter- 
change has  been  in  both  directions,  which  is  as 
it  should  be. 

Since  1940  the  Dejjartment  of  State  has  in  part 
supported  the  exchange  of  students  by  issuing 
travel  gi-ants  to  some  and  by  awai-ding  mainte- 
nance grants  each  year  to  a  carefully  selected  group 
of  graduate  students  from  the  other  nations  of  the 
liemisphere.  We  know  that  nearly  all  these  stu- 
dents have  had  a  successful  and  profitable  stay  in 
the  United  States,  for,  every  day,  letters  are  re- 
ceived in  the  Department  from  some  of  them  who 
have  either  returned  to  their  homeland  or  who  are 
still  on  our  campuses.  They  tell  us  what  they 
think  of  the  experience  of  living  in  the  United 
States.  Let  me  read  you  an  excerpt  from  one  of 
these  student  letters,  written  by  a  young  man  28 
years  old  who  has  studied  soil  science  at  a  univer- 
sity in  the  Middle  West.  He  is  both  critical  and 
fair.    He  writes : 

"The  university  life  in  the  United  States  differs 
.  .  .  very  much  from  the  university  life  of  the 
Latin  American  countries,  and  from  that  of  the 
university  life  of  my  own  country,  especially  in 
methods  of  education.  I  have  observed  here  that 
the  university  students  are  conducted  as  'kids' 
of  high  school.  In  other  words  tliey  do  not  have 
any  mental  independence  during  their  college 
years  .  .  . 

"In  other  respects  of  the  American  university 
life,  we  the  Latin  American  students  have  a  gi-eat 
lesson  to  learn,  and  I  want  to  point  it  out.  One 
of  them  is  the  higher  training  in  citizenship.  The 
other  lesson  that  we  need  to  learn  and  assimilate 
is  the  dignity  of  manual  labor  and  the  role  that  this 
thing  plays  in  the  humble  dignity  of  the  American 


students,  working  in  tasks  which  in  my  country 
would  be  considered  beneath  the  proud  dignity  of 
a  university  student." 

Nearly  all  the  students  assisted  by  the  Depart- 
ment are  graduate  students.  About  a  third  of 
them  are  studying  medicine  and  dentistry,  and 
most  of  the  others  are  in  the  various  sciences  or 
engineering. 

Another  kind  of  grant  is  offered  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  for  exchange  visits  in  the  Western 
Hemisphere  by  leaders  of  science,  education,  and 
the  professions.  You  have  doubtless  met  some 
of  these  prominent  visitoi-s.  They  have  come  from 
20  of  the  other  American  republics,  and  they  have 
included  scholars  and  university  presidents,  at 
least  50  journalists,  a  number  of  leaders  in  social 
welfare,  and  many  scientists  working  upon  health 
and  agricultural  problems. 

These  three  types  of  grants  are  of  particular  im- 
portance, since  they  enable  people  to  travel  and 
exchange  ideas  in  the  most  effective  possible  way, 
namely,  face  to  face. 

We  are  no  less  interested  in  centere  of  Ameri- 
can culture  abroad.  Not  long  ago  there  came  over 
my  desk  in  the  Department  of  State  the  annual  re- 
poi't  of  the  Benjamin  Franklin  Library  at  Mexico 
City.  This  library  was  set  up  on  a  modest  scale 
in  1942  with  funds  from  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment. It  now  has  8,000  volumes  concerning 
the  United  States,  of  which  over  1,000  were  donated 
by  private  citizens  during  the  past  year.  Nearly 
60,000  loans  of  books  were  made  in  1943.  In- 
terestingly enough,  about  half  the  readers  were 
Mexican  children  who  crowded  into  the  small 
reading-room  specially  reserved  for  them,  and 
overflowed  into  the  halls.  The  auditorium  in  the 
libraiy  is  used  for  weekly  motion  pictures  on  the 
United  States  and  for  lectures  by  visiting  Ameri- 
cans. English  classes,  also  given  in  the  building, 
showed  a  remarkable  growth  last  year.  Whereas 
in  January  there  were  150  students,  in  November 
there  were  650.  In  addition  to  these  libraries 
devoted  exclusively  to  the  United  States,  our  Gov- 
ernment has  aided  approximately  500  public  U- 
braries  in  Central  and  South  America  to  increase 
their  collections  of  books  in  English  about  the 
United  States. 


587463 — 44- 


432 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


We  have  concerned  ourselves  with  the  transla- 
tion of  books  from  English  into  Spanish  and  Por- 
tuguese, and  the  translation  of  books  from  those 
languages  into  English.  As  you  know,  our  book- 
stores in  the  United  States  have  seldom  carried 
titles  by  Latin  American  authors,  and  the  reverse 
is  also  true;  bookstores  in  Central  and  South 
America  prior  to  the  war  offered  for  sale  almost 
no  translations  of  books  from  the  United  States, 
whereas  European  books,  especially  those  from 
Spain,  France,  and  Germany,  were  to  be  found 
everywhere.  To  meet  this  need,  a  program  was 
inaugurated  in  1941  to  give  special  grants  to  pub- 
lishers, generally  sufficient  to  pay  the  cost  of  the 
translation  of  a  book;  the  publisher  then  took  care 
of  publication  and  distribution. 

The  cultural-cooperation  program  also  assists 
groups  of  private  citizens  who  are  interested  in 
developing  better  understanding  between  the 
United  States  and  the  other  American  republics. 
In  the  princij^al  cities  of  the  hemisphere  there  ai'e 
centers  which  are  commonly  known  as  cultural  in- 
stitutes. They  are  equipped  with  small  libraries 
of  American  books  and  periodicals.  Lectures  are 
arranged  and  motion  pictures  and  an  occasional  ex- 
hibition are  shown  at  these  institutes.  Nearly  all 
these  institutes  offer  classes  for  the  teaching  of 
English,  Spanish,  and  Portuguese.  You  will  un- 
derstand how  strong  and  independent  these  or- 
ganizations are  when  I  tell  you  that  they  raised  ap- 
proximately half  their  total  budgets  through  local 
donations  last  year.  Latest  reports  indicate  that 
the  institutes  now  have  enrolled  over  12,000  stu- 
dents of  English. 

Let  me  emphasize  the  fact  that  this  is  no  one-way 
project,  for  the  Coordinator  of  Inter-American 
Affairs  has  been  aiding  the  establishment  of  inter- 
American  centers  here  in  the  United  States  which 
carry  on  similar  activities,  including  the  promo- 
tion of  the  Spanish  and  Portuguese  languages. 

No  account  of  our  cultural-relations  program 
would  be  complete  without  mention  of  the  useful 
part  that  motion  pictures  and  radio  have  played. 
Educational  motion  pictures  are  presented  in 
schools,  hospitals,  and  army  training-camps;  and 
before  all  kinds  of  public  gatherings,  for  we  have 
ever  in  mind  that  our  program  is  essentially  a  dem- 
ocratic one — a  people  s  program.     I  recall  recent 


reports  of  exhibitions  in  city  department  stores 
and  in  village  squares,  and  the  pictures  themselves 
concern  agriculture,  public  health,  the  industries  of 
the  United  States,  our  geography,  our  sports,  and 
our  schools.  Recently  the  audiences  which  have 
seen  these  pictures  have  exceeded  3,000,000  pereons 
a  month. 

The  radio  has  also  been  useful  in  reaching  large 
masses  of  people.  A  single  radio  chain  in  Colom- 
bia, which  was  broadcasting  English  lessons  pre- 
pared by  a  local  Ajnerican  resident,  received  13,- 
000  requests  for  the  small  printed  textbook  which 
accompanied  the  radio  course. 

Many  of  the  activities  which  I  have  just  men- 
tioned owe  a  great  deal  to  the  collaboration  and 
assistance  of  other  agencies,  both  inside  and  outside 
the  Government,  and  notably,  of  course,  to  the  Co- 
ordinator of  Inter-American  Affairs  and,  in  the 
case  of  activities  carried  on  outside  of  the  Ameri- 
can republics,  to  the  Office  of  War  Information. 

We  ai'e  often  asked :  Is  our  cultural-relations 
program  successful  ?  Is  it  realistic  ?  Does  it  pay  ? 
Of  course,  it  is  not  a  perfect  program.  Notliing  in 
a  democracy  is  perfect.  Mistakes  have  been  made ; 
improvements  are  and  always  will  be  in  order; 
they  have  been  suggested  and  are  being  carried 
out ;  but  the  successes  have  been  tangible,  and  it  is  a 
fact  that  this  program  has  done  much  to  open  up 
an  uninterrupted  current  of  ideas  between  the 
peoples  of  the  Western  Hemisphere.  This  is  not  a 
Department  of  State  evaluation  alone  but  that  of 
independent  judges.  In  1941  five  members  of  the 
Appropriations  Committee  of  the  United  States 
House  of  Representatives  made  a  tour  of  the  hem- 
isphere and  investigated,  among  other  things,  the 
work  in  cultural  relations.  The  committee  mem- 
bers reported  that  the  program,  conducted  at  rela- 
tively modest  cost,  was  generally  effective  and 
productive  of  notable  results.  Their  report  con- 
tained suggestions  for  strengthening  the  program, 
including  greater  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of 
English,  and  a  stronger  program  for  the  transla- 
tion of  books.  During  the  past  two  years  marked 
progress  has  been  made  in  these  two  activities. 

I  would  like  to  cite  another  judgment  on  this 
program — that  of  the  other  governments  in  the      ; 
hemisphere.     Their  active  cooperation  with  the 
Department  of  State,  including  the  sharing  of  the 


MAY    13,    1944 


433 


financial  expense  of  many  projects,  has  been  most 
gratifying.  For  instance,  in  Nicaragua  the  Gov- 
ernment is  providing  free  of  charge  the  building 
and  utilities  for  the  United  States  Library;  in 
Brazil  the  Government  has  set  up  at  its  own  ex- 
pense six  professorships  in  United  States  language 
and  literature  in  its  national  universities;  and  in 
Peru  the  Government  appropriated  $50,000  last 
year  for  the  expense  of  F'eruvian  students  coming 
to  the  United  States  and  $10,000  for  United  States 
students  to  study  in  Peru. 

I  have  given  to  you  a  brief  account  of  some  of 
our  experience  to  date  in  conducting  a  program 
of  cultural  relations.  How  should  we  shape  our 
plans  for  the  future  ? 

We  seek  the  fundamental  goal  of  constructing 
after  the  war  a  more  stable  world  order,  both  with 
respect  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  and  to  the 
achievement  of  the  freedoms,  the  economic  ad- 
vancement, and  the  various  forms  of  security  de- 
manded by  the  peoples  of  all  nations. 

There  is  need  for  developing  a  greater  under- 
standing of  cultural  differences  and  a  greater  dis- 
cernment of  common  beliefs  and  values  beneath 
these  differences.  The  separation  of  nations  into 
violently  opposed  and  sternly  barricaded  ideologi- 
cal camps  is  a  disaster  of  the  first  magnitude.  It 
is  essential  too  that  we  make  a  concerted  effort 
toward  a  greater  understanding  and  a  greater 
consensus  among  the  peoples  of  the  world  in  the 
field  of  ideas  and  values  if  an  international  order 
in  any  degree  approximating  our  hopes  for  peace 
is  to  be  achieved. 

How  will  our  cultural-relations  program  be  ex- 
tended and  what  will  be  its  principal  activities? 

A  program  with  the  Axis-dominated  countries 
on  the  continent  of  Europe  must  be  considered 
in  the  light  of  conditions  after  those  countries 
are  liberated.  Looking  beyond  Europe,  long- 
range  programs  are  needed  in  the  Near  and  Mid- 
dle East,  where  a  better  understanding  with  the 
peoples  of  that  part  of  the  world  is  already  a  mat- 
ter of  first-rate  importance.  Already  we  have  re- 
ceived many  requests.  We  have  been  asked  by  the 
Afghan  Government  to  send  American  engineers 
to  replace  the  Japanese  engineers  in  Afghanistan ; 
the  Government  of  India  has  requested  an  hydrau- 


lic engineer;  China  has  requested  more  than  20 
technical  experts  of  various  kinds. 

We  are  assisting  Chinese  students  as  a  wartime 
measure.  Approximately  1,500  of  these  students 
were  studying  in  the  United  States  at  the  outbreak 
of  the  Pacific  war.  They  were  unable  to  return 
home  and  were  cut  off  from  their  usual  source  of 
funds,  and  about  350  have  received  financial  aid 
from  the  United  States  Government,  and  a  similar 
number  were  given  aid  by  the  Chinese  Govern- 
ment. ( 

Another  major  activity  which  the  Department 
foresees  is  the  world-wide  exchange  of  books  and 
periodicals  and  the  wider  use  of  public  libraries. 
Our  great  foundations  in  the  United  States  have 
already  made  a  beginning  in  this  work.  The 
Rockefeller  Foundation  has  given  $50,000  for  the 
stockpiling  of  United  States  technical  and  schol- 
arly journals  during  the  war  for  distribution  to 
foreign  libraries  after  the  war.  The  American 
Library  Association  is  calling  for  donations  of 
many  tyi^es  of  books  to  be  sent  to  libraries  in  dev- 
astated areas.  United  States  publishers  are  dis- 
cussing measures  to  reduce  the  export  price  of  their 
books  and  thus  make  them  more  accessible  to 
schools  and  libraries  abroad.  Some  United  States 
magazines  have  published  inexpensive  overseas 
editions.  The  Department  of  State  is  studying 
these  private  activities  and  proposes  to  lend  as- 
sistance in  some  regions  where  private  initiative 
is  unable  to  bear  the  full  burden. 

There  remains  one  important  and  far-reaching 
activity  to  which  I  shall  devote  the  remainder  of 
my  remarks.  That  is  the  problem  of  assisting 
Europe  and  Asia  to  rehabilitate  their  schools  and 
other  cultural  institutions.  That  problem  is  a 
challenge  to  our  Government  and  to  our  people — 
a  challenge  even  to  the  boys  and  girls  in  our 
schools  who  enjoy  advantages  which  are  denied 
to  many  children  in  Europe. 

We  have  recognized  that  there  are  three  distinct 
parts  to  this  problem:  (1)  emei'gency  aid  for  the 
liberated  countries;  (2)  educational  policies  to- 
ward the  Axis  countries;  and  (3)  a  permanent 
international  organization  for  education. 

We  have  now,  as  you  know,  taken  action  on  the 
first  of  these  problems,  relating  to  liberated  areas. 


434 

We  have  stated  our  jwlicy,  and  our  official  delega- 
tion to  London,  where  the  rebuilding  of  education 
in  the  liberated  countries  has  been  discussed,  has 
just  returned. 

The  press  has  recently  carried  many  reports  on 
the  destruction  of  educational  facilities  in  Europe. 
We  know  that  the  occupied  countries  in  western 
Europe— France,  Belgium,  Holland,  and  Nor- 
way— have  so  far  suffered  relatively  little  damage 
to  their  universities  and  schools,  but  that  many 
of  their  teachers  and  professors  have  died  in  con- 
centration camps.  In  eastern  Europe  on  the 
other  hand— in  Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  Yugo- 
slavia, and  Greece— the  Germans  have  destroyed 
virtually  all  intellectual  and  cultural  life.  Early 
in  the  war  Germany  gave  particular  attention  to 
the  elimination  of  scientists,  students,  and  teachers, 
and  nearly  all  the  equipment  of  libraries,  labora- 
tories, and  schools  has  been  destroyed.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Warsaw,  for  example,  formerly  con- 
tained thirty-one  scientific  institutes.  Fifteen 
were  completely  destroyed  by  the  Germans  and 
eight  others  have  been  stripped  of  all  equipment. 

At  the  University  of  Cracow,  largest  scientific 
center  in  Poland,  the  library  was  removed  by  the 
Germans,  and  170  professors  were  deported  to 
concentration  camps  where  many  have  since  died. 
It  is  unnecessary  to  burden  you  with  further  de- 
tails. Reports  from  all  parts  of  eastern  Europe 
indicate  the  almost  total  destruction  of  educa- 
tional facilities  and  the  disappearance  of  most 
leaders  of  education.  These  people,  where  lib- 
erated, will  need  help  in  order  to  help  themselves. 
They  must  have  equipment  and  training  for  their 
personnel  before  they  can  begin  to  restore  the 
process  of  civilized  living. 

In  our  recent  statement  of  policy  concerning 
the  educational  restoration  of  the  liberated  coun- 
tries we  have  recognized  that  each  nation  has  de- 
termined and  must  continue  to  determine  its  own 
educational  system.  Each  of  these  liberated  na- 
tions is  clearly  entitled  to  this  freedom  of  choice, 
and  in  that  connection  the  following  words  of  our 
policy  statement  deserve  emphasis: 

"It  would  be  unwise  for  this  Government  to  un- 
dertake to  apply,  much  less  impose,  a  foreign 
educational  program  or  system  in  any  liberated 
country,  or  to  develop  a  program  for  the  place- 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 

ment  of  American  teachers  in  the  schools  of  these 
countries,  or  for  the  preparation  of  textbooks  in 
the  United  States  for  use  in  such  schools." 

Tliese  are  activities  of  which  the  Department  of 
State  does  not  approve.  The  policy  statement 
recognized  the  usefulness  of  four  types  of  aid  to 
the  liberated  countries.    These  are : 

First,  assistance  in  restocking  books,  scientific 
equipment,  and  other  teaching  aids. 

Secondly,  assistance  in  providing  opportunities 
for  the  training  of  foreign  students  in  American 
institutions. 

Thirdly,  assistance  in  reestablishing  essential 
library  facilities. 

And  finally,  assistance  in  recovering  educa- 
tional and  other  cultural  materials  looted  by  the 
Axis. 

In  order  to  cooperate  with  the  other  United 
Nations  in  carrying  out  these  activities  the  De- 
partment sent  to  London  last  month  a  delegation 
of  six  Americans  under  the  leadership  of  Con- 
gressman J.  William  Fulbright  of  Arkansas  to 
collaborate  with  the  Conference  of  Allied  Minis- 
ters of  Education.  The  Conference  is  recom- 
mending to  the  participating  governments  a  plan 
for  a  temporary  international  organization  for 
education.  This  plan  is  now  under  consideration. 
At  the  approiJriate  time  the  problem  of  a  per- 
manent organization  will  be  considered  in  the 
light  of  experience  and  the  existing  circumstances. 

It  is  not  possible  at  present  to  make  any  precise 
statement  concerning  education  or  the  treatment 
of  education  in  the  Axis  countries,  and  particu- 
larly in  Germany.  These  are  questions  to  be  de- 
termined by  combined  agreement  on  the  part  of 
the  United  Nations.  They  are  questions  to  which 
we  are  devoting  much  careful  thought,  since  we 
are  fully  alive  to  their  momentous  importance  in 
terms  of  the  kind  of  world  in  which  our  children 
and  our  gi-andchildren  are  to  live.  This  much, 
however,  I  can  say :  We  believe  that,  while  force 
can  be  used  to  destroy  the  way  of  life  of  a  people, 
it  cannot  successfully  build  and  permanently  main- 
tain a  new  life.  Other  and  very  different  methods 
must  be  used — methods  which  are  the  very  antith- 
esis of  the  methods  practiced  by  our  enemies. 


MAY     13,     1944 


435 


And  now,  by  way  of  conclusion,  I  want  to  ask 
your  cooperation  in  carrying  on  tlie  important 
part  of  our  foreign  relations  which  I  have  tried  to 
describe.  We  do  not  think  of  our  cultural-rela- 
tions progi'am  as  any  exclusively  governmental 
activity.  Eather  do  we  think  of  that  program  as 
the  expression  of  the  best  thought  of  our  univer- 
sities, colleges,  and  educational  organizations,  and 
of  ourselves  in  the  Department  of  State  as  a  source 
of  information  for  the  guidance  of  that  expression 
and  as  a  focusing  and  coordinating  center  from 
which  it  may  proceed  with  a  maximum  of  effec- 
tiveness. 


American  Republics 


VISIT  OF  PERUVIAN  ARCHITECT 

Senor  Emilio  Harth-Terre,  distinguished  Peru- 
vian architect,  has  arrived  in  Washington  as  a 
guest  of  the  Department  of  State.  As  he  is  at  the 
present  time  engaged  with  plans  for  the  immediate 
rebuilding  of  the  National  Library  at  Lima,  which 
was  devastated  by  fire  in  1943,  he  plans  to  visit  the 
larger  libraries  of  this  country  and  to  observe  in 
detail  such  library  services  as  stacks,  elevators,  and 
air-conditioning. 

Senor  Harth-Terre  is  Professor  of  Fine  Arts  in 
the  School  of  Fine  Arts  at  Lima  and  is  a  founding 
member  of  the  National  Council  for  the  Preserva- 
tion and  Restoration  of  Historical  Monuments. 
In  the  latter  capacity  he  was  charged  with  the  now 
completed  reconstruction  of  the  Cathedral  of 
Lima.  He  has  also  reconstructed,  among  many 
other  important  works,  the  tower  of  the  Church 
of  Santo  Domingo,  which  fell  during  an  earth- 
quake ;  the  f  agade  of  the  Church  of  La  Merced,  de- 
stroyed in  the  Revolution;  and  the  Convent  of  St. 
Augustine  at  Sana. 

During  his  tour  of  this  country,  Senor  Harth- 
Terre  will  give  a  number  of  lectures  and  conduct 
several  round-tables  on  Peruvian  art  and  architec- 
ture. 


VISIT   OF   DIRECTOR   OF  MEXICAN   INSTI- 
TUTE OF  TROPICAL  MEDICINE 

Dr.  Jose  Zozaya,  Director  of  the  Institute  of 
Public  Health  and  Tropical  Diseases  of  Mexico, 
has  arrived  in  Washington  as  a  guest  of  the  De- 
partment of  State.  Dr.  Zozaya,  a  Harvard  grad- 
uate, is  also  chairman  of  the  Medical  and  Biologi- 
cal Sciences  section  of  the  ConmiSn  Impulsora  y 
Coordinadora  de  l-a  Investigacion  Cienti'ftca,  an 
organization  which  was  established  last  year  by 
President  Avila  Camacho  and  which  corresponds 
to  our  National  Research  Council. 

While  he  is  in  the  United  States  Dr.  Zozaya  will 
visit  public-health  centers  and  universities  in 
Washington,  Philadelphia,  New  York,  and  Chi- 
cago; will  spend  some  time  at  Harvard  and  the 
University  of  Michigan ;  and  will  extend  to  young 
physicians  who  wish  to  specialize  in  tropical  medi- 
cine and  to  established  specialists  in  that  field  in- 
vitations to  pursue  their  investigations  at  the  In- 
stitute of  Public  Health  and  Tropical  Diseases  of 
Mexico. 


VISIT  OF  HAITIAN  PHYSICIAN  AND 
ENGINEER 

[Released  to  the  press  May  11] 

Two  distinguished  Haitians,  Mr.  Felix  Bayard 
and  Dr.  Catts  Pressoir,  have  arrived  in  Washing- 
ton as  guests  of  the  Department  of  State.  Mr. 
Bayard  is  head  of  the  Government  Printing  Of- 
fice of  Haiti  and  editor  of  Le  Moniteur,  the  official 
gazette.  Dr.  Pressoir,  physician  and  educator,  is 
professor  of  psychology  in  the  Lycee  Petion  at 
Port-au-Prince. 

Mr.  Bayard  is  especially  interested  in  printing 
processes.  During  his  stay  in  Washington  he  will 
observe  the  work  of  the  Government  Printing  Of- 
fice. He  will  then  spend  several  weeks  visiting 
printing  establishments  in  New  York  and  Albany. 

Dr.  Pressoir,  during  his  visit  to  this  country, 
will  devote  especial  attention  to  university  meth- 
ods and  programs.  He  will  visit  medical  col- 
leges and  centers  of  learning  in  Washington, 
Philadelphia,  New  York,  Boston,  and  Chicago. 


The  Department 


SYSTEMATIZING  DEPARTMENTAL  ORDERS  AND  OTHER  ISSUANCES 
Departmental  Order  1269  of  May  3,  1944  ^ 


Purpose  and  authority.  The  purpose  of  the 
present  order,  issued  under  authority  contained  in 
R.  S.  161  (5  U.  S.  C.  22),  is  to  systematize  the  var- 
ious chisses  of  orders,  instructions,  and  notices  of 
the  Department  of  State,  exchisive  of  those  relat- 
ing solely  to  the  Foreign  Service,  in  the  following 
series : 

Departmental  Orders 
Departmental  Regulations 
Departmental  Designations 
Administrative  Instructions — 

General  Administration 

Personnel 

Budget  and  Fiscal 

Communications  and  Records 

Coordination  and  Review 

Operating  Facilities 

Security  Control 

Official  Travel 
Public  Notices 
Announcements  (unnumbered) 

The  content  of  each  of  the  foregoing  series  will  be 
as  indicated  herein. 

1  Departmental  Orders,  (a)  The  continued  se- 
ries of  Departmental  Orders  will  deal  with  the 
organization  of  the  Department,  the  definition  and 
assignment  of  functions  and  responsibilities  (in- 
cluding the  establishment  of  primary  units  down 
to  and  within  divisions),  relations  with  other 
agencies,  and  delegations  of  authority  by  position 
titles. 

(b)  Departmental  Orders  will  be  signed  by  the 
Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary. 

2  Departmental  Regulations,  (a)  This  new 
numbered  series  will  comprise  all  regulatory  mat- 

436 


ter  of  general  apj^licability  and  legal  effect,  that  is, 
rules  which  affect  the  public  and  are  issued  under 
statute  or  Executive  order.  Departmental  Regula- 
tions must  under  the  law  be  issued  in  the  codified 
form  and  style  of  the  Code  of  Federal  Regulations 
and  be  transmitted  immediately  upon  signature  to 
the  Division  of  the  Federal  Register,  National 
Archives,  for  filing  and  promulgation  in  the 
Register. 

(b)  Departmental  Regulations  will  be  signed 
by  the  Secretaiy  or  Acting  Secretary. 

3  Departmental  Designations,  (a)  This  new 
numbered  series  will  comprise  designations  of  in- 
dividuals by  name  to  principal  positions  within 
the  Department,  including  assistant  chiefs  of  di- 
visions and  officers  of  comparable  responsibility, 
and  also  necessary  delegations  to  individuals  by 
name  of  obligating,  certifying,  approving,  and  like 
types  of  authority. 

(b)  Departmental  Designations  will  be  signed 
by  the  Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary,  or  the  As- 
sistant Secretary  in  charge  of  administration. 

4  Administrative  Insfruction.s.  This  new  mul- 
tiple series  will  be  the  medium  by  which  the  poli- 
cies and  organization  set  forth  basically  in  De- 
partmental Orders  will  be  implemented  in  detail. 
The  series  will  be  subdivided  into  several  separate- 
ly numbered  categories :  General  Administration ; 
Personnel;  Budget  and  Fiscal;  Communications 
and  Records;  Coordination  and  Review;  Operat- 
ing Facilities;  Security  Control;  and  Official 
Travel. 

5  Administrative  Instructions — General  Ad- 
ministration, (a)  This  new  numbered  series  will 
comprise   detailed    instructions   on    subjects   not 


'  EfEective  May  3,  1944. 


MAY    13,    1944 


437 


primarily  related  to  those  specially  dealt  with  in 
the  following  categories  of  Administrative  In- 
structions. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Ad- 
ministrative Management  and  approved  by  the 
Director  of  the  Office  of  Departmental  Adminis- 
tration. 

6  Administrative  Instructions — Personnel,  (a) 
This  new  numbered  sei'ies  will  comprise  the  de- 
tailed instructions  on  various  aspects  of  personnel 
administration. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of  De- 
partmental Personnel  and  approved  by  the  Direc- 
tor of  the  Office  of  Departmental  Administration. 

7  Administrative  Instructions — B ud g  et  and 
Fiscal,  (a)  This  new  numbered  series  will  com- 
prise detailed  instructions  on  various  aspects  of 
budgetary  and  fiscal  administration. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Bud- 
get and  Finance  and  approved  by  the  Director  of 
tlie  Office  of  Departmental  Administration. 

8  Administrative  Insfruct/om — Communica- 
tions and  Records,  (a)  This  new  numbered 
series  will  comprise  detailed  instructions  on  the 
handhng  of  telegraphic  and  other  communications 
and  on  the  custody  and  disposition  of  records. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of 
Communications  and  Records  and  approved  by  the 
Director  of  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration. 

9  Administrative  Instructions — Coordination 
and  Review,  (a)  This  new  numbered  series  will 
comprise  detailed  instructions  on  the  preparation, 
coordination,  and  signature  of  the  Department's 
correspondence. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Co- 
ordination and  Review  and  approved  by  the  Direc- 
tor of  the  Office  of  Departmental  Administration. 

10  Administrative  Instructions — 0 perating 
Facilities,  (a)  This  new  numbered  series  will 
comprise  detailed  instructions  on  supplies,  equip- 


ment, space,  messenger  service,  duplicating  service, 
and  other  operating  facilities  of  the  Department, 
(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division 
of  Administrative  Management  and  approved 
by  the  Director  of  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration. 

11  Ad7ninhtrative  Instructions — Security  Con- 
trol, (a)  This  new  numbered  series  will  comprise 
detailed  instructions  to  insure  the  security  of  in- 
formation, transactions,  and  documents  of  concern 
to  the  Department. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Assistant  Secretary  in  charge 
of  administration  as  Security  Officer  of  the  De- 
partment or,  in  his  absence,  by  the  Director  of  the 
Office  of  Departmental  Administration. 

12  Administrative  Instructions — Offi.cial  Travel. 
(a)  This  new  numbered  series  will  comprise  de- 
tailed instructions  issued  in  accordance  with 
statutes  and  regulations  governing  official  travel, 
notification  of  changes  made  in  the  Standardized 
Government  Travel  Regulations,  and  other  per- 
tinent matters. 

(b)  This  series  of  Administrative  Instructions 
will  be  signed  by  the  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Bud- 
get and  Finance  and  approved  by  the  Director 
of  the  Office  of  Departmental  Administration. 

13  Puhlic  Notices,  (a)  This  new  numbered 
series  will  comprise  items  of  information  which 
are  of  public  interest  and  of  sufficient  legal  import 
to  I'equire  publication  in  the  Federal  Register  but 
which,  being  non-regulatory  in  nature,  are  not 
properly  included  in  the  Code  of  Federal  Regu- 
lations; for  example,  notices  of  public  hearings 
on  trade  agreements. 

(b)  Departmental  Public  Notices  will  be  signed 
by  the  Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary. 

14  Ajinouncements.  (a)  In  addition  to  the  fore- 
going regular  numbered  series,  this  new  unnum- 
bered category  will  be  the  vehicle  for  informative 
items  of  timely  interest  within  the  Department, 
such  as  patriotic  or  charitable  appeals  or  general 
notices  to  the  personnel. 

(b)  Announcements  will  be  signed  by  the  ap- 
propriate responsible  officers  of  the  Department. 


438 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


15  Control,clearance,  and  distribution,  (a)  All 
of  the  foregoing  classes  of  material  shall  be  cleared 
with  the  Office  of  Departmental  Administration, 
which  shall  be  responsible  for:  (1)  decision  re- 
garding appropriate  treatment  in  one  of  the  De- 
partmental series;  (2)  analysis  of  the  proposal 
from  the  standpoint  of  organization,  functions, 
and  over-all  administrative  considerations,  in- 
cluding its  effect  throughout  the  Department; 
(3)  matters  of  form  and  style;  (4)  clearance  of 
the  draft  through  other  offices,  including  consul- 
tation with  the  Office  of  the  Legal  Adviser  and, 
where  necessary,  the  Division  of  Research  and 
Publication;  and  (5)  processing  and  distribution 
of  the  document. 

(b)  Any  office  or  division  which  desires  to  ini- 
tiate a  document  in  any  of  the  foregoing  series  is 
requested  to  consult  with  the  appropriate  staff  of 
the  Office  of  Departmental  Administration  in 
planning  and  developing  the  draft. 

16  Standards  of  style,  (a)  As  a  convenience  to 
drafting  officers,  standards  of  style  and  arrange- 
ment for  Departmental  Orders,  Departmental 
Designations,  and  Administrative  Instructions 
are  given  in  annex  A  of  the  present  order. 

(b)  Standards  of  style  and  procedure  for  De- 
partmental Regulations  and  Public  Notices,  and 
also  for  Executive  orders  and  proclamations,  are 
given  in  annex  B  of  the  present  order.  The  re- 
quirements set  forth  herein  and  elaborated  in 
annex  B  to  this  order  supersede  those  set  forth  in 
Departmental  Orders  663  of  January  19, 1937,  790 
of  March  30,  1939,  and  820  of  October  5,  1939, 
which  are  hereby  repealed. 

(c)  In  general  the  standards  of  style  for  the 
unnumbered  Announcement  series  should  accord 
with  the  Style  Manual  of  the  Department  of 
State;  the  form  of  this  series  must  necessarily  be 
adapted  to  the  variable  nature  of  the  context,  and 
standards  therefor  cannot  be  established. 

17  Maintenance  of  series  files  in  the  several  Of- 
fices a/nd  divisions.  All  Offices  and  divisions  shall 
maintain  a  permanent  file  of  all  issues  in  the  sev- 
eral series  prescribed  in  this  order.  It  is  recom- 
mended that  the  documents  be  kept  serially  by 
classes,  thus  making  them  available  for  frequent 
reference  and  for  use  in  orienting  new  personnel. 


18  Issiiance  of  intra-Office  and  intra-divisioiiol 
instructions.  In  addition  to  the  documents  dealt 
with  in  this  order,  it  is  assumed  that  each  Director 
of  Office  and  Chief  of  Division  will  issue  instruc- 
tions on  the  internal  affairs  of  the  Office  or  divi- 
sion. The  appropriate  staff  of  the  Office  of  De- 
partmental Administration  is  available  for  con- 
sultation in  the  drafting  of  such  instructions.  In 
most  cases  the  Office  of  Departmental  Administra- 
tion should  be  consulted  in  advance,  in  order  to 
decide  whether  the  subject  requires  treatment  at 
the  Department  level.  It  is  suggested  that  intra- 
Office  and  intra-di visional  instructions  be  issued 
in  appropriately  numbered  series  and  that  copies 
tliereof  be  filed  with  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration  for  purposes  of  information. 

19  Effective  date  of  documents  in  the  series. 
Unless  otherwise  specifically  indicated  therein  the 
effective  date  of  any  order,  designation,  or  in- 
struction will  be  the  date  of  its  signature  and  the 
effective  date  of  any  regulation  will  be  the  date 
of  filing  in  the  Division  of  the  Federal  Register, 
National  Archives. 

CORDELL  HtJIiL 

Mat  3,  1944. 

Annex  A  to  Departmental  Order  1269 

Standards  of  style  an*d  arrangement  for  depart- 
mental ORDERS,  departmental  DESIGNATIONS, 
and  administrative  INSTRUCTIONS 

The  following  paragraphs  on  standards  of 
style  and  arrangement  are  to  govern  in  the  prep- 
aration of  Departmental  Orders,  Departmental 
Designations,  and  Administrative  Instructions. 

1  Serial  numbering 

2  General  style 

3  Subject-matter 

4  Headings  and  paragraphs 

5  Preamble  to  orders 

6  References  to  officials  by  title 

7  Preliminary  draft 

8  Final  draft  for  signature 

9  Signature  and  date  line 
10  Dates  of  issue  and  effect 


MAY    13,    1944 


439 


11  Supplemented,    amended,    or    superseded 

documents 

12  Cross-reference  citations 

13  Accompaniments 

14  Amendment  of  the  standards 

15  Repository  for  the  signed  originals  and 

first  carbons 

16  Ijidexes 

1  Serial  numhering.  (a)  Each  of  the  new 
series  or  subseries  is  to  be  numbered  consecutively, 
beginning  with  arable  1;  the  Departmental 
Orders  will  continue  the  present  serial  number- 
ing. The  serial  number  is  to  be  inserted  in  the 
banner  heading  immediately  after  signature. 

(b)  Administrative  Instructions  will  bear  only 
one  number,  that  of  the  subseries,  which  is  to  be 
assigned  in  accordance  with  paragraph  (a) 
above.  For  example :  Administrative  Instruc- 
tions— General  Administration  1,  2,  etc. ;  Admin- 
strative  Instructions — Budget  and  Fiscal  1,  2, 
etc. 

(c)  Citations  to  the  numbered  series  are  to  be 
given  in  the  following  abbreviated  form : 

Departmental  Orders:  DO 
Departmental  Regulations :  DE 
Departmental  Designations :  DD 
Administrative  Instructions — 

General  Administration:  AI-GA 

Personnel :  AI-P 

Budget  and  Fiscal:  AI-BF 

Communications  and  Records:  AI-DCR 
'     Coordination  and  Review :  AI-CR 

Operating  Facilities:  AI-OF 

Security  Control :  AI-SC 

Official  Travel :  AI-OT 

2  General  style.  In  general  the  style  of  these 
series  is  to  be  governed  by  the  Style  Manual  of 
the  Department  of  State.  Any  deviation  there- 
from must  be  approved  by  the  Office  of  Depart- 
mental Administration. 

3  Subject-maiter.  Each  document  is  to  be  lim- 
ited to  one  subject,  which  is  to  appear  as  an  all- 
capital  centered  heading  immediately  following 
the  banner  heading. 


4  Headings  and  paragraphs.  The  following 
style  relating  to  headings  and  paragraphs  applies 
to  all  documents  issued  in  these  series : 

(a)  All  headings  are  to  be  topical  and  as  short 
as  possible. 

(b)  Paragraphs  are  to  be  numbered  consecu- 
tively throughout,  beginning  with  arable  1,  fol- 
lowed by  one  space  but  no  period;  they  are  also 
to  carry  underscored  paragraph  headings,  with 
only  proper  names  capitalized. 

(c)  Subparagraphs  to  a  numbered  paragraph 
are  to  be  lettered  consecutively  in  parentheses,  be- 
ginning each  time  with  ( a ) .  Lettered  paragraphs 
are  not  to  carry  paragraph  headings. 

5  Preamble  to  orders.  The  text  of  every  order 
is  to  begin  with  a  preamble  giving  the  purpose  of 
and  authority  for  its  issue;  if  deemed  advisable, 
it  may  also  give  the  background  necessary  for  a 
clear  understanding  thereof. 

6  References  to  officials  hy  title.  References  to 
officials,  wherever  possible,  are  to  be  by  title  only. 
However,  in  the  case  of  an  Assistant  Secretary  of 
State  or  a  Special  Assistant  to  the  Secretary,  it 
may  sometimes  be  necessary  to  use  the  personal 
name  as  well  as  the  title. 

7  Preliminary  draft.  A  preliminary  draft 
should  be  prepared  for  submission  to  all  interested 
offices  for  approval  and  initialing.  Such  draft 
should  be  initialed  by  the  originating  office,  which 
must  assume  final  responsibility  therefor  other 
than  that  attaching  to  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration  under  paragraph  14  of  Depart- 
mental Order  1269. 

8  Final  draft  for  signature.  The  final  draft 
for  signature  is  to  be  prepared  as  follows : 

(a)  Special,  colored,  letter-size  sheets  with  ban- 
ner headings  have  been  provided  for  the  series 
and  are  to  be  used  for  the  first  page  of  the  final 
draft.  Blank  sheets  of  a  corresponding  color  are 
to  be  used  for  all  following  pages. 

(b)  The  first  carbon  (first  page  excepted)  is  to 
be  on  the  regular  blue  sheets  customarily  used  for 
filing  in  the  Division  of  Communications  and  Rec- 
ords ;  other  carbons,  as  needed  are  to  be  on  flimsy 
paper. 


587463 — 44- 


440 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


(c)  The  first  page  of  all  carbon  copies  of  all 
documents  is  to  match  the  first  page  of  the  original 
with  regard  to  color  of  paper  and  banner  heading. 

(d)  The  symbols  of  the  originating  or  respon- 
sible offices  are  to  be  placed  only  on  the  carbon 
copies,  blue  carbons  included;  the  initials  of  the 
originating  or  responsible  officers  are  to  be  placed 
only  on  the  blue  carbons. 

(e)  The  initials  of  responsible  and  approving 
officers  are  to  be  inserted  prior  to  signature. 

9  Signature  and  date  line,  (a)  Sufficient  space 
is  always  to  be  left  for  the  signature.  The  title 
of  the  Secretary  is  not  to  appear  under  the  signa- 
ture of  a  document  in  any  of  these  three  series; 
the  title  of  all  other  signing  officers  is  to  be  typed 
in,  immediately  beneath  the  space  left  for  sig- 
nature. 

(b)  The  original  only  is  to  be  signed. 

(c)  The  date  is  to  be  placed  on  the  original  and 
first  carbon  at  the  end  of  the  document,  on  the 
line  immediately  following  the  signature,  indented 
five  spaces  from  the  left-hand  margin. 

10  Dates  of  issue  and  effect.  The  date  of  issue 
is  the  date  of  signature  and  is  to  be  entered  with  the 
date  of  effect  in  the  banner  heading  prior  to  proc- 
essing for  distribution.  The  date  of  effect  is  de- 
termined by  circumstances;  if  not  otherwise  spe- 
cifically indicated  in  the  document,  it  is  to  be  the 
date  of  its  signature. 

11  Supplemented,  amended,  or  superseded  docu- 
ments. Statements  with  regard  to  supplemented, 
amended,  or  superseded  documents  in  these  series 
are  to  be  definite,  with  accurate  citations  to  the 
serial  numbers  and  dates  of  the  documents  affected. 

12  Cross-reference  citations.  Cross-reference 
citations,  where  necessary,  are  to  be  given  at  the 
end  of  the  document,  immediately  preceding  the 
signature. 

13  Accompaniments,  (a)  All  accompaniments 
are  to  bear  appropriate  references  to  the  docu- 
ments they  accompany. 

(b)  Accompanying  forms,  graphs,  and  tables 
are  to  bear  appropriate  designations  or  numbers, 
and  month-and-year  date;  references  to  them 
should  always  be  made  in  the  appropriate  places 
in  the  text  of  the  document  they  accompany. 

(c)  Accompaniments  to  a  document  are  to  be 
listed  at  the  end  of  the  document  they  accompany. 


14  Amendment  of  the  standards.  These  stand- 
ards of  style  and  arrangement  may  be  amended, 
supplemented,  or  abrogated  only  as  deemed  neces- 
sary and  approved  by  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration. 

15  Repository  for  the  signed  originals  and  first 
carbons.  The  Office  of  Departmental  Administra- 
tion is  to  be  the  repository  for  the  signed  originals 
of  the  above  classes  of  documents  and  also  for  the 
originals  of  all  notices;  the  Division  of  Communi- 
cations and  Records  is  to  be  the  repository  for  the 
first  carbons  thereof. 

16  Indexes.  Indexes  to  the  above  classes  of 
documents  will  be  issued  periodically  by  the  Office 
of  Departmental  Administration. 

Annex  B  to  Departmental  Order  1269 

standards  of  style  and  procedure  for  depart- 
mental regulations  and  public  notices 

Since  under  the  law  (44  U.S.C.  305(a);  1 
CFR  2.2)  the  Departmental  Regulations  and  Pub- 
lic Notices  must  be  filed  with  the  Division  of  the 
Federal  Register,  National  Archives,  immediately 
upon  signature  in  order  to  be  legally  effective  as  of 
the  date  of  issue  and  to  be  promulgated  in  the 
Register  as  soon  thereafter  as  possible,  and  since 
under  the  law  (1  CFR,  1943  Cum.  Supp.,  pt.  2),  the 
Departmental  Regulations  must  be  issued  in  the 
form  and  style  of  the  Code  of  Federal  Regulations, 
the  preparation  of  both  of  these  series  must  differ 
in  certain  respects  from  that  of  all  other  seties. 
The  following  standards  of  style  and  procedure 
are  to  govern  in  the  preparation  of  Departmental 
Regulations  and  Public  Notices. 

1  Two  editions  of  each  series 

2  Serial  numbering 

3  Codification    of    the    Departmental 

Regulations 

4  Subject-matter  and  headings 

5  Arrangement   of   the   Departmental 

Regulations 

6  Arrangement  of  the  Public  Notices 

7  General  Style 

8  Preamble 

9  Headings 

10  References  to  officials  by  title 


MAY    13,    1944 


441 


11  Preliminary  drafts 

12  Final  drafts  for  signature 

13  Signature  and  date  line 

14  Dates  of  issue  and  effect 

15  Supplemented,    amended,    or    superseded 

regulations 

16  Cross-reference  citations 

17  Accompaniments 

18  Amendment  of  the  standards 

19  Repository  for  the  signed  originals  and 

first  carbons 

20  Filing  of  the  regulations  and  notices  with 

the  Division  of  the  Federal  Register 

21  Executive  Oi'ders  and  Proclamations 

Attachment :  Sample  of  CFR  codification 

1  Two  editions  of  each  series,  (a)  The  Depart- 
mental Regulations  and  Public  Notices  will  each 
necessarily  be  issued  in  two  editions,  a  regular  De- 
paitmental  edition  and  a  special  edition  for  the 
Federal  Register.  The  Departmental  edition  will 
be  the  official  source  of  the  Register  edition. 

(b)  The  two  editions  will  be  textually  identical ; 
differences  in  arrangement  and  procedure  are  in- 
dicated hereinafter. 

2  Serial  numbering,  (a)  Each  series  will  be 
numbered  consecutively,  beginning  with  arabic  1. 

(b)  In  the  Departmental  edition  the  serial  num- 
ber will  be  inserted  in  the  banner  heading;  in  the 
Register  edition  it  will  be  inserted  in  brackets  im- 
mediately preceding  the  preamble.  In  each  edi- 
tion the  insertion  should  be  made  immediately 
after  signature. 

3  C odifieation  of  the  Departmental  Regulations. 
The  Departmental  Regulations  are  to  be  codified 
for  inclusion  in  title  22  of  the  Code  of  Federal  Reg- 
ulations, under  the  appropriate  part  heading  of  the 
Code  sample  attached  hereto)  ;  if  the  subject  is 
not  already  covered  in  the  Code,  a  new  part  head- 
ing must  be  assigned. 

4  Subject-matter  and  headings.  Each  document 
is  to  be  limited  to  a  single  subject,  which  will  be 
indicated  by  the  part  heading  in  the  Departmental 
Regulations  and  by  the  main  heading  in  a  Public 
Notice. 

5  Arrangement  of  the  Departmental  Regula- 
tions, (a)  The  Departmental  Regulations  are  to 
be  arranged  in  arabic-numbered  parts,  arabic-num- 


bered  sections,  and  lettered  paragraphs  (lower- 
case letters  in  parentheses) ;  subparagraphs  (pref- 
erably indented)  are  to  be  arabic-numbered  in 
parentheses. 

(b)  The  section  number  is  to  include  the  part 
number  and  to  be  preceded  by  the  section  symbol ; 
for  example,  section  1  of  part  1  would  have  "§1.1" 
as  its  section  number. 

(c)  The  sections  are  also  to  carry  underscored 
section  headings. 

(d)  The  paragraphs  and  subparagraphs  are  not 
to  carry  headings  of  any  kind. 

6  Arrangement  of  the  Public  Notices.  Other 
than  as  indicated  in  paragraph  4  above,  the  ar- 
rangement of  the  Public  Notices  is  to  be  governed 
by  the  context;  however,  for  simplicity  in  refer- 
ence it  is  desirable  that  the  paragraphs  be  numbered 
consecutively  in  arabic  numerals  and  be  given  an 
underscored  paragraph  heading. 

7  General  style.  Except  as  otherwise  indicated 
herein  or  in  the  Federal  Register  Regulations  as 
modified  by  the  Archives,  the  general  style  of  the 
Departmental  Regulations  and  Public  Notices  is 
to  be  governed  by  the  Style  Manual  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State.  Any  deviation  therefrom  must  be 
approved  by  the  Office  of  Departmental  Adminis- 
tration. 

8  Preamble.  The  text  of  every  Departmental 
Regulation  and  Public  Notice  is  to  begin  with  a 
preamble  stating  the  purpose  of  and  authority 
for  its  issue. 

9  Headings.  All  headings  are  to  be  topical  and 
as  short  as  possible. 

10  References  to  officials  by  title.  References 
to  officials  are  to  be  by  title  only. 

11  Preliminary  drafts,  (a)  The  preliminary 
drafts  are  to  be  prepared  in  the  same  way  as  those 
of  all  the  other  series.  See  DO  1269,  annex  A, 
par.  7. 

(b)  Each  such  draft  Regulation  and  Public 
Notice  is  to  be  submitted  to  the  Division  of  Re- 
search and  Publication  for  codification,  editing, 
or  apj^roval. 

12  Final  drafts  for  signature.  The  final  drafts 
for  signature  are  to  be  prepared  as  follows : 

(a)  The  Departmental  edition  of  both  the  Reg- 
ulations and  the  Public  Notices  is  to  be  prepared  in 
the  same  way  as  all  the  other  series.  See  DO  1269, 
annex  A,  pars.  8(a)-8(e). 


442 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULIiETTN 


(b)  The  Register  edition  of  both  the  Regula- 
tions and  the  Public  Notices  is  to  be  typed  on 
legal-size  sheets,  the  original  on  plain  white  paper, 
the  first  carbon  on  the  usual  blue  paper,  and  seven 
additional  carbons  on  white  flimsy  paper. 
Neither  the  original  nor  any  copy  of  this  edition 
is  to  bear  oiBce  symbols  or  the  initials  of  approving 
officers. 

13  Signature  and  date  line,  (a)  Sufficient 
space  is  always  to  be  left  for  the  signature.  The 
title  of  the  Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary  is  to  be 
typed  in,  immediately  beneath  the  space  left  for 
signature. 

(b)  The  original  of  each  edition  is  to  be  signed. 

(c)  The  date  is  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
document  on  the  line  immediately  following  the 
signature,  indented  five  spaces  from  the  left-hand 
margin. 

14  Dates  of  issue  and  effect.  The  date  of  issue 
is  the  date  of  signature.  The  date  of  effect  is  the 
date  of  filing  in  the  Division  of  the  Federal  Reg- 
ister, or  a  date  subsequent  thereto  if  specifically 
so  indicated  in  the  document.  Both  dates  are  to 
be  inserted  in  the  banner  heading  of  the  Depart- 
mental edition  prior  to  processing  for  distribu- 
tion. 

15  Supplemented,  amended,  or  superseded  reg- 
ulations. Statements  with  regard  to  supple- 
mented, amended,  or  superseded  regulations  are 
to  be  definite,  with  specific  reference  to  the  affected 
title  and  section  of  the  Code  of  Federal  Regula- 
tions. A  footnote  giving  the  number  of  the  cor- 
responding Departmental  Regulation  series  is  to 
be  inserted  in  the  Departmental  edition. 

16  Cross-reference  citations.  Cross-reference 
citations,  where  necessary,  are  to  be  given  at  the 
end  of  the  document,  immediately  preceding  the 
signature. 

17  Accompaniments.  Tlie  procedure  with  re- 
gard to  the  accompaniments  of  documents  is  to 
accord  with  that  for  all  the  other  series.  See  DO 
1269,  amiex  A,  par.  13. 

18  Amendment  of  the  standards.  Tliese  stand- 
ards of  style  and  procedure  may  be  altered  by 
revision  of  the  regulations  of  the  National 
Archives,  so  far  as  those  regulations  are  appli- 
cable ;  otherwise  only  upon  approval  of  the  Office 
of  Departmental  Administration. 


19  Repository  for  the  signed  originals  and  first 
carhon-s.  (a)  The  Office  of  Departmental  Ad- 
ministration is  to  be  the  repository  for  the  signed 
originals  of  the  Departmental  edition  of  both 
issuances;  the  Division  of  Communications  and 
Records  is  to  be  the  repository  of  the  first  carbons 
thereof. 

(b)  The  National  Archives  will  be  the  reposi- 
tory for  the  signed  originals  of  the  Register  edi- 
tion of  both  issuances :  the  Office  of  Departmental 
Administration,  the  Division  of  Communications 
and  Records,  and  the  Division  of  Research  and 
Publications  will  each  be  the  repository  for  one 
carbon  thereof. 

20  Filing  of  the  regulations  and  notices  with 
the  Division  of  the  Federal  Register,  (a)  Four 
copies  of  the  regulations  and  notices  (the  original 
bearing  the  Department  seal  and  three  certified 
copies  thereof)  are  to  be  transmitted  to  the  Direc- 
tor of  the  Division  of  the  Federal  Register, 
National  Archives,  at  the  earliest  possible  moment 
after  signature.  The  Office  of  Departmental  Ad- 
ministration will  assume  responsibility  for  the 
affixation  of  seal,  the  certification,  and  the  prompt 
delivery  of  the  documents  to  the  National 
Arcliives. 

(b)  After  the  Register  edition  has  been  duly 
recorded  in  the  National  Archives,  the  dates  of 
issue  and  effect  may  be  inserted  in  the  banner 
lieading  of  the  Departmental  edition  and  that 
edition  processed  for  distribution  in  the  Depart- 
ment. 

21  Executive  Orders  and  Proclamations,  (a) 
The  preparation  of  Executive  Orders  and  Procla- 
mations is  specifically  governed  by  Executive 
Order  7298  of  February  18,  1936,  the  pertinent 
provisions  of  which  are  incorporated  in  the  Fed- 
eral Register  Regulations  (1  CFR  2.6).  Tlie 
drafting  of  and  procedures  for  such  orders  and 
proclamations  will  therefore^conform  with  those 
regulations. 

(b)  At  least  seven  carbon  copies  (one  blue  and 
six  flimsies)  are  to  be  made  of  every  Executive 
Order  and  Proclamation  prepared  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  the  original  and  six  carbons  being 
required  for  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget. 

(c)  The  proclamations  prepared  by  all  Gov- 
ernment departments  and  agencies,  after  signa- 


I 


MAY    13,    1944 


443 


ture  by  the  President,  are  sent  to  the  Department 
of  State  for  signature  by  the  Secretary,  affixation 
of  the  Great  Seal,  and  immediate  transmission  of 
the  original  and  two  carbon  copies  to  the  Division 
of  the  Federal  Register,  National  Archives,  for 
filing  and  promulgation.  The  Office  of  Depart- 
mental Administration  will  continue  to  have  re- 
sponsibility for  the  proper  performance  of  these 
functions. 

(d)  Nothing  in  this  paragraph  21  shall  be  con- 
strued to  apply  to  proclamations  regarding 
treaties,  conventions,  protocols,  and  other  inter- 
national agreements. 

[Sample  of  CFR  Codification] 
CODE   OF  FEDERAL  REGULATIONS 


TITLE  22— FOREIGN  RELATIONS 

Chapter  I — Department  of  State 

Part   S — Certificates    of   Authentication 

[Departmental  Order  1218-A] 

Under  the  authority  contained  in  R.  S.  161  (3  U.S.C. 
22) ,  §  8.1  of  title  22  of  the  Code  of  Federal  Regulations, 
issued  on  May  24,  1&43  (8  F.R.  6918),  is  hereby  amended 
to  read  as  follows  : 

§  8.1  Officers  authorized  to  sign  and  issue  certificates  of 
authentication.  The  Chief  or  Acting  Chief,  Division  of 
Administrative  Management,  is  hereby  authorized  to  sign 
and  issue  certificates  of  authentication  under  the  Seal  of 
the  Department  of  State  for  and  in  the  name  of  the  Sec- 
retary of  State  or  Acting  Secretary  of  State.  The  form 
of   authentication    shall    be    as   follows :    "In    testimony 

whereof,  I, ,  Secretary  of  State  (or 

Acting  Secretary  of  State),  have  hereunto  caused  the  Seal 
of  the  Department  of  State  to  be  affixed  and  my  name 
subscribed  by  the  Chief  (or  Acting  Chief),  Division  of 
Administrative  Management,  of  the  said  Department,  at 
the  city  of  Washington,  in  the  District  of  Columbia,  this 

day  of ,  19 , 

Secretary  of  State.    By ,  Chief   (or 

Acting  Chief),  Division  of  Administrative  Management." 
(R.S.  161;  5  U.S.C.  22) 

The  title  of  this  part  is  hereby  changed  to  read  "Part 
8 — Certificates  of  Authentication". 

This  amendment  is  effective  ijnmediately. 

CoRUELL  Hull 
Secretary  of  I'^tnte 

February  8,  1944 


ESTABLISHMENT  OF  DIVISION  OF  AMERI- 
CAN REPUBLICS  ANALYSIS  AND  LIAISON 

Departmental  Order  1271  of  May  3,  1944  ^ 

1  Establishment  of  the  division.  There  is 
hereby  established  a  Division  of  American  Ke- 
publics  Analysis  and  Liaison  in  the  Office  of  Amer- 
ican Republic  Affairs.  The  Division  of  American 
Republics  Analysis  and  Liaison  shall  be  respon- 
sible for:  (a)  analysis  of  data  and  preparation  of 
special  studies  and  reports  on  developments  within 
and  among  the  Latin- American  countries;  (b) 
liaison  with  other  offices  of  the  Department  and 
with  other  agencies  of  the  Government  on  matters 
of  general  policy  in  the  inter- American  field  which 
are  outside  the  scope  of  the  geographic  divisions 
of  the  Office;  and  (c)  formulation  of  policy  to  be 
adopted  by  the  Office  of  American  Republic  Af- 
fairs concerning  inter-American  organizations, 
conferences,  and  conventions. 

2  Organization  of  the  division.  The  Division 
of  American  Reijublics  Analysis  and  Liaison  shall 
consist  of  three  sections :  Analysis  Section ;  Liai- 
son Section ;  and  Inter-American  Section. 

3  Analysis  Section,  (a)  The  Analysis  Section 
is  responsible  for  the  collection  and  analysis  of 
data  from  all  sources,  including  regular  Depart- 
mental despatches  and  memoranda,  reports  of 
other  Federal  agencies,  and  published  documents 
bearing  on  the  work  of  the  Office  of  American  Re- 
public Affairs;  the  conduct  of  special  studies  on 
current  conditions,  trends  and  policy  questions  of 
interest  to  the  divisions  of  the  Office  of  American 
Rejjublic  Affairs;  tlie  assembling  and  digesting 
of  research  materials  on  background  and  policy 
developments  of  interest  to  officers  of  the  Office,  the 
missions,  and  selected  officers  of  the  Department; 
cooperation  with  other  divisions  of  the  Department 
on  research  relating  to  the  other  American  Re- 
publics, particularly  the  divisions  of  the  Office  of 
Special  Political  Affairs  and  the  Office  of  Eco- 
nomic Affairs;  cooperation  with  the  research  staff 
of  other  Government  agencies  engaged  in  research 
on  Latin-American  problems;  contact,  when  ap- 
propriate, with  the  Division  of  Research  and  Pub- 
lication ;  and  maintenance  of  a  reference  service  on 


•  Effective  May  3.  1944. 


444 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


data  concerning  the  other  American  Republics  for 
all  officers  of  American  Republic  Affairs,  other 
officers  of  the  Department  and  other  Federal  agen- 
cies "who  may  have  occasion  to  call  on  this  service, 
(b)  This  section  shall  serve  as  the  research  staff 
to  the  Director  and  Deputy  Director  of  the  Office 
on  problems  with  which  they  are  dealing,  and  to 
the  Chiefs  of  the  divisions  on  special  problems. 
In  rendering  this  assistance,  the  section  shall  take 
the  initiative  in  selecting  topics  warranting  analy- 
sis and  shall  develop  recommendations  bearing  on 
policy,  as  well  as  answering  requests  for  informa- 
tion and  research.  The  section  will  work  with  the 
planning  staff  of  tlie  Office  of  Foreign  Service 
Administration  on  the  development  of  standards 
for  tlie  improvement  of  reporting  from  tlie  mis- 
sions and  for  the  evaluation  of  Foreign  Service 
reports. 

4  Liaison  Section,  (a)  The  Liaison  Section  is 
responsible  for  maintaining  liaison  on  policy  mat- 
ters of  the  Office  of  American  Republic  Affairs, 
outside  the  scope  of  the  geographic  divisions,  with 
other  offices  of  the  Department  concerned  with 
general  inter- American  activities,  and  for  advis- 
ing the  Coordinator  of  Inter-American  Affairs  and 
other  agencies  of  the  Government  carrying  on 
programs  in  the  other  American  Republics  on  the 
relation  of  their  progi'ams  to  tlie  policy  of  the 
Office  of  American  Republic  Affairs. 

(b)  The  Liaison  Section  will  assist  the  Chief 
Informational  Liaison  Officer  in  carrying  on  the 
work  of  tlie  Information  Service  Committee;  in 
advising  with  the  Special  Assistant,  Mr.  McDer- 
mott,  on  press  matters ;  and  in  consulting  with  the 
Office  of  Public  Information  on  its  public  informa- 
tion activities  and  its  cultural  relations  programs. 

5  Inter-American  Section.  The  Inter- American 
Section  will  formulate  and  recommend  policy  and 
action  to  be  adopted  by  the  Office  of  American 
Republic  Affairs  on  Departmental  problems  of  an 
inter-American  character  as  distinguished  from 
problems  falling  within  the  scope  of  the  geo- 
graphic divisions.  The  section  will  also,  working 
closely  with  the  Division  of  International  Con- 
ferences and  the  Division  of  International  Security 
and  Organization,  handle  for  the  Office  of  Ameri- 
can Republic  Affairs  policy  matters  relating  to 


American    participation    in    inter-American    or- 
ganizations, meetings,  treaties,  and  conventions. 

6  Assistance  from  other  divisions  of  the  Office. 
In  performing  its  work  the  division  will  call  upon 
the  geographic  divisions  of  the  Office  of  American 
Republic  Affairs  for  assistance  in  keeping  cur- 
rently apprised  of  developments  in  and  policy 
toward  the  several  countries. 

7  Transfer  of  personnel  to  the  division.  Per- 
sonnel presently  performing  any  of  the  functions 
cited  in  this  order  are  hereby  transferred  to  the 
Division  of  American  Republics  Analysis  and 
Liaison. 

8  Routing  symbol.  The  routing  symbol  for  the 
Division  of  American  Republics  Analysis  and 
Liaison  shall  be  RL. 

9  Departmental  Order  amended.  The  provi- 
sions of  Departmental  Order  1218  of  January  15, 
1944,  which  relate  to  the  functions  of  the  Office 
of  American  Republic  Affairs,  are  accordingly 
amended. 

CoKDELL   Hull 


APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  1  of  May  3, 1944, 
effective  May  3, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  Jolin  C.  Dreier  as  Chief  of  the  Division 
of  American  Republics  Analysis  and  Liaison,  Of- 
fice of  American  Republic  Affairs. 


[Released  to  the  press  May  8] 

Because  of  the  serious  illness  of  his  wife,  which 
occurred  on  the  eve  of  his  intended  return  to 
Algiers,  Mr.  Edwin  C.  Wilson  has  found  it  neces- 
sary to  remain  here  in  Washington  and  will  there- 
fore be  unable  to  resume  his  duties  as  representa- 
tive of  the  United  States  to  the  French  Committee 
of  National  Liberation  at  Algiers. 

Mr.  Wilson  has  been  designated  as  Director  of 
the  Office  of  Special  Political  Affairs  of  the  De- 
partment, and  he  assumed  his  new  duties  on  May 
8, 1944. 


Treaty  Information 


TREATIES  AND  OTHER  INTERNATIONAL   AGREEMENTS:  PROCEDURE,  FORMALITIES, 
AND  THE  INFORMATION  FACILITIES  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE 

By  William.  V.  Whittington  ^ 


In  article  II,  section  2  of  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States  it  is  provided,  with  reference  to  the 
powers  of  the  President,  as  follows : 

"He  shall  have  Power,  by  and  with  the  Advice 
and  Consent  of  the  Senate,  to  make  Treaties,  pro- 
vided two  thirds  of  the  Senators  present  con- 
cur;    ..." 

The  treaty-making  power  under  the  Constitu- 
tion and  the  relative  functions  of  the  several 
branches  of  the  Government  in  the  making  and 
execution  of  treaties  are  subjects  which  have  been 
dealt  with  in  countless  volumes,  articles,  and  dis- 
courses. They  are  subjects  concerning  which  it  is 
easy  to  excite  discussion  in  almost  any  group  of 
individuals  interested  in  the  processes  of  govern- 
ment. 

However,  little  has  been  written  with  respect  to 
matters  of  a  procedural  or  formal  character  af- 
fecting the  making  of  international  agreements. 
An  explanation  of  certain  procedures  and  formali- 
ties incident  to  the  making  of  treaties  and  other 
international  agreements  should  be  useful,  not 
only  as  a  guide  for  oificials  having  responsibilities 
in  connection  with  negotiations  but  also  as  a  source 
of  information  for  others  who  may  have  an  in- 
terest, either  practical  or  academic,  in  the  subject. 

Some  insight  into  these  procedures  and  formali- 
ties may  be  obtained  by  giving  attention  to  the 
functions  and  the  work  of  the  office  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  which  is  charged  with  the  immediate 
responsibility  in  regard  to  such  matters:  the 
Treaty  Section  of  the  Division  of  Research  and 
Publication. 


In  order  to  gain  a  proper  perspective  it  is  well 
to  relate  a  bit  of  departmental  history. 

On  April  21,  1928  there  was  created  in  the  De- 
partment of  State  a  Treaty  Division,  "organized 
in  response  to  the  need  for  centralization  and  con- 
sistent direction  in  the  drafting  and  negotiation 
of  agreements  with  other  countries."  ^ 

The  functions  of  the  Treaty  Division,  as  out- 
lined in  official  publications,  were  as  follows :  ^ 

"Charged  with  assisting,  when  and  as  requested 
by  the  responsible  officers,  in  the  drafting  of 
treaties  and  other  international  agreements,  and 
cori'espondence  pertaining  to  the  negotiation,  con- 
struction, and  termination  of  treaties.  The  di- 
vision is  also  charged  with  maintaining  a  set  of 
treaties  and  other  international  agreements  in 
force  to  which  the  United  States  is  a  party,  and' 
likewise  those  to  which  it  is  not  a  party,  together 
with  the  pertinent  laws,  proclamations,  Executive 
orders,  and  resolutions;  maintaining  lists  of 
treaties  and  other  international  agreements  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  foreign  governments 
which  are  in  process  of  negotiation  or  ratifica- 
tion; collecting  and  keeping  available  informa- 
tion regarding  the  application,  interpretation,  and 
status  of  treaties;  analyzing  treaties  by  subject, 

'  The  author  of  this  article  is  Assistant  Chief  of  the 
Treaty  Section,  Division  of  Research  and  Publication, 
Department  of  State. 

^  The  Department  of  State  of  the  Vnited  States,  rev.  ed. 
June  1936,  prepared  by  E.  Wilder  Spaulding  and  George 
Verne  Blue,  Division  of  Research  and  Publication.  (De- 
partment of  State  publication  878,  p.  30.) 

'Register  of  the  Department  of  State,  to  and  including 
the  edition  of  Oct.  1,  1942;  and  Congressional  Directory, 
to  and  including  the  edition  of  Jan.  1944  (78th  Cong., 
2d  Sess.). 

445 


446 


DEPAKTMENT    OF    STATE    BULLETIN 


and  assembling,  comparing,  and  studying  the 
provisions  on  the  same  subject  in  different 
treaties;  examining  the  texts  of  treaties,  conven- 
tions, or  international  agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  a  party,  with  a  view  to  recom- 
mending such  action  as  may  be  required  to  obtain 
the  fulfilment  by  the  other  party  of  its  duties  and 
obligations  and  to  effect  the  performance  of  the 
duties  and  obligations  of  the  United  States  by 
legislative  or  administrative  acts;  maintaining 
lists  of  treaties,  conventions,  or  international 
agreements  expiring  or  subject  to  extension  with 
a  view  to  considering  the  renewal  or  extension 
thereof;  performing  the  duties  of  a  secretariat  for 
all  treaties  of  which  the  United  States  is  the  de- 
positary; and  with  performing  such  other  duties 
as  may  be  assigned  by  the  Secretary  of  State." 

By  Departmental  Order  1218  of  January  15, 
1944,  relating  to  the  organization  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  it  was  provided  that  the  Legal 
Adviser  "shall  have  general  responsibility  for  all 
matters  of  a  legal  character  concerning  the  De- 
partment, including  matters  of  a  legal  character 
formerly  dealt  with  by  the  Treaty  Division,  which 
is  hereby  abolished." 

By  the  same  departmental  order  certain  of  the 
functions  of  the  former  Treaty  Division  were 
transferred  to  the  Division  of  Research  and  Pub- 
lication, as  follows : 

"The  Division  of  Research  and  Publication 
shall  have  responsibility  in  matters  pertaining 
to:  ...  (d)  collection,  compilation  and  main- 
tenance of  information  pertaining  to  treaties  and 
other  international  agreements,  the  performance 
of  research  and  the  furnishing  of  information  and 
advice,  other  than  of  a  legal  character,  with  re- 
spect to  the  provisions  of  such  existing  or  proposed 
instruments;  procedural  matters,  including  the 
preparation  of  full  powers,  ratifications,  procla- 
mations and  protocols,  and  matters  related  to  the 
signing,  ratification,  proclamation  and  registra- 
tion of  treaties  and  other  international  agreements 
(except  with  respect  to  proclamations  of  trade 
agreements,  which  shall  be  handled  in  the  Divi- 
sion of  Commercial  Policy) ;  and  custody  of  the 
originals  of  treaties  and  other  international  agree- 
ments;    ...     " 


By  the  end  of  the  year  1943  the  staff  of  the 
Treaty  Division  had  been  reduced,  through  retire- 
ments, deaths,  and  wartime  manpower  problems, 
to  a  total  of  four  regular  full-time  employees,  each 
of  whom  had  had  years  of  training  and  experience 
in  matters  affecting  treaties  and  other  interna- 
tional agreements.  The  staff,  records,  and  offices 
of  the  former  Treaty  Division  were  transferred  to 
the  Division  of  Research  and  Publication  and  be- 
came the  nucleus  of  the  Treaty  Section  of  that 
Division.  Other  competent  assistants  have  been 
added  to  the  staff  since  January  15, 1944. 

It  is  necessarily  true  that  the  brevity  of  descrip- 
tion required  by  departmental  orders  leaves  much 
to  be  desired  so  far  as  the  presentation  of  an 
adequate  picture  of  the  work  is  concerned.  A  field 
of  operations  that  is  potentially  as  broad  as  the 
entire  field  of  foreign  relations  is  summarized 
in  less  than  a  hundred  words.  To  obtain  a  better 
appreciation  of  certain  factors  which  are,  in  some 
respects,  no  less  important  from  the  standpoint  of 
an  effective  conduct  of  foreign  relations  than  the 
technical  negotiations  which  precede  the  signing 
of  an  international  agreement  or  the  action  which 
is  taken  in  connection  with  Senate  consideration 
of  an  international  agreement,  it  would  be  helpful 
to  give  some  attention  to  the  functions  of  the 
Treaty  Section. 

n 

'■^collection,  compilation  and  maintenance  of  infor- 
mation pertaining  to  treaties  and  other  interna- 
tional agreements" 

Before  proceeding  any  farther,  perhaps  it  would 
be  well  to  concentrate  upon  the  words  "treaties 
and  other  international  agreements".  The  usual 
distinction  between  treaties,  in  a  constitutional 
sense,  and  Executive  agreements  should  be  borne 
in  mind.  An  international  agreement  which  is 
entered  into  subject  to  the  constitutional  proce- 
dures incident  to  approval  by  the  Senate  and  sub- 
sequent ratification  by  the  President  is  regarded 
as  a  treaty  in  the  constitutional  sense.  Other  inter- 
national agreements,  effected  in  a  variety  of  ways 
in  pursuance  of  the  Executive  authority  and  not 
requiring  submission  to  the  Senate  for  its  advice 


MAY    13,    1944 


447 


and  consent  to  ratification,  are  commonly  referred 
to  as  Executive  agreements/ 

The  immediate  availability  of  full,  accurate,  and 
authoritative  information  concerning  treaties  and 
other  international  agreements  which  have  been 
entered  into — not  only  agreements  between  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  and  foreign  gov- 
ernments but  also  agreements  which  have  been 
entered  into  between  other  governments  and  to 
M-hich  the  United  States  is  not  a  party — is  essen- 
tial :  essential  in  the  determination  of  policies  and 
programs  affecting  the  foreign  relations  of  the 
United  States,  and  essential  in  the  intelligent 
preparation  for  negotiations  with  foreign  gov- 
ernments and  in  the  effective  handling  of  those 
negotiations. 

Frequently  one  must  perceive  clearly  where  one 
has  been  in  order  to  understand  better  what  lies 
ahead.  It  was  Patrick  Henry  who  said :  "I  know 
of  no  way  of  judging  the  future  but  by  the  past." 
"Study  the  past  if  you  would  divine  the  future" 
is  the  way  Confucius  expresses  the  same  idea. 

In  short,  the  collection,  compilation,  and  main- 
tenance of  authoritative  information  pertaining  to 
treaties  and  other  international  agreements  is  an 
indispensable  part  of  the  process  of  treaty-making. 

The  technicalities  involved  in  the  performance 
of  this  task  are  alniost  inexplicable  to  one  who  has 
not  dealt  with  the  problems  at  first-hand.  To 
speak,  for  instance,  of  signatures,  ratifications,  ad- 
herences,  reservations,  depositaries,  procedures  for 
bringing  into  force  or  for  termination,  proclama- 
tions, execution,  source  references,  et  cetera,  prob- 
ably conveys  a  very  nebulous  picture  of  the  scope  of 
the  work  involved. 

The  Treaty  Section,  continuing  a  system  devised 
in  the  former  Treaty  Division,  undertakes  to  main- 
tain a  card-index  file  in  which  there  is  a  separate 
card  record  for  each  treaty,  and  for  each  interna- 


■  For  additional  comments  on  tliis  subject,  see  "Treaties 
and  Their  Legal  Effects",  an  address  delivered  on  May  4, 
1940  at  a  luncheon  of  the  Federal  Bar  Association  by 
William  V.  Whittington  {Bulletin.  May  11,  1940,  p.  502)  ; 
also  The  Makiny  uf  Treaties  and  International  Agreements 
and  the  Work  of  the  Treaty  Division  of  the  Department 
of  State,  an  address  delivered  on  Apr.  29,  1938  before  the 
Conference  of  Teachers  of  International  Law  by  William 
V.  Whittington  (Department  of  State  publication  1174). 


tional  agreement  other  than  a  treaty,  with  respect 
to  which  any  information  is  available.  These 
card  records  are  undoubtedly  among  the  most  fre- 
quently consulted  records  in  the  Department  of 
State.  The  aim  is  to  have  these  records  so  com- 
plete, and  yet  so  concise,  that  any  inquiry  concern- 
ing a  particular  treaty  or  other  agreement  may  be 
answered  reliably  within  the  space  of  a  minute  or 
less,  so  long  as  the  inquiry  does  not  require  a  tech- 
nical analysis  of  the  provisions  or  extensive  re- 
search and  the  compilation  of  material. 

To  indicate  here  every  kind  of  information  that 
is  cataloged  on  the  "treaty  cards"  would  be,  of 
course,  impossible.  At  the  risk  of  being  tiresome, 
one  fairly  typical  example  will  be  given.  The  rec- 
ord taken  for  this  purpose  is  one  which  relates  to 
the  Convention  for  the  Suppression  of  the  Abuse  of 
Opium  and  Other  Drugs,  signed  at  The  Hague 
January  23,  1912,  and  the  Final  Protocol  relating 
thereto,  signed  at  The  Hague  July  9,  1913.- 

The  record  for  the  Opium  Convention  and  Final 
Protocol  shows  at  the  top  and  to  the  left  of  the 
card  the  words  "Opium  and  Other  Drugs",  which 
are  the  key  to  the  record's  place  in  the  alphabetical 
index.  Immediately  below  these  key  words  are  the 
words  "The  Hague  January  23,  1912".  Among 
other  information  shown  on  the  record  are:  The 
full  titles  of  the  convention  and  final  protocol ;  the 
places  and  dates  of  signature ;  the  name  of  the  de- 
positary government;  information,  with  appro- 
priate references  to  convention  provisions,  show- 
ing "How  made  effective",  "Date  of  entry  into 
force",  "Term",  and  "Procedure  for  termination"; 
a  space  for  inserting  information  as  to  the  date  of 
termination,  at  such  time  as  the  instrmnents  are 
terminated ;  an  indication  of  specific  references  in 
the  convention  to  prior  treaties ;  the  date  of  proc- 
lamation by  the  President;  information  concern- 
ing final  action,  if  any,  taken  by  each  of  the  58 
signatory  countries  and  each  of  the  adhering  coun- 
tries for  bringing  the  convention  into  force ;  infor- 
mation concerning  reservations  made  by  signatory 
countries ;  source  references  to  official  publications 
containing  the  texts  of  the  convention  and  final 
protocol,  including  among  others  the  Statutes  at 
Large,  the  United  States  Treaty  Series,  and  the 

"  Treaty  Series  612,  38  Stat.,  pt.  2,  1912,  1937. 


448 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


League  of  Nations  Treaty  Series ;  and  remarks  con- 
cerning other  matters  of  interest  in  I'elation  to  the 
convention  and  final  protocol,  including  refer- 
ences to  legislation  and  court  decisions  affecting 
their  operation. 

Substantially  the  same  kind  of  information  as 
that  indicated  above  is  recorded  for  each  multi- 
lateral treaty — that  is,  each  treaty  to  which  there 
are  more  than  two  contracting  parties.  In  the 
case  of  bilateral  treaties,  with  only  two  contract- 
ing iDarties,  similar  information  is  recorded,  ex- 
cept that  notations  regarding  exchange  of  ratifi- 
cations take  the  place  of  notations  regarding 
deposit  of  ratification  or  adherence.  Pertinent 
information  is  recorded  also,  in  a  similar  way, 
with  respect  to  other  international  agreements. 

There  are,  of  course,  many  treaties  and  other 
agreements  to  which  the  United  States  has  been 
a  party  but  which  are  no  longer  in  force  and  also 
a  vast  number  of  foreign  treaties  and  other  agree- 
ments to  which  the  United  States  is  not  a  party. 
To  have  readily  available  information  regarding 
such  treaties  is  sometimes  no  less  important  than 
to  have  information  regarding  treaties  of  the 
United  States  presently  in  force. 

The  Treaty  Section  undertakes  to  keep  the 
treaty  cards  at  all  times  as  accurate  and  reliable 
as  possible,  well  knowing  that  it  is  likely  to  be 
called  upon  at  any  time  for  information  upon 
which  an  important  course  of  action  may  depend. 

In  addition  to  these  card  records,  the  Treaty 
Section  maintains  records  and  registers  showing 
the  progress  of  treaty  negotiations  and  the  action 
taken  toward  bringing  into  force  a  treaty  which 
has  been  signed.  Just  as  it  is  necessary  in  any 
railway  system  to  know  at  any  time  the  location 
of  a  particular  railway  car,  its  direction  of  travel, 
and  the  load  it  is  carrying,  it  is  necessary  in  the 
process  of  treaty-making  to  follow  a  particular 
treaty  through  its  various  stages:  signature,  sub- 
mission by  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the  Presi- 
dent, transmission  by  the  President  to  the  Senate, 
reference  to  the  Senate  Committee  on  Foi'eign 
Relations,  publication  in  Senate  confidential  docu- 
ment, removal  of  the  Senate's  "injunction  of 
secrecy",  report  of  the  Committee  to  the  Senate 
either  with  or  without  amendment,  advice  and 
consent  of  the  Senate  to  ratification,  ratification 


by  the  President,  exchange  or  deposit  of  ratifica- 
tion, proclamation,  and  registration. 

It  is  necessary  also  to  follow  the  treaties  and 
other  international  agreements  of  the  United 
States  through  the  stages  of  publication  in  the 
official  series  and  in  the  Statutes  at  Large. 
Treaties  of  the  United  States  which  enter  into 
force  as  a  result  of  ratification  by  and  with  the 
advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  are  printed  in  an 
official  Treaty  Series.  Other  international  agree- 
ments of  the  United  States,  which  are  commonly 
referi'ed  to  as  Executive  agreements  and  most  of 
which  are  effected  by  the  simple  procedure  of  an 
exchange  of  diplomatic  notes  expressing  a  mu- 
tual understanding  concerning  matters  of  an 
administrative  character,  are  printed  in  an  official 
Executive  Agreement  Series,  which  was  inaugu- 
rated in  1929.  Before  that  year  a  number  of  Ex- 
ecutive agreements  had  been  printed  in  the  Treaty 
Series. 

Each  treaty  and  each  Executive  agreement  is 
printed  separately  in  leaflet  form  in  the  appropri- 
ate numbered  series.  At  the  present  time  the 
Treaty  Series  numbers  run  to  986,  although  actu- 
ally there  are  more  than  a  thousand  separate  in- 
struments in  the  series,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
among  the  earlier  numbers  there  are  some  accom- 
panied by  letters  or  fractions.  There  are  391  sep- 
arate publications  in  the  Executive  Agreement 
Series  at  this  time. 

The  Treaty  Section  handles  the  preliminary  task 
of  preparing  treaties  and  other  international 
agreements  of  the  United  States  for  publication 
in  the  Treaty  Series  or  Executive  Agreement  Se- 
ries, follows  the  progress  of  each  document  in  the 
course  of  publication,  and,  when  the  publication 
has  been  completed,  obtains  from  the  Government 
Printing  Office  a  supply  of  each  of  the  printed  leaf- 
lets. The  Section  is  in  a  position,  therefore,  in 
response  to  inquiries,  to  supply  copies  of  printed 
treaties  and  Executive  agreements  of  the  United 
States  to  officials  and  to  others  who  may  have  need 
for  them.  In  the  event  that  the  supply  of  printed 
leaflet  copies  has  been  exhausted,  as  is  the  case  with 
some  of  the  earlier  treaties,  the  Section  is  able  to 
direct  inquirers  to  the  United  States  Statutes  at 
Large  or  to  other  official  publications  containing 
the  texts  of  international  agreements.    Frequently 


MAY    13,    1944 


449 


it  has  been  found  necessary  to  invite  the  attention 
of  inquirers,  inchiding  lawyers,  to  the  fact  that  un- 
der title  1,  section  30,  of  the  United  States  Code 
the  Statutes  at  Large  "shall  be  legal  evidence  of 
the  .  .  .  treaties,  international  agreements  other 
than  treaties,  .  .  .  therein  contained,  in  all  the 
courts  of  the  United  States,  the  several  States,  and 
the  Territories  and  insular  possessions  of  the 
United  States." 

Frequently  the  need  for  information  concern- 
ing a  particular  agreement  or  a  particular  pro- 
vision is  not  so  important  as  the  need  for  a  refer- 
ence to  or  an  analysis  of  all  provisions  relating  to 
a  particular  subject.  Certain  types  of  provisions 
are  the  subject  of  frequent  inquiry.  It  is  conven- 
ient, therefore,  to  have  readily  available  in  some 
cases  lists  of  treaties  or  compilations  of  provisions 
relating  to  a  particular  matter ;  for  example,  pro- 
visions relating  to  the  competency  and  authority 
of  consular  officers  in  connection  with  the  settle- 
ment of  estates  or  the  rights  of  inheritance,  ac- 
quisition, and  ownership  of  property.  The  Treaty 
Section  undertakes,  as  did  the  former  Treaty  Di- 
vision, to  prepare  such  lists  or  compilations  as 
i-eady  sources  of  information. 

The  Treaty  Section  prepares  material  relating 
to  treaties  and  other  international  agreements  for 
publication  in  the  Department  of  State  Bulleti7i, 
under  the  heading  "Treaty  Information". 

It  should  be  clear  from  the  incomplete  picture 
presented  above  concerning  the  information  facili- 
ties of  the  Treaty  Section,  that  the  collection,  com- 
pilation, and  maintenance  of  information  pertain- 
ing to  treaties  and  other  international  agreements 
is  a  task  which  requires  continuous  and  careful  re- 
search involving  the  study  of  agreements,  laws, 
judicial  decisions,  and  any  available  document  or 
publication  which  may  have  a  bearing  upon  the 
matter.  Among  the  members  of  the  staff  of  the 
Section  are  some  who  have  a  knowledge  of  for- 
eign languages.  Consequently,  many  publications 
in  foreign  languages  can  be  examined  within  the 
Section  without  the  need  for  burdening  the  De- 
partment's central  translating  staff. 


Ill 


"the  performance  of  research  and  the  furnishing 
of  information  and  advice,  other  than  of  a  legal 


character,  with  respect  to  the  jrrovlsions  of  such 
existing  or  proposed  insfrmne7ifs" 

The  following  comments  in  an  address  delivered 
a  few  years  ago  are  pertinent :  ^ 

"During  the  past  160  years  the  conduct  of  inter- 
national relations,  while  facilitated  in  certain  re- 
spects by  reason  of  improved  methods  of  communi- 
cation and  transportation,  has  tended  to  become 
far  more  complex  and  to  require  an  increasing  use 
of  carefully  negotiated  treaties  or  agreements  for 
the  regulation  of  intercourse  between  the  nations. 

"In  the  conduct  of  our  foreign  relations  there  is 
no  more  important  function  imposed  upon  the 
Department  of  State  than  that  of  the  negotiation 
of  agreements  with  other  nations,  whereby  the 
rights,  privileges,  and  immunities  of  American 
citizens  may  be  given  a  legal  status  independent 
of  general  international  law,  which,  only  too  often, 
is  inadequate  to  guarantee  the  desired  measure  of 
protection  and  security. 

"In  general,  therefore,  the  task  of  preparing  for 
and  negotiating  agreements  with  foreign  coun- 
tries, especially  in  I'egard  to  commercial  dealings 
or  trade  reciprocity,  requires  a  vast  amount  of 
study  and  intensive  research.  A  large  part  of  this 
labor  involves  the  analytical  study  of  provisions 
in  other  ti'eaties,  both  those  which  continue  in 
force  and  those  which,  for  one  reason  or  another, 
have  ceased  to  be  in  force,  containing  provisions 
of  a  comparable  nature." 

The  Treaty  Section  receives  many  inquiries  or 
requests  for  information  each  day.  Dui'ing  some 
months  the  telephone  inquiries  alone  have  totaled 
a  thousand  or  more.  These  inquiries  may  be  from 
other  offices  of  the  Department  of  State,  from 
offices  of  other  departments  or  agencies  of  the 
Govermnent,  from  the  offices  of  Senators  or  Repre- 
sentatives, from  foreign  diplomatic  missions  in 
Washington,  and  from  lawyers,  authors,  and 
others.  In  any  case,  where  the  existence  or  status 
of  treaty  provisions  may  be  a  factor  to  be  con- 
sidered, the  Treaty  Section  is  likely  to  receive  by 
telephone  or  in  writing,  or  sometimes  by  the  per- 

'  "Compilation  of  Analytical  Treaty  Index",  an  address 
delivered  on  Apr.  20,  1938  at  a  lunclieon  of  the  Federal 
Bar  Association  by  William  V.  Whittington  (Department 
of  State  Press  Releases,  Apr.  23,  1938,  p.  496). 


450 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


sonal  visit  of  the  inquirer,  a  request  for  informa- 
tion regarding  such  provisions. 

The  inquiries  range  from  simple  questions  which 
may  be  answered  by  quick  reference  to  the  treaty 
cards  to  complex  questions  which  may  require  days 
or  weeks  of  research.  In  some  cases  an  authori- 
tative response  to  an  inquiry  may  be  a  vital  factor 
in  determining  the  political  or  military  action  of 
this  Government.  In  some  cases  the  granting  of 
a  right  to  an  individual,  either  an  American  citi- 
zen abroad  or  an  alien  in  this  country,  may  depend 
upon  the  nature  of  the  information  furnished  in 
response  to  an  inquiry. 

The  officers  of  the  Treaty  Section,  in  addition 
to  the  preparation  of  research  memorandums, 
draft  official  correspondence  furnishing  informa- 
tion within  the  scope  of  the  functions  of  the  Sec- 
tion, including  instructions  to  American  diplo- 
matic missions  abroad,  notes  to  foreign  diplomatic 
missions  in  Washington,  letters  to  other  depart- 
ments or  agencies  of  the  Government,  and  letters 
to  individuals  or  organizations. 

Other  offices  of  the  Department  call  upon  the 
Treaty  Section  for  assistance  and  advice  in  con- 
nection with  iDcnding  or  contemplated  negotia- 
tions for  treaties  and  other  international  agree- 
ments. Officers  of  the  Treaty  Section,  assisting 
in  the  drafting  of  instruments,  have  participated 
in  discussions  and  conferences,  not  only  in  Wash- 
ington but  in  foreign  countries.  They  are  credited 
with  having  given  material  assistance  particu- 
larly in  matters  of  treaty  terminology,  style,  pro- 
cedures, and  formalities.  They  have  had  con- 
siderable experience  in  dealing  with  treaty 
matters  and  have  made  extensive  studies  concern- 
ing treaty  procedures  not  only  of  the  United 
States  but  also  of  foreign  countries. 

In  as  much  as  the  Legal  Adviser  of  the  Depart- 
ment is  charged  with  the  responsibility  of  giving 
advice  of  a  legal  character,  the  officers  of  the 
Treaty  Section  do  not  undertake  to  give  such  ad- 
vice. However,  offices  of  the  Department  having 
need  for  information  and  advice,  other  than  of 
a  legal  character,  with  respect  to  existing  or  pro- 
posed treaties  or  other  international  agreements 
may  and  do  call  upon  the  Treaty  Section.  When- 
ever requested  by  the  appropriate  officers  of  the 
Department,  and  upon  the  basis  of  information  as 
to  the  substance  of  desired  provisions,  the  technical 


officers  of  the  Section  have  prepared  provisional 
or  tentative  drafts  of  treaties  or  other  agi-eements, 
or  of  provisions  to  be  incorporated  in  such  instru- 
ments, for  consideration  by  the  Department. 

IV 

'■'■procedural  matters,  incluSing  the  preparation 
of  full  powers,  ratifications,  proclamations  and 
protocols,  and  matters  related  to  the  signing,  rati- 
fication, proclamation  and  7'egistration  of  treaties 
and  other  international  agreements  {except  with 
respect  to  proclamations  of  trade  agreements, 
which  shall  he  handled  i?i  the  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy) " 

As  might  well  be  imagined,  even  by  one  who 
knows  little  more  about  treaties  than  the  fact  that 
they  are  contracts  or  agreements  between  two  or 
more  sovereign  governments,  there  is  much  more 
to  the  process  of  treaty-making  than  a  mere  "meet- 
ing of  the  minds"  or,  for  that  matter,  than  the 
signing  of  a  written  document. 

The  conduct  of  foreign  relations  is  burdened 
necessarily  with  certain  formalities  with  which 
we  would  not  wish  to  be  bothered  in  dealing  with 
our  neighbors  next  door.  This  is  especially  true 
in  the  matter  of  entering  into  agreements. 

Some  of  the  formalities  and  procedures  inci- 
dent to  the  making  of  international  agreements 
may  seem  cumbersome,  but  there  can  be  no  doubt 
that  they  are  essential.  In  many  cases  there  is 
substantial  uniformity  in  the  practices  of  the 
various  governments. 

Treaties  and  other  international  agreements 
may  be  negotiated  in  a  variety  of  ways.  Most 
Executive  agreements  of  the  United  States  have 
been  effected  by  exchanges  of  notes,  usually  con- 
sisting of  an  interchange  of  official  communica- 
tions between  two  governments,  one  of  the  notes 
making  a  proposal  with  respect  to  some  adminis- 
trative matter  of  mutual  concern  to  both  govern- 
ments and  the  other  note  accepting  the  proposal 
and  acknowledging  that  the  agreement  is  to  be  con- 
sidered in  effect.  There  is  no  complexity  as  to  the 
procedure  in  such  cases,  and  usually  there  is  no 
formality  different  from  that  involved  in  the 
sending  of  any  diplomatic  communication. 

In  the  making  of  treaties  and  certain  other 
international  agreements,  arrangements  customar- 
ily are  made  for  the  signing  of  a  single  instrument 


i 


MAY    13,    1944 


451 


in  one  or  several  languages.  In  the  case  of  bi- 
lateral treaties  or  agreements  the  instrument  is 
engrossed  and  signed  in  an  original  for  each  gov- 
ernment. This  is  usually  the  culminating  act  in  a 
series  of  discussions  or  a  period  of  negotiations 
between  the  authorities  of  the  two  governments. 
In  the  case  of  multilateral  treaties  the  negotiations 
frequently  are  conducted  in  an  international  con- 
ference, called  especially  for  that  purpose,  at 
which  the  interested  governments  are  represented 
by  delegates.  The  original  of  the  multilateral 
treaty,  when  signed,  is  retained  in  the  archives 
either  of  a  depositary  government  or  of  an  inter- 
national organization  such  as  the  Pan  American 
Union  or  the  League  of  Nations.  The  depositary 
authority  will  furnish  certified  copies  to  all  the 
signatories  of  the  treaty. 

Full  powers.  Each  representative  or  plenipo- 
tentiary who  signs  a  treaty  is  furnished  a  full 
power,  signed  by  the  chief  executive  of  his  govern- 
ment. This  full  power,  which  is  the  formal  evi- 
dence of  the  representative's  authority  to  sign  on 
behalf  of  his  government,  just  as  a  power  of  attor- 
ney is  the  evidence  of  authority  for  the  perfor- 
mance of  certain  acts,  must  be  prepared  esi>ecially 
for  the  occasion,  naming  the  representative  and 
showing  his  title  and  a  clear  indication  of  the  par- 
ticular instrument  which  he  is  entitled  to  sign.  A 
full  power  for  the  signing  of  a  treaty  on  behalf  of 
this  Government  contains  a  statement  to  the  effect 
that  the  signing  of  the  treaty  is  subject  to  ratifica- 
tion by  and  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the 
Senate.  The  terminology  of  full  powers,  although 
of  a  standard  form  in  some  resjiects,  will  vary  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  instrument  to  be 
signed,  the  mode  of  its  negotiation,  and  the  coun- 
tries involved. 

Engrossing.  When  the  terms  of  the  treaty  or 
other  international  agreement  have  been  agreed 
upon,  the  text  thereof,  either  in  one  language  or 
in  several  languages,  will  be  engrossed  for  signa- 
ture— that  is,  it  will  be  typed,  exact  in  all  respects 
as  agreed  upon,  on  so-called  "treaty  paper".  The 
treaty  paper  used  by  the  Department  of  State,  in 
the  case  of  an  instrument  to  be  signed  in  Wash- 
ington, is  a  high-quality,  large-size  double  sheet, 
with  blocked  lines  marking  off  a  portion  thereof 
slightly  less  in  size  than  a  standard  long  sheet  of 
typewriting  paper.    The  paper  is  heavy  and  both 


sides  may  be  used.  The  double  sheet  makes  it  pos- 
sible to  bind  the  completed  document  in  book 
fashion.  When  the  text  is  in  more  than  one  lan- 
guage, the  languages  preferably  are  typed  in  par- 
allel columns.  When  this  is  not  convenient  the 
engrossing  will  be  done  if  possible  in  such  a  way 
that  the  languages  will  appear  on  pages  facing 
each  other.  In  some  instances  it  is  necessary  to 
have  the  full  text  in  one  of  the  languages  follow 
the  full  text  in  the  other  language,  for  example,  an 
instrmnent  signed  in  English  and  an  oriental  lan- 
guage, such  as  Chinese.^  Since  the  Department  of 
State  does  not  have  machines  for  the  typing  of 
oriental  languages,  the  Department  usually  enlists 
the  aid  of  a  person  or  persons  capable  of  engrossing 
such  language  by  hand  on  the  treaty  paper.  The 
text  of  the  treaty  or  other  agi"eement,  in  all  lan- 
guages in  which  it  is  to  be  signed,  is  engrossed  in 
duplicate.  The  duplicates  are  the  same  in  all 
respects  with  the  sole  exception  of  the  alternat 
form :  in  the  original  to  be  retained  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  for  this  Government  the  references 
to  the  two  governments  will  place  this  Government 
first  and  the  signature  of  this  Government's  pleni- 
potentiary will  appear  first,  while  in  the  original 
to  be  transmitted  to  the  other  government  that 
government  will  be  placed  first  in  the  references 
and  the  signature  of  that  government's  pleni- 
potentiary will  ajjpear  first. 

Signature.  When  the  engrossing  of  a  treaty  or 
other  international  agreement  which  is  to  be 
signed  in  a  single  instrument  has  been  completed 
arrangements  are  made  for  signature.  The  ar- 
rangements are  made,  usually  by  telephone,  with 
the  office  of  the  Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary  of 
State  and  with  the  foreign  diplomatic  mission 
concerned  for  the  signing  of  the  agreement  at  a 
certain  time  and  place,  the  place  being  ordinarily 
the  office  of  the  Secretary  or  Acting  Secretary. 
At  the  time  agreed  upon,  the  signing  officers,  to- 
gether with  those  who  are  charged  with  handling 
the  formalities,  and  certain  others  who  may  have 
had  a  hand  in  negotiating  the  particular  agree- 
ment, gather,  and  within  a  comjiaratively  short 
space  of  time  the  signing  will  have  been  accom- 
plished.   There  is  more  ceremony  in  some  cases 


'  See  Treaty  Series  984,  the  treaty  relinquishing  extra- 
territorial rights  in  China  and  the  regulation  of  related 
matters,  signed  at  Washington  Jan.  11,  1943. 


452 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


than  in  others,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the 
agreement.  In  the  case  of  all  treaties  and  of  most 
other  intei'national  agreements  signed  in  a  single 
instrument,  the  signatures  of  the  plenipotentiaries 
are  accompanied  by  their  seals,  with  ribbons  fast- 
ened in  the  seals  and  binding  the  document.  One 
of  the  duplicate  originals  is  handed  to  the  foreign 
plenipotentiary  for  transmission  to  his  govern- 
ment, while  one  is  retained  in  the  Department  of 
State. 

Procedure  governed  ty  nature  of  agreement. 
When  the  formality  of  signing  and  sealing  the 
instrument  has  been  completed,  the  next  step  de- 
pends upon  the  nature  of  the  agreement.  In  the 
case  of  certain  agreements  other  than  treaties, 
such  as  reciprocal  trade  agreements  negotiated 
and  signed  in  pursuance  of  existing  legislation 
authorizing  such  agreements,  the  next  step  is 
proclamation  by  the  President.  That  is  a  sub- 
ject to  be  dealt  with  hereinafter.  In  the  case  of  a 
treaty  the  next  step  is  that  which  is  directed  to- 
ward ratification.  It  should  be  mentioned  at  this 
jjoint  also  that  the  comments  above  concerning  the 
arrangements  for,  and  the  act  of,  signing  agree- 
ments have  reference  primarily  to  bilateral  instru- 
ments. It  has  been  indicated  elsewhere  that 
multilateral  instruments  are,  as  a  rule,  signed  in 
a  single  document  which  is  retained  by  a  stipu- 
lated depositary,  certified  copies  of  the  multi- 
lateral instrument  being  furnished  to  all  the 
signatories. 

Tiansw.isswn  to  the  Senate.  After  a  treaty  has 
been  signed  and  sealed,  a  communication  consti- 
tuting a  report  on  the  treaty  and  explaining  the 
provisions  thereof  at  such  length  as  circumstances 
appear  to  make  desirable  is  prepared  for  trans- 
mission by  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the  President. 
Accompanying  this  report  to  the  President  will  be 
the  original  of  the  treaty  in  the  case  of  a  bilateral 
treaty,  or  a  certified  copy  in  the  case  of  a  multilat- 
eral treaty,  and  a  message  from  the  President  to 
the  Senate  for  transmission  of  the  treaty,  and  the 
report.  If  the  President  should  approve  thereof, 
he  will  sign  the  message  and  will  send  the  docu- 
ments on  their  way  to  the  Senate. 

Reference  to  Committee.  Upon  receipt  by  the 
Senate  the  English  text  of  the  treaty,  together 
with  the  accompanying  papers,  is  ordered  to  be 
printed  in  a  Senate  document  and  the  matter  is  re- 
ferred to  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations. 


The  material  printed  in  the  Senate  document  will 
be  based  upon  exact  "printer's  copies"  which  are 
made  in  the  Department  of  State  and  are  sent 
along  with  the  original  material.  A  supply  of  the 
printed  Senate  document  is  received  in  the  De- 
partment of  State  for  official  use.  The  text  of  the 
treaty  is  not  made  public  until  the  Senate  removes 
its  "injunction  of  secrecy".  Tliis  may  be  done 
quickly  after  the  reference  to  the  Committee  or  it 
may  be  done  after  the  Committee  has  given  full 
consideration  to  various  factors.  When  the  Sen- 
ate indicates  that  the  treaty  is  made  public,  copies 
of  the  Senate  document  are  available  for  general 
distribution. 

Action  hy  the  Senate.  Hearings  are  held  by  the 
Committee  on  Foreign  Relations  in  due  course  and 
the  Department  of  State  is  represented  in  such 
hearings  by  one  or  more  persons  familiar  with  the 
subject-matter  of  the  treaty  and  the  procedure  by 
which  it  was  entered  into.  The  Committee,  in  re- 
porting its  recommendations  with  respect  to  a 
treaty  which  has  been  under  consideration  by  it, 
customarily  submits  to  the  Senate  a  written  report, 
usually  quite  brief,  which  will  be  printed  in  a 
nimibei*ed  Senate  executive  report.  If  the  Com- 
mittee should  have  approved  the  treaty  as  sub- 
mitted by  the  President,  it  will  "report  the  same 
favorably  to  the  Senate  without  amendment  with 
the  recommendation  that  it  advise  and  consent  to 
its  ratification".  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  Com- 
mittee has  any  objection  or  suggestion  to  make 
concerning  the  treaty  the  report  will  set  forth  the 
matter  in  such  detail  as  the  Committee  may  deem 
appiopriate. 

Ratification.  Upon  the  supposition  that  the 
Senate,  in  accordance  with  recommendations  made 
by  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations,  advises 
and  consents  to  ratification  of  the  treaty  the  orig- 
inal document  will  be  returned  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  with  a  resolution  certifying  to  that 
effect.  It  then  becomes  necessary  for  an  instru- 
ment of  ratification  to  be  prepared  for  the  Presi- 
dent's signature.  This  instrument  will  set  forth 
all  pertinent  facts,  including  the  title  of  the  treaty, 
the  date  of  signature,  the  countries  involved,  and 
the  language  or  languages  in  which  signed,  with 
an  indication  that  the  original  or  the  certified 
copy  of  the  treaty  is  annexed  thereto,  followed  by 
a  specific  statement  as  to  the  action  taken  by  the 
Senate,  with  the  text  of  any  reservation  or  amend- 


MAY    13,    1944 


453 


ment  which  the  Senate  may  have  proposed,  and 
a  declaration  by  the  F'resident  that  he  has  seen 
and  considered  the  said  treaty  and  that  he  does 
thereby  "in  pursuance  of  the  aforesaid  advice  and 
consent  of  the  Senate,  ratify  and  confinn  the  same 
and  every  article  and  clause  thereof."  A  dupli- 
cate of  this  ratification,  the  duplicate  commonly 
being  referred  to  as  "the  exchange  copy",  is  pre- 
pared at  the  same  time.  It  differs  from  the  prin- 
cipal instrument  in  that  the  text  of  the  treaty 
usually  is  set  forth  "word  for  word"  in  the  in- 
strument of  ratification,  whereas  the  principal  in- 
strument annexes  the  original  or  the  certified  copy. 
The  instrument  of  ratification  and  the  exchange 
copy  thereof  then  are  sent  to  the  White  House 
where,  if  approved  by  the  President,  he  will  sign 
them  and  have  them  returned  to  the  Department 
of  State  for  further  action. 

Deposit  of  ratificafioti.  In  the  case  of  a  multi- 
lateral treaty,  the  exchange  copy  of  the  instru- 
ment of  ratification  will  be  sent  with  an  official 
communication  to  the  depositary  authority  and 
will  be  "deposited"  by  that  authority  with  the 
archives  pertaining  to  the  treaty.  If  the  United 
States  be  the  depositary,  then  this  Government 
will  send  to  the  other  signatories  of  the  treaty  no- 
tices informing  them  of  the  deposit  of  this  Gov- 
ernment's ratification.  Depositary  authorities  are 
charged  by  the  terms  of  the  treaties  entrusted  to 
their  custody  to  notify  all  signatories  concerning 
all  deposits  of  ratification  and  also  concerning  all 
adherences  to  or  withdrawals  from  such  treaties. 
The  term  "adherence"  is  used  customarily  in  the 
case  of  a  non-signatory  country  or  territory  which 
becomes  a  party  to  the  treaty  in  accordance  with 
provisions  in  the  treaty  for  that  purpose.  It  is 
usual,  by  the  terms  of  the  treaty,  for  the  treaty 
to  come  into  force  as  to  each  signatory  upon  the 
deposit  of  its  ratification  or  as  to  each  non-signa- 
tory upon  the  deposit  or  notification  of  its  ad- 
herence.   The  provisions  may  vary  in  this  respect. 

Exchange  of  ratifications.  In  the  case  of  a  bi- 
lateral treaty,  the  usual  procedure  is  to  make  ar- 
rangements for  the  formal  exchange  of  the  re- 
spective instruments  of  ratification  of  the  two 
governments.  The  formalities  in  this  respect  are 
much  the  same  as  in  the  making  of  arrangements 
for  signing  the  treaty.  A  document  called  a  pro- 
tocol of  exchange  is  prepared  for  signature  by  the 


plenipotentiaries  effecting  the  exchange  of  instru- 
ments, as  formal  evidence  of  the  action  taken. 
This  protocol  of  exchange,  which  sets  forth  the 
essential  facts  concerning  the  action  taken,  is  en- 
grossed in  duplicate  (an  original  for  each  govern- 
ment), on  treaty  paper  of  the  kind  to  which  ref- 
erence has  been  made.  It  is  usual,  by  the  terms 
of  a  bilateral  treaty,  for  the  treaty  to  come  into 
force  upon  the  exchange  of  the  instruments  of 
ratification. 

Proclamation  of  treaties.  Although  the  ex- 
change or  deposit  of  ratifications  is  customarily 
the  final  action  needed  to  bring  the  treaty  into 
definitive  international  effect,  a  treaty  is  always 
proclaimed  by  the  President.  This  proclamation, 
which  is  prepared  in  the  Department  of  State,  re- 
fers in  exact  terms  to  the  title,  date,  and  signatories 
of  the  treaty,  with  an  indication  as  to  the  language 
or  languages  in  which  the  treaty  was  signed,  then 
usually  embodies  the  signed  original  of  the  treaty, 
followed  by  statements  with  respect  to  all  perti- 
nent matters  upon  which  the  full  effectiveness  of 
the  treaty  depends,  including  the  provisions  con- 
cerning the  coming  into  force  of  the  treaty,  the 
action  taken  in  pursuance  of  those  provisions,  and 
a  textual  reference  to  any  reservation  which  may 
have  been  made  in  regard  to  this  Government's 
obligations  under  the  treaty.  The  j^roclamation 
concludes  with  a  declaration  to  the  effect  that  the 
President  has  caused  the  treaty  "to  be  made  public 
to  the  end  that  the  same  and  every  article  and 
clause  thereof  may  be  observed  and  fulfilled  with 
good  faith  by  the  United  States  of  America,  the 
citizens  of  the  United  States  of  America,  and  all 
other  persons  subject  to  the  jurisdiction  thereof". 
The  proclamation  is  sent  to  the  White  House  for 
the  President's  approval  and  signature.  After 
the  proclamation  has  been  signed  by  the  President 
it  is  returned  to  the  Dei^artment  of  State  for  such 
further  action  as  may  be  needed,  including  pub- 
lication. 

Proclamation  of  trade  agreements.  The  pro- 
cedure for  the  proclamation  of  reciprocal  trade 
agreements  is  different  in  some  respects  from  the 
procedure  with  respect  to  treaties.  Reciprocal 
trade  agreements  and  other  international  agree- 
ments which  are  not  treaties  are  not  ratified.  No 
in.strument  of  ratification  is  necessary.  The  trade 
agreements  which  have  been  entered  into  under 
the  act  of  1934,  or  under  that  act  as  extended  and 


454 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


amended,^  have  contained  provisions  whereby  such 
agreements  would  enter  into  force  after  a  specified 
lapse  of  time  following  the  exchange  of  the  Presi- 
dent's jjroclamation  for  the  instrument  of  ratifica- 
tion or  the  proclamation  of  the  foreign  govern- 
ment. This  has  meant  that  in  preparing  the  proc- 
lamations of  trade  agreements  it  has  been  neces- 
sary to  have  them  prepared  and  signed  in  dupli- 
cate. One  of  the  duplicates  is  an  exchange  copy, 
and  formalities  are  observed  for  the  exchange  of 
proclamations  or  for  the  exchange  of  the  proc- 
lamation for  an  instrument  of  ratification  in  much 
the  same  way  as  in  the  case  of  an  exchange  of 
treaty  ratifications.  After  this  exchange,  a  sup- 
plementary 23roclamation,  simpler  in  both  form 
and  substance  than  the  principal  proclamation,  is 
prepared  and  sent  to  the  White  House  for  signa- 
ture by  the  President.  The  object  of  this  supple- 
mentary proclamation  is  to  proclaim  the  date  on 
which  the  trade  agreement  is  to  come  into  force. 
When  this  action  has  been  taken,  the  usual  pro- 
cedure with  a  view  to  publication  is  taken.  Mean- 
while, as  a  matter  of  practice  the  Department  of 
State,  as  promptly  as  possible,  has  furnished  photo- 
stat copies  of  trade  agreements  to  those  depart- 
ments and  agencies  of  the  Government  which  are 
charged  with  the  carrying  out  of  the  obligations 
of  this  Govermnent  under  such  agreements. 

Piiilication.  When  all  procedures  necessary  to 
give  full  effect  to  a  treaty  or  other  agreement  have 
been  followed  as  indicated  above,  preparations  are 
made  for  the  publication  of  the  texts  thereof  in  the 
official  Treaty  Series  or  Executive  Agreement  Se- 
ries and  in  the  United  States  Statutes  at  Large. 
It  is  appropriate  here  to  point  out  that  title  I,  sec- 
tion 30,  of  the  United  States  Code  contains  the 
following  provision : 

"The  Secretary  of  State  shall  cause  to  be  com- 
piled, edited,  indexed,  and  published,  the  United 
States  Statutes  at  Large,  whicli  shall  contain  .  .  . 
all  treaties  to  which  the  United  States  is  a  party 
that  have  been  j^roclaimed  since  the  date  of  the 
adjournment  of  the  regular  session  of  Congress 
next  preceding;  all  international  agi'eements  other 
than  treaties  to  which  the  United  States  is  a  party 


'  48  Stat.  943 ;  50  Stat.  24 ;  54  Stat.  107 ;  57  Stat.  125. 


that  have  been  signed,  proclaimed,  or  with  refer- 
ence to  which  any  other  final  formality  has  been 
executed,  since  that  date ;     ..." 

Press  releases.  Upon  certain  occasions  the  De- 
partment of  State  issues  press  releases  giving  in- 
formation concerning  action  taken  with  respect  to 
treaties  or  other  international  agreements.  Such 
occasions  include  the  signing,  the  exchange  or  de- 
posit of  formal  instruments,  and  the  signing  of 
proclamations  or  supplementary  proclamations. 
The  texts  of  such  press  releases  are  printed  in  the 
Department  of  State  Bulletin,  together  with  other 
information  i-egarding  treaties  and  other  interna- 
tional agreements. 

Registration.  When  treaties  have  been  printed 
in  the  Treaty  Series  or  when  other  international 
agreements  have  been  printed  in  the  Executive 
Agreement  Series  the  Department  of  State  sends 
certified  copies  of  the  printed  texts  to  the  Pan 
American  Union  and,  when  circumstances  affect- 
ing postal  communication  have  permitted,  to  the 
League  of  Nations  for  registration  in  accordance 
with  arrangements  made  on  this  subject.  In  the 
case  of  the  League  of  Nations,  of  course,  this  ac- 
tion is  merely  evidence  of  cooperation  with  a  view 
to  the  recording  or  registration  of  international 
agreements  by  the  League  and  with  a  view  to 
the  publication  of  such  agreements  in  the  League 
of  Nations  Treaty  Series.^ 

The  drafting  of  full  powers,  supervising  the  en- 
grossing of  formal  documents,  handling  the  for- 
malities in  connection  with  the  signature  of  trea- 
ties and  other  formal  instruments,  the  drafting 
of  reports  and  messages  with  a  view  to  ratification 
of  treaties,  participation  when  needed  in  connec- 
tion with  Senate  Committee  hearings  with  respect 
to  treaties,  the  drafting  of  instruments  of  ratifica- 
tion, proclamations,  and  protocols,  the  deposit  of 
instruments  of  ratification  in  the  case  of  multi- 
lateral treaties,  the  registration  of  treaties  and 
other  agreements,  the  preliminary  work  in  prepar- 
ing treaties  and  other  agreements  for  publication, 
and,  in  general,  fulfilling  the  responsibilities  of  a 

'See  Executive  (Agreement  Series  70,  49  Stat.,  pt.  2, 
3059:  arrangement  effected  by  exchange  of  notes  between 
tlie  Acting  Legal  Adviser  of  the  Secretariat  of  the  League 
of  Vatious  and  the  American  Consul  at  Geneva,  Jan. 
22  and  23,  1934. 


MAY    13,    1944 

secretariat,  including  the  drafting  of  official  com- 
munications and  press  releases  relating  to  such 
matters,  require  considerable  technical  training 
and  painstaking  effort.  The  above  outline  of  cer- 
tain procedures  and  formalities  should  be  sufficient 
evidence  of  that  fact.  This  work  is  a  part  of  the 
responsibility  of  the  Treaty  Section,  except  that, 
with  respect  to  proclamations  of  trade  agi'eements, 
the  determination  of  the  context  of  such  proclama- 
tions is  a  matter  that  is  handled  in  the  Division  of 
Commercial  Policy. 

V 

"an<^  custody  of  the  originals  of  treaties  and  other 
international  agreements" 

After  the  signing  of  an  international  agreement 
and  until  such  agreement  has  entered  into  force 
and  the  Treaty  Section  has  prepared  the  texts  for 
publication  in  the  Treaty  Series  or  Executive 
Agreement  Series,  the  Section  is  charged  with 
responsibility  as  custodian  of  the  originals  or  cer- 
tified copies  of  treaties  and  other  international 
agreements. 

When  the  material  for  publication  is  placed  in 
the  hands  of  the  editorial  staff  of  the  Division  of 
Research  and  Publication  the  custody  of  the  orig- 
inals or  certified  copies  is  transferred  to  the  sec- 
tion of  the  Divison  charged  with  maintaining  the 
permanent  archives  of  international  agreements. 

In  the  case  of  some  treaties  which  have  been 
signed  on  behalf  of  the  United  States  but  which, 
for  one  reason  or  another,  do  not  enter  into  force 
with  respect  to  the  United  States,  the  originals  or 
certified  copies  thereof  usually  are  held  in  the 
Treaty  Section  until  such  time  as  circumstances 
warrant  the  placing  of  such  documents  in  the  per- 
manent archives  of  the  Department  as  "unper- 
fected  treaties". 

In  as  much  as  the  Treaty  Section  is  the  De- 
partment's clearing-house  for  information  in  re- 
gard to  treaties  and  other  international  agree- 
ments and  for  a  time  is  the  custodian  of  originals 
or  certified  copies  of  such  instruments,  offices  of 
the  Department  which  have  the  primary  respon- 
sibility for  handling  negotiations  of  international 
agreements  dealing  with  matters  within  the  scope 
of  their  respective  functions  have  also  the  respon- 
sibility for  keeping  the  Treaty  Section  informed 


455 

with  respect  to  such  agreements  concluded  or 
signed,  including  agreements  effected  by  exchanges 
of  notes. 

VI 

So  much  for  a  behind-the-scenes  view  of  some 
of  the  less-publicized  ramifications  in  the  process 
of  making  treaties  and  other  international 
agreements. 

The  procedures,  formalities,  and  functions 
which  have  been  the  subject  of  comment  may  be 
compared  with  cogs  in  the  wheels  of  a  giant  ma- 
chine: when  all  are  properly  geared  and  lubri- 
cated the  machine  will  operate  smoothly  and  ef- 
ficiently, but  let  one  of  the  cogs  cease  to  function 
as  it  should  and  there  may  be  embarrassing  con- 
sequences. In  other  words,  all  these  procedures, 
formalities,  and  functions  are  essential  and  impor- 
tant factors  in  dealing  with  foreign  relations. 

ADDITIONAL  DIVERSION  OF  WATERS  OF 
THE  NIAGARA  RIVER  FOR  POWER  PUR- 
POSES 

An  arrangement  between  the  United  States  and 
Canada  providing  for  an  additional  emergency 
diversion  for  power  purposes  of  waters  of  the 
Niagara  River  above  the  Falls  has  been  entered 
into,  subject  to  approval  by  the  Senate,  by  an 
exchange  of  notes  dated  May  3,  1944  between  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  the  Canadian  Ambassador 
in  Washington. 

This  arrangement,  which  supplements  the  ar- 
rangement effected  by  an  exchange  of  notes  of 
May  20, 1941  ( Executive  Agreement  Series  209 ;  see 
Bulletin  of  June  7,  1941,  p.  709,  and  June  14, 1941, 
p.  736)  and  the  supplementary  arrangement  ef- 
fected by  exchange  of  notes  dated  October  27  and 
November  27,  1941  (Executive  Agreement  Series 
223;  see  Bulletin  of  Dec.  6,  1941,  p.  456),  amends 
in  its  application  article  V  of  the  treaty  of  Janu- 
ary 11,  1909  between  the  United  States  and  His 
Britannic  Majesty  relating  to  the  boundary  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Canada  (Treaty  Se- 
ries 548),  to  permit,  for  the  duration  of  the  emer- 
gency unless  terminated  earlier  by  agreement,  an 
additional  diversion  of  the  waters  of  the  Niagara 
River  above  the  Falls. 


456 


DEPAETMENT  OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


MUTUAL-AID  AGREEMENT, 
CANADA  AND  THE  FRENCH  COMMITTEE  OF  NATIONAL  LIBERATION 


The  American  Embassy  at  Ottawa  transmitted 
to  the  Department  of  State,  with  a  despatch  of 
April  20,  1944,  a  copy  of  an  agreement,  signed  at 
Ottawa  on  April  14, 1944  between  the  Government 
of  Canada  and  the  French  Committee  of  National 
Liberation  on  the  principles  applying  to  the  provi- 
sion by  Canada  of  Canadian  war  supplies  to  the 
French  Committee  of  National  Liberation  under 
the  War  Appropriation  (United  Nations  Mutual 
Aid)  Act  of  Canada,  1943.  The  agreement  be- 
came effective  on  April  14, 1944,  the  date  of  signa- 
ture. 

The  text  of  the  agreement  follows : 

Whereas  Canada  and  the  French  Committee 
of  National  Liberation  are  associated  in  the  pres- 
ent war,  and 

Whereas  it  is  desirable  that  war  supplies  should 
be  distributed  in  accordance  with  strategic  needs 
of  the  war  and  in  such  manner  as  to  contribute  most 
effectively  to  the  winning  of  the  war  and  the  estab- 
lislunent  of  peace,  and 

Whereas  it  is  expedient  that  the  conditions  upon 
which  such  war  supplies  are  made  available  should 
not  be  such  as  to  burden  post-war  commerce,  or 
lead  to  the  imposition  of  trade  restrictions  or 
otherwise  prejudice  a  just  and  enduring  peace, 
and 

Whereas  the  Government  of  Canada  and  the 
French  Committee  of  National  Liberation  are 
mutually  desirous  of  concluding  an  agreement  in 
regard  to  the  conditions  upon  which  Canadian 
war  supplies  will  be  made  available  to  the  French 
Committee  of  National  Liberation, 

The  Undersigned,  being  duly  authorized  by  the 
Government  of  Canada  and  the  French  Committee 
of  National  Liberation  respectively  for  the  pur- 
pose, have  agreed  as  follows : — 

Article  I 

The  Government  of  Canada  will  make  available 
under  the  War  Appropriation  (United  Nations 
Mutual  Aid)  Act  of  Canada,  1943,  to  the  French 
Committee  of  National  Liberation  such  war  sup- 


plies as  the  Government  of  Canada  shall  authorize 
from  time  to  time  to  be  provided. 

Abticle  II 

The  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation 
will  continue  to  contribute  to  the  defence  of  Can- 
ada and  the  strengthening  thereof  and  will  provide 
such  articles,  services,  facilities  or  information  as 
it  may  be  in  a  position  to  supply  and  as  may  from 
time  to  time  be  determined  by  common  agreement 
in  the  light  of  the  development  of  the  war. 

Article  III 

Tlie  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation 
will,  in  support  of  any  applications  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Canada  for  the  provision  of  war  sup- 
jDlies  under  this  agreement,  furnish  the  Govern- 
ment of  Canada  with  such  relevant  information 
as  the  Government  of  Canada  may  require  for  the 
purpose  of  deciding  upon  the  applications  and  for 
executing  the  purjioses  of  this  agreement. 

Article  IV 

Tlie  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation 
agrees  to  use  any  war  supplies  delivered  to  it  under 
this  agreement  in  the  joint  and  effective  prosecu- 
tion of  the  war. 

Article  V 

The  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation 
will  not  without  the  consent  of  the  Government 
of  Canada  sell  to  any  other  Government  or  to  per- 
sons in  other  countries  war  supplies  delivered  to 
it  under  this  agreement. 

Article  VI 

The  Government  of  Canada  will  not  require 
the  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation  to 
re-deliver  to  the  Government  of  Canada  any  war 
supplies  delivered  under  this  agreement  except  as 
specifically  provided  in  Articles  VII  and  VIII  and 
subject  to  any  special  agreement  which  may  be 
concluded  in  the  circumstances  contemplated  in 
Article  IX. 


MAY    13,    1944 


457 


Article  VII 

Title  to  any  cargo  ships  delivered  under  this 
agreement  will  remain  with  the  Government  of 
Canada  and  the  ships  shall  be  chartered  to  the 
French  Committee  of  National  Liberation  on 
terms  providing  for  their  re-delivery. 

Article  VIII 

Upon  the  cessation  of  hostilities  in  any  major 
theatre  of  war,  any  war  supplies  which  have  been 
transferred  to  the  French  Committee  of  National 
Liberation  under  this  agreement  and  are  still  in 
Canada  or  in  ocean  transit  shall  revert  to  Canadian 
ownership,  except  those  supplies  destined  for  a 
theatre  of  war  in  which  hostilities  have  not  ceased 
or  supplies  made  available  for  relief  purposes 
or  such  other  supplies  as  the  Government  of  Can- 
ada may  specify. 

Article  IX 

The  Government  of  Canada  reserves  the  right 
to  request : 

(a)  the  delivery,  after  the  cessation  of  hostili- 
ties in  any  theatre  of  war,  for  relief  and  rehabili- 
tation pui-poses,  to  another  United  Nation  or  to 
an  international  organization,  of  automotive  equip- 
ment supplied  under  this  agreement ; 

(b)  the  transfer  to  Canadian  forces  serving  out- 
side Canada  after  the  cessation  of  hostilities  of 
vehicles,  aircraft,  ordnance  or  military  equipment 
supplied  under  this  agreement  to  the  French  Com- 
mittee of  National  Liberation  if  such  war  sup- 
plies are  required  for  the  use  of  such  Canadian 
forces  and  are  not  requii-ed  by  the  P'rench  Com- 
mittee of  National  Liberation  for  military  opera- 
tions ;  and 

(c)  the  return  to  Canada  after  the  war,  if  re- 
quired in  Canada  for  Canadian  purposes,  of  air- 
craft and  automotive  equipment  supplied  under 
this  agreement  which  may  still  be  serviceable,  due 
regard  being  had  to  the  degree  of  wastage  likely 
to  have  been  suffered  by  these  articles,  provided 
that  when  the  identity  of  such  Canadian  equip- 
ment has  been  lost  as  a  result  of  pooling  arrange- 
ments or  for  other  reasons,  the  French  Commit- 
tee of  National  Liberation  may  substitute  equip- 
ment of  a  similar  type. 


The  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation 
agrees  to  use  its  best  endeavours  to  meet  any  such 
requests  on  such  reasonable  terms  and  conditions 
as  shall  be  settled  in  consultation  with  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Canada. 

Article  X 

The  Government  of  Canada  and  the  French 
Committee  of  National  Liberation  re-affirm  their 
desire  to  promote  mutually  advantageous  eco- 
nomic relations  between  Canada  and  France  and 
throughout  the  world.  They  declare  that  their 
guiding  purposes  include  the  adoption  of  meas- 
ures designed  to  promote  employment,  the  pro- 
duction and  consumption  of  goods,  and  the  expan- 
sion of  commerce  through  appropriate  interna- 
tional agreements  on  commercial  policy,  with  the 
object  of  contributing  to  the  attainment  of  all  the 
economic  objectives  set  forth  in  the  Declaration 
of  August  14th,  1941,  known  as  the  Atlantic 
Charter. 

Article  XI 

This  agreement  will  take  effect  as  from  this 
day's  date.  It  shall  apply  to  war  supplies  fur- 
nished to  the  French  Committee  of  National  Lib- 
eration by  the  Government  of  Canada  under  the 
authority  of  the  War  Appropriation  (United  Na- 
tions Mutual  Aid)  Act  of  Canada,  1943,  or  sub- 
stituted Act,  including  supplies  furnished  under 
the  said  Act  before  the  conclusion  of  this  agree- 
ment. It  shall  continue  in  force  until  a  date  to  be 
agreed  upon  by  the  Government  of  Canada  and 
the  French  Committee  of  National  Liberation. 

Dated  at  Ottawa  this  fourteenth  day  of  April, 
nineteen  hundred  and  forty-four. 

Signed  for  and  on  behalf  of 

the  Govermnent  of  Canada : 

W.  L.  Mackenzie  King 
C.  D.  Howe 

Signed  for  and  on  behalf  of 

the  French  Committee  of 
National  Liberation : 

G.  BONNEAU 


458 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


TREATY  BETWEEN  CANADA  AND  CHINA  FOR  THE  RELINQUISHMENT  OF 
EXTRATERRITORIAL  RIGHTS  IN  CHINA 


The  American  Embassy  at  Ottawa  transmitted 
to  the  Department  of  State,  with  a  despatch  of 
April  19,  1944,  a  copy  of  a  treaty  between  Canada 
and  the  Republic  of  China  concerning  the  relin- 
quishment of  extraterritorial  rights  in  China  and 
the  regulation  of  related  matters,  with  exchange  of 
notes,  signed  at  Ottawa  on  April  14,  1944. 

The  English  text  of  the  treaty  and  the  exchange 
of  notes  follow : 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Great  Britain,  Ireland 
and  the  British  Dominions  beyond  the  Seas,  Em- 
peror of  India,  in  respect  of  Canada,  and  His  Ex- 
cellency the  President  of  the  National  Government 
of  the  Republic  of  China ; 

Desiring  to  promote  a  spirit  of  friendship  in 
the  general  relations  between  Canada  and  China, 
and  for  this  purpose  to  adjust  certain  matters  in 
the  relations  of  the  two  countries; 

Have  decided  to  conclude  a  Treaty  for  this  pur- 
pose, and  to  that  end  have  appointed  as  their 
Plenipotentiaries : 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  Great  Britain,  Ireland 
and  the  British  Dominions  beyond  the  Seas,  Em- 
peror of  India,  for  Canada : 

The  Right  Honourable  W.  L.  Mackenzie  King, 
Prime  Minister,  President  of  the  Privy  Council 
and  Secretary  of  State  for  External  Affairs  of 
Canada,  and 

His  Excellency  the  President  of  the  National 
Government  of  the  Republic  of  China : 

His  Excellency  Dr.  Liu  Shih  Shun,  Ambassador 
Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary  of  the  Repub- 
lic of  China  to  Canada ; 

Who,  having  communicated  to  each  other  their 
full  powers,  found  in  good  and  due  form,  have 
agreed  on  the  following  Articles: 

Article  I 

In  the  present  Treaty  the  expression  "compa- 
nies" shall  be  interpreted  as  meaning  limited  lia- 
bility and  other  companies,  partnerships  and  as- 


sociations constituted  under  the  laws  of  Canada 
or  of  the  Republic  of  China  as  the  case  may  be. 

Article  II 

All  provisions  of  treaties  or  agreements  in  force 
between  Canada  and  China,  which  authorize  any 
British  or  Canadian  authoi'ity  to  exercise  juris- 
diction in  China  over  Canadian  nationals  or  com- 
panies are  hereby  abrogated.  Canadian  nationals 
and  companies  shall  be  subject  in  China  to  the  ju- 
risdiction of  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
China,  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  inter- 
national law  and  practice. 

Article  III 

The  Government  of  Canada  will  cooperate,  to 
the  extent  that  any  Canadian  interest  may  be  in- 
volved, with  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
China  in  negotiations  and  arrangements  for  the 
abandonment  by  foreign  Governments  of  special 
privileges  held  by  them  in  Peiping,  Shanghai, 
Amoy,  Tientsin  and  Canton,  and  will  raise  no  ob- 
jection to  any  measures  which  may  be  directed  to 
the  abolition  of  such  special  privileges. 

Article  IV 

(1)  Article  II  of  the  present  Treaty  shall  not 
affect  existing  rights  in  respect  of,  or  existing 
titles  to,  real  property  in  China  held  by  Canadian 
nationals  or  companies.  Such  existing  rights  and 
titles  shall  be  indefeasible  except  upon  proof,  es- 
tablished through  due  process  of  law,  that  such 
rights  or  titles  have  been  acquired  by  fraud  or  by 
fraudulent  or  dishonest  practices,  it  being  under- 
stood that  no  right  or  title  shall  be  rendered  in- 
valid by  virtue  of  any  subsequent  change  in  the 
official  procedure  through  which  it  was  acquired. 
It  is  agreed  that  the  exercise  of  these  rights  or 
titles  shall  be  subject  to  the  laws  and  regulations 
of  the  Republic  of  China  concerning  taxation, 
national  defence  and  the  right  of  eminent  domain 
and  that  no  such  rights  or  titles  may  be  alienated 


MAY    13,    1944 


459 


to  the  Government  or  nationals  (including  com- 
panies) of  any  third  country  without  the  express 
consent  of  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
China.  And  it  is  further  agreed  that  the  restric- 
tion on  the  right  of  alienation  of  existing  right? 
and  titles  to  real  property  referred  to  in  this  Ar- 
ticle will  be  applied  by  the  Chinese  authorities  in 
an  equitable  manner  and  that  if,  and  when,  the 
Government  of  the  Republic  of  China  declines  to 
give  assent  to  a  proposed  transfer,  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Republic  of  China  will,  in  a  spirit  of 
justice  and  with  a  view  to  precluding  loss  on  the 
part  of  the  nationals  or  companies  whose  inter- 
ests are  affected,  undertake,  if  so  requested  by 
the  nationals  or  companies  to  whom  permission 
to  alienate  has  been  refused,  to  take  over  the  rights 
and  titles  in  question  and  to  pay  adequate  com- 
pensation tlierefor. 

(2)  Should  the  Government  of  the  Republic 
of  China  desire  to  replace  by  new  and  appropri- 
ate deeds  existing  documentary  evidence  relat- 
ing to  real  property  held  by  Canadian  nationals 
or  companies,  the  new  deeds  shall  fully  protect 
the  prior  rights  and  interests  of  the  Canadian 
nationals  or  companies,  and  their  legal  heirs,  suc- 
cessors or  assigns. 

(3)  Canadian  nationals  or  companies  shall  not 
be  required  by  the  Chinese  authorities  to  make  any 
payments  of  fees  in  connection  with  land  trans- 
fers for  or  with  relation  to  any  period  prior  to  the 
day  of  coming  into  force  of  the  present  Treaty. 

ARTICliE  V 

The  Government  of  Canada  having  long  ac- 
corded rights  to  nationals  of  the  Republic  of 
China  within  the  territory  of  Canada  to  travel, 
reside  and  carry  on  trade  throughout  the  whole 
extent  of  that  territory,  the  Government  of  the 
Republic  of  China  agrees  to  accord  similar 
rights  to  Canadian  nationals  within  the  territory 
of  the  Republic  of  China.  Each  of  the  two  Gov- 
ernments will  endeavour  to  accord  in  territoi-y 
under  its  jurisdiction  to  nationals  and  companies 
of  the  other  country  in  regard  to  all  legal  proceed- 
ings and  in  matters  relating  to  the  administration 
of  justice,  and  to  the  levying  of  taxes  or  require- 


ments in  connection  therewith,  treatment  not  less 
favourable  than  that  accorded  to  its  own  nationals 
and  companies. 

Article  VI 

The  consular  officers  of  one  High  Contracting 
Party,  duly  provided  with  exequaturs,  shall  be 
permitted  to  reside  in  such  ports,  places  and  cities 
of  the  other  High  Contracting  Party  as  may  be 
agreed  upon.  The  consular  officers  of  each  of  the 
High  Contracting  Parties  shall  have  the  right  to 
interview,  to  communicate  with,  and  to  advise 
nationals  or  companies  of  their  country  within 
their  consular  districts;  they  shall  be  informed 
immediately  whenever  nationals  of  their  country 
are  under  detention  or  arrest  or  in  prison  or  are 
awaiting  trial  in  their  consular  districts  and  they 
shall,  upon  notification  to  the  appropriate  au- 
thorities, be  permitted  to  visit  any  such  nationals ; 
and,  in  general,  the  consular  officers  of  each  of  the 
High  Contracting  Parties  in  the  territory  of  the 
other  shall  be  accorded  the  rights,  privileges  and 
immunities  enjoyed  by  consular  officers  under 
modern  international  usage. 

It  is  likewise  agreed  that  the  nationals  or  com- 
panies of  each  of  the  High  Contracting  Parties  in 
the  territory  of  the  other  shall  have  the  right  at 
all  times  to  communicate  with  the  consular  officers 
of  their  country.  Communications  to  their  con- 
sular officers  from  nationals  of  each  of  the  High 
Contracting  Parties  who  are  under  detention  or 
arrest  or  in  prison  or  are  awaiting  trial  in  the 
territory  of  the  other  High  Contracting  Party 
shall  be  forwarded  to  such  consular  officers  by  the 
local  authorities. 

Article  VII 

(1)  The  High  Contracting  Parties  agree  that 
they  will  enter  into  negotiations  for  the  conclu- 
sion of  a  comprehensive  modern  treaty  or  treaties 
of  friendship,  commerce,  navigation  and  consular 
rights  upon  the  request  of  either  of  them  or  in 
any  case  within  six  months  after  the  cessation  of 
the  hostilities  in  the  war  against  the  common 
enemies  in  which  they  are  both  now  engaged.  The 
treaty  or  treaties  to  be  thus  negotiated  will  be 
based  upon  the  principles  of  international  law  and 


460 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


practice  as  reflected  in  modern  international  pro- 
cedure and  in  the  modern  treaties  which  each  of 
the  Governments  has  concluded  with  other 
Powers  in  recent  years. 

(2)  Pending  the  conclusion  of  the  comprehen- 
sive treaty  or  treaties  referred  to  in  the  preceding 
paragraph,  if  any  questions  affecting  the  rights  in 
the  territory  of  the  Republic  of  China  of  the 
Canadian  Government  or  of  Canadian  nationals 
or  companies  should  arise  in  future  and  if  these 
questions  are  not  covered  by  the  present  Treaty 
and  annexed  exchange  of  notes  or  by  the  provi- 
sions of  the  existing  treaties,  conventions  and 
agreements  between  the  Governments  of  Canada 
and  the  Republic  of  China  wliich  are  not  abro- 
gated by  or  inconsistent  with  the  present  Treaty 
and  annexed  exchange  of  notes,  such  questions 
shall  be  discussed  by  representatives  of  the  two 
Governments  and  shall  be  decided  in  accordance 
with  the  generally  accepted  principles  of  inter- 
national law  and  with  modern  international 
practice. 

Article  VIII 

The  High  Contracting  Parties  agree  that  ques- 
tions which  may  affect  the  sovereignty  of  the  Re- 
public of  China  and  which  are  not  covered  by  the 
present  Treaty  and  annexed  exchange  of  notes 
shall  be  discussed  by  representatives  of  the  High 
Contracting  Parties  and  decided  in  accordance 
with  generally  accepted  principles  of  international 
law  and  modern  international  practice. 

Article  IX 

The  present  Treaty  shall  be  ratified  and  the  in- 
stnnnents  of  ratification  shall  be  exchanged  at 
Chungking  as  soon  as  possible.  The  present 
Treaty  shall  come  into  force  and  be  effective  on 
the  day  of  the  exchange  of  ratifications. 

In  witness  whereof  the  above-mentioned  Pleni- 
potentiaries have  signed  the  present  Treaty  and 
affixed  thereto  their  seals. 

Done  at  Ottawa  this  fifteenth  day  of  April,  1944, 
corresponding  to  the  fifteenth  day  of  the  fourth 
month  of  the  thirty-third  year  of  the  Republic  of 


China,  in  duplicate  in  English  and  Chinese,  both 

texts  being  equally  authentic. 

W.  L.  Mackenzie  King 
Lm  Shih  Shun 


Embassy  of  the  Republic  of  China, 

Ottawa,  April  i^,  19JfJf. 
Sir, 

In  connection  with  the  Treaty  signed  today  be- 
tween His  Excellency  the  President  of  the  National 
Government  of  the  Republic  of  China  and  His 
Majesty  the  King  of  Great  Britain,  Ireland  and  the 
British  Dominions  beyond  the  Seas,  Emperor  of 
India,  for  Canada,  I  have  the  honour  to  state  that 
it  is  the  understanding  of  the  National  Govern- 
ment of  the  Republic  of  China  that  all  rights  and 
privileges  relinquished  by  His  Majesty  the  King, 
for  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and 
Northern  Ireland  and  India,  as  provided  in  the 
Treaty  and  exchange  of  notes  of  January  11, 1943, 
between  the  Republic  of  China  on  the  one  hand 
and  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and 
Nortliern  Ireland  and  India  on  the  other,  have 
been  similarly  relinquished  by  His  Majesty  the 
King  for  Canada.  This  understanding,  if  con- 
firmed by  your  Govermnent,  shall  be  considered  as 
forming  an  integral  part  of  the  Treaty  signed  to- 
day and  shall  be  considered  to  be  effective  upon  the 
date  of  the  entry  into  force  of  that  Treaty.  I 
should  be  glad  if  you  would  confirm  the  above 
understanding  on  behalf  of  the  Government  of 
Canada. 

I  avail  [etc.]  Liu  Shih  Shun 

The  Secretary  of  State 
FOR  External  Affairs, 

Ottawa. 


Ottawa,  April  14, 1944- 
Excellency, 

I  have  the  honour  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of 
your  Excellency's  note  of  today's  date  reading  as 
follows — 


i 


MAT    13,    1944 


461 


[Here  follows  the  note  from  His  Excellency  Liu 
Shili  Shun  printed  above.] 

I  have  the  honour  on  behalf  of  the  Government 
of  Canada  to  confirm  the  understanding  of  the 
National  Government  of  the  Kepublic  of  China 
that  all  rights  and  privileges  relinquished  by  His 
Majesty  the  King,  for  the  United  Kingdom  of 
Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland  and  India,  as 
provided  in  the  Treaty  and  exchange  of  notes  of 
January  11th,  1943,  between  the  Republic  of  China 
on  the  one  hand  and  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great 
Britain  and  Northern  Ireland  and  India  on  the 
other,  have  been  similarly  relinquished  by  His 
Majesty  the  King  for  Canada. 

This  understanding  shall  be  considered  as  form- 
ing an  integral  part  of  the  Treaty  signed  today 
and  shall  be  considered  to  be  effective  upon  the  dat« 
of  the  entry  into  force  of  that  Treaty. 

Accept  [etc.] 

W.  L.  Mackenzie  King 
Secretary  of  State  for  External  Affairs 

His  Excellency  Dr.  Lru  Shih  Shun, 

Amhassador  of  the  Republic  of  China, 
Chinese  Ejnbassy,  Ottawa. 


PROTOCOL  ON  PELAGIC  WHALING 

The  White  House  announced  on  May  10,  1944 
that  on  that  date  the  President  transmitted  to  the 
Senate,  with  a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and 
consent  of  that  body  to  ratification,  a  protocol  re- 
lating to  pelagic  whaling  operations,  which  was 
signed  at  London  on  February  7,  1944  for  the 
United  States  of  America,  the  Union  of  South 
Africa,  the  Commonwealth  of  Australia,  the 
United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern 
Ireland,  Canada,  New  Zealand,  and  Norway. 

AGREEMENT  FOR  UNITED  NATIONS  RELIEF 
AND  REHABILITATION  ADMINISTRATION 

India 

The  Office  of  the  Personal  Representative  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States  at  New  Delhi  in- 
formed the  Department  of  State,  in  a  despatch  of 
April  10,  1944,  that  the  Legislative  Assembly  of 
India  and  the  Council  of  State  (Upper  House) 
had  approved  on  April  5  and  6,  1944,  respectively, 
the  Agreement  for  United  Nations  Relief  and  Re- 
habilitation Administration  signed  at  Washington 
on  November  9, 1943. 


INTER-AMERICAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

El  Salvador 

The  American  Embassy  at  San  Salvador  in- 
formed the  Department  of  State,  by  a  despatch  of 
April  24, 1944,  that  on  March  29, 1944  the  National 
Legislative  Assembly  of  El  Salvador  ratified  the 
Convention  on  the  Liter-American  Institute  of 
Agricultural  Sciences,  which  was  opened  for  sig- 
nature at  the  Pan  American  Union  on  January  15, 
1944.  The  decree  of  ratification  of  the  Conven- 
tion, copies  of  which  were  enclosed  with  the  des- 
patch, was  published  in  the  Diario  Oficial  of  April 
20,  1944. 

The  decree  reads  in  part  as  follows  (transla- 
tion) :  "The  present  decree  will  have  the  force  of 
law  from  the  day  of  its  publication  in  the  Diario 
OfudaV 


The  Foreign  Service 


The  American  Consulate  at  Southampton,  Eng- 
land, was  reestablished,  effective  April  30, 1944. 


Legislation 


Extension  of  Lend-Lease  Act : 

Hearing  before  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations, 

United  States  Senate,  7Sth  Cong.,  2d  sess.,  on  H.  B. 

4254.    April  26,  1S>44.     il,  54  pp. 

S.  Kept.  848,  7Sth  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  4254.     [Favorable 

report.  ]     5  pp. 

Estimate  of  Appropriation  for  the  American  Commission 

for  the  Protection  and  Salvage  of  Artistic  and  Historic 

Monuments  in  War  Areas :  Communication  from  the 


462 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


President  of  the  United  States  transmitting  an  estimate 
of  approiiriation  for  the  American  Commission  for  the 
Protection  and  Salvage  of  Artistic  and  Historic  Monu- 
ments in  War  Areas,  for  the  fiscal  year  1945,  amounting 
to  $59,000.  H.  Doe.  568,  78th  Cong.  2  pp. 
Retired  Officers  or  Employees  of  the  United  States 
Tendered  Decorations  From  Foreign  Governments: 
Message  from  the  President  of  the  United  States  trans- 
mitting list  of  retired  officers  or  employees  of  the 
United  States  for  whom  the  Department  of  State  is 
holding  decorations,  orders,  medals,  or  presents  ten- 
dered them  by  foreign  governments.  H.  Doe.  583,  78th 
Cong.     3  pp. 


Recruiting  of  Mexican  Non-Agricultural  Workers :  Agree- 
ment Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Mex- 
ico— Etiected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Mexico  City 
April  29,  1943;  effective  April  29,  1943.  Executive 
Agreement  Series  376.    Publication  2108.     14  pp.    50. 

Foreign  Affairs  of  the  United  States  in  Wartime  and 
After :  Address  by  Breckenridge  Long,  Assistant  Secre- 
tary of  State,  before  the  American  Federation  of  Labor 
Fonim  on  Labor  and  the  Post-War  World,  New  York, 
N.  Y.,  April  12,  1944.    Publication  2110.    9  pp.    50. 

Diplomatic  List,  May  1944.  Publication  2117.  ii,  122  pp. 
Subscription,  $1  a  year ;  single  copy,  100. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Plantation  Rubber  Investigations :  Agreement  Between 
the  United  States  of  America  and  Mexico  Continuing 
in  Force  an  Agreement  of  April  11,  1941  as  Supple- 
mented by  an  Agreement  of  July  14,  1942  and  an  Agree- 
ment of  March  3,  4,  and  29  and  April  3,  1943,  and  Texts 
of  Above-Cited  Agreements — Effected  by  exchange  of 
notes  signed  at  Mexico  City  July  10  and  September  20, 
1943;  effective  July  1,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Se- 
ries 364.    Publication  2105.    20  pp.    100. 


Other  Government  Agencies 

Education  in  China  Today  [with  bibliography],  by  C.  O. 
Arndt,  Severin  K.  Turosienski,  and  Tung  Yuen  Fong. 
1944.  (Federal  Security  Agency,  United  States  Office 
of  Education.)  12  pp.  50  (available  from  the  Superin- 
tendent of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office). 

Greece,  Selected  List  of  References ;  compiled  by  Ann 
Duncan  Brown  and  Helen  Dudenbostel  Jones.  1943. 
(Bibliography  Division,  Library  of  Congress.)  iv,  101 
pp.,  processed.  Available  from  Library  of  Congress  (free 
to  institutions  only). 

Colombia,  Land  of  El  Dorado.  1944.  (Office  of  the  Co- 
ordinator of  Inter- American  Affairs.)  IG  pp.,  illus. 
Available  from  CIAA. 


U.    S.  eOVERHHENT   PRINTIHC  OFFICE,  IS44 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents   -    -   .   .    Subscription  price,  ?2.75  a  year 


PUBUSHEO  WEBKLY  WITH  THB  APPBOYAL  OF  THE  DIBECTOR  OF  THE  BUBEAD  OF  THE  BUOOBT 


I-' 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


.B  U  jL  JL 


H 


1   r 


1    JL 


1 


N 


MAY  20,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  256— Publication  2128 


0 


ontents 


The  War  Page 

Statement  I)y  the  President 455 

Wartime   Economic   Problems   and    Post- War   Trade: 

Address  by  Charles  P.  Taft 465 

Supplies  for  Liberated  Areas:  By  James  ^.  SiiZ/weZZ  .    .  469 

Extension  of  the  Lend-Lcase  Act 478 

Exchange  of  American  and  German  Nationals   ....  478 
Civil-Affairs  Agreements  With  Belgium,   the  Nether- 
lands, and  Norway 479 

General 

National  Foreign-Trade  Week:  Statement  by  tlie  Sec- 
retary of  State 479 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

Twenty-sixth    International    Labor    Conference:  Re- 
marks by  President  Roosevelt 481 

Proposed  Declaration  Concernmg  the  Aims  and  Pur- 
poses of  the  International  Labor  Organization  .    .       482 

First   Conference   of   Commissions   of   In  ter- American 

Development 483 

A  Pattern  of  National  Unity:  Address  by  Assistant 

Secretary  Berle 484 

American  Republics 

Protocol  of  Peace,  Friendship,  and  Boundaries,  Ecua- 
dor and  Peru 487 

[oyer] 


tJ.  §:  gyPIRIffTENOENT  OF  DOCUh.twTS 

JUN 15  1944 


0 


OIltentS-CONTlNVED 


The  Department  Page 

Change  in  Title  of  the  Office  of  Foreign  Service  Admin- 
istration and  Creation  of  the  Division  of  Foreign 
Buildings  Operations:  Departmental  Order   1273 

of  May  6,  1944 488 

Modification  of  the  Visa  Procedure 490 

Appointment  of  Officers 490 

Treaty  Information 

Australian -New  Zealand  Agreement,  1944 490 

Renewal  of  Naval-Aviation-Mission  Agreement  With 

Peru 490 


B.    S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE:  19*4 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D,  C, 
Price,  10  cents   -    -   -   -    Subscription  price.  $2.75  a  year 

FtlBLISHEP  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPROVAL  OF  THE  0IRECTOK  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  THE  BUDGET 


The  War 


STATEMENT  BY  THE  PRESIDENT 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  20] 

President  Eoosevelt  made  the  following  state- 
ment on  May  20  in  connection  with  Vice  Presi- 
dent "Wallace's  trij)  to  China : 

"I  have  asked  the  Vice  President  of  the  United 
States  to  serve  as  a  messenger  for  me  in  China. 
He  is  taking  with  him  Mr.  John  Carter  Vincent, 
Chief  of  the  Division  of  Cliinese  Affairs,  State 
Dejiartment ;  Mr.  Owen  Lattimore,  Deputy  Direc- 
tor of  the  Overseas  Branch,  Office  of  War  Infor- 
mation; and  Mr.  John  Hazard,  Chief  Liaison 
Officer,  Division  for  Soviet  Supply,  Foreign  Eco- 
nomic Administration. 

'"Eastern  Asia  will  play  a  very  important  part 


in  the  future  history  of  the  world.  Forces  are 
heing  unleashed  there  which  are  of  the  utmost  im- 
portance to  our  future  peace  and  prosperity.  The 
Vice  President,  because  of  his  present  position 
as  well  as  his  training  in  economics  and  agricul- 
ture, is  unusually  well  fitted  to  bring  both  to  me 
and  to  the  people  of  the  United  States  a  most  valu- 
able first-hand  report. 

"For  the  time  being  nothing  more  can  be  said 
of  certain  aspects  of  the  Vice  President's  trip. 
Suffice  it  to  say  that  he  will  be  visiting  a  dozen 
places  w'hich  I  have  long  wanted  to  see.  He  left 
today  and  will  report  to  me  upon  his  return  which 
is  expected  about  the  middle  of  July." 


WARTIME  ECONOMIC  PROBLEMS  AND  POST-WAR  TRADE 

Address  by  Charles  P.  Tafl  '■ 


[Released  to  the  press  May  17] 

The  League  of  Women  Voters  seeks  good  gov- 
ernment in  community,  state,  and  nation  and  intel- 
ligent participation  in  government  by  all  citizens, 
especially  women.  The  League  has  emphasized  the 
importance  of  foreign  affairs  and  in  that  part  of 
its  program  has  made  one  of  its  greatest  contribu- 
tions to  the  national  interest. 

We  need  good  government  in  our  communities. 
We  have  made  great  progress  in  the  50  years  since 
the  National  Municipal  League  first  was  organ- 
ized, and  started  people  thinking  about  good  pub- 
lic services  well  administered.  The  reforms  that 
began  in  the  cities  have  spread  to  the  states  and 
national  governments,  and  the  League  has  had  an 
important  part  in  every  one  of  those  fields. 

Those  principles  of  local  self-government  and 
sound  administration  in  public  service  are  more 
important  than  ever  today.  Our  civil-affairs  offi- 
cers in  Italy  have  found,  and  later  in  Germany  and 
Japan  will  find,  their  greatest  difficulty  in  the 
development  of  local  political  responsibility.  I 
heard  Count  Sforza  say  a  few  months  ago  that 
Italy  has  one  of  the  oldest  traditions  of  local  self- 


government,  which  gives  hope  there,  in  spite  of  the 
twenty-odd  years  of  suppression. 

But  it  will  be  in  Germany,  with  its  centralized 
dictatorship,  and  in  Japan,  where  little  if  any 
democratic  experience  or  ideal  has  ever  existed  at 
the  grass  roots,  that  we  shall  have  occasion  to 
think  well  of  our  own  citizenship  and  freedom — 
something  we  may  have  taken  too  lightly  hereto- 
fore. W^e  have  a  jewel  of  great  price  that  we  must 
cherish  and  preserve  when  we  have  won  our  battle 
in  its  defense.  We  are  the  oldest  republic  in  the 
world  with  a  tradition  of  democracy  that  devel- 
oped even  faster  than  in  the  British  Isles  and  Hol- 
land, from  which  came  its  beginnings.  We  face 
the  menace  of  the  dictatorships  with  a  pattern  of 
living  and  government  essential  for  the  future  of 
the  w' orld. 

This  is  a  critical  moment  in  the  war.  It  is  a 
critical  moment  from  the  strategic  standpoint, 


'  Delivered  before  a  meeting  of  the  Indiana  League  of 
Women  Voters,  Indianapolis,  Ind.,  May  17,  1944.  Mr. 
Taft  is  Director  of  tlie  Ofiiee  of  Wartime  Economic 
Affairs,  Department  of  State. 

465 


466 


DEPABTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


with  two  of  the  prongs  of  our  great  world  offensive 
already  started  toward  the  vitals  of  our  enemies. 
In  Itaiy  and  around  the  world,  in  the  central  and 
southwest  Pacific,  parts  of  the  supreme  attack  have 
begun.    The  great  invasion  is  poised. 

The  real  crisis  is  spiritual.  We  Americans  re- 
acted none  too  well  to  the  news  from  Cassino  and 
Anzio,  and  we  have  been  showing  signs  of  strain. 
Can  we  stand  up  when  the  casualty  lists  begin  to 
mount  from  the  second  and  tliird  and  fourth 
fronts?  We  have  been  tired,  and  the  British  for 
good  reason  have  been  more  tired  than  we.  They 
have  been  at  it  two  years  longer  than  we,  and  they 
have  lost  in  proportion  to  their  population  10  or 
12  times  as  many  as  we  liave,  military  and  civilian, 
at  the  front  and  in  the  bombing  blitz.  Probably 
that  is  why  criticism  of  both  of  our  Governments, 
and  especially  of  tlieii-  foreign  policies,  rose  on 
both  sides  of  the  Atlantic  during  these  bleak  win- 
ter months  when  plans  were  coming  to  fruition. 

This  was  the  time  when  our  faith  and  touglmess 
l>egan  to  be  put  to  the  test.  Can  we  hold  to  our 
beliefs  and  stay  by  our  judgment?  Old  principles 
sometimes  seem  watery  and  ineffective,  patience 
wears  thin,  and  you  inspect  your  most  trusted 
leaders. 

Mr.  Hull  himself  was  llms  suspect  dining  that 
period,  but  his  speech  of  April  9  reasserted  his 
leadershij)  of  Americans  of  good-will.  Democrats 
and  Republicans  alike.  Mr.  Hull  presented  to  the 
people  of  the  United  States  a  vigorous  reaffirma- 
tion of  faith  with  a  democratic  toughness  of  fiber 
that  gives  hope  to  all  of  us,  and  gave  specific  guid- 
ance in  some  of  these  problems  of  foreign  policy 
that  have  been  a  source  of  worry  in  the  United 
States. 

This  was  his  final  paragraph : 

"All  of  these  questions  of  foreign  policy  which, 
as  I  said  earlier,  is  the  matter  of  focusing  and  ex- 
pressing your  will  in  the  world  outside  our  borders, 
are  difficult  and  often  involve  matters  of  contro- 
versy. Under  our  constitutional  system  the  will 
of  the  American  people  in  this  field  is  not  effective 
imless  it  is  united  will.  If  we  are  divided  we  are 
ineffective.  We  are  in  a  year  of  a  national  election 
in  whicli  it  is  easy  to  arouse  controversy  on  almost 
any  subject,  whether  or  not  the  subject  is  an  issue 
in  the  campaign.     You,  therefore,  as  well  as  we 


who  are  in  public  office,  bear  a  great  responsibility. 
It  is  the  responsibility  of  avoiding  needless  con- 
troversy in  tlie  formulation  of  your  judginents.  It 
is  the  responsibility  for  sober  and  considered 
thought  and  expression.  It  is  the  responsibility 
for  patience  both  with  our  Allies  and  with  those 
who  must  speak  for  you  with  them.  Once  before 
in  our  lifetime  we  fell  into  disunity  and  became 
ineffective  in  world  affairs  by  reason  of  it.  Should 
this  happen  again  it  will  be  a  tragedy  to  you  and 
to  your  children  and  to  the  world  for  generations." 

My  own  concern  in  the  Department  of  State  in 
helping  to  produce  that  unity  and  prevent  disunity 
is  in  the  economic  field,  and  particularly  in  the 
current  operations  of  many  Government  depart- 
ments which  affect  our  foreign  relations.  While 
theoretically  I  have  Wartime  Economic  Affairs, 
and  Hari-y  Hawkins  the  Office  of  Economic  Af- 
fairs, meaning  long-time  and  post-war  economics, 
the  line  can  never  be  drawn  with  any  exactitude. 
Every  day  I  have  to  know  from  Mr.  Hawkins'  di- 
visions what  is  long-time  policy  in  order  to  have 
our  operating  divisions  guide  current  operations  in 
the  direction  called  for  by  that  policy. 

^Ir.  Hull  referred  to  a  number  of  these  economic 
problems  in  his  address.  I  am  sure  you  will  be 
interested  in  having  me  sjjell  out  some  of  his  brief 
references.  One  of  our  most  important  responsi- 
bilities is  in  dealing  with  the  European  neutrals. 
Our  growing  strength  and  that  of  our  Allies  makes 
only  one  outcome  of  this  war  possible,  he  said : 

"We  can  no  longer  acquiesce  in  these  nations' 
drawing  ui)on  the  resources  of  the  Allied  world 
when  they  at  the  same  time  contribute  to  the  death 
of  troops  whose  sacrifice  contributes  to  their  salva- 
tion as  well  as  ours.  We  .have  scrupulously  re- 
sfjccted  the  sovereignty  of  these  nations;  and  we 
have  not  coerced,  nor  shall  we  coerce,  any  nation 
to  join  us  in  the  fight.  We  have  said  to  these 
countries  that  it  is  no  longer  necessary  for  them 
to  purchase  protection  against  aggression  by  fur- 
iii.shing  aid  to  our  enemy — whether  it  be  by  permit- 
ting official  German  agents  to  carry  on  their  activi- 
ties of  espionage  against  the  Allies  within  neutral 
borders,  or  by  sending  to  Germany  the  essential 
ingredients  of  the  steel  which  kills  our  soldiers, 
or  by  permitting  highly  skilled  workers  and  fac- 
tories to  supply  products  which  can  no  longer  issue 


MAY    20,    1944 


467 


from  the  smoking  ruins  of  German  factories.  We 
ask  tliem  only,  but  \Yith  insistence,  to  cease  aiding 
our  enemy." 

The  problem  of  German  espionage  by  official 
agents  in  Spain  and  Ireland  is  a  political  matter 
not  in  my  field.  But  the  situation  with  reference 
to  ferro-alloys  from  the  neutrals  surrounding 
Germany  is  very  much  my  business.  Wolfram 
(tungsten),  nickel  and  chrome,  and  molybdenum 
and  manganese  come  from  Finland,  Turkey,  Spain, 
and  Portugal;  iron  ore  and  ball  bearings  come 
from  Sweden,  and  other  articles  from  Switzer- 
land. We  are  saying  to  all  these  countries,  with 
all  the  seriousness  we  can  muster — you  cannot 
continue  to  help  the  Germans  kill  our  boys.  You 
have  limited  these  shipments  considerably  by 
agreement  with  us.  Now  you  must  limit  them  all 
still  further  and  stop  shipping  what  can  be  used 
by  our  enemies.  Turkey  has  stopped  chrome. 
Spain  has  cut  wolfram  to  25  percent  of  what  she 
issued  export  licenses  for  in  1943.  Our  political 
and  economic  warfare  people  are  going  after  Por- 
tugal and  Sweden. 

Mr.  Hull  referred  to  order  in  Europe  as  essen- 
tial for  the  winning  of  the  war.  The  order  re- 
quired is  economic  as  well  as  militai'y  or  police 
order.  It  is  going  to  be  terribly  difficult  to  get 
the  necessary  food  and  supplies  into  Europe  and 
distribute  them  equitably.  Rationing  will  have  to 
continue  and  somebody  has  to  administer  it.  In- 
flation is  one  of  the  serious  difficulties  until  normal 
channels  of  exports  and  imports  are  opened.  So 
price  control  must  continue.  Americans  of  the 
blood  of  the  liberated  nations  are  naturally  con- 
cerned and  want  to  give  and  send  money.  Until 
the  economic  machinery  is  running  on  a  relatively 
normal  basis,  sending  money  into  these  countries 
is  no  help  but  on  the  contrary  will  only  contribute 
to  inflation.  The  only  answer  is  to  ship  food  and 
supplies,  and  that  will  go  just  as  fast  as  the  gov- 
ernments and  UNRRA  can  accomplish  it.  When 
food  is  a  little  more  plentiful,  then  people  can 
help  their  relatives  by  food  drafts,  mass  extra 
shipments  packaged  on  arrival  in  the  foreign 
country  and  delivered  to  the  person  designated. 
That  was  done  after  the  last  war,  but  it  will  not  be 
possible  again  for  some  time  to  come. 

The  process  that  gets  supplies  where  they  must 
go   is  a  complicated   one   in   which   the   United 


States  and  the  United  Kingdom  are  operating 
as  partners.  That  is  no  mere  phrase.  We  have 
44  United  and  Associated  Nations,  but  they  have 
not  yet  completely  learned  to  work  together.  The 
British  and  Americans  are  doing  so,  and  their 
experience  is  a  pattern  for  real  progress  toward 
international  peace  among  all  nations. 

Each  of  us,  the  British  and  ourselves,  produce 
certain  goods  for  the  war  effort.  There  are  not 
enough  to  go  around  and  each  of  us  has  agencies 
that  allocate  our  production  and  our  raw  mate- 
rials to  the  domestic  needs,  and  to  the  demands  of 
tiie  war  abroad.  For  instance,  there  is  a  U.S. 
Food  Requirements  and  Allocations  Committee, 
■with  members  among  others  from  the  Army,  Navy, 
Maritime  Commission,  War  Production  Board, 
AYar  Food  Administration,  Foreign  Economic 
Administration,  and  State  Department.  The  War 
Production  Board  Requirements  Committee  is 
the  same  kind  of  body  in  the  field  of  raw  materials 
and  manufactured  goods  from  the  United  States. 

But  then  you  have  to  measure  U.S.  allocations 
against  supplies  in  the  United  Kingdom  and  other 
parts  of  the  world,  and  needs  abroad  as  well.  So 
the  Ignited  States  and  the  United  Kingdom  come 
together  in  what  are  called  the  Combined 
Boards— Combined  Food  Board,  Combined  Raw 
Materials  Board,  Combined  Production  and  Re- 
sources Board,  and  Combined  Shipping  Adjust- 
ment Board,  with  Canada  sharing  in  certain  of 
these  operations.  There  is  full  disclosure  of  all  in- 
formation and  a  successful  effort  to  operate  with 
pooled  resources  and  an  agreed  allocation  of  sup- 
plies available  from  other  areas. 

But  what  you  need  from  other  countries  does  not 
come  without  effort,  and  the  Government  itself 
often  has  to  send  representatives  abroad  to  be  sure 
we  get  what  we  need.  We  may  have  to  provide 
incentive  payments,  or  even  put  on  development 
programs  to  secure  marginal  ]n-oduction.  In  con- 
nection with  that  you  must  provide  enough  sup- 
plies to  maintain  the  basic  economies  of  those 
countries,  and  because  there  is  virtually  no  area 
which  is  not  contributing  in  .some  measure  to  our 
united  war  effort,  we  find  ourselves,  United  States 
and  United  Kingdom,  assuming  the  responsibility 
of  organizing  the  provision  for  the  basic  needs  of 
tbe  non-Axis  world. 

That  means  a  pretty  complete  disruption  of 
normal  lines  of  trade  and  a  disruption  equally  of 


468 


DEPAETMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


the  usual  commercial  channels.  One  of  our  steady 
persistent  pressures,  especially  now  as  all  but  a 
few  items  are,  while  short,  adequate  for  restricted 
needs,  is  to  restore  the  use  of  the  usual  importers 
and  exporters  with  their  connections  in  banking, 
insurance,  and  as  far  as  possible  in  shipping.  In- 
ertia is  hard  to  overcome,  and  foreign  govern- 
ments, which  have  learned  how  to  manage  trade, 
don't  let  go  easily  of  their  trade  controls. 

When  surpluses  come,  as  they  have  begun  to  in 
the  case  of  wool,  balsa,  and  shellac,  for  instance, 
we  are  faced  with  the  problem  of  cutting  back 
orders  to  fit  requirements,  although  we  may  have 
made  extensive  moral  commitments  abroad.  The 
State  Department  and  Foreign  Economic  Admin- 
istration have  their  more  extensive  headaches  with 
those  questions. 

As  these  supplies  become  easier  and  the  ship- 
ping more  abundant,  the  allocations  by  some  of 
these  boards  have  less  and  less  basis  in  supply  and 
shipping  considerations  and  more  and  more  in 
post-war  objectives  for  trade.  We  are  scrutiniz- 
ing those  decisions  thoroughly  and  reviewing  them 
to  get  rid  both  of  unnecessary  restrictions  and  of 
assignment  of  purchasing  or  selling  areas  that 
have  become  an  assignment  of  markets  divorced 
from  strictly  war  considerations. 

At  that  stage  you  have  to  define  your  objective 
for  post-war  trade.  My  chief,  in  his  speecli  of 
April  9,  reiterated  the  policy  of  tliis  Government: 

"The  heart  of  the  matter  lies  in  action  which 
will  stimulate  and  expand  production  in  industry 
and  agriculture  and  free  international  commerce 
from  excessive  and  unreasonable  restrictions. 
These  are  the  essential  prerequisites  to  maintain- 
ing and  improving  the  standard  of  living  in  our 
own  and  in  all  countries.  Production  cannot  go 
forward  without  arrangements  to  provide  invest- 
ment capital.  Trade  cannot  be  conducted  without 
stable  currencies  in  which  payments  can  be  pi'om- 
ised  and  made.  Trade  cannot  develop  unless  ex- 
cessive barriers  in  the  form  of  tariffs,  preferences, 
quotas,  exchange  controls,  monopolies,  and  sub- 
sidies, and  others  are  reduced  or  eliminated.  It 
needs  also  agreed  arrangements  under  which  com- 
munication systems  between  nations  and  transport 
by  air  and  sea  can  develop.  And  much  of  all  this 
will  miss  its  mark  of  satisfying  human  needs  unless 
we  take  agreed  action  for  the  improvement  of 


labor    standards    and    standards    of   health    and 
nutrition." 

Those  ideals  and  objectives  are  not  mere  gen- 
eralities. With  the  experience  of  10  years  in  ad- 
ministering the  trade-agreements  program,  the 
staff  of  the  State  Department  in  commercial  and 
commodity  policy  has  been  working  for  2  years  on 
very  specific  proposals  and  has  been  exploring  their 
practical  applications  with  the  British,  Canadians, 
and  Latin  American  countries. 

Against  the  program  you  have  first  the  old  high- 
tariff  ideas.  These  have  lost  any  general  support 
but  still  constitute  an  important  section  of  opinion. 

Against  this  program  also  you  have  the  program 
of  the  Federation  of  British  Industry  and  the  views 
expressed  recently  in  a  series  of  articles  in  the 
London  Economist.  These  views  call  for  a  sterl- 
ing bloc  of  the  United  Kingdom,  colonies,  and  the 
dominions,  \A\xs  the  nearby  European  powers. 
Within  that  bloc  would  be  a  managed  economy  on 
an  international  scale,  to  jDrotect  those  within  the 
bloc  from  the  competition  and  trade  and  financial 
policies  of  the  other  nations. 

I  will  only  say  tonight  that  whatever  you  may 
hear  at  the  moment,  tliere  is  a  large  and  I  believe 
preponderant  section  of  British  opinion  in  business 
and  in  government  to  the  contrary,  and  in  favor  of 
Secretary  Hull's  general  proposals.  That  is  alwaj'S 
on  the  condition  that  trade  is  so  restored  that 
Britain  can  export  all  that  it  must  export  to  pay 
for  the  things  it  must  import  if  it  is  to  live  at  all. 

But  the  most  dangerous  views  that  we  must  meet 
are  those  of  the  pessimist,  who  says:  Yes,  this  is 
all  right  in  theory,  and  I  would  go  along  if  it  were 
possible.  But  these  other  nations  will  only  look 
out  for  No.  1,  especially  the  British  and  Russians, 
and  in  the  end  we  shall  only  live  by  barter  and 
bilateral  exchanges  that  get  us  those  few  things  we 
need.  We  must  become  self-contained  and  stand 
by  our  own  strength.  So  speaks  the  pessimist  and 
jingo-nationalist. 

In  that  way  lies  disaster.  Our  metals  are  run- 
ning out,  and  so  may  our  oil  eventually  unless  we 
exercise  some  restraint  when  our  automobiles  go 
back  unrestrained  on  the  highways  after  the  war. 
Other  essentials  must  come  from  abroad,  and  in  50 
years,  like  the  British,  we  shall  have  to  export  to 
pay  for  the  things  we  need  for  life. 


MAT   20,    1944 

We  need  an  act  of  faith,  not  by  ourselves,  but 
jointly  with  the  British  Commonwealth  and  China 
and  the  other  great  trading  powers.  Russia  is  a 
state  trader,  but  there  is  already  evidence  that  that 
situation  can  be  met  by  amicable  agreement. 

We  sliall  travel  after  this  war,  as  our  i^eople  have 
always  traveled,  and  many  times  more  often.  The 
money  we  spend  abroad  enables  foreigners  to  buy 
our  goods. 

Every  country  will  need  industrial  rehabilita- 
tion and  reconstruction.  We  can  afford  to  give 
long  credits  at  low  interest  to  industrialize  them 
with  our  machinery,  for  that  makes  more  custom- 
ers, able  to  buy  more.  It  need  not  be  economic 
imperialism,  for,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Export- 
Import  Bank,  we  can  require  that  the  cost  of  local 
supplies  and  labor  for  projects  abroad  shall  be 
furnished  abroad,  and  at  least  50-percent  invest- 
ment from  the  foreign  nation.  An  industrialized 
world  with  adequate  labor  protection  and  social- 


469 

welfare  measures  means  that  we  do  not  need  to 
worry  in  the  end  about  cheap  labor.  In  the  mean- 
time our  productive  labor  has  shown  that  cheap 
labor  is  usually  not  as  productive  and  that  we  can 
compete  with  anybody  if  we  have  a  fair  chance 
without  controls  and  quotas  and  tariffs  in  foreign 
countries. 

Nobody  is  looking  for  free  trade.  Free  trade 
without  restriction  could  mean  utter  disruption 
of  successful  industries  and  major  unemployment 
in  spots.  But  the  automobile  industry  has  been 
only  one  demonstration— wheat  in  the  northwest 
states  is  anotlier— that  the  most  expert  industrial 
and  agricultural  country  in  the  world  does  not  need 
to  fear  competition.  Cheap  labor  is  inefficient 
labor.  We  can  afford  to  buy  foreign  products 
we  need  and  use  them  for  our  profit,  convenience, 
and  pleasure,  while  we  sell  ours  in  exchange, 
around  a  great  free  globe  of  peace  and  prosperity. 


SUPPLIES  FOR  LIBERATED  AREAS 

By  James  A.  Stillwell'- 


It  is  not  at  all  surprising  that  John  Q.  Public 
has  so  many  and  varied  misconceptions  concern- 
ing the  role  of  the  United  States  Government  in 
providing  supplies  for  the  relief  of  the  liberated 
populations  of  the  world.  Tlie  campaign  for  vic- 
tory, with  all  its  tremendous  problems  of  logistics 
and  its  requirements  of  secrecy,  cuts  across  so  many 
of  the  plans  for  relief  that  officials  with  direct  re- 
sponsibility often  develop  differing  viewpoints. 
Many  Government  officials  not  directly  connected 
with  these  operations  have  the  same  misconcep- 
tions of  the  problem  as  those  so  frequently  ex- 
pressed by  the  citizens  at  large. 

At  first  glance  this  state  of  affairs  may  sound 
appalling,  but  by  reviewing  the  varied  events  in 
the  development  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment's participation  in  the  foreign-relief  activities 
one  can  understand  much  easier  that  a  state  of 
confusion  could  exist.  A  review  of  those  events 
tends  to  develop  an  appreciative  attitude  toward 
the  groups  who  are  directly  responsible  for  pro- 
ducing relief  supplies. 

As  early  as  September  1941  a  group  of  officials 
in  the  United  Kingdom  began  to  lay  the  ground- 


work for  the  planning  of  civilian-supply  require- 
ments for  the  areas  of  Europe,  then  dominated  by 
the  Axis.  The  Allied  governments  realized  that 
this  was  a  problem  of  direct  concern.  Therefore, 
the  Inter-Allied  Committee  on  Post-War  Require- 
ments was  established  in  London  under  the  leader- 
ship of  Sir  Frederick  Leith-Ross.  The  purpose  of 
the  Committee  was  to  establish  over-all  require- 
ments for  food,  clothing,  medical  and  sanitary 
supplies,  and  temporary  slielter  that  would  be 
necessary  in  the  event  of  liberation  of  the  Axis- 
dominated  areas. 

Tins  Committee  worked  out  an  elaborate  set  of 
requirements  for  each  of  the  countries  under  Axis 
domination.  It  divided  these  programs  into  four 
"time  periods"  of  six  months  each,  developing  one 
set  of  figures  upon  what  was  called  an  "unscorched 
policy"  and  another  upon  what  was  called 
"scorched  policy".  Obviously,  on  an  unscorched 
assumption  the  damage  inflicted  bj^  a  retreating 
army  and  the  destruction  necessary  to  the  advance 


'  Mr.  Stillwell  is  Adviser  on  Supplies  in  the  Liberated 
Areas  Division,  Department  of  State. 


470 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


of  the  Allied  forces  were  assumed  to  be  negligible. 
The  importation  of  relief  supplies  under  such  con- 
ditions would  naturally  be  far  less  in  quantity  than 
that  necessary  under  any  condition  that  would  be 
likely  to  exist  following  the  defeat  of  the  Axis 
forces. 

The  figures  developed  on  the  second  assumption, 
oi-  scorched  policy,  pyramided  into  fantastic  pro- 
portions. In  the  developing  of  these  two  pro- 
grams, the  Committee  accumulated  a  great  mass  of 
invaluable  factual  data.  It  made  elaborate  studies 
of  the  eating  habits  in  the  various  countries  of 
Europe  and  drew  up  detailed  tables  of  the  nutri- 
tional value  of  food  consumed  and  the  average 
caloric  consumption  of  the  population  of  Europe. 
From  these  studies  the  Committee  developed  all 
the  subsequent  programs  of  food  requirements  for 
the  liberated  populations  of  Europe. 

The  Leith-Ross  committee  consisted  of  members 
from  the  United  Kingdom,  the  United  States,  and 
the  various  governments-in-exile.  United  States 
representatives,  however,  did  not  participate  ac- 
tively in  the  formulation  of  the  figures.  The  vari- 
ous technical  groups  drav>n  from  the  ^Ministry  of 
Food  and  from  the  Ministry  of  Supplies  of  the 
British  Government  did  the  actual  work  on  these 
studies. 

In  preparing  its  figiu-es,  the  Leith-Ross  com- 
mittee did  not  attempt  to  relate  the  requirements 
to  supply  availability  but  concentrated  its  efforts 
to  produce  requirements  figures  based  upon  arbi- 
trary assumptions. 

Early  in  March  1943  the  British  Government 
appointed  Sir  Hubert  Young  to  direct  a  system- 
atic revision  of  the  Leith-Ross  figures  based  upon 
actual  trends  and  anticipated  developments  in  the 
Allied  war  against  the  Axis. 

In  this  work  Sir  Hubert  Young  was  appointed 
as  working  assistant  to  Sir  Robert  Sinclair.  They 
established  various  working  parties  which  re- 
viewed the  figures  by  commodity  and  which  pro- 
duced voluminous  reports  concerning  every  pliase 
of  civilian  supply  in  the  liberated  countries. 

A  review  of  the  reports  of  the  Leith-Ross  com- 
mittee and  those  of  the  Young-Sinclair  working 
parties  would  prompt  many  people  to  say  that  a 
lot  of  paper  had  been  wasted  by  "stratosphere 
planning."  Such  a  statement,  however,  would  be 
a  gross  injustice  to  the  valuable  work  that  these 


two  connnittees  had  performed.  One  should  re- 
member that  the  "long  distance"  plamiing  which 
has  been  accomplished  in  Washington  could  never 
have  been  started  without  the  untold  amount  of 
factual  data  documented  by  the  Leith-Ross  com- 
mittee and  by  the  Young-Sinclair  woi'king  parties. 

Not  before  the  invasion  of  North  Africa  was 
being  planned  did  the  United  States  Government 
become  acutely  aware  of  the  practical  planning 
necessary  to  the  relief  of  the  oppressed  popula- 
tions of  occupied  areas. 

Officials  interested  in  post-war  relief  found  it 
extremely  difficult  to  divert  the  attention  of  the 
leaders  in  Washington  from  the  actual  prosecution 
of  the  war  to  the  intangible  job  of  planning  civilian 
supplies  for  sick  and  hungry  people  who,  we 
hoped,  might  be  liberated  in  the  near  future. 
Many  people,  to  be  sure,  looked  upon  this  Gov- 
ernment's first  step  toward  establishing  a  foreign- 
relief  organization  as  a  "glorified  world-wide 
WPA  project." 

Governor  Lehman  faced  a  rather  hostile  atmos- 
phere when  he  came  to  Washington  on  December 
4,  1942  as  Director  of  the  newly  established  Office 
of  Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Operations. 
Militai-y  leaders  were  too  busy  with  the  grim  busi- 
ness of  winning  a  war  and  officials  of  other  Gov- 
ernment agencies  were  too  engrossed  in  handling 
the  specific  essential  jobs  outlined  for  them  to  dis- 
cuss problems  of  relief  after  a  war  that  was  cer- 
tainly far  from  being  won.  To  complicate  Gov- 
ernor Lehman's  problem  further,  the  Office  of  For- 
eign Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Operations  received 
no  funds  to  activate  the  programs  of  relief  that 
it  had  established.  Director  Lehman  was  in- 
structed to  look  to  the  Lend-Lease  Administra- 
tion for  any  funds  necessary  for  the  procurement 
of  supplies  for  relief  purposes. 

This  type  of  procurement  was  an  entirelj'  new 
field  for  the  Lend-Lease  Administration,  particu- 
lai'ly  in  view  of  the  fact  that  all  of  its  previous 
activities  had  been  on  a  government-to-govern- 
ment basis ;  whereas,  the  handling  of  procurement 
for  the  Office  of  Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation 
was  a  very  indirect  business  and  one  that  would 
necessitate  uncertain  quantities  of  supplies  for  un- 
certain destinations.  This  plan  would  mean 
"stockpiling  relief  supplies".  Many  members  of 
Congress  and  the  allocating  authorities  in  Wash- 


MAT   20,    1944 


471 


ington  looked  upon  such  a  plan  with  A'ery  little 
favor. 

In  order  to  fulfil  its  responsibilities,  however, 
the  Lend-Lease  Administration  established  a  Lib- 
erated Areas  Branch  in  March  1943,  under  the  di- 
rection of  Mr.  Walter  Thaj'er.  In  the  meantime, 
the  Office  of  Foreign  Belief  and  Rehabilitation 
Operations  had  established  several  technical 
groups  who  were  producing  requirements  pro- 
grams for  the  relief  activities  that  they  antici- 
pated. They  had  established  also  a  Procurement 
Division  for  the  purpose  of  activating  these  pro- 
grams into  actual  goods. 

Thus  began  an  era  of  jurisdictional  difficulties. 

The  Lend-Lease  Administration  felt  its  respon- 
sibilities as  custodian  of  the  lend-lease  funds.  The 
Office  of  Foreign  Eelief  and  Rehabilitation  was 
keenly  aware  of  its  responsibilities  for  directing 
the  relief  role  to  be  played  by  this  Government  in 
liberated  areas.  Differences  of  ojjinion  would  in- 
evitable' arise  concerning  the  validity  and  even  the 
necessity  for  the  supplies  that  OFRRO  was  requi- 
sitioning. Effective  working  agreements  between 
the  two  organizations  were  soon  established,  how- 
ever, and  the  difficult  task  of  clearing  the  various 
hurdles  of  allocations  of  materials,  production 
priorities,  and  delivery  schedules  progressed. 

Both  the  Lend-Lease  Administration  and  the 
Office  of  Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  were 
having  personnel  difficulties  which  further  compli- 
cated this  process  of  development;  the  latter,  an 
entirely  new  organization,  was  forced  to  gather 
personnel  who  were  entirely  unfamiliai*  with  the 
intricate  processes  of  governmental  procurement. 
All  of  them  were  enthusiastic  in  their  main  ob- 
jective of  producing  a  program  of  civilian  sup- 
plies for  the  suffering  populations  of  Europe,  but 
they  were  definitely  annoyed  when  those  programs 
were  not  promptly  translated  into  terms  of  actual 
supplies.  Before  the  meshing  of  the  gears  of  the 
new  philosophy  of  lelief  could  be  synchronized 
with  that  of  the  prosecution  of  the  war  policy 
existent  in  Washington  OFRRO  and  Lend-Lease 
Administration  experienced  a  period  of  change. 

Mr.  Walter  Thaj'er  of  the  Lend-Lease  Adminis- 
tration had  been  called  to  London  to  assume  an 
important  position  on  the  staff  of  Mr.  Averill  Har- 
riman's  mission  in  London ;  the  Assistant  Director 

588741 — 14 2 


of  Liberated  Areas  Branch,  Mr.  John  O'Boyle,  was 
called  into  Uncle  Sam's  Army ;  Mr.  Rupert  Emer- 
son, formerly  Regional  Administrator  for  the 
Office  of  Price  Administration,  was  brought  to  the 
Lend-Lease  Administration  to  head  a  new  Lib- 
erated Areas  Division;  and  the  writer  was  ap- 
pointed as  Deputy  Director  to  assist  in  the  reor- 
ganization and  enlargement  of  the  Division. 

By  this  time,  because  of  the  lack  of  tangible  evi- 
dence of  progress,  the  officials  of  the  Office  of 
Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  were  becoming 
increasingly  impatient.  The  very  excellent 
groundwork  done  by  Messrs.  Thayer  and  O'Boyle 
enabled  the  new  Liberated  Areas  Division  to  pro- 
duce some  early  results  for  OFRRO  in  the  form  of 
actual  contracts  for  the  procurement  of  the  goods. 

The  purchase  of  supplies  for  relief  purposes  was 
restricted  to  those  items  which  required  a  lengthy 
period  of  manufacture  and  which  were  of  common 
need  to  all  areas.  To  have  procured  large  quan- 
tities of  food  supplies  or  other  perishable  products, 
since  the  fact  of  liberation  was  undeterminable, 
would  have  been  impracticable. 

Contracts  were  made,  therefore,  for  the  procure- 
ment of  shoes,  used  clothing,  a  few  textile  materials, 
and  a  variety  of  hand  tools  and  other  small  equip- 
ment necessary  to  a  relief  operation.  One  should 
point  out  that  procurement  was  approved  only  for 
those  items  that  would  obviously  be  required  from 
this  country's  production,  and  that  procurement 
was  limited  to  quantities  that  could  be  only  a  mere 
token  of  the  actual  requirements. 

Several  million  pairs  of  shoes  suitable  for  relief 
purposes  were  procured,  sorted,  and  packed  for  ex- 
port. Since  these  shoes  were  secured  from  dis- 
tressed stocks,  the  civilian  supply  of  this  country 
was  not  affected.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  leather 
was  in  extremely  short  supply,  a  shoe  was  designed 
to  be  made  primarily  of  canvas  uppers  with  compo- 
sition soles.  Contracts  were  let  with  several  manu- 
facturers to  produce  several  million  pairs  of  this 
type  of  shoe.  As  a  result,  approximately  13,- 
OOO.nOO  pairs  of  shoes,  at  the  average  cost  of  $1.33  a 
pair,  will  be  in  stockpile  ready  for  relief  use  by 
July  1944. 

The  procurement  of  supplies  for  relief  purposes 
presents  many  more  problems  than  any  other  type 
of    procurement,   pai'ticularly    while    all   of    the 


472 


DEPAETMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Nation's  industries  are  busy  producing  materials 
for  war. 

It  was  essential  that  any  items  procured  for 
relief  purposes  should  not  create  an  undue  burden 
either  on  the  material  supply  or  on  the  production 
facilities  of  this  country.  Public  opinion  must 
also  be  taken  into  account.  Many  persons  thought 
that  the  American  public  did  not  look  favorably 
upon  restrictive  rationing,  even  though  the  pro- 
curement of  large  quantities  of  relief  supplies 
had  caused  that  restriction.  To  make  up  relief 
supplies  of  those  items  which  could  be  supplied, 
as  far  as  possible,  without  an  undue  drain  on  the 
civilian  economy  was  important ;  and  to  maintain 
the  position  of  the  American  taxpayer  by  holding 
the  cost  of  relief  goods  to  the  lowest  possible  figure 
was  essential. 

With  those  factors  in  mind,  procurement  officials 
were  instructed  to  take  advantage  of  all  used 
materials  available.  As  a  result  of  this  instruc- 
tion, thev  had  to  face  many  more  complicated 
problems. 

From  a  political  point  of  view,  the  peoples  of 
Europe  wlio  would  be  the  recipients  of  those  relief 
goods  had  to  be  given  some  consideration.  The 
benevolence  of  the  United  States  Government 
would  not  be  particularly  impressive  to  those  peo- 
ples if  we  attempted  to  present  them  with 
worn-out,  tattered  clothing  and  broken-down 
equipment  as  our  effort  toward  their  relief.  Con- 
sequently, the  procurement  of  used  materials  had 
to  be  directed  in  a  sensible  manner. 

The  procurement  of  used  articles  also  presented 
many  operational  difficulties.  For  example,  the 
purcliase  of  new  clothing  necessary  to  clothe  a 
stated  number  of  individuals  of  all  ages  is  rela- 
tively simple  since  it  can  be  ordered  by  specific 
sizes,  qualities,  and  amounts.  Used  clothing, 
which  generally  must  be  repaired  and  disinfected, 
cannot  be  gathered  by  any  definite  specifications. 
The  piocess  of  sorting,  disinfecting,  repairing, 
and  packing  is  in  itself  a  major  operation.  The 
procurement  contracts,  however,  alM'ays  include 
specific  packing  instructions  so  that  when  the  arti- 
cles are  finished  they  are  delivered  to  the  trans- 
portation agents  properly  packed,  marked,  and 
ready  for  shipment. 

In  spite  of  all  these  difficulties,  large  amounts 
of  used  garments  of  all  types,  including  blankets, 
were  assembled  and  made  ready  for  export. 


Neither  the  Office  of  Foreign  Relief  and  E«- 
Iiabilitation  nor  the  Office  of  Lend-Lease  Admini- 
stration had  any  specific  information  concerning 
when,  wliere,  or  how  much  of  these  goods  would 
be  needed.  This  fact  made  all  these  operations 
more  difficult. 

Tlie  War  Department  had  also  been  drawn  into 
the  relief  business  by  virtue  of  its  participation  in 
tlie  invasion  of  Sicily  and  Italy.  The  War  De- 
partment's basic  philosophy  concerning  civilian 
supplies  in  liberated  areas  was  drawn  from  the 
rules  adopted  at  the  Geneva  Conference.  Under 
these  rules,  the  armed  forces  were  obligated  to 
prevent  starvation  and  the  spread  of  disease  and 
pestilence  among  the  people  .of  the  areas  they  oc- 
cupy. They  could  fulfil  this  obligation  by  dis- 
tributing basic  Army  rations  to  starving  people 
and  by  applying  simple  precautions  for  their 
health  and  sanitation. 

The  Secretary  of  War,  soon  realizing,  however, 
lliat  the  regular  operational  divisions  of  the  Army 
could  not  be  expected  to  handle  properly  the  civil- 
ian-sui)ply  problems  presented  by  the  liberation  of 
large  jiopulations,  established  a  Civilian  Affairs 
Division  in  his  General  Staff  and  appointed  Maj. 
Gen.  John  H.  Hilldring  as  its  Director.  This 
Civilian  Affairs  Division  was  to  be  responsible  for 
the  establishing  of  policies,  the  programming  of 
requirements,  and  the  administering  of  the  relief 
activities  of  the  Army  in  all  areas  where  the 
United  States  was  to  participate  in  military 
operations. 

With  so  many  different  organizations  dealing 
with  relief  problems  for  the  same  areas  and  with 
no  definite  understanding  among  them  as  to  the 
specific  responsibilities  of  each,  a  general  state 
of  confusion  naturally  developed.  For  this  rea- 
son, the  Department  of  State  was  directed  to 
establish  the  Office  of  Foreign  Economic  Coordina- 
tion .under  the  direction  of  Assistant  Secretary 
Dean  Acheson.  This  Office  was  to  provide  a  forum 
wliere  jurisdictional  questions  among  the  various 
agencies  could  be  heard  and  general  agreements 
could  be  reached  concerning  the  operations  of  this 
Government's  relief  activities.  Up  until  this  time, 
little  attention  had  been  given  to  the  problem  of 
coordinating  the  Anglo-American  view  of  relief 
operations.  Obviously,  this  coordination  was 
necessary  if  we  expected  the  United  Kingdom  to 
bear  a  part  of  the  material  and  financial  burden. 


MAY    20,    1944 


473 


The  idea  of  an  international  relief  organization 
had  been  quite  generally  discussed,  but  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United  States  and  the  United 
Kingdom  recognized  that  they  would  have  to  bear 
the  major  portion  of  the  cost. 

The  very  nature  of  our  military  relations  with 
the  United  Kingdom  made  it  simple  to  establish 
a  combined  mechanism  for  handling  military  re- 
lief problems.  The  Combined  Civil  Affairs  Com- 
mittee was  therefore  organized  under  the  Com- 
bined Chiefs  of  Stall'  for  the  purpose  of  dealing 
with  the  civilian-supply  problems  which  directly 
affected  military  operations.  Thus  civilian-sup- 
ply problems  in  Italy  became  a  proper  subject  for 
the  Combined  Civil  Affairs  Committee.  No  one 
knew  just  how,  when,  or  where  military  respon- 
sibilit^v  would  cease  and  civilian  responsibility 
would  begin. 

These  are  a  few  of  the  problems  which  Mr. 
Acheson's  coordinating  committee  had  to  face.  All 
the  civilian  agencies  directly  concerned  with  I'elief 
activities  were  represented  on  the  Committee. 
General  Hilldring  was  the  War  Department's  rep- 
resentative. The  early  sessions  of  the  Committee 
served  to  outline  prominently  the  disorganized 
state  of  this  Government's  relief  efforts  and  to 
establish  the  necessity  for  the  combined  planning 
of  the  United  States  and  United  Kingdom  civilian 
organization  and  for  the  direct  coordination  of 
those  plans  with  the  military  relief  programs. 

The  Committee  could  not  possibly  relate  the 
civilian  agencies'  responsibilities  to  definite  time 
periods,  because  when  a  so-called  military  period 
would  start  or  end  was  not  known;  nor  could  the 
Committee  determine  which  civilian  agency  would 
assume  operational  responsibilities  when  the 
period  of  military  responsibility  had  ended. 

Negotiation  necessary  to  the  establishment  of 
an  international  relief  organization  had  been  quite 
successful.  On  November  9,  1943,  forty-four  na- 
tions signed  the  agreement  to  participate  in  an 
international  relief  effort. 

Representatives  of  these  forty-four  nations  at- 
tended the  first  conference  of  the  United  Nations 
Relief  and  Reliabilitation  Administration  in  At- 
lantic City  from  November  9  through  December  3, 
1943.  Governor  Lehman,  the  Director  of  the  Office 
of  Foreign  Relief  and  Rehabilitation,  was  unani- 
mously elected  as  the  Director  General  of  this  new 


international  organization,  and  Mi'.  Acheson 
became  the  United  States  member  of  the  council. 

It  was  generally  understood  that  the  United 
Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration 
would  absorb  the  personnel  of  the  Office  of  Foreign 
Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Operations. 

The  President,  in  the  meantime,  had  issued  an 
Executive  order  for  the  amalgamation  of  the  Lend- 
Lease  Achninistration,  the  Office  of  Foreign  Eco- 
nomic Coordination,  the  Office  of  Foreign  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Operations,  the  Office  of  Eco- 
nomic Warfare,  and  the  United  States  Commercial 
Corporation  into  one  agency:  the  Foreign  Eco- 
nomic Administration.  Tliis  amalgamation  elimi- 
nated most  of  the  difficulty  of  determining  which 
civilian  agency  would  be  responsible  for  relief  ac- 
tivities; but  it  did  not  establish  the  relative  re- 
sponsibilities of  the  military,  the  United  States 
civilian  agencies,  and  the  United  Nations  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Administration.  The  United 
States  Army  was  the  only  agency  of  this  Govern- 
ment directly  involved  in  current  civilian-supply 
problems  in  Italy.  The  military  leaders  were  not 
eager  to  continue  handling  the  relief  problems  in 
the  liberated  areas,  but  no  other  agency  existed,  at 
that  particular  time,  to  which  they  could  transfer 
this  responsibility. 

On  November  10  the  President  addressed  a  letter 
to  Secretary  of  War  Stimson  directing  the  War 
Department  to  assume  the  responsibility  for  ship- 
ping and  distributing  relief  supplies  to  the  civilian 
populations  of  liberated  areas  until  such  time  as 
the  civilian  agencies  would  be  in  a  position  to  take 
over  the  longer-range  program  of  relief. 

AVith  the  placing  of  this  new  responsibility  upon 
the  War  Department  and  with  the  establishment  of 
UNRRA,  plus  the  organization  of  FEA,  the  char- 
acter of  the  work  to  be  done  within  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  concerning  relief  operations  was 
materially  changed.  A  residual  part  of  the  Office 
of  Foreign  Economic  Coordination  was,  therefore, 
retained  in  the  Department  of  State  as  the  Office 
of  the  Special  Adviser  on  Liberated  Areas,  and 
early  in  November  1943  several  area  and  func- 
tional advisers  to  Assistant  Secretary  Dean  Ache- 
son  were  appointed  to  carry  out  the  work  neces- 
sary in  the  liberated-areas  activities. 

One  of  these  positions  was  designated  for  an 
Adviser  on  Supplies  for  Liberated  Areas,  whose 


474 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


duty  was  to  advise  the  FEA  and  the  War  Depart- 
ment on  foreign-policy  questions  in  supplying  the 
liberated  areas.  The  course  of  events  required 
what  in  effect  was  coordination  by  the  Department 
of  State  between  the  United  States  agencies, 
UNRRA.  and  the  governments-in-exile. 

In  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  War  Department 
had  had  no  previous  direct  responsibility  for  for- 
mulating plans  and  for  preparing  the  programs 
of  civilian  supplies  for  liberated  areas,  it  was  ob- 
viously a  military  necessity  in  the  immediate  zone 
of  operations  and  therefore  essential  to  prepare 
such  plans  as  promptly  as  possible.  Procurement 
of  supplies  had  to  be  coordinated  under  one  general 
plan.  Furthermore,  the  progress  of  the  war  in 
Europe  made  it  quite  obvious  that  this  Govern- 
ment would  be  caught  again  in  the  position  of  "too 
little  and  too  late"  unless  quick  results  could  be 
obtained  in  the  field  of  actual  procurement  of  nec- 
essary relief  supplies. 

On  November  17, 1943  General  Hilldring  called 
a  meeting  of  what  he  designated  as  an  Ad  Hoc 
Economic  Committee  to  discuss  the  activation  of 
the  President's  directive  to  the  War  Department 
concerning  its  civilian-supply  activities.  Since 
most  of  the  members  of  the  Division  of  Economic 
Affairs  of  the  Department  of  State  and  the  offi- 
cials of  the  Liberated  Areas  Division  of  FEA  were 
attending  the  UNRRA  Conference  in  Atlantic 
City,  the  Adviser  on  Supplies  of  the  Department 
of  State  attended  the  meeting,  representing  both 
the  Liberated  Areas  of  the  Department  and  the 
Liberated  Areas  of  FEA. 

At  that  meeting  the  Committee  drew  up  plans 
whereby  a  working  relationship  between  FEA,  the 
DeiJartment  of  State,  and  the  War  Department 
would  be  immediately  established  for  the  purpose 
of  preparing  a  program  of  supplies  for  liberated 
areas. 

A  Supply  Subcommittee  which  had  been  estab- 
lished under  the  jurisdiction  of  the  old  OFEC  had 
made  very  little  progress  toward  accomplishing 
a  combined  United  States  -  United  Kingdom  pro- 
gram for  the  countries  of  Europe.  This  Commit- 
tee, consisting  of  representation  from  the  British 
Embassy  Staff,  the  Department  of  State,  FEA, 
and  the  International  Division  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment, attempted  a  reconciliation  of  the  Young- 
Sinclair  figures  with  those  which  OFRRO  had 


produced.  It  failed  to  accomplish  tliis  purpose, 
mainly  because  of  the  lack  of  a  coordinated  Ameri- 
can view.  The  Committee  had,  however,  succeeded 
in  performing  the  very  useful  function  of  an  oper- 
ating facility  for  clearance  of  current  requests  from 
the  Allied  military  leaders  in  Italy  for  many  types 
of  items  which  the  supply  authorities  of  either 
the  United  States  or  United  Kingdom  military 
organizations  had  failed  to  procure. 

Up  until  that  time  the  War  Department  had 
taken  the  position  that  it  could  supply  only  those 
items  for  civilian  relief  which  were  already  in- 
cluded in  its  regular  Army  supply  program.  Con- 
sequently, it  called  upon  the  Lend-Lease  Division 
of  FEA  to  procure  such  things  as  clothing  and 
textiles,  agricultural  implements,  seeds,  pesticides, 
and  fertilizers. 

The  handling  of  civilian  affairs  in  Italy  and  of 
the  requisitions  from  General  Eisenhower  had  long 
since  pointed  out  the  necessity  of  supplying  items 
that  would  assist  the  liberated  people  to  produce 
food,  clothing,  and  other  supplies  essential  to  the 
relief  within  the  area  liberated.  Actual  impor- 
tation of  civilian  supplies  into  the  liberated  areas 
of  Sicily  and  Italy  was  increasing  at  such  a  rapid 
rate  that  if  continued  it  would  have  been  necessary 
to  import,  within  a  very  few  months,  all  of  the 
consumer  goods  necessary  to  civilian  existence. 
The  civilian-affairs  officials  of  the  Allied  armies 
backed  by  the  Allied  commander  began  calling 
frantically  for  the  importation  of  agricultural- 
production  goods,  particularly  seeds,  fertilizers, 
and  many  types  of  repair  equipment,  so  that  both 
the  agricultural  and  industrial  facilities  could  be 
put  to  work  producing  indigenous  supplies. 

Fortunately,  the  old  Liberated  Areas  Division 
of  Lend-Lease  and  the  Office  of  Foreign  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  persomiel  had  continued  to  pro- 
cure and  stockjDile  several  basic  items  which  they 
were  quite  certain  would  be  necessary  in  relief 
operations.  Up  to  that  time,  many  people  had 
roundly  criticized,  both  publicly  and  privately, 
those  activities. 

Only  through  these  stockpiles  was  the  United 
States  Army  able  to  meet  several  emergency  situa- 
tions, to  avert  chaotic  conditions  developing 
among  the  civilian  populations,  and  to  make  emer- 
gency shipments  of  clothing  during  the  winter 
months  for  approximately  400,000  men,  women, 


MAY    2  0,     1944 


475 


and  children  in  Italy.  It  was  able  to  deliver,  also, 
several  thousand  tons  of  fertilizers,  seed  potatoes, 
pesticides,  coal-mine  repair  equipment,  and  many 
other  essential  items  that  could  not  have  been  ob- 
tained had  the  stockpiles  not  been  developed. 

These  experiences  were  of  inestimable  value  in 
re-orienting  the  general  approach  to  the  problems 
of  civilian  relief  and  supply. 

On  December  21,  1943  General  Hilldring,  Chief 
of  the  Civil  Affairs  Division  of  tlie  General  Staff, 
formed  a  working  party  of  representatives  of  the 
Doixirtnient  of  State.  FEA,  and  the  International 
Division  of  the  Army  to  produce  a  program  of 
sujiplies  for  all  the  areas  of  Europe  to  be  liberated. 
The  pi'ograni  had  to  be  of  such  a  character  that  it 
would  receive  the  consolidated  support  of  all 
American  agencies. 

Since  the  military  period  of  operations  in  Euro- 
pean areas  could  not  be  determined  and  since  it 
was  not  known  when  the  invasion  would  start,  the 
working  party  agreed  that  a  program  should  be 
jiroduced  which  would  be  so  modest  in  character 
that  immediate  procurement  could  be  undertaken. 

For  this  reason,  the  first  six  months  were  desig- 
nated, merely  for  the  convenience  of  planning,  as 
the  "military  period".  However,  in  some  areas 
the  military  authorities  would  have  to  maintain 
control  of  civilian-supply  activities  for  much 
longer  than  six  months,  whereas  in  other  areas 
military  control  might  not  be  necessary  for  longer 
than  one,  two,  or  three  months. 

The  working  parties  were  directed  to  produce  a 
complete  program  within  seven  days'  time.  They 
operated  day  and  night,  drawing  together  factual 
data  from  the  studies  made  by  the  Leith-Ross 
committee,  Young-Sinclair  working  parties,  the 
OFRRO  organization,  and  the  technical  staffs  of 
the  War  Department.  They  produced  two  sets  of 
figures,  designated  as  "Plan  A"  and  "Plan  B". 

Plan  A  was  based  upon  the  assumption  of  a  com- 
plete collapse  of  the  Axis  in  Europe  by  February 
1,  1944  and  no  scorching  in  the  areas  liberated. 
Plan  B  was  developed  on  the  assumption  of  col- 
lapse during  the  early  months  of  the  year  but  with 
considerable  amount  of  scorching  in  the  areas 
liberated.  A  variation  of  these  plans,  assuming 
collapse  during  the  fall  season  of  the  year,  was 
developed  to  determine  the  essential  diffei'ences  in 
the  requirements  of  a  particular  area  for  the  dif- 
ferent seasons  of  the  year. 

riSS741 — 44 3 


About  January  1,  1944,  the  supply  officials  of 
the  United  States  Army  presented  Plan  A  to  the 
British  Army  Staff  for  concurrence,  through  the 
Supply  Subcommittee  of  the  Combined  Civil  Af- 
fairs Committee.  The  British  referred  the  figures 
to  the  War  Office  in  Loudon,  and  several  discus- 
sions between  the  British  Military,  United  States 
Military,  the  Department  of  State,  and  FEA 
representatives  ensued,  before  the  CCAC  gave  the 
program  official  approval  on  February  17,  1944. 

Plan  A  in  its  original  form  included  supplies 
of  food,  medical  and  sanitary  supplies,  soap, 
petroleum,  coal,  clothing,  textiles,  shoes,  and  agri- 
cultural-production goods  for  all  the  countries  of 
Europe  except  Germany  and  Austria.  The  plan 
included  only  a  small  quantity  of  supplies  for  the 
relief  of  a  portion  of  Allied  prisoners  of  war  and 
alien  forced-labor  battalions  within  Germany  and 
Austria.  It  provided  no  goods  for  the  relief  of 
German  nationals,  pending  determination  of  policy 
on  the  treatment  of  Germany  after  surrender. 

The  food  program  in  Plan  A  was  based  upon 
tonnages  necessary  to  supplement  the  indigenous 
supplies.  In  a  country  wliere  a  part  of  the  popula- 
tion is  receiving  on  the  present  ration  only  1,500 
calories  per  da_y  per  person,  Plan  A  provides  suffi- 
cient food  to  supply  an  additional  500  calories  a  day 
for  each  jDerson.  At  best,  these  tonnages  will  prob- 
ably supply  only  enough  food  to  bring  the  per- 
capita  intake  of  persons  now  receiving  less  than, 
2j000  calories  a  day  up  to  that  level,  which,  accord- 
ing to  nutritionists,  is  the  minimum  for  bare  sub- 
sistence. The  average  dailj'  consumption  of  food 
by  the  people  in  the  United  States  is  about  3,400 
calories.  Tonnages  of  food  in  Plan  A  would  pro- 
vide only  7  percent  of  the  calories  consumed  in  the 
same  areas  in  a  corresponding  pre-war  period. 

By  volume,  Plan  A  calls  for  the  importation  of 
about  3,300,000  metric  tons  of  food  to  the  liberated 
areas  of  Europe  during  the  first  6-month  period. 
To  the  average  individual  that  may  appear  to  be  a 
staggering  figure,  and  the  figures  as  such  should 
be  cautiously  used.  The  conunon  belief  of  the 
American  people  is  that  the  United  States  will  have 
to  be  the, "bread  basket"  for  all  the  suffering  popu- 
lations of  the  world  for  a  period  of  time  after  the 
war  is  won.  For  this  reason,  the  average  person 
would  automatically  assume  that  a  major  portion 
of  the  3,300,000  tons  of  food  would  have  to  come 
from  the  United  States. 


476 


DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE    BULLETIISi 


The  facts  are  quite  contrary  to  the  general  im- 
pression. Of  the  total  amount  of  food  required  in 
Plan  A,  supply  authorities  estimate  that  only  about 
16  percent  to  20  percent  by  voliune  will  have  to  be 
furnished  from  the  United  States.  This  estimate 
can  be  easily  understood  upon  proper  analysis  of 
the  content  of  the  food  program.  Of  the  3,300,000 
tons  of  food  required,  wheat  alone  makes  up  a 
total  of  2,500,000  tons.  The  United  States  is  not 
a  major  source  for  exportable  surpluses  of  wheat. 
Approximately  95  percent  of  the  wheat  will  have 
to  come  from  sources  outside  the  United  States, 
such  as  Canada,  Australia,  India,  and  Argentina. 
By  volume,  the  United  States  will  probably  be  the 
source  of  supply  for  less  than  15  percent  of  the 
total  requirements.  That  volume,  however,  will 
represent  approximately  55  percent  to  60  percent 
of  the  dollar  value  of  the  total  program,  since  the 
items  which  the  United  States  must  furnish  in 
quantity,  such  as  medical  supplies,  clothing,  tex- 
tiles, shoes,  and  agricultural  equipment,  have  a 
much  higher  unit  cost  than  do  foodstuffs  and  coal. 

The  officials  of  the  Army  Service  Forces  of  the 
United  States  Army  have  constantly  maintained 
the  position  that  they  should  procure  only  those 
items  common  to  their  regular  Army  Supply  Pro- 
gram. They,  therefore,  requested  the  officials  of 
the  FEA  to  assume  the  responsibility  for  the  pro- 
curement of  the  clothing,  textiles,  shoes,  and  agri- 
cultural-production goods  included  in  Plan  A. 
Since  some  sort  of  machinery,  under  this  arrange- 
ment, was  necessary  to  coordinate  the  views  of 
FEA,  the  Department  of  State,  and  the  Army  on 
problems  of  supply,  the  United  States  Procure- 
ment Committee  was  established  on  about  Febru- 
ary 1,  1944.  Its  members  consisted  of  the  Chief 
of  the  International  Division,  United  States 
Army;  Procurement  Officer,  Liberated  Areas 
Branch,  FEA;  and  the  Adviser  on  Supplies,  De- 
partment of  State.  The  chief  purpose  of  this 
Committee  was  to  iron  out  the  operational  difficul- 
ties encountered  in  attempting  to  place  the  United 
States  portion  of  Plan  A  into  actual  procurement ; 
and  in  order  to  carry  out  its  responsibilities,  the 
Committee  secured  the  cooperation  of  the  various 
governmental  agencies  which  had  a  direct  inter- 
est in  the  supply  problems.  The  Committee  estab- 
lished, as  a  result,  the  practice  of  providing  a 
forum  where  such  agencies  as  the  War  Shipping 
Administration,    the    Treasury,   WPB,    and    the 


technical-service  branches  of  the  Army  could  ex- 
press their  views  concerning  the  supply  problems 
presented. 

Even  after  Plan  A  was  produced  in  its  original 
form,  a  tremendous  amount  of  work  was  necessary 
before  the  program  could  be  submitted  to  allocat- 
ing authorities  for  recommendations  concerning 
sources  of  supply.  The  technical  staffs  of  FEA 
and  the  service  branches  of  the  Army  presented, 
through  the  facilities  of  the  United  States  Pro- 
curement Committee,  detailed  specifications  of  all 
the  requirements. 

If  the  United  States  Procurement  Committee 
could  have  submitted  all  of  the  program  to  one 
committee  or  to  one  industry  division  of  the  War 
Production  Board,  the  United  States  allocating 
authority  for  supplies  other  than  food,  the  mat- 
ter of  securing  advice  from  the  supply  authorities 
would  have  been  reasonably  easy.  But  the  proc- 
ess was  not  so  simple  as  that. 

It  was  necessary  to  submit  the  food  and  soap 
requirements  of  the  program  to  the  War  Food 
Administration.  However,  several  different  divi- 
sions of  WPB  handle  the  allocation  of  other  com- 
modities in  the  program,  such  as  medical  and  sani- 
tary supplies,  which  consist  of  some  7,000  items. 
That  part  of  the  program  as  well  as  many  other 
parts  had  to  be  broken  down  so  that  it  could  be 
presented  to  the  proper  authorities.  Coal  is  un- 
der the  jui'isdiction  of  the  Solid  Fuels  Adminis- 
trator; petroleum  allocations  are  handled  by  the 
Army  and  Navy  Petroleum  Board ;  textiles,  cloth- 
ing, and  shoes  come  under  the  authority  of  the 
Textile  Industry  Division  of  WPB ;  and  agricul- 
tural-machinery part  of  the  agricultural  program  J 
comes  under  the  jurisdiction  of  another  industry  ■ 
division  of  WPB ;  and  the  fertilizer  and  part  of 
the  agricultural  program  come  under  the  juris- 
diction of  both  the  War  Food  Administration  and 
the  WPB. 

One  should  readily  understand,  therefore,  that 
the  presentation  of  the  program  (Plan  A)  to  allo- 
cating authorities  was  a  major  operation. 

Many  meetings  were  held,  both  at  high  and  low 
levels,  concerning  the  apparent  lack  of  progress 
in  the  implementation  of  Plan  A. 

In  the  meantime,  however,  the  United  States 
Army  had  decided  that  it  had  no  direct  respon- 
sibility for  programming  supplies  for  the  countries 
of  Eastern  Europe  and  therefore  did  not  feel 


MAY    2  0,     10  11 


477 


justified  in  requesting  allocating  authorities  to 
indicate  sources  of  supply  for  the  part  of  Plan  A 
designated  for  that  area.  Several  conferences 
were  held  among  the  officials  of  FEA,  the  De- 
partment of  State,  and  the  War  Department  con- 
cerning this  problem.  Subsequently,  an  agree- 
ment was  reached  whereby  the  War  Department 
would  be  responsible  for  the  programming  and 
procuring  of  the  supplies  to  come  from  the  United 
States  destined  for  Western  Europe,  Germany, 
Austria,  and  that  part  of  Italy  yet  to  be  liberated. 
Supplies  for  the  Balkans,  Southern  Italy,  Sicily, 
and  Sardinia  would  be  handled  as  a  direct  Lend- 
Lease  operation,  but  FEA  would  transfer  the  sup- 
plies so  procured  to  the  United  States  Army  for 
transportation  to  the  ultimate  destination.  It  was 
assumed  that  in  the  part  of  Eastern  Europe  which 
is  to  be  the  scene  of  Russian  military  operations, 
the  primary  responsibility  for  civilian  supplies 
during  the  military  period  would  be  the  direct 
concern  of  the  Soviet  forces,  and  any  assistance 
required  from  the  United  States  would  be  given 
through  the  mechanics  of  the  Soviet  Lend-Lease 
Protocol. 

In  accordance  with  these  agreements,  the  De- 
partment of  State,  FEA,  and  the  War  Department 
prepared  a  combined  statement  which  they  pre- 
sented to  the  Appropriations  Committee  of  the 
House  of  Representatives,  and  from  which  they 
drew  up  the  budgets  for  the  fiscal  year  1945. 

^Vlien  the  American  allocating  authorities  had 
made  their  recommendations  concerning  the  source 
of  supply,  they  presented  those  recommendations 
to  the  Combined  Boards  for  official  Anglo-Ameri- 
can opinions. 

Upon  receipt  of  a  source-of-supply  recommen- 
dation from  the  Combined  Boards,  the  combined 
United  States  -  United  Kingdom  military  author- 
ities had  to  determine  procurement  responsibility 
as  between  these  respective  countries.  That  is  the 
point  which  has  now  been  reached. 

From  the  procedural  difficulties  outlined  above, 
it  is  surprising  that  any  supplies  have  been  pro- 
cured. Actually,  however,  when  the  final  agree- 
ment is  reached  in  a  few  days  as  to  procurement 
responsibility  on  the  total  requirements  of  Plan  A, 
enough  supplies  will  already  have  been  procured 
in  stockpile  to  cover  at  least  50  percent  of  the  pro- 
gram. Because  of  the  previous  procurement  activ- 
ities on  the  old  OFRRO  programs,  the  FEA  will 


have  sufficient  quantities  of  clothing,  shoes,  tex- 
tiles, and  agricultural  equipment  to  meet  a  large 
percentage  of  the  United  States  share.  Sizeable 
quantities  of  medical  and  sanitary  supplies,  soap 
and  food  can  be  drawn  from  the  Army  stockpiles. 
At  the  same  time,  pi-ocurement  has  been  proceed- 
ing in  the  United  Kingdom  to  the  extent  that  that 
nation  will  be  able  to  provide  its  share  of  Plan  A 
for  a  90-day  period  from  existing  stockpiles.  Ad- 
ditional procurement  will  be  necessary,  of  course, 
but  the  actual  ability  to  meet  urgent  demands  is 
far  greater  than  is  generally  realized. 

In  the  United  States  procurement  has  also  pro- 
gressed enough  to  be  in  a  position  to  negotiate  cost 
responsibility  with  the  United  Kingdom.  This 
negotiation  is  now  under  way. 

Of  course,  Plan  A  is  not  a  complete  program  of 
relief  for  the  Liberated  Areas  of  Europe,  nor  is  it 
a  fixed  program  for  the  military  period.  It  covers 
only  a  six-month  period,  and  it  is  expected  that 
the  i-evision  processes  will  be  continuous  and  will 
be  based  on  actual  reports  from  the  field. 

The  completion  of  this  first  effort,  however,  has 
provided  a  basic  program  against  which  procure- 
ment has  proceeded,  and  the  process  of  its  de- 
velopment has  established  the  machinery  through 
which  revisions  and  additional  progi'ams  can  be 
greatly  facilitated. 

Some  progress  has  been  made  toward  establish- 
ing a  direct  coordination  between  the  program 
for  the  military  period  with  the  programs  being 
developed  by  UNRRA  for  subsequent  periods.  It 
is  anticipated,  however,  that  UNRRA  will  operate 
only  in  those  areas  where  the  indigenous  Allied 
govermnents  are  not  capable  of  handling  their 
own  post-military  relief  activities.  Some  of  these 
governments  may  be  able  to  pay  for  the  supplies 
distributed  during  the  military  period.  The  re- 
cipients themselves  will  pay  for  much  of  the  food 
and  equipment,  which  is  more  correctly  described 
as  civilian  supply  than  as  relief. 

The  total  burden  upon  the  United  States  for 
relief  supplies  to  Liberated  Areas  cannot,  at  this 
time,  be  determined.  If,  however,  this  discussion 
of  Plan  A  clears  up  some  of  the  misconceptions 
concerning  the  extent  and  the  scope  of  this  Gov- 
ernment's plans  for  providing  civilian  supplies  to 
the  liberated  populations  of  the  world,  it  will 
have  accomplished  a  useful  purpose. 


478 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


EXTENSION  OF  THE  LEND-LEASE  ACT ' 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  17] 

On  May  17.  1944,  the  President  approved  H.R. 
4254,  the  extension  of  the  Lend-Lease  Act,  and 
issued  the  following  statement : 

"Once  again,  by  overwhelming  majorities,  the 
elected  representatives  of  the  American  people  in 
the  Congress  have  affii'med  that  lend-lease  is  a 
powerful  weapon  working  for  the  United  States 
and  the  other  United  Nations  against  our  common 
enemies.  For  the  third  time,  I  am  affixing  my  ap- 
proval to  a  Lend-Lease  Act. 

"Wlien,  on  March  11,  1941,  the  Lend-Lease  Act 
first  became  law,  Britain  stood  virtually  alone  be- 
fore the  tide  of  Axis  aggression  which  had  swept 
across  western  Europe.  Everywliere  the  peace- 
loving  peoples  of  the  world  were  facing  disaster. 
But  the  iDassage  of  the  Lend-Lease  Act  gave  firm 
assurance  to  those  resisting  the  aggressors  that 
the  overpowering  material  resources  of  the  United 
States  were  on  their  side. 

"After  we  were  attacked  on  December  7,  1941, 
lend-lease  became  an  essential  part  of  our  own  war 
effort. 

"The  promise  of  ever-increasing  help  which  the 
Lhiited  States  held  forth  to  those  who  defied  the 
Axis  has  been  fulfilled.  In  April  1941,  the  first  full 
month  of  the  lend-lease  program,  we  furnished  aid 
valued  at  28  million  dollars.  In  the  month  of 
March  1944,  the  lend-lease  aid  supplied  amounted 
to  $1,629,554,000— almost  as  much  as  the  aid  ren- 
dered during  the  entire  first  year  of  lend-lease 
operations.  From  the  beginning  of  the  lend-lease 
program  in  March  1941  to  April  1,  1944,  our  aid 
totaled  $24,224,806,000. 

"Through  lend-lease  and  I'everse  lend-lease,  the 
material  resources  and  supplies  of  the  United  Na- 


'  Under  the  act  approved  Mar.  11,  1041,  as  amended, 
known  as  "the  Lend-Lease  Act",  agreements  have  been 
entered  into  with  the  following  cotnitries:  Anstr.ilia,  Bel- 
gium, Bolivia,  Brazil.  Canada,  Chile.  China,  Colombia, 
Costa  Rica,  Cuba,  Czechoslovakia,  Dominican  Republic, 
Ecuador,  El  Salvador,  Ethiopia,  Fighting  France,  Greece, 
Guatemala,  Haiti,  Honduras,  Iceland,  Liberia,  Mexico, 
Netherland.s,  New  Zealand,  Nicaragua,  Norway,  Paragua.v, 
Peru,  Poland,  Union  of  Soviet  .Socialist  Republics,  United 
Kingdom,  Uruguay,  Venezuela,  and  Yugoslavia. 

'  BuLLETi.N  of  May  6,  1944,  p.  413. 


tions  have  been  pooled  for  their  most  effective  use 
against  our  common  enemies. 

"The  combined  forces  and  the  combined  re- 
sources of  the  United  Nations  are  striking  with 
their  united  strength  from  all  directions  against 
the  heart  of  Nazi  Germany.  Our  fighting  men  are 
joined  with  British,  Soviet,  French,  Dutch,  Polish, 
Czech,  Yugoslavian,  and  the  fighting  men  of  the 
other  LTnited  Nations.  In  the  Far  East  and  in  the 
Pacific,  combined  United  Nations  fighting  forces 
are  also  striking  with  increasing  power  against 
the  Jax^anese. 

"This  unity  of  strength,  both  in  men  and  in  re- 
sources, among  the  free  peoples  of  the  world  will 
bring  complete  and  final  victorj'.  That  victory  will 
come  sooner,  and  will  cost  less  in  lives  and  mate- 
rials because  we  have  pooled  our  manpower  and 
our  material  resources,  as  United  Nations,  to 
defeat  the  enemy." 

EXCHANGE  OF  AMERICAN  AND  GERMAN 
NATIONALS 

fRelp.ised  to  the  press  May  17] 

The  State  Department  and  the  War  Department 
announced  on  May  17  that  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment, under  a  separate  and  parallel  agreement 
with  the  Government  of  Germany,  is  effecting  an 
exchange  of  seriously  sick  and  seriously  wounded 
prisoners  of  war  with  Germany  at  Barcelona, 
Spain,  at  the  same  time  as  the  exchange  of  sick  and 
wounded  which  is  to  occur  between  the  British 
Commonwealth  Governments  and  Germany.  By 
arrangement  among  the  respective  Governments, 
the  motorship  Gripsholm  is  being  used  for  the 
transportation  of  the  German  repatriates  in  Allied 
custody  to  Barcelona  and  for  the  return  of  the 
Allied  repatriates  received  at  Barcelona.  The  ex- 
cliange  began  on  May  17  and  should  be  completed 
within  two  or  three  days.  This  was  the  mission  on 
which  the  Gripshohn  sailed  May  2  from  New  York, 
as  announced  at  that  time  by  the  State  and  War 
Departments.^  Until  the  exchange  is  actually 
completed  at  Barcelona  the  United  States  will  not 
be  in  a  position  to  announce  definitively  the  num- 
bers and  identities  of  the  American  sick  and 
wounded  who  are  being  returned  to  the  United 
States.    Arrangements  have  been  made  for  this  in- 


MAY    2  0,    1944 


479 


formation  to  be  telegraphed  promptly  upon  com- 
pletion of  the  exchange  operation  at  Barcelona,  at 
which  time  next-of-kin  of  the  American  personnel 
being  repatriated  will  be  notified  by  telegram,  and 
the  details  will  be  made  available  to  the  press. 

The  Giipsholm  will  return  to  the  United  States 
via  a  North  African  port  and  a  port  in  the  United 
Kingdom  and  is  expected  to  reach  New  York  abovit 
June  10.  The  vessel  is  making  the  voyage  under 
safe-conduct. 

CIVIL-AFFAIRS  AGREEMENTS  WITH  BEL- 
GIUM, THE  NETHERLANDS,  AND  NOR- 
WAY 

[Released  to  the  press  May  16] 

Agreements  in  identical  terms  were  concluded 
on  May  16  by  the  United  States  of  America  and 
the  United  Kingdom  with  the  Governments  of 
Belgium  and  the  Netherlands  and  by  the  United 
States  of  America,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the 
U.S.S.E.  with  the  Government  of  Norway.  These 
agreements  concern  arrangements  to  be  made  for 
civil  administration  and  jurisdiction  in  the  Bel- 
gian, Netherlands,  and  Norwegian  territories  when 


they  are  liberated  by  the  Allied  forces.^  The  Soviet 
Government  has  been  consulted  concerning  the  ar- 
rangements with  Belgium  and  the  Netherlands  and 
has  expressed  its  agreement. 

These  agreements  are  intended  to  be  essentially 
temporary  and  practical  in  character.  They  are 
designed  to  facilitate  the  task  of  Allied  com- 
manders and  to  further  the  common  purpose  of  the 
Governments  concerned,  namely,  the  speedy  expul- 
sion of  the  Germans  from  Allied  territory  and 
final  victory  of  the  Allies  over  Germany. 

The  agreements  recognize  that  the  Allied  Su- 
preme Commander  must  enjoy  de  facto  during  the 
first  or  military  phase  of  the  liberation  of  the 
Netherlands  such  measure  of  supreme  responsi- 
bility and  authority  over  civil  administration  as 
may  be  required  by  the  military  situation.  It  is 
laid  down  that,  as  soon  as  the  military  situation 
permits,  the  Netherlands  Government  shall  resume 
their  full  constitutional  responsibility  for  civil  ad- 
ministration on  the  understanding  that  such  special 
facilities  as  the  Allied  forces  may  continue  to  re- 
quire on  Netherlands  territoiy  will  be  made  avail- 
able for  the  prosecution  of  the  war  to  its  final 
conclusion. 


General 


NATIONAL  FOREIGN-TRADE  WEEK 
Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  May  19] 

Since  National  Foreign-Trade  Week  was  ob- 
served last  year  the  war  against  the  aggressors  has 
approached  its  most  crucial  stage.  Ultimate  col- 
lapse of  the  aimed  forces  of  our  enemies  is  certain, 
and  we  can  hasten  that  collapse  if  we  continue  to 
maintain,  at  every  moment,  our  utmost  effort  in 
complete  unity  with  the  other  nations  associated 
with  us  in  this  war. 

The  coming  victory  throws  into  clearer  and 
sharper  focus  some  of  the  tremendous  tasks  and 
problems  which  we  shall  face  at  the  end  of 
hostilities.  Without  relaxing  our  war  effort  in  the 
slightest  degree,  we  must  give  profomid  thought 


to  post-war  problems  and  begin  to  take  steps  which 
will  help  to  solve  them.  We  must  hold  fast  to  a 
clear  vision  of  the  security  and  well-being  for  which 
we  are  fighting  and  work  toward  effective  means  to 
preserve  them  after  they  have  been  won. 

National  Foreign-Trade  Week  is  a  most  appro- 
priate occasion  for  taking  stock  of  our  situation. 
Employment  on  the  home-front  is  at  an  all-time 


^  In  the  case  of  the  agreements  with  Belgium  and  the 
Netherlands,  the  press  releases  contain  the  following  varia- 
tion :  "liberated  by  the  Allied  Expeditionary  Force  under 
the  Supreme  Allied  Commander". 

^  Made  in  connection  with  the  observance  of  National 
Foreign-Trade  Week,  May  21-27,  1944. 


480 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


high.  Many  millions  now  employed  in  making 
the  things  with  which  war  is  waged  will  need  good 
jobs  after  the  war  making  peacetime  products,  as 
will  many  millions  now  serving  in  our  armed 
forces.  Private  enterprise  will,  I  believe,  meet 
this  challenge  with  courage  and  resourcefulness. 
I  believe,  also,  that  the  great  majority  of  American 
businessmen  will  recognize  the  need,  as  well  as  the 
unique  opportunity,  for  utilizing  our  enormous  ca- 
pacity in  the  production  of  the  kinds  of  peace- 
time goods  best  suited  to  our  material  and  human 
resources;  for  choosing  those  lines  of  production 
that  can  stand  on  their  own  feet  without  heavy 
tariff  protection  or  subsidies. 

Only  as  people  everywhere  have  opportunity  to 
produce  those  things  and  perform  those  tasks  for 
which  they  are  best  fitted  and  to  exchange  those 
products  for  the  products  of  other  people  at  home 
or  abroad,  will  the  world  have  the  maximum  sup- 
lilies  of  things  to  be  enjoyed.  This  can  be  achieved 
only  as  we  cooperate  with  other  like-minded  na- 
tions, as  we  are  cooperating  now  in  war,  to  pro- 
vide a  basis  for  expanding  trade  and  commerce 
among  nations  on  a  sound  aud  equitable  basis. 

The  shift  from  wai-time  to  peacetime  commerce 
will  undoubtedly  entail  some  rather  difficult  ad- 
justments both  in  our  domestic  economy  and  in  our 
economic  relations  with  other  countries.  Those 
adjustments  must  not  involve  such  blunders  as  oc- 
curred after  World  AVar  I  when  we,  as  well  as  other 
nations,  adopted  commercial  policies  and  took  eco- 
nomic measures  that  disregarded  and  injured  the 
citizens  of  other  countries.  Neither  this  country 
nor  the  world  covdd  stand  a  repetition  of  the  bitter 
resentment  among  nations,  the  retaliatoi-y  actions, 
and  the  economic  chaos  and  depression  which  fi- 
nally helped  to  plunge  us  into  this  war. 

After  this  war,  international  economic  rela- 
tions must  be  developed  through  cooperative  meas- 
ures. Tliere  must  be  international  arrangement 
for  currency  stability  as  an  aid  to  commerce  and 
the  settlement  of  international  financial  transac- 
tions. Through  international  investment,  capital 
must  be  made  available  for  the  sound  develop- 
ment of  latent  natural  resources  and  productive 
capacity  in  relatively  undeveloped  areas.  Above 
all,  provision  must  be  made  for  reduction  or  re- 


moval of  unreasonable  trade  barriers  and  for  the 
abandonment  of  trade  discriminations  in  all  forms. 

Such  an  international  system  of  trade  and  finan- 
cial relations,  embodying  sound  economic  stand- 
ards and  the  principles  of  justice,  must  be  cre- 
ated and  made  effective  in  order  to  support  any  in- 
ternational organization  that  may  be  set  up  to  keep 
and  enforce  the  peace.  Otherwise,  the  structure 
of  international  security  would  be  threatened  with 
collapse  as  a  result  of  economic  disorder  and 
conflict. 

Leadership  toward  a  new  system  of  international 
relationships  in  trade  and  other  economic  affairs 
will  devolve  very  largely  upon  the  United  States 
because  of  our  great  economic  strength.  We 
should  assume  this  leadership,  and  the  respon- 
sibility that  goes  with  it,  primarily  for  reasons  of 
pure  national  self-interest.  We  ourselves  cannot 
live  in  prosperity  and  security  in  our  own  country 
while  people  in  other  countries  are  suffering  want 
and  being  driven  to  despair  by  economic  hard- 
ship. If  we  are  to  have  jobs  for  all  our  workers 
and  mai'kets  for  all  our  goods  people  in  other 
countries  must  likewise  have  opportunity  to  pro- 
duce to  their  maximum  capacity  and  to  pay  us, 
with  the  fruits  of  .their  efforts,  for  the  things  we 
want  to  sell  them. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  and  other 
United  Nations  Governments  are  endeavoring  to 
make  as  rapid  pi'ogress  as  possible  toward  the 
objectives  set  forth  in  the  the  Atlantic  Charter, 
and  the  mutual-aid  agreements,  and  the  Moscow 
and  Tehran  Declarations.  In  carrying  out  this 
great  task  they  need  and  must  have  the  support 
of  the  people  whose  interests  thej'  serve. 

In  this  matter  foreign  traders  have  a  special 
responsibility  extending  far  beyond  tlie  mere  safe- 
guarding and  enhancement  of  their  own  business 
interests.  They  have  a  special  knowledge  of  for- 
eign trade  and  its  place  as  a  necessary  support 
of  international  prosperity  and  world  security. 
They  can  contribute  much  to  the  establishment 
of  a  sound  system  of  trade  relations  among  na- 
tions by  sharing  their  knowledge  and  understand- 
ing with  other  citizens  and  groups.  Observance 
of  National  Foreign-Trade  Week  is  one  means  of 
carrying  out  this  responsibility. 


I 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  INTERNATIONAL  LABOR  CONFERENCE 
Remarks  by  President  Roosevelt ' 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  17] 

Miss  Perkins,  Mr.  Goodrich,  Mr.  Phelan,  Del- 
egates TO  THE  CoNrERENCE :  It  is  a  great  pleasure 
to  have  you  with  us  here  in  the  White  House 
again.  As  I  pointed  out  to  you  Avhen  we  last 
met — two  and  a  half  years  ago — taking  part  in 
a  conference  of  the  International  Labor  Organi- 
zation is  not  a  new  experience  for  nie.  I  take 
pride  in  the  fact  that  I  was  permitted  to  play  a 
part  in  the  first  conference  of  the  Organization 
that  was  held  here  in  Washington  in  1919. 

Those  were  indeed  trying  days  when  last  we 
met  in  1941.  The  fate  of  the  free  peoples  of  the 
entire  world  hung  in  the  balance.  Yet  with  the 
courage  and  foresight  that  have  always  character- 
ized the  Iniernutional  Labor  Organization,  you 
as  representatives  of  governments,  workers,  and 
employers  had  the  boldness  to  come  together  from 
all  parts  of  the  world  to  formulate  plans  for  re- 
construction. 

You  have  been  meeting  in  Philadelphia  where, 
one  hundred  sixty-eight  j'ears  ago,  the  Fathers  of 
this  Republic  affirmed  certain  truths  to  be  self- 
evident.  They  declared  that  among  other  things 
all  men  are  endowed  by  their  Creator  with  cer- 
tain inalienable  rights,  among  them  Life,  Liberty, 
and  the  Pursuit  of  Happiness.  In  these  words  are 
expressed  the  nbiding  purpose  of  all  peoples  im- 
bued with  the  ideals  of  freedom  and  democracy. 

The  Declaration  which  you  have  formulated  in 
Philadelphia  may  well  acquire  a  similar  signifi- 
cance. In  it  you  have  reaffirmed  principles  which 
are  the  essential  bulwarks  of  any  permanent  peace. 
With  the  expanding  use  of  machinery  and  the 
revolution  in  transportation,  it  is  well  that  the 
world  sliould  recognize  the  fundamental  principle 
of  your  Declaration:  "Poverty  anywhere  consti- 
tutes a  danger  to  prosperity  everywhere."  This 
pilnciple  is  a  guide  to  all  of  our  international 
economic  deliberations. 


Y^ou  liave  affirmed  the  right  of  all  human  beings 
to  material  well-being  and  spiritual  development 
under  conditions  of  freedom  and  dignity  and  under 
conditions  of  economic  security  and  opportunity. 
The  attainment  of  those  conditions  must  consti- 
tute a  central  aim  of  national  and  international 
I^olicy.  Indeed,  the  worthiness  and  success  of  in- 
ternational policies  will  be  measured  in  the  future 
by  the  extent  to  which  they  promote  the  achieve- 
ment of  this  end. 

Your  Declaration  sums  up  the  aspirations  of 
an  epoch  which  has  known  two  world  wars.  I  con- 
fidently believe  that  future  generations  will  look 
back  upon  it  as  a  landmark  in  world  thinking. 
I  am  glad  to  have  this  opportunity  of  indorsing 
its  siDecific  terms  on  behalf  of  the  United  States. 
I  trust,  also,  that  within  a  short  time  its  specific 
terms  will  be  whole-heartedly  indorsed  by  all  of 
the  LTnited  Nations. 

As  I  look  over  the  report  of  your  work,  I  see 
that  you  have,  for  the  first  time  in  history,  set  out 
in  a  form  which  could  be  adopted  as  a  treaty  by 
the  nations  a  particular  series  of  social  objectives. 
I  note  that  among  other  things  they  include  full 
employment,  wages  and  working  conditions  calcu- 
lated to  insure  a  just  share  of  the  fruits  of  23rogress 
to  all,  the  extension  of  social  security,  the  recogni- 
tion of  the  right  of  collective  bargaining,  provi- 
sion for  child  welfare,  and  the  assurance  of  ade- 
quate educational  and  vocational  opportunities. 
It  will  be  your  responsibility  to  promote  these  ob- 
jectives through  your  own  organization  and 
through  such  international  agencies  as  may  be 
created. 

With  great  wisdom  you  have  realized  that  these 
social  objectives  cannot  be  attained  and  supported 
without  a  high  level  of  useful  economic  activity. 

'Delivered  at  the  White  Hou.se  on  May  17,  1944  before 
the  delegates  to  the  Conference  of  the  International  Labor 
Organization. 

481 


482 

You  have  recommended  a  series  of  economic  poli- 
cies and  undertakings  designed  to  bring  about  a 
material  economy  which  will  make  it  possible  to 
maintain  them. 

You  have  also  wisely  provided  for  the  further 
development  and  reorganization  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labor  Organization  itself  so  that  it  may 
be  broadened  and  strengthened  for  carrying  out 
these  social  objectives,  and  at  the  same  time  inte- 
grated on  a  cooperative  basis  with  whatever  new 
international  agency  or  agencies  are  created  by 
the  United  Nations.  This  forms  an  admirable 
pattern  for  formulating  certain  aspects  of  the 
peace.  I  want  to  assure  you  that  this  Government 
will  do  everything  in  its  power  to  see  that  the 
provisions  for  the  attainment  of  these  social  and 
labor  objectives  shall  be  included. 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 

The  people  of  the  occupied  countries  are  in  deep 
suffering.  Their  representatives  have  agreed  upon 
the  social  objectives  and  economic  policies  you  have 
set  forth.  I  trust  that  this  marks  the  beginning 
of  a  new  and  better  day,  a  period  of  hope  for 
material  comfort,  for  security,  and  for  spiritual 
and  personal  development,  for  all  those  groups 
now  suffering  so  sorely  under  the  heel  of  the  op- 
pressor. The  United  Nations  will  be  determined 
that  all  the  oppressed  of  the  earth  shall  be  included 
in  these  social  objectives. 

I  want  to  offer  my  congratulations  to  those  of 
you  who  have  participated  in  this  Conference. 
You  have  mj'  gratitude  for  the  program  of  mutual 
helpfulness  which  you  have  laid  out — a  program 
which,  I  am  sure,  will  inspire  all  of  those  in  our 
generation  who  want  to  build  and  madntain  a  just 
peace. 


PROPOSED  DECLARATION  CONCERNING   THE  AIMS  AND  PURPOSES  OF  THE 
INTERNATIONAL  LABOR  ORGANIZATION  ^ 


The  text  of  the  proposed  Declaration  concerning 
the  aims  and  purposes  of  the  International  Labor 
Organization  submitted  by  the  Special  Drafting 
Committee  follows : 

The  General  Conference  of  the  International 
Labour  Organisation,  meeting  in  its  Twenty-sixth 
Session  in  Philadelphia,  hereby  adopts,  this  day 
of  May  in  the  year  nineteen  hundred  and  forty- 
four,  the  present  Declaration  of  the  aims  and  pur- 
poses of  the  International  Labour  Organisation 
and  of  the  principles  which  should  inspire  the 
policy  of  its  Members. 

I 
The  Conference  reaffirms  the  fundamental  prin- 
ciples on  which  the  Organisation  is  based  and,  in 
particular,  that : 

(a)  labour  is  not  a  commodity ; 

(b)  freedom  of  expression  and  of  association 
are  essential  to  sustained  progress; 

(c)  poverty  anywhere  constitutes  a  danger  to 
prosperity  everywhere ; 

(d)  the  war  against  want  requires  to  be  carried 
on  with  unrelenting  vigour  within  each  nation,  and 
by  continuous  and  concerted  international  effort  in 
which  the  representatives  of  workers  and  employ- 


ers, enjoying  equal  status  with  those  of  Govern- 
ments, join  with  them  in  free  discussion  and  demo- 
cratic decision  with  a  view  to  the  promotion  of  the 
common  welfare. 

II 

Believing  that  experience  has  fully  demonstrated 
the  truth  of  the  statement  in  the  Preamble  to  the 
Constitution  of  the  International  Labour  Organi- 
sation that  lasting  peace  can  be  established  only 
if  it  is  based  on  social  justice,  the  Conference 
affirms  that : 

(a)  all  human  beings,  irrespective  of  race,  creed 
or  sex,  have  the  right  to  pursue  both  their  material 
well-being  and  their  spiritual  development  in  con- 
ditions of  freedom  and  dignity,  of  economic  secu- 
rity and  equal  opportunity ; 

(i)  the  attainment  of  the  conditions  in  which 
this  shall  be  possible  must  constitute  the  central 
aim  of  national  and  international  policy; 

(c)  all  national  and  international  policies  and 
measures,  in  particular  those  of  an  economic  and 
financial  character,  should  be  judged  in  this  light 

'  International  Labour  Conferenre  (twenty-sixth  session, 
PhWaaehMa) ,  Provisio7ial  Record,  No.  16  [XXVI-1944]. 


I 


MAY    20,    1944 


483 


and  accepted  only  in  so  far  as  they  may  be  held  to 
promote  and  not  to  hinder  the  achievement  of  this 
funrla mental  objective ; 

(d)  it  is  a  responsibility  of  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  to  examine  and  consider  all 
international  economic  and  financial  policies  and 
measures  in  the  light  of  this  fundamental  objec- 
tive; 

{e)  in  discharfiinf!;  the  tasks  entrusted  to  it  the 
International  Labour  Organisation,  having  con- 
sidered all  relevant  economic  and  financial  factors, 
may  include  in  its  decisions  and  recommendations 
any  pi'ovisions  which  it  considers  appropriate. 

Ill 

The  Conference  recognises  the  solemn  obligation 
of  the  International  Labour  Organisation  to  fur- 
ther among  the  nations  of  the  world  programmes 
which  will  achieve : 

(a)  full  employment  and  the  raising  of  stand- 
ards of  living; 

{h)  the  employment  of  workers  in  the  occupa- 
tions in  whicli  they  can  have  the  satisfaction  of 
giving  the  fullest  measure  of  their  skill  and  at- 
tainments and  make  their  greatest  contribution 
to  the  common  well-being; 

(c)  the  pi-Dvision,  as  a  means  to  the  attainment 
of  this  end  and  under  adequate  guarantees  for  all 
concerned,  of  facilities  for  training  and  the  trans- 
fer of  labour,  including  migration  for  employ- 
ment and  settlement; 

{(l)  policies  in  regard  to  wages  and  earnings, 
hours  and  other  conditions  of  work  calculated  to 
ensure  a  just  share  of  the  fruits  of  progress  to  all, 
and  a  minimum  living  wage  to  all  employed  and 
in  need  of  such  protection; 

(e)  the  effective  recognition  of  the  right  of  col- 
lective bargaining,  the  co-operation  of  manage- 
ment and  labour  in  tiie  continuous  improvement 
of  productive  efficiency,  and  the  collaboration  of 
workers  ajid  employers  in  the  preparation  and 
application  of  social  and  economic  measures; 

(/)  the  extension  of  social  security  measures  to 
provide  a  basic  income  to  all  in  need  of  such  pro- 
tection and  comprehensive  medical  care ; 

ig)  adequate  protection  for  the  life  and  health 
of  workers  in  all  occupations; 


{h)  provision  for  child  welfare  and  matei-nity 
protection; 

(/)  the  provision  of  adequate  nutrition,  housing 
and  facilities  for  recreation  and  culture; 

{ /)  the  assurance  of  equality  of  educational  and 
vocat  ional  opportunity. 

IV 

Confident  that  the  fuller  and  broader  utilisation 
of  the  world's  productive  resources  necessary  for 
the  acliievement  of  tlie  objectives  set  forth  in  this 
Declaration  can  be  secured  by  effective  interna- 
tional and  national  action,  including  measures  to 
expand  production  and  consumption,  to  avoid 
severe  economic  fluctuations,  to  promote  the  eco- 
nomic and  social  advancement  of  the  less  de- 
veloped regions  of  the  world,  to  assure  greater 
stability  in  world  prices  of  primary  products,  and 
to  promote  a  high  and  steady  volume  of  interna- 
tional trade,  the  Conference  pledges  the  full  co- 
operation of  the  International  Labour  Organisa- 
tion with  such  international  bodies  as  may  be 
entrusted  with  a  share  of  the  responsibility  for 
tliis  great  task  and  for  the  promotion  of  the  health, 
education  and  well-being  of  all  peoples. 


The  Conference  affirms  that  the  principles  set 
foi-th  in  this  Declaration  are  fully  applicable  to  all 
peoples  everywhere  and  that,  M'hile  the  manner  of 
their  application  must  be  determined  with  due 
regard  to  the  stage  of  social  and  economic  de- 
velopment reached  by  each  people,  their  progres- 
sive application  to  peoples  who  are  still  dependent, 
as  well  as  to  those  who  have  already  achieved  self- 
government,  is  a  matter  of  concei-n  to  the  whole 
civilised  world. 

FIRST  CONFERENCE  OF  COMMISSIONS  OF 
INTER-AMERICAN  DEVELOPMENT 

The  Coordinator  of  Inter-American  Affairs  has 
issued  Economic  Report,  No.  5,  dated  May  20, 
1944,  in  which  are  included  brief  summaries  of  the 
texts  of  the  recommendations  adopted  by  the  Con- 
ference of  Commissions  of  Inter-American  Devel- 
opment in  New  York  on  May  18.  1944.  Recom- 
mendations  concerning   international    trade    are 


484 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


included    in    the    report    under    the    following 
headings: 

Insurance 

Statistics 

Reduction  of  Trade  Barriers 

Trade  Preferences  and  Discriminations 

Customs  Unions 

Subsidies 

Private  Agreements  Which  Restrict  Interna- 
tional Trade 

State  Trading 

Government  Purchase  Contracts 

International  Agreements  To  Facilitate  Dis- 
tribution of  Production  Surpluses 

Trade  in  Mineral  Products 


Production,  Distribution,  and  Consumption 

of  Foodstuffs 
International   Trade   in   Relation  to   Social 

Legislation 

The  following  recommendations  deal  with  trans- 
portation : 

Transportation  Facilities  and  Services 

Overland  Transportation 

Merchant  Marines 

Air  Transportation 

Rates :  Maintenance  of  Inter- American  Ship- 
ping, Maritime,  and  Air  Transportation — 
Freight  Rates,  and  Transportation  Rates 

Communication  Facilities 

Touiist  Travel 


A  PATTERN  OF  NATIONAL  UNITY 

Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  May  20] 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen  :  Following  your  annual 
custom,  you,  as  social  workers,  are  here  assembled 
to  consider  your  common  problems.  You  have 
devoted  your  lives  and  professional  efforts  par- 
ticularly to  persons  and  groups  of  Jewish  origin. 
This  in  no  sense  separates  or  segregates  you  from 
the  gallant  groups  of  social  workers  throughout 
America  who  are  meeting  and  attacking  problems 
of  human  misei'y  wherever  and  whenever  they  are 
found.  Jewish  social-welfare  work  is  not  a  thing 
apart.  It  is  a  great  element  in  a  great  American 
eifort. 

Nevertheless,  you  rightly  do  have  an  especial 
interest  in  Jewish  problems,  which  form  a  part 
of  the  gi-eat  complicated  country  which  is  America. 
I  hope  that  never  will  Jewish  problems  be  con- 
sidered apart  from  American  problems  and  that 
the  element  of  segregation  will  never  creep  into 
our  national  thinking.  Your  social  work  is  a  par- 
ticular and  splendid  demonstration  of  the  unified 
American  approach.  In  earlier  days  I  had  the 
rare  privilege  of  working  at  the  Henry  Street  Set- 
tlement under  the  leadership  of  a  great  woman, 
who  was  also  a  great  Jewess  and  a  great  Ameri- 
can, Miss  Lillian  Wald.  Her  work  has  been  copied 
and  carried  on  not  only  in  every  State  of  the  Union, 
but  also  in  countries  on  every  continent,  and  the 


world  was  richer  for  her  tireless  devotion. 
Around  us  in  that  vicinity  were  groups  specifically 
devoted  to  the  large  Jewish  immigrant  population 
which  was  then  concentrated  in  Lower  New  York. 
I  can  personally  testify  that  in  the  many  emer- 
gencies which  concerned  Italians,  Slovenes,  Greeks, 
and,  in  fact,  many  races,  we  turned  when  necessary 
to  these  Jewish  societies,  and  never  were  turned 
away.  Reciprocally,  I  can  recall  cases  in  which 
Jewish  families  found  swift  help  from  organiza- 
tions whose  particular  field  of  endeavor  lay  with 
groups  of  Italians,  or  Poles,  or  Negroes. 

This  was  great,  because  it  was  human  and  be- 
cause it  was  American.  For  America  is  not  a 
combination  of  different  racial  groups.  It  is  an 
integral  whole ;  and  no  one  who  loves  America,  or 
who  understands  her  ideals,  will  undertake  to  fos- 
ter race  blocs  in  this  country.  To  attempt  to  divide 
the  United  States  into  separate  groups  for  pur- 
poses of  pressure  politics,  and  particularly  for 
purposes  of  foreign  politicians,  would  be  an  at- 
tempt to  destroy  this  country. 

Long  ago  our  enemies  conceived  the  idea  that 
America  could  be  thus  divided,  and  weakened,  and 


'  D9liverecl  at  the  joint  annual  meeting  of  the  National 
Conference  of  Jewish  Social  Welfare,  the  National  Asso- 
ciation of  Jewish  Center  Worliei-s,  and  the  National  Coun- 
cil for  Jewish  Education,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  Mav  20,  1944. 


MAY   20,    1944 


485 


eventually  conquered.  To  this  end,  in  1937  the 
Hitler  government  instructed  its  propaganda 
service  to  endeavor  to  create  racial  divisions  in 
this  country.  The  spearhead  of  this  attack  was, 
of  course,  the  encouragement  of  anti-Semitism; 
but  the  plan  appears  to  have  been  to  stir  up  any 
other  race  antagonisms  which  could  conveniently 
be  created  and  exploited.  Happilj',  that  effort 
almost  totally  failed,  because  it  was  resisted  by 
the  solid  common  sense  of  most  right-thinking 
Americans,  irrespective  of  their  ancestry  or  the 
countries  from  which  they  came.  I  venture  to 
predict  that  no  attempt  to  split  race  from  race, 
or  group  from  grouiD,  will  be  successful  as  long 
as  American  thought  remains  true  to  the  teach- 
ings of  Washington  and  Jefferson  and,  beyond  all 
others,  Lincoln,  great  saints  in  the  American  cal- 
endar of  freedom. 

It  was  partly  with  that  in  mind  that  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  in  1941  issued  a  release,  known  as 
Kelease  No.  600,^  asking  that  no  attempt  be  made 
to  build  up  blocs  based  on  race  or  racial  origin. 
Where  anyone  had  a  case  to  present,  it  would  best 
be  presented  to  the  entire  public  opinion  of  the 
United  States;  and  if  help  was  sought,  the  most 
effective  help  could  best  be  had  from  united  Amer- 
ican effort. 

Tn  keeping  witli  that  spirit,  American  public 
opinion  as  a  whole  has  been  brought  to  bear  on  the 
tragic  and  terrible  problem  of  Jews  on  the  Con- 
tinent of  Europe.  Since  the  days  of  the  Babj^- 
lonian  captivity  there  has  been,  perhaps,  no  deeper 
tragedy  in  the  dramatic  passages  of  Jewish  his- 
tory than  that  of  today.  I  do  not  dwell  on  the 
ghastly  details  of  the  European  terror.  We  have 
talked  to  survivors  of  it,  and  to  eyewitnesses  of 
unspeakable  things.  We  have  met,  too,  with 
gleams  of  light  in  this  black  picture ;  for  example, 
the  spontaneous  action  of  the  Danish  people  which 
made  possible  the  escape  of  substantially  all  of 
the  Jews  in  Denmark  when  the  Nazi  hordes  began 
to  hunt  them  down.  It  is  impossible  not  to  re- 
member some  groups  in  Hungary  who  gave  shelter 
and  safety  to  refugees  in  the  very  heart  of  Hitler's 
empire.  More  than  a  few,  seeking  safety,  found 
refuge  in  peasant  huts  and  small  villages  in  Bel- 
gium, the  Netherlands,  France,  and,  indeed,  in 


'  Bulletin  of  Dee.  13,  1941,  p.  519. 


practically  all  countries  on  the  European  main- 
land. These  people  risked  their  own  lives  to  save 
others,  strangers  though  they  were.  It  is  true 
that  Jews  today  have  cause  for  sorrow  and  bitter- 
ness. But  I  hope  they  will  also  remember  the 
many  acts  of  unrecorded  heroism  by  which  some 
have  escaped  and  some,  still  in  enemy  territory, 
remain  alive. 

It  is  the  declared  policy  of  this  country  to  at- 
tempt to  bring  war  criminals  to  justice;  equally, 
it  must  be  our  duty  to  remember  those  who,  in 
danger  themselves,  endeavored  to  reach  out  a  help- 
ing hand. 

It  is  known  to  all  of  you  that  this  Government  is 
endeavoring  to  do  what  it  can  to  assist  and  to 
rescue  these  victims  of  tyraniiy  and  hate. 

When  the  war  is  over,  we  shall  have  to  meet  a 
series  of  problems  arising  from  the  mania  which 
has  thrown  its  shadow  across  the  world.  This  war 
was  conceived  in  hatred,  and  built  on  hatred,  pur- 
posely created  and  fostered  by  a  savage  group  of 
evil  men.  In  considerable  measure  the  psychology 
created  was  essentially  a  disease ;  for,  as  you  well 
know,  mental  and  spiritual  diseases  are  today  as 
well  recognized  medically  as  are  physical  diseases. 
The  hate  disease  was  sown  and  spread  by  the  Nazis 
for  the  particular  purpose  of  helping  them  to  make 
their  people  fight.  Yet  the  problem  cannot  be 
wholly  limited  to  that  group.  They  were  able  to 
injure  other  groups ;  and  the  wounds  they  created 
are  mental  and  psj'chological  as  well  as  physical. 
These  will  take  time  to  heal.  We  must  be  swift  to 
recognize  the  phenomenon  and  careful  in  han- 
dling it. 

In  terms  of  political  life,  I  think  that  for  a  time 
we  shall  hear  louder  and  more  strident  voices  as 
extremists  endeavor  to  exploit  the  troubled  and 
imhappy  minds  of  people  who  have  suffered  more 
pain  than  the  human  spirit  can  easily  bear.  We 
shall  have  to  recognize  these  extremists  for  what 
they  are,  and  patiently  and  endlessly  continue  to 
follow  in  the  paths  of  good-will.  In  seeking  the 
larger  objective  of  a  world  of  peace-loving  nations, 
we  shall  have  to  resolve  steadily  to  put  aside  the 
minor  irritations  which  endlessly  beset  us;  we  shall 
have  to  recognize  that  progress  must  be  based 
not  on  exploiting  grievances  but  on  arriving  at 
solutions. 


486 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


This  will  not  be  easy  to  do.  The  quieter  voices 
are  too  often  unlieard.  Yet  at  long  last  when  pas- 
sion is  spent  the  work  of  reconstruction  is  even- 
tually done  by  the  people  who  have  had  the 
strength  and  vision  to  endeavor  to  seek  the  truth 
and  arrive  at  solutions  with  wisdom,  justice,  and 
charity. 

The  United  States,  in  company  with  her  major 
Allies,  is  committed  by  the  Moscow  Declaration  to 
the  attempt  to  form  a  world  organization,  based  on 
the  principle  of  participation  by  all  peace-loving 
nations.  Thereby  a  pathway  of  hope  may  be 
opened  which,  if  followed,  may  offer  assurance 
that  the  peace  which  follows  the  war  will  be  a  last- 
ing settlement,  and  not  merely  an  armistice  be- 
tween conflicts.  It  is  perhaps  appropriate  to  em- 
phasize one  outstanding  fact.  The  international 
arrangements  are,  to  be  sure,  of  crucial  importance. 
But  they  will  only  be  valid  if  the  moral  sense  and 
public  opinion  of  the  nations  entering  into  this 
organization  wholly  support  governments  in  this 
vast  endeavor.  It  is  fairly  easy  to  draw  plans  and 
to  write  words.  It  is  far  less  easy  to  mobilize  and 
maintain  the  national  will  to  make  these  arrange- 
ments work.  Tills  lesson  has  been  taught  us  many 
times  by  history.  A  plan  for  an  association  of  na- 
tions was  sponsored  by  the  famous  French  King, 
Henry  IV,  known  as  Henry  of  Navarre ;  but  it  was 
too  far  ahead  of  his  time  to  gain  acceptance.  An 
attempt  was  made  after  the  Napoleonic  wars  to 
maintain  peace  through  the  European  concert  of 
powers ;  but  the  will  was  lacking,  and  old  rivalries, 
antagonisms,  and  ambitions  proved  stronger  mo- 
tives than  the  desire  for  a  continuing  peace.  The 
attempt  made  by  President  Wilson  and  the  coun- 
tries which  entered  the  League  of  Nations  is  still 
fresh  in  our  memories.  It  is  difficult  not  to  con- 
clude that  any  of  these  plans  might  have  succeeded 
had  there  been  determination  by  all  the  peoples 
that  these  institutions,  entered  on  with  hope, 
should  succeed;  that  smaller  matters,  even  those 
important  in  themselves,  must  be  put  aside  in 
attaining  the  larger  objective. 

In  this  sense  the  entire  world  must  seek  to  do 
what  many  of  you  have  been  doing  here  in  the 
United  States;  must  endeavor  to  sow  confidence 
where  thei'e  was  suspicion,  and  to  refuse  to  follow 
demagogues  and  leaders  who  seek  to  exploit  na- 


tional dijfferences,  when  true  leadership  calls  for 
building  up  international  confidence. 

In  our  social  objectives,  we  have  long  since 
learned  that  disease  and  distress  and  unemploy- 
ment anywhere  weakens  our  social  fabric  every- 
wjaere.  Increasingly,  our  communities  attempt  to 
prevent  or  remedy  these  conditions  as  rapidly  as 
they  appear.  We  no  longer  delay  preventive  ac- 
tion because  an  e];)idemic  has  not  reached  our  town 
or  has  not  yet  threatened  our  family.  We  no  longer 
consider  that  we  are  safe  as  long  as  plague  spots 
breeding  crime  and  poverty  and  degeneracy  are 
left  unattended.  We  must  learn  that  exactly 
the  same  considerations  apply  to  international  life 
and  to  the  cause  of  peace.  For  one  thing,  the  dis- 
ease of  war  will  spread  far  more  rapidly  in  years 
to  come  than  has  been  true  up  to  now.  No  longer 
can  an  American  content  himself  with  the  belief 
that  a  war  overseas  cannot  reach  him  because  two 
oceans  lie  between  him  and  the  area  of  active 
danger.  It  is  far  more  likely  that  another  war,  if 
it  comes,  will  commence  with  an  attack  on  the 
United  States,  since  no  General  Staff,  remembering 
the  experience  of  the  First  and  Second  World 
Wars,  will  count  America  out.  A  statement  re- 
cently attributed  to  General  Stulpnagel,  the  Ger- 
man Military  Governor  of  Paris,  boars  this  out; 
he  is  quoted  as  saying  that  Germany,  having  failed 
in  the  present  effort,  must  look  forward  to  a  new 
war  and  that  in  that  war  she  should  begin  by 
paralyzing  the  United  States.  Long-range  air- 
craft and  new  explosives  might  well  bring  this 
sufficiently  near  to  possibility.  Instead  of  having 
a  cou^jle  of  years  to  think  things  over,  to  decide 
what  we  want  to  do,  and  to  build  up  our  force  while 
others  hold  a  front  line,  we  shall  probably  be  our- 
selves in  the  front  line  on  a  huge  scale.  If  this  is 
realized,  we  shall  begin  to  understand  the  feelings 
of  the  European  peoples  who,  if  the  world  cannot 
prevent  wars,  must  li\e  out  their  entire  lives  in  fear 
of  sudden  destruction.  Planning  post-war  organi- 
zation is  thus  not  an  adventure  in  starry-eyed 
idealism.  It  is  a  matter  of  deadly  practical 
necessity. 

There  is  thus  offered  to  every  American  the 
opportunity  to  join  directly  in  post-war  reorgani- 
zation. He  can  begin  with  himself.  He  can  study 
out  and  understand  the  need  for  world  organization 


MAY    20,    1944 

which  -will  give  security,  and  can  study  out  and 
understand  why  it  is  of  direct  importance  to  him. 
He  can  make  this  clear  to  his  friends  and  to  the 
community  in  which  he  lives.  He  can  assist  in 
making  the  public  opinion,  without  whicli  no  plan 
can  be  completed.  He  can  go  on  maintaining  that 
public  o})ini()n  so  that,  when  a  world  organization 
is  constructed,  it  can  work  etfectively,  with  the  full 
support  of  the  United  States.  He  can  refuse  to 
become  part}'  to  minor  international  controversies 
or  to  be  led  into  race  or  national  hatred.  He  can 
sui^port  the  efforts  of  men  of  good-will  who  seek 
with  justice  as  well  as  strength  to  resolve  questions 
in  friendship  and  peace,  and  to  defend  against  the 
I'ebirth  of  organized  hatreds  like  that  of  the  Nazi 
doctrine.    He  can  jsractice  this. 

He  can  do  more.  He  can  practice  this  at  home. 
Many  of  us  live  in  communities  composed  of  several 
races,  and  of  groujDS  of  different  ancestry.  Some 
communities  have,  in  miniature,  many  of  the  cur- 
rents of  thought  which  we  find  in  the  Old  World. 
Not  infi'equently,  the  same  conflicts  which  divide 
race  from  race  and  nation  from  nation  elsewhere 
crop  up  in  these  towns  and  cities.  This  is  the  prob- 
lem of  world  peace,  though  it  may  present  itself 
as  a  local  quarrel  between  a  couple  of  rival  groups, 
or  a  violent  controversy  between  a  couple  of 
foreign-language  newspapers.  All  of  them  can 
Mork  actively  at  the  problem  of  continuing  peace 
almost  without  leaving  your  front  doors..  The 
success  of  world  organization  depends  directly  on 
the  success  of  the  will  to  organize  peace  in  the 
smallest  community  as  well  as  in  the  family  of 
nations. 

Statesmanship  is  not  confined  to  Prime  Minis- 
ters and  Government  representatives  and  profes- 
sional diplomats.  It  even  transcends  the  related 
fields  of  journalism  and  science  and  leadership  in 
public  opinion.  Every  man  can  be,  and  today  he 
must  be,  a  statesman.  He  has  the  materials  for  it ; 
he  has  hour-by-hour  information  from  every  part 
of  the  world  relating  to  every  phase  of  hunum 
life.  International  problems  ai'e  actually  brought 
to  him  not  only  by  news,  but  by  currents  of  politics 
and  thought  which  endeavor  to  affect  him  and  the 
men  around  him.  He  is  no  longer  isolated  from 
tlie  processes  of  world  politics.  Whether  he  will 
or  not,  he  is  actually  a  part  of  them.  His  opinion 
is  struggled  for  and  fought  for;  his  influence,  no 
matter  how  humble,  is  courted  and  sought  after 


487 

by  nations,  great  and  small.  He  is  recognized  as 
having  within  himself  a  part  of  the  power  which 
makes  for  justice  or  for  aggression;  for  fairness 
or  for  hatred ;  for  peace  or  for  war. 

America  has  insisted  on  a  pattern  of  national 
unity,  but  based  on  the  free  thought  and  choice 
of  individuals.  She  has  protected  that  individual 
thought  and  opinion  by  freedom  of  information, 
freedom  of  speech,  and  by  every  historic  and  con- 
stitutional guaranty.  She  has  argued,  rightly, 
that  this  common  bond  of  decent,  law-abiding,  and 
kindly  people  will  resolve  her  internal  conflicts 
and  give  her  that  singleness  of  purpose  which  will 
enable  her  in  the  future,  as  it  has  in  the  past,  to 
face  the  world.  She  must  rely  on  you,  and  all  of 
you,  and  on  your  countless  friends,  to  accept  the 
responsibility  that  goes  with  the  right  of  indi- 
vidual life  and  thought.  She  must  rely  upon  you 
to  furnish  the  strength  and  will  to  join  in  the 
great  decisions  which  now  face  the  world  and  to 
act  when  action  is  needed.  She  is  on  the  eve  of 
her  greatest  battle.  She  must  depend  on  the  moral 
and  mental  strength  and  courage  of  Americans  to 
assure  that  the  peace  shall  be  fruitful,  just  as  she 
must  depend  on  the  bravery  and  the  resoluteness 
of  her  sons  as  they  face  the  common  enemy. 


American  Republics 


PROTOCOL  OF  PEACE,  FRIENDSHIP,  AND 
BOUNDARIES,  ECUADOR  AND  PERU  ' 

[Released  to  the  press  May  2U] 

The  following  telegrams  were  sent  by  Presi- 
dent Eoosevelt  to  the  Presidents  of  Ecuador  and 
Peru  and  to  the  President  of  Brazil;  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  to  the  Minister  of  Foreign  Af- 
fairs of  Brazil: 

2'o  the  Presidents  of  Ecu<idor  and,  Peru 

ft 

I  have  learned  with  deep  satisfaction  that  Your 
Excellency's  Government,  through  the  good  offices 
of  the  eminent  Foreign  Minister  of  Brazil,  Dr.  Os- 
waldo  Aranha,  has  reached  agreement  on  inter- 
pretation of  the  Protocol  of  Peace,  Friendship 

'BULLETIN  of  Mii.v  17,  1941,  p.  .""I'JG,  July  26,  1941,  p.  73, 
Aug.  9,  1941,  p.  112,  and  Feb.  28,  1942,  p.  194. 


488 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


and  Boundaries,  signed  by  Ecuador  and  Peru  on 
January  29,  1942  at  Kio  de  Janeiro.  I  hope  that 
confirmation  of  this  agreement  may  be  speedily 
effected  by  exchange  of  notes,  in  order  to  permit 
the  distinguished  Brazilian  technical  expert,  Cap- 
tain Braz  de  Aguiar,  to  complete  his  inspection 
of  the  eastern  sector  of  the  boundary  on  the  ground, 
and  thus  facilitate  completion  of  the  demarcation 
of  all  sectors  of  the  boundary  as  soon  as  possible. 
I  heartily  congratulate  Your  Excellency  on  reach- 
ing this  agreement,  ■nhich  I  regard  as  an  outstand- 
ing contribution  to  inter- American  solidarity  and 


good-will. 


Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


To  the  President  of  Brazil 

The  splendid  outcome  of  the  -R-ork  of  your  For- 
eign Minister,  His  Excellency  Oswaldo  Aranha, 
in  adjusting  the  boundary  differences  between 
Ecuador  and  Peru,  will  be  a  source  of  reassurance 
and  satisfaction  to  all  America.  I  join  the  host 
of  friends  of  your  great  nation  in  congratulating 


Your  Excellency  on  this  outstanding  achievement, 
which  is  in  accord  with  the  Bi'azilian  tradition  of 
the  peaceful  settlement  of  boundary  disputes  by 
conciliation. 

Franklin  D  Eoosevelt 

To  the  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Brazil 

I  am  immensely  pleased  that  your  brilliant 
efforts  have  so  fruitfully  assisted  the  Govern- 
ments of  Ecuador  and  Peru  in  delimitation  of 
their  common  boundary.  Your  action  on  behalf  of 
the  guarantors  of  the  Rio  de  Janeiro  Protocol 
again  illustrates  the  highest  type  of  cooperation 
among  the  American  republics  for  the  peaceful 
conciliation  of  their  difficulties. 

It  is  a  soui'ce  of  special  gratification  to  me,  as 
I  extend  my  heartiest  congratulations  to  you,  the 
Foreign  Minister  of  a  great  neighbor  and  an  old 
and  good  friend,  to  know  that  you  are  continuing 
the  historic  achievements  of  Brazilian  diplomacy 
in  the  peaceful  settlement  of  boundary  problems. 

CoRDELL  Hull 


The  Department 


CHANGE  IN  TITLE  OF  THE  OFFICE  OF   FOREIGN  SERVICE  ADMINISTRATION 
ANT>  CREATION  OF  THE  DIVISION  OF  FOREIGN  BUILDINGS  OPERATIONS 

Departmental  Order  1273  of  May  6,  1944  ^ 


1  Change  in  Title  of  the  Office  of  Foreign 
Service  Administration.  Departmental  Order 
1218  ^  of  January  15,  1944,  is  hereby  amended  to 
change  the  title  of  the  Office  of  Foreign  Service 
Administration  to  Office  of  the  Foreign  Service. 
The  routing  symbol  of  the  Office  shall  be  OFS. 

2  Creation  of  the  Division  of  Foreign  Buildings 
Operations.  There  is  hereby  established  a  Divi- 
sion of  Foreign  Buildings  Operations  in  the  Office 
of  tlie  Foreign  Service  to  perform  the  functions 
of  housing  and  furnishing  diplomatic  and  consu- 
lar establishments  abroad  as  required  by  the  For- 
eign Service  Buildings  Act  of  Congress,  approved 
May  7,  1926. 

3  Organization  and  Functions  of  the  Division  of 
Foreign  Buildings  O perations.  Within  the  Divi- 
sion of  Foreign  Buildings  Operations  are  three 


Sections,  functioning  under  the  direction  of  the 
Chief  and  Assistant  Chief  of  the  Division  :  Build- 
ings Projects  Section,  Property  Management  Sec- 
tion, and  Furniture  and  Furnishings  Section. 

4  Building  Projects  Section.  The  Building 
Projects  Section  is  resi^onsible  for  the  analysis,  ap- 
proval and  development  of  projects  for  the  pur- 
chase of  properties  and  construction  of  buildings 
for  the  housing  of  the  diplomatic,  consular  and 
other  agencies  of  the  United  States  Government 
abroad.    This  includes  such  activities  as: 

(a)  The  maintenance  of  complete  information 
and  records  concerning  property  purchases,  initial 
construction,  and  major  improvements  of  proper- 
ties. 


'  Effective  May  6,  1944. 

=  Bulletin  of  Jan.  22,  1944,  p.  45. 


MAT   20,    1944 


489 


(b)  Analysis  and  determination  of  the  needs 
for  acquiring  new  sites  and  constructing  or  alter- 
ing buildings  for  these  purposes. 

(c)  Providing  of  architectural  and  engineering 
designs,  plans  and  specifications  for  the  housing  of 
the  Foreign  Service  of  the  United  States. 

(d)  Analysis  and  determination  upon  projects 
submitted  by  the  missions  and  other  Government 
agencies  for  the  purchase  of  property  and  build- 
ings, for  new  construction  or  for  major  altera- 
tions and  repairs  work. 

(e)  Supervision  and  inspection  of  the  con- 
struction, alterations,  repairs  and  maintenance 
operations  on  Foreign  Service  buildings  and 
pi'operties. 

5  Property  Management  Section.  The  Prop- 
ei'ty  Management  Section  is  responsible  for  the 
supervision  of  the  physical  maintenance  and  use 
of  Foreign  Service  real  properties.  This  shall 
include  such  activities  as: 

(a)  Maintenance  of  information  and  records 
regarding  Government-owned  diplomatic  and 
consular  establishments  abroad. 

(b)  Formulation  and  execution  of  plans  for 
the  physical  maintenance,  and  routine  alteration 
and  repair  of  such  properties. 

(c)  Analysis  and  approval  of  requests  for  al- 
terations and  repairs  on  Foreign  Service  proper- 
ties. 

(d)  Advice  to  the  missions  on  property  matters. 

(e)  Conduct  of  field  inspections  and  surveys  of 
Foreign  Service  properties. 

6  Furniture  and  Furnishings  Section.  The 
Furniture  and  Furnishings  Section  is  responsible 
for  the  initial  purchase  and  replacement  of  articles 
of  residential  furniture  and  furnishings.  This 
includes  such  activities  as: 

(a)  Collection  and  maintenance  of  complete 
records  and  inventories  on  all  Government-owned 
residential  furniture,  furnishings,  and  related 
articles  of  equipment  in  buildings  owned  or 
leased  by  the  Department  of  State. 

(b)  Preparation  of  programs  for  the  furnish- 
ing of  buildings  constructed,  purchased  or  leased 
for  Foreign  Service  residences  abroad,  and  the 
maintenance  of  existing  furnishings. 

(c)  Preparation  of  designs,  layouts,  specifica- 
tions, contracts,  and  orders  for  such  articles  of 
furniture  and  furnishings. 


(d)  Analysis  and  approval  of  proposals  from 
the  field  for  purchase  or  maintenance  of  furniture 
and  furnishings. 

(e)  Conduct  of  factory,  warehouse,  showroom, 
or  field  inspections  necessary  to  carry  out  its 
responsibilities. 

7  Responsibilities  of  the  Chief  of  Division,  (a) 
The  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Foreign  Service 
Buildings  is  responsible  for  general  supervision 
and  direction  of  the  work  of  the  Division  and  the 
Sections.  He  shall  act  as  Executive  Secretary  of 
the  Foreign  Service  Buildings  Commission,  es- 
tablished by  Act  of  Congress  May  7,  1926,  on 
which  are  represented  the  Secretary  of  State,  the 
Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the  Secretary  of  Com- 
merce, the  Chairman  and  the  ranking  minority 
member  of  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations 
of  the  Senate,  and  the  Chairman  and  the  ranking 
minority  member  of  the  Committee  on  Foreign 
Affairs  of  the  House  of  Representatives.  The 
Chief  of  the  Division  is  responsible  for  the  prep- 
aration and  submission  to  the  Commission  of  re- 
ports on  the  status  and  projects  of  the  Foreign 
Service  Buildings  program,  and  of  reports  for 
the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  and  for  carry- 
ing out  the  directions  of  the  Foreign  Service 
Buildings  Commission. 

(b)  The  Chief  of  the  Division  is  responsible 
for  the  preparation  of  budgetary  programs'  for 
initial  construction  work,  property  acquisitions, 
alterations,  repairs,  maintenance,  residential  fur- 
nishings, and  supervision  of  construction,  and 
is  responsible  for  the  expenditure  of  funds 
appropriated  for  such  purposes. 

(c)  The  Chief  of  the  Division  shall  work  in 
close  collaboration  with  the  Division  of  Foreign 
Service  Admhiistration,  and  shall  render  to 
that  Division,  when  required,  technical  services, 
including : 

(1)  Inspection  and  recommendation  of  proper- 
ties for  lease;  recommendations  on  lessor-lessee 
obligations,  rental  rates  and  terms  and  layout 
requirements. 

(2)  Inspection  of  existing  leased  properties; 
reports  and  recommendations  on  contract  party 
obligations  and  programs  of  improvement  of  exist- 
ing facilities. 

(d)  The  Chief,  in  carrying  out  the  responsibili- 
ties of  the  Division,  will  also  work  closely  with 


490 


DEPARTMENT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


the  Divipion  of  Foreign  Service  Personnel,  the 
Division  of  Budget  and  Finance,  the  Legal  Ad- 
viser, and  the  geographical  Offices. 

8  Departmental  Order  Amended.  Departmen-" 
tal  Order  1218  of  January  15,  1944,  page  42,  is 
hereby  amended,  and  the  functions,  personnel  and 
recoi'ds  concerned  with  this  work  are  hereby  trans- 
ferred to  the  Division  of  Foreign  Buildings  Op- 
erations. 

9  Routing  Symbol  for  the  Division.  The  rout- 
ing symbol  for  the  Division  of  Foreign  Buildings 
Operations  shall  be  FBO. 

CoEDELL  Hull 
May  6,  1944. 

MODIFICATION  OF  THE  VISA 
PROCEDURE 

[Released  to  tUe  press  May  16] 

A  special  committee  has  been  set  up  in  the  Visa 
Division  of  the  Department  to  exjjedite  action  in 
visa  cases  and  to  examine  newly  received  applica- 
tions. Advisory  approvals  for  the  issuance  of  visas 
may  be  sent  to  American  consular  officers  in  cases 
other  than  those  of  alien  enemies  wliich  are  recom- 
mended by  the  committee  as  not  requiring  con- 
sideration under  the  Interdepartmental  Visa  Com- 
mittee Procedure. 

Until  a  simplified  form  of  application  is  avail- 
able-the  longer  BC  form  of  application  may  be 
used. 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  3  of  May  6,  1944, 
effective  I\Iay  6,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  Frederick  D.  G.  Eibble  as  Executive 
Assistant  to  the  Assistant  Secretary,  Mr.  Long. 

By  Departmental  Designation  5  of  May  6,  1944, 
effective  May  6, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  Frederick  Larkin  as  Chief  of  the  Divi- 
sion of  Foreign  Buildings  Operations. 

By  Departmental  Designation  6  of  May  16, 1944, 
effective  January  22,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
designated  Mr.  Frank  J.  Merkling  as  Assistant  on 
legislative  matters  to  the  Assistant  Secretary,  Mr. 
Long. 

By  Departmental  Designation  7  of  May  20, 1944, 
effective  JNIay  13, 1944,  tlie  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  Eric  C.  "VVendelin  as  Assistant  Chief  and 
temporarily  Acting  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Eiver 
Plate  Affairs,  Office  of  American  Republic  Affairs. 


Treaty  Information 


AUSTRALIAN  -  NEW  ZEALAND  AGREEMENT, 
1944 

The  text  of  the  Australian  -  Xew  Zealand  Agree- 
ment, 1944,  providing  for  Australian  -  New  Zea- 
land cooperation  and  collaboration,  signed  at  Can- 
berra, Australia,  on  January  21,  1944,  and  infor- 
mation and  statements  relating  to  the  agreement 
and  the  Canberra  conference  are  printed  in  Cv/r- 
rent  Notes  on  International  Affairs,  January  1944, 
vol.  15,  no.  1,  issued  by  the  Australian  Department 
of  External  Affairs. 

RENEWAL     OF     NAVAL-AVIATION-MISSION 
AGREEMENT  WITH  PERU 

By  exchanges  of  notes  signed  at  Washington 
January  31,  February  18,  April  6  and  29,  and  May 
2, 1944  an  agreement  was  effected  between  the  Gov- 
ermnent  of  the  United  States  and  the  Government 
of  Peru  for  the  renewal  of  the  agreement  pro- 
viding for  the  assignment  of  a  United  States 
Naval-Aviation  Mission  to  Peru  signed  at  Wash- 
ington on  July  31,  1940  (Executive  Agreement 
Series  178). 

The  above-mentioned  notes  renew  the  agree- 
ment of  1940  for  a  period  of  two  years  from  July 
31,  1944,  the  date  the  agreement  would  otherwise 
have  terminated,  and  amend  that  agreement  by 
the  addition  of  the  following  article : 

"The  members  of  this  Mission  are  permitted  and 
may  be  authorized  to  represent  the  United  States 
of  America  on  any  commission  and  in  any  other 
capacity  having  to  do  with  military  cooperation 
or  hemispheric  defense  without  prejudice  to  this 
Agreement,  during  the  present  war  emergency." 

The  terms  "Ministry  of  Marine  and  Aviation" 
and  "Minister  of  Marine  and  Aviation"  are 
changed  to  "Ministry  of  Aeronautics"  and  "Min- 
ister of  Aeronautics",  respectively,  wherever  they 
appear  in  the  agreement  of  July  31,  1940,  in  con- 
formity with  a  recent  act  approved  by  the  Con- 
irress  of  Peru. 


1 


^  ^ 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULL 


H 


^   rm 


c 


riN 


MAY  27,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  257— Publication  2134 


ontents 


I 


\ 


The  War  p^^^ 

Certain  Aspects  of  Our  Economic  Policy  Toward  the 

Ji^viroj)eiiu  Neuir&h:  By  Livingston  T.  Merchant  .  .  493 
Lend-Lease   Operations:    Letter   of    the    President   to 

Congress    Transmitting   the    Fifteenth    Quarterly 

Keport 495 

CivU  Aviation 496 

Relief  Supplies  for  American  Prisoners  of  War  in  the 

Philippines 496 

The  Proclaimed  List:  Inclusion  of  Swedish  Firms    ...       497 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

United  Nations  Monetarj'  and  Financial  Conference  .    .       498 

First  Pan  American  Congress  on  Criminology 499 

United  States  National  Commission  of  the  Permanent 

American  Aeronautical  Commission 499 

American  Republics 

Fifteenth    Anniversary    of    Inauguration    of    Airmail 
Service   Between   the   United   States    and    vSouth 

America 500 

The  New  Government  in  Bolivia:  Statement  by  the 

Secretary  of  State 501 

Visit  of  Rector  of  the  National  University  of  Nicaragua .        50 1 

Visit  of  Cuban  Health-Unit  Director 501 

[over] 


«.fi.8UP£RINTENDEriT0FD0CU«£Nrs 


0 


ontents-coNTmvED 

Far  East  ^"^e 

Paul  B.  Eaton  Eeturns  From  China 501 

Near  East 

Conference  of  Greek  Political  Leaders 502 

The  Department 

United  States  Section  of  Anglo-American  Caribbean 
Commission:  Departmental  Order  1274  of  May  23, 
1944 502 

Appointment  of  Officers 503 

Treaty  Information 

Renewal  of  Agreement  With  Panama  for  the  Detail  of  a 
United  States  Army  Officer  To  Serve  as  Adviser  to 
the  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Panama    ....       503 

Canadian  Mutual- Aid  Agreements 504 

Legislation 504 

Publications 504 


The  War 


CERTAIN  ASPECTS  OF  OUR  ECONOMIC  POLICY  TOWARD  THE 

EUROPEAN  NEUTRALS 

By  Livingston  T.  Merchant ' 


Wlien  the  United  States  entered  the  war  in  De- 
cember 1941,  the  European  neutrals  assumed  a 
new  significance  for  this  Government.  From  that 
moment  two  tests  had  to  be  applied  to  them :  how 
much  economic  support  could  they  give  our  war 
effort  and  how  much  help  were  they  giving  the 
enemy.  This  help  to  the  enemy  included  oppor- 
tunities for  espionage  and  the  dissemination  of 
propaganda;  and,  in  certain  cases,  it  included, 
through  the  export  of  strategic  materials,  impor- 
tant and  direct  economic  support  to  the  German 
war-machine.  The  effort  to  cut  off  economic  aid 
to  the  Axis  has  been  one  phase  of  total  war  which 
for  obvious  reasons  has  received  little  publicity. 
Important  results  have,  however,  been  achieved. 

In  reviewing  the  effort  to  eliminate  all  economic 
assistance  to  the  Axis  on  the  part  of  the  European 
neutrals  one  has  to  consider  only  five  countries: 
Switzerland,  Sweden,  Spain,  Portugal,  and  Tur- 
key. The  geographic  situation  of  these  five  coun- 
tries in  relation  to  Germany  and  to  German-occu- 
pied territory  permits  the  physical  movement  of 
raw  materials  or  of  other  goods  with  regularity 
and  on  a  significant  scale.  One  must  remember 
also,  in  considering  the  economic-warfare  prob- 
lems posed  by  the  position  of  these  countries,  that 
the  situation  of  each  vai-ies  greatly.  The  five  have 
little  in  common  except  non-belligerency.  There 
has  remained  in  this  war  a  lingering  and  confus- 
ing tendency  to  lump  the  few  remaining  non-bel- 
ligerent countries  in  Europe  into  one  group  and 
conveniently  refer  to  it  as  the  "European  neu- 
trals". This  tendency  is  a  relic  of  earlier  smaller 
wars ;  today  it  is  totally  unreal.  One  can  reason- 
ably assume  that  the  primary  reason  why  Hitler 
has  not  long  since  occupied  these  countries  is  that 
his  military  advisers  have  coldly  calculated  that 


the  necessary  military  investment  would  provide 
the  Wehrmacht  with  too  low  a  strategic  and  eco- 
nomic dividend.  The  escape  of  these  countries 
from  Nazi  occupation  has  not  been,  therefore,  ex- 
clusively an  individual  choice  freely  exercised. 

To  emphasize  the  dissimilarities  of  these  coun- 
tries one  needs  only  to  recall  that  Sweden  and 
Switzerland  are  "islands"  surrounded  by  Ger- 
many or  by  German-controlled  areas.  Turkey 
and  Portugal  have  treaties  of  alliance  with  Great 
Britain.  Spain,  a  dictatorsliip  under  debt  to  Hit- 
ler, is  neither  island  nor  ally. 

Common  factors  are,  however,  evident.  In 
1940  and  in  1941  each  of  these  countries  was  trad- 
ing heavily  with  the  Axis,  but  each  was  dependent, 
to  some  degree,  on  imports  from  overseas  which 
the  Axis  could  not  supply.  To  deal  with  this 
economic  problem  the  British  threw  into  gear  in 
September  1939  carefully  laid  plans  for  the  appli- 
cation of  an  economic  blockade  against  Germany 
and  Italy.  The  main  features  of  such  a  blockade 
were  born  in  the  experience  of  the  first  World 
War.  It  was  naturally  designed  to  meet  the  mili- 
tary and  economic  realities  which  the  British  faced 
at  the  start  of  World  War  II.  The  basic  premises 
of  the  blockade  were  two  in  number:  first,  the 
naval  forces  at  the  disposal  of  Great  Britain  and 
its  Allies  at  that  time  were  insufficient  to  impose 
an  absolute  embargo  by  men-of-war  patrolling 
every  mile  of  Europe's  coastline;  second,  the  neu- 
trals possessed  a  right  to  maintain  normal  trade 
relations  with  the  enemy.  The  blockade,  therefore, 
rested  for  effectiveness  at  least  as  much  upon  the 
consent  of  the  neutrals  as  upon  the  guns  of  the 
British  Navy.    The  implements  with  which  the 

"  The  author  of  this  article  is  Chief  of  the  Eastern 
Hemisphere  Division  of  the  Department  of  State. 

493 


494 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


blockade  was  enforced  included  the  use  of  a  special 
type  of  trade  ti-eaty  known  as  the  "war  trade 
agreement." 

Soon  after  the  outbreak  of  war  in  1939,  Great 
Britain  negotiated  individual  war  trade  agree- 
ments with  most  of  the  European  neutrals.  Al- 
though not  identical,  these  agreements  closely  re- 
sembled each  other.  Turkey,  however,  was  an 
exception.  The  guiding  principle  in  each  case 
was  the  establishment  of  blockade  quotas  for  the 
goods  received  from  overseas. 

The  goods  covered  by  these  specific  quotas  as 
well  as  the  size  of  each  individual  quota  were  based 
on  an  estimate  of  the  normal  requirements  of  the 
country  in  question.  In  return  for  permission  to 
import  through  the  blockade  goods  under  quota 
in  the  amounts  set  for  each  quarter,  each  neutral 
agreed  not  to  reexport  the  materials  which  thus 
passed  through  the  blockade.  Certain  other  re- 
strictions, varying  from  country  to  country  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  strength  of  Great  Britain's  bar- 
gaining position  at  the  time  of  the  negotiation, 
were  imposed  upon  the  size  and  character  of  the 
neutral's  trade  with  the  enemy.  Machinery  was 
established  in  London  for  the  purpose  of  scruti- 
nizing each  individual  shipment  to  a  neutral  by 
water.  If  the  particular  consignment  was  ap- 
proved as  being  within  the  quarterly  blockade 
quota,  a  passport,  known  as  a  "navicert,"  was 
issued.  This  gave  the  shipment  safe  passage 
through  the  blockade.  Other  components  of  the 
blockade  were  certain  fiscal  controls  and  the  black 
list.  These  denied  to  enemy  individuals  and 
enemy  concerns  or  to  those  denounced  as  agents  of 
the  enemy  in  neutral  areas  trading  privileges  with 
the  Allies. 

In  appraising  the  form  and  effectiveness  of  these 
agreements,  one  must  not  forget  that  the  Germany 
of  1939  to  1943  was  vastly  different  from  what  it  is 
today.  Even  last  year  it  had  military  forces  to 
spare  in  addition  to  a  powerful  air  force.  The 
threat  of  the  Luftwaffe  brooded  over  the  neutral 
negotiators  every  time  they  sat  down  at  a  confer- 
ence table  with  the  enemies  of  Germany.  Nor  was 
Germany  ever  averse  to  punctuating  a  disappoint- 
ment over  a  withheld  export  license  or  an  unful- 
filled commitment  by  torpedoing  on  the  high  seas 
a  neutral  ship  in  whose  captain's  safe  rested  a 
German  safe-conduct. 


These  considerations  limited  the  freedom  of 
choice  of  the  neutrals.  The  Allies  also  operated 
under  restraints.  At  times  vital  supply  needs  im- 
posed a  limitation  which  might  then  be  met  only 
from  a  particular  neutral  source.  The  threat  of 
such  loss  strengthened  the  hand  of  the  neutral  in 
its  negotiation  with  us,  and  by  the  same  token 
forced  us  sometimes  to  stay  our  own  hand. 

In  order  to  reduce  the  economic  aid  to  the  enemy 
which  was  within  limits  perforce  admitted  under 
the  war  trade  agreements,  the  British  made  sub- 
stantial internal  purchases  from  certain  countries 
of  materials  that  they  did  not  necessarily  need, 
but  which  the  enemy  required.  Operations  of  this 
sort,  designed  to  deny  enemy  acquisitions  at  the 
source,  were  labeled  by  the  British  as  "preemp- 
tion." The  United  States  has  tended  to  call  them 
"preclusive  purchases." 

When  this  country  entered  the  war  in  December 
1941  it  became  a  partner  in  the  economic-warfare 
system  that  the  British  had  established  and  oper- 
ated. Thereupon  the  United  States  Government 
took  various  steps  to  adapt  its  existing  economic 
controls  and  to  adopt  new  measures  necessary  to 
implement  the  partnership.  Among  the  measures 
was  a  provision  for  cooperating  with  the  British 
on  a  joint  basis  in  preclusive  operations  in  certain 
neutral  countries. 

The  Allies'  economic  policy  toward  the  neutrals 
in  1942  moved  along  much  the  same  lines  as  in 
1941  before  the  United  States  entry  into  the  war. 
Secretary  Hull,  in  his  speech  on  April  9,  1944,^ 
spoke  of  our  efforts  in  every  direction  to  reduce  the 
aid  which  the  neutrals  by  their  trade  gave  the 
enemy  and  simultaneously  to  increase  the  strength 
which  we  might  draw  from  them.  The  limits  on 
our  power  continually  forced  the  acceptance  of 
compromises  which  we  would  not  have  freely 
chosen.  The  economic  and  the  growing  military 
force  which  followed  the  entry  of  the  United  States 
into  the  war,  however,  enabled  the  adoption  of 
steadily  intensified  economic  operations  and  in- 
creasing pressure  on  the  neutrals  to  gain  the 
avowed  objective  of  the  total  withdrawal  of  their 
economic  support  to  the  enemy.  Preclusive  pur- 
chasing operations  were  multiplied  in  range  and 
expenditure,  and  the  results  became  increasingly 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  15,  1944,  p.  336. 


MAY    27,    1944 


495 


apparent.  Certain  of  the  war  ti'ade  agreements 
were  renegotiated,  and,  in  the  case  of  at  least  one, 
the  country  concerned  became  an  equal  partner 
with  the  British  in  the  new  agreement. 

The  year  1943  saw  a  further  rise  in  the  com- 
bined power  of  the  Allies.  This  factor,  coupled 
with  the  growing  scarcity  of  vital  raw  materials 
throughout  the  world,  enabled  us  to  drive  harder 
bargains  and  to  exact  greater  concessions  from  the 
neutrals  in  our  economic  relations.  The  help  they 
gave  the  enemy  continued.  It  was  clearly  declin- 
ing, but  it  was  still  substantial.  The  number  of 
Allied  cruisers  to  be  spared  for  the  interception  of 
neutral  ships  was  increasing.  The  interception  of 
neutral  ships,  which  were  brought  into  contraband- 
control  bases  and  which  were  searched  by  experts, 
discouraged  illicit  shipments  through  the  blockade 
and  tightened  still  further  the  economic  noose  on 
Germany.  In  1943  enemy  blockade  runners  from 
the  Far  East,  as  newspaper  readers  are  now  aware, 
suffered  a  savagely  high  mortality,  which  placed 
additional  pressure  on  the  German  war-machine. 

Throughout  the  war  the  economic-warfare  agen- 
cies of  the  British  and  the  United  States  Govern- 
ments have  worked  closely  with  the  highest  mili- 
tary authorities.  They  have  maintained  a  con- 
stant interchange  of  information  and  recommenda- 
tions concerning  the  military  pressure,  through 
bombing,  economic  measures,  negotiation,  or  other 
actions,  that  could  do  the  most  damage.  One 
should  recognize,  however,  that  the  highest  mili- 
tary strategy  at  times  required  that  the  maximum 
economic  pressure  not  be  exerted  against  a  partic- 
ular country,  or  occasionally  even  that  economic 
benefits  be  conferred  for  reasons  which  might  bear 
no  apparent  relation  to  the  facts  available  to  the 
public.  This  observation  is  made  not  to  extenuate 
the  failures  where  they  have  been  encountered  in 
our  economic  warfare,  but  rather  to  emphasize  the 
intimacy  of  the  relationship  between  military  and 
economic  warfare. 

The  time  has  come  when  this  Government,  in 
the  effort  to  shorten  the  war,  has  made  abundantly 
clear  the  fact  that  the  neutrals  of  Europe  must 
cease  their  aid  to  Germany.  Secretary  Hull,  in  his 
speech  of  April  9, 1944,  said : 

"We  can  no  longer  acquiesce  in  these  [neutral] 
nations'  drawing  upon  the  resources  of  the  allied 


world  when  they  at  the  same  time  contribute  to 
the  death  of  troops  whose  sacrifice  contributes  to 
their  salvation  as  well  as  ours.  We  have  scrupu- 
lously respected  the  sovereignty  of  these  nations; 
and  we  have  not  coerced,  nor  shall  we  coerce,  any 
nation  to  join  us  in  the  fight.  We  have  said  to 
these  countries  that  it  is  no  longer  necessary  for 
them  to  purchase  protection  against  aggression  by 
furnishing  aid  to  our  enemy — whether  it  be  by  per- 
mitting official  German  agents  to  carry  on  their 
activities  of  espionage  against  the  Allies  within 
neutral  borders,  or  by  sending  to  Germany  the 
essential  ingredients  of  the  steel  which  kills  our 
soldiers,  or  by  permitting  highly  skilled  workers 
and  factories  to  supply  products  which  can  no 
longer  issue  from  the  smoking  ruins  of  German 
factories.  We  ask  them  only,  but  with  insistence, 
to  cease  aiding  our  enemy." 

When  we  have  achieved  that  objective  completely 
we  can  confidently  count  on  a  shortening  of  the  war 
as  a  direct  result.  From  that  time  forward  the 
direction  of  our  economic  policy  toward  the  neu- 
trals will  be  in  large  part  controlled  by  the  necessity 
of  reintegrating  their  resources  and  their  produc- 
tive capacity  into  the  economy  of  Europe  at  peace. 

LEND-LEASE  OPERATIONS 

Letter  of  the  President  to  Congress  Transmitting 
the  Fifteenth  Quarterly  Report 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  22] 

The  following  letter  of  the  President  to  the 
Congress,  dated  May  22,  1944,  accompanied  a  re- 
port on  lend-lease  operations  for  the  period  ended 
March  31,  1944:1 

To   The   Congress   of   the   United   States   of 
America  : 

I  am  submitting  herewith  the  Fifteenth  Report 
on  Lend-Lease  Operations  for  the  period  ending 
March  31,  1944. 

United  Nations  forces  are  now  about  to  strike 
new  and  mightier  blows  at  Nazi-occupied  Europe 
from  offensive  bases  in  the  West,  the  South,  and 
the  East.  The  fighting  men  of  many  nations  have 
been  banded  together  in  combined  operations. 
They  are  armed  with  the  most  powerful  weapons 


'  Not  printed  herein. 


496 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


that  the  combined  resources  and  ingenuity  of  the 
United  Nations  can  produce.  They  are  ready  to 
bring  to  bear  their  strength  to  continue  the  crush- 
ing process  against  the  Nazis  and  the  German  war 
macliine. 

Our  American  forces  will  go  into  battle  side  by 
side  with  the  men  of  Britain,  France,  Norway, 
Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  Netherlands  and  our 
other  allies.  At  sea,  warships  flying  many  United 
Nations  flags  will  escort  the  fleets.  In  the  skies, 
the  E.  A.  F.  will  join  with  the  United  States  Army 
Air  Forces  in  blasting  the  paths  for  our  troops 
and  in  protecting  them  from  air  attack. 

For  this  great  undertaking,  the  United  Nations 
fighting  partnership  has  been  made  far  stronger 
by  lend-lease  and  reverse  lend-lease.  Through 
lend-lease  we  have  made  certain  that  every  man 
in  the  forces  of  the  other  United  Nations  who  goes 
into  battle  beside  an  American  fighting  man  has 
what  he  needs  to  hit  the  common  enemy  as  hard 
as  possible.  Through  reverse  lend-lease,  the 
American  Forces  have  been  similarly  aided  by  our 
allies  with  everything  they  had  that  we  needed. 

On  the  eastern  European  front  also,  arms  and 
other  war  supplies  provided  by  the  United  States 
and  the  British  Commonwealth,  will  continue  to 
strengthen  the  Soviet  Armies  for  the  new  blows 
that  will  be  timed  with  our  advances. 

In  the  Far  East  and  the  Pacific  our  offensives  in 
New  Guinea,  in  Burma,  and  against  the  Japanese 
fortress  islands  in  the  Central  Pacific  are  proof 
that  the  battle  for  Japan  is  not  waiting  upon  the 
successful  conclusion  of  the  battle  against  Nazi 
Germany.  China  is  being  helped  to  the  utmost 
of  our  ability. 

Decisive  battles  are  ahead.  Now,  more  than 
ever,  it  is  vital  to  our  own  American  Army  and 
Navy  and  Air  Forces,  as  well  as  to  the  forces  of 
the  other  United  Nations,  that  we  continue  to  pro- 
vide our  fighting  partners  with  the  additional  war 
supplies  they  need  to  supplement  their  own  re- 
sources. Congress  has  again  recognized  this  fact 
by  its  overwhelming  vote  to  extend  the  Lend-Lease 
Act. 

Only  by  uniting  our  full  strength  with  the  full 
strength  of  the  other  free  peoples  of  the  world 
have  we  moved  from  the  defensive  to  the  offensive, 
from  defeats  to  victories.  By  maintaining  our 
unity  now  we  shall  certainly  achieve  final  victory. 


By  continuing  our  unity  after  the  war  we  can 
assure  a  peace  in  which  mankind  can  live  and  work 
and  worship  in  peace,  freedom,  and  security. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 

CIVIL  AVIATION^ 

[Released  to  the  press  May  25] 

The  Chinese  group,  consisting  of  Mr.  Chang  Kia- 
Ngau,  Minister  of  Transportation ;  Major  General 
P.  T.  Mow,  Chinese  Army  Air  Forces;  and  Mr. 
Liu  Chieh,  Chinese  Minister  and  Counselor  of  the 
Embassy  in  Washington,  has  entered  upon  explor- 
atory talks  on  civil  aviation  with  an  American 
group  consisting  of  Ambassador  Joseph  C.  Grew ;  ^ 
Assistant  Secretary  of  State  Adolf  A.  Berle,  Jr.; 
Mr.  L.  Welch  Pogue,  Chairman  of  the  Civil  Aero- 
nautics Board;  Mr.  William  A.  M.  Burden,  As- 
sistant Secretary  of  Commerce;  and  Mr.  Stokeley 
W.  Morgan,  Chief  of  the  Aviation  Division  of  the 
Department  of  State.  The  first  conference  was 
held  on  Monday,  May  22,  1944,  and  another  con- 
ference is  expected  to  take  place  at  an  early  date. 

The  Russian  group  which  is  to  hold  exploratory 
conferences  with  the  same  American  group  is  now 
in  Washington  and  consists  of  the  following :  Am- 
bassador Andrei  A.  Gromyko ;  Lieutenant  General 
L.  G.  Rudenko;  Major  General  A.  A.  Avseevich; 
Major  General  N.  I.  Petrov;  and  Colonel  P.  F. 
Berezin.  The  first  conference  is  expected  to  take 
place  on  Monday,  May  29, 1944. 

RELIEF  SUPPLIES  FOR  AMERICAN  PRISON- 
ERS OF  WAR  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 

[Reloasod  to  the  press  May  23] 

The  War  Prisoners'  Aid  of  ihe  Young  Men's 
Christian  Association  was  recently  informed  by 
its  Stockholm  office  that  the  Japanese  authorities 
in  the  Philippine  Islands  had  extended  permission  aj 
to  the  neutral  delegate  there  of  the  War  Prisoners'  " 
Aid  to  purchase  locally  relief  supplies  to  an  amount 
not  exceeding  $25,000  monthly  for  shipment  to  ci- 
vilian internment  and  prisoner-of-war  camps  in 
the  Philippine  Islands.  United  States  Govern- 
ment funds  have  been  made  available  for  expendi- 
ture by  the  War  Prisoners'  Aid  delegate  for  this 
purpose.    These  funds  are  in  addition  to  montlily 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  1,  1944,  p.  301. 

■  Mr.  Grew  is  Director  of  the  Office  of  Far  Eastern  Af- 
fairs, Department  of  State. 


MAY   27,    1944 


497 


remittances  of  official  fimds  which  are  being  trans- 
mitted regularly  through  Swiss  Government  chan- 
nels to  the  executive  committees  of  civilian  intern- 
ment camps  in  the  Philippine  Islands  under  au- 
thorization obtained  from  the  Japanese  authorities 
in  August  1943.  Although  information  has  been 
received  that  the  American  Red  Cross  relief  sup- 
plies sent  on  the  exchange  vessels  to  Japan  and 
Japanese-occupied  territories,  including  the  Phil- 
ippine Islands,  have  been  distributed  by  the  Jap- 
anese authorities,  permission  has  so  far  not  been 
given  by  the  Japanese  Government  for  the  inspec- 
tion of  civilian  internment  camps  or  of  prisoner- 
of-war  camps  in  the  Philippine  Islands  by  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Swiss  Govermnent,  which  repre- 
sents American  interests  in  the  Far  East,  or  by 
representatives  of  neutral  organizations.  The 
United  States  Government  is  continuing  to  press 
the  Japanese  Government  to  grant  full  reciprocity 
in  this  respect. 

THE  PROCLAIMED  LIST:  INCLUSION  OF 
SWEDISH  FIRMS 

[Released  to  the  press  May  22] 

With  reference  to  a  press  report  that  considera- 
tion is  being  given  to  a  complete  blacklisting  of  all 
Swedish  concerns  having  American  connections, 
the  Department  of  State  stated  on  May  22,  1944 
that  no  firm  has  been  or  will  be  included  in  the 
Proclaimed  List  merely  because  means  of  pressure 
may  exist  by  reason  of  American  connections. 
Firms  are  included  in  the  Proclaimed  List  only  be- 
cause of  activities  on  their  part  which  assist  the 
Axis  war  effort.  None  of  the  firms  mentioned  in 
the  report  is  at  the  present  time  under  considera- 
tion for  inclusion  in  the  list.  The  firms  men- 
tioned, with  their  American  connections,  were : 

Swedish  company 
De  Laval  Augturbin 

Separator  A.B. 

Svenska  A.B.  Gasaccumulator 

Svenska  A.B.  Gasaccumulator 


Affiliate 

De  Laval  Steam  Turbine 
Co. 

De  Laval  Separator  Co. 

Elastic  Stop  Nut  Corp.  of 
America 

American    Gas   Accumu- 
lator Co. 

Electrolux  Corp. 

Re- 


Electrolux  Companies,  Sweden 

Kreuger&Toll  (EnskeldaBank)  International  .Match 

alization  Co. 
Telefonaktiebolaget,  L.  M.  Erics-  Teleric,  Inc. 

son 
Fernstrom  &  Co.,  A.B. 


Dick  Bergman 


Fernstrom   Paper   Mills, 

Inc. 
Hoyland  Steel  Co.,  Inc. 


Skandia  Insurance  Co.  Hudson  Insurance  Co. 

Enskilda   Bank,   A.B.    Fudicia    Nineteen  Corp. 

(owned  by  A.B.  Providentia) 
[Released  to  the  press  May  22] 

The  Interdepartmental  Proclaimed  List  Com- 
mittee took  action  on  May  22,  1944  which  will  re- 
sidt  in  the  inclusion  of  38  additional  Swedish  firms 
in  the  supplement  to  the  Proclaimed  List  to  be 
issued  on  June  2.  The  inclusion  of  these  firms  is 
in  line  with  the  regular  policy  of  the  Committee 
of  including  in  the  list  the  names  of  firms  in  neu- 
tral countries  who  have  assisted  the  Axis  by  en- 
gaging in  trade  with  enemy  territory  to  an  unusual 
extent  or  in  other  ways.  The  names  of  other  firms 
are  currently  under  consideration  for  inclusion. 

The  names  of  the  Swedish  firms  which  will  be 
included  in  the  June  2  supplement  to  the  Pro- 
claimed List  are : 

A.  R.  Applequist  Forvaltnings  A/B 
A/B  Kol  and  Transport 

A/B  Ara 

A/B  Ragnar  Appelquist 

Bat-Tjanst  A/B 

Swedish  Yaclits  A/B 

Pilip  Anderson  &  Co.,  A/B 

Filip  Anderson 

Anderson  Line  Ltd.,  A/B 

A/B  Kinofa 

Forsakringsbolaget  Bore  Forlags  A/B 

J.  C.  Hempel 

A/B  International  Shipping  Service 

A/B  Planeten 

Tessalia  A/B 

Hofjuvelerare  K.  Anderson  A.  B. 

Hallbergs  Guldsmedsaktiebolag,  C.  G. 

Guldvaruhuset  A/B 

Ungerska  Exportkontoret  A/B 

Pallig,  Walter  Albert 

Trulsson,  Frithiof  Nils  Hans 

A/B  Transportbransle 

Lindstrom  and  Wadell  A/B 

A/B  Pallasfllm 

Metallkontor  A/B 

E.  Schlabach 

A/B  Eltron 

Superfon  P.  Richter 

Sydprodukter  A/B 

Guernio  de  Luca 

Rosenthals  Specialaffar  A/B 

Tyska  Skolan  A/B 

Avimat  A/B 

Nordiskt  Filmotek  A/B 

B.  E.  Berg 

Skandinaviska  Berkefeld  Filter  A/B 
Janssen,  Lebrecht  Teodor 
Dufva,  Dag  Olaf 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


UNITED  NATIONS  MONETARY  AND  FINANCIAL  CONFERENCE  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  26] 

President  Roosevelt  has  called  an  international 
conference  for  the  purpose  of  discussing  proposals 
to  meet  post-war  international  monetary  problems. 

Invitations  have  been  extended  to  all  the  United 
Nations  and  the  nations  associated  with  them  in 
the  war,  requesting  them  to  send  official  repre- 
sentatives to  the  United  States  for  the  Conference, 
which  will  begin  on  July  first. 

The  delegates  representing  the  United  States 
will  be  headed  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury, 
Henry  Morgenthau,  Jr. 

A  list  of  governments  and  authorities  invited  to 
participate  in  the  Conference  follows: 

Australia  India 

Belgium  Iran 

Brazil  Iraq 

Canada  Liberia 

Chile  Luxembourg 

China  Mexico 

Colombia  Netherlands 

Costa  Rica  New  Zealand 

Cuba  Nicaragua 

Czechoslovakia  Norway 

Dominican  Republic  Panama 

Ecuador  Paraguay 

Egypt  Peru 

El  Salvador  Philippine  Commonwealth 

Ethiopia  Poland 

French  Committee  of  Union  of  South  Africa 

National  Liberation  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 

Greece  Republics 

Guatemala  United  Kingdom 

Haiti  Uruguay 

Honduras  ,                 Venezuela 

Iceland  Yugoslavia 

The  Conference  is  expected  to  last  several  weeks. 

All  agreements  worked  out  by  the  Conference 
subsequently  will  be  submitted  to  the  respective 
governments  for  approval. 


A  paraphrase  of  the  circular  note  sent  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  to  the  Washington  missions, 

498 


inviting  them  to  attend  the  United  Nations  Mone- 
tary and  Financial  Conference,  follows: 

The  Secretary  of  State  presents  his  compli- 
ments to  Their  Excellencies  and  Messieurs,  the 
chiefs  of  mission  or  principal  representatives  of 
the  governments  and  authorities  of  the  United 
Nations  and  the  nations  associated  with  them  in 
this  war,  and  refers  to  the  Joint  Statement  of 
Technical  Experts^  recommending  the  establish- 
ment of  an  international  monetary  fund  and  out- 
lining the  principles  for  such  a  fund. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  feels  that 
the  joint  statement  marks  an  important  step  to- 
ward international  economic  cooperation  in  the 
post-war  world  and  is  confident  that  others  have 
been  equally  gratified  by  this  evidence  of  the  de- 
sire of  the  United  Nations  and  the  nations  asso- 
ciated with  them  in  this  war  to  cooperate  in 
meeting  post-war  economic  problems. 

As  a  further  step  toward  the  realization  of  this 
objective,  the  President  of  the  United  States  now 
proposes  to  call  a  United  Nations  conference  for 
the  purpose  of  formulating  proposals  of  a  defi- 
nite character  for  an  international  monetary 
fund  and  possibly  a  bank  for  reconstruction  and 
development.  Of  course,  it  would  be  understood 
that  the  delegates  would  not  be  required  to  pos- 
sess plenipotentiary  powers  and  that  the  pro- 
posals formulated  at  the  meeting  would  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  several  governments  and  authorities 
for  acceptance  or  rejection. 

Accordingly,  telegraphic  instructions  have 
been  issued  to  the  chiefs  of  the  appropriate  diplo- 
matic missions  of  the  United  States  to  extend  on 
behalf  of  the  President  a  cordial  invitation  for  the 
respective  governments  and  authorities  to  send 
one  or  more  delegates  to  the  United  Nations  Mone- 
tary and  Financial  Conference  to  convene  in  the 

'  To  be  held  at  Bretton  Woods,  N.H. 

'  Treasury  Department  press  release  of  Apr,  21,  1944. 


MAY    27,    1944 


499 


United  States  on  July  1,  1944.  The  governments 
and  authorities  are  being  informed  that  the 
United  States  Delegation  to  the  Conference  will 
be  under  the  chairmanship  of  the  Secretary  of 
the  Treasury  and  that  the  names  of  the  other 
United  States  delegates,  as  well  as  information 
concerning  the  site  of  the  Conference  and  ar- 
rangements for  the  meeting,  will  be  forwarded  at 
a  later  date. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States,  believing 
that  the  early  formulation  of  precise  proposals 
for  an  international  monetary  fund  and  a  bank 
for  reconstruction  and  development  is  of  vital 
concern  to  all  of  the  United  Nations  group,  hopes 
that  favorable  replies  to  the  invitations  extended 
on  behalf  of  the  President  will  be  received  at  the 
earliest  possible  moment,  together  with  the  names 
of  all  of  the  members  of  the  respective  delegations. 

Mr.  Hull  will  be  glad  to  communicate  from 
time  to  time  to  Their  Excellencies  and  Messieurs, 
the  chiefs  of  mission  or  princiiDal  representatives, 
detailed  information  concerning  the  ai-rangements 
for  the  forthcoming  Conference. 

Department  of  State, 

Washington,  May  26, 19^. 

* 

FIRST  PAN  AMERICAN  CONGRESS 
ON  CRIMINOLOGY 

[Released  to  the  press  May  22] 

This  Government  has  accepted  the  invitation  of 
the  Chilean  Government  to  participate  in  the  First 
Pan  American  Congress  on  Criminology,  which 
will  be  held  at  Santiago,  Chile,  from  May  29  to 
June  3,  1944.  The  President  has  approved  the 
designation  of  the  following  oflBcials  of  the  Fed- 
eral Bureau  of  Investigation,  Department  of  Jus- 
tice, as  this  Government's  delegates  to  the  meeting : 
Mr.  Heber  M.  Clegg,  Mr.  John  N.  Speakes,  and 
Mr.  William  L.  Shea. 

UNITED  STATES  NATIONAL  COMMISSION 
OF  THE  PERMANENT  AMERICAN  AERO- 
NAUTICAL COMMISSION 

[Released  to  the  press  May  27] 

Reference  is  made  to  the  Department's  Press 
Release  464  of  September  23,  1941  ^  concerning 
the  establislmient  of  the  United  States  National 


Commission  of  the  Permanent  American  Aero- 
nautical Commission  (Comision  Aeronautica  Per- 
manente  Americana),  frequently  referred  to  as 
C.A.P.A.  The  creation  of  the  Permanent  Ameri- 
can Aeronautical  Commission  was  provided  for  in 
a  resolution  of  the  Inter-American  Technical  Avi- 
ation Conference  which  was  held  at  Lima,  Peru, 
in  September  1937.  The  purpose  of  the  Commis- 
sion is  to  forward  the  work  incident  to  the  unifica- 
tion and  codification  of  international  public  and 
private  air  law  and  to  develop  and  coordinate 
technical  activities  of  mutual  concern  in  the  field 
of  aeronautics  among  the  American  republics.  The 
resolution  of  the  Lima  Conference  also  provided 
for  the  organization  in  each  of  the  American  re- 
publics of  a  national  commission  for  the  purpose 
of  preparing  projects  and  proposals  for  the  con- 
sideration of  the  Permanent  American  Aeronauti- 
cal Commission. 

The  terms  of  the  original  members  of  the  United 
States  National  Commission  having  expired,  the 
President  has  now  approved  the  designation  of 
the  following  persons  as  members  of  the  United 
States  National  Commission  of  the  Permanent 
Aeronautical  Commission : 

Mr.  Oswald  Ryan,  Member,  Civil  Aeronautics  Board,  De- 
partment of  Commerce,  chairman 

The  Honorable  Alfred  L.  Bulwinkle,  Member  of  Committee 
on  Interstate  and  Foreign  Commerce,  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives 

The  Honorable  William  A.  M.  Burden,  Assistant  Secretary 
of  Commerce 

The  Honorable  Bennett  Champ  Clarli,  Chairman,  Commit- 
tee on  Interoceanlc  Canals,  United  States  Senate 

Lt.  Col.  Louis  A.  Johnson,  Infantry  Reserve,  United  States 
Army,  former  Assistant  Secretary  of  War,  Clarksburg, 
West  Virginia 

Mr.  Arnold  W.  Knauth,  Attorney,  Admiralty  and  Shipping 
Section,  Department  of  Justice 

Mr.  Stephen  LatchforU,  Cliairman,  United  States  Section, 
International  Technical  Committee  of  Aerial  Legal 
Experts 

ftlr.  Stokeley  W.  Morgan,  Chief,  Aviation  Division,  Depart- 
ment of  State 

Dr.  Francis  W.  Reichelderfer,  Chief,  Weather  Bureau, 
Department  of  Commerce,  and  Vice  Chairman,  Na- 
tional Advisory  Committee  for  Aeronautics 

Mr.  Theodore  P.  Wright,  Director  of  the  Aircraft  Resources 
Control  Office,  Aircraft  Production  Board,  War  De- 
partment 


'  Bulletin  of  Sept.  27,  1941,  p.  238. 


American  Republics 


FIFTEENTH  AlVNIVERSARY  OF  INAUGURATION  OF  AIRMAIL  SERVICE  BETWEEN  THE 

UNITED  STATES  AND  SOUTH  AMERICA 


[Released  to  the  press  May  23] 

The  following  telegrams  have  been  exchanged 
between  President  Roosevelt  and  His  Excellency 
Manuel  Prado,  President  of  the  Republic  of  Peru : 

Mat  18,  1944. 
Fifteen  years  ago  today  Pan  American-Grace 
Airways  Inc.  began  international  airmail  service 
between  Peru  and  the  United  States,  thus  estab- 
lishing a  service  which  has  contributed  toward 
strengthening  in  the  most  efficient  manner  the 
bonds  which  unite  both  countries.  On  this  agree- 
able occasion  I  am  pleased  cordially  to  address 
Your  Excellency,  renewing  the  decision  of  my 
Government  to  contribute  by  all  possible  means 
within  its  grasp  to  the  fortifying  of  the  magnifi- 
cent relations  of  good  neighborliness  existing 
between  Peru  and  your  great  friendly  Nation. 
Convinced  that  now  it  is  indispensable  to 
strengthen  the  union  of  the  Americas  in  order  to 
triumph  in  the  unwavering  undertaking  to  rees- 
tablish freedom  in  the  world,  I  am  confident  that 
the  important  services  which  Pan  American-Grace 
Airways  Inc.  has  been  rendering  will  be  extended 
in  the  future,  to  the  benefit  of  cultural,  commercial, 
and  personal  relations  between  the  men  who  foresee 
with  faith  the  favorable  future  which  Providence 
has  in  store  for  our  peoples. 

Manuel  Prado 


Mat  22,  1944. 
I  wish  to  thank  Your  Excellency  for  your  cordial 
message  on  the  fifteenth  anniversary  of  the  inau- 
guration of  the  international  airmail  service  be- 
tween Peru  and  the  United  States  by  Pan- 
American-Grace  Airways,  and  I  am  pleased  that 
you  feel  the  efforts  of  the  Company  have  contrib- 
uted materially  toward  strengthening  the  bonds 
which  unite  both  countries.  I  agree  with  you  that 
it  is  necessary  to  strengthen  the  union  of  the  Amer- 
icas in  order  to  carry  to  a  satisfactory  conclusion 
the  struggle  for  freedom  in  which  we  are  now 

500 


engaged  and  I  believe  that  those  enterprises  which 
contribute  to  this  end  deserve  our  good  wishes. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 

[Released  to  the  press  May  23] 

The  following  telegrams  have  been  exchanged 
between  Pi'esident  Roosevelt  and  His  Excellency 
Carlos  Arroyo  del  Rio,  President  of  the  Republic  of 
Ecuador : 

Mat  18, 1944. 
Upon  the  occasion  of  the  fifteenth  anniversary 
of  the  flight  by  which  there  was  inaugurated  the 
airmail  service  between  the  United  States  and  the 
countries  of  the  west  coast  of  South  America,  I 
am  happy  to  send  to  Your  Excellency,  together 
with  my  cordial  greetings,  an  expression  of  the 
api^roval  with  which  Ecuador  has  observed  the  de- 
velopment of  this  service,  which  has  contributed 
to  bind  together  more  closely  the  peoples  of  Amer- 
ica. I  express  the  hope  which  Ecuador  cherishes 
that  this  development  will  be  intensified  each  day 
as  necessity  requires  and  as  solidarity  of  effort  and 
destiny  demand.  I  reiterate  to  Your  Excellency 
the  testimony  of  my  friendship  and  consideration. 

Arroyo  del  Rio 
President  of  Ecuador 


May  22, 1944. 

I  appreciate  Your  Excellency's  friendly  message 
on  the  fifteenth  anniversary  of  the  inauguration  of 
the  airmail  service  between  the  United  States  and 
the  west  coast  of  South  America.  The  growth  of 
this  essential  service  in  the  past  fifteen  years  gives 
ground  for  confidence  that  the  future  development 
of  aviation  will  continue  to  strengthen  the  bonds 
of  friendship  and  mutual  understanding  between 
the  peoples  of  this  hemisphere. 

Please  accept.  Excellency,  my  warm  personal  re- 
gards and  assurances  of  my  highest  esteem. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


MAY   27,    1944 


501 


THE   NEW   GOVERNMENT   IN   BOLIVIA  ^ 
Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  May  26] 

The  Secretary  of  State  made  the  following  reply 
to  inquiries  received  May  26 :  "Ambassador  War- 
ren "  has  now  handed  me  his  report.  I  am  giving 
the  matter  attention  and  will  forward  his  findings 
to  the  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  other  American 
republics  for  their  study  and  recommendations. 
The  report  should  serve  as  the  basis  for  an  ex- 
change of  ideas  and  consultation  among  all  of  us." 

VISIT  OF  RECTOR  OF  THE  NATIONAL 
UNIVERSITY  OF  NICARAGUA 

Dr.  Modesto  Armijo,  rector  of  the  National  Uni- 
versity of  Nicaragua  at  Managua,  has  arrived  in 
Washington  as  guest  of  the  Department  of  State. 
He  plans  to  spend  two  months  visiting  leading  edu- 
cational and  cultural  centers  in  AVashington  and  in 
Eastern,  Midwestern,  and  Southern  States. 

Dr.  Armijo  has  held  a  Cabinet  post  as  Minister 
of  Education  and  has  also  been  Chief  Justice  of 
the  Su^Dreme  Court  of  Nicaragua.  In  the  inter- 
national field  he  has  reijresented  his  country  as 
Minister  to  Guatemala  and  delegate  to  many  inter- 
national conferences. 

Among  Dr.  Armijo's  most  notable  writings  are  a 
study  on  education  in  Nicaragua  and  his  well- 
known  work  on  the  political  status  of  women. 

Dr.  Armijo  is  head  of  the  Nicaraguan-American 
Cultural  Institute,  an  organization  dedicated  to 
furthering  mutual  acquaintance  and  cultural  rela- 
tions between  citizens  of  the  United  States  and 
Nicaragua.  He  is  also  a  member  of  many  literary 
and  professional  organizations  and  of  the  Acade- 
mies of  Geography  and  History  of  both  Nicaragua 
and  Honduras. 

VISIT  OF  CUBAN  HEALTHUNIT  DIRECTOR 

Dr.  Pedro  Nogueira,  director  of  the  Marianao 
Health  Unit  in  Cuba,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
at  the  invitation  of  the  Department  of  State. 
During  his  six  weeks'  visit  he  will  study  public- 
health  problems  in  Durham,  N.  C,  Philadelphia, 
New  York,  and  Albany.  In  June  Dr.  Nogueira 
plans  to  attend  at  Chicago  the  annual  congress 
of  the  American  College  of  Chest  Physicians,  of 
which  he  is  a  member. 


Dr.  Nogueira  is  also  vice  director  of  the  rural- 
housing  section  of  the  Cuban  Good  Neighbor 
Foundation,  which  was  created  soon  after  Pearl 
Harbor  with  funds  assigned  by  the  Pro-Allied  Aid 
Commission  of  Cuba.  This  group  devotes  part  of 
its  receipts  to  worthy  causes  in  other  Allied  na- 
tions, and  part  to  health  and  other  public-welfare 
enterprises  in  Cuba.  One  of  the  most  recent  proj- 
ects of  the  rural-housing  section,  to  which  Dr. 
Nogueira  is  devoting  much  attention,  is  demon- 
stration work  on  the  Murga  farm  in  Marianao. 
There,  at  a  total  cost  of  $2,800,  25  dwellings  occu- 
pied by  the  families  of  farm  laborers — 156  per- 
sons— have  been  supplied  with  running  water, 
latrines,  and  cement  floors.  Stagnant  pools  have 
been  drained.  A  communal  garden  has  been 
planted  and  is  tended  by  the  school  children,  and 
the  school  itself  is  giving  health  instruction  and 
vaccinating  the  children  against  smallpox  and 
other  communicable  diseases. 


Far  East 


PAUL  B.  EATON  RETURNS  FROM  CHINA 

Paul  B.  Eaton,  head  of  tlie  mechanical  engineer- 
ing department  at  Lafayette  College,  has  just  re- 
turned from  China,  where  he  served  for  one  year 
under  the  Department  of  State  as  a  teclmical  ad- 
viser to  the  Chinese  Government.  Wliile  in  China 
Professor  Eaton  visited  most  of  the  government 
engineering  universities,  inspected  many  of  the 
industries,  and  made  a  special  trip  over  the  rail- 
ways in  the  southern  part  of  west  China.  He  met 
engineers  engaged  in  education,  management,  de- 
sign, and  operation  and  gained  an  impression  of 
the  problems  that  they  have  been  facing.  Profes- 
sor Eaton  states  that  the  Chinese  engineers,  im- 
daunted  by  reverses,  look  eagerly  to  America  and 
American  engineers  for  aid,  not  only  during  the 
war  but  also  in  the  post-war  years,  and  that  they 
desire  aid  in  technological  development  and  in  the 
strengthening  of  management  functions. 

•  BULLETHN  of  Dec.  25,  1943,  p.  449,  Jan.  8, 1944,  p.  28,  and 
Jan.  29,  1944,  p.  132. 
^  Sent  on  special  mission  to  Bolivia. 


502 


DEPARTMEfNT    OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Near  East 


CONFERENCE  OF  GREEK  POLITICAL 
LEADERS 

[Released  to  the  press  May  22] 

On  May  16,  1944  the  President  received  the  fol- 
lowing message  from  Professor  Svolos  and  Messrs. 
Porphyrogennis  and  Roussos,  three  of  the  dele- 
gates attending  the  current  conference  of  Greek 
political  leaders  in  the  Near  East : 

We,  the  representatives  of  Fighting  Greece  at 
the  Conference  for  National  Unity,  wish  to  express 
to  you  our  respectful  admiration  and  gi-atitude  for 
the  friendly  interest  which  you  take  in  our  coun- 
try. 

The  Greek  people,  who  are  fighting  in  the  towns 
and  in  the  mountains  against  the  most  barbarous 
of  tyrannies,  will  never  allow  themselves  to  be 
withdrawn  from  the  camp  of  the  Allies  and  of  the 
United  Nations  who  are  fighting  for  freedom  and 
amongst  whom  your  great  country  occupies,  under 
your  illustrious  leadership,  so  glorious  a  position. 

Though  the  desire  for  national  unity  has  led  to 
actions  as  melancholy  as  the  late  mutinies  in  the 
Middle  East  forces,  actions  deplored  and  con- 
demned by  all,  we  can  assure  Your  Excellency  that 
the  Greek  people,  by  their  struggle  of  yesterday, 
today  and  tomorrow  and  by  the  help  of  their 
great  Allies,  will  succeed  in  rubbing  out  that  dark 
page. 

We  rely  on  your  sympathy  which  you  have  so 
often  shown  towards  our  country  and  we  assure 
you  that  we  will  do  our  utmost  to  achieve  that 
national  unity  which  is  an  indispensable  condition 
for  the  liberation,  peace  and  well-being  of  our 
country  which  has  endured  so  much  from  Italian, 
German  and  Bulgarian  aggressors. 

SvOLOS 
PORPHTEOGENNIS 

Roussos 


The  President  sent  the  following  reply  under 
date  of  May  19 : 

I  have  received  your  welcome  and  reassuring 
message.  We  Americans  are  firm  friends  of  the 
Greek  people,  who  have  fought  so  valiantly  and 
suffered  so  direly  during  the  course  of  the  war, 
and  have  therefore  been  profoundly  distressed  by 
the  recent  disunity  in  Greek  ranks.  But  we  re- 
member that  the  Greeks  have  always  shown  the 
capacity  to  submerge  their  differences  and  rally 
together  in  times  of  real  national  crisis.  The  oc- 
casion and  the  opportunity  exist  again  today  and 
it  is  our  earnest  hope  and  prayer  that  the  Greek 
leaders  assembled  in  the  Near  East  will  make  of 
the  current  conference  a  new  landmark  of  pur- 
poseful unity  in  Greek  history. 

Roosevelt 


The  Department 


UNITED    STATES    SECTION    OF    ANGLO- 
AMERICAN  CARIBBEAN  COMMISSION 

Departmental  Order  1274  of  May  23,  1944  ^ 

1  Fwvction  of  the  Anglo-Americwn  Cariiiean 
Commission.  Under  the  terms  of  the  joint  com- 
munique issued  by  the  Governments  of  the  United 
States  and  Great  Britain  on  March  9,  1942,  the 
Anglo-American  Caribbean  Commission  was  cre- 
ated "for  the  purpose  of  encouraging  and  strength- 
ening social  and  economic  cooperation  between 
the  United  States  of  America  and  its  possessions 
and  bases  in  the  area  known  geographically  and 
politically  as  the  Caribbean,  and  the  United  King- 
dom and  the  British  Colonies  in  the  same  area." 
The  Commission  was  further  directed  to  include 
in  its  terms  of  reference  close  cooperation  in  social 
and  economic  matters  between  all  regions  adjacent 
to  the  Caribbean.     The  Chairman  of  the  United 


'  Effective  May  23,  1944. 


MAY    2  7,    1944 


503 


States  Section  of  the  Commission  reports  directly 
to  the  President. 

2  Relationshifs  of  the  United  States  Section  to 
the  Department.  In  fiscal  and  administrative 
matters,  the  United  States  Section  of  the  Anglo- 
American  Caribbean  Commission  shall  be  under 
the  jurisdiction  of  the  Assistant  Secretary  in 
charge  of  the  administration  of  the  Department  of 
State.  Matters  of  policy  affecting  relations  with 
possessions  of  European  countries  in  the  Carib- 
bean area  dealt  with  by  the  United  States  Section 
of  the  Commission  shall  be  cleared  through  the 
appropriate  Divisions  of  the  Office  of  European 
Affairs.  Those  policy  matters  affecting  relations 
with  American  Republics  in  the  Caribbean  area 
shall  be  cleared  through  the  Division  of  Caribbean 
and  Central  American  Affairs  of  the  Office  of 
American  Eepublic  Affairs.  When  necessaiy,  the 
United  States  Section  of  the  Commission  and  the 
geographic  Offices  shall  consult  with  other  inter- 
ested Offices  or  Divisions  of  the  Department.  The 
United  States  Section  of  the  Commission  shall 
keep  the  Office  of  European  Affairs  and  the  Office 
of  American  Republic  Affairs  currently  informed 
of  matters  which  it  is  handling  within  their  re- 
spective fields;  those  Offices,  and  other  Divisions 
and  Offices  of  the  Department,  particularly  the 
Division  of  Communications  and  Records,  shall 
keep  the  United  States  Section  of  the  Commission 
currently  informed  of  matters  in  which  the  United 
States  Section  is  interested. 

The  United  States  Section  shall  be  represented 
on  the  interdivisional  Working  Committee  on 
Problems  of  Dependent  Territories  of  the  Divi- 
sion of  International  Security  and  Organization. 

3  Office  location  and  routing  symhol.  The 
offices  of  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean  Commis- 
sion are  in  the  Otis  Building,  810  Eighteenth 
Street,  Northwest.  The  routing  symbol  of  the 
United  States  Section  of  the  Commission  shall  be 
AACC. 


4  Departmental  Order  amended.  Departmen- 
tal Order  1218,  January  15,  1944,  page  22,  is  ac- 
cordingly amended. 

CoRDELL  Hull 

Mat  23, 1944 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  9  of  May  22, 1944, 
effective  May  1,  1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  des- 
ignated Mr.  Eugene  H.  Dooman  and  Mr.  Edwin  F. 
Stanton  as  Sjiecial  Assistants  to  the  Director  of 
the  Office  of  Far  Eastern  Affairs. 

By  Departmental  Designation  10  of  May  26, 
1944,  effective  May  26, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State 
has  designated  the  following  officers  of  the  United 
States  Section  of  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean 
Commission  stationed  in  Washington :  Mr.  Charles 
W.  Taussig,  Chairman  of  the  United  States  Sec- 
tion; Mr.  Coert  duBois,  United  States  Commis- 
sioner, supervising  field  operations;  Mr.  Sidney 
de  la  Rue,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Chairman ;  and 
Mr.  John  F.  Gauge,  Executive  Secretary. 


Treaty  Information 


RENEWAL  OF  AGREEMENT  WITH  PANAMA 
FOR  THE  DETAIL  OF  A  UNITED  STATES 
ARMY  OFFICER  TO  SERVE  AS  ADVISER 
TO  THE  MINISTER  OF  FOREIGN  AFFAIRS 
OF  PANAMA 

There  has  been  effected  by  an  exchange  of  notes 
signed  in  Washington  on  April  26  and  May  18, 
1944,  between  the  Ambassador  of  Panama  in 
Washington  and  the  Under  Secretary  of  State,  a 
renewal,  for  an  additional  period  of  one  year,  of 
an  agreement  providing  for  the  detail  of  a  United 
States  Army  officer  to  serve  as  adviser  to  the  Min- 
ister of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Panama  signed  at 


504 


DEPARTMENT  OP  STATE  BULLETIN 


Washington  on  July  7, 1942  (Executive  Agreement 
Series  258),  and  extended  for  a  period  of  one  year 
by  an  exchange  of  notes  dated  July  6  and  August 
6,  1943  (Executive  Agreement  Series  336).  The 
renewal  is  effective  from  July  7,  1944. 

CANADIAN  MUTUAL-AID  AGREEMENTS 

The  text  of  a  mutual-aid  agreement  between 
the  Government  of  Canada  and  the  French  Com- 
mittee of  National  Liberation,  signed  at  Ottawa 
on  April  14,  1944,  was  printed  in  the  Bulletin  of 
May  13,  1944,  pages  456^57.  Similar  agreements 
were  concluded  by  the  Government  of  Canada  with 
the  United  Kingdom  on  February  11,  1944,  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  on  February 
11,  1944,  Australia  on  March  9,  1944,  and  China 
on  March  22,  1944.  A  statement  by  Prime  Min- 
ister Mackenzie  King  regarding  Canadian  mutual 
aid  appears  in  the  March  16,  1944  issue  of  the 
Canadian  House  of  Commons  Debates,  pages 
1584-1586. 


Legislation 


The  Jewish  National  Home  in  Palestine:   Hearings  be- 
fore the  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, 78th  Cong.,  2d  sess.,  on  H.  Res.  418  and  H. 
Res.  419,  Resolutions  Relative  to  the  Jev?ish  National 
Home  in  Palestine.     February  8,  9,  15,  and  16,  1944. 
With  appendix  of  documents  relating  to  the  Jewish  Na- 
tional Home  in  Palestine.     11,  512  pp. 
Departments  of  State,  Justice,  and  Commerce  Appropria- 
tion Bill  for  1945 : 
Hearings  Before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on 
Appropriations,  United  States  Senate,  78th  Cong., 
2d  sess.,  on  H.R.  4204.     A  bill  making  appropria- 
tions for  the  Department  of  State,  the  Department 
of  Justice,  and  the  Department  of  Commerce,  for 
the  fiscal  year  ending  June  30,  1945,  and  for  other 
purposes,     ii,  331  pp. 
S.  Rept.  887,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4204.     [Favorable  re- 
port.]   5  pp. 
Appointment  of  Two  Additional  Assistant  Secretaries  of 
State.    H.  Rept.  1422,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4311.     [Fav- 
orable report.]     2  pp. 
Foreign  Service  Buildings  and  Grounds.     H.  Rept.  1421, 
78th  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  4282.     [Favorable  report]     5  pp. 


Providing  That  Nationals  of  the  United  States  Shall  Not 
Lose  Their  Nationality  by  Reason  of  Voting  Under  Legal 
Compulsion  in  a  Foreign  State.  H.  Rept.  1428,  78th 
Cong.,  on  H.  R.  2448.     [Favorable  report.]     3  pp. 

Declaring  the  policy  of  the  Congress  with  Respect  to  the 
Independence  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  H.  Rept.  1497, 
78th  Cong.,  on  S.  J.  Res.  93.     [Favorable  report.]     2  pp. 

Establishing  the  Filipino  Rehabilitation  Commission.  H. 
Rept.  1507,  78th  Cong.,  on  S.  J.  Res.  94.  [Favorable 
report.]     3  pp. 

Limiting  Production  of  Opium  to  Amount  Required  for 
Medicinal  and  Scientific  Purposes.  H.  Rept.  1515,  78th 
Cong.,  on  H.  J.  Res.  241.     [Favorable  report.]     4  pp. 

National  War  Agencies  Appropriation  Bill,  1945.  H.  Rept. 
I.'')!!,  7Sth  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  4879.     43  pp. 

Lend-Lease  Aid :  Preliminary  Report  of  Committee  In- 
vestigators to  the  Committee  on  Appropriations,  United 
States  Senate,  on  Lend-Lease  Aid  and  Government  Ex- 
penditures Abroad.    S.  Doc.  190,  78th  Cong,    ii,  34  pp. 

Supplemental  Estimates  of  Appropriations  for  the  Depart- 
ment of  State :  Communication  from  the  President  of 
the  United  States  transmitting  supplemental  estimates 
of  appropriations  for  the  fiscal  year  1944,  amounting  to 
$11,600,000,  and  a  draft  of  proposed  provisions  pertain- 
ing to  appropriations,  for  the  Department  of  State.  H. 
Doe.  578,  78th  Cong.     3  pp. 

Draft  of  Proposed  Provision  Pertaining  to  the  Department 
of  State :  Communication  from  the  President  of  the 
United  States  transmitting  draft  of  a  proposed  provision 
pertaining  to  an  appropriation  of  the  Department  of 
State  for  the  fiscal  year  1944.  H.  Doc.  587,  78th  Cong. 
2  pp. 

Fifteenth  Report  to  Congress  on  Lend-Lease  Operations: 
Message  from  the  President  of  the  United  States  trans- 
mitting the  Fifteenth  Report  on  Lend-Lease  Operations 
for  the  Period  Ending  March  31,  1944.  H.  Doc.  616. 
7Sth  Cong.     84  pp. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 
Boundaries  of  the  Latin  American  Republics:  An  Anno- 
tated List  of  Documents,  1493-1943  (Tentative  Version). 
By  Alexander  Marchant,  Office  of  the  Geographer,  De- 
partment of  State.  Inter-American  Series  24.  Publica- 
tion 2082.     V,  386  pp.     50c. 

Flight  Strips  Along  Alaska  Highway :  Agreement  Between 
the  United  States  of  America  and  Canada— Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  August  26  and  Sep- 


MAY   27,    1944 

tember  10, 1942.    Executive  Agreement  Series  381.    Pub- 
lication 2112.     2  pp.     5c. 

Status  of  Countries  in  Relation  to  the  War  April  22,  1!W4 : 
Compiled  by  Katharine  Elizabeth  Crane,  Division  of 
Research  and  Publication,  Department  of  State — Re- 
printed from  the  Bulletin  of  April  22,  1944.  Publication 
211S.     10  pp.     5c. 

Other  Government  Agencies 

"Cuba  in  1943",  prepared  in  American  Republics  Unit, 
Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce,  on  basis  of 
report  from  Albert  F.  Nufer,  Counselor  of  Embassy  for 
Economic  Affairs,  U.  S.  Embassy,  Habana,  Cuba. 

"The  Foreign  Service  and  American  Business",  by  John  G. 
Erhardt,  Director,  OflBce  of  Foreign  Service  Administra- 
tion, Department  of  State. 

"Economic  Tug-of-War  in  Present-Day  Spain",  an  article 
by  Mr.  Robert  E.  Whedbee  of  the  Madrid  Embassy  In 


505 

collaboration  with  Mr.  Arley  T.  Caudill  of  the  European 
Unit  of  the  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 

Annual  Report  of  the  American  Historical  Association  for 
the  Year  1942  (in  Three  Volumes),  Volume  II:  Letters 
from  the  Berlin  Embassy  1871-1874, 1880-1885,  Edited  by 
Paul  Knaplund,  78th  Cong.,  1st  Sess.  H.  Doc.  12,  428  pp. 

The  first  article  listed  under  "Other  Government 
Agencies"  will  be  found  in  the  May  13,  1944  issue 
of  the  Department  of  Commerce  publication  en- 
titled Foveign  Covimerce  Weekly.  The  second  ar- 
ticle -will  be  found  in  the  May  20, 1944  issue  of  that 
periodical.  The  third  article  is  to  be  published  in 
the  May  27, 1944  issue. 

Copies  of  Foreign  Commerce  Weehly  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Superintendent  of  Documents, 
Government  Printing  Office,  for  10  cents  each. 


0.    S.   GOVERNMENT   PRINTING  OFFICE:  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents.  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents    -    -    .    .    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPROVAL  OF  THE  DIEECTOE  OP  THE  BUEEAU  OF  THE  BUDGET 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULL 


H 


■^  m 


J 


TIN 

JUNE  3,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  258— Publication  2139 


C 


ontents 


The  War: 

Sovereign  Equality  for  All  Nations:  Statement  by  the 
Secretary  of  State 

Albania :  Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State   .... 

Lend-Lease  Plane  Exports:  Statement  by  the  Presi- 
dent     

Preliminary  Discussions  on  Establishment  of  Inter- 
national Peace  and  Seciirity  Organization:  Statement 
by  the  Secretary  of  State 

Executive  Committee  on  Economic  Foreign  Policy   .    . 

Proclaimed  List:  Cumulative  Supplement  3  to  Revision 
VII 

Exchange  of  American  and  German  Nationals   .... 

American  Republics 

Direct    Radio    Circuit    Between    United    States    and 

Uruguay     

Inter-American  Coffee  Board 

Agriculture  in  the  United  States:  West  Indian  Assist- 
ance     

Visit  of  Du-ector  of  Children's  Orchestras  in  Uruguay .    . 

The  Department 

Appointment  of  Advisers  to  Division  of  Labor  Re- 
lations     

Appointment  of  Officers 

[OVEBl 


Page 

509 
510 

510 


510 
511 

511 
511 


511 

512 

512 
513 


513 
513 


U.  S.  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMEuTS 

JUN  16  1944 


0 


OntBTl  fS— CONTINUED 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc.  Page 

Twenty -sixth  International  Labor  Conference: 

Message  of  President  Roosevelt 514 

Resolution  Concerning  Social  Provisions  in  the  Peace 

Settlement 514 

Resolution   Concerning  Economic   Policies  for   the 

Attaiimient  of  Social  Objectives 517 

Treaty  Information 

Trade  Agreement  With  Iran 521 

Inter-American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences   .    .       522 

General 

Iceland 522 

The  Foreign  Service 

Consular  Offices 522 

Publications 522 


The  War 


SOVEREIGN  EQUALITY  FOR  ALL  NATIONS 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 


[Released  to  the  press  June  1] 

At  his  press  and  radio  news  conference  on  June  1 
the  Secretary  of  State  made  the  following  reply 
in  answer  to  a  question  whether  there  was  any- 
thing he  could  say  that  might  be  of  reassurance 
to  the  small  nations.  The  correspondent  who 
asked  the  question  pointed  out  that  some  of  the 
small  nations  seemed  to  think  that  they  would  not 
be  properly  represented  in  the  proposed  interna- 
tional organization : 

"That  is  a  matter  in  which  the  small  nations  and 
the  large  nations  as  well  should  be  at  all  times 
especially  interested.  It  is  a  mutual  affair.  The 
future  welfare  of  each  nation  depends  upon  the 
welfare  of  all.  In  view  of  that  common  interest 
and  that  self-interest  in  every  mutual  sense,  I 
doubt  whether  there  would  be  many  nations,  large 
or  small,  which  would  have  any  other  purpose  than 
to  cooperate  in  all  legitimate  and  practicable  in- 
ternational relationships  that  would  be  mutually 
advantageous  and  mutually  profitable.  As  far  as 
this  Government  is  concerned,  whenever  I  have 
said  anything  on  this  subject,  it  has  always  em- 
phasized the  all-inclusive  nature  of  the  world  situ- 
ation and  our  disposition  and  purpose  to  see  that 
all  nations,  especially  the  small  nations,  are  kept 
on  a  position  of  equality  with  all  others  and  that, 
in  every  practicable  way,  there  will  be  cooperation. 

"Now,  it  is  not  possible  at  this  stage  for  this 
Government  or  any  government  to  give  any- 
body a  blueprint  as  to  all  of  the  details  of  how 
these  relationships  between  all  of  the  different  na- 
tions will  be  gradually  developed  and  perfected. 
There  is  no  occasion  to  be  especially  concerned 
about  the  attitude  of  this  Government  in  view  of 
the  declarations  that  the  President,  and  I,  and 
others  have  made.  The  truth  is  that  even  those 
declarations  are  not  necessarily  called  for  in  the 


light  of  our  entire  history  and  our  traditions.  We 
have  for  150  years  preached  liberty  to  all  the  na- 
tions of  the  earth,  to  all  the  peoples  of  the  earth, 
and  we  have  practiced  it.  We  have  encouraged  all 
nations  to  aspire  to  liberty,  and  to  enjoy  it.  Our 
attitude  toward  the  Philippines  is  a  striking  ex- 
ample. Nobody  had  to  put  us  on  the  witness  stand 
to  know  what  we  were  doing  for  them. 

"Even  back  in  our  earlier  days  we  preached  the 
same  spirit  of  liberty  with  which  we,  ourselves, 
were  inspired  in  acquiring  our  own  liberty,  to  all 
the  nations — especially  those  that  were  in  chains 
of  despotism,  as  the  South  American  countries 
were  for  centuries  under  Spanish  rule.  Nobody 
asked  us  to  do  it.  That  was  our  philosophy.  That 
was  our  spirit,  both  at  home  and  toward  all  peoples 
who  might  aspire  to  liberty.  As  soon  as  our  Amer- 
ican neighbors  threw  off  the  Spanish  yoke  we 
proceeded  to  recognize  them,  right  and  left.  We 
had  the  same  spirit  toward  Greece  and  other  coun- 
tries desiring  liberty  as  we  demonstrated  in  the 
Philippines.  That  has  been  our  consistent  record, 
a  record  of  championship  of  liberty  for  everybody, 
encouraging  them  at  all  times  and  in  all  places. 
I  see  no  reason  why  this  country,  this  great  free 
people  who  through  generations  have  dedicated 
themselves  to  this  wonderful  human  cause  and  pre- 
served it — I  see  no  reason  why  they  should  be  cate- 
chized every  morning  before  breakfast  as  to  their 
loyalty  to  liberty,  or  their  consistent  desire  of  lib- 
erty for  everybody  and  freedom  for  aspiring  peo- 
ples everywhere. 

"I  have  spoken  of  this  often  in  speeches  and  at 
other  times  before,  during,  and  after  my  trip  to 
Europe.  Here  is  an  example  from  my  address  to 
the  Congress :  'The  principle  of  sovereign  equality 
of  all  peace-loving  states,  irrespective  of  size  and 
strength,  as  partners  in  a  future  system  of  general 

509 


510 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


security  will  be  the  foundation  stone  upon  which 
the  future  international  organization  will  be  con- 
structed.' ^  That  is  our  objective.  I  think  I  have 
indicated  sufficiently  to  you  the  policy  of  this  na- 
tion and  this  Government  representing  it." 

ALBANIA 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  June  2] 

Five  years  ago  today,  on  June  3,  1939,  a  Fascist 
constitution  was  imposed  uj^on  the  Albanian  peo- 
ple by  the  Mussolini  regime  of  Italy.  The  Alba- 
nian people  never  accepted  this  constitution  nor  the 
series  of  puppet  governments  set  up  to  administer 
it. 

The  United  States,  of  coui'se,  never  recognized 
the  Fascist  annexation  of  Albania  which  followed 
the  unprovoked  aggression  of  April  7,  1939  and 
considers  that  the  right  to  freedom  under  institu- 
tions of  their  own  choosing  resides  in  the  people 
of  Albania. 

Albanian  patriots  have  fought,  and  continue  to 
fight,  to  drive  the  Nazis  from  their  country.  This 
is  a  part  of  the  common  struggle,  to  which  these 
sturdy  people  can  make  a  precious  contribution  if 
they  can  achieve  unity  in  the  effoi't  of  their  arms. 
Thus  they  can  hasten  the  day  of  their  liberation. 

LEND-LEASE  PLANE  EXPORTS 
Statement  by  the  President 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  2] 

Tabulation  of  figures  on  lend-lease  plane  exports 
for  the  month  of  March  has  now  been  completed  by 
the  Foreign  Economic  Administration.  On  the 
basis  of  these  figures  it  can  be  announced  that : 

1.  In  the  91  days  from  January  1,  1944  to  April 
1,  1944  a  total  of  4,400  planes  were  sent  to  our 
Allies  from  the  United  States.  This  means  that 
on  the  average  338  planes  were  shipped  or  flown 
every  week  to  fighting  forces  allied  with  our  own 
against  our  common  enemies  on  battle-fronts 
around  the  world. 

2.  Between  March  11, 1941,  when  the  Lend-Lease 
Act  was  passed,  and  April  1, 1944  more  than  33,000 
planes  have  been  sent  from  the  United  States  to 
the  forces  of  the  other  United  Nations.  Our  Allies 
IDaid  cash  for  7,000  of  the  jplanes.    The  remaining 


26,000  were  sent  under  lend-lease.  Many  thou- 
sands were  ferried  all  the  way  by  air  from  the 
factories  to  the  battle-fronts. 

3.  In  the  same  period  the  United  States  pro- 
duced over  175,000  planes.  We  thus  retained  for 
our  own  part  of  the  combined  United  Nations  war 
effort  more  than  four  fifths  of  the  planes  we  pro- 
duced, while  sending  very  large  numbers  to  our 
Allies.  Through  lend-lease  we  have  seen  to  it  that 
the  men  who  fight  beside  Americans,  in  the  of- 
fensives already  under  way  and  in  the  still  greater 
offensives  that  are  ahead,  have  the  extra  striking 
power  they  need  to  deliver  the  most  damaging  jjos- 
sible  blows  against  our  enemies — the  Germans  and 
the  Japanese. 

PRELIMINARY  DISCUSSIONS  ON  ESTAB- 
LISHMENT OF  INTERNATIONAL  PEACE 
AND   SECURITY  ORGANIZATION 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  May  29] 

The  first  phase  of  the  informal  conversations 
with  the  eight  Senators  ^  has  been  concluded.  We 
had  frank  and  fruitful  discussions  on  the  general 
principles,  questions,  and  plans  relating  to  the 
establishment  of  an  international  peace  and  se- 
curity organization  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciples contained  in  the  Moscow  four-nation  declara- 
tion,^ the  Connally  resolution,  and  other  similar 
declarations  made  in  this  country.  I  am  definitely 
encouraged  and  am  ready  to  proceed,  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  President,  with  informal  discussions 
on  this  subject  with  Great  Britain,  Russia,  and 
China,  and  then  with  governments  of  other  United 
Nations. 

Meanwhile,  I  shall  have  further  discussions  with 
these  and  other  leaders  of  both  parties  in  the  two 
Houses  of  Congress,  and  with  others.  The  door 
of  non-partisanship  will  continue  to  be  wide  open 
here  at  the  Department  of  State,  especially  when 
any  phase  of  the  planning  for  a  post-war  security 
organization  is  under  consideration. 


"  Bulletin  of  Nov.  20,  1943,  p.  343. 

°  Senators  Connally  of  Texas,  chairman;  George  of 
Georgia  :  Barkley  of  Kentucky ;  Gillette  of  Iowa  ;  La  Fol- 
lette  of  Wisconsin ;  Vandenberg  of  Michigan  ;  White  of 
Maine :  and  Austin  of  Vermont. 

'  Bulletin  of  Nov.  6,  1»43,  p.  308.  and  Nov.  20,  1943, 
p.  342. 


JUNE    3,    1944 


511 


EXECUTIVE  COMMITTEE  ON  ECONOMIC 
FOREIGN  POLICY 

Creation  and  Authority — The  Executive  Com- 
mittee on  Economic  Foreign  Policy  was  created  by 
letter  of  April  5,  1944  from  the  President  to  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  by  similar  letters  to  the 
heads  of  the  other  interested  Departments  and 
agencies  listed  below. 

Purpose — It  is  the  function  of  the  Committee 
to  examine  problems  and  developments  affecting 
the  economic  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States 
and  to  formulate  recommendations  in  regard 
thereto  for  the  consideration  of  the  Secretary  of 
State  and,  in  appropriate  cases,  of  the  President. 
Major  interdepartmental  committees  concerned 
with  general  economic  affairs  including  those  es- 
tablished in  the  Department  of  State  are,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  letter  from  the  President,  expected 
to  be  appropriately  geared  into  this  Committee. 

Organization — The  Committee  consists  of  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Departments  of  State,  the  Treas- 
ury, Agriculture,  Commerce,  and  Labor,  the 
United  States  Tariff  Commission,  and  the  Foreign 
Economic  Administration.  Representatives  of 
other  departments  and  agencies  are  invited  to  par- 
ticipate in  this  Committee  or  its  subcommittees 
when  matters  of  special  interest  to  them  are  under 
consideration.  The  chairman  of  the  Committee 
is  an  officer  of  the  Department  of  State  designated 
by  the  Secretary  of  State. 

Activities — The  Committee  meets  weekly,  or 
more  often  if  necessary.  The  Committee  studies 
and  advises  on  questions  of  economic  foreign 
policy.  It  considers  also  problems  of  various 
Departments  and  agencies  of  the  Government  deal- 
ing with  domestic  matters  which  have  an  impor- 
tant bearing  on  such  policy. 

Members 

Department  of  State Dean  Acheson,  chairman 

Department  of  State Harry  C.  Hawkins,  vice 

cliairman 

Department  of  the  Treasury Harry  D.  White 

Department  of  Agriculture Leslie  A.  Wheeler 

Department  of  Commerce Amos  E.  Taylor 

Department  of  Labor A.  P.  Hinrichs 

United    States    Tariff   Comniis-    Oscar  B.  Ryder 

sion. 
Foreign  Economic  Administra-  Lauchlin  Currie 

tion. 


PROCLAIMED  LIST:  CUMULATIVE  SUP- 
PLEMENT 3  TO  REVISION  VII 

[Released  to  the  press  June  3] 

The  Secretary  of  State,  acting  in  conjunction 
with  the  Acting  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  the 
Attorney  General,  the  Acting  Secretary  of  Com- 
merce, the  Administrator  of  Foreign  Economic 
Administration,  and  the  Coordinator  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  on  June  3  issued  Cumulative 
Supplement  3  to  Revision  VII  of  the  Proclaimed 
List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals,  promulgated 
March  23, 1944. 

Part  I  of  Cumulative  Supplement  3  contains  45 
additional  listings  in  the  other  American  republics 
and  55  deletions.  Part  II  contains  214  additional 
listings  outside  the  American  republics  and  42  de- 
letions. 

With  the  issuance  of  this  Supplement  the  Pro- 
claimed List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals  has  been 
extended  to  include  certain  cases  in  Finland. 

EXCHANGE  OF  AMERICAN  AND 
GERMAN  NATIONALS 

A  list  of  civilian  American  and  Latin  American 
nationals  who  will  arrive  in  New  York  on  board 
the  G-rifsholm  on  or  about  June  5  has  been  issued 
as  Department  of  State  press  release  195  of  May 
29,  1944. 


American  Republics 


DIRECT  RADIO  CIRCUIT  BETWEEN 
UNITED  STATES  AND  URUGUAY 

[Released  to  the  press  June  3] 

On  the  occasion  of  the  opening  of  the  first  direct 
radio  circuit  on  June  1,  1944  between  the  United 
States  and  Uruguay,  the  following  congratulatory 
telegrams  were  exchanged  between  the  President 
of  Uruguay  and  President  Roosevelt ;  between  the 
Minister  of  Foreign  Relations  and  Secretary  of 
State  Hull ;  and  between  the  Director  General  of 
Communications  in  Uruguay  and  the  Chairman  of 
the  Federal  Communications  Commission : 


512 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


I  reafRrm  to  Your  Excellency  the  profound 
sentiments  of  traditional  friendship  of  our  people 
united  by  history,  destiny,  and  juridical  and  moral 
obligations  in  the  struggle  for  liberty  and  in  the 
defense  of  the  Continent. 

Juan  Jose  Amezaga 
President  of  the  Oriental 

Republic  of  Uruguay 

I  deeply  appreciate  your  message  on  the  auspi- 
cious occasion  of  the  inauguration  of  direct  radio 
telegraphic  communications  between  the  United 
States  and  Uruguay.  At  this  crucial  moment  in 
the  struggle  against  the  forces  of  world  aggression, 
I  reiterate  to  you,  Mr.  President,  the  deep  senti- 
ment of  friendship  and  collaboration  that  unites 
our  people  in  the  common  defense  of  those  princi- 
ples of  liberty  and  justice  that  constitute  the 
historic  tradition  of  America. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 


forces  of  oppression  throughout  the  world  has 
reached  the  crucial  stage. 

CoRDELL  Hull 


The  direct  radio  telegraphic  service  between 
Uruguay  and  the  United  States  of  America  now 
inaugurated  will  reinforce  and  stimulate  the  his- 
torical ties  of  our  peoples  identified  in  the  guard- 
ianship of  the  principles  of  law  and  liberty  which 
constitute  the  sacred  and  common  tradition  of  the 
American  countries  and  joined  together  in  the 
work  of  continental  cooperation  and  defense  of 
the  hemisphere.  In  the  name  of  the  Uruguayan 
people  and  Government  I  express  to  Your  Excel- 
lency the  most  sincere  and  effusive  wishes  for  the 
triumph  of  the  free  nations  over  the  enemies  of 
the  ethical  and  juridical  order  of  civilization. 

JosE  Sebkato 

I  thank  Your  Excellency  for  the  cordial  and 
friendly  message  transmitted  on  the  occasion  of 
the  inauguration  of  direct  radio  telegraphic  com- 
munications between  the  United  States  and  Uru- 
guay. This  significant  development  symbolizes  the 
close  ties  and  the  singleness  of  purpose  that  unite 
our  two  countries  in  the  defense  of  our  common 
heritage  of  liberty  and  justice.  I  am  particularly 
happy  to  reaffirm  to  you,  Mr.  Minister,  the  pro- 
found sentiment  of  friendship  and  mutual  collab- 
oration that  animates  the  peoples  of  our  two  coun- 
tries, at  a  time  when  the  struggle  against  the 


I  take  pleasure  in  sending  you,  with  my  friendly 
greeting  and  congratulations  for  the  success  of 
preliminary  tests,  the  assurances  of  my  high  ap- 
preciation for  the  favorable  reception  and  val- 
uable support  which  you  gave  this  initiative 
destined  to  unite  still  more  closely  the  countries 
of  Washington  and  Artigas. 

Juan  J.  Milleh 

It  is  with  great  satisfaction  that  I  acknowledge 
your  cordial  message  and  send  you  my  sincere 
greetings  on  the  inauguration  of  direct  radio  tele- 
graphic service  between  New  York  and  Monte- 
video. I  have  no  doubt  that  the  establishment  of 
this  new  means  of  communication,  to  which  you 
have  so  effectively  contributed,  will  serve  to  bring 
our  two  countries  ever  closer  together. 

James  Lawrence  Fly 

INTER-AMERICAN  COFFEE  BOARD 

[Released  to  the  press  May  30] 

The  President  has  now  approved  the  designa- 
tion of  Mr.  Edward  G.  Gale,  Assistant  Chief  of 
the  Commodities  Division,  Department  of  State, 
as  the  Delegate  of  the  United  States  to  the  Inter- 
American  Coffee  Board  to  succeed  Mr.  Emilio  G. 
Collado.'  The  President  has  also  approved  the 
designation  of  Mr.  Walter  N.  Walmsley,  Jr.,  Chief 
of  the  Division  of  Brazilian  Affairs,  Department 
of  State,  as  Alternate  Delegate  to  the  Board.  Mr. 
Cale  held  the  position  of  Alternate  Delegate  dur- 
ing the  incumbency  of  Mr.  CoUado  as  this  Govern- 
ment's Delegate. 

AGRICULTURE  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 
West  Indian  Assistance 

[Released  to  the  press  May  29] 

Sir  Henry  Grattan  Baishe,  K.C.M.G.,  C.B.,  Gov- 
ernor of  Barbados,  British  West  Indies,  accom- 
panied by  Mr.  Guy  Perrin,  Labor  Commissioner 
of  Barbados,  returned  to  Bridgetown  May  27  after 

'  BniiETiN  of  Dec.  18, 1943,  p.  431. 


JUNE    3,    194  4 

having  spent  two  weeks  in  the  United  States  in 
discussions  with  the  War  Food  Administration, 
the  War  Manpower  Commission,  and  the  War 
Shipping  Administration.  As  a  result  of  these 
talks  an  understanding  has  been  reached  whereby 
Barbados  will  send  to  the  United  States  during  the 
summer  approximately  5,000  laborers.  The  men 
will  be  assigned  work  principally  in  agriculture 
and  in  food  processing.  Recruiting  of  the  laborers 
will  commence  in  the  immediate  future. 

Sir  Grattan  came  to  tlie  United  States  at  the 
suggestion  of  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean 
Commission,  which  agency  has  been  instrumental 
in  assisting  tlie  successful  completion  of  the 
arrangements. 

The  West  Indies  are  furnishing  a  substantial 
amount  of  labor  to  the  United  States  for  agricul- 
tural and  allied  purposes  this  year.  British  Hon- 
duras will  furnish  1,200  laborers,  500  of  whom  are 
skilled  lumbermen ;  Jamaica  will  send  at  least  16,- 
000,  and  this  number  may  be  increased  if  trans- 
portation permits;  the  Bahamas  are  furnishing 
approximately  5,000;  and  arrangements  are  being 
made  for  approximately  3,000  Puerto  Ricans,  most 
of  whom  will  be  skilled  or  semi-skilled  laborers, 
who  will  assist  in  food  processing  and  in  other 
emergency  work. 

VISIT  OF  DIRECTOR  OF  CHILDREN'S 
ORCHESTRAS  IN  URUGUAY 

[Released  to  the  press  June  2] 

Ruben  Cartimbula,  of  Montevideo,  Uruguay,  has 
arrived  in  Washington  as  guest  of  the  Department 
of  State.  Seiior  Carambula  directs  the  Children's 
School  for  Initiation  Into  Music.  He  has  organ- 
ized and  directs  children's  orchestras  throughout 
Uruguay. 

One  of  the  most  important  phases  of  Seiior 
Car^mbula's  work  is  carrying  music  to  children  in 
remote  country  districts,  especially  those  too  poor 
to  have  access  to  a  piano  or  string  instruments. 
To  meet  their  needs,  he  has  invented  a  series  of 
instruments  which  they  can  construct  themselves. 
He  has  introduced  into  Uruguay  the  tonette,  a  type 
of  flute,  and  a  recorder.  Seiior  Carambula  has 
prepared  short  descriptions  in  English  of  the 
typical  folk  music  of  the  River  Plate  region. 
While  in  the  United  States  he  plans  to  work  with 
children's  rhythm  bands  and  orchestras  in  per- 
forming adaptations  of  this  music. 


^ 


513 


The  Department 


APPOINTMENT    OF    ADVISERS    TO 
DIVISION  OF  LABOR  RELATIONS 

[Released  to  the  press  May  20] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  29 
the  appointment  of  Mr.  Robert  J.  Watt,  Interna- 
tional Representative  of  the  American  Federation 
of  Labor;  Mr.  J.  Raymond  Walsh,  Director  of 
Research  and  Education  of  the  Congress  of  Indus- 
trial Organizations;  and  Professor  Sumner 
Slichter,  of  Harvard  University,  as  advisers  to  the 
Department's  Division  of  Labor  Relations.  In 
this  capacity  they  will  advise  the  Department  on 
the  labor  aspects  of  economic  and  political  prob- 
lems in  the  international  field. 

The  Division  of  Labor  Relations,  among  other 
functions,  is  responsible  for  initiating  and  coor- 
dinating policy  and  action  in  matters  pertaining 
to  (a)  the  effects  on  the  foreign  relations  of  the 
United  States  of  policies  and  practices  in  foreign 
countries  concerning  wage  and  hour  standards, 
working  conditions,  and  similar  matters  of  in- 
terest and  concern  to  labor  in  the  United  States 
and  abroad;  (b)  the  interest  of  labor  in  the  United 
States  in  matters  of  broad  international  policy; 
and  (c)  international  arrangements  for  the  promo- 
tion of  full  employment,  health,  and  economic  and 
social  welfare. 

Mr.  Otis  E.  Mulliken  has  been  designated  Chief 
of  the  Division  of  Labor  Relations.^ 

APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  13  of  June  2, 1944, 
effective  June  2, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  John  N.  Plakias  as  Special  Assistant 
in  the  Office  of  Transportation  and  Communica- 
tions. 

By  Departmental  Designation  15  of  June  2, 1944, 
effective  May  31, 1944,  the  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  A.  Dana  Hodgdon  temporarily  as  Act- 
ing Liaison  Officer  with  responsibility  for  assisting 
the  Secretary  and  the  Under  Secretary  in  their 
liaison  with  the  War  and  Navy  Departments  and 
such  other  duties  as  may  be  assigned  to  him. 


'  Departmental  Designation  11,  Issued  May  29,  1944 ; 
effective  May  29,  1944. 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  INTERNATIONAL  LABOR  CONFERENCE 

Message  of  President  Roosevelt 


JReleased  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  29] 

To  The  Congress  of  the  United  States  : 

The  Twenty-Sixth  Conference  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labor  Organization  has  just  been  held  at 
Philadelphia.  Representatives  of  the  govern- 
ments, employers  and  workers  of  forty-one  coun- 
tries took  part  in  its  deliberations. 

The  Conference,  by  a  two-thirds  majority, 
adopted  Recommendations  on  the  following  seven 
subjects : 

1.  Income  Security 

2.  Social  Security  for  the  Armed  Forces 

3.  Medical  Care 

4.  Social  Policy  in  Dependent  Territories 

5.  Employment  in  the  Transition  from  War  to 

Peace 

6.  The  Organization  of  Employment  Services 

7.  National  Planning  of  Public  Works 

Under  the  Constitution  of  the  International 
Labor  Organization,  these  recommendations  are 
forwarded  to  the  member  governments  for  submis- 
sion by  them  to  their  respective,  competent  na- 
tional authorities.  I  shall  accordingly  submit 
them  to  the  Congress  in  the  regular  way  when 
certified  copies  are  received. 


The  Conference  made  other  important  decisions 
of  which  I  think  the  Congress  should  be  informed. 

First,  it  adopted  by  unanimous  vote  a  declara- 
tion of  the  aims  and  purposes  of  the  International 
Labor  Organization  which  has  been  referred  to  as 
the  "Declaration  of  Philadelphia". 

Secondly,  it  unanimously  adopted  resolutions 
concerning  the  social  provisions  of  the  peace 
settlement. 

Thirdly,  it  unanimously  adopted  resolutions 
concerning  the  economic  policies,  international  and 
national,  required  for  the  attainment  of  the  social 
objectives  of  the  United  Nations. 

Because  of  the  interest  and  importance  of  these 
three  documents,  I  am  transmitting  them  herewith 
for  the  information  of  the  Congress. 

Frankun  D  Roosevelt 

The  White  House, 
May  29, 19U- 

[Here  follows  the  text  of  the  Declaration  Con- 
cerning the  Aims  and  Purposes  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labor  Organization ;  see  Bulletin  of  May 
20,  1944,  p.  482.] 


Resolution  Concerning  Social  Provisions  in  the  Peace  Settlement 


Whereas  the  Conference  is  called  upon  to  make 
recommendations  to  the  United  Nations  for  pres- 
ent and  post-war  social  policy,  and  more  partic- 
ularly concerning  the  social  provisions  to  be  in- 
scribed in  the  various  general  or  special  treaties 
or  agreements  to  which  the  United  Nations  will 
jointly  or  severally  become  parties; 

Wliereas  the  prospect  of  a  complete  victory  of 
the  United  Nations  makes  it  possible  to  prepare 
a  better  world  order  directed  towards  the  achieve- 
ment of  the  social  objectives  which  these  nations 

514 


proclaimed  in  the  Atlantic  Charter  in  expressing 
their  desire  to  bring  about  the  fullest  collaboration 
between  all  nations  in  the  economic  field  with  the 
object  of  securing  for  all  improved  labour  stand- 
ards, economic  advancement  and  social  security; 

1. 

The  Conference  considers  that  the  principles 
stated  in  the  following  draft  are  appropriate  for 
inclusion  in  a  general  or  special  treaty  or  agree- 
ment between  nations  desirous  of  giving  early  ef- 


JUNE    3,    194  4 


515 


feet  to  the  principles  of  the  Atlantic  Charter  and 
Article  VII  of  the  Mutual  Aid  agreement : 

The  signatory  governments 

Having  pledged  themselves  to  provide  condi- 
tions which  will  ensure  an  increasing  measure  of 
freedom  from  want  to  their  own  peoples  and  to 
all  peoples ;  Recognizing,  therefore,  their  common 
obligation  to  foster  expanding  production  and  em- 
ployment on  a  sound  basis,  free  from  disruptive 
fluctuations,  and  to  ensure  that  workers  and  pro- 
ductive resources  shall  not  be  allowed  to  be  idle 
while  the  needs  of  large  parts  of  the  world  remain 
unsatisfied; 

Eealizing  that  the  economic  life  and  conditions 
in  each  nation  are  increasingly  dependent  upon 
the  economic  life  and  conditions  of  other  nations, 
and  that  hence  the  attainment  of  the  above-stated 
objectives  requires  increasing  collaboration  among 
nations ; 

Have  agreed  that: 

Article  I 

The  Declaration  of  the  Aims  and  Purposes  of 
the  International  Labour  Organization  adopted 
by  the  International  Labour  Conference  at  Phila- 
delphia, 1944,  the  text  of  which  is  annexed,  is 
hereby  reaffirmed. 

Article  II 

Each  government  recognizes  its  duty  to  main- 
tain a  high  level  of  employment.  Accordingly, 
all  arrangements  by  and  among  the  signatory  and 
other  like-minded  governments  for  international 
economic  cooiDcration  should  be  framed  and  ad- 
ministered to  serve  the  objectives  set  forth  in 
Article  I.  They  should  be  directed  to  the  expan- 
sion of  production,  employment  and  the  exchange 
and  consumption  of  goods  and  to  the  liberation  of 
economic  activity  from  unreasonable  restrictions. 
Particular  consideration  should  be  given  to  meas- 
ures for  promoting  the  reconstruction  of  economic 
life  in  countries  whose  economic  and  social  life 
has  been  disrupted  as  the  result  of  Axis  aggres- 
sion. 

Article  III 

The  following  matters  are  of  international  con- 
cern and  should  be  among  the  social  objectives  of 
international  as  well  as  national  policy : 

( 1 )  Opportunity  for  useful  and  regular  employ- 
ment to  all  persons  who  want  work,  at  fair  wages 

591603—44 2 


or  returns  and  under  reasonable  conditions,  with 
provision  for  protection  of  health  and  against  in- 
jury in  all  occupations; 

(2)  Raising  standards  of  living  to  provide  ade- 
quate nutrition,  housing,  medical  care  and  edu- 
cation ; 

(3)  Establishment  of  minimum  standards  of 
employment  to  prevent  exploitation  of  workers, 
whether  employed  or  self-employed,  whose  oppor- 
tunities for  high  wage  employment  are  limited; 

(4)  Provision  for  child  welfare; 

(5)  Provision  for  a  regular  flow  of  income  to  all 
those  whose  employment  is  interrupted  by  sickness 
or  injury,  by  old  age  or  by  lack  of  employment  op- 
poi'tunity ; 

(6)  The  effective  recognition  of  the  right  of 
freedom  of  association  and  of  collective  bargain- 

mfr- 

(7)  Provision  of  facilities  for  training  and 
transfer  of  labour. 

Article  IV 

The  International  Labour  Office  may,  under 
standards  constitutionally  determined  by  the  In- 
ternational Labour  Conference,  as  occasion  re- 
quires, collect  from,  and  interchange  with,  the  sig- 
natory governments,  uniform  statistical  and  other 
economic  information  on  the  following  matters 
which  are  among  those  of  direct  interest  to  the 
International  Labour  Organisation  and  are  of 
intei'national  concern  : 

(1)  Employment,  wages  and  conditions  of 
work ; 

(2)  Standards  of  living  and  the  distribution  of 
income,  with  particular  reference  to  wage  and  sal- 
aried workers; 

(3)  Technical  education  and  training  for  em- 
ployment ; 

(4)  Industrial  health,  safety  and  welfare; 

(5)  Industrial  relations; 

(6)  Social  security;  and 

(7)  Administration  of  labour  and  social  secu- 
rity legislation. 

Article  V 

With  respect  to  the  matters  set  forth  in  article 
III: 

(1)  The  governments,  through  appropriate  in- 
ternational agencies,  shall  develop  standards  and 
statistical  measures,  and  shall  maintain  uniform 
statistics  and  other  information. 


516 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


(2)  The  governments  shall  interchange  among 
themselves  and  make  available  to  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  such  information  and  re- 
ports as  may  be  required  to  assist  them  and  the 
Organisation  to  develop  recommendations  with 
respect  to  such  matters. 

(3)  The  governments  shall  take  appropriate 
steps  to  assure  close  collaboration  and  full  ex- 
change of  information  between  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  and  any  other  international 
bodies  which  now  exist  or  may  be  established  for 
the  promotion  of  economic  advancement  and  so- 
cial well-being. 

(4)  The  governments  shall  take  appropriate 
steps  to  have  placed  on  the  agenda  of  the  Interna- 
national  Labour  Conference  annually  the  subjects 
of  the  extent  to  which  the  social  objectives  set  forth 
in  Article  I  have  been  attained  and  on  the  measures 
taken  during  the  year  toward  the  attainment  of  the 
objectives. 

Abticle  VI 

With  respect  to  draft  international  conventions 
and  recommendations  adopted  by  the  Conference 
in  accordance  with  Article  19  of  the  constitution 
of  the  International  Labour  Organisation,  the  sig- 
natory governments  undertake  to  report  to  the  In- 
ternational Labour  Office  as  requested  by  the  Gov- 
erning Body  on  the  status  of  legislation  and 
administration  and,  in  so  far  as  practicable,  of 
practices  under  collective  agreements  between  em- 
ployers and  workers. 


The  Conference  recommends  that  the  Govern- 
ing Body  of  the  International  Labour  Organisa- 
tion: 

(1)  call  a  special  conference  of  the  Organisa- 
tion when  in  its  opinion  there  is  a  danger  of  a 
substantial  fall  in  general  employment  levels  for 
the  purpose  of  recommending  appropriate  national 
or  international  measures  to  prevent  the  develoiJ- 
ment  or  spread  of  imemployment  and  to  establish 
conditions  under  which  high  levels  of  employment 
may  be  maintained  or  restored ; 

(2)  correlate  the  activities  of  the  I.L.O.  toward 
the  end  of  maintaining  full  employment  with  those 
of  any  other  international  agency  or  agencies 
which  may  be  designated  by  the  United  Nations  to 


have  primary  responsibility  in  related  economic 
fields. 

3. 

The  Conference  Recommends  that: 

(1)  The  United  Nations  should  undertake — 

(a)  to  apply  to  any  dependent  territories  in 
respect  of  which  they  have  accepted  or  may  accept 
a  measure  of  international  accountability  through 
any  international  or  regional  commission  or  other 
body  the  princi]5le  that  all  policies  designed  to 
applj'  to  dependent  territories  shall  be  primarily 
directed  to  the  well-being  and  development  of  the 
peoples  of  such  territories,  and  to  the  promotion 
of  the  desire  on  their  part  for  social  progress; 

(b)  to  apply  to  such  territories  the  provi- 
sions of  the  Forced  Labour  Convention,  1930;  the 
Recruiting  of  Indigenous  Workers  Convention, 
1936;  the  Contracts  of  Employment  (Indigenous 
Workers)  Convention,  1939,  and  the  Penal  Sanc- 
tions (Indigenous  Woi'kers)  Convention,  1939; 

(c)  to  make  a  periodical  report  to  the  In- 
ternational Labour  Office  in  respect  of  each  such 
territory  indicating  the  extent  to  which  effect  has 
been  given  to  the  provisions  of  the  Social  Policy 
(Dependent  Territoi-ies)  Recommendation,  1944; 

(d)  to  ask  the  International  Labour  Office 
to  appoint,  in  continuation  of  the  collaboration 
established  in  the  case  of  the  Permanent  Mandates 
Commission,  a  representative  on  any  Committee 
which  may  be  entrusted  with  the  task  of  watching 
over  the  application  of  the  principle  of  interna- 
tional accountability,  and  further  to  ensure  that 
any  facilities  which  may  be  afforded,  in  the  form 
of  inspection  or  otherwise,  for  the  better  imple- 
mentation of  this  principle,  shall  include  appro- 
priate measures  for  examining  the  application  of 
the  above-mentioned  Conventions  and  Recommen- 
dation. 

(2)  When  determining  the  future  status  of  de- 
pendent territories  which  on  1  September  1939 
were  controlled  by  Axis  Powers,  the  United  Na- 
tions should  specifically  require  the  application 
thereto  of  the  arrangements  provided  for  in  the 
preceding  paragraph. 

(3)  In  any  negotiations  regarding  the  organi- 
sation, control  and  operation  of  merchant  ship- 
ping and  in  particular  in  making  international 
arrangements  for  the  disposal  of  merchant  ship- 
ping   tonnage,    the    United    Nations    concerned 


JUNE   3,    1944 


517 


should  consult  the  competent  bodies  of  the  Inter- 
national Labour  Organisation,  such  as  the  Joint 
Maritime  Commission,  in  regard  to  the  possibility 
of  including  stipulations  concerning  the  standard 
of  accommodation  to  be  provided  for  crews  and  of 
stipulations  embodying  the  provisions  of  Conven- 
tions already  adopted  by  the  maritime  sessions  of 
the  Conference,  or  of  any  further  such  Conven- 
tions that  may  be  adopted  before  the  negotiation 
of  such  agreements. 

(4)  In  making  international  arrangements  con- 
cerning transport  by  air,  land,  and  inland  water- 
way, the  United  Nations  should  have  due  regard 
to  the  repercussions  of  such  arrangements  on  the 
working  and  living  conditions  of  persons  employed 
in  transport,  and  should  consult  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  in  regard  to  such  repercus- 
sions and  more  particularly  in  regard  to  the  work- 
ing and  living  conditions  of  persons  who,  in  oper- 
ating such  transport  systems,  work  in  or  under 
the  jurisdiction  of  more  than  one  country. 

(5)  The  International  Labour  Organisation 
should  make  available  to  the  United  Nations  any 
information  or  assistance  calculated  to  facilitate 
the  implementation  of  the  proposals  contained  in 
the  resolution  concerning  economic  policies  for  the 
attainment  of  social  objectives  and  the  present 
resolution  and  should  be  prepared  to  participate 
in  any  international  conference  which  may  be  con- 
sidering such  proposals. 

4. 

Believing  that  the  exceptional  opportunity  of 
the  negotiations  of  the  peace  settlement  should  be 
taken  to  secure  a  concerted  advance  in  the  ac- 
ceptance of  binding  obligations  concerning  condi- 
tions of  labor; 

The  Conference  reaffirming  the  principle  of  the 
association  of  management  and  labour  in  the  fram- 
ing of  such  standards. 

Recommends 

(a)  That  throughout  the  peace  settlement  the 
United  Nations  should  wherever  appropriate  in- 
clude provisions  for  labor  standards.  In  a  num- 
ber of  cases  such  provisions  might  properly  be 
taken  from  conventions  or  recommendations  that 
have  been  or  may  be  adopted  by  the  International 
Labour  Conference. 


(b)  That  the  Governing  Body  should  appoint  a 
consultative  committee  on  labour  provisions  in  the 
peace  settlement.  This  committee  should  hold 
itself  in  readiness,  together  with  the  Director  of 
the  International  Labour  Office,  to  give  advice 
with  reference  to  such  provisions  on  the  request  of 
the  United  Nations  or  of  particular  groups  of  the 
United  Nations.  This  committee  should  have  the 
right  to  co-opt  additional  members  of  special  com- 
petence with  respect  to  the  particular  sets  of  pro- 
visions under  consideration. 

(c)  That  the  United  Nations  should  make  full 
use  of  this  committee  in  any  way  in  which  they 
consider  it  appropriate  to  include  labour  provi- 
sions in  the  peace  settlement. 

5. 

The  Conference  recommends  to  Governments 
that  a  Conference  of  representatives  of  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United,  associated,  and  other  Na- 
tions, willing  to  attend,  be  called  at  an  early  date, 
in  association  with  the  Governing  Body  of  the 
International  Labour  Office,  to  consider  an  inter- 
national agreement  on  domestic  policies  of  em- 
ployment and  unemployment;  and  this  Confer- 
ence pledges  the  full  co-operation  and  the  assist- 
ance of  the  I.L.O.  in  calling  such  a  conference  on 
employment,  and  in  helping  to  carry  into  effect 
apjsropriate  decisions  it  might  make. 

Resolution  Concerning  Economic  Policies  for 
the  Attainment  of  Social  Objectives 

Wliereas  the  prospect  of  a  complete  victory  of 
the  United  Nations  makes  it  possible  to  prepare  a 
better  world  order  directed  towards  the  achieve- 
ment of  the  social  objectives  which  these  nations 
proclaimed  in  the  Atlantic  Charter  in  expressing 
their  desire  to  bring  about  the  fullest  collaboration 
between  all  nations  in  the  economic  field  with  the 
object  of  securing  for  all  improved  labour  stand- 
ards, economic  advancement  and  social  security; 
and 

Whereas  these  objectives  of  the  United  Nations 
coincide  with  the  basic  principles  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Organisation,  and  the  International 
Labour  Conference,  meeting  in  New  York  in  1941, 
pledged  the  full  collaboration  of  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  in  their  implementation ;  and 


518 


DEPAKTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Whereas  the  International  Labour  Conference  is 
called  upon  by  Item  II  on  the  Agenda  of  the 
present  Session  to  make  recommendations  to  the 
United  Nations  for  present  and  post-war  social 
policy  concerning  more  especially  the  measures  re- 
quired to  be  taken  internationally  and  nationally 
to  ensure  full  employment,  social  security  and  ris- 
ing standards  of  living;  and 

Whereas  the  initiative  with  regard  to  inter- 
national 25olicy  lies  with  the  United  Nations  at  the 
present  time,  and  it  is  desirable  in  order  to  attain 
the  objectives  referred  to  that  all  nations  should 
pursue  an  appropriate  national  policy ;  and 

Whereas  the  attainment  of  full  employment  and 
high  productivity  by  the  various  nations  after  the 
war  is  essential  to  the  achievement  of  freedom  from 
want,  the  attainment  of  increasing  living  stand- 
ards, the  realisation  of  genuine  economic  security 
and  the  continuation  of  peaceful  economic  prog- 
ress ;  and 

Whei'eas  full  employment  can  be  achieved  and 
maintained  only  through  the  adoption,  by  govern- 
ments, industry  and  labour,  of  policies  and 
measures  which  effectively  encourage  the  continu- 
ing expansion  of  production  and  improvement  of 
distribution ;  and 

Wliereas  the  speedy  achievement  of  full  employ- 
ment requires  the  prompt  and  orderly  reconversion, 
reconstruction  and  expansion  of  industry,  trade, 
commerce  and  agriculture  after  the  war,  and  the 
subsequent  maintenance  of  employment  and  pro- 
duction at  high  levels  requires  the  creation  of  an 
economic  and  social  environment  conducive  to  a 
progressive  and  expanding  economy ; 

The  Conference  adopts  the  following  resolution : 

1.  Inteknational  Policy 
1.  Believing  that  the  relief  of  war-stricken  peo- 
ples, repatriation  of  prisoners  and  exiles  and  re- 
sumption of  agricultural  and  industrial  production 
are  matters  which  will  be  of  the  utmost  urgency 
immediately  on  the  liberation  of  occupied  countries 
and  that  on  the  successful  handling  of  these  prob- 
lems the  possibility  of  achieving  the  long-range  ob- 
jectives of  social  and  economic  well-being  will 
largely  depend. 

The  Conference  welcomes  the  creation  of  the 
United  Nations  Relief  and  Eehabilitation  Admin- 
istration, urges  all  States  concerned  to  co-operate 
actively  in  the  achievement  of  the  tasks  entrusted 


to  it  and  assures  the  Administration  of  the  readi- 
ness of  the  International  Labour  Organisation  to 
assist  it  in  every  appropriate  way. 

2.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  for  varying  periods 
after  the  end  of  hostilities  many  essential  com- 
modities and  transport  facilities  will  be  in  short 
supply,  and  that  international  arrangements  will 
be  needed  to  ensure  a  fair  allocation  of  available 
supplies  and  prevent  excessive  price  movements, 

The  Conference  considers  that  the  Governments 
of  the  United  Nations  concerned  should  arrange 
to  continue  in  operation,  for  such  periods  as  any 
serious  shortages  may  persist,  the  existing  machin- 
ery of  international  co-ordination  and  control  sub- 
ject to  such  modification,  and  in  particular  to  such 
enlargement  of  the  membership  of  the  authorities 
concerned,  as  may  contribute  to  the  equitable  and 
efficient  operation  of  such  machinery  in  the  transi- 
tion from  war  to  peace. 

3.  The  Conference  endorses  the  declaration  of 
the  United  Nations  Conference  on  Food  and  Agri- 
culture held  in  May  1943,  that  while  the  primary 
responsibility  lies  with  each  nation  for  seeing  that 
its  own  people  have  the  food  needed  for  life  and 
health,  each  nation  can  fully  achieve  this  goal  only 
if  all  co-operate  in  appropriate  international  ac- 
tion, and  urges  the  setting  up  of  a  permanent  inter- 
national organisation,  as  recommended  by  the 
Conference  on  Food  and  Agriculture,  to  raise  the 
level  of  nutrition  and  improve  the  efficiency  of  ag- 
ricultural production  and  distribution. 

4.  Recognising  that  a  satisfactory  international 
monetaiy  system  is  essential  to  the  full  develop- 
ment of  mutually  advantageous  economic  relations 
between  nations,  and  consequently  to  the  raising 
of  standards  of  living, 

The  Conference  attaches  great  importance  to  the 
establishment  at  the  earliest  possible  moment  of  ef- 
fective international  machinery  for  settling  bal- 
ances arising  out  of  international  trade  and  other 
transactions  and  for  maintaining  stability  in  i-ates 
of  exchange,  notes  with  satisfaction  that  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United  Nations  are  giving  careful 
attention  to  this  matter  and  urges  that  they  in- 
clude in  any  agreement  establishing  such  machin- 
ery a  provision  requiring  the  authorities  responsi- 
ble for  its  application  to  have  regard  in  framing 
and  applying  their  policies  to  the  effect  of  their 
decisions  on  employment  and  living  standards. 


JTJNE    3,    1944 


519 


5.  Noting  that  imports  of  capital  will  be  needed 
for  reconstruction,  development  and  the  raising  of 
living  standards  in  many  countries,  and  believing 
that  the  provision  of  such  capital  will  contribute 
to  the  maintenance  of  full  employment  in  the  lend- 
ing countries, 

The  Conference : 

(a)  considers  that  the  existing  machinery 
of  the  international  capital  market  should  be  sup- 
plemented by  the  establishment  of  appropriate  in- 
ternational machinery  for  the  purpose  of  promot- 
ing the  international  movement  of  capital ; 

(b)  considers  that  the  promotion  of  full 
employment  and  higher  living  standards  should 
be  regarded  as  a  primary  objective  of  any  such 
international  machinery ; 

(c)  considers  that  the  authorities  responsi- 
ble for  the  operation  of  such  international  ma- 
chinery should  consult  the  International  Labour 
Organisation  as  to  the  appropriateness  of  includ- 
ing in  the  terms  under  which  development  works 
financed  in  whole  or  in  part  through  such  ma- 
chinery are  to  be  carried  out,  provisions  regarding 
the  welfare  and  working  conditions  of  the  labour 
employed;  and  that  such  provisions  should  be 
framed  in  consultation  with  the  International  La- 
bour Organisation; 

(d)  affirms  the  readiness  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Organisation  to  render  every 
assistance  in  its  power  in  determining  the  appro- 
priateness of  the  inclusion  of  such  provisions  and 
in  their  framing  and  application  and  in  the  pro- 
motion through  the  operations  of  such  interna- 
tional machinery  of  the  general  objectives  of  full 
employment  and  higher  living  standards. 

6.  Recognising  the  great  contribution  which  the 
international  exchange  of  goods  and  services  can 
make  to  higher  living  standards  and  to  high  levels 
of  employment, 

The  Conference : 

(a)  believes  that  the  measures  proposed  in 
the  foregoing  paragraphs  for  the  promotion  of 
exchange  stabilisation  and  international  lending 
will  contribute  to  the  expansion  of  international 
trade,  but  considers  tliat  the  United  Nations  should 
also  examine  wartime  changes  in  industrial  capac- 
ity, and  arrange  for  exchange  of  information  on 
postwar  industrial  programmes  and  should  take 
vigorous  action  to  promote  the  expansion  of  in- 
ternational trade  by  appropriate  commercial  poli- 
cies; and  considers  that  all  countries,  creditor  as 


well  as  debtor,  should  adapt  their  commercial  pol- 
icy in  such  a  way  as  to  enable  them  to  settle  all 
obligations  arising  out  of  international  transac- 
tions ; 

(b)  considers  that  the  United  Nations 
should  initiate  measures  to  facilitate  the  co-or- 
dination through  appropriate  international  ma- 
chinery of  the  commercial  policies  of  all  countries 
for  the  purpose  of  promoting  a  steady  expansion 
in  world  trade  on  a  multilateral  basis ; 

(c)  considers  that  in  such  co-ordination 
special  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  need 
of  countries  which  are  highly  dependent  on  re- 
turns from  exports  to  take  measures  to  ensure  a 
high  degree  of  stability  in  the  level  of  their  eco- 
nomic activity  and  observes  that  the  need  for  these 
measures  will  decrease  to  the  extent  that  inter- 
national collaboration  proves  successful ;  and 

(d)  considers  that  in  such  co-ordination 
special  account  should  be  taken  of  the  dislocation 
and  the  accumulated  needs  resulting  from  the 
devastation  caused  by  war  operations  and  from 
the  jDrolonged  diversion  from  peacetime  produc- 
tion in  countries  which  have  been  engaged  for  a 
long  period  in  a  sustained  and  total  war  effort. 

7.  In  order  to  lay  the  foundation  for  rising  levels 
of  consumption  throughout  the  world  and  at  the 
same  time  to  ensure  more  stable  and  adequate  in- 
comes to  those  primary  producers  whose  services 
are  needed  for  the  production  of  essential  raw 
materials  and  foodstuffs, 

The  Conference  considers  that  the  United  Na- 
tions should  initiate  concerted  action  designed  to 
ensure  the  constant  availability  to  all  purchasers 
of  adequate  supj^lies  of  such  commodities  at  prices 
which  give  a  reasonable  return  to  the  efficient  pro- 
ducer and  are  held  sufficiently  stable  to  afford  pro- 
tection against  major  short-term  fluctuations  in 
supply  or  demand ;  and  that  such  international  ar- 
rangements (a)  should  provide  for  adequate  repre- 
sentation of  consumers  as  well  as  producers,  repre- 
senting both  importing  and  exporting  countries, 
in  all  authorities  responsible  for  the  determination 
and  application  of  policy,  and  (b)  should  aim  to 
assure  to  all  workers,  including  the  self-employed, 
engaged  in  the  production  of  the  commodities  con- 
cerned, fair  remuneration,  satisfactory  working 
conditions  and  adequate  social  security  protection, 
having  regard  to  the  general  standards  in  the 
countries  concerned. 


520 

8.  Believing  that  migratory  movements  may 
play  an  important  part  in  the  development  of  a 
dynamic  economy,  and  that  disorderly  interna- 
tional migration  may  create  economic  and  social 
dislocation  in  the  countries  concerned  and  involve 
serious  individual  hardship  for  the  migrants  them- 
selves, while  desirable  migratory  movements  are 
often  hampered  by  technical  and  financial  diffi- 
culties which  can  be  overcome  only  through  inter- 
national co-operation. 

The  Conference  considers  that : 

(a)  The  United  Nations  should  encourage 
by  appropriate  measures,  with  adequate  safe- 
guards for  all  concerned,  the  orderly  migration  of 
labour  and  settled  in  accordance  with  the  economic 
needs  and  social  conditions  prevailing  in  the  vari- 
ous countries,  and  in  this  connection  should  note 
the  Conclusions  adopted  by  the  Conference  of  Ex- 
perts on  Teclmical  and  Financial  Co-operation 
with  regard  to  Migration  for  Settlement  held  at 
the  International  Labour  Office  in  1938; 

(b)  Arrangements  should  be  made  for  close 
co-operation  between  the  International  Labour 
Organisation  and  any  public  international  agency 
established  to  deal  with  migration ; 

(c)  The  Governing  Body  should  take  steps 
to  bring  before  an  early  session  of  the  Conference 
a  report  of  a  representative  commission,  with  such 
technical  assistance  as  it  may  require,  on  the  means 
necessary  to  protect  the  interests  of  labour,  on  the 
one  hand,  against  barriers  which  prevent  migra- 
tion from  areas  of  limited  resources,  and  on  the 
other  hand,  against  the  lowering  of  the  labour 
standards  that  might  result  from  immigration  at 
a  rate  exceeding  the  capacity  of  the  receiving 
countries  to  absorb  immigrants. 

9.  In  order  that  re-employment  may  be  expe- 
dited and  healthy  living  standards  established 
within  a  period  of  minimum  duration  in  areas  lib- 
erated from  Axis  occupation. 

The  Conference  recommends  that  arrangements 
be  made  by  those  nations  whose  productive  ca- 
pacities have  been  maintained  during  the  war,  by 
all  other  nations  which  are  in  a  position  to  make 
materials  available  and  by  the  appropriate  inter- 
national organisations,  to  give  the  highest  priority 
consistent  with  the  exigencies  of  war  to  immedi- 
ately supplying  the  territories  liberated  from  Axis 
occupation  with  materials  and  equipment  required 
for  industrial  installations,  agriculture,  transport, 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE   BULLETIN 

public  works  and  utilities  of  an  essential  character. 

10.  Believing  that  the  best  possible  conditions 
for  a  rise  in  the  standard  of  living  and  the  mainte- 
nance of  full  employment  in  the  world  can  only  be 
obtained  by  mutually  consistent  national  economic, 
financial  and  social  policies  and  by  co-ordination 
of  the  activities  of  the  different  international  in- 
stitutions in  this  field. 

The  Conference  considers  that  appropriate  in- 
ternational measures  should  be  taken  which  guar- 
antee sufficient  contact  and  consultation  with 
regard  to  such  policies  between  governments  as 
well  as  between  the  different  international  insti- 
tutions. 

2.  National  Polict 

11.  In  order  that  full  employment  at  productive 
peacetime  pursuits,  freedom  from  want,  rising 
standards  of  living  and  genuine  economic  security 
may  be  achieved  with  a  minimum  of  delay  after 
the  war, 

Tlie  Conference  urges  that  governments  and 
employers'  and  workers'  organisations  formulate 
comprehensive  and  co-ordinated  programmes, 
suited  to  the  particular  needs  of  their  countries, 
for  prompt  and  orderly  reconversion,  reconstruc- 
tion and  economic  expansion,  and  that  such  pro- 
grammes be  prepared  and  applied  simultaneously 
with  the  consideration  of  the  international  meas- 
ures referred  to  in  the  preceding  paragraphs. 

12.  Kecognising  that  the  economic  situation  will 
differ  markedly  among  the  various  countries  at  the 
war's  end,  varying  particularly  with  the  degree 
and  type  of  industrial  development,  the  extent  to 
which  the  peacetime  economy  has  been  disrupted 
by  the  war,  and  whether  the  country's  territory 
has  been  occupied  by  the  enemy ;  and  recognizing 
that  national  post-war  economic  programmes  must 
vai'y  accordingly,  in  order  to  meet  most  effectively 
the  needs  of  the  country  in  which  they  are  to  be 
applied. 

The  Conference  urges  that,  with  due  allowance 
for  difference  in  national  economic  situations,  pro- 
grammes for  economic  reconversion,  reconstruc- 
tion and  expansion  include  the  development  of 
sound  policies  and  procedures  to  provide : 

(a)  Effective  arrangements  for  the  orderly 
and  expeditious  demobilisation  and  repatriation, 
and  for  the  early  absorption  in  productive  peace- 
time employment  of  members  of  the  armed  forces, 


JUNE   3,    1944 


521 


civilian  workers,  prisoners,  persons  who  have  re- 
sisted deportation,  deported  persons  and  refugees, 
for  the  prompt  tei'mination  of  contracts  and  set- 
tlement of  claims,  the  prompt  determination  of 
policy  on  the  peacetime  use  of  Government-owned 
war  production  capacity  and  equipment  and  the 
disposition  of  surplus  materials,  with  a  view  to  the 
use  of  these  items  to  satisfy  human  needs,  and  lib- 
eral provision  for  the  maintenance,  educational 
training  and  retraining  of  persons  unavoidably  out 
of  employment  as  recommended  by  the  26th  Ses- 
sion of  the  International  Labour  Conference  in  its 
Recommendation  concerning  employment  organi- 
sation in  the  transition  from  war  to  peace ; 

(b)  Retention,  as  long  as  shortages  exist,  of 
such  war-created  economic  controls — for  example, 
price  and  exchange  controls  and  rationing — as  are 
necessai'y  to  prevent  inflation,  and  the  relaxation 
of  such  controls  as  rapidly  thereafter  as  is  con- 
sistent with  the  public  welfare ; 

(c)  Adjustment  of  tax  systems  to  encourage 
rapid  reconversion,  reconstruction  and  economic 
expansion,  while  maintaining  an  equitable  dis- 
tribution of  tax  burdens  and  avoiding  financial 
measures  which  tend  to  increase  the  dangers  of 
inflation  or  deflation ; 

(d)  Development  of  effective  mechanisms 
for  adequate  financing  of  the  reconversion,  recon- 
struction and  expansion  of  industry,  trade,  com- 
merce and  agriculture  and  jDarticularly  to  assist 
the  establishment  of  new  and  efficient  enterprises. 

13.  The  Conference  urges  that  all  practicable 
measures  be  taken  to  maintain  a  high  and  steady 
level  of  employment,  to  minimise  fluctuations  and 
business  activity,  and.  to  assure  a  steadily  expand- 
ing volume  of  production,  more  particularly  by 
means  of : 

(a)  Fiscal,  monetary  and  other  measures, 
including  useful  public  works,  to  sustain  the  vol- 
ume of  demand  for  goods  and  services  at  a  high 
level  while  avoiding  the  dangers  of  an  inflationary 
spiral  of  prices  and  wages — in  this  connection  at- 
tention should  be  paid,  among  other  measures,  to 
such  methods  as  an  adequate  income  security  sys- 
tem, and  to  properly  timed  public  works  financed 
by  borrowing  in  periods  of  depression,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Public  Works  (National  Plaiming) 
Recommendation,  1937 ; 

(b)  Measures  to  discourage  monopolistic 
practices  and  to  encourage  teclmological  progress, 


to  maintain  a  reasonably  flexible  system  of  prices 
and  wages,  to  encourage  the  transfer  of  workers 
and  productive  resources  from  declining  to  ex- 
panding industries,  and  to  attain  a  high  degree  of 
mobility  of  resources  and  freedom  of  access  to 
alternative  employments ; 

(c)  Measures  to  provide  adequate  incen- 
tives to  engage  in  and  expand  constructive  eco- 
nomic activity,  to  encourage  private  investment 
and  to  maintain  the  rate  of  investment — among 
the  measures  which  warrant  careful  consideration 
in  this  connection  are  the  adjustment  of  tax  sys- 
tems, removal  of  artificial  barriei's  limiting  access 
to  resources  and  markets,  the  relaxation  of  un- 
reasonable restrictions  imposed  by  governmental 
agencies  or  by  business  or  by  labour  organisations, 
and  the  maintenance  of  a  high  and  stable  demand 
for  goods ; 

(d)  Measures  to  provide  adequate  oppor- 
tunity for  workers  to  engage  in  productive  activity 
and  to  obtain  advancement — among  the  measures 
which  warrant  careful  consideration  in  this  con- 
nection are  the  provision  of  improved  and  more 
generally  accessible  educational  and  training  fa- 
cilities, provision  of  higher  nutritional  and  health 
standards,  improvement  of  public  employment 
services,  increased  provision  against  economic  in- 
security, the  maintenance  of  wages  at  a  high  level, 
and  the  protection,  extension  and  improvement  of 
collective  bargaining  procedures. 


Treaty  Information 


TRADE  AGREEMENT  WITH  IRAN 

[Released  to  the  press  May  29] 

On  May  29,  1944  the  Honorable  Cordell  Hull, 
Secretary  of  State  of  the  United  States,  and  the 
Honorable  Mohammed  Shayesteh,  Minister  of  Iran 
in  Washington,  effected  the  exchange  of  the  Presi- 
dent's proclamation  and  the  Iranian  instrument  of 
ratification  of  the  reciprocal  trade  agreement  and 
the  accompanying  exchange  of  notes  between  the 
United  States  and  Iran  dated  April  8, 1943. 

Article  XIV  of  the  agreement  provides  that  it 
shall  enter  into  force  on  the  thirtieth  day  follow- 
ing the  exchange  of  the  proclamation  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  for  the  instrument  of 
ratification  of  Iran. 


522 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


Following  the  exchange  on  May  29,  1944,  there 
was  issued  a  supplementary  proclamation  by  the 
President  proclaiming  that  the  agreement,  includ- 
ing two  schedules  and  the  exchange  of  notes,  will 
enter  into  force  on  June  28,  1944,  the  thirtieth  day 
following  May  29, 1944. 

The  English  texts  of  the  agreement  and  accom- 
panying exchange  of  notes  were  made  public  in 
the  Department's  press  release  133  of  April  8, 1943 
and  an  analysis  of  the  agreement  in  press  release 
134  of  the  same  date.^  A  statement  concerning  the 
President's  proclamation  of  the  agreement,  includ- 
ing the  schedules  and  exchange  of  notes,  was  made 
in  the  Department's  press  release  102  of  March  31, 
1944.2  rpj^g  English  and  Persian  texts  of  the  agree- 
ment and  accompanying  exchange  of  notes  will  be 
printed  in  the  Executive  Agreement  Series  and  the 
Statutes  at  Large. 

BNTER-AMEPJCAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

Chile 

The  Director  General  of  the  Pan  American 
Union  informed  the  Secretary  of  State,  by  a  letter 
of  May  15, 1944,  that  the  Convention  on  the  Inter- 
American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences, 
which  was  opened  for  signature  at  the  Pan  Amer- 
ican Union  on  January  15,  1944,  was  signed  for 
Chile  on  May  13,  1944. 


ICELAND 

[Released  to  the  press  June  3] 

The  President  has  designated  the  Honorable 
Louis  G.  Di-eyfus,  Jr.,  of  California,  as  his  Special 
Kepresentative  with  the  personal  rank  of  Ambas- 
sador to  attend  the  ceremonies  to  be  held  in  Iceland 
on  June  17,  1944  incident  to  the  establishment  of 
the  Republic  of  Iceland. 


The  Foreign  Service 


CONSULAR  OFFICES 

The  American  Consulate  at  Grenada,  British 
West  Indies,  was  opened  to  the  public  on  May 
25,  1944. 


Publications 


Depaetment  of  State 

Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Signed  at  Rio 
de  Janeiro  July  17,  1942.     Executive  Agreement  Series 

373.  Publication  2115.     7  pp.     5^. 

Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Signed  at  Rio  de 
Janeiro  February  10,  1943 ;  Executive  Agreement  Series 

374.  Publication  2116.     7  pp.     5^. 

Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Agreement  signed 
at  Rio  de  Janeiro  November  25,  1943,  effective  January 
1,  1944 ;  and  Exchange  of  Notes  signed  November  9  and 
25,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series  875.  Publication 
2119.     17  pp.     10^. 

Southern  Terminus  of  Alaska  Highway :  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Canada — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  May 
4  and  9,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  380.  Pub- 
lication 2122.     2  pp.     5^. 

Haines-Champagne  Section  of.  Alaska  Highway:  Agree- 
ment Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Can- 
ada— Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa 
November  28  and  December  7,  1942.  Executive  Agree- 
ment Series  382.     Fublication*2123.     2  pp.     5^. 

Foreign  Service  List  (Abridged),  April  1,  1944.  Publica- 
tion 2121.  iv,  60  pp.  Subscription,  500  a  year  (65(i 
foreign)  ;  single  copy,  200. 

The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals : 
Cumulative  Supplement  No.  3,  June  2,  1944,  to  Revision 
VII  of  March  23, 1944.     Publication  2132.     36  pp.     Free. 


'  BijLLETiN  of  Apr.  10,  1943,  p.  299. 
'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  1,  1944,  p.  305. 


0.    S     GOVERNMENT    PRINTING  OFFICE:  I9J< 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office.  Washington  25.  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents    -    -   -   -    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPROVAL  OF  THE  DIBECTOK  OF  THE  BDREAn  OF  THE  BUDGET 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BULL 


H 


"^  m 


c 


riN 


JUNE  10,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  259— Publication  2144 


ontents 


The  War 

Page 
"In  This  Poignant  Hour  .  .  .":  Prayer  by  the  Presi- 
dent           525 

Allied  Military  Operations  in  France : 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 526 

Statement  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State 526 

Liberation  of  Rome  by  the  Allies : 

Radio  Address  by  the  President 526 

Messages  Exchanged  Between  the  President  of  the 
United    States   and   Government   and   Military 

Officials  of  the  United  Nations 628 

Attitude  of  the  Liberian  Government 532 

War  Refugees : 

Removal  of  European  Refugees  to  the  United  States  .      532 

Refugee  Centers  in  the  Middle  East 533 

Portuguese  Action  Concerning  the  Exportation  and  Pro- 
duction of  AVolfram :  Announcement  by  the  Acting 

Secretary  of  State 535 

Exchange  of  American  and  German  Nationals 535 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 

United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administra- 
tion :  Statement  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State  .  .      535 

American  Republics 

Visit  of  the  Executive  Director  of  the  National  Council 

of  Geography  of  Brazil 536 

Recognition  by  the  United  States  of  the  Government 

of  Ecuador £36 

[ovee] 


JUL  25  liH4 


0 


0/1^671^5— CONTINUED 


The  Far  East  page 
Belief  Supplies  for  Allied  Nationals  Interned  in  the  Far 

Etist 536 

Visit  of  Scholars  From  China 537 

Willis  C.  Barrett  Keturns  From  China 538 

EUEOPE 

Return  of  the  President's  Personal  Representative  to 

the  Vatican 538 

Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  Polish  Prime  Minister  .      538 

General 
The  Responsibility  of  Labor  in  the  Post-War  Period: 

Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle 539 

Presentation  of  Legion  of  Merit  Medals 541 

American  Mexican  Claims  Commission 542 

Treaty  Information 

Double-Taxation  Convention  With  Canada 543 

International  Opium  Convention 543 

The  Department 

Transfer  of  Functions  of  the  Secretary's  Liaison  Office 
to  the  Division  of  Foreign  Activity  Correlation :  De- 
partmental Order  1277  of  June  7, 1944 543 

Rubber  Advisory  Panel 544 

Appointment  of  Officers 544 

Legislation 544 

Publications 545 


The  War 


"IN  TfflS  POIGNANT  HOUR 
Prayer  by  the  President  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  61 

My  Fellow  Americans  :  In  this  poignant  hour, 
I  ask  you  to  join  me  in  prayer : 

ALMIGHTY  GOD:  Our  sons,  pride  of  our 
t  Nation,  this  day  have  set  upon  a  mighty 
endeavor,  a  struggle  to  preserve  our  Republic,  our 
religion,  and  our  civilization,  and  to  set  free  a 
suffering  humanity. 

Lead  them  straight  and  true;  give  strength  to 
their  arms,  stoutness  to  their  hearts,  steadfastness 
to  their  faith. 

They  will  need  Thy  blessings.  Their  road  will 
be  long  and  hard.  The  enemy  is  strong.  He  may 
liurl  back  our  forces.  Success  may  not  come  with 
rushing  speed,  but  we  shall  return  again  and  again ; 
and  we  know  that  by  Thy  grace,  and  by  the  right- 
eousness of  our  cause,  our  sons  will  triumph. 

They  will  be  sore  tried,  by  night  and  by  day, 
without  rest — till  the  victory  is  won.  The  dark- 
ness will  be  rent  by  noise  and  flame.  Men's  souls 
will  be  shaken  with  the  violences  of  war. 

These  are  men  lately  drawn  from  the  ways  of 
peace.  They  fight  not  for  the  lust  of  conquest. 
They  fight  to  end  conquest.  They  fight  to  liberate. 
They  fight  to  let  justice  arise,  and  tolerance  and 
good-will  among  all  Thy  people.  They  yearn  but 
for  the  end  of  battle,  for  their  return  to  the  haven 
of  home. 

Some  will  never  return.  Embrace  these,  Father, 
and  receive  them,  Thy  heroic  servants,  into  Thy 
kingdom. 

And  for  us  at  home — fathers,  mothers,  children, 
wives,  sisters,  and  brothers  of  brave  men  overseas — 
whose  thoughts  and  prayers  are  ever  with  them — 
help  us.  Almighty  God,  to  rededicate  ourselves  in 


renewed  faith  in  Thee  in  this  hour  of  great 
sacrifice. 

Many  people  have  urged  that  I  call  the  Nation 
into  a  single  day  of  special  prayer.  But  because 
the  road  is  long  and  the  desire  is  great,  I  ask  that 
our  people  devote  themselves  in  continuance  of 
prayer.  As  we  rise  to  each  new  day,  and  again 
when  each  day  is  spent,  let  words  of  prayer  be 
on  our  lips,  invoking  Thy  help  to  our  efforts. 

Give  us  strength,  too — strength  in  our  daily 
tasks,  to  redouble  the  contributions  we  make  in 
the  physical  and  material  support  of  our  armed 
forces. 

And  let  our  hearts  be  stout,  to  wait  out  the  long 
travail,  to  bear  sorrows  that  may  come,  to  impart 
our  courage  unto  our  sons  wheresoever  they 
may  be. 

And,  O  Lord,  give  us  Faith.  Give  us  Faith  in 
Thee;  Faith  in  our  sons;  Faith  in  each  other; 
Faith  in  our  united  crusade.  Let  not  the  keenness 
of  our  spirit  ever  be  dulled.  Let  not  the  impacts 
of  temporary  events,  of  temporal  matters  of  but 
fleeting  moment — let  not  these  deter  us  in  our 
unconquerable  purpose. 

With  Thy  blessing,  we  shall  prevail  over  the 
unholy  forces  of  our  enemy.  Help  us  to  conquer 
the  apostles  of  greed  and  racial  arrogancies.  Lead 
us  to  the  saving  of  our  country,  and  with  our 
sister  nations  into  a  world  unity  that  will  spell 
a  sure  peace — a  peace  invulnerable  to  the  schem- 
ings  of  unworthy  men.  And  a  peace  that  will  let 
all  men  live  in  freedom,  reaping  the  just  rewards 
of  their  honest  toil. 

Thy  will  be  done,  Almighty  God.    Amen. 


'  Broadcast  on  June  6,  1944. 


525 


526 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


ALLIED  MILITARY  OPERATIONS  IN  FRANCE 


Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  June  G] 

The  Honorable  Cordell  Hull,  Secretary  of  State, 
made  the  following  statement  at  Hershey,  Pa.,  in 
response  to  a  request  for  comment  on  the  invasion 
in  Europe : 

"Our  brave  Allied  armies,  today  waging  the 
most  pivotal  battle  of  all  time,  never  more  truly 
represented  the  cause  of  liberty  and  of  mankind. 
The  forces  of  savagery,  desperately  endeavoring 
to  destroy  the  human  race,  are  making  their  last 
stand.  While  we  fight  and  pray,  and  while  we 
know  that  the  fighting  will  be  hard,  we  confidently 
look  forward  to  a  great  historic  Allied  victory. 
We  must  then  pledge  our  all  that  never  again  shall 
the  forces  of  human  destruction  be  let  loose  on 
the  world." 


Statement  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  June  6] 

The  liberation  of  Europe  has  begun.  For  four 
long  years  the  people  of  Europe  have  suffered 
tyranny,  oppression,  and  starvation.  They  have 
remained  strong  in  hope  for  this  day  and  the  days 
to  come.  For  them  it  means  that  freedom  from 
suffering  and  oppression  is  at  last  on  the  horizon. 
For  the  people  of  China  and  the  Far  East  also, 
this  day  heralds  the  beginning  of  a  new  era. 

Our  men  and  those  of  our  Allies  are  making 
the  supreme  sacrifice  in  order  that  we  and  all 
men  may  live  in  peace  and  freedom.  For  us  at 
home  this  is  the  time  not  for  rejoicing — that 
can  come  later — but  for  every  one  of  us  to  put 
everything  he  has  into  his  job  to  speed  the  day 
of  victory. 


UBERATION  OF  ROME  BY  THE  ALLIES 
Radio  Address  by  the  President  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  5] 

Yesterday,  June  fourth,  1941,  Rome  fell  to  Amer- 
ican and  Allied  troops.  The  first  of  the  Axis  cap- 
itals is  now  in  our  hands.    One  up  and  two  to  go ! 

It  is  perhaps  significant  that  the  first  of  these 
capitals  to  fall  should  have  the  longest  history  of 
all  of  them.  The  story  of  Rome  goes  back  to  the 
time  of  the  foundations  of  our  civilization.  We 
can  still  see  there  monuments  of  the  time  when 
Rome  and  the  Romans  controlled  the  whole  of  the 
then  known  world.  That,  too,  is  significant,  for 
the  United  Nations  are  determined  that  in  the 
future  no  one  city  and  no  one  race  will  be  able  to 
control  the  whole  of  the  world. 

In  addition  to  the  monuments  of  the  older  times, 
we  also  see  in  Rome  the  great  symbol  of  Christian- 
ity, which  has  reached  into  almost  every  part  of  the 
world.  There  are  other  shrines  and  other  churches 
in  many  places,  but  the  churches  and  shrines  of 
Rome  are  visible  symbols  of  the  faith  and  deter- 
mination of  the  early  saints  and  martyrs  that 
Christianity  should  live  and  become  universal. 
And  now  it  will  be  a  source  of  deep  satisfaction 
that  the  freedom  of  the  Pope  and  of  Vatican  City 
is  assured  by  the  armies  of  the  United  Nations. 


It  is  also  significant  that  Rome  has  been  liberated 
by  the  armed  forces  of  many  nations.  The  Ameri- 
can and  British  armies — who  bore  the  chief  bur- 
dens of  battle — found  at  their  sides  our  own  North 
American  neighbors,  the  gallant  Canadians.  The 
fighting  New  Zealanders  from  the  far  South 
Pacific,  the  courageous  French  and  the  French 
Moroccans,  the  South  Africans,  the  Poles  and  the 
East  Indians — all  of  them  fought  with  us  on  the 
bloody  approaches  to  Rome. 

The  Italians,  too,  foi'swearing  a  i^artnership  in 
the  Axis  which  they  never  desired,  have  sent  their 
troops  to  join  us  in  our  battles  against  the  German 
trespassers  on  their  soil. 

The  prospect  of  the  liberation  of  Rome  meant 
enough  to  Hitler  and  his  generals  to  induce  them 
to  fight  desperately  at  great  cost  of  men  and  mate- 
rials and  with  great  sacrifice  to  their  crumbling 
Eastern  line  and  to  their  Western  front.  No 
thanks  are  due  to  them  if  Rome  was  spared  the 
devastation  which  the  Germans  wreaked  on  Naples 
and  other  Italian  cities.  The  Allied  generals 
maneuvered  so  skilfull^y  that  the  Nazis  could  only 


'  Broadcast  ou  June  5,  1944. 


JUNE    10,    1944 


527 


have  stayed  long  enough  to  damage  Eome  at  the 
risk  of  losing  their  armies. 

But  Rome  is  of  course  more  than  a  military 
objective. 

Ever  since  before  the  days  of  the  Caesars, 
Rome  has  stood  as  a  symbol  of  autliority.  Rome 
was  the  Republic.  Rome  was  the  Empire. 
Rome  was  the  Catholic  Church,  and  Rome  was 
the  capital  of  a  united  Italy.  Later,  unfortu- 
nately, Rome  became  the  seat  of  Fascism — one  of 
the  three  capitals  of  the  Axis. 

For  a  quarter  century  the  Italian  people  were 
enslaved  and  degraded  by  the  rule  of  Mussolini 
from  Rome.  They  will  mark  its  liberation  with 
deep  emotion.  In  the  north  of  Ital}',  the  people 
are  still  dominated  and  threatened  by  the  Nazi 
overlords  and  their  Fascist  puppets. 

Our  victory  comes  at  an  excellent  time,  while 
our  Allied  forces  are  poised  for  another  strike 
at  Western  Europe — and  while  armies  of  other 
Nazi  soldiers  nervously  await  our  assault.  And 
our  gallant  Russian  allies  continue  to  make  their 
power  felt  more  and  more. 

From  a  strictly  military  standpoint,  we  had 
long  ago  accomplished  certain  of  the  main  ob- 
jectives of  our  Italian  campaign — the  control  of 
the  sea  lanes  of  the  Mediterranean  to  shorten  our 
combat  and  supply  lines,  and  the  capture  of  the 
air]iorts  of  Foggia  from  which  we  have  struck 
telling  blows  on  the  Continent. 

It  would  be  unwise  to  inflate  in  our  own  minds 
the  military  importance  of  the  capture  of  Rome. 
We  sliall  have  to  jDush  through  a  long  period 
of  greater  effoi-t  and  fiercer  fighting  before  we 
get  into  Germany  itself.  The  Germans  have  re- 
treated thousands  of  miles,  all  the  way  from 
the  gates  of  Cairo,  through  Libya  and  Tunisia 
and  Sicily  and  southern  Italy.  They  have  suf- 
fered heavy  losses,  but  not  great  enough  yet  to 
cause  collapse. 

Germany  has  not  yet  been  driven  to  surrender. 
Germany  has  not  yet  been  driven  to  the  point 
where  she  will  be  unable  to  recommence  world 
conquest  a  geneifition  hence. 

Therefore,  the  victory  still  lies  some  distance 
ahead.  That  distance  will  be  covered  in  due 
time — have  no  fear  of  that.  But  it  will  be  tough 
and  it  will  be  costly. 


In  Italy  the  people  had  lived  so  long  under 
the  corrupt  rule  of  Mussolini  that,  in  spite  of  the 
tinsel  at  the  top,  their  economic  condition  had 
grown  steadily  worse.  Our  troops  have  found 
starvation,  malnutrition,  disease,  a  deteriorating 
education,  and  lowered  public  health— all  by- 
products of  the  Fascist  misrule. 

The  task  of  the  Allies  in  occupation  has  been 
stupendous.  We  have  had  to  start  at  tlie  very 
bottom,  assisting  local  governments  to  re-form  on 
democratic  lines.  We  have  had  to  give  them 
bread  to  replace  that  which  was  stolen  out  of 
their  mouths  by  the  Germans.  We  have  had  to 
make  it  possible  for  the  Italians  to  raise  and  use 
their  own  local  crops.  We  have  to  help  them 
cleanse  their  schools  of  Fascist  trappings. 

The  American  people  as  a  whole  approve  the 
salvage  of  these  human  beings,  who  are  only 
now  learning  to  walk  in  a  new  atmosphere  of 
freedom. 

Some  of  us  may  let  our  thoughts  run  to  the 
financial  cost  of  it.  Essentially  it  is  what  we  can 
call  a  form  of  relief.  At  the  same  time  we  hope 
that  this  relief  will  be  an  investment  for  the 
future — an  investment  that  will  pay  dividends 
by  eliminating  Fascism  and  ending  any  Italian 
desires  to  start  another  war  of  aggression  in  the 
future.  They  are  dividends  which  justify  such 
an  investment,  because  they  are  additional  sup- 
ports for  world  jDeace. 

The  Italian  people  are  capable  of  self-govern- 
ment. We  do  not  lose  sight  of  their  vii'tues  as 
a  peace-loving  nation. 

We  remember  the  many  centuries  in  which  the 
Italians  were  leaders  in  the  arts  and  sciences, 
enriching  the  lives  of  all  mankind. 

We  remember  the  great  sons  of  the  Italian  peo- 
ple— Galileo  and  Marconi,  Michelangelo  and 
Dante — and  that  fearless  discoverer  who  typifies 
the  courage  of  Italy,  Christopher  Columbus. 

Italy  cannot  grow  in  stature  by  seeking  to  build 
up  a  great  militaristic  empire.  Italians  have  been 
overcrowded  within  their  own  territories,  but  they 
do  not  need  to  try  to  conquer  the  lands  of  other 
peoples  in  order  to  find  the  breath  of  life.  Other 
peoples  may  not  want  to  be  conquered. 

In  the  past  Italians  have  come  by  the  millions 
to  the  United  States.     They  have  been  welcomed. 


528 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


they  have  prospered,  they  have  become  good  citi- 
zens, community  and  governmental  leaders. 
They  are  not  Italian-Americans.  They  are 
Americans — Americans  of  Italian  descent. 

Italians  have  gone  in  great  numbers  to  the  other 
Americas — Brazil  and  the  Argentine,  for  exam- 
ple— and  to  many  other  nations  in  every  con- 
tinent of  the  world,  giving  of  their  industry  and 
their  talents,  and  achieving  success  and  the  com- 
fort of  good  living. 

Italy  should  go  on  as  a  great  mother  nation, 
contributing  to  the  culture  and  progress  and  good- 
will of  all  mankind — and  developing  her  special 
talents  in  the  arts,  crafts,  and  sciences,  and  pre- 
serving her  historic  and  cultural  heritage  for  the 
benefit  of  all  peoples. 

We  want  and  expect  the  help  of  the  future  Italy 
toward  lasting  peace.  All  the  other  nations  op- 
posed to  Fascism  and  Nazism  should  help  give 
Italy  a  chance. 

The  Germans,  after  years  of  domination  in 
Rome,  left  the  people  in  the  Eternal  City  on  the 
verge  of  starvation.  We  and  the  British  will  do 
everything  we  can  to  bring  them  relief.  Antici- 
pating the  fall  of  Rome,  we  made  preparations  to 
ship  food  supplies  to  the  city,  but  it  should  be 
borne  in  mind  that  the  needs  are  so  great  and  the 
transportation    requirements   of   our    armies   so 


heavy  that  improvement  must  be  gradual.  We 
have  already  begun  to  save  the  lives  of  the  men, 
women,  and  children  of  Rome. 

This  is  an  example  of  the  efficiency  of  your 
machinery  of  war.  The  magnificent  ability  and 
energy  of  the  American  people  in  growing  the 
crops,  building  the  merchant  ships,  making  and 
collecting  the  cargos,  getting  the  supplies  over 
thousands  of  miles  of  water,  and  thinking  ahead 
to  meet  emergencies — all  this  spells,  I  think,  an 
amazing  efficiency  on  the  part  of  our  armed 
forces,  all  the  various  agencies  working  with  them, 
and  American  industry  and  labor  as  a  whole. 

No  great  effort  like  this  can  be  a  hundred  per- 
cent perfect,  but  the  batting  average  is  very,  very 
high. 

I  extend  the  congi'atulations  and  thanks  of  the 
American  people  to  General  Alexander,  who  has 
been  in  command  of  the  whole  Italian  operation; 
to  General  Clark  and  General  Leese  of  the  Fifth 
and  the  Eighth  Armies;  to  General  Wilson,  the 
Sujireme  Allied  Commander  of  the  Mediterranean 
theater,  and  General  Devers,  his  American  Dep- 
uty ;  to  General  Eaker ;  to  Admirals  Cunningham 
and  Hewitt;  and  to  all  their  brave  officers  and 
men. 

May  God  bless  them  and  watch  over  them  and 
over  all  of  our  gallant,  fighting  men. 


Message*  Exchanged  Between  the  President  of  the  United  States  and  Government  and  Military 

Officials  of  the  United  Nations 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  7] 

The  following  cablegrams  and  acknowledg- 
ments have  been  exchanged  to  date  between  the 
President  and  various  government  and  military 
officials  of  the  United  Nations : 

Premier  Stalin  to  the  President 
The  news  of  the  capture  of  Rome  was  received 
in  the  Soviet  Union  with  great  satisfaction.     I 
congratulate  you  upon  this  great  victory  of  Allied 
Anglo-American  troops. 


Marshal  Badoglio  to  the  President 

To  you,  Mr.  President,  to  the  great  and  free 
North  American  people,  and  to  your  gallant  troops, 
on  the  day  when  the  victorious  troops  pursuing 
the  fleeing  enemy  are  restoring  Rome  to  the  new 


Italy,  I  send  my  ardent  wishes  for  the  future  as 
well  as  my  gratitude.  Today  Rome,  the  first 
European  capital  to  be  liberated  from  the  Ger- 
mans, once  again  occupies  her  place  in  the  world 
of  justice  and  liberty.  There  can  be  no  surer  guar- 
antee of  renewed  and  lasting  friendship  between 
the  United  States  and  Italy  than  the  sacrifices  of 
American  soldiers  for  the  liberation  of  Rome. 

The  President  to  Marshal  Badoglio 
I  thank  you  for  your  message  of  June  6.  The 
American  people  found  it  of  good  augury  to  that 
cause  of  world  freedom  and  progress  for  which 
they  are  fighting  that  the  first  capital  of  the  Euro- 
pean continent  to  emerge  from  the  black  shadow 
of  tyranny  should  be  Rome,  with  all  its  universal 
significance.  Its  liberation  was  a  fitting  prelude 
to  that  mighty  invasion  launched  from  the  North. 


JUNE    10,    1944 


529 


Just  as  Rome  and  the  other  historic  cities  of 
Italy  are  felt  to  be  the  inheritance  of  all  the  civi- 
lized world,  so,  I  am  sure,  the  Italian  people  have 
never  been  moi'e  keenly  aware  than  today  that  the 
cause  of  the  civilized  world  is  their  cause  and 
demands  the  complete  dedication  of  their  powers 
of  mind  and  heart. 


Prime  Minister  Curtin  of  Australia  to  the 
President 

Joyfully  Australia  tenders  its  congratulations 
on  the  Allied  liberation  of  Rome  and  pays  deep 
tribute  to  the  gallant  forces  of  the  United  Nations 
whose  devotion  has  evoked  this  marked  advance 
towards  the  final  victory  which  will  free  all  the 
world  from  despotism  and  tyranny.  ]\Iy  deepest 
personal  regards. 


The  President  to  General  Sir  Henry  Maitland 
Wilson 

We  are  all  thrilled  by  the  splendid  success  in 
Italy.     My  very  warm  congratulations  to  you. 

General  Sir  Henry  Maitland,  Wilson  to  the 
President 

I  greatly  appreciate  and  want  to  thank  you  for 
your  message. 

Our  success  during  the  last  few  months  is  due 
to  the  fine  fighting  qualities  of  the  Allied  troops, 
the  constant  harassing  operations  of  the  Allied  Air 
Forces  and  the  support  received  from  the  Allied 
Navies.  The  85th  and  SS'th  United  States  Divi- 
sions showed  dash  and  fighting  spirit  in  this  their 
first  battle,  and  I  should  like  to  record  my  admira- 
tion of  these  fine  troops. 


The  President  to  General  Sir  Harold  Alexander 

I  am  very  happy  to  be  able  to  send  to  my  old 
friend  unstinted  praise  and  congratulations  on  the 
fall  of  Rome.     Grand  job. 

General  Sir  Harold  Alexander  to  the  President 

Your  kind  message  of  congratulations  is  greatly 
appreciated.  The  United  States  Fifth  Army 
played  a  magnificent  part  m  this  victory.  I  am 
immensely  proud  of  it. 


The  President  to  Lieutenant  General  Mark  Clark 

You  have  made  the  American  people  very 
happy.  It  is  a  grand  job.  Well  done.  Con- 
gratulations to  you  and  the  men  of  the  Fifth  Army. 

Lieutenant  General  Mark  Clark  to  the  President 

All  members  of  the  Fifth  Army  are  inspired  by 
your  deeply  appreciated  message  of  congratula- 
tions, and  we  reaffirm  our  pledge  to  deliver  un- 
relenting blows  until  the  enemy  is  finally  defeated. 


The  President  to  Lieutenant  General  Sir  Oliver 
Leese 

My  very  warm  congratulations  to  you  and  the 
men  of  the  Eighth  Army. 

Lieutenant  General  Sir  Oliver  Leese  to  the 
President 

I  thank  you,  Mr.  President,  on  behalf  of  all 
ranks  of  the  Eighth  Army,  for  your  most  kind  con- 
gratulations which  we  value  greatly.  It  has  been 
an  inspiration  to  fight  alongside  the  Fifth  Army. 
With  all  my  respects  and  grateful  thanks  to- 
yourself. 

The  President  to  Admiral  Sir  John  H.  D. 
Cwnningham 

My  hearty  congratulations  to  you,  to  the  officers 
and  men  under  your  command.  The  Navies  of 
Britain  and  the  U.S.  have  lived  up  to  their  reputa- 
tions.    Well  done. 

Admiral  Sir  John  Cunningham  to  the  President 

I  wish  to  thank  you  for  your  message  on  behalf 
of  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Allied  Navies.  All 
of  us  appreciate  it  very  much. 


The  King  of  Greece  to  the  President 

On  the  victory  of  Rome,  the  first  great  success 
in  Europe,  I  send  you  my  sincere  congratulations 
with  real  pleasure  and  satisfaction.  We  are  filled 
with  confidence  that  the  magnificant  American 
and  Allied  troops  will  in  a  short  while  complete 
their  task  of  bringing  the  world  final  victory  and 
freedom. 


530 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


The  President  of  Brazil  to  the  President 

I  congratulate  Your  Excellency  on  the  first  day 
of  the  invasion  of  Europe,  decisive  step  for  the 
final  victory  of  Allied  arms,  liberation  of  op- 
pressed nations,  and  restoration  of  tranquilitj'  to 
the  world.  The  Brazilian  Government  and  people 
follow  with  emotion  and  enthusiasm,  hour  by 
hour,  the  march  of  events,  certain  that  for  the 
heroic  American  forces  of  land,  sea,  and  air  the 
decisive  days  which  follow  will  be  ones  of  glory 
during  which  th.ey  represent  on  the  fields  of  battle 
'the  peoples  of  our  Continent,  yearning  for  peace 
and  justice.  I  beg  that  Your  Excellency,  leader 
of  the  American  people,  accept  my  most  cordial 
salutations  and  transmit  to  General  Eisenhower 
the  most  ardent  wishes  of  myself  and  of  Brazil 
for  the  complete  success  of  the  arms  under  his 
supreme  command. 


The  President  of  Costa  Rica  to  the  President 

The  Costa  Rican  Congress  agreed  in  today's 
session  to  send  the  Congresses  and  Chiefs  of  the 
Allied  Nations  engaged  in  struggle  for  democracy 
a  message  of  encouragement  and  friendship  on  the 
occasion  of  the  invasion  of  the  European  Conti- 
nent which  was  begun  today. 


The  President  of  Honduras  to  the  President 

The  news  of  the  Allied  offensive  against  the 
fortress  of  Europe  has  stirred  the  Honduran 
people  who  are  fully  confident  of  the  triumphs 
of  the  United  Nations  in  the  struggle  against 
totalitarianism.  The  Honduran  nation  expresses 
the  most  fervent  wishes  for  the  success  of  the 
Allied  arms  in  this  great  battle  and  associates 
itself  with  the  feelings  of  the  North  American 
people  and  other  friendly  nations.  1  have  the 
honor  to  present  to  Your  Excellency  the  recog- 
nition of  my  Government  and  that  of  the  Hon- 
duran nation  for  the  gigantic  efforts  which  that 
Government  and  people  are  making  for  victory. 
Your  warm  friend. 


people  and  of  myself  for  the  success  achieved  in 
the  Italian  campaign  upon  the  occupation  of 
Rome  by  the  forces  under  the  command  of  Gen- 
eral Clark,  saving  from  destruction  a  historic 
city  and  its  cultural  and  religious  monuments. 
The  glorious  feat  of  war  which  has  just  been 
accomplished  has  brought  new  laurels  for  the 
armed  forces  of  the  United  States  and  the  Allies 
and  constitutes  a  decisive  step  toward  the  final 
triumph  over  the  aggressor  hordes  which  have 
not  been  nor  shall  be  able  to  resist  the  valor  of 
the  men  who  are  fighting  for  the  liberty  of  the 
world.  On  this  pleasing  occasion  I  renew  to 
Your  Excellency  the  testimony  of  my  highest 
personal  esteem. 

Generalissimo  Chiang  Kai-sheh  to  the  President 

On  the  historic  occasion  of  the  liberation  of 
Rome  may  I  convey  to  you  and  the  gallant  Ameri- 
can forces  my  warmest  congratulations.  This  sig- 
nal feat  of  arms  demonstrates  anew  the  might  of 
the  United  Nations,  which  foreshadows  in  quick 
succession  the  liberation  of  all  countries  suffering 
under  Axis  occupation. 


The  King  of  Egypt  to  the  President 

The  so  brilliant  exploits  of  the  valiant  Allied 
forces  crowned  by  their  triumphant  entry  into 
Rome  offer  me  a  happy  occasion  to  renew  to  Your 
Excellency  the  sincere  expression  of  all  my  admira- 
tion and  my  most  sincere  felicitations,  together 
with  my  cordial  wishes  for  an  early  final  victory. 


TJie  President  of  Peru  to  the  President 
It  is  very  pleasing  to  me  to  convey  to  Your 
Excellency  the  congratulations  of  the  Peruvian 


The  President  of  Colombia  to  the  President 

When  the  soldiers  of  the  United  Nations  under 
the  command  of  an  American  general  are  begin- 
ning one  of  the  greatest  military  enterprises  in 
history,  I  wish  to  be  the  interpreter  to  Your  Excel- 
lency of  the  very  keenly  felt  emotion  which  grips 
the  people  of  Colombia,  now,  as  never  before, 
linked  to  the  American  Nation  in  interest  in  vic- 
tory and  in  concern  for  the  sacrifices  which  must 
precede  it. 

The  Colombians  would,  at  any  time,  have  ob- 
served with  astonishment  and  enthusiasm  this 
extraordinary  military  campaign  and  its  opera- 
tions, the  application  of  modern  science  to  the 


JUNE    10,    1944 


531 


liberation  of  the  oppressed  peoples.  On  this  occa- 
sion our  people  feel,  moreover,  a  legitimate  pride 
that  it  is  American-born  officers  and  soldiers  who 
are  fighting  such  extraordinary  battles,  carrying  to 
the  Old  World  not  only  the  invincible  force  of  a 
civilization  which  they  prepared  and  strengthened 
for  the  service  of  humanity  but  also  their  generous 
spirit  which  does  not  jDermit  them  to  vacillate  in 
the  determination  to  shed  their  blood  for  the  liberty 
of  the  enslaved  nations  and  for  the  defense  and 
definitive  establishment  of  the  great  political  and 
social  principles  which  have  had  their  birth  and 
such  splendid  development  in  America. 

The  Colombians,  Excellency,  the  Allies  and 
brothers  of  the  Americans  who  are  fighting  in 
France  today  against  a  common  enemy,  regret  that 
they  cannot  offer  yet  greater  aid  to  this  great 
enterprise  of  free  humanity  nor  a  more  effective 
direct  contribution  to  the  liberation  of  the  Euro- 
pean peoples.  All  are  today  sending  up  their 
Christian  prayers  for  the  success  and  final  victory 
of  the  Allied  troops  and  hope,  as  do  your  country- 
men, that  the  compensation  for  the  incalculable 
efforts,  unmatched  in  the  history  of  the  world, 
which  the  United  States  is  making  in  behalf  of 
humanity  may  be  a  prompt  victory  which  will  save 
the  greatest  number  of  American  lives  and  crown 
with  glory  the  armies  of  all  the  nations  which  are 
beginning  to  lay  siege,  from  the  west,  east,  and 
south,  to  the  fortress  of  political  barbarity.  Ee- 
ceive,  Excellency,  the  sentiments  of  solidarity  of 
the  Colombian  people  and  my  sentiments  of  friend- 
ship and  admiration. 


The  President  of  the  Republic  of  Paraguay  to  the 
President 

On  this  day  so  glorious  for  the  arms  of  the  United 
Nations,  on  which  heavy  forces  of  the  Army  of 
your  country  are  taking  part  in  the  invasion  of  the 
Continent,  I  repeat  to  you  my  wishes  that  the  most 
complete  victoiy  will  crown  so  much  daring  and 
so  much  effort  displayed  in  the  cause  of  the  freedom 
of  the  peoples  of  the  world. 


The  President  of  Haiti  to  the  President 

On  the  occasion  of  the  liberation  of  Rome  by  the 
valiant  and  glorious  American  troops,  I  feel  the 
need,  as  Chief  of  an  Allied  and  Catholic  State, 

592397 


of  expressing  to  Your  Excellency  the  congratu- 
lations and  sentiments  of  the  Haitian  people  and 
Governinent.  I  desire  also  to  add  my  wish  to 
those  formulated  by  all  the  United  Nations,  that 
the  liberation  of  Europe,  inaugurated  by  the  land- 
ing of  the  Allied  troops  on  the  coast  of  France, 
may  continue  rapidly  and  lead  to  the  final  vic- 
tory. In  the  name  of  the  Haitian  people  and 
Government,  which  are  more  than  ever  united 
with  the  great  American  Republic,  I  send  Your 
Excellency  the  assurance  of  our  unfailing  attach- 
ment. 


The    President    and    the    Pro-Secretary    of    the 
Chilean  Senate  to  the  President 

On  the  occasion  of  the  beginning  of  the  libera- 
tion of  Europe  by  the  Allied  armies  the  Chilean 
Senate  decided  unanimously  to  express  to  Your 
Excellency  the  joy  which  seizes  it  and  the  cer- 
tainty it  has  that  the  most  complete  success  must 
reward  this  effort  on  behalf  of  liberty  and  right. 


The  Prime  Minister  of  Belgiv/m  to  the  President 

The  Belgian  Government  begs  Your  Excellency 
to  accept  its  most  ardent  felicitations  for  the 
brilliant  part  played  by  the  valiant  American 
Army  in  the  liberation  of  Rome.  This  glorious 
feat  of  arms,  which  constitutes  an  important  step 
on  the  road  to  the  liberation  of  Europe,  will  be 
deeply  felt  by  my  fellow  countrymen,  who  suffer 
under  the  yoke  of  the  enemy. 


The  President  of  the  Dominican  Republic  to  the 
President 

Receive  my  most  cordial  and  effusive  message  of 
congratulations  and  sympathy  on  the  occasion  of 
the  success  obtained  by  the  Allied  armies  in  be- 
ginning the  offensive  with  which  it  is  intended  to 
liberate  the  European  peoples  from  the  oppression 
to  which  the  pitiless  Nazi  tyranny  now  holds  them 
subject.  I  very  fervently  hope  that  the  final 
success  of  this  glorious  undertaking  will  crown  the 
aspirations  of  those  of  us  who  have  placed  all  our 
faith  in  the  triumph  of  democracy  and  liberty. 
All  this  to  the  honor  and  glory  of  the  North 
American  armed  forces. 


532 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Attitude  of  the  Liberian  Government 

[Released  to  the  press  June  8] 

The  American  Minister  to  Liberia,  the  Honor- 
able Lester  A.  Walton,  has  informed  the  Depart- 
ment that  the  Liberian  Government  has  expressed 
to  this  Government  its  gratification  over  the  occu- 
pation of  Kome  by  the  Allied   Armies  of  the 


United  Nations  and  their  invasion  of  Europe 
through  northern  France.  The  Liberian  Gov- 
ernment has  also  requested  the  American  Minis- 
ter to  inform  this  Government  of  its  reaffirmation 
of  the  pledge  of  the  Liberian  nation  and  people 
whole-heartedly  to  give  their  support  in  the  fight 
for  freedom  in  the  world. 


WAR  REFUGEES 
Removal  of  European  Refugees  to  the  United  States 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  9] 

The  following  cablegram  was  sent  by  the  Presi- 
dent to  Ambassador  Kobert  Murphy  in  Algiers : 

"Information  available  to  me  indicates  that  there 
are  real  possibilities  of  saving  human  lives  by 
bringing  more  refugees  through  Yugoslavia  to 
southern  Italy.  I  am  also  informed  that  the  escape 
of  refugees  by  this  route  has  from  time  to  time 
been  greatly  impeded  because  the  facilities  in 
southern  Italy  for  refugees  have  been  overtaxed. 
I  am  advised  that  this  is  the  situation  at  the  present 
moment  and  that  accordingly  possibilities  of  in- 
creasing the  flow  of  refugees  to  Italy  may  be  lost. 

"I  understand  that  many  of  the  refugees  in 
southern  Italy  have  been  and  are  being  moved  to 
temporary  havens  in  areas  adjacent  to  the  Mediter- 
ranean and  that  efforts  are  being  made  to  increase 
existing  refugee  facilities  in  these  areas.  I  am 
most  anxious  that  this  effort  to  take  refugees  from 
Italy  to  areas  relatively  close  by  be  intensified. 

"At  the  same  time  I  feel  that  it  is  important  that 
the  United  States  indicate  that  it  is  ready  to  share 
the  burden  of  caring  for  refugees  during  the  war. 
Accordingly,  I  have  decided  that  approximately 
1,000  refugees  should  be  immediately  brought  from 
Italy  to  this  country,  to  be  placed  in  an  Emergency 
Refugee  Shelter  to  be  established  at  Fort  Ontario 
near  Oswego,  New  York,  where  under  appropriate 
security  restrictions  they  will  remain  for  the  dura- 
tion of  the  war.  These  refugees  will  be  brought 
into  this  country  outside  of  the  regular  immigra- 
tion procedure  just  as  civilian  internees  from  Latin 
American  countries  and  prisoners  of  war  have  been 
brought  here.  The  Emergency  Refugee  Shelter 
will  be  well  equipped  to  take  good  care  of  these 
people.  It  is  contemplated  that  at  the  end  of  the 
war  they  will  be  returned  to  their  homelands. 


"You  may  assume  that  the  Emergency  Refugee 
Shelter  will  be  ready  to  receive  these  refugees  when 
they  arrive.  I  will  appreciate  it  therefore  if  you 
will  arrange  for  the  departure  to  the  United  States 
as  rapidly  as  possible,  consistent  with  military  re- 
quirements, of  approximately  1,000  refugees  in 
southern  Italy.  You  may  call  upon  representatives 
of  the  War  Refugee  Boai'd  in  Algiers  to  assist  you 
in  this  matter.  The  full  cooperation  of  our  mili- 
tary and  naval  authorities  should  be  enlisted  in 
effecting  the  prompt  removal  and  transportation 
of  the  refugees. 

"In  choosing  the  refugees  to  be  brought  to  the 
L'nited  States,  please  bear  in  mind  that  to  the  ex- 
tent possible  those  refugees  should  be  selected  for 
whom  other  havens  of  refuge  are  not  immediately 
available.  I  should  however  like  the  group  to  in- 
clude a  reasonable  proportion  of  various  categories 
of  persecuted  peoples  who  have  fled  to  Italy. 

"You  should  bear  in  mind  that  since  these  refu- 
gees are  to  be  placed  in  a  camp  in  the  LTnited  States 
under  appropriate  security  restrictions,  the  pi"o- 
cedure  for  the  selection  of  the  refugees  and  ar- 
rangements for  bringing  them  here  should  be  as 
simple  and  expeditious  as  possible,  uncomplicated 
by  any  of  the  usual  foi-malities  involved  in  admit- 
ting people  to  the  United  States  under  the  immi- 
gration laws. 

"However,  please  be  sure  that  the  necessary 
health  checks  are  made  to  aA'oid  bringing  here  per- 
sons afflicted  with  any  loathsome,  dangerous  or 
contagious  disease. 

"If  you  encounter  any  difficulties  in  arranging 
for  the  prompt  departure  of  these  refugees  please 
let  me  know." 

A  copy  of  the  memorandum  sent  by  the  Presi- 
dent on  June  8  to  the  Secretaries  of  War,  Navy, 


JUNE    10,    1944 

and  Interior,  the  Director  of  the  Bndget,  and  the 
Executive  Director  of  the  War  Refugee  Board  ^ 
follows : 

"There  is  attaclied  a  cable  which  I  have  dis- 
patched to  Robert  Murphy  in  Algiers,  requesting 
that  he  make  arrangements  for  the  departure  to 
the  United  States  as  rapidly  as  possible  of  ap- 
proximately 1,000  refugees  now  in  southern  Italy. 

"These  refugees  will  be  brought  into  this 
country  outside  of  the  regular  immigration  pro- 
cedure and  placed  in  Fort  Ontario  near  Oswego, 
New  York.  While  the  War  Refugee  Board  is 
charged  with  the  overall  responsibility  for  this 
project,  the  Army  shall  take  the  necessary  security 
precautions  so  that  these  refugees  will  remain  in 
the  camp  and  the  actual  administration  of  the 
camp  is  to  be  in  the  hands  of  the  War  Relocation 
Authority. 

"Accordingly,  the  following  steps  should  be 
taken  as  expeditiously  as  possible: 

"(1)  The  AVar  Department  and  the  Navy  De- 
l)artment  shall   send   whatever   instructions   are 


533 

necessary  to  the  military  authorities  in  Italy  and 
North  Africa  to  expedite  the  transportation  of 
these  refugees  to  the  United  States. 

"(2)  The  War  Department  shall  arrange  to  fur- 
nish and  properly  equip  Fort  Ontario  to  receive 
these  refugees;  shall  arrange  for  their  transpor- 
tation from  tlie  port  of  arrival  to  the  camp;  and 
shall  arrange  for  the  necessary  security  precau- 
tions. 

"(3)  The  War  Relocation  Authority  sh.all  make 
arrangements  to  handle  the  actual  administration 
of  the  camp,  which  will  be  designated  as  an  Emer- 
gency Refugee  Shelter. 

"(4)  Until  UNRRA  is  in  a  position  to  assume 
the  financial  responsibilities  involved,  the  Bureau 
of  the  Budget  shall  make  arrangements  for 
financing  the  project;  using  to  the  extent  possible 
any  available  funds  of  the  War  Department,  the 
War  Relocation  Authority,  and  the  War  Refugee 
Board,  and  from  the  Foreign  War  Relief  appro- 
priation, and  if  necessary  drawing  upon  the  Presi- 
dent's Emergency  Fund." 


Refugee  Centers  in  the  Middle  East 


[Released  to  the  press  by  tJNRRA  June  10] 

The  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation 
Administration  on  June  10  made  public  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  refugee  camps  it  operates  in  the  Middle 
East  which  were  referred  to  in  President  Roose- 
velt's statement  on  the  care  of  eastern  European 
refugees  in  his  press  conference  June  9.  The  sum- 
mary follows : 

Since  May  1, 1944,  the  United  Nations  Relief  and 
Rehabilitation  Administration  has  been  adminis- 
tering in  the  Middle  East  six  refugee  centers,  now 
housing  approximately  40,500  and  expected  within 
a  short  time  to  house  a  total  of  54,000  Greek  and 
Yugoslav  refugees,  mainly  women  and  children. 
These  camps  were  formerly  administered  by  the 
Middle  East  Relief  and  Refugee  Administration 
(M.E.R.R.A.),  whose  functions  have  been  ab- 
sorbed by  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabili- 
tation Administration.  The  refugees  cared  for  in 
these  camps  were  driven  out  of  coastal  and  island 
areas  of  Greece  and  Yugoslavia  as  a  result  of  mili- 
tary operations.  Refugees  are  pi-esently  leaving 
these  areas  at  the  rate  of  9,000  a  month. 


The  larger  part  of  the  Yugoslav  refugees  were 
at  first  transported  by  the  military  authorities 
from  Yugoslavia  to  Italy  and  were  and  are  being 
turned  over  to  the  care  of  the  United  Nations  Re- 
lief and  Rehabilitation  Administration  by  the 
military  authorities  in  order  to  reduce  the  drain  on 
supplies  and  shipping  to  Italy.  Most  of  the  Greek 
refugees  were  driven  out  of  the  Greek  and  Dode- 
canese Islands  by  the  Germans.  Thus  the  care  of 
these  refugees  by  the  United  Nations  Relief  and 
Rehabilitation  Administration  is  closely  related  to 
military  necessity.  In  fact,  the  British  Army  is 
coo^Derating  very  closely  with  the  United  Nations 
Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration  in  the 
administration  of  the  camps  and  is  furnishing  a 
substantial  number  of  personnel  and  other  services. 
Voluntary  welfare  agencies  are  also  cooperating 
closely  with  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Reha- 
bilitation Administration  and  have  furnished  val- 
uable personnel  and  certain  amounts  of  supplies. 

The  estimate  of  the  cost  of  operation  of  these 
camps  for  the  year  beginning  May  1,  1944  is  ap- 

'  BururriN  of  Jan.  22,  1944,  p.  95. 


634 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


proximately  $9,600,000,  excluding  administrative 
expenses,  which  cannot  be  estimated  since  British 
military  personnel  is  now  assisting  in  the  operation 
of  tlie  camps  and  may  have  to  be  replaced  by 
civilians.  An  additional  $500,000  will  be  required 
for  new  construction  and  additional  equipment. 

These  estimates  assume  a  maximum  camp  popu- 
lation of  54,000.  The  general  rule  of  the  camps 
is  to  require  work  from  all  physically  fit  refugees. 
In  addition  to  duties  connected  with  camp  mainte- 
nance, refugee  women  work  at  sewing  and  knit- 
ting, and  men  are  carpenters,  cobblers,  paintei's, 
etc.  Women  and  girls  are  being  trained  as  nurses 
so  that  they  can  help  in  the  camps  and  in  the 
countries  to  which  they  will  return.  Those  un- 
able to  work  receive  small  allowances  of  about  50 
cents  weekly  with  which  they  may  make  purchases 
at  the  camp  canteen. 

The  following  is  a  summary  description  of  the 
camps : 

Moses  WeJU — ^Located  in  Egypt.  Refugee  camp, 
in  operation  by  Middle  East  Relief  and  Refugee 
Administration  since  July  1942.  Population  as  of 
March  16,  1944,  was  1,841  Greek  refugees,  pre- 
dominantly women  and  children;  the  camp  was 
being  enlarged  and  equipped  to  accommodate 
some  3,500  in  May  and  June  and  5,000  from  July 
to  September  of  this  year.  Refugees  are  housed 
in  tents  with  concrete  floors,  the  capacity  of  each 
tent  being  16  to  20  persons.  The  camp  has  been 
administered  by  British  Army  personnel,  with 
Greeks  serving  as  medical  officers,  priests,  and 
welfare  officers. 

El  Shaft — Located  in  Egj'pt.  Refugee  camp, 
set  up  by  Middle  East  Relief  and  Refugee  Ad- 
ministration early  in  1944  to  accommodate  Yugo- 
slav refugees  evacuated  from  the  Dalmatian 
Coast  via  Italy  to  Egypt.  By  April  11,000  had 
arrived,  predominantly  women  and  children.  The 
camp  population  is  expected  to  be  20,000  to  25,000 
in  May  and  June  and  30,000  from  July  to  Septem- 
ber. The  camp  was  under  construction  when  the 
United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Admin- 
istration took  over,  and  conditions  were  very 
primitive.  The  refugees  were  and  are  to  be 
housed  in  tents.  At  the  end  of  March,  the  staff 
was  comprised  of  British  Army  personnel  and 
persons  fi'om  private  agencies,  including  repre- 
sentatives from  the  Near  East  Foundation,  the 


American  Friends'  Service  Committee,  the  Men- 
nonite  Central  Committee,  the  Friends'  Ambu- 
lance Unit,  the  British  Red  Cross  and  St.  John's 
War  Organization,  the  American  Red  Cross,  the 
International  Voluntary  Service  for  Peace,  the 
Jewish  Relief  Unit,  and  the  Save  the  Children 
Federation. 

El  Khatatha — ^Located  in  Egypt.  A  refugee 
camp,  which  is  expected  to  hai'bor  5,000  Yugo- 
slavs. Its  staff  consisted,  in  April,  of  British 
Army  personnel  and  25  persons  from  private 
agencies. 

Tolumhat — ^Located  in  Egypt.  A  reception  and 
transit  camp,  with  a  population  of  approximately 
40  Greeks  and  173  Yugoslavs  on  March  16,  1944. 
Its  staff  at  that  date  consisted  of  British  officers. 
The  camp  is  expected  to  harbor  1,000  f)ersons. 

Nuseiraf — ^Located  in  Palestine.  Its  popula- 
tion on  April  6,  1944  consisted  of  7,805  refugees 
from  the  Greek  islands  and  the  Dodecanese,  of 
whom  the  great  majority  are  women  and  children. 
Its  population  was  expected  to  increase  to  10,000 
in  May  and  June  and  12,000  from  July  to  Sep- 
tember. This  camp  was  taken  over  by  the  Middle 
East  Relief  and  Refugee  Administration  to  shel- 
ter all  Greek  refugees  brought  into  Palestine. 
The  refugees  are  housed  in  tents  or  barrack-style 
huts.  As  of  April  6,  1944  the  staff  included 
British  and  Greek  Army  personnel,  Greek  doc- 
tors, and  workers  from  voluntary  societies  (the 
Near  East  Foundation,  British  Red  Cross,  and 
Friends'  Ambulance  Unit). 

Aleppo — Located  in  Syria.  A  ti'ansit  camp, 
housed  in  barracks  and  intended  for  the  reception, 
interrogation,  disinfection,  medical  examination, 
and  routing  of  all  refugees  entering  through 
Turkey.  The  refugees  arriving  in  April  were 
mainly  from  the  Greek  and  Dodecanese  Islands 
and  were  coming  through  at  the  rate  of  1,000  a 
month.  On  March  16,  1944  the  population  of  the 
camp  numbered  some  248  persons,  and  the  staff  on 
that  date  consisted  of  British  military  personnel. 
Its  population  was  expected  to  increase  to  1,000 
by  May  and  June. 

Camp  Marshal  Lyautey  near  Casablanca, 
Morocco,  is  a  joint  United  States-United  King- 
dom undertaking  to  which  stateless  and  other 
refugees  in  Spain  are  being  removed  so  that  other 
refugees  may  be  able  to  enter  Spain  from  enemy- 


JUNE    10,    1944 


535 


occupied  areas.  With  the  creation  of  the  United 
Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration 
the  question  arose  of  transferring  the  camp  to  the 
United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Ad- 
ministration, and  it  is  hoped  that  the  transfer 
will  become  etfective  when  funds  for  the  United 
States  contribution  to  the  United  Nations  Relief 
and  Rehabilitation  Administration  have  been  ap- 
propriated. The  site  of  the  camp  is  a  former 
Army  base,  now  evacuated,  and  the  buildings,  of 
semi-permanent  barracks  tj'pe,  will  accommodate 
2,000  persons.  With  the  use  of  tents,  camp  ca- 
pacity can  be  extended  to  8,000.  Pending  the 
transfer,  the  United  Nations  Relief  and  Rehabili- 
tation Administration  has  provided  certain  neces- 
sary administrative  personnel  and  has  assisted 
United  States  agencies  in  their  administration  of 
the  camp. 

PORTUGUESE  ACTION  CONCERNING  THE 
EXPORTATION  AND  PRODUCTION  OF 
WOLFRAM 

Announcement  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State 

[  Keleased  to  the  press  June  6] 

The  Portuguese  Government  undertook  on  June 
5  to  impose  a  total  prohibition  upon  the  export  of 
wolfram  and  to  bring  about  an  immediate  cessa- 
tion of  wolfram  production  in  Portugal. 

The  action  of  the  Portuguese  Government 
sliould  prove  a  factor  in  shortening  the  war,  in  as 
much  as  it  will  deprive  the  enemy  in  Europe  of 
impox'tant  quantities  of  a  vital  war  material. 

The  United  States  Government  has  been  active 
in  the  negotiations  which  have  led  up  to  this  sat- 
isfactory conclusion  in  close  consultation  with  the 
British  and  Brazilian  Governments. 

EXCHANGE  OF  AMERICAN  AND  GERMAN 
NATIONALS 

[Released  to  the  press  June  6] 

The  Swedish  motor  vessel  Gripsholm  docked 
June  6  at  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  completing  a  voyage 
of  35  days  in  connection  with  another  repatriation 
of  nationals  of  the  United  States,  certain  of  the 
other  American  republics,  and  the  British  Com- 
monwealth of  Nations,  on  the  one  hand,  and  Ger- 
many on  the  other.  There  were  repatriated  from 
Germany  64  seriously  sick  and  wounded  American 


prisoners  of  war  and  46  civilians  of  the  United 
States  and  other  countries  of  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere. The  vessel  also  embarked  at  Barcelona 
more  than  900  seriously  sick  and  wounded  pris- 
oners of  war  of  the  British  Commonwealth  of 
Nations  and  21  British  civilians  from  Germany, 
most  of  whom  were  discharged  in  other  ports  dur- 
ing the  return  voyage. 

The  Gnpsholtn  carried  to  Barcelona  810  seri- 
ously sick  and  wounded  German  prisoners  of  war 
and  protected  personnel  and  90  German  civilians. 

The  exchange  was  made  possible  through  the 
kind  cooperation  of  the  Swiss  Government,  which 
provided  channels  of  communication  between  the 
belligerents  and  safeguarded  their  respective  in- 
terests, and  the  Spanish  Government,  which  made 
the  port  facilities  at  Barcelona  available  and  acted 
as  guarantor  of  the  actual  exchange.  Mr.  Emil 
Greuter  of  the  Swiss  Legation  in  Washington 
served  aboard  the  vessel  as  neutral  representative 
for  the  belligerents. 

The  United  States  Government  has  expressed 
its  appreciation  to  the  neutral  Governments  con- 
cerned for  the  parts  they  played  in  the  exchange. 

The  Gripsholm  likewise  carried  relief  supplies 
and  mail  for  prisoners  of  war  and  civilian 
internees. 


International  Conferences, 
Commissions,  Etc. 


UNITED  NATIONS  RELIEF  AND  REHABIL- 
ITATION ADMINISTRATION 

Statement  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State  ' 

[Released  to  the  press  June  5] 

The  success  of  the  UNRRA  will  be  placed  in 
grave  jeopardy,  and  military  operations  for  the 
liberation  of  Eurofje  may  be  unnecessarily  pro- 
longed, if  the  United  States  fails  to  provide — and 
to  provide  in  time — its  share  of  the  funds  necessary 
for  UNRRA's  operations. 

UNRRA  may  be  called  upon  to  begin  active 
operations  in  some  liberated  areas  within  the  cur- 
rent year.    How  rapidly  its  responsibilities  will 

'  Made  at  bis  press  and  radio  news  conference  on 
June  5,  1944. 


536 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


expand  in  scope  will  depend  on  military  develop- 
ments, which  no  one  can  foresee.  It  is,  however, 
essential  that  we  be  ready,  and  it  is  already  late. 

Eight  hundred  million  dollars  is  the  minimum 
contribution  by  the  United  States  necessary  to 
pi'ovide  for  the  first  six  months  of  active  opera- 
tions by  UNKRA.  The  $450,000,000  voted  by  the 
House  is  required  for  advance  procurement  of 
those  supplies  that  must  be  bought  ahead  of  time 
if  they  are  to  be  on  hand  when  they  are  needed. 
But  the  $350,000,000  which  is  in  transfer  authority 
which  the  House  did  not  approve  is  required  for 
other  supplies  equally  essential,  to  the  first  six 
months  of  active  relief  operations. 

This  $350,000,000  is  an  essential  part  of  the 
amount  needed  now  for  UNERA.  To  provide  for 
only  one  part  without  the  other  would  seriously 
prejudice  UNRRA's  operations. 

I  am  confident  that  the  Congress,  on  due  con- 
sideration of  what  is  at  stake,  will  reverse  this 
decision  and  that  the  appropriation  bill,  when  it 
is  finally  passed,  will  provide  the  full  amount  nec- 
essary for  UNRRA  to  undertake  the  responsibili- 
ties which  the  United  States  and  the  other  United 
and  Associated  Nations  have  assigned  to  it. 


American  Republics 


VISIT  OF  THE  EXECUTIVE  DIRECTOR  OF 
THE  NATIONAL  COUNCIL  OF  GEOGRAPHY 
OF  BRAZIL 

[Released  to  the  press  June  G] 

Dr.  Christovao  Leite  de  Castro,  Executive  Direc- 
tor of  the  National  Council  of  Geography  of  the 
Government  of  Brazil,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
at  the  invitation  of  the  Department  of  State.  For 
the  greater  part  of  his  two  months'  visit,  Dr.  Leite 
de  Castro  will  act  as  Visiting  Consultant  on  Bra- 
zilian Geography  at  the  Hispanic  Foundation  of 
the  Library  of  Congress.  Later  he  will  visit 
geographic  centers  and  manufacturers  of  geo- 
graphic material  throughout  the  country,  con- 
ferring with  technical  experts  and  acquiring  maps, 
instruments,  and  other  aids  for  the  use  of  his 
Government. 

Another  purpose  of  his  trip  is  to  discuss  with 
geogiaphers  the  second  consultation  of  the  Com- 


mittee on  Cartography  of  the  Pan  American  In- 
stitute of  Geography  and  History,  which  will  be 
held  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  in  August.  The  first  meet- 
ing took  place  in  Washington  last  October.  Dr. 
Leite  de  Castro  reports  that  the  Brazilian  Govern- 
ment is  extending  official  invitations  to  all  the 
American  republics  to  send  delegates  to  this 
meeting. 

RECOGNITION  BY  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF 
THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  ECUADOR 

[Released  to  the  press  June  G] 

The  Acting  Secretary  of  State.  Edward  R.  Stet- 
tinius,  Jr.,  announced  late  on  the  afternoon  of 
June  6  that  the  Government  of  the  United  States 
had  extended  full  recognition  to  the  Government 
of  Ecuador  which  is  now  organized  under  Dr.  Jose 
Alaria  Velasco  Ibarra. 

At  5  o'clock  p.  m.  on  June  6  the  American 
Ambassador  in  Quito  informed  the  new  Minister 
of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Ecuador  of  this  action  by 
the  Government  of  the  United  States.  It  is  under- 
stood that  many  other  American  republics  took 
simultaneous  action  in  granting  recognition,  fol- 
lowing consultation  and  exchange  of  information 
pursuant  to  resolution  22  of  the  Committee  for 
Political  Defense  at  Montevideo.^ 


The  Far  East 


RELIEF  SUPPLIES  FOR  ALLIED  NATIONALS 
INTERNED  IN  THE  FAR  EAST 

[Released  to  the  press  June  G] 

A  communication  from  the  Japanese  Govern- 
ment was  received  by  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment on  May  10, 194-4,  through  Swiss  Government 
channels,  in  which  the  Japanese  Government  of- 
fered to  send  to  a  Soviet  port  at  regular  intervals 
a  Japanese  ship  to  pick  up  relief  supplies  which 
were  shijiped  to  Vladivostok  last  fall — and  addi- 
tional relief  supplies  and  mail  intended  for  distri- 
bution to  Allied  nationals  interned  in  the  Far  East 
which  would  be  sent  subsequently  via  Soviet  terri- 
tory with  the  cooperation  of  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment— and  to  transport  them  to  Japan.  It  was,  of 
course,  necessary  to  consult  the  Soviet  Government 


'  Bulletin  of  Jau.  1,  1M4,  p.  20. 


JUNE    10,    1944 


537 


in  the  matter.  That  Government  has  kindly  ex- 
pressed its  willingness  to  cooperate  and  has  named 
a  convenient  Soviet  Pacific  port  adjacent  to  Vladi- 
vostok where  the  relief  supplies  already  on  Soviet 
territory  may  be  picked  up  by  a  Japanese  ship. 
The  Soviet  Government  has  suggested,  alterna- 
tively, that  these  supplies  might  be  sent  overland 
and  has  offered  to  deliver  them  to  the  Japanese 
authorities  at  a  convenient  border  railroad  station. 
The  Soviet  Government  has  also  named  an  equally 
accessible  port  where  such  mail  and  relief  supplies 
as  may  be  shipped  in  the  future  for  distribution  to 
Allied  nationals  in  Japanese  custody  may  be  picked 
up  by  Japanese  ships.  The  Japanese  Government 
has  been  informed  of  the  foregoing  through  the 
Swiss  Government,  and  it  is  hoped  that  in  the  near 
future  these  supplies  will  be  forwarded  and 
distributed. 

VISIT  OF  SCHOLARS  FROM  CHINA 

[Released  to  the  press  June  7] 

Six  Chinese  institutions  of  learning  have  been 
asked  by  the  Department  of  State  to  appoint 
members  of  their  staffs  to  represent  them  for  a 
year  in  the  United  States.  They  are  Nankai  Uni- 
versity, Peking  National  University,  Nanking 
University,  Lingnan  University,  National  Amoy 
University,  and  the  Academia  Sinica.  Five  of 
them  have  already  named  representatives  who  are 
expected  to  arrive  in  this  country  during  July, 

The  group  includes  a  botanist,  a  neurophysi- 
ologist,  a  sociologist,  a  specialist  in  Chinese  litera- 
ture, and  a  chemist  who  is  the  president  of  one  of 
China's  leading  universities.  All  five  have 
studied  in  this  country,  but  with  .one  exception 
they  have  not  been  here  since  1927. 

Dr.  S.  C.  (Hsu-ching)  Chen,  specialist  in  so- 
ciology and  culturology,  is  the  representative  se- 
'  lected  by  Nankai  University.  He  is  dean  of  the 
College  of  Law  and  Commerce  of  the  National 
Southwest  Associated  University,  of  which  Nankai 
is  a  constituent  part.  He  received  his  Ph.D.  at 
the  University  of  Illinois  in  1927  and  also  studied 
social  sciences  in  Germany  from  1929  to  1931.  Be- 
fore joining  the  staff  of  the  Nankai  Institute  of 
Economics  in  1934,  he  taught  for  several  years  at 
Lingnan  University.  He  served  as  research  di- 
rector of  the  Nankai  Institute  from  1935  to  1941. 

The  representative  of  the  National  University  of 
Peking  is  Dr.  Chen-sheng  Yang,  who  has  been  act- 


ing dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Literature  in 
the  absence  of  Dr.  Hu  Shih.^  Di\  Yang  studied 
psychology  and  education  at  Columbia,  Cornell, 
and  Harvard  from  1919  to  1923.  He  was  formerly 
president  of  National  Tsingtao  University.  His 
specialty  is  the  study  of  Chinese  literature,  and  he 
is  also  deeply  interested  in  Chinese  painting. 

Nanking  LTniversity  is  sending  its  president.  Dr. 
Y.  G.  (Yu-kuang)  Chen,  who  has,  in  addition  to 
his  professional  concern  with  university  adminis- 
tration and  education,  a  long-continued  interest  in 
chemistry  and  general  science,  the  field  of  his 
original  training.  He  studied  in  this  country  from 
1916  to  1922,  receiving  his  Ph.D.  degree  from 
Columbia  in  the  latter  year.  He  has  been  presi- 
dent of  his  university  since  1927.  He  hopes  to 
travel  to  various  American  educational  centers  to 
examine  American  educational  developments  dur- 
ing the  war  and  post-war  plans  for  educational 
programs  relating  to  applied  sciences. 

Lingnan  University  has  appointed  Dr.  Chi-tung 
Yung  of  the  College  of  Agriculture.  Dr.  Yung  is 
a  botanist  whose  special  interests  are  plant  mor- 
phology and  plant  anatomy.  After  receiving  his 
B.S.  at  Tsing  Hua  University  in  1929,  he  taught 
there  until  1935  when  he  came  to  this  country  for 
further  study  as  a  research  fellow  of  the  China 
Foundation.  He  received  his  Ph.D.  at  Cliicago  in 
1937.  He  has  been  at  Lingnan  since  1938.  In 
addition  to  being  a  scientist,  Dr.  Yung  is  an  accom- 
plished musician.  He  directs  the  orchestra  and 
choir  at  his  university.  During  his  visit  to  the 
United  States  he  hopes  to  travel  and  lecture  and 
to  have  the  opportunity  of  doing  further  botanic 
research. 

The  Academia  Sinica  will  send  Dr.  Ging-hsi 
"Wang,  the  director  of  its  Institute  of  Psychology 
in  Kweilin.  Dr.  Wang  is  particularly  interested 
in  physiological  psychology  and  neurophysiology. 
After  his  graduation  from  National  Peking  Uni- 
versity in  1919,  he  came  to 'this  country  to  study 
and  received  his  Ph.D.  at  Johns  Hopkins  Univer- 
sity ill  1923.  Subsequently  he  taught  psycho- 
biology  at  the  Johns  Hopkins  Medical  School  in 
the  years  1923-24  and  1925-27.  He  has  held  his 
present  position  since  1934.  He  hopes  to  spend 
much  of  his  time  in  this  country  in  physiological 
laboratories  learning  new  techniques  for  experi- 


'  Chinese  Ambassador  to  the  United  States,  1938-42. 


538 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


mental  research  on  the  physiology  of  the  central 
nervous  sj'stem. 

National  Araoy  University  has  not  yet  named  its 
representative.  This  university  is  still  in  Fukien 
province,  very  remote  from  Chungking.  Com- 
munications are  necessarily  delayed.  As  soon  as 
information  is  received,  the  professor  appointed 
by  this  university  will  be  announced. 

The  invitations  extended  for  the  year  1944-45 
continue  a  program  of  the  Department  under 
which  Professors  Y.  L.  Chin  (Tsinghua  Univer- 
sity), C.  Y.  Chang  (Chekiang  University),  N.  C. 
Liu  (Wuhan  University),  H.  T.  Fei  (Yunnan 
University),  T.  L.  Hsiao  (Szechuan  University), 
and  C.  Tsai  (National  Central  University)  spent 
the  past  year  in  this  country  as  representatives 
of  their  universities. 

It  is  expected  that  all  six  of  the  visiting  pro- 
fessors for  1944-45  will  wish  to  travel  widely  to 
American  educational  institutions  throughout  the 
country  and  will  be  glad  to  participate  in  confer- 
ences or  give  lectures.  Any  inquiries  or  invita- 
tions for  the  professors  should  be  addressed  to 
the  China  Section;  Science,  Education,  and  Art 
Division;  Department  of  State;  Washington  25, 
D.  C. 

WILLIS  C.  BARRETT  RETURNS  FROM 
CHINA 

[Released  to  the  press  June  9] 

Mr.  Willis  C.  Barrett  has  returned  from  China 
where  he  served  under  the  Department  of  State 
as  a  technical  adviser  to  the  National  Conserv- 
ancy Commission  of  the  Chinese  Government. 

Mr.  Barrett  had  had  10  years  of  engineering 
experience  in  China  between  1924  and  1935.  Dur- 
ing the  past  year  in  China  he  traveled  extensively 
inspecting  and  advising  on  irrigation  projects, 
canalization  and  training  of  rivers,  flood  control, 
and  conservation  of  water  for  irrigation  and 
power.  He  inspected  more  than  25  projects  in 
the  provinces  of  Szechuan,  Kansu,  Ningsia, 
Shensi,  and  Honan,  the  most  important  being  the 
control  of  the  flood  waters  of  the  Yellow  River 
and  a  post-war  plan  to  turn  the  Yellow  River 
back  into  its  old  cliannels.  Mr.  Barrett  was  ac- 
companied on  his  various  trips  by  officials  of  na- 
tional engineering  agencies  as  well  as  by  the  ap- 
propriate provincial  officials,  which  made  possi- 


ble on-the-spot  analyses  of  the  problems  involved 
in  each  project.  ^^ 

Mr.  Barrett  is  the  tenth  expert  to  complete  his 
assignment  under  the  Department  of  State's  cul- 
tural-relations program;  12  other  experts  are 
either  in  China  or  are  en  route  there  to  serve  the 
Chinese  Government. 


Europe 


RETURN  OF  THE  PRESIDENT'S  PERSONAL 
REPRESENTATIVE   TO   THE   VATICAN 

[Released  to  the  press  June  10] 

The  Acting  Secretary  of  State,  Edward  R.  Stet- 
tinius,  Jr.,  announced  on  June  10  that  at  the  re- 
quest of  the  President  the  Honorable  Myron  C. 
Taylor  had  been  asked  to  return  to  the  Vatican 
as  soon  as  possible  as  the  President's  Personal 
Representative. 

VISIT  TO  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  THE 
POLISH  PRIME  MINISTER 

[Released  to  tlie  press  June  5] 

The  following  statement  has  been  made  by  Act- 
ing Secretary  of  State  Stettinius : 

"On  the  invitation  of  this  Government,  the  Pol- 
ish Prime  Minister  is  arriving  in  Washington  to- 
day on  a  visit  of  courtesy,  his  first  trip  to  this 
country  since  his  assumption  of  the  Premiership. 
He  is  expected,  during  his  short  stay,  to  exchange 
views  with  the  President  and  other  American  offi- 
cials on  general  European  and  Polish  questions." 

[Released  to  the  press  June  5] 

His  Excellency  Stanislaw  Mikolajczyk,  Prime 
Minister  of  Poland,  arrived  in  Washington  June  5 
as  a  guest  of  this  Government  and  will  remain  in 
Washington  approximately  one  week. 

During  the  Prime  Minister's  stay  he  will  be  at 
Blair  House  and  will  be  given  a  dinner  by  the 
President  at  the  White  House  on  the  evening  of 
June  7.  The  Prime  Minister  will  also  be  given 
dinners  by  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State  on  the 
evening  of  June  8  and  by  the  Polish  Ambassador 
on  June  9. 

It  is  also  expected  that  the  Prime  Minister  will 
make  the  usual  visits  to  Mount  Vernon,  Arlington, 
and  the  Capitol. 


General 


THE  RESPONSIBILITY  OF  LABOR  IN  THE  POST-WAR  PERIOD 
Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle  ' 


[Released  to  the  press  June  6] 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen  :  It  is  always  a  privilege 
to  be  a  guest  at  your  conventions,  and  doubly  so 
to  be  a  guest  in  Boston,  where  I  was  born  and  which 
was  my  home  for  many  years.  It  was  my  rare 
good  fortune  to  work  with  members  and  officers 
of  this  union  in  many  struggles  in  the  public  inter- 
est— municipal,  State,  and  national.  They  have 
been  good  fights. 

But  there  is  every  indication  that  in  the  next  few 
yeai's  your  organization  and  others  like  it  will  i'ace 
the  most  difficult  and  challenging  period  in  the 
history  of  labor  organization.  To  that  subject  I 
want  to  speak. 

Wars  do  end,  and  this  one  will.  The  years 
which  follow  wai's  are  not  nice.  In  the  history  of 
the  United  States,  they  are  apt  to  be  pretty  bad. 
Living  and  working  through  them  takes  all  the 
strength  of  character  men  have. 


On  the  business  side,  the  pattern  is  fairly  fa- 
miliar. The  first  effect  of  peace  is  apt  to  be  an 
economic  explosion.  Unless  controlled,  it  means 
runaway  prices,  heavy  speculation,  and,  at  the  end 
of  a  few  months,  an  economic  smash.  This  comes 
because,  after  war,  people  want  to  buy  things  they 
could  not  get,  do  the  things  they  could  not  do.  But 
since  peacetime  production  is  still  short,  the  supply 
does  not  equal  the  "demand;  speculators  run  up 
prices;  trouble  sets  in.  You  remember  sugar  at 
30  cents  a  pound  in  1919. 

A  short  time  later,  the  short  boom  breaks  and 
there  is  depression  and  unemployment.  In  the 
past  this  has  happened  because  sufficient  provision 
was  not  made  for  returning  soldiers  and  for 
change-over  of  war  workers  to  peacetime  work. 
Men  who  are  afraid  their  jobs  will  not  last  do  not 
buy ;  manufacturers  who  do  not  think  they  can  sell 
do  not  put  their  plants  to  work. 


These  immediate  post-war  depressions  are  also 
apt  to  be  fairly  short,  though  this  is  not  sure. 
Usually  things  do  get  going;  accumulated  war  sav- 
ings begin  to  be  spent;  business  looks  up;  jobs 
become  more  plentiful.  Fairly  good  times  follow, 
lasting  for  several  years.  Traditionally,  it  used  to 
be  about  eight  years  from  the  low  of  the  post-war 
depression  to  the  top  of  the  next  crest. 

These  years  do  fairly  well  in  tei'ms  of  employ- 
ment and  business.  But  they  are  apt  to  be  accom- 
panied by  social  changes  which  are  not  good.  Post- 
war years  have  usually  seen  a  low  ebb  in  public 
and  political  life:  a  good  deal  of  corruption  and 
crookedness;  a  good  deal  of  bad  administration — 
local,  State,  and  national.  It  was  like  that  after 
the  Civil  War;  and  no  one  thinks  of  the  years 
following  the  first  World  War  with  any  pride.  Na- 
tional and  international  life  gets  slack  and  un- 
jDleasant;  business  brings  the  smart  operator  to  the 
fore;  the  solid,  constructive  forces  are  apt  to  be 
unheard. 

History  tells  that  the  latter  end  of  these  years  is 
likely  to  be  a  crazy,  speculative  boom — and  then,  a 
complete  crash,  lasting  for  years. 

My  suggestion  today  is  that  you  start  work  now 
to  avoid  this  pattern  of  bad  history. 

II 

Countries  which  go  through  the  post-war  prob- 
lems are  pretty  apt  to  blame  the  entire  mess  on 
their  leaders,  and  to  look  for  new  leaders  who  can 
bring  them  out  of  their  troubles.  In  European 
countries,  the  result  has  been  revolution  more  often 
than  not.  In  the  United  States,  it  has  been  the 
signal  for  a  general,  agitated  house-cleaning  on  all 
fronts:  business,  politics,  labor,  and  the  profes- 
sions.   Wlien  that  time  comes,  people  turn  to  men 


'  Delivered  before  the  session  of  the  Twenty-fifth  Conven- 
tion of  the  International  Ladies'  Garment  Workers'  Union 
at  Boston  on  June  6,  1944. 

838 


540 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


and  groups  tliey  think  they  can  trust,  to  organiza- 
tions which  have  kept  faith  with  the  public  and 
with  the  country.    Tlien,  character  counts. 

Your  trade-union  and  othei's  like  it  are  going  to 
have  to  live  through  those  post-war  years.  They 
are  going  to  have  a  good,  large  share  of  respon- 
sibility for  carrying  on  the  national  life  during 
that  period.  The  ti'ades-unions  are  now  one  of  the 
great  centers  of  concentrated  power  in  America. 
Because  of  that,  they  are  going  to  be  held,  in  part, 
responsible  by  the  public  for  what  happens. 

This  is  important.  In  the  1929  crash,  the  respon- 
sibility was  largely  borne  by  business  and  financial 
interests  which  had  struggled  for  power,  got  it, 
and  were  unable  to  use  it  well.  In  the  next  period, 
the  growth  of  labor  power  is  such  tliat  their  organ- 
izations and  leaders  will  also  be  asked,  "What  did 
you  do  about  it?  Wliat  part  have  you  had  in  all 
this?  What  have  you  done  to  help  the  situation?" 
This  is  inescapable.  In  democratic  life,  respon- 
sibility goes  with  power. 

in 

Your  organization  and  other  enlightened  unions 
have  been  well  advised  to  be  thinking,  now,  about 
your  future  plans.  These  will  have  to  fall  into 
two  main  categories:  plans  you  make  for  strictly 
labor  purposes ;  and  plans  you  make  in  the  general 
public  interest.  Both  subjects  have  to  be  con- 
sidered. Organized  labor  is  now  so  great  a  part 
of  American  industi'ial  life  that  it  can  no  longer 
represent  merely  a  labor  interest.  In  fact,  labor 
interest  indeed  can  only  be  in  a  healthy  condition 
when  all  other  interests,  public  and  private,  are 
on  a  sound  basis.  Your  membership  is,  actually, 
a  large  slice  of  the  public.  Perhaps  you  will  ex- 
cuse a  few  suggestions  from  an  old  friend. 

First,  do  everything  you  can  to  clear  out  and 
clean  up  any  bad  spots  in  labor  organization.  A 
few  days  ago  your  president,  Mr.  Dubinsky,  made 
the  just  observation  that  decentralization  was  no 
excuse  for  not  cleaning  up  racketeering  conditions, 
and  he  clearly  included  safeguarding  democratic 
union  administration.  This  union,  happily,  has 
an  excellent  record ;  and  it  deserves  the  support  of 
all  other  labor  organizations  in  its  clean-up  cam- 
paign. Whenever  a  racketeer  gets  a  strangle-hold 
on  a  union  local,  he  commits  a  crime  against  every 
union  member  in  the  United  States  because  he 
discredits  and  weakens  the  entire  labor  movement. 


This  is  a  specific  labor  interest,  but  you  will  find 
that  it  takes  you  into  the  wider  field  of  decent  local 
government.  Racketeers  cannot  exist  without  local 
political  help.  It  will  need  not  merely  resolutions 
at  conventions  but  active  support  of  the  forces 
of  clean  and  decent  government  in  the  cities  and 
towns  in  which  you  have  influence.  It  may  be 
added  that  you  will  need  the  strongest,  cleanest, 
and  most  efficient  local  government  you  can  hope 
to  create  for  other  purposes  besides  that  of  seeing 
that  both  labor  and  management  keep  themselves 
free  of  underworld  groups  which  from  time  to  tfrae 
like  to  masquerade  as  labor  leaders. 

This  means  work  and  lots  of  it.  Post-war  eras 
have  been  pretty  apt  to  develop  unclean  move- 
ments. Along  with  political  corruption  and  dis- 
orderly movements,  we  had  financial  racketeering 
of  the  Goulds  and  the  Fiskes  as  post-Civil-War 
products ;  and  these  were  paralleled  by  the  cor- 
porate and  financial  racketeering  and  by  the  gang- 
ster troubles  of  the  twenties. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  keep  your  own  organization 
clean,  but  it  is  not  enough.  There  were  financial 
people  who  said,  in  1932,  that  they  were  not  re- 
sponsible for  the  shocking  conditions  in  finance 
because,  though  they  knew  about  these  conditions, 
they  had  kept  clear  themselves.  The  public, 
cruelly  but  justly,  asked  whether  they  had  tried 
to  do  anything  about  it.  Now,  as  partners  in  in- 
dustrial power  the  labor  movement  will  be  held  to 
the  same  responsibility — and  it  can  and  must  avoid 
making  the  same  mistakes. 

Second,  I  hope  you  will  intensify  your  work  in 
the  field  of  technical  and  economic  research,  not 
only  in  the  specific  field  of  your  trade  but  in  the 
field  of  general  economic  reconstruction.  You  can 
command  the  best  talent  in  the  country.  You  have 
as  powerful  a  voice  as  any  in  formulating  the 
measures  which  must  be  taken  to  prevent  unem- 
ployment and  to  mitigate  or  prevent  business  up- 
sets of  past  post-war  eras.  Obviously,  neither  the 
garment  trade  nor  any  other  trade  will  prosper 
if  the  country  is  going  through  a  succession  of 
booms  and  slumps. 

This  is  going  to  call  for  new  and  original 
thinking.  As  far  as  I  can  see,  the  United  States 
is  almost  the  last  great  industrial  country  in  the 
world  to  stick  to  certain  classic  economic  ideas. 
Practically  everywhere  else,  business  and  eco- 
nomic life  will  be  organized  on  quite  different 


JUNE    10,    1944 


541 


lines.  This  obviously  is  true  of  Soviet  Russia  and 
apparently  will  be  true  of  most  of  the  Continent 
of  Europe.  We  do  not  yet  know  the  extent  of  in- 
dustrial reorganization  in  England,  but  there  is 
every  indication  that  the  British  economy  is  go- 
ing to  be  organized  with  the  primary  intention  of 
maintaining  full  employment.  My  own  opinion 
IS  that  no  government  in  the  United  States  will 
be  able  to  live  unless  it  likewise  tackles  and  solves 
this  problem  and  is  prepared  to  take  all  measures 
necessary  for  that  purpose.  But  there  are  all 
kinds  of  ways  of  attacking  the  problem.  Merely 
to  say,  "no  unemployment",  is  not  enough — for 
there  was  no  unemployment  in  Nazi  Germany  and 
the  system  was  as  evil  as  it  could  possibly  be. 
We  are  committed  to  preserving  private  initiative 
so  far  as  possible,  but  private  initiative  will  prob- 
ably have  to  be  supi:)lemented  by  Government  meas- 
ures. You  are  just  as  much  interested  in  a  con- 
tinuing and  growing  market  for  your  employer's 
goods  as  is  your  employer :  he  needs  it,  you  need 
it.  Where  is  it  coming  from?  You  know  that 
there  are  plenty  of  people  who  need  your  product, 
and  you  know  that  you  and  the  enterprises  for 
which  you  work  can  fill  that  need.  The  problem 
is  to  create  a  situation  so  that  the  people  who  do 
need  your  product  shall  be  able  to  buy  it. 

Third,  you  will  have  to  continue  and  perhaps 
intensify  the  splendid  efforts  you  have  already 
made  in  the  cause  of  world  organization 
and  world  peace.  Obviously,  no  plan  of  organi- 
zation and  no  economic  planning  can  be  successful 
if  the  entire  world,  after  the  war,  travels  again 
the  terrible  road  which  it  followed  between  the 
two  wars. 

It  is,  of  course,  for  governments  to  endeavor  to 
work  out  the  terms  of  world  organization.  But 
this,  in  a  sense,  is  paper  work.  No  organization 
or  set  of  international  agreements  means  anything 
unless  it  is  backed  by  the  solid  public  opinion  of 
its  respective  countries.  A  successful  search  for 
peace  will  be  almost  as  intense  as  the  effort  for 
victory.  Aggression  anywhere  means  eventual 
danger  to  the  United  States.  Indeed,  the  detail 
of  world  organization  is  less  important,  essen- 
tially, than  the  popular  force  behind  it.  The  in- 
stitutions created,  if  they  are  live,  will  learn  by 
their  mistakes  and  improve  their  structure  as  they 


go  along.    Institutions  which  have  not  the  breath 
of  popular  life  in  them  will  simply  decay. 

IV 

These,  as  it  seems  to  me,  are  the  three  essen- 
tials of  your  work :  a  clean  house,  sound  economic 
planning,  and  steady  support  of  the  active  insti- 
tutions of  peace. 

The  resources  of  the  United  States  in  time  of 
peace  as  well  as  in  war  are  so  vast  that  they  are 
not  even  known.  In  the  past  four  years  this 
country  has  been  able  to  support  the  economic 
burden  of  the  greatest  war  in  American  history 
and  at  the  same  time  to  provide  a  civilian  income 
about  equal  to  normal.  Plainly,  the  country  is 
capable  of  liberating  production  sufficient  almost 
to  double  the  pre-war  standard  of  living  of  every- 
one in  this  country,  so  far  as  material  things  go. 
Plainly,  also,  it  has  not  yet  found  the  means  of 
doing  this.  You  and  your  colleagues  are  one  of 
the  groups  to  which  the  country  must  look  in 
charting  its  eventual  course.  You  will  have  diffi- 
culties and  troubles  and  disillusionments  as  you 
go  forward.  But  you  will  find,  year  by  year,  that 
character  in  the  long  run  brings  with  it  the  public 
confidence;  that  sound  thinking  eventually  tri- 
umphs; and  that,  as  your  work  continues,  your 
strength  will  increase. 

PRESENTATION  OF  LEGION  OF  MERIT 
MEDALS 

[Released  to  the  press  June  0] 

In  the  presence  of  representatives  of  the  War 
and  Navy  Departments,  the  Acting  Secretary  of 
State,  on  behalf  of  this  Government,  presented  on 
June  9  to  the  Minister  of  Denmark,  the  Honorable 
Henrik  de  Kauffmann,  the  Legion  of  Merit  medals 
and  their  citations  which  have  been  awarded  with 
the  approval  of  the  President  to  Captain  lb  Poul- 
sen.  Corporal  Marius  Jensen,  and,  posthumously, 
to  Patrolman  Eli  Knudsen  for  exceptionally  meri- 
torious conduct  in  the  performance  of  outstanding 
services  as  members  of  the  Northwest  Greenland 
Sledge  Patrol  operating  in  collaboration  with  the 
Greenland  Base  Command,  United  States  Army. 

As  has  previously  been  announced,  a  German 
base  in  Greenland  was  discovered  early  in  1913  by 
a  Sledge  Patrol  group.    The  patrol  was  attacked 


540 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


and  groups  they  think  they  can  trust,  to  organiza- 
tions which  have  kept  faith  with  the  public  and 
with  the  country.    Then,  character  counts. 

Your  trade-union  and  others  like  it  are  going  to 
have  to  live  through  those  post-war  years.  They 
are  going  to  liave  a  good,  large  share  of  respon- 
sibility for  carrying  on  the  national  life  during 
that  period.  Tlie  trades-unions  are  now  one  of  tlie 
great  centers  of  concentrated  power  in  America. 
Because  of  that,  they  are  going  to  be  held,  in  part, 
responsible  by  the  public  for  what  happens. 

This  is  important.  In  tlie  1929  crash,  the  respon- 
sibility was  largely  borne  by  business  and  financial 
interests  which  had  struggled  for  power,  got  it, 
and  were  unable  to  use  it  well.  In  the  next  period, 
the  growth  of  labor  power  is  such  that  their  organ- 
izations and  leaders  will  also  be  asked,  "AVhat  did 
you  do  about  it?  Wliat  part  have  you  had  in  all 
this  ?  What  have  you  done  to  help  the  situation  ?" 
This  is  inescapable.  In  democratic  life,  respon- 
sibility goes  with  power. 

in 

Your  organization  and  other  enlightened  unions 
have  been  well  advised  to  be  thinking,  now,  about 
your  future  plans.  These  will  have  to  fall  into 
two  main  categories :  plans  you  make  for  strictly 
labor  purposes ;  and  plans  you  make  in  the  general 
public  interest.  Both  subjects  have  to  be  con- 
sidered. Organized  labor  is  now  so  great  a  part 
of  American  industrial  life  that  it  can  no  longer 
represent  merely  a  labor  interest.  In  fact,  labor 
interest  indeed  can  only  be  in  a  healthy  condition 
when  all  other  interests,  public  and  private,  are 
on  a  sound  basis.  Your  membership  is,  actually, 
a  large  slice  of  the  public.  Perhaps  you  will  ex- 
cuse a  few  suggestions  from  an  old  friend. 

First,  do  everything  you  can  to  clear  out  and 
clean  up  any  bad  spots  in  labor  organization.  A 
few  days  ago  your  president,  Mr.  Dubinsky,  made 
the  just  observation  that  decentralization  was  no 
excuse  for  not  cleaning  up  racketeering  conditions, 
and  he  clearly  included  safeguarding  democratic 
union  administration.  This  union,  happily,  has 
an  excellent  record ;  and  it  deserves  the  support  of 
all  other  labor  organizations  in  its  clean-up  cam- 
paign. Whenever  a  racketeer  gets  a  strangle-hold 
on  a  union  local,  he  commits  a  crime  against  every 
union  member  in  the  United  States  because  he 
discredits  and  weakens  the  entire  labor  movement. 


This  is  a  specific  labor  interest,  but  you  will  find 
that  it  takes  you  into  the  wider  field  of  decent  local 
government.  Racketeers  cannot  exist  without  local 
political  help.  It  will  need  not  merely  resolutions 
at  conventions  but  active  support  of  the  forces 
of  clean  and  decent  govei'nment  in  the  cities  and 
towns  in  whicli  you  have  influence.  It  may  be 
added  that  you  will  need  the  strongest,  cleanest, 
and  most  efficient  local  government  you  can  hope 
to  create  for  other  purposes  besides  that  of  seeing 
that  botli  labor  and  management  keep  themselves 
free  of  underworld  groups  which  from  time  to  tfme 
like  to  masquerade  as  labor  leaders. 

This  means  work  and  lots  of  it.  Post-war  eras 
have  been  pretty  apt  to  develop  unclean  move- 
ments. Along  witli  political  corruption  and  dis- 
orderly movements,  we  had  financial  racketeering 
of  the  Goulds  and  the  Fiskes  as  post-Civil-War 
products ;  and  these  were  paralleled  by  the  cor-  , 
porate  and  financial  racketeering  and  by  the  gang- 
ster troubles  of  the  twenties. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  keep  your  own  organization 
clean,  but  it  is  not  enough.  There  were  financial 
people  who  said,  in  1932,  that  they  were  not  re- 
sponsible for  the  shocking  conditions  in  finance 
because,  though  they  knew  about  these  conditions, 
they  had  kept  clear  themselves.  The  public, 
cruelly  but  justly,  asked  whether  they  had  tried 
to  do  anything  about  it.  Now,  as  partners  in  in- 
dustrial power  the  labor  movement  will  be  held  to 
the  same  responsibility — and  it  can  and  must  avoid 
making  the  same  mistakes. 

Second,  I  hope  you  will  intensify  your  work  in  i 
the  field  of  technical  and  economic  research,  not 
only  in  the  specific  field  of  your  trade  but  in  the 
field  of  general  economic  reconstruction.  You  can 
command  the  best  talent  in  the  country.  You  have 
as  powerful  a  voice  as  any  in  formulating  the 
measures  which  must  be  taken  to  prevent  unem- 
ployment and  to  mitigate  or  prevent  business  up- 
sets of  past  post-war  eras.  Obviously,  neither  the 
garment  trade  nor  any  other  trade  will  prosper 
if  the  country  is  going  through  a  succession  of 
booms  and  slumps. 

This  is  going  to  call  for  new  and  original 
thinking.  As  far  as  I  can  see,  the  United  States 
is  almost  the  last  great  industrial  country  in  the 
world  to  stick  to  certain  classic  economic  ideas., 
Practically  everywhere  else,  business  and  eco- 
nomic life  will  De  organized  on  quite  different 


JUNE    10,    1944 


541 


lines.  This  obviously  is  true  of  Soviet  Russia  and 
appai'ently  will  be  true  of  most  of  the  Continent 
of  Europe.  We  do  not  yet  know  the  extent  of  in- 
dustrial reorganization  in  England,  but  there  is 
every  indication  that  the  British  economy  is  go- 
ing to  be  organized  with  the  primary  intention  of 
maintaining  full  employment.  My  own  opinion 
is  that  no  government  in  the  United  States  will 
be  able  to  live  unless  it  likewise  tackles  and  solves 
this  problem  and  is  prepared  to  take  all  measures 
necessary  for  that  purpose.  But  there  are  all 
kinds  of  ways  of  attacking  the  problem.  Merely 
to  say,  "no  unemployment",  is  not  enough — for 
there  was  no  unemployment  in  Nazi  Germany  and 
the  system  was  as  evil  as  it  could  possibly  be. 
We  are  committed  to  preserving  private  initiative 
so  far  as  possible,  but  private  initiative  will  prob- 
ably have  to  be  supplemented  by  Government  meas- 
ures. You  are  just  as  much  interested  in  a  con- 
tinuing and  growing  market  for  your  employer's 
goods  as  is  your  employer:  he  needs  it,  you  need 
it.  Where  is  it  coming  from?  You  know  that 
there  are  plenty  of  people  who  need  your  product, 
and  you  know  that  you  and  the  enterprises  for 
which  you  work  can  fill  that  need.  The  problem 
is  to  create  a  situation  so  that  the  people  who  do 
need  your  product  shall  be  able  to  buy  it. 

Third,  you  will  have  to  continue  and  perhaps 
intensify  the  splendid  efforts  you  have  already 
made  in  the  cause  of  world  organization 
and  world  peace.  Obviously,  no  plan  of  organi- 
zation and  no  economic  planning  can  be  successful 
if  the  entire  world,  after  the  war,  travels  again 
the  terrible  road  which  it  followed  between  the 
two  wars. 

It  is,  of  course,  for  governments  to  endeavor  to 
work  out  the  terms  of  world  organization.  But 
this,  in  a  sense,  is  paper  work.  No  organization 
or  set  of  international  agreements  means  anything 
unless  it  is  backed  by  the  solid  public  opinion  of 
its  respective  countries.  A  successful  search  for 
peace  will  be  almost  as  intense  as  the  effort  for 
victory.  Aggression  anywhere  means  eventual 
danger  to  the  United  States.  Indeed,  the  detail 
of  world  organization  is  less  important,  essen- 
tially, than  the  popular  force  behind  it.  The  in- 
stitutions created,  if  they  are  live,  will  learn  by 
their  mistakes  and  improve  their  structure  as  they 


go  along.    Institutions  which  have  not  the  breath 
of  popular  life  in  them  will  simply  decay. 

IV 

These,  as  it  seems  to  me,  are  the  three  essen- 
tials of  your  work :  a  clean  house,  sound  economic 
planning,  and  steady  support  of  the  active  insti- 
tutions of  peace. 

The  resources  of  the  United  States  in  time  of 
peace  as  well  as  in  war  are  so  vast  that  they  are 
not  even  known.  In  the  past  four  years  this 
country  has  been  able  to  support  the  economic 
burden  of  the  greatest  war  in  American  history 
and  at  the  same  time  to  provide  a  civilian  income 
about  equal  to  normal.  Plainly,  the  country  is 
capable  of  liberating  production  sufficient  almost 
to  double  the  pre-war  standard  of  living  of  every- 
one in  this  country,  so  far  as  material  things  go. 
Plainly,  also,  it  has  not  yet  found  the  means  of 
doing  this.  You  and  your  colleagues  are  one  of 
the  groups  to  which  the  country  must  look  in 
charting  its  eventual  course.  You  will  have  diffi- 
culties and  troubles  and  disillusionments  as  you 
go  forward.  But  you  will  find,  year  by  year,  that 
character  in  the  long  run  brings  with  it  the  public 
confidence;  that  sound  thinking  eventually  tri- 
umphs; and  that,  as  your  work  continues,  your 
sti'ength  will  increase. 

PRESENTATION  OF  LEGION  OF  MERIT 
MEDALS 

[Released  to  the  press  June  0] 

In  the  presence  of  representatives  of  the  War 
and  Navy  Departments,  the  Acting  Secretary  of 
State,  on  behalf  of  this  Government,  presented  on 
June  9  to  the  Minister  of  Denmark,  the  Honorable 
Henrik  de  Kauffmann,  the  Legion  of  Merit  medals 
and  their  citations  which  have  been  awarded  with 
the  approval  of  the  President  to  Captain  lb  Poul- 
sen,  Corporal  Marius  Jensen,  and,  posthumously, 
to  Patrolman  Eli  Knudsen  for  exceptionally  meri- 
torious conduct  in  the  performance  of  outstanding 
services  as  members  of  the  Northwest  Greenland 
Sledge  Patrol  operating  in  collaboration  with  the 
Greenland  Base  Command,  United  States  Army. 

As  has  previously  been  announced,  a  German 
base  in  Greenland  was  discovered  early  in  1913  by 
a  Sledge  Patrol  group.    The  patrol  was  attacked 


542 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


by  the  Germans  but  managed  to  report  its  discov- 
ery to  the  American  military  authorities. 

The  follo\vin<r  remarks  were  made  by  the  Hon- 
orable Edward  11.  Stettinius,  Jr.,  Acting  Secretary 
of  State,  to  the  Honorable  Henrik  de  Kauffmann, 
Minister  of  Denmark : 

"Mr.  Minister:  It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to 
present  to  you  on  behalf  of  this  Government  the 
Legion  of  Merit  Medals  and  their  citations  which 
have  been  awarded  with  the  approval  of  the  Presi- 
dent to  aptain  lb  Poulsen,  Corporal  Manus  Jen- 
sen, and,  posthumously,  to  Patrolman  Eli  Knudsen 
for  exceptionally  meritorious  conduct  in  the  per- 
formance of  outstanding  service  as  members  of  the 
Northwest  Greenland  Sledge  Patrol  operating  in 
collaboration  with  the  Greenland  Base  Command, 
United  States  Army.  Not  only  did  these  men  fight 
valiantly  in  defense  of  this  colony  of  Denmark  but 
also  one  made  the  supreme  sacrifice  for  his  country. 
Their  example  is  an  inspiration  to  their  fellow 
countrjmien  who  suffer  under  the  heel  of  the  Ger- 
man oppressor." 

The  reply  of  the  Minister  of  Denmark  follows : 

"I  want  to  thank  you,  Mr.  Secretary,  for  the 
words  you  have  just  addressed  to  me  and  for  the 
three  decorations  that  you  have  handed  to  me  to 
be  transmitted  to  two  of  my  countrymen  and  to 
the  family  of  a  Dane  who  died  doing  his  duty.  I 
shall  turn  these  over,  at  the  same  time  informing 
my  countrymen  of  what  you  said. 

"You  know  how  all  Danes  feel.  Every  Dane, 
whether  he  is  at  home  or  abroad,  and  whatever  his 
position  in  life  is — whether  he  is  in  the  armed 
forces,  on  the  seas,  at  home  in  Denmark  working 
one  way  or  the  other — has  one  aim:  to  do  his 
utmost  to  help  win  the  war  and  defeat  our  com- 
mon enemy. 

"That  is  why  the  three  decorations  you  have  just 
handed  me  will  not  only  bring  happiness  to  the 
people  directly  concerned  but  also  to  every  Dane. 
I  want  to  thank  you  on  behalf  of  Denmark." 

AMERICAN  MEXICAN  CLAIMS  COMMISSION 

[Released  to  the  press  June  G] 

John  Maktos  was  appointed  recently  General 
Counsel  of  the  American  Mexican  Claims  Com- 
mission.' 


Mr.  Maktos,  a  member  of  the  bars  of  the  Dis- 
trict of  Columbia  and  of  Michigan,  received  three 
degrees  from  Harvard  University :  Bachelor  of 
Arts  in  1923,  Bachelor  of  Law  in  1926,  and  Doctor 
of  Juridical  Science  in  1929.  From  1926  to  1928 
he  pursued  post-graduate  law  studies  at  Oxford 
University.  He  has  been  awarded  the  Carnegie 
Fellowship  in  International  Law  and  the  Hyman 
Fellowship  in  International  Law. 

From  the  time  of  his  graduation  until  his  ap- 
pointment as  General  Counsel,  Mr.  Maktos  was 
in  the  service  of  the  Department  of  State.  He 
was  Assistant  Legal  Adviser  until  1941,  when 
he  was  appointed  chairman  of  Interdepartmental 
Visa  Review  Committee  C.  The  Committee's 
function  was  to  pass  on  the  admissibility  of  aliens 
into  the  United  States.  Upon  the  completion  of 
the  Committee's  work  in  1943  he  was  appointed 
principal  divisional  assistant  in  the  Division  of 
International  Security  and  Organization,  a  posi- 
tion which  he  held  until  the  assumption  of  his 
present  office.  While  Assistant  Legal  Adviser 
he  acted  as  assistant  counsel  for  the  Government 
in  the  arbitration  of  the  claim  of  the  United 
States  on  behalf  of  P.  W.  Shufeldt  against  Guate- 
mala and  as  Legal  Assistant  to  the  American 
Connuissioner  in  the  settlement  of  the  claims  of 
the  United  States  against  Turkey. 

Mr.  Maktos  succeeds  Edwin  D.  Dickinson, 
formerly  Dean  of  the  School  of  Jurisprudence  at 
the  University  of  California,  as  General  Counsel. 

The  American  Mexican  Claims  Commission 
consists  of  Edgar  E.  Witt  of  Texas,  chairman, 
Samuel  M.  Gold  of  New  York,  and  Charles  F. 
McLaughlin  of  Nebraska.  It  was  established 
under  the  act  of  Congress  known  as  the  "Settle- 
ment of  Mexican  Claims  Act  of  1942."  The  Com- 
mission's functions  are  to  determine  the  merits 
of  claims  of  the  United  States  against  Mexico  en- 
titled to  participate  in  the  distribution  of  a  lump 
sum  of  $40,000,OCO  which  the  Government  of 
Mexico  agreed  to  pay  to  the  United  States  in 
settlement  of  certain  claims.  The  cases  grow  out 
of  expropriation  of  lands  and  mines,  confiscation 
or  destruction  of  personal  property,  personal  in- 
juries, and  alleged  denial  of  justice. 

'Bulletin  of  May  8,  1943,  p.  420,  and  May  22,  IMS, 
p.  457. 


JUNE    10,    1944 


543 


Treaty  Information 


DOUBLE-TAXATION  CONVENTION  WITH 
CANADA 

[Released  to  the  press  June  9] 

A  convention  between  the  United  States  and 
Canada  for  the  avoidance  of  double  taxation  and 
the  jjrevention  of  fiscal  evasion  in  the  case  of  estate 
taxes  and  succession  duties  was  signed  on  June  8 
by  the  Honorable  Ray  Atherton,  American  Am- 
bassador in  Ottawa,  for  the  United  States,  and  by 
the  Eight  Honorable  William  Lyon  Mackenzie 
King,  C.M.G.,  Prime  Minister,  President  of  the 
Privy  Council,  Secretary  of  State  for  External 
Affairs,  and  the  Honorable  Colin  William  George 
Gibson,  K.O.,  M.C.,  V.D.,  Minister  of  National 
Revenue,  for  Canada. 

The  convention  has  for  its  principal  purpose 
the  elimination,  in  so  far  as  practicable,  of  double 
taxation  which  otherwise  would  result  from  the 
application  to  the  same  estate  or  succession  of  both 
Federal  estate  taxes  and  Dominion  succession 
duties.  The  convention  also  contains  provisions 
relating  to  mutual  administrative  assistance 
through  the  exchange  of  infoi-mation,  with  a  view 
to  discouraging  tax  evasion.  The  application  of 
the  convention  extends  only  to  estate  taxes  imposed 
by  the  Federal  Government  and  succession  duties 
imposed  by  tlie  Dominion  Government,  and  does 
not  extend  to  the  imposition  and  collection  of  taxes 
by  political  subdivisions — that  is,  by  States  of  the 
United  States  or  Provinces  of  Canada. 

The  principal  provisions  of  the  convention,  in 
their  aiD25li<^'ation  to  double  taxation  affecting  es- 
tates or  successions,  parallel  in  certain  respects  the 
principal  provisions  of  the  convention  and  proto- 
col now  in  force  between  the  United  States  and 
Canada  providing  for  the  avoidance  of  double  tax- 
ation and  prevention  of  fiscal  evasion  in  the  case 
of  income  taxes,  signed  in  Washington  on  March  4, 
1942,  which  by  its  terms  became  effective  as  of 
January  1,  IMU 

It  is  provided  in  article  XIV  of  the  convention 
signed  in  Ottawa  that  the  convention  shall  be  rati- 
fied and  the  instruments  of  ratification  shall  be 


exchanged.  In  the  event  of  such  an  exchange  of 
instruments  of  ratification,  the  convention  shall  be 
deemed  to  have  come  into  effect  on  June  14,  1911, 
which  date  coincides  with  the  date  on  which  the 
Dominion  Succession  Duty  Act  went  into  effect, 
and  shall  continue  in  effect  for  a  period  of  five 
years  from  that  date  and  indefinitely  after  that 
period,  but  may  be  terminated  by  either  Govern- 
ment at  the  end  of  the  five-year  period  or  at  any 
time  thereafter  provided  that  at  least  six  months 
prior  notice  of  termination  has  been  given. 

INTERNATIONAL  OPIUM  CONVENTION 

Afghanistan 

The  American  Embassy  near  the  Netherlands 
Govermnent  at  London  reported  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  by  a  despatch  of  May  17,  1944,  that 
the  Netherlands  Government  had  stated  in  a  note 
dated  May  9,  1944,  that  it  had  received  on  May  5, 
1944,  notification  from  the  Government  of  Afghan- 
istan of  the  adherence  of  Afghanistan  to  the  In- 
ternational Opium  Convention  which  was  signed 
at  The  Hague  January  23,  1912  (Treaty  Series 
612),  effective  as  from  May  5, 1944. 


The  Department 


TRANSFER  OF  FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  SECRE- 
TARY'S LIAISON  OFFICE  TO  THE  DIVISION 
OF  FOREIGN  ACTIVITY  CORRELATION 

Departmental  Order  1277  of  June  7,  1944  = 

Purpose.  In  order  to  centralize  further  the  De- 
partment's liaison  activities  with  the  War  and 
Navy  Departments,  the  functions  now  performed 
by  the  Secretary's  Liaison  Office  are  hereby  trans- 
ferred to  the  Division  of  Foreign  Activity  Correla- 
tion. The  Secretary's  Liaison  Office  is  hereby 
abolished. 

1  Transfer  of  personnel.  Personnel  presently 
assigned  to  the  Secretary's  Liaison  Office  are 
hereby  transferred  to  the  Division  of  Foreign  Ac- 
tivity Correlation. 

'  Treaty  Series  G83;  56  Stat.  1399. 
^  Effective  June  7,  1944. 


544 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


2  Routing  symbol.  The  symbol  of  the  Divi- 
sion of  Foreign  Activity  Correlation  will  remain 
FC.  Correspondence  pertaining  specifically  to 
War-Navy  Liaison  matters  should  be  marked 
FC/L. 

3  Previous  orders  amended  or  superseded. 
This  order  amends  Departmental  Order  825,  and 
the  appended  Departmental  Memorandum,  dated 
November  3,  1939,  describing  the  functions  of  the 
Liaison  Office  (then  attached  to  the  Office  of  the 
Under  Secretary) ;  and  page  3  (Section  5,  relating 
to  the  Office  of  the  Secretary)  and  page  9  (Section 
4,  relating  to  the  Division  of  Foreign  Activity 
Correlation)  of  Department  Order  1218,  dated 
January  15,  1944.  This  order  supersedes  Depart- 
mental Order  1255,  dated  April  10,  1944;  the 
pertinent  portion  of  the  Administrative  Instruc- 
tion dated  March  6,  1944 ;  and  Departmental  Des- 
ignation 15,  dated  May  31, 1944. 

E.  R.  Stettinius,  Jr., 
Acting  Secretary  of  State. 
June  7, 1944. 

RUBBER  ADVISORY  PANEL 

[Released  to  the  press  June  6] 

The  following  members  will  be  on  the  Rubber 
Advisory  Panel  which  was  established  to  serve 
in  a  consultative  capacity  to  the  Department  on 
matters  relating  to  rubber  and  rubber  substitutes 
and  to  advise  on  technical  matters : 

F.  B.  Davis,  Jr.,  chairman.  United  States  Rubber  Co. 

Stuart  Hotchliiss,  chairman,  Cambridge  Rubber  Co. 

L.  R.  Jackson,  executive  vice  president,  Firestone  Tire 
&  Rubber  Co. 

P.  Litchfield,  chairman,  Goodyear  Tire  &  Rubber  Co. 

Harry  E.  Smith,  general  manager,  Manhattan  Rubber 
Manufacturing  Division,   Raybestos-Manhattan,    Inc. 

A.  L.  Viles,  president.  Rubber  Manufacturers  Assn.,  Inc. 

John  L.  CoUyer,  president,  B.  F.  Goodrich  Co. 

J.  W.  Bicknell,  executive  vice  president,  Rubber  Develop- 
ment Corp. 

William  L.  Batt,  vice  chairman.  War  Production  Board. 

H.  J.  Klossner,  president.  Rubber  Reserve  Co. 

L.  D.  Tompkins,  deputy  rubber  director.  War  Production 
Board. 

R.  D.  Young,  president.  Rubber  Trade  Assn. 


APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  16,  issued  June 
3, 1944,  effective  June  3, 1944,  the  Acting  Secretary 
of  State,  pursuant  to  the  provisions  of  Depart- 
mental Order  1275  establishing  the  position  of 
Assistant  Security  Officer,  designated  Comdr.  Lee 
W.  Parke,  U.S.N.,  as  Assistant  Security  Officer  in 
the  Office  of  the  Assistant  Secretary  and  Security 
Officer,  Mr.  Shaw.  By  the  same  Departmental 
Designation,  the  Acting  Secretary  of  State  desig- 
nated Mr.  David  A.  Salmon  as  Consultant  on 
Cryptography  in  the  Office  of  the  Assistant  Secre- 
tary, Mr.  Shaw. 

By  Departmental  Designation  19,  issued  June  8, 
1944,  effective  June  8,  1944,  the  Acting  Secretary 
of  State  designated  Mr.  E.  Wilder  Spaulding  as 
Chief  of  the  Division  of  Research  and  Publication. 


Legislation 


Twenty-sixth  Conference  of  the  International  Labor 
Organization  :  Message  from  the  President  of  the  United 
States  transmitting  Recommendations  of  the  Twenty- 
sixth  Conference  of  the  International  Labor  Organi- 
zation.    H.  Doc.  621,  78th  Cong.     14  pp. 

Certain  Officers  and  Employees  of  the  Foreign  Service  of 
the  United  States:  Message  from  the  President  of  the 
United  States  transmitting  Report  from  the  Secretary 
of  State  with  Reference  to  the  Enactment  of  Legislation 
for  the  Sum  of  $90,130.91  for  the  Rslief  of  Certain  Offi- 
cers and  Employees  of  the  Foreign  Service  of  the 
United  States.     H.  Doc.  622,  7Sth  Cong.     22  pp. 

Digest  of  Legislation  Enacted  by  the  Seventy-eighth  Con- 
gress, First  Session,  Together  With  a  Preliminary 
Statement  Relative  Thereto.  S.  Doc.  195,  78th  Cong. 
12  pp. 

National  War  Agencies  Appropriation  Bill  for  1945: 
.  Hearings  Before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee 
on  Appropriations,  House  of  Representatives,  78th  Cong., 
2d  sess.,  on  the  National  War  Agencies  Appropriation 
Bill  for  1945.  Part  I,  lOSO  pp.  [Department  of  State 
activities  In  connection  with  the  Office  of  Coordinator 
of  Inter-American  Affairs,  p.  1002].  Part  IL  732  pp. 
[Department  of  State  activities  in  connection  with  the 
Office  of  War  Information,  p.  333,  and  in  connection 
with  the  Office  of  Strategic  Services,  p.  351] 


JUNE    10,    1944 


545 


Foreign  Economic  Administration  Appropriation  Bill  for 
1945:  Hearings  Before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Appropriations,  House  of  Representatives,  78th 
Cong.,  2(3  sess.,  on  the  Foreign  Economic  Admiiiistratiou 
Appropriation  Bill  for  1945.  475  pp.  [Department  o£ 
State,  pp.  244,  281,  402.] 

Foreign  Economic  Administration  Appropriation  Bill, 
1945 — Including  Defense  Aid  (Lend-Lease)  and  Par- 
ticipation by  tlie  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 
Belief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration.  H.  Kept. 
1591,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4937.  [Favorable  report] 
28  pp. 

Department  of  State  Appropriation  Bill  for  1945 :  Hearings 
before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on  Appropri- 
ations, House  of  Representatives,  78th  Cong.,  2d  sess.,  on 


the  Department  of  State  Appropriation  Bill  for  1945. 
326  pp. 

Departments  of  State,  Justice,  and  Commerce  Appropria- 
tion Bill,  1945.  H.  Kept  1599,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4204. 
3  pp. 

Alaskan  International  Highvray  Commission.  H.  Rept. 
1603,  7Sth  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4625.  [Favorable  report.] 
Ip. 

Implementing  the  Jurisdiction  of  Service  Courts  of 
Friendly  Foreign  Forces.  S.  Rept.  956,  78th  Cong.,  on 
H.R.  3241.     [Favorable  report.]     7  pp. 

Requesting  the  President  To  Limit  Production  of  Opium  to 
Amounts  Required  for  Medical  Purposes.  S.  Rept.  957, 
78th  Cong.,  on  H.  J.  Res.  241.     [Favorable  report.]     2  pp. 


Publications 


Department  of  State 

Cultural-Cooperation  Program  of  the  Department  of  State: 
Address  by  G.  Howland  Shaw,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
State,  at  the  Loyola  University  Forum,  New  Orleans, 
La.,  May  8, 1944.     Publication  2130.     14  pp.     5(#. 

Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Effected  by  ex- 
change of  notes  signed  at  Washington  March  14,  1942. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  372.  Publication  2063.  3 
pp.     50. 

Importation  Privileges  for  Government  Officials  and  Em- 
ployees :  Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of  Amer- 
ica and  Canada — Effected  by  exchanges  of  notes  signed 
at  Ottawa  July  21,  October  29,  and  November  9,  1942. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  3S3.  Publication  2124.  3 
pp.     50. 


Other  Government  Agencies 

"Guatemala's  Market  for  Organic  Chemicals",  by  Kathleen 
Molesworth,  Assistant  Commercial  Attach^  at  Guate- 
mala City. 

"India's  Sugar  Industry  Today",  by  Charles  E.  Brookhart, 
Consul  at  Calcutta,  in  collaboration  with  Alice  J.  Mullen 
of  the  Industrial  Projects  Unit,  Bureau  of  Foreign  and 
Domestic  Commerce. 

These  articles  will  be  found  in  the  June  10, 1944 
issue  of  Foreign  Commerce  Weekly.  Copies  of 
this  periodical,  which  is  issued  by  the  Department 
of  Commerce,  may  be  obtained  from  the  Superin- 
tendent of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Of- 
fice, for  10  cents  each. 


U.   S.  GOVERNMENT  PRINTINS  OFFICE!  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  TrintlnK  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Trice,  10  cents   -   -   .   -    Subscription  price,  $2.75  a  year 

PDBLISHED  WEEKLY  WITH  THE  APPBOVAL  OF  THE  DIBECTOS  OV  THE  BCIiEAO  OV  THE  BUDGET 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BIJ 


J 


J 


ETIN 


JUNE  17,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  260— Publication  2145 


C 


ontents 


The  War  Page 

Allied  Military  Operations  in  Europe: 

Report  by  General  Eisenhower  to  the  President   .    .       549 
Acknowledgments  by  President  Roosevelt  of  Mes- 
sages  From   Various   Officials    of    the   United 

Nations 549 

Messages  Exchanged  Between  the  Prime  Minister 

of  Greece  and  the  Secretary  of  State 552 

Post-War  Security  Organization  Program:  Statement 

by  the  President 552 

Removal  of  European  Refugees  to  the  United  States: 

Message  of  the  President  to  the  Congress   ....       553 

General 

Opportunities  for  Women  in  the  Conduct  of  Inter- 
national Relations:  Address  by  Assistant  Secretary 
Shaw 555 

Iceland 

Independence  of  the  Republic  of  Iceland: 

Messages  of  President  Roosevelt  to  the  President  of 
Iceland  and  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the 

Minister  of  Foreign  Aflairs 557 

Address  by  the  Honorable  Louis  G.  Dreyfus,  Jr.    .    .'      557 
The  Icelandic  Independence  Movement:  By  William 

C.   Trimble 559 

Presentation  of  Letters  of  Credence   by   the  United 

States  Minister  to  Iceland 563 

[over] 


•^^L  25  1944 


C' 


OnfG/liS— CONTINUED 


Fab  East  Page 

Visit  of  President  of  Amoy  University  to  the  United 

States 564 

Europe 

Minister  of  Finland  Requested  to  Leave  the  United 

States 565 

Visit  to  the  United  States  of  the  Polish  Prime  Minister  .       565 

American  Republics 

Proposal  for  Rescue  of  Refugees  from  German  Terri- 
tory          566 

Presentation  of  Letters  of  Credence  by  the  Ambassador 

of  Costa  Rica 566 

Treaty  Information 

Inter-American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences   .    .    .  567 

Regulation  of  Inter-American  AutO;motive  Traffic  .    .  567 
Provisional  Fur-Seal  Agreement  Between  the  United 

States  and  Canada 568 

Protocol  on  Pelagic  Whaling ,    .    .  568 

The  Department 
Appointment  of  Officers 568 

Publications 568 

Legislation 568 


The  War 


ALLIED  MILITARY  OPERATIONS  IN  EUROPE 

Report  by  General  Eisenhower  to  the  President 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  13] 

On  June  6th  we  initiated  the  first  vital  step  lead- 
ing to  tlie  decisive  battle  of  Europe.  The  first 
great  obstacle  has  been  surmounted — that  is  the 
breaching  of  the  beach  defenses  that  the  enemy  by 
lavish  employment  of  enslaved  labor  had  installed 
in  forest-like  density  along  the  entire  lateral  of 
northwest  Europe.  Gallantry,  fortitude  and  skill 
were  called  for,  and  these,  in  abundant  measure, 
the  entire  allied  force  has  displayed  since  the  open- 
ing day  of  the  battle.  A  particularly  satisfying 
feature  of  the  fighting  has  been  the  fine  perform- 
ance of  troops — American,  Bi-itish,  and  Cana- 
dian— committed  to  battle  for  the  first  time.  Just 
as  they  did  and  are  still  doing  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean, these  untried  allied  units  have  conducted 
themselves  in  a  manner  worthy  of  their  more  ex- 
perienced comrades  who  conquered  the  German 
in  Africa,  Sicily  and  Italy. 

What  is  more  important,  complete  unity  between 
the  air,  ground  and  naval  services  has  prevailed. 

Satisfactory  as  is  the  progress  of  this  battle  to 
date,  in  magnitude  it  is  but  a  mere  beginning  to 


the  tremendous  struggles  that  must  follow  before 

Although  the  cross- 


final  victory  is  achieved, 
channel  landing  operation  was  attended  by  hazards 
and  difficulties  greater,  I  believe,  than  have  ever 
before  faced  an  invading  army,  this  initial  success 
has  given  us  only  a  foothold  upon  northwestern 
France.  Through  the  opening  thus  made,  and 
through  others  yet  to  come,  the  flood  of  our  fighting 
strength  must  be  poured.  Our  operations,  vast 
and  imjjortant  as  they  are,  are  only  part  of  the 
far  larger  pattern  of  a  combined  assault  against 
the  fortress  of  Germany  by  the  great  Russian 
armies  from  the  East  and  our  forces  from  the 
Mediterranean. 

The  Nazis  will  be  forced  to  fight  throughout  the 
perimeter  of  their  stronghold,  daily  expending 
their  dwindling  resources  until  overwhelmed  by 
the  hopelessness  of  their  position.  To  this  end  we 
need  every  man,  every  weapon,  and  all  the  courage 
and  fortitude  of  our  respective  peoples.  The 
allied  soldier  will  do  his  duty. 

DwiGHT  D.  Eisenhower 


Acknowledgments  by  President  Roosevelt  of   Messages  From  Various  OfBeials 

of  the  United  Nations 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  14] 

On  June  7  the  press  was  given  texts  of  cable- 
grams and  acknowledgments  exchanged  between 
the  President  of  the  United  States  and  various 
government  and  militai\y  officials  of  the  United 
Nations.^  The  texts  of  the  President's  acknowl- 
edgments follow : 

To  the  King  of  Greece 

I  am  grateful  for  your  message  of  congratula- 
tions on  the  fall  of  Rome.  Our  successful  Allied 
armies  in  Italy  and  in  the  East  have  now  been 


joined  in  the  all-out  struggle  for  the  liberation  of 
the  continent  by  the  forces  who  have  landed  in 
France.  I  know  that  their  progress  will  be  at- 
tended by  the  prayerful  hopes  of  the  entire  Greek 
people. 

To  the  President  of  Brasil 

I  am  deeply  moved  by  the  sentiments  expressed 
by  Your  Excellency  on  behalf  of  yourself  and  of 
the  people  of  Brazil  on  the  occasion  of  the  first  day 
of  the  landing  of  Allied  troops  in  France  to  effect 

'  Bulletin  of  June  10, 1944,  p.  528. 

549 


550 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


the  liberation  of  the  captive  populations  of  Europe 
and  to  restore  peace  to  the  world. 

I  shall  take  pleasure  in  transmitting  to  General 
Eisenhower  the  inspiring  message  of  the  Chief  of 
the  Government  of  our  great  Ally,  Brazil,  who  is 
also  sending  her  valiant  sons  to  fight  the  foes  of 
liberty  on  distant  battlefields. 

To  the  President  of  the  Costa  Rican  Congress 

Please  convey  to  the  Costa  Rican  Congress  my 
thanks  for  its  message  of  encouragement  and  sup- 
port sent  in  connection  with  the  initiation  of  mili- 
tary operations  for  the  liberation  of  Europe. 
Though  the  campaign  may  be  difficult  I  have  faith 
in  the  victory  of  the  United  Nations. 

To  the  President  of  Honduras 

I  am  happy  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  your 
telegram  expressing  the  fervent  hopes  and  prayers 
of  the  Honduran  nation  that  victory  will  crown 
the  attack  of  the  United  Nations  upon  the  fortress 
of  Europe.  The  battle  will  unquestionably  be 
hard  but  I  am  wholly  confident  that  the  outcome 
will  be  a  triumph  for  the  forces  of  liberation. 

To  the  President  of  the  Republic  of  Peru 

I  have  received  with  the  greatest  of  pleasure 
Your  Excellency's  cordial  message  of  June  5,  sent 
on  the  occasion  of  the  liberation  of  the  city  of 
Rome  by  the  armies  of  the  United  Nations.  I 
agree  with  Your  Excellency  that  this  event  con- 
stitutes a  decisive  step  toward  the  inevitable  final 
triumph  over  the  forces  of  our  enemies.  The  lib- 
eration of  Rome  by  the  combined  United  Nations 
armies  proves  the  gi'eat  strength  of  the  present 
union  of  free  peoples  the  woi'ld  over  against  the 
tyranny  of  the  Axis  powers.  The  people  of  the 
United  States  of  America  are  also  particularly 
pleased  that  this  was  effected  without  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  historic  monuments  of  the  Eternal 
City.  I  take  great  pleasure  in  cordially  recipro- 
cating Your  Excellency's  kind  expression  of  per- 
sonal esteem. 

To  the  President  of  the  National  Governnfient  of 
the  Republic  of  China 

On  behalf  of  the  forces  of  the  United  States  I 
thank  you  for  your  heartening  message  on  the 
liberation  of  Rome.  This  achievement  was  made 
possible  by   the   inspiration,  unity   and   swiftly 


mounting  strength  of  our  democratic  cause,  and  I 
am  supremely  confident  that  these  factors  will 
soon  bring  us  gi-eater  victories  which  will  ensure 
the  destruction  of  Axis  tyranny  not  only  in 
Europe  but  also  in  Asia. 

To  the  King  of  Egypt 

I  have  received  with  deep  appreciation  Your 
Majesty's  message  of  felicitation  on  the  occasion 
of  the  liberation  of  Rome.  It  is  my  hope  also  that 
the  armies  of  freedom  soon  shall  triumph  over  the 
forces  of  the  Axis  aggressors. 

To  the  President  of  the  Republic  of  Colombia 

I  deeply  appreciate  Your  Excellency's  inspir- 
ing message  in  which  you  have  expressed  in  this 
momentous  hour  the  deep  and  fervent  spirit  of  the 
Colombian  people  who  are  united  with  us  in  the 
determination  to  achieve  the  liberation  of  those 
peoples  cruelly  enslaved  by  our  common  enemy. 
We  may  look  forward  with  full  confidence,  that, 
through  the  sacrifice  and  devotion  to  the  just  cause 
to  which  our  nations  have  dedicated  themselves, 
ultimate  victory  will  bring  justice  and  freedom  to 
the  world. 

To  the  President  of  the  Republic  of  Paraguay 

I  take  great  pleasure  in  expressing  my  appre- 
ciation for  Your  Excellency's  message  of  June  6 
on  the  occasion  of  the  landing  of  United  States 
forces  in  France. 

The  decisive  phase  of  the  battle  of  liberation 
has  begun  with  realistic  appreciation  of  the  long 
road  that  lies  ahead  and  with  complete  confidence 
in  ultimate  victory. 

To  the  P7'esident  of  Haiti 

I  wish  to  express  my  appreciation  for  your 
telegram  conveying  the  congratulations  of  the 
Haitian  peoj^le  and  Government  upon  the  occa- 
sion of  the  occupation  of  Rome  and  the  initiation 
of  the  campaign  for  the  liberation  of  Europe. 
Though  the  road  may  be  hard,  I  am  certain  of 
the  ultimate  victory  of  the  United  Nations. 

To  the  President  of  the  Senate  of  Chile 

Thank  you  for  the  message  which  you  and  Don 
Fernando  Altamirano  Z.  were  kind  enough  to 
send  on  behalf  of  the  Senate  of  Chile  on  the  oc- 
casion of  the  landings  made  by  the  Allied  armies 


JUNE    17,    1944 


551 


in  northern  France.  It  gives  me  deep  satisfac- 
tion to  know  that  the  good  wishes  and  support 
of  the  Chilean  Senate  are  with  us  during  this 
supremely  critical  phase  of  the  war. 

To  the  Prhne  Minister  of  Belgium 

I  deeply  appreciate  your  kind  message  of  June  6. 
The  victory  of  the  Allies  in  Italy  is  an  auspicious 
beginning  of  the  liberation  of  the  enslaved  peo- 
ples of  Europe.  You  may  be  sure  that  our  un- 
sparing efforts  will  not  cease  until  the  enemy  has 
been  crushed  and  freedom  has  been  restored  to 
your  brave  fellow  countrymen. 

To  the  President  of  the  Dominican  Republic 

I  am  happy  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  your 
telegram  of  congratulations  on  the  initial  suc- 
cess obtained  by  the  Allied  Armies  in  the  cam- 
paign for  the  liberation  of  Europe.  Though  the 
campaign  may  be  difficult,  I  have  faith  in  the 
victory  of  the  United  Nations. 

To  the  PHme  Minister  of  Australia 

Thank  you  for  your  message  of  congratula- 
tion upon  the  liberation  of  Rome  and  your  trib- 
ute to  tlie  gallant  forces  of  the  United  Nations. 
We  may  be  justly  proud  of  this  splendid  accom- 
plishment by  our  combined  forces.  This  example 
of  complete  cooperation  and  coordination  of  ef- 
fort gives  us  high  hopes  for  the  success  of  the 
still  greater  task  to  which  our  combined  armies 
have  now  set  themselves  on  the  Continent  of 
Europe. 


that  this  was  possible  without  destruction  of  its 
many  monuments  of  religion,  of  history  and  of 
culture. 


The  following  wires  from  various  foreign  gov- 
ernments were  received  too  late  for  inclusion  in 
the  June  7,  1944  release.  Texts  of  the  messages 
and  of  the  President's  replies  are  as  follows : 

The  President  of  Guatemala  to  the  President 

I  am  happy  to  felicitate  Your  Excellency  upon 
the  occupation  of  Rome  by  the  victorious  North 
American  troops  and  I  express  my  desire  that  the 
invincible  army  of  the  United  Nations  may  con- 
tinue its  triumphant  march  forward. 

The  President  to  the  President  of  Ouatemala 

Please  accept  my  thanks  for  your  telegram  of 
felicitations  upon  the  taking  of  Rome.    I  rejoice 


The  President  of  Ecuador  to  the  President 

I  greet  Your  Excellency  and  assure  you  of  my 
pleasure  at  the  transcendental  victories  in  France, 
the  nation  of  freedom,  of  the  North  American 
armies  which  have  demonstrated  to  the  world  the 
inevitable  arrival  of  the  hour  of  the  people  and  of 
justice. 

The  President  to  the  President  of  Ecuador 

I  deeply  appreciate  Your  Excellency's  friendly 
message  at  this  time  when  the  Armies  of  tho 
United  Nations  are  engaging  in  tremendous  and 
sacrificial  struggle  which  we  know  must  precede 
the  liberation  of  Europe.  I  am  wholly  confident 
of  the  ultimate  victory  which  will  assure  through- 
out the  world  the  reign  of  the  principles  of  justice 
and  freedom  to  which  our  nations  are  dedicated. 


The  Emperor  of  Ethiopia  to  the  President 

The  entire  Ethiopian  people  are  following  the 
opening  of  the  invasion  with  their  prayers  to  the 
God  of  victories  for  the  triumphant  outcome  of 
the  historic  campaign  to  which  the  whole  Ameri- 
can nation  is  committed.  May  the  fall  of  Rome 
be  speedily  followed  by  the  rapid  fall  of  the 
remaining  strongholds  of  Axis  resistance. 

The  President  to  the  Emperor  of  Ethiopia 

I  thank  Your  Majesty  most  wannly  for  your 
message. 

In  this  titanic  struggle  the  American  people  are 
supported  in  their  will  to  triumph  by  the  knowl- 
edge that  staunch  and  unfailing  allies  stand  by 
their  side  and  by  the  prayers  and  good  wishes  of 
honorable  men  everywhere.  Victoi-y  will  come. 
Your  Majesty's  message  cheers  us  on  the  way. 


The  President  of  the  United  States  of  Venezuela 
to  the  President 

Yesterday,  when  the  glorious  Allied  forces 
began  the  most  important  stage  of  this  war  in 
wliich  the  sons  of  Your  Excellency's  noble  country 
are  struggling  with  intrejiid  valor,  will  pass  into 


552 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


history  as  one  of  the  symbolic  dates  of  the  struggle 
for  the  principles  of  liberty  and  justice  which  the 
democratic  countries  support.  The  Government 
and  the  people  of  Venezuela  who  share  the  same 
ideals  have  received  with  keen  emotion  the  first 
news  and  express  their  sincere  wishes  for  the  suc- 
cess of  the  present  campaign.  To  these,  I  add  my 
personal  wishes. 

The   President   to   the  President  of  the   United 
States  of  Venezuela 

I  deeply  appreciate  Your  Excellency's  friendly 
and  inspiring  message  conveying  your  wishes  and 
those  of  the  Government  and  people  of  Venezuela 
for  the  successful  outcome  of  the  momentous 
struggle  which  has  just  been  initiated  in  France. 
This  military  action  will  lead  to  the  fulfillment 
of  the  fervent  desires  of  free  people  the  world 
over  that  freedom,  liberty  and  justice  shall  be 
guaranteed  to  all. 

Messages  Exchanged  Between  the  Prime  Minis- 
ter of  Greece  and  the  Secretary  of  State 

[Released  to  the  press  June  15] 

The  Secretary  of  State  has  received  the  fol- 
lowing message  of  congratulation  from  the  Prime 
Minister  of  Greece  under  date  of  June  8,  194:4 : 


Please  accept  and  transmit  to  the  American 
Government  and  people  and  to  the  gallant  armed 
forces  of  the  United  States  the  congratulations  of 
the  Hellenic  Government  and  myself  for  the  his- 
torical victory  of  the  capture  of  Eome  and  our 
heartfelt  wishes  for  the  success  of  the  mighty 
endeavour  which  began  yesterday  on  the  shores 
of  France.  The  Greek  people  who  were  the  first 
to  defeat  the  Italians  in  their  untried  pride  and 
aggressiveness  have  hailed  the  fate  of  the  second 
capital  of  the  Axis  as  the  infallible  omen  of 
greater  and  final  victories  which  may  God  grant 
to  your  forces  now  engaged  on  their  heroic  cru- 
sade. 

George  Papandreotj 

The  following  reply  was  sent  to  M.  Papandreou 
on  June  14: 

I  greatly  appreciate  Your  Excellency's  message 
of  congratulations  on  the  occasion  of  the  fall  of 
Rome  and  the  successful  launching  of  the  inva- 
sion from  the  West.  The  day  of  liberation  of 
occupied  Europe  is  surely  dawning.  It  is  the 
earnest  hope  of  all  Americans  that  this  long- 
awaited  prospect  will  give  to  the  Greek  people 
renewed  strength  and  unity  for  the  reconstruction 
of  their  free  national  life. 

CoRDELL  Hull, 


POST-WAR  SECURITY  ORGANIZATION  PROGRAM 


Statement  by 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  15] 

The  conference  today  with  officials  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  on  the  post-war  security  organi- 
zation program  is  a  continuation  of  conferences 
which  have  been  held  from  time  to  time  during 
the  past  18  months.  These  conferences  have  en- 
abled me  to  give  personal  attention  to  the  develop- 
ment and  progress  of  the  post-war  work  the 
Department  of  State  is  doing. 

All  plans  and  suggestions  from  groups,  organi- 
zations, and  individuals  have  been  carefully  dis- 
cussed and  considered.  I  wish  to  emphasize  the 
entirely  non-partisan  nature  of  these  consulta- 
tions. All  aspects  of  the  post-war  program  have 
been  debated  in  a  cooperative  spirit.  This  is  a 
tribute  to  the  political  leaders  who  realize  that 


the  President 

the  national  interest  demands  a  national  program 
now.  Such  teamwork  has  met  the  overwhelming 
approval  of  the  American  people. 

The  maintenance  of  peace  and  security  must  be 
the  joint  task  of  all  peace-loving  nations.  We 
have,  therefore,  sought  to  develop  plans  for  an 
international  organization  comprising  all  such 
nations.  The  purpose  of  the  organization  would 
be  to  maintain  peace  and  security  and  to  assist  the 
creation,  through  international  cooperation,  of 
conditions  of  stability  and  well-being  necessary 
for  peaceful  and  friendly  relations  among  nations. 

Accordingly,  it  is  our  thought  that  the  organi- 
zation would  be  a  fully  representative  body  with 
broad  responsibilities  for  promoting  and  facili- 
tating  international   cooperation,   through   sucl^ 


JUNE    17,    1944 

agencies  as  may  be  found  necessary,  to  consider 
and  deal  wi.tli  the  problems  of  world  relations. 
It  is  our  further  thought  that  the  organization 
would  provide  for  a  council,  elected  annually  by 
the  fully  representative  body  of  all  nations,  which 
would  include  the  four  major  nations  and  a  suit- 
able number  of  other  nations.  The  council  would 
concern  itself  with  peaceful  settlement  of  inter- 
national disputes  and  with  the  prevention  of 
threats  to  the  peace  or  breaches  of  the  peace. 

There  would  also  be  an  international  court  of 
justice  to  deal  primarily  with  justiciable  disputes. 

We  are  not  thinking  of  a  superstate  with  its 
own  police  forces  and  other  paraphernalia  of 
coercive  power.  We  are  seeking  effective  agree- 
ment and  arrangements  through  which  the  na- 


553 

tions  would  maintain,  according  to  their  capaci- 
ties, adequate  forces  to  meet  the  needs  of  pre- 
venting war  and  of  making  impossible  deliberate 
preparation  for  war  and  to  have  such  forces 
available  for  joint  action  when  necessary. 

All  this,  of  course,  will  become  possible  once 
our  present  enemies  are  defeated  and  effective 
arrangements  are  made  to  prevent  them  from 
making  war  again. 

Beyond  that,  the  hope  of  a  peaceful  and  ad- 
vancing world  will  rest  upon  the  willingness  and 
ability  of  the  peace-loving  nations,  large  and 
small,  bearing  responsibility  commensurate  with 
their  individual  capacities,  to  work  together  for 
the  maintenance  of  peace  and  security. 


REMOVAL  OF  EUROPEAN  REFUGEES  TO  THE  UNITED  STATES 

Message  of  the  President  to   the  Congress 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  12] 

To  THE  Congress  of  the  United  States  :  Con- 
gress has  repeatedly  manifested  its  deep  concern 
with  the  pitiful  plight  of  the  persecuted  minori- 
ties in  Europe  whose  lives  are  each  day  being 
offered  in  sacrifice  on  the  altar  of  Nazi  tyranny. 

This  Nation  is  appalled  by  the  systematic  per- 
secution of  helpless  minority  groups  by  the  Nazis. 
To  us  the  unprovoked  murder  of  innocent  people 
simply  because  of  race,  religion  or  political  creed 
is  the  blackest  of  all  possible  crimes.  Since  the 
Nazis  began  this  campaign  many  of  our  citizens 
in  all  walks  of  life  and  of  all  political  and  religious 
persuasions  have  expressed  our  feeling  of  repulsion 
and  our  anger.  It  is  a  matter  with  respect  to 
which  there  is  and  can  be  no  division  of  opinion 
amongst  us. 

As  the  hour  of  the  final  defeat  of  the  Hitlerite 
forces  draws  closer,  the  fury  of  their  insane  desire 
to  wipe  out  the  Jewish  race  in  Europe  continues 
undiminished.  This  is  but  one  example:  Many 
christian  groups  also  are  being  murdered. 
Knowing  that  they  have  lost  the  war,  the  Nazis 
are  determined  to  complete  their  program  of  mass 
extermination.  This  program  is  but  one  mani- 
festation of  Hitler's  aim  to  salvage  from  military 
defeat  victory  for  Nazi  principles — the  very  prin- 
ciples which  this  war  must  destroy  unless  we  shall 
have  fought  in  vain. 


This  Government  has  not  only  made  clear  its 
abhorrence  of  this  inhuman  and  barbarous  activity 
of  the  Nazis,  but,  in  cooperation  with  other  gov- 
ernments has  endeavored  to  alleviate  the  condi- 
tion of  the  persecuted  peoples.  In  January  of  this 
year  I  determined  that  this  Government  should 
intensify  its  efforts  to  combat  the  Nazi  terror. 
Accordingly,  I  established  the  War  Refugee 
Board,  composed  of  the  Secretaries  of  State, 
Treasury  and  War.  This  Board  was  charged  with 
the  responsibility  of  taking  all  action  consistent 
with  the  successful  prosecution  of  the  war  to  rescue 
the  victims  of  enemy  oppression  in  imminent  dan- 
ger of  death  and  to  afford  such  victims  all  other 
possible  relief  and  assistance.  It  was  entrusted 
with  the  solemn  duty  of  translating  this  Govern- 
ment's humanitarian  policy  into  prompt  action, 
thus  manifesting  once  again  in  a  concrete  way 
that  our  kind  of  world  and  not  Hitler's  will  pre- 
vail. Its  purpose  is  directly  and  closely  related 
to  our  whole  war  effort. 

Since  its  establishment,  the  War  Refugee  Board, 
acting  through  a  full  time  administrative  staff, 
has  made  a  direct  and  forceful  attack  on  the 
problem.  Operating  quietly,  as  is  appropriate, 
tlie  Board,  through  its  representatives  in  various 
parts  of  the  world,  has  actually  succeeded  in  sav- 
ing the  lives  of  innocent  people.  Not  only  have 
refugees  been   evacuated   from  enemy  territory, 


554 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


but  many  measures  have  been  taken  to  protect  the 
lives  of  those  who  have  not  been  able  to  escape. 

Above  all,  the  eflForts  of  the  Board  have  brought 
new  hope  to  the  oppressed  peoples  of  Europe. 
This  statement  is  not  idle  speculation.  From 
various  sources,  I  have  received  word  that  thou- 
sands of  people,  wearied  by  their  years  of  resist- 
ance to  Hitler  and  by  their  sufferings  to  the  point 
of  giving  up  the  struggle,  have  been  given  the  will 
and  desire  to  continue  bj^  the  concrete  manifesta- 
tion of  this  Government's  desire  to  do  all  possible 
to  aid  and  rescue  the  oppressed. 

To  the  Hitlerites,  their  subordinates  and  func- 
tionaries and  satellites,  to  the  German  people  and 
to  all  other  peoples  under  the  Nazi  yoke,  we  have 
made  clear  our  determination  to  punish  all  partici- 
pants in  these  acts  of  savagerj'.  In  the  name  of 
humanity  we  have  called  upon  them  to  spare  the 
lives  of  these  innocent  people. 

Notwithstanding  this  Government's  unremitting 
efforts,  which  are  continuing,  the  numbers  actually 
rescued  from  the  jaws  of  death  have  been  small 
compared  with  the  numbers  still  facing  extinction 
in  German  territory'.  This  is  due  principally  to 
the  fact  that  our  enemies,  despite  all  our  appeals 
and  our  willingness  to  find  havsais  of  refuge  for 
the  oppressed  peoples,  persist  in  their  fiendish 
extermination  campaign  and  actively  prevent  the 
intended  victims  from  escaping  to  safety. 

In  the  face  of  this  attitude  of  our  enemies  we 
must  not  fail  to  take  full  advantage  of  any  oppor- 
tunity, however  limited,  for  the  rescue  of  Hitler's 
victims.  AYe  are  confronted  with  a  most  urgent 
situation. 

Therefore,  I  wish  to  report  to  you  today  concern- 
ing a  step  which  I  have  just  taken  in  an  effort  to 
save  additional  lives  and  which  1  am  certain  will 
meet  with  your  approval.  You  will,  I  am  sure, 
appreciate  that  this  measure  is  not  only  consistent 
with  the  successful  prosecution  of  the  war,  but  that 
it  was  essential  to  take  action  without  delay. 

Even  before  the  Allied  landing  in  Italy  there 
had  been  a  substantial  movement  of  persecuted 
peoples  of  various  races  and  nationalities  into 
that  country.  This  movement  was  undoubtedly 
prompted  by  the  fact  that,  despite  all  attempts  by 
the  Fascists  to  stir  up  intolerance,  the  warm- 
hearted Italian  people  could  not  forsake  their 
centuries-old  tradition  of  tolerance  and  humani- 
tarianism.  The  Allied  landings  swelled  this 
stream  of  fleeing  and  hunted  peoples  seeking  sanc- 


tuary behind  the  gmis  of  the  United  Nations. 
However,  in  view  of  the  military  situation  in  Italy, 
the  number  of  refugees  who  can  be  accommodated 
there  is  relatively  limited.  The  Allied  military 
forces,  in  view  of  their  primary  responsibility, 
have  not  been  able  generally  speaking  to  encourage 
the  escape  of  refugees  from  enemy  territory.  This 
unfortunate  situation  lias  prevented  the  escape  of 
the  largest  possible  number  of  refugees.  Further- 
more, as  the  number  of  refugees  living  in  southern 
Italy  increases,  their  care  constitutes  an  additional 
and  substantial  burden  for  the  militai'y  authorities. 

Recently  the  facilities  for  the  care  of  refugees  in 
southern  Italy  have  become  so  overtaxed  that  un- 
less many  refugees  who  have  already  escaped  to 
that  area  and  are  arriving  daily,  particularly  from 
the  Balkan  countries,  can  be  promptly  removed  to 
havens  of  refuge  elsewhere,  the  escape  of  refugees 
to  that  area  from  German-occupied  territory  will 
be  seriously  impeded.  It  was  apparent  that 
prompt  action  was  necessary  to  meet  this  situa- 
tion. Many  of  the  refugees  in  southern  Italy  have 
been  and  are  being  moved  to  temporary  refuges  in 
the  territory  of  other  United  and  friendly  nations. 
However,  in  view  of  the  number  of  refugees  still  in 
southern  Italy,  the  problem  could  not  be  solved 
unless  temporary  havens  of  refuge  were  found  for 
some  of  them  in  still  other  areas.  In  view  of  this 
most  urgent  situation  it  seemed  indispensable  that 
the  United  States  in  keeping  with  our  heritage  and 
our  ideals  of  liberty  and  justice  take  immediate 
steps  to  share  the  responsibility  for  meeting  the 
problem. 

Accordingly,  arrangements  have  been  made  to 
bring  immediately  to  this  country  approximately 
1,000  refugees  who  have  fled  from  their  homelands 
to  soutliern  Italy.  Upon  the  termination  of  the 
war  thej'  will  be  sent  back  to  their  homelands. 
These  refugees  are  predominantly  women  and 
children.  They  will  be  placed  on  their  arrival  in 
a  vacated  Army  camp  on  the  Atlantic  Coast  where 
they  will  remain  under  appropriate  security 
restrictions. 

The  Ami}'  will  take  tlie  necessary  security  pre- 
cautions and  the  camp  will  be  administered  by  the 
War  Eelocation  Authority.  The  War  Refugee 
Board  is  charged  with  over-all  responsibility  for 
this  project. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 

The  White  House, 
June  12,  lOU- 


General 


OPPORTUNITIES  FOR  WOIMEN  IN  THE  CONDUCT  OF  INTERNATIONAL  RELATIONS 

Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Shaw  ^ 


[Released  to  the  press  June  1-1] 

At  the  outset  I  am  going  to  make  an  assumption 
which  I  know  is  a  safe  one,  namely  that  you  are  not 
concerned  with  the  conception,  which  happily  is 
ever  more  narrowly  held,  that  women  as  such  con- 
stitute something  in  the  nature  of  a  national  minor- 
ity for  which  representation  should  be  secured  on 
all  Governmental  projects.  It  may  once  have  been 
tactically  expedient  to  promote  that  somewhat  re- 
stricted view  in  the  process  of  obtaining  general 
recognition  of  the  simple  fact  that  the  w^omen  of 
this  country  are  likewise  members  of  the  body 
politic.  But  that  fact  is  certainly  now  beyond 
dispute. 

Today  we  in  the  Government  who  are  engaged 
in  the  selection  of  individuals  for  the  performance 
of  the  multitude  of  tasks  which  confront  us  both 
here  and  abroad  are  concerned  only  with  the  com- 
petence of  the  potential  Government  servant  or 
representative.  Nevertheless  to  those  of  you  who 
recall  that  June  day  25  years  ago  when  what  be- 
came the  19th  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of 
the  United  States  received  the  approval  of  the 
Congress,  there  must  indeed  be  a  source  of  satisfac- 
tion in  the  knowledge  that  today  the  women  of  the 
nation  are  playing  an  active,  a  vital,  and  an  indis- 
pensable role  in  every  line  of  American  endeavor 
from  assembly  line  to  the  President's  Cabinet. 
And  those  women  are  there,  not  because  they  are 
women  but  because  they  have  what  it  takes. 

This  afternoon  I  would  like  to  speak  briefly 
about  the  role  of  women  in  the  conduct  of  our  in- 
ternational relations,  which  as  you  know  is  the 
province  of  the  State  Department.  In  so  doing  I 
risk  being  charged  with  trying  to  divide  into 
meaningless  categories  the  people  who  serve  their 
country  in  the  international  field.  It  might  per- 
haps fairly  be  said  that  it  would  be  almost  as 
meaningful  for  me  to  devote  a  discussion  to  the 
work  in  this  field  of  all  persons  who  bear  the  name 
of  Smith.  Yet  because  of  the  history  of  the  eman- 
cipation of  women,  perhaps  such  a  segregation  is 
not  totally  lacking  in  significance  to  this  gathering. 

593897 — 44 2 


As  you  know,  our  foreign  relations  are  con- 
ducted through  the  complementary  channels  of  a 
home  office — the  Department  of  State — and  a 
field  staff — the  Foreign  Service  of  the  United 
States.  I  am  going  to  speak  first  about  the  home 
office — the  Department  of  State. 

Of  the  persons  engaged  in  administrative  and 
professional  work  in  the  Department,  more  than 
300,  or  over  one  third,  are  women.  This  figure 
does  not,  of  course,  include  the  many  highly  valued 
women  who  are  employed  in  the  essentially  im- 
portant field  of  secretarial  and  stenographic  work. 
In  the  administrative  and  professional  classifica- 
tions, to  which  I  just  referred,  women  are  receiv- 
ing base  salaries  of  from  $2000  to  $8000  per  year. 
Wliile  war  conditions  are  in  part  responsible  for 
the  increased  ratio  of  participation  by  women  in 
Government  affaii-s,  those  war  conditions  are  not 
responsible  for  the  professional  and  technical 
competency  which  is  being  outstandingly  demon- 
strated by  the  women  who  have  recently  joined  the 
State  Department.  I  think  some  of  you  who  have 
participated  in  the  past  in  Government  activities 
can  take  at  least  partial  credit  for  the  high  quality 
of  the  work  now  being  performed  by  women  in 
the  various  activities  of  the  Department.  For, 
with  the  example  before  them  of  your  own  success- 
ful contributions  to  the  operations  of  the  Govern- 
ment, young  women  in  their  college  days  have  in 
recent  years  prepared  themselves  with  more  as- 
surance that  suitable  outlets  for  their  talents  will 
be  found. 

I  think  these  women  who  are  working  with  us 
are  happy  in  the  knowledge  that  they  are  more 
than  carrying  their  share  of  the  burden  and  that 
they  are  regarded  by  their  fellow  workers  not  as 
stopgap  or  makeshift  employees — necessary  evils 
"for  the  duration" — but  as  full-fledged  and  ex- 
pert technicians  capable  of  doing  the  best  possible 
job.  It  was  interesting  to  me  to  hear  the  com- 
ments of  a  competent  research  worker — a  woman 


1  Delivered   at   the  Conference   On   How   Women   May 
Share  in  Post-War  Policy-Making,  Washington,  June  14. 


5SS, 


556 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


known  to  many  of  you  here — who  recently  joined 
the  staff  of  the  Department.  Said  she,  "I  have 
been  impressed  by  the  attitude  or  rather  lack  of 
attitude  toward  women  in  the  Department."  I 
thought  that  that  was  a  very  apt  way  of  saying 
that  the  presence  of  women  as  officers  of  the  De- 
partment has  now  become  commonplace. 

So  far  as  concerns  the  Foreign  Service  of  the 
United  States — I  am  speaking  now  of  the  regular 
Foreign  Service  or  the  "career  service"  as  it  is 
sometimes  called — I  will  state  quite  frankly  that 
the  situation  at  least  in  the  past  has  been  different. 
These  people  serve  abroad  in  many  lands  and 
under  extremely  varied  circumstances.  It  is  no 
reflection  on  our  friendly  neighbors  in  other  parts 
of  the  world,  but  rather  a  manifestation  of  pride 
in  our  own  standards,  to  say  that  the  position 
which  women  hold  in  the  United  States  is  not 
always  understood  by  the  peoples  of  some  of  the 
other  countries  of  this  world.  Moreover,  the  liv- 
ing conditions — not  merely  the  physical  surround- 
ings but  the  sociological  settings — differ  in  many 
foreign  posts  to  a  very  large  degree  from  those 
found  in  our  own  country.  I  personally  believe 
that  time  will  bring  a  change  in  this  situation  and 
that  in  the  future  there  will  be  more  opportunity 
for  women  in  our  Foreign  Service.  However,  in 
spite  of  these  factors  and  in  spite  of  the  fact  that 
Foreign  Service  officers  must  be  selected  on  the 
basis  of  their  being  able  to  serve  anywhere  in 
the  world  at  any  time,  there  are  now  included  in 
our  regular  Foreign  Service  seven  women  as 
Foreign  Service  officers.  Five  others  have  at  one 
time  or  another  been  members  of  the  regular 
Service  but  have  either  resigned  or  retired.  In 
addition,  as  you  know,  two  women  have  served  as 
Chiefs  of  Missions:  Mrs.  Ruth  Bryan  Owen 
Rohde  as  Minister  to  Denmark  and  Mrs.  Florence 
J  affray  Harriman  as  Minister  to  Norway. 

During  the  war  the  regular  Foreign  Service 
has  been  supplemented  by  an  Auxiliary  Foreign 
Service  made  up  of  people  sent  abroad  to  serve  in 
special  capacities  connected  with  this  emergency 
period.  Twelve  women  are  officers  in  this  auxil- 
iary service.  It  may  be  expected  that  the  com- 
plexity which  characterizes  our  present-day 
foreign  relations  will,  even  at  the  conclusion  of  the 
present  emergency,  require  us  more  and  more  to 
attach  to  our  embassies  and  legations  abroad  spe- 


cialists on  temporary  assignments  in  fields  in  which 
women  have  shown  themselves  outstandingly  qual- 
ified, such  as  labor  relations,  welfare  work,  cul- 
tural relations,  economic  relations,  and  so  on. 

So  much  for  the  Department  of  State  and  the 
Foreign  Service  of  the  United  States.  There  is, 
of  course,  another  area  of  international  activity 
in  which  women  have  taken  and  will  continue  to 
take  an  active  part,  namely  those  international 
conversations,  conferences,  and  commissions  in 
which  this  Government  participates  through 
American  delegations.  The  speakers  this  morning 
dwelt  at  some  length  upon  the  role  which  women 
have  played  in  these  special  assignments.  By  way 
of  summary,  the  following  constitute  a  list  of  re- 
cent international  gatherings  at  which  women  have 
been  members  of  the  American  delegations : 

The  United  Nations  Conference  on  Food  and 
Agriculture  at  Hot  Springs,  Virginia,  in 
May  and  June  1943 

The  first  Council  Meeting  of  the  United  Nations 
Relief  and  Rehabilitation  Administration  at 
Atlantic  City  in  November  1943 

The  Meeting  of  the  International  Labor  Organ- 
ization at  Philadelphia  in  April  1944 

The  Conference  of  Allied  Ministers  of  Education 
at  London  in  April  and  May  1944 

As  the  war  approaches  the  final  decision  we  can, 
of  course,  expect  that  numerous  other  occasions  will 
arise  for  consultations  between  representatives  of 
the  United  Nations  on  international  problems  of 
mutual  concern.  Many  of  these  problems  will  be 
of  a  highly  technical  character.  It  is  inevitable 
that  those  selected  to  represent  this  Government  in 
such  consultations  or  deliberations  will,  as  in  the 
past,  continue  to  be  chosen  on  the  basis  of  their 
technical  qualifications.  The  record  of  participa- 
tion by  women  in  the  conferences  and  meetings 
which  I  have  just  listed  clearly  demonstrates,  if 
there  ever  was  a  doubt,  that  the  desired  technical 
qualifications  are  to  be  found  among  women  as  well 
as  men.  From  this  it  may  be  concluded  that 
women  will  continue  to  find  themselves  taking  part 
in  future  meetings  of  this  character.  And,  of 
course,  tlie  same  must  be  true  of  those  international 
consultations  and  conferences  which  will  follow  the 
termination  of  hostilities. 

In  the  selection  of  those  persons  who  will  make 


JUNE    17,    1944 


557 


up  the  American  representation  in  these  ad  hoc  in- 
ternational consultations,  it  is  obviously  desirable 
that  full  information  be  available  as  to  potential 
selectees,  particularly  with  respect  to  their  profes- 
sional or  technical  qualifications.  This  informa- 
tion is  not  always  at  hand  in  the  files  of  the  State 
Department  or  of  other  Government  departments. 
In  this  connection  I  may  say  that  we  in  the  State 
Department  are  aware  of  the  fact  that  groups  of 
private  citizens  are  capable  of  rendering  valued 
assistance  by  assembling  data  as  to  technically 


qualified  persons — and  I  emphasize  the  element  of 
qualification — who  might  constitute  something  in 
the  nature  of  an  informal  panel  from  which  appro- 
priate selections  can  be  made  at  opportune  times. 
In  summary,  whether  it  be  to  serve  in  the  State 
Department,  in  our  Foreign  Service,  or  on  special 
commissions,  we  are  looking  for  the  best  in  the  land. 
I  can  assure  you  that  those  who  possess  preemi- 
nently the  requisite  qualifications  will  be  chosen, 
whether  they  be  men  or  women. 


Iceland 


INDEPEIVDEIVCE  OF  THE  REPUBLIC  OF  ICELAND 

Messages  of  President  Roosevelt  to  the  President  of  Iceland  and  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the 

Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs 


[Released  to  the  press  June  17] 

The  following  messages  were  sent  by  President 
Roosevelt  to  His  Excellency  Sveinn  Bjornsson, 
President  of  the  Republic  of  Iceland,  and  by  Secre- 
tary of  State  Cordell  Hull  to  His  Excellency 
Vilhjalmur  Thor,  Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of 
Iceland : 

Please  accept  my  heartiest  congratulations  on 
your  election  to  the  high  office  of  President  of  the 


Republic  of  Iceland  and  my  best  wishes  and  those 
of  the  people  of  the  United  States  for  the  continued 
prosperity  of  the  Icelandic  nation. 

Franklin  D  Roosevelt 

On  this  historic  occasion  in  Icelandic  history 
please  accept  my  sincere  felicitations  on  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Republic  of  Iceland. 

Cordell  Hull 


Address  by  the  Honorable  Louis  G.  Dreyfus,  Jr.^ 


[Released  to  the  press  June  17] 

Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen  :  I  con- 
sider it  both  a  great  pleasure  and  a  signal  honor 
to  address  you,  Mr.-  President,  as  the  Special 
Representative  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  on  this  unique  and  world-important  occa- 
sion— the  inauguration  of  the  first  President  of 
the  Republic  of  Iceland,  to  whom  I  am  happy 
to  bring  the  very  cordial  personal  greetings  and 
the  congratulations  of  President  Roosevelt.  I 
also  have  the  honor  to  welcome  the  Republic  of 
Iceland  as  the  newest  republic  in  the  family  of 
free  nations.  The  pleasure  which  I  feel  is  derived 
from  the  warmth  of  friendship  existing  here,  and 
the  honor  I  sense  results  from  the  high  standards 
and  ideals  of  patriotism,  democracy,  and  good- 
will for  which  the  Icelandic  nation  stands. 


It  is  indeed  at  a  great  moment  that  I  bring 
you  this  message.  In  that  strange  mutation  of 
events  shaping  the  heroic  history  of  Iceland  it 
is  again  a  terrible  world  war  that  has  given 
impetus  to  the  intense  desire  of  the  people  of 
Iceland  for  independence.  The  countries  from 
which  most  of  your  ancestors  came  and  with 
which  you  have  been  so  closely  associated  in  the 
past  are  at  present  under  the  heel  of  the  oppressor, 
who  confesses  and  openly  preaches  the  unchristian 
doctrines  which  you,  in  common  with  the  other 
peo^jles  in  the  North,  have  combated  these  900 


'  Delivered  at  the  inauguration  of  the  President  of 
Iceland  on  June  17,  1944.  Mr.  Dreyfus  is  Special  Repre- 
sentative of  the  President  with  the  personal  rank  of 
Ambassador. 


558 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


years.  But  it  is  not  the  physical  severance  of 
the  cultural  and  political  ties  with  the  peoples  of 
Denmark  and  Norway  which  has  prompted  you 
to  reaffirm,  once  and  for  all,  your  national  inde- 
pendence. It  is  rather  the  culmination  of  a  cen- 
turies-old desire  for  complete  sovereignty.  Your 
country  was  established  by  an  adventurous  people 
who  moved  westward  to  seek  a  maximum  freedom 
and  independence.  Today  tlieir  goals  have  finally 
been  achieved.  It  is  not  strange  that  hundreds 
of  years  later  the  movement  of  other  peoples 
cherishing  tlie  same  desires  also  was  toward  the 
West. 

More  than  a  thousand  years  ago  a  government 
was  established  at  Thingvellir,  this  very  spot 
where  we  meet  today,  which  provided  for  a  par- 
liament with  legislative  and  judicial  functions. 
The  Althing,  the  world's  oldest  parliament,  is 
universally  recognized  as  Iceland's  greatest  con- 
tribution to  the  development  of  representative 
political  institutions.  The  flame  kindled  here  has 
spread  to  all  lands  where  free  men  assemble. 
Mankind  will  never  forget  this  debt  it  owes  to 
Iceland. 

Here  the  history  of  Iceland  imfolds  itself.  In 
my  mind's  eye  I  see  heroic  figures  marching  across 
the  scene  of  passing  centuries  from  Njal  of 
Bjergthorshval,  Thorvald  Kodransson  the  Far 
Traveler,  who  espoused  Christianity  and  preached 
it  at  the  Althing  in  984,  to  Jon  Sigurdsson,  to 
whom  we  have  this  morning  paid  worthy  tribute. 
Jon  Sigurdsson  saw  clearly  how  the  desire  for 
national  independence  ran  like  a  golden  thread 
through  Iceland's  history.  When  the  Danish 
Government  proposed  to  apply  Denmark's  con- 
stitution of  June  5,  1849  to  Iceland,  thereby  in- 
cluding it  as  an  integral  part  of  the  kingdom,  he 
voiced  the  protest  of  his  countrymen  in  asserting 
that  Iceland  would  not  accept  provincial  au- 
tonomy but  demanded  a  constitution  of  its  own 
as  a  sovereign  state  in  a  confederate  union  with 
Denmark.  He  lived  to  see  the  constitution  of 
1874  which,  despite  its  defects,  represented  a  step 
in  the  direction  of  the  aspirations  of  the  Icelandic 
people  and  whicli  led  to  the  emergence  of  Iceland 
as  a  sovereign  state  with  its  own  flag  in  1918. 

Today  the  United  States  and  Iceland  are  asso- 
ciated to  preserve  that  freedom  so  dear  to  both  of 


us  which  insures  to  every  man  the  inalienable 
rights  with  which  we  were  endowed  by  God.  In 
this  instance,  the  cooperation  is  the  direct  result  of 
the  responsibility  assumed  on  July  7,  1941  by  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  at  the  request  of 
the  Icelandic  Government.  To  my  mind  this  step 
of  paramount  significance  may  be  considered  to 
be  the  cornerstone  of  a  close  relationsliip  between 
our  two  free  independent  nations.  It  has  brought 
our  countries  together  and  has  enabled  citizens  of 
the  United  States — who  are  essentially  democratic 
and  believers  in  individual  liberty,  effective  elec- 
toral suffrage,  and  administrative  honesty — to 
work  side  by  side  in  a  cordial  collaboration  with 
their  Icelandic  brothers,  who  cherish  the  same 
ideals  and  beliefs. 

It  is  my  earnest  hope  that  after  the  termina- 
tion of  the  war  there  will  be  a  further  develop- 
ment of  the  cultural  and  commercial  relations  now 
existing  between  our  two  countries.  This  will  be 
one  of  my  principal  interests,  as  I  am  fully  per- 
suaded that  an  intimate  association  of  this  nature 
will  redound  to  the  benefit  of  both  our  nations 
and  will  further  the  establishment  and  mainte- 
nance of  a  just  and  lasting  peace  throughout  the 
world.  Those  sons  of  Iceland  who  migrated  to  the 
United  States  have  contributed  no  little  to  its  de- 
velopment and,  in  turn,  because  of  a  similarity  of 
ideals  and  customs,  fitted  themselves  with  a  mini- 
mum of  effort  into  the  cultural  system  of  their 
adopted  country.  The  ties  of  friendship  estab- 
lished by  Americans  in  Iceland  and  the  number 
of  Icelandic  students  who  have  gone  to  my  country 
in  pursuit  of  learning  will  contribute  further  to 
strengthen  the  cordial  relationships  which  have 
always  existed  between  our  peoples  and  which,  I 
am  convinced,  will  continue  to  exist  in  the  future. 

You,  Mr.  President,  and  you,  the  people  of  Ice- 
land, stand  on  the  threshold  of  a  new  era  that  will 
bring  you  new  problems.  May  there  be  granted 
to  you  the  same  determination,  the  same  courage, 
and  the  same  viilues  as  wei'e  shown  by  the  first 
Scandinavians  who  made  landfall  on  your  shores, 
who  sailed  a  turbulent  sea  in  open  boats  without 
compass,  and  who  depended  on  the  stars  in  heaven 
and  their  own  stout  hearts  to  reacli  their  goal. 
With  the  same  courage  and  devotion  as  they  dis- 
played, you  will  be  facing  a  liigh  destiny. 


JUNE    17,    1944 


559 


THE  ICELANDIC  INDEPENDENCE  MOVEMENT 

By  Willmtn  C.  Trimhle  ^ 


The  Icelandic  independence  movement  is  con- 
sidered to  have  started  in  the  nineteenth  century. 
It  was  partially  recognized  by  Denmark  in  the 
revival  (»f  the  Althing  ^  in  1843  and  in  the  grant  of 
substantial  home  rule  in  1903.  The  Danish  law  of 
November  30, 1918,  effective  December  1, 1918,  pi-o- 
viding  for  the  union  of  Denmark  and  Iceland,  was 
itself  a  further  concession  by  Denmark  to  the 
growing  demands  for  national  independence.  The 
pertinent  sections  of  this  agreement,  which  is 
usually  referred  to  as  the  "Act  of  Union",  are 
quoted  below :  ^ 

Part  /,  article  1 

"Denmark  and  Iceland  shall  be  free  and  Sover- 
eign States  united  under  a  common  King,  and  by 
the  agreement  contained  in  this  Law  of  Union;  the 
names  of  both  States  shall  be  indicated  in  the 
King's  title." 

Part  III,  article  7 

"Demnark  shall  attend  on  Iceland's  behalf  to  its 
foreign  affairs     .  .  ." 

Part  III,  article  8 

"Denmark  will,  until  such  time  as  Iceland  may 
decide  to  take  over  at  its  own  expense  either 
wholly  or  in  part  the  inspection  of  fishing  in  Ice- 
landic waters,  undertake  to  carry  out  such  under 
the  Danish  flag." 

Part  VI,  article  18 

"On  the  expiration  of  the  year  1940,  both  the 
Kigsdag  and  the  Althing  may  at  any  time  demand 
the  commencement  of  negotiations  for  a  revision 
of  the  Law. 

"If  on  the  exjoiration  of  three  years  after  the 
handing  in  of  a  petition  for  the  commencement  of 
negotiations,  these  do  not  lead  to  a  renewed  agree- 
ment, both  the  Danish  Rigsdag  and  the  Icelandic 
Althing  may  resolve  that  the  agreements  contained 
in  this  Law  shall  be  annulled. 


'  The  autbor  of  this  article  is  an  officer  in  the  Division 
of  Northern  I-]uropean  Affairs,  Department  of  State. 

^Icelandic  I'arliament. 

"Transiation  as  in  British  and  Foreign  State  Papers, 
1917-1018,  vol.  CXI  (London:  His  Majesty's  Stationery 
Office,  1921). 


"In  order  that  this  decision  shall  be  binding,  at 
least  two-thirds  of  the  members  of  each  House  of 
the  Rigsdag  and  of  the  United  Assembly  [Al- 
thing] must  have  voted  in  its  favor,  and  it  must 
subsequently  be  confirmed  by  voting  on  the  part 
of  electors,  who  possess  the  franchise  at  the  usual 
general  elections. 

"If  it  is  shown  by  such  voting  that  at  least  three- 
fourths  of  the  electors  participated  at  the  election, 
and  that  at  least  three-fourths  of  the  voters  are 
for  abolition  of  the  Law,  the  agreement  shall  cease 
to  exist." 

Part  VII,  article  20 

"This  Law  of  Union  comes  into  force  on  the  1st 
December,  1918.     To  which  all  must  conform. 

"Given  at  Amalienborg,  November  30,  1918 
under  the  Royal  Hand  and  Seal. 

(ls)  Christian  R" 

At  the  time  of  its  passage,  the  Act  of  Union  was 
apparently  considered  by  many  Icelanders  to  be 
merely  a  temporary  arrangement  pending  the 
achievement  of  complete  independence,  and  this 
opinion  has  continued  to  be  held,  being  reiterated 
in  an  Althing  resolution  of  April  15,  1937,  which 
stated,  in  translation,  that :  * 

"The  Althing  resolves  to  instruct  the  Govern- 
ment to  prepare  immediately,  in  cooperation  with 
the  Foreign  Affairs  Committee,  the  procedure  for 
handling  foreign  affairs,  at  home  and  abroad, 
which  will  prove  most  suitable  when  the  Icelanders 
take  advantage  of  the  abrogation  clause  of  the  Act 
of  Union,  and  take  the  whole  handling  of  their  own 
affairs  into  their  own  hands    .  .  ." 

The  occupation  of  Denmark  by  Germany  on 
April  9,  1940  prevented  the  King  from  executing 
his  constitutional  powers,''  and  made  it  impossible 
for  Denmark  to  handle  Iceland's  foreign  relations 
and  to  protect  its  fisheries.     Accordingly,  on  April 


*  Text  of  resolution  transmitted  to  the  American  Lega- 
tion at  Reylfjavilj  by  the  Icelandic  Ministry  for  Foreign 
Affairs. 

"  Constitution  of  the  Kingdom  of  Iceland  dated  May  18, 
1920. 


560 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


10,  1940,  the  Icelandic  Cabinet  introduced  into  the 
Icelandic  Althing  the  following  two  resolutions, 
both  of  which  were  passed  by  unanimous  vote :  ^ 

"1.  Having  regard  to  the  fact  that  the  situation 
which  has  been  created  makes  it  impossible  for 
His  Majesty  the  King  of  Iceland  to  execute  the 
Royal  Power  given  to  him  under  the  Constitutional 
Act,  the  Icelandic  Parliament  declares  that  the 
Cabinet  of  Iceland  is,  for  the  time  being,  intrusted 
with  the  conduct  of  the  said  power. 

"2.  Having  regard  to  the  situation  now  created, 
Denmark  is  not  in  a  position  to  execute  the  au- 
thority to  take  charge  of  the  Foreign  Affairs  of 
Iceland,  granted  to  it  under  the  provisions  of  Ar- 
ticle 7  of  the  Danish  Icelandic  Act  of  Union,  nor 
can  it  carry  out  the  fishery  inspection  within  Ice- 
landic territorial  waters  in  accordance  with  Article 
8  of  the  same  Act.  Therefore,  the  Icelandic 
Althing  declares  that  Iceland  will,  for  the  time 
being,  take  entire  charge  of  the  said  affairs." 

A  press  release  summarizing  the  above  resolu- 
tions was  issued  by  the  Danish  Legation  in  Wash- 
ington on  April  10, 1910. 

Iceland's  ability  to  "take  charge  of"  its  foreign 
affairs  has  been  recognized  by  the  United  States 
and  other  governments,  as  is  indicated  by  the  ac- 
crediting of  Ministers  thereto  and  the  negotiation 
of  agreements  such  as  the  Defense  of  Iceland 
Agreement  of  July  1,  1941 "  and  the  Eeciprocal 
Trade  Agreement  of  August  27,  1943.^  Further- 
more, Iceland  already  possessed  some  experience 
in  handling  foreign  affaii's,  an  Icelandic  Legation 
havmg  been  maintained  at  Copenhagen  for  a  num- 
ber of  years  and,  more  recently,  Icelandic  attaches 
having  been  attached  to  Danish  legations  in  certain 
foreign  countries. 

On  May  17,  1941  both  Houses  of  the  Althing 
made  the  following  announcement  with  respect  to 
Iceland's  independence :  * 

"As  a  result  of  the  German  occupation  of  Den- 


'  Utanrikismalataduneytid,  Reykjavik.    Translation  pre- 
pared by  the  American  Consulate  at  Reykjavik. 
^  Executive  Agreement  Series  232. 
^  Executive  Agreement  Series  342. 


mark  the  Icelandic  Parliament  on  April  10,  1940 
passed  two  resolutions  concerning :  first,  the  execu- 
tion of  the  Supreme  Power;  and,  second,  the  con- 
duct of  foreign  affairs,  as  well  as  the  execution  of 
fishery  inspection  within  the  territorial  waters  of 
Iceland. 

"In  these  resolutions  it  was  stated  that,  in  view  of 
the  situation  which  had  been  created,  it  was  im- 
possible for  His  Majesty  the  King  of  Iceland  to 
execute  the  Royal  Power  given  to  him  under  the 
Constitutional  Act,  and  that  therefore  the  Ice- 
landic Parliament  had  entrusted  the  Icelandic  cab- 
inet, for  the  time  being  with  the  conduct  of  the  said 
power. 

"As  a  consequence  of  the  second  resolution, 
which  affirmed  that  Denmark  was  not  in  a  posi- 
tion to  execute  the  authority  to  take  charge  of 
the  foreign  affairs  of  Iceland,  nor  to  carry  out 
the  fishery  inspection  within  the  territorial  waters 
of  Iceland  in  conformity  with  the  provisions  of 
the  Act  of  Union  of  1918,  the  Althing  declared 
that  Iceland,  for  the  time  being,  would  take  com- 
plete charge  of  the  said  affairs. 

"Since  more  than  a  year  has  elapsed  with  the 
situation  unchanged  as  concerns  the  incapacity 
of  His  Majesty  the  King  to  execute  the  Royal 
Power,  and  of  Denmark  to  perform  the  functions 
entrusted  to  it  by  Iceland,  the  situation  required 
that  a  more  precise  attitude  should  be  taken  in 
respect  of  relations  with  Denmark,  so  that,  on 
the  17th  of  this  month,  the  Althing  passed  unani- 
mous resolutions  on  the  subject  of  the  Act  of 
Union  with  Denmark  as  well  as  the  constitutional 
aims  of  the  Althing  as  the  representatives  of  the 
Icelandic  people.  These  resolutions  were  as  fol- 
lows: 

"1.  The  Althing  resolves  to  declare  that  Ice- 
land has  acquired  the  right  to  abolish  entirely 
the  Act  of  Union  with  Denmark,  since  Iceland 
has  had  to  take  into  its  own  hands  the  conduct 
of  all  of  its  affairs,  and  since  Denmark  is  not  in 
a  position  to  attend  to  the  matters  on  behalf  of 

*  Translation  prepared  by  the  American  Consulate  at 
Reykjavik. 


JUNE    17,    1844 


561 


Iceland  which  were  agreed  to  under  the  Danish- 
Icelandic  Act  of  Union  of  1918.  On  the  part  of 
Iceland  there  shall  be  no  question  of  renewing 
the  Act  of  Union  with  Denmark,  although  it  is 
not  thought  expedient  in  the  present  circumstances 
to  eflFect  the  formal  abolition  of  the  imion,  nor  to 
establish  the  final  constitution  of  the  state,  but 
these  will  not  be  postponed  beyond  the  end  of 
the  war. 

"2.  The  Althing  has  resolved  to  appoint  a  re- 
gent, for  a  period  of  one  year,'  to  wield  Supreme 
Power  in  matters  of  state  which  were  placed  in 
the  hands  of  the  cabinet  on  April  10,  1940. 

"3.  The  Althing  decides  to  announce  its  will  that 
a  republic  be  established  in  Iceland  as  soon  as 
the  union  with  Denmark  has  been  formally 
dissolved." 

The  first  and  third  resolutions  were  passed  by 
unanimous  vote  and  the  second  by  a  vote  of  38 
to  3.  Accordingly,  they  may  be  considered  to 
have  represented  the  practical  unanimity  of  feel- 
ing of  Icelanders  on  the  subject  of  relations  with 
Denmark. 

Immediately  following  the  passage  of  the  reso- 
lutions, the  Icelandic  Government  instructed  its 
Charge  d'Affaires  at  Copenhagen  to  bring  them 
to  the  notice  of  the  King  and  the  Danish  Gov- 
ernment. This  was  done  in  a  formal  note  dated 
May  20,  1941.  In  this  connection  it  will  be  re- 
called that  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of 
part  VI,  article  18,  of  the  Act  of  Union  Iceland 
now  possessed  the  right  to  demand  a  revision 
of  this  agreement.  In  reply  the  Danish  Prime 
Minister  on  May  31,  1941  wrote  the  following 
note  to  the  Icelandic  Charge  d'Affaires : ' 

Sir: 

I  hereby  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge  the 
receipt  of  the  message  which  you  submitted  to  me 
on  May  20, 1941,  in  accordance  with  the  instructions 
of  your  Government,  relative  to  two  resolutions 
adopted  by  the  Icelandic  Althing  concerning  the 
dissolution  of  the  Personal  Union  existing  between 


'  Term  of  office  subsequently  extended. 
'  Translation  of  item  in  Copenhagen  Politiken,  June  6, 
1941. 


Denmark  and  Iceland  and  to  request  you  kindly  to 
communicate  the  following  facts  to  the  Government 
of  Iceland : 

The  Danish  Government  fully  appreciates  the 
difficulties  called  for  by  the  existing  circumstances 
which  may  have  led  to  the  adoption  of  these  Reso- 
lutions, but  finds  it  regrettable  that  the  Althing  has 
found  itself  called  upon  to  indicate  at  this  moment 
its  views  with  respect  to  the  interstate  relations 
existing  between  the  two  countries. 

The  Danish  Government,  which  has  observed 
with  satisfaction  the  statement  to  the  effect  that 
Iceland  does  not  regard  it  as  opportune  at  present 
to  take  steps  to  dissolve  the  Union,  has  taken  cog- 
nizance of  this  fact  and  regards  it  as  an  indication 
that  the  Icelandic  Government  intends  at  the  con- 
clusion of  this  war  to  institute  negotiations  to  this 
end.  In  this  connection  the  Danish  Government 
declares  that  as  soon  as  conditions  permit,  it  will 
be  prepared  on  its  part  to  enter  into  negotiations 
upon  the  basis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of 
Union,  and  to  give  due  consideration  to  the  wishes 
of  the  Icelandic  people. 

Th.  Stauning 

A  further  step  toward  independence  was  taken 
on  September  7, 1942,  when  the  following  addition 
to  the  75th  article  of  the  Constitution  of  May  18, 
1920  was  passed  by  the  Althing :  ^ 

"1.  Wlien  the  Parliament  shall  adopt  the  change 
in  the  Icelandic  constitutional  organization  which 
is  outlined  in  its  resolution  of  May  17,  1941,  this 
amendment  as  passed  by  the  Parliament  shall  have 
the  effect  as  fundamental  law  when  the  majority  of 
all  eligible  voters  in  the  country  shall  have  ap- 
proved it  by  secret  popular  vote. 

"2.  This  law  is  effective  at  once." 

A  committee  of  the  Althing  was  appointed  on 
May  22, 1942  to  draft  the  aforementioned  new  con- 
stitution of  Iceland.  Its  draft  was  submitted  to 
the  Althing  in  the  form  of  a  bill  in  April  1943. 
The  proposed  constitution  differed  from  that  of 
May  18, 1920  only  in  that  it  provided  for  the  estab- 

'  Translation  of  item  in  Reylijavik  AlthyduMadid,  Sept. 
8,  1942. 


562 

lishment  of  a  republic  instead  of  a  kingdom,  for 
the  election  of  a  President  to  replace  the  King,  and 
for  the  changes  necessary  as  a  consequence  of  the 
severance  of  the  union  with  Denmark. 

Since  the  three-year  period  following  the  de- 
livery of  the  notice  of  intention  by  Iceland  to 
terminate  the  Act  of  Union  would  not  expire  be- 
fore May  20,  1944,  the  third  anniversary  of  the 
date  on  which  the  Icelandic  Charge  d'Affaires  at 
Copenhagen  delivered  his  note  on  this  subject  to  the 
Danish  Government,  the  Icelandic  Government 
decided  that  immediate  action  on  the  proposed 
constitution  and  the  final  abrogation  of  the  Act  of 
Union  was  not  necessary.  The  delay  in  acting  on 
the  proposed  constitution  did  not  mean  that  senti- 
ment respecting  the  independence  of  Iceland  had 
undergone  any  change.  This  is  indicated  in  the 
following  excerpts  from  a  statement  made  by  the 
Prime  Minister  of  Iceland  before  a  joint  session 
of  the  Althing  on  November  1,  1943:^ 

"It  is  to  be  expected  that  final  decisions  about 
the  establishment  of  a  Kepublic  in  Iceland  and 
about  the  constitution  of  the  Supreme  Power  of 
the  country  will  soon  be  taken  in  the  Althing." 

"The  present  government  will,  therefore,  carry 
out  the  decisions  of  the  Althing  about  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  Republic  in  Iceland,  whenever  such 
decisions  may  be  made  and  to  the  best  of  their 
ability  when  called  upon  to  do  so." 

Further  indication  of  the  views  of  the  Icelandic 
people  with  respect  to  the  severance  of  the  ties 
with  Denmark  was  given  in  an  announcement 
made  on  November  30,  1943  by  spokesmen  of 
the  Conservative,  Progressive,  and  Communist 
Parties,  which  control  45  of  the  52  votes  in  the 
Althing,  to  the  effect  that  the  three  parties  had 
united  in  demanding  a  breach  of  ties  with  Den- 
mark "early  in  1944"  and  the  establishment  of  a 
republic  before  June  17, 1944.= 

In  accordance  with  constitutional  procedure, 
the  proposed  constitution  was  reintroduced  on 
January  12,  1944  to  the  session  of  the  Althing 
which  had  opened  on  January  10, 1944.     Together 

'  Statement  in  translation  prepared  by  the  Icelandic 
Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs,  transmitted  to  the  American 
Legation  at  Rej-lijavik. 

'  Summary  of  statement  transmitted  to  the  Department 
of  State  by  the  American  Legation  at  Reyljjavilj. 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 

with  it  there  was  presented  a  brief  resolution 
providing  for  the  abrogation  of  the  1918  Act  of 
Union  with  Denmark  and  the  retention  by  Danish 
subjects  resident  in  Iceland  of  equal  rights  with 
Icelanders. 

The  Constitution  Bill  was  passed  by  unanimous 
vote  of  the  Althing  on  March  8.  1944,  in  substan- 
tially the  same  form  as  introduced,  the  principal 
modification  being  that  the  first  President  of  the 
republic  should  be  elected  by  the  Althing  for  a 
term  which  would  expire  on  July  31,  1945  and 
that  each  subsequent  President  should  be  elected 
by  direct  vote  of  the  people  for  a  four-year  term. 

The  proposed  resolution  on  the  abrogation  of 
the  Act  of  Union  was  referred  to  the  Joint  Com- 
mittee of  the  Althing  on  the  Constitution  and 
Abrogation  which,  after  making  certain  changes, 
reported  it  out  in  the  following  form :  ^ 

"The  Althing  resolves  to  proclaim  that  the  Act 
of  Union  between  Iceland  and  Denmark  is 
abrogated. 

"This  resolution  shall  be  placed  before  the  elec- 
torate of  the  country  for  acceptance  or  rejection  by 
secret  ballot.  If  the  resolution  is  approved,  it 
shall  become  effective  when  it  has  again  been 
passed  by  the  Althing  following  the  plebiscite." 

The  resolution  was  passed  in  this  form  by  unani- 
mqus  vote  of  the  Althing  on  February  25.  1944. 

As  may  be  noted,  that  section  of  the  draft  resolu- 
tion of  January  10,  1944  regarding  the  retention 
by  Danish  subjects  residing  in  Iceland  of  equal 
rights  with  Icelanders  was  omitted  fi'om  the  text 
of  the  measure  as  passed  by  the  Althing.  Instead, 
a  bill  was  introduced  which  became  law  on  March 
2,  1944,  providing  that  such  rights  should  be  en- 
joyed by  Danish  residents  until  six  months  after 
the  initiation  of  negotiations  on  this  subject 
between  Iceland  and  Denmark. 

In  accordance  with  the  terms  of  article  18  of  the 
Act  of  Union,  a  plebiscite  was  held  on  May  20-23, 
1944  to  vote  on  the  resolution  of  February  25  on 
the  abrogation  of  the  Act  of  Union  and  the  Con- 
stitution Bill  of  March  8.  Slightly  less  than  98 
percent  of  aU  registered  voters  took  part.  Ninety- 
seven  percent  of  the  votes  cast  were  in  favor  of 
terminating  the  union  with  Denmark,  while  95 
percent  approved  the  Constitution  providing  for 

°  Translation  prepared  by  the  American  Legation  at 
Reykjavik. 


JUNE    17,    1944 


563 


the  establishment  of  a  republic.  The  Althing 
ratified  the  action  of  the  people  on  these  two  pro- 
jiosals  by  unanimous  vote  on  June  Ifi,  1944. 

The  Republic  of  Iceland  formally  came  into 
being  on  June  IT,  1944,  the  13;kl  anniversary  of  the 
birth  of  Jon  Sigurdsson,  the  Icelandic  national 
hero.  On  the  same  day  the  first  President  of  the 
Republic  was  elected  by  the  Althing.  President 
Roosevelt  designated  the  American  Minister  to 
Iceland  as  his  Special  Representative  with  the 
personal  rank  of  Ambassador  for  the  inaugural 
ceremonies.  INIoreover,  the  Congress,  in  a  con- 
current resolution  passed  by  unanimous  vote  of 
the  House  of  Representatives  on  June  10, 1944  and 
by  the  Senate  on  June  15,  1944,  conveyed  its  con- 
gratulations to  the  Althing  on  the  establishment 
of  the  Republic  in  the  following  terms : 

"Whereas  the  people  of  Iceland  in  a  free  plebi- 
scite on  May  20  to  23,  1944,  overwhelmingly  ap- 
proved the  constitutional  bill  passed  by  the 
Althing  providing  for  the  establishment  of  a 
republican  form  of  government ;  and 

"Whereas  the  Republic  of  Iceland  will  be  for- 
mally established  on  June  17, 1944 :  Now,  therefore, 
belt 

"Resolved  :  That  the  Congress  hereby  expresses 
to  the  Icelandic  Althing,  the  oldest  parliamentary 
body  in  the  world,  its  congratulations  on  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Republic  of  Iceland  and  its  welcome 
to  the  Republic  of  Iceland  as  the  newest  republic 
in  the  family  of  free  nations." 

A  message  sent  by  the  King  of  Denmark  on  the 
occasion  of  the  June  17  ceremonies  is  referred  to 
in  the  following  press  release  issued  by  the  Ice- 
landic Foreign  Office  on  that  day :  "At  17 : 1.5 
o'clock,  the  Prime  Minister  went  unexpectedly  to 
the  Speaker's  table  and  said  he  has  been  informed 
that  the  Icelandic  Government  had  received  a 
message  from  King  Christian  X  of  Denmark  ex- 
pressing his  best  wishes  for  the  Icelandic  people 
and  hoping  the  ties  of  friendship  which  exist 
between  Iceland  and  other  Scandinavian  couu; 
tries  might  grow  still  stronger.  The  people  re- 
ceived this  news  with  great  applause."  ^ 

Although  the  ties  with  the  Danish  Crown  have 
been  severed  and  the  form  of  the  Government  of 
Iceland  changed,  these  acts  do  not  imply  that  only 

'  Translation  prepared  by  the  American  Legation  at 
Reykjavik. 


now  has  Iceland  become  a  sovereign  state.  It  has, 
in  fact,  enjoyed  this  status  since  December  1, 1918.^ 
Evidence  of  recognition  of  this  fact  by  the  United 
States  is  found  in  the  Treaty  of  Arbitration  with 
Iceland  signed  May  15, 1930.^  Further  evidence  is 
found  in  paragraph  2  of  the  Defense  of  Iceland 
Agreement  which  provides :  * 

"United  States  further  promise  to  recognize  the 
absolute  independence  and  sovereignty  of  Iceland 
and  to  exercise  their  best  efforts  witli  those  powers 
which  will  negotiate  the  peace  treaty  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  present  war  in  order  that  such  treaty 
shall  likewise  recognize  the  absolute  independence 
and  sovereignty  of  Iceland." 

PRESEINTATION  OF  LETTERS  OF  CREDENCE 
BY  THE  UNITED  STATES  MINISTER  TO 
ICELAND 

[Released  to  the  piess  June  15] 

The  remarks  of  the  newly  appointed  Minister 
of  the  United  States  to  Iceland,  the  Honorable 
Louis  G.  Dreyfus,  Jr.,  on  the  occasion  of  the  presen- 
tation of  his  letters  of  credence  to  the  Regent  of 
Iceland  on  June  14, 1944,  follow : 

Excellency  :  I  have  the  honor  to  place  in  Your 
Excellency's  hands  the  letters  of  recall  of  my  pred- 
ecessor, Mr.  Leland  Morris,  and  the  letters  which 
accredit  me  to  you  as  Envoy  Extraordinary  and 
Minister  Plenipotentiary. 

It  is  a  great  distinction  for  me  to  have  been 
designated  by  the  President  of  the  United  States 
to  fulfil  this  high  mission  on  the  eve  of  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Republic  of  Iceland,  an  event  which 
opens  a  new  chapter  in  the  history  of  Iceland. 

Stimulated  by  the  joint  interests  and  the  common 
benefits  which  it  has  created,  a  historic  process  of 
mutual  rapprochement  was  initiated  by  the  agree- 
ment effected  July  1, 1941  between  Iceland  and  the 
United  States.  This  has  served  to  place  the  rela- 
tions between  our  countries  on  a  footing  of  the 
greatest  cordiality  and  confidence,  drawing  closer 
and  closer  the  bonds  of  cooperation  and  friendship 
between  them.  The  deep  interest  in  this  pact 
shown  by  the  President  of  the  United  States  serves 


-  See  pt.  I,  art.  1,  of  the  Act  of  Union,  supra. 

'  Treaty  Series  828 ;  Treaties.  Conventions,  International 
Acts,  Protocols,  and  Agreements  Brtv^een  the  United  States 
of  America  and  Other  Potvers,  192S-37.  vol.  IV,  p.  4074. 

*  Executive  Agreement  Series  232. 


564 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


as  a  gi-eat  incentive  for  me  to  devote  myself  to  the 
best  of  my  ability  to  the  task  of  contributing  to  the 
further  development  of  the  friendly  and  intimate 
relations  which  so  hajipily  exist  between  our  coun- 
ti'ies.  I  hope  that  I  may  in  my  endeavor  count 
upon  the  assistance  and  the  cooperation  of  Your 
Excellency  and  the  Icelandic  Government. 

President  Roosevelt,  with  whom  I  conferred  be- 
fore my  departure  from  the  United  States,  charged 
me  particularly  to  convey  to  Your  Excellency  his 
best  wishes  and  those  of  the  American  people  for 
the  prosperity  of  Iceland  and  for  your  personal 
happiness,  to  which  wishes  I  desire  to  add  my  own. 

The  reply  of  the  Regent  of  Iceland  follows: 

Mr.  Minister:  It  is  with  great  pleasure  that  I 
accept  from  your  hands  the  letters  by  which  His 
Excellency  the  President  of  the  United  States  of 
America  has  accredited  you  as  Envoy  Extraordi- 
nary Plenipotentiary  near  the  Government  of  Ice- 
land. I  am  happy  to  receive  you  in  that  capacity. 
You  may  be  assured  of  my  willingness  and  that  of 
the  officials  of  the  Government  to  cooperate  with 
you  in  the  execution  of  your  important  mission. 
In  accepting  at  the  same  time  the  letters  of  recall 
of  your  predecessor,  I  want  to  express  how  much 
I,  myself,  and  the  Government  appreciated  his 
devoted  work  for  strengthening  the  good  under- 
standing and  the  friendly  relations  between  the 
Governments  and  jieoples  of  our  two  countries. 
Mr.  Morris  has  left  many  good  friends  in  Iceland, 
and  I  am  glad  to  tell  you  that  I  am  one  of  them.  It 
gives  me  an  especially  great  pleasure  that  you  have 
also  arrived  here  as  a  special  representative  with 
rank  of  Ambassador  of  His  Excellency  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  of  America  for  the  pur- 
pose of  representing  him  at  the  inauguration  of  the 
reestablishment  of  the  Republic  in  Iceland.  This 
extraordinary  token  of  friendship  which  His  Ex- 
cellency the  President  has  thus  shown  our  country 
at  this  important  event  in  our  history  has  touched 
the  heart  of  every  Icelander  and  at  the  same  time 
been  invaluable  to  Iceland.  Since  July  7. 1941  the 
friendly  intercourse  and  cordial  relations  between 
Icelanders  and  Americans  have  grown  to  a  great 
extent.  It  is  a  .special  favor  to  me  to  be  able  to 
express  to  you  the  pleasure  of  our  people  with  this 
expansion  of  mutual  knowledge.     We  have  learned 


to  appreciate  the  great  American  nation's  under- 
standing for  our  nation.  This  understanding  has 
been  expressed  both  by  the  authorities  of  the 
United  States  of  America  and  their  representatives 
in  this  country  and  by  the  United  States  armed 
forces  which  have  been  in  this  country  according 
to  an  agreement  for  almost  three  j'ears.  I  think 
I  am  not  saying  too  much  when  I  call  this  a  great 
example,  a  fact  which  may  be  traced  to  the  sincere 
American  love  for  freedom  which  we  Icelanders 
are  proud  to  share  with  our  great  Western  friends. 
I  am  deeply  grateful  for  the  special  greetings  you 
brought  me  from  the  President  of  the  United  States 
and  the  wishes  expressed  therein  towards  Iceland 
and  myself.  I  beg  you  to  express  to  His  Excel- 
lency the  President  my  heart-felt  appreciation  of 
his  greetings  and  of  all  the  various  friendship  he 
has  shown  the  people  of  Iceland  and  myself  both 
now  and  earlier.  I  should  be  most  grateful  if 
you  would  convey  to  His  Excellency  the  President 
my  cordial  wishes  for  his  health  and  happiness  and 
for  the  good  fortune  and  well-being  of  the  people 
of  the  United  States  of  America. 


Far  East 


VISIT  OF  PRESIDENT  OF  AMOY  UNIVER- 
SITY TO  THE  UNITED  STATES 

[Released  to  the  press  June  13] 

President  P.  T.  (Pen-tung)  Sah  has  been  ap- 
pointed by  the  National  University  of  Amoy  as  its 
representative  in  the  United  States  for  a  year's 
visit  at  the  invitation  of  the  Department  of  State, 
according  to  information  just  received  from  China. 
President  Sah  is  not  only  the  administrative  head 
of  one  of  China's  leading  universities  but  is  also 
a  distinguished  professor  of  physics,  with  a  long 
record  of  teaching.  Like  the  five  other  Chinese 
educators  coming  to  this  country  under  the  same 
program,  whose  names  were  announced  by  the 
Department  on  June  7,^  President  Sah  will  visit 
American  colleges  and  universities  and  will  be 
glad  to  lecture  or  take  part  in  conferences. 


Bulletin  of  June  10, 1944,  p.  537. 


JUNE    17,    1944 


Europe 


MINISTER  OF  FINLAND  REQUESTED  TO 
LEAVE  THE  UNITED  STATES 

[Released  to  the  press  June  16] 

The  Minister  of  Finland,  Mr.  Hjalmar  J. 
Procope,  and  three  counselors  of  the  Finnish  Lega- 
tion, Mr.  T.  O.  Vahervuori,  Mr.  Urho  Toivola,  and 
Mr.  Risto  Solanko,  were  handed  their  passports 
on  June  16  and  requested  to  leave  the  country  at 
the  earliest  moment  because  of  activities  on  their 
part  inimical  to  the  interests  of  the  United  States. 

This  action  does  not  constitute  a  rupture  of 
diplomatic  relations  between  the  United  States  and 
Finland. 

VISIT  TO  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  THE 
POLISH  PRIME  MINISTER 

[Released  to  the  press  June  17] 

Just  before  the  departure  of  the  Polish  Prime 
Minister  the  President  of  the  United  States  ad- 
dressed the  following  letter  to  him : 
]\It  de.\r  Mr.  Prime  Minister  : 

I  wish  to  take  this  opportunity,  just  before  your 
departure,  to  wish  you  a  safe  return  after  your 
most  welcome  visit  to  Washington. 

I  particularly  desire  to  express  to  you  the  pleas- 
ure I  had  in  seeing  you  again,  which  enabled  me 
to  have  most  frank,  sincere,  and  friendly  exchanges 
of  views  with  you  on  the  many  questions  which  are 
of  mutual  interest  to  us. 

I  need  hardly  tell  you  how  much  the  American 
people  admire  the  courage  and  fortitude  of  the 
Polish  people,  who  for  almost  five  years  have  borne 
witli  brave  and  stout  hearts  the  cruel  hardships  of 
war  and  oppression.  Their  steadfast  determina- 
tion to  be  free  again  and  the  indomitable  spirit  of 
their  fighting  men  constitute  the  best  pledge  that 
Poland  shall  reassume  her  rightful  place  among 
the  free  nations  of  the  world. 

The  forces  of  liberation  are  on  the  march  to 
certain  victory  and  the  establishment  of  a  peace 
based  upon  tlie  principles  of  freedom,  democracy, 
mutual  understanding,  and  security  for  all  liberty- 
loving  people. 


565 

Permit  me  to  express  again  how  much  I  appreci- 
ated the  opportunity  of  renewing  our  acquaint  ance. 
I  feel  that  such  personal  exchanges  of  views  cannot 
but  contribute  to  mutual  understanding. 
Very  sincerely  yours, 

Franklin  D  Roose\'elt 

The  Prime  Minister  of  Poland,  prior  to  his  de- 
parture, sent  the  following  letter  to  the  President : 

Mr.  President, 

I  am  deeply  touched  and  most  sincerely  grate- 
ful for  the  great  kindness  and  hospitality  which  I 
have  received  from  you  during  my  visit.  May 
I  thank  you  from  the  bottom  of  my  heart  for  all 
the  proofs  of  your  kindness  and  for  giving  me 
so  many  opportunities  of  seeing  you  and  of  hav- 
ing frank  talks  with  you  on  the  vital  subjects 
and  problems  which  affect  Poland  and  Europe 
now  and  after  this  war. 

I  should  like  to  thank  you  not  only  for  your 
most  friendly  and  kind  reception  but  especially 
for  your  deep  and  so  broad  approach  to  the  prob- 
lems of  the  future. 

The  ideals  and  principles  of  the  Atlantic 
Charter  and  of  the  Four  Freedoms  of  which  you 
are  the  initiator  are  for  us  Poles  in  our  hard 
fight  for  the  speedy  liberation  of  our  country  that 
encouragement  and  inspiration  which  we  most 
need  on  our  way  of  struggle,  suft'ering  and  work. 

The  loss  of  individual  freedom  and  of  all  that 
man  possessed  has  strengthened  in  the  Polish 
people  their  love,  respect  and  yearning  for  that 
Freedom.  The  fate  of  the  people  shared  by  all 
social  classes  irrespective  of  their  origin  and 
religion  has  brought  man  closer  to  man  in  my 
country  so  strongly  that  it  has  cemented  the 
foundations  of  Democracy  and  created  the  con- 
ditions necessary  to  mutual  understanding  and 
collaboration.  This  love  of  freedom  increases  the 
striving  to  make  it  .secure  when,  after  the  final 
Victory,  it  will  be  necessary  to  build  new  founda- 
tions for  nations  and  peace-loving  peoples. 

I  leave  greatly  impressed  by  the  conversations 
which  I  was  privileged  to  have  with  you,  by  your 
views  and  your  wide  knowledge  of  human  and 
national  problems. 

I  would  be  very  happy  if  the  few  modest  sug- 
gestions which  you  gave  me  the  opportunity  of 


566 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


contributing  in  our  talks  could  even  in  the  slight- 
est way  serve  the  common  cause  and  be  of  some 
use  to  you,  Mr.  President,  who  are  leading  your 
nation  in  this  great  fight  for  the  common  cause 
together  with  your  Allies,  giving  so  much  of 
youi'self  and  carrying  so  great  a  responsibility  as 
regards  the  fulfillment  of  the  ideals  with  which 
you  have  inspired  tlie  hearts  of  the  soldiers  and 
fighters  for  freedom. 

S.    MiKOLAJCZTK 


American  Republics 


PROPOSAL  FOR  RESCUE  OF  REFUGEES 
FROM  GERMAN  TERRITORY 

[Released  to  the  press  June  17] 

The  Secretary  of  State  sent  the  following  tele- 
gram on  June  17  to  Dr.  Alberto  Guani,  Chairman 
of  the  Emergency  Advisory  Committee  for  Polit- 
ical Defense  in  Montevideo,  with  respect  to  the 
endeavors  being  made  to  rescue  refugees  from 
German  territory : 

I  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge  Your  Excel- 
lency's communication  of  May  31,  transmitting 
to  me  a  copy  of  the  resolution  adopted  by  the 
Committee  on  that  date. 

I  note  that  this  resolution  proposes  that  the 
American  Republics  concert  and  intensify  their 
efforts  to  rescue  from  German  hands  some  thou- 
sands of  oppressed  minorities  holding  non- 
European  documentation;  that  this  be  done  by 
joint  proposals  to  exchange  German  nationals 
from  the  American  Republics  for  these  persecuted 
groups ;  and  that  such  exchanges  can  be  achieved 
consistently  with  security  considerations  sur- 
rounding exchanges  previously  formulated  by 
your  Committee  in  the  interests  of  hemispheric 
defense. 

My  Government  will  be  most  happy  to  parti- 
cipate actively  in  such  an  inter-American  pro- 
gram. In  company  with  some  of  its  sister  repub- 
lics and  other  governments  it  has  been  giving 
intensive  consideration  to  this  problem.  The  di- 
rection and  stimulus  the  Committee's  resolution 


provides  for  the  development  of  a  joint  progi'am 
of  larger  proportions  is  most  welcome,  and  is  in 
line  with  those  great  humanitarian  concepts  for 
which  the  American  Republics  stand. 

I  extend  to  you  and  your  distinguished  col- 
leagues the  assurances  of  my  highest  consideration. 

CoKDELL  Hull 


PRESENTATION  OF  LETTERS  OF  CREDENCE 
BY  THE  AMBASSADOR  OF  COSTA  RICA 

[Released  to  the  press  June  15] 

A  translation  of  the  remarks  of  the  newly  ap- 
pointed Ambassador  of  Costa  Rica,  Seiior  Don 
Francisco  cle  Paula  Gutierrez  upon  the  occasion 
of  the  presentation  of  his  letters  of  credence,  June 
15,  1944,  follows : 

Mr.  President:  The  President  of  Costa  Rica 
has  been  good  enough  to  honor  me  with  the  repre- 
sentation of  my  country  before  your  Government, 
and  in  accepting  so  arduous  a  task  I  have  counted 
upon  Your  Excellency's  benevolent  friendship  in 
order  to  be  able  to  carry  it  out — a  friendship  which 
Your  Excellency  has  ever  manifested  by  lending 
us  your  efficacious  help  and  valued  cooperation 
for  the  purpose  of  settling  the  various  problems 
which  the  difficult  and  abnormal  world  situation 
necessarily  brings  in  its  train. 

I  consider  it  one  of  the  privileges  of  my  life 
that  I  am  permitted  to  represent  my  small  country 
before  the  great  and  powerful  brother  of  the 
north,  in  the  most  important  epoch  of  history, 
when  the  destinies  of  humanity  are  being  forged, 
in  great  part,  by  the  orientation  given  them  by 
the  illustrious  statesman  who — to  the  good  for- 
tune of  all — governs  the  United  States  of 
America. 

The  traditional  friendship  of  our  two  countries 
and  of  their  Governments,  which  has  Imown  no 
eclipse  through  their  independent  life,  has  been 
even  more  strengthened  now  that  the  two  Na- 
tions battle  together  to  preserve  to  man  the  right 
to  live  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  justice, 
under  the  egis  of  law,  and  within  the  framework 
of  democratic  institutions. 

Our  contribution,  Mr.  President,  is  indeed 
modest,  just  as  our  resources  are  modest  and  our 


JUNE    17,    1944 


567 


population  is  small,  but  we  have  offered  all  we 
have  and  we  give  it  with  an  inflexible  determina- 
tion to  serve  until  the  final  victory  be  won.  While 
I  occupy  the  high  position  whicli  has  been  en- 
trusted to  me  I  shall  have  no  other  aspiration 
than  to  follow  that  line  of  conduct,  which  is  the 
one  which  Costa  Eica  has  set  for  herself  as  one  of 
the  United  Nations.  When  peace  comes  we  shall 
Imaintain  that  same  spirit  of  cooperation  and 
solidarity  in  order  to  carry  out  to  the  end  the 
plans  the  study  of  which  has  already  begun 
and  which  have  for  their  purpose  the  consolida- 
tion of  tlie  victory  and  the  rendering  impossible, 
in  so  far  as  that  can  be  done,  the  scourge  of  a 
new  world  war. 

I  have  the  honor  to  present  to  Your  Excellency 
the  letters  of  recall  of  my  distinguished  prede- 
cessor, Seiior  Don  Carlos  Manuel  Escalante,  to- 
gether with  the  credentials  which  accredit  me  as 
Ambassador  Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary 
before  Your  Excellency's  enlightened  Government. 

In  the  name  of  the  President  of  Costa  Rica, 
of  the  Government  and  the  people  of  Costa  Rica, 
and  in  my  own  name,  I  express  my  vei-y  sincere 
good  wishes  for  the  prosperity  and  increasing 
greatness  of  the  United  States  and  for  the  happi- 
ness of  tlie  illustrious  statesman  who  today  directs 
its  destinies. 

The  President's  reply  to  the  remarks  of  Senor 
Don  Francisco  de  Paula  Gutierrez  follows : 

Mr.  A]mb.\ssador  :  It  is  with  great  pleasure  that 
I  receive  the  letters  accrediting  Your  Excellency 
as  Ambassador  of  Costa  Rica  to  the  United  States. 
You  are  welcome  not  only  as  the  representative  of 
an  Ally  in  this  great  struggle — not  alone  for  the 
distinguished  career  which  you  already  have 
achieved — ^but  also  as  one  who  has  always  striven 
to  promote  friendshij)  between  our  respective 
countries.  I  am  happy  to  assure  you  that  you  can 
count  on  the  closest  collaboration  from  the  officials 
of  this  Government  in  carrying  out  the  responsi- 
bilities of  your  office. 

The  United  States  well  remembers  when,  im- 
mediately it  had  been  stricken  by  the  treacherous 
blow  of  an  aggressor,  Costa  Rica  was  in  the  fore- 
front of  those   nations  which  gallantly   ranged 


themselves  on  our  side.  Today  the  aggressor  na- 
tions are  reeling  beneath  our  counterstrokes ;  al- 
though costly  sacrifices  must  yet  be  made,  we  know 
the  victory  will  be  ours.  Costa  Rica  has  shown 
itself  great  in  that  which  makes  a  nation  great — 
a  willingness  to  fight  for  fundamental  principles. 
For  this  reason  Costa  Rica  is  one  of  the  United 
Nations  in  this  great  battle  for  human  dignity  and 
freedom. 

I  shall  be  grateful  if  you  will  convey  to  President 
Picado,  whose  recent  visit  we  remember  so  pleas- 
antly, my  cordial  good  wishes  for  his  personal 
well-being  and  for  the  progress  and  prosperity  of 
the  Costa  Rican  people. 


Treaty  Information 


INTER-AMERICAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

El  Salvador 

The  Director  General  of  the  Pan  American 
Union  informed  the  Secretary  of  State  by  a 
letter  of  June  7,  1944  that  the  instrument  of 
ratification  by  the  Government  of  El  Salvador  of 
the  Convention  on  the  Inter- American  Institute 
of  Agricultural  Sciencee,  which  was  opened  for 
signature  at  the  Pan  American  Union  on  January 
15, 1944,  was  deposited  with  the  Pan  American  Un- 
ion on  May  31,  1944.  The  instrument  of  rati- 
fication is  dated  May  16,  1944. 

REGULATION  OF  INTER-AMERICAN 
AUTOMOTIVE  TRAFFIC 

Brazil 

The  xlmerican  Embassy  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  trans- 
mitted to  the  Department,  with  a  despatch  of 
May  20,  1944,  a  copy  of  Decree  Law  6481  of  May 
9,  1944  approving  the  Convention  on  the  Regu- 
lation of  Inter-American  Automotive  Traffic, 
which  was  deposited  with  the  Pan  American 
Union  and  opened  for  signature  on  December 
15,  1943.  The  Decree  Law  is  printed  in  the 
Brazilian  Diano  Ojicial  of  May  11,  1944. 


568 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


PROVISIONAL  FUR-SEAL  AGREEMENT 

BETWEEN  THE  UNITED  STATES 

AND  CANADA 

The  Canadian  Ambassador  at  Washington 
transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of  State,  with  a  note 
of  June  12,  1944,  copies  of  Order-in-Council  P.C. 
4112  of  May  30,  1944  issued  under  authority  of 
the  Canadian  AVar  Measures  Act  applying  and 
giving  force  of  law,  in  so  far  as  Canada  is  con- 
cerned, to  the  provisions  of  the  Provisional  Fur- 
Seal  Agreement  between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Canada  which  was  effected  by  ex- 
change of  notes  signed  in  Washington  on  Decem- 
ber 8  and  19,  1942.  The  Agreement  entered  into 
force  on  May  30,  1944,  the  date  of  issuance  of 
the  Canadian  Order-in-Council,  and  is  effective 
as  from  June  1,  1942,  under  the  provisions  of 
article  X  of  the  Agreement. 

PROTOCOL  ON  PELAGIC  WHALING 

On  June  16,  1944  the  Senate  gave  its  advice 
and  consent  to  ratification  of  a  protocol  relating 
to  pelagic  whaling  operations  which  was  signed 
at  London  on  February  7,  1944  by  the  accredited 
representatives  of  the  Governments  of  the  United 
States  of  America,  the  Union  of  South  Africa, 
the  Commonwealth  of  Australia,  the  United 
Kingdom'  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland, 
Canada,  New  Zealand,  and  Norway. 


The  Department 


APPOINTMENT  OF  OFFICERS 

By  Departmental  Designation  20,  issued  June 
10,  1944,  effective  June  5,  1944,  the  Secretary  of 
State  designated  Mr.  Carl  B.  Spaeth  as  Chief  of 
the  Division  of  Eiver  Plate  Affairs. 


Publications 


Departjient  of  State 

Treaties  in  Force :  A  List  of  Treaties  and  Other  Interna- 
tional Acts  of  the  United  States  in  Force  on  December 
31,  1941.     Publication  2103.     viii,  275  pp.     40^. 

The  Personnel  Program  of  the  Department  of  State:  Prin- 
ciples and  Policies.     Publication  2129.     8  pp.     5^. 

Diplomatic  List.  June  1944.  Publication  2138.  ii,  121  pp. 
Subscription,  $1  a  year;  single  copy,  100. 

Other  Government  Agencies 

"Sweden   in  1943",  by   Grant  Olson,   Attache,  American 

Legation,  Stockholm. 
"Electronics  in   Peru",  based  on  a  report  by   Frederick 

W.  Hinke,  American  Embassy,  Lima. 

These  two  articles  will  be  found  in  the  June  17, 
1944  issue  of  the  Department  of  Commerce  publica- 
tion entitled  Foreign  Commerce  Weekly^  copies  of 
which  may  be  obtained  from  the  Superintendent 
of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  for  10 
cents  each. 


Legislation 


Caring  for  Refugees  in  the  United  States:  Message  from 
the  President  of  the  United  States  notifying  the  Congress 
that  arrangements  have  been  made  to  care  for  approxi- 
mately 1,000  refugees  in  the  United  States.  H.  Doc.  656, 
78th  Cong.     3  jjp. 

Second  Deficiency  Appropriation  Bill  for  1944 :  Hearings 
Before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Committee  on  Appropri- 
ations, House  of  Representatives,  7Sth  Cong.,  2d  Sess., 
on  the  Second  Deficiency  Appropriation  Bill  for  1944. 
LDepartment  of  State,  pp.  174-190.]     445  pp. 

Second  Deficiency  Appropriation  Act,  1944.  H.  Rept.  1660, 
78th  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  5040.  [Department  of  State,  pp. 
11,12,10,26.]     28  pp. 

Keeonstructiou  Fund  in  Joint  Account  With  Foreign  Gov- 
ernments for  Rehabilitation,  Stabilization  of  Currencies, 


JUNE    17,    1944  569 

and  Reconstruction:  Hearings  Before  the  Committee  on  Departments  of  State.  Justice,  and  Commerce  Appropria- 

Foreign  Affairs,  House  of  Representatives,  TSth  Cong.,  M  tion  Bill,  1945 :  H.  Eept.  1623,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  4204. 

Sess.,  on  H.J.  Res.  226,  a  joint  resolution  to  provide  for  ^,    J*'.     ^             ,,      ,              *  .,     n    *  .i  c5^  *      ^       .  ^ 

Certain  Former  Employees  of  tlie  United  States  Court  for 

a  central  reconstruction  fund  to  be  used  in  joint  account  ^^.^^^      ^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ..g^j^  ^^^^^^  ^^  ^  ^  ^^g^j       ^  pp 

with  foreign  governments  for  rehabilitation,  stabilization  Removing  Restrictions  on  Transfers  of  Small  Craft  to 

of  currencies,  and  reconstruction,  and  for  other  pui-poses.  Other  American  Republics  in  Furtherance  of  the  War 

188  pp.  Effort.     H.  Rept.  1675,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.  R.  499.     4  pp. 


0.    1.  OOVERNUENT  PRIHT1II6  OFriCEt  1144 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  OflJce.  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents     -    -     -     -     Subscription  price,  ?2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WSEKLY  WITH  THE  APFBOVAL  OF  THB  DIBBCTOB  OF  THB  BUBEAD  OF  THE  BUDOBT 


'j3S-i   /  /-fa 


THE    DEPARTMENT    OF    STATE 


BUI 


J 


I 


^ 


^   rm 


riN 


JUNE  24,  1944 
Vol.  X,  No.  261— Publication  2147 


C 


ontents 


Page 


The  War 

Error  of  Statement  by  British  Minister  of  Production: 

Statement  by  the  Secretary  of  State 573 

Appointment  of  Colonel  O'Dwyer  to  the  Allied  Control 

Commission  for  Italy 573 

Thii'd  Anniversary  of  the  Nazi  Attack  on  the  Soviet 

Union 573 

General 

Freedom  of  Infoimation:  Address  by  Assistant  Secre- 
tary Berle 574 

Control  of  the  International  Traffic  in  Arms :  By  James 

M.  Ludlow 576 

American  Republics 

Recognition  by  the  United  States  of  the  New  Govern- 
ment of  Bolivia 584 

Fellowships   for   Citizens   From   the   Other  American 

Republics 584 

Interdepartmental   Committee   on    Cooperation  With 

the  American  Republics 585 

Visit  of  Hondm-an  Architect 585 

Europe 

Arrangements  for  Departure  of  Former  Minister  of 

Finland 585 

The  Far  East 

Floyd  Taylor  Returns  From  China 586 

Gifts  From  United  States  to  Chinese  Institutions   .    .    .       586 

[ovee] 


U.  $.  SUPERtKTE.'^iDE.M  OF  DOCUMENTS 

JUL  25  1944 


0 


OMJe/lfS-CONTINUED 

International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc.  Page 

United  Nations  Monetary  and  Financial  Conference  .    .  587 
United  States  Commission  of  the  Permanent  American 
Aeronautical  Commission:  Statement  by  Oswald 

Ryan 588 

British  Colonies  Supply  Mission 588 

The  Foreign  Service 

The  Joint  Sm'vey  Group :  The  Foreign  Service  Prepares 
To  Meet  Its  Expanding  Responsibilities,  by  Alan 
N.  Steyne 589 

Death  of  Julian  B.  Foster 591 

Treaty  Information 

Protocol  on  Pelagic  Whaling      592 

Military-Service  Agreement  With  China 593 

Intei'-American  Institute  of  Agricultm-al  Sciences   .    .    .  593 
Convention  of  Commerce  and  Navigation,  Chile  and 

Cuba 594 

Publications 594 

Legislation 596 


S.   GOVERNMENT   PRINTING  OFFICE:  1944 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C. 
Price,  10  cents   -   -   .   .    Subscription  price,  ^2.75  a  year 

PUBLISHED  WEBKLY  WITH  THE  APPEOVAL  OF  THE  DIEECTOK  OF  THE  BUEEAD  OF  THE  BUDQBI 


The  War 


ERROR  OF  STATEMENT  BY  BRITISH  MINISTER  OF  PRODUCTION 


Statement  by  the 

[Released  to  the  press  June  20] 

Unfortunately,  the  statement  of  the  British 
Minister  of  Production  is  entirely  in  error  as  to 
the  facts  and  fails  to  state  the  true  attitude  of  the 
United  States  both  during  the  earlier  stages  of 
military  preparation  for  world  conquest  by  Ger- 
many and  Japan  and  during  the  later  aggressions 
by  those  two  countries. 

This  Government  from  the  beginning  to  the  end 
was  actuated  by  the  single  policy  of  self-defense 
against  the  rapidly  increasing  danger  to  this  Na- 


Secretary  of  State 

tion.  The  aid  given  to  Great  Britain  and  other 
countries  who  were  resisting  conquest  was,  in  the 
woixls  of  the  Lend-Lease  Act,  "vital  to  the  defense 
of  the  United  States." 

Japan  for  years  had  notoriously  pursued  a  pro- 
gram of  the  widest  conquest.  In  1931  she  seized 
Manchuria;  in  1937  she  invaded  China;  in  1940 
she  entered  Indochina;  and  finally  in  1941  she 
lamiched  the  unprovoked  attack  on  the  United 
States  at  Pearl  Harbor. 


APPOINTMENT  OF  COLONEL  O'DWYER 

FOR 

[Released  to  the  press  June  23] 

The  President  has  appointed  Col.  William 
O'Dwyer  to  be  the  ranking  American  official  of  the 
Economic  Section  of  the  Allied  Control  Commis- 
sion for  Italy  with  the  title  of  Vice  President.  He 
will  have  the  personal  rank  of  Minister.  In  this 
capacity  Colonel  O'Dwyer  will  repi'esent  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign  Economic  Ad- 
ministration. Colonel  O'Dwyer  will  succeed  Mr. 
Henry  F.  Grady. 

Colonel  O'Dwyer  was  commissioned  June  1, 
1942  as  a  major  and  since  August  1942  has  served 
with  the  Army  Air  Forces  in  Washington  and  at 
Wright  Field,  Ohio. 


TO  THE  ALLIED    CONTROL  COMMISSION 
ITALY 

The  Allied  Control  Commission  for  Italy  is  a 
combined  Allied  body,  staffed  by  both  military 
and  civilian  personnel,  operating  under  the  presi- 
dency of  the  Allied  theater  commander,  Gen.  Sir 
Henry  M.  Wilson.  Its  Deputy  President  is  Lieu- 
tenant General  Mason-Macfarlane  of  the  British 
Army.  The  Allied  Control  Commission  for 
Italy  was  established  to  supervise  the  execution 
of  the  terms  of  the  armistice  and  acts  in  an 
advisory  capacity  with  the  Italian  Govermnent 
on  matters  of  military,  economic,  and  civilian 
admmistration. 


THIRD  ANNTVERSARY  OF  THE  NAZI  ATTACK  ON  THE  SOVIET  UNION 


[Released  to  the  press  June  22] 

At  his  press  and  radio  news  conference  on  June 
22  the  Secretary  of  State  said : 

"Again  we  mark  the  anniversary  of  the  brutal 
Nazi  assault  upon  the  Soviet  Union.  The  tre- 
mendous accomplishments  achieved  by  the  Soviet 
armies  during  a  series  of  brilliant  offensive  cam- 


paigns during  the  past  year  have  forced  the  Nazis 
to  disgorge  the  bulk  of  their  momentary  conquests 
in  the  Soviet  Union.  No  one  can  doubt  that  the 
Soviet  forces  will  continue  their  brilliant  offensive 
record  in  the  forthcoming  decisive  battles  for  the 
liberation  of  Europe." 

573 


General 


FREEDOM  OF  INFORMATION 
Address  by  Assistant  Secretary  Berle 


[Released  to  the  press  June  21] 

Gentlemen  :  Any  meeting  of  the  Foreign  Press 
Association  is  an  event  of  importance.  This  is 
particularly  true  when  it  meets  to  welcome  as  dis- 
tinguished a  guest  of  honor  as  Sir  Keith  Murdoch, 
who  is  famous  not  only  in  Australia  but  through- 
out the  entire  Western  Pacific  area.  This  is  a  part 
of  the  world  about  which  we  are  learning  in  two 
ways :  the  hard  way,  as  we  fight  over  great  parts  of 
it,  island  by  island ;  and  the  friendly  way,  as  we 
grow  in  acquaintance  with  our  Allies,  the  Com- 
monwealth of  Australia,  the  Dominion  of  New 
Zealand,  and  the  Netherlands. 

On  the  hard  side,  our  comradeship  has  become 
blood  brotherhood  as  Australians,  New  Zealand- 
ers,  Netherlanders,  and  Americans  work  together, 
fight  together,  die  together,  and  win  together 
against  a  bitter  foe  of  everything  we  hold  dear. 
But  with  this  has  come  the  happiness  of  friendly 
competition  as  intercourse  grows  and  as  friendly 
visits  ripen  into  lasting  neighborship. 

In  the  unending  process  of  international  life,  the 
foreign  press  and  the  foreign  correspondents  have 
come  to  play  a  decisive  part.  They  have  a  direct 
function  in  the  regular  day's  work  of  foreign  af- 
fairs, and  an  even  greater  significance  in  the 
growth  of  world  institutions.  The  exchange  of 
foreign  news,  foreign  correspondence,  is  now  the 
raw  material  of  world  opinion.  On  that  opinion 
the  relations  between  countries  must  finally  rest. 

Four  great  countries,  the  United  States,  Great 
Britain,  the  Soviet  Union,  and  China,  committed 
themselves  at  Moscow  to  work  out  as  soon  as  prac- 
ticable a  world  organization  for  the  purpose  of  as- 
suring continued  peace  when  the  present  battles 
are  done.  It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  freedom 
of  information  is  a  major  necessity  if  world  or- 
ganization is  to  succeed.  With  freedom  of  in- 
formation there  is  possibility  of  understanding 
between  peoples.  Without  it  the  way  is  always 
open  to  build  up  misunderstanding,  suspicion, 
fear,  and  finally,  hatred.    Often  a  knowledge  of 

674 


the  facts  ends  the  suspicion;  a  square  look  at  the 
situation  allays  fear ;  and,  except  in  rare  cases,  few 
people  hate  where  they  are  fully  informed. 

Propaganda  which  is  misrepresentation,  and 
plain  lies,  of  course,  may  start  under  a  system  of 
free  information ;  but  they  are  not  apt  to  last  very 
long.  Where  there  is  free  access  to  the  news  and 
freedom  to  transmit  it  the  truth  does  eventually 
emerge.  In  many  cases  the  public  wants  to  know 
the  facts,  and  keeps  on  wanting  to  know  the  facts ; 
and  for  that  reason  it  ultimately  does  get  the  facts. 
Over  the  long  pull  it  generally  reaches  judgments 
that  are  sound  and  just.  But  this  cannot  be  done 
if  there  is  not  the  widest  access  to  the  news,  and  the 
widest  facility  for  assuring  that  the  news  can  be 
transmitted. 

In  wartime  there  are,  of  course,  obvious  excep- 
tions which  are  known  and  recognized  by  all  rea- 
sonable people.  But  in  peacetime  the  greatest 
safeguard  in  foreign  relations  is  the  gathering  and 
publishing  of  news  and  views,  and  the  interchange 
of  these  among  peoples. 

It  is  not  amiss  to  pay  tribute  here  to  the  men 
who  make  a  profession  of  foreign  correspondence. 
They  are  the  advance  guard  in  international  rela- 
tions. Their  profession,  their  work,  takes  courage 
and  high  professional  training.  Among  their 
ranks  are  heroes :  the  men  who  have  moved  out  in 
the  big  pushes;  who  have  lived  and  have  died  in 
the  front  lines ;  who  have  kept  the  world  informed 
from  foxholes,  under  shell  fire,  in  the  captured 
cities  among  the  land  mines  and  booby  traps ;  who 
have  told  the  stories  of  air  raids  from  the  bays  of 
the  Flying  Fortresses ;  and  who  have  given  us  the 
laughter  and  the  grief  of  the  field  forces.  These 
men  we  honor ;  probably  even  now  we  do  not  realize 
how  deeply  we  are  in  their  debt. 

But  let  us  also  pay  tribute  to  a  diflferent  kind  of 
courage  and  devotion,  less  often  recognized  but 


'Delivered  before  the  Foreign  Press  Association,  New 
Yorlj,  N.Y.,  June  21,  1944. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


575 


no  less  important  in  the  great  scheme  of  demo- 
cratic life.  These  are  the  men  and  the  organiza- 
tions behind  them  who  steadfastly  insist  on  writ- 
ing and  reporting  the  truth  as  thej'  see  it  from  day 
to  day,  even  when  the  truth  they  have  to  utter  is 
not  pleasant  to  their  readers.  It  is  true  that  pub- 
lic opinion  wants  the  facts  and  at  long  last  gen- 
erally gets  them ;  but  it  also  is  true  that  people  like 
to  be  told  what  they  want  to  hear.  If  the  facts 
are  not  pleasant,  if  the  truth  does  not  go  along 
with  the  current  desire,  there  is  great  temptation, 
and  sometimes  danger,  in  hewing  to  the  line  and 
telling  the  unslanted  story.  All  of  us  have  known 
foreign  correspondents  who  have  had  chances  to 
lead  an  easier  life  by  tipping  the  scales  in  favor  of 
a  popular  passion.  Sometimes,  by  putting  a 
slight  twist  on  their  stories  they  could  please  pow- 
erful groups  in  the  country  in  which  they  were 
working.  Sometimes,  by  not  looking  too  closely 
at  the  origin  of  a  story,  they  could  score  a  tem- 
porary success.  Sometimes,  by  omitting  impor- 
tant facts,  they  could  secure  the  political  gratitude 
of  important  people.  There  are  men  known  to 
most  of  you  who  have  met  these  situations,  some- 
times at  the  greatest  of  risk  to  themselves — the 
heroes  of  the  struggle  for  information  on  which 
world  relationships  and  world  safety  finally  rest. 

A  group  of  such  men  stayed  in  Berlin  and  Tokyo 
until  war  finally  blacked  out  those  Axis  capitals. 
In  the  face  of  pressure  and  threats  and  bribery 
and  influence  of  all  kinds,  they  tried  to  the  end  to 
tell  the  world  the  real  nature  of  the  Nazi  plans, 
to  warn  their  countries  of  the  coming  attack. 
Such  foreknowledge  as  world  opinion  had  of  the 
criminal  intentions  of  the  Nazi  and  Japanese  rul- 
ers came  principally  from  these  men.  This  is  but 
one  of  many  instances  which  could  be  given. 

At  present,  foreign  correspondence  and  the  ex- 
change of  views  between  nations  is  the  first  line 
of  defense  of  any  country  against  hostile  propa- 
ganda. Without  it  public  opinion  would  be  in 
danger  of  being  led  like  sheep  by  alien  propaganda 
machines.  Our  enemies  know  this  and  paid  tribute 
to  the  strength  and  influence  of  foreign  correspond- 
ence by  the  efforts  they  made  to  control  and  cor- 
rupt it.  They  appreciated  that  an  earnest  and  able 
reporter  is  a  powerful  figure;  and  the  history  of 
propaganda  in  this  war  is  filled  with  efforts  by 


enemy  services  to  secure  a  foothold  in  our  coun- 
tries by  way  of  foreign  news.  Happily,  the  record 
shows  that  few  men  in  this  great  profession  were 
victims  of  these  attempts. 

The  growing  power  of  the  profession  of  trans- 
mitting foreign  news  carries  with  it  corresponding 
responsibility.  Where  institutions  come  to  be 
trusted  as  they  have  in  the  United  States,  they 
must  also  accept  the  duties  that  arise  from  that 
trust. 

In  some  quarters  the  doctrine  has  grown  up  that 
it  is  legitimate  for  the  fact-gathering  reporter  also 
to  represent  a  point  of  view,  and  to  direct  his  fact- 
gathering  and  his  comment  according  to  that  point 
of  view.  Clearly,  any  informed  man  has  a  right  to 
a  point  of  view  and,  indeed,  will  almost  inevitably 
have  one.  But  the  facts  are  neither  liberal  nor 
conservative,  neither  radical  nor  reactionary. 
They  are  what  they  are.  It  used  to  be  one  of  the 
standing  complaints  against  certain  sections  of  the 
European  press  before  this  war  that  one  could 
never  read  the  news,  but  only  a  disguised  editorial 
about  the  news.  Today  I  think  most  correspond- 
ents and  news  services  recognize  the  obligation  to 
separate  clearly  their  account  of  the  facts  from 
their  views  about  them,  so  that  the  reader  or 
radio  listener  will  always  know  what  happened, 
rather  than  the  opinion  of  the  reporter  or  news- 
paper or  press  association  about  what  happened. 

Even  greater  is  the  obligation  never  to  surrender 
mind  and  judgment  to  any  outside  influence — no 
matter  how  worthy  it  may  appear.  The  final 
guarantee  of  the  institution  of  free  information  by 
press  and  radio  rests  on  the  honor  of  the  reporter : 
on  the  fact  that  he  is  true  to  himself  and  serves  no 
master  except  his  best  judgment  as  to  the  truth, 
and  his  professional  care  and  skill  in  presenting  it. 

These  are  commonplaces,  and  they  would  hardly 
be  worth  repeating  if  it  were  not  for  the  fact  that 
great  events  are  influenced  in  large  measure  by 
precisely  this  instrument  of  free  information. 
There  is  double  danger  in  controlling  information : 
the  danger  that  the  public  is  deceived,  and  the 
even  greater  danger  that  the  group  attempting  to 
control  information  will  deceive  itself.  We  have 
seen  governments  which  got  control  over  the  press 
and  radio  of  their  own  countries  and  sent  out  false 
or  colored  information  to  other  comitries.    And 


576 


DEPARTMENT  OF  STATE  BULLETIN 


we  have  seen  the  results :  that  the  repetition  of  the 
propaganda  they  sent  out  came  back  to  them,  and 
they  were  unable  to  distinguish  the  facts  from  the 
fiction  they  themselves  had  spread.  Hitler  worked 
up  a  German-controlled  propaganda  to  attempt  to 
divide  opinion  in  the  United  States;  and  I  think 
he  came  pretty  close  to  convincing  himself  that 
American  opinion  was  actually  so  divided  that 
the  United  States  would  not  or  could  not  defend 
itself.  Frequently — perhaps  usually — a  govern- 
ment which  tries  to  spread  false  propaganda 
abroad  ends  up  by  believing  the  picture  it  tries 
to  create,  for  the  men  who  are  willing  to  be  con- 
trolled in  putting  out  information  are  pretty  apt 
to  be  untrustworthy  reporters  when  they  send  in- 
formation back.  That  would  be  reason  enough — 
though  there  are  many  more — why  the  United 
States  has  never  believed  in  a  press  controlled 
either  by  the  Government  or  by  any  outside  in- 
terest. It  has  never  had  a  controlled  press  and,  I 
hope,  never  will. 


This  country  has  been  glad  to  welcome  as  hon- 
ored guests  and  colleagues  the  editors  and  cor- 
respondents from  other  countries.  It  has  at- 
tempted to  maintain  freedom  of  information.  It 
has  appreciated  the  courtesies  extended  to  its 
editors  and  reporters  overseas.  Its  hearty  and 
sincere  goodwill  is  based  on  deeper  feeling  than 
courtesy.  In  the  firm  conviction  that  all  of  us  are 
colleagues  in  the  endless  task  and  high  adventure 
of  knitting  together  a  civilization  which  is  once 
more  promising  peace  and  decency  and  hope,  let 
me  salute  you.  It  is  not  an  accident  that  your 
profession  has  been  known  and  honored,  in  its 
various  forms,  from  the  modern  days  of  radio  to 
the  earliest  days  of  prehistoric  Greece.  Homer 
and  Euripides  paid  homage  to  the  bearers  of  tid- 
ings, the  messengers  who  play  so  large  a  part  in 
the  great  classic  dramas.  A  Cabinet  Minister  and 
a  workman's  family,  seeking  to  know  the  fate  of 
their  country  and  friends  in  the  struggles  of  today, 
honor  the  bearers  of  tidings  no  less. 


CONTROL  OF  THE  INTERNATIONAL  TRAFFIC  IN  ARMS 

By  James  M.  Ludloio  ^ 


Born  in  Neutrality  and  brought  up  in  War. 

That  is  the  biography  of  the  Department  of 
State's  administration  of  the  control  of  the  inter- 
national traffic  in  arms,  ammunition,  and  imple- 
ments of  war.  In  the  past  this  control,  now  near- 
ing  the  end  of  its  first  decade,  attracted  considera- 
ble attention.  Today,  when  the  Nation  is  produc- 
ing staggering  quantities  of  all  types  of  weapons 
and  implements  of  war,  the  part  which  the  De- 
partment plays  in  the  administrative  control  over 
the  ceaseless  outflow  of  war  materiel  to  all  parts 
of  the  world  seems  buried,  pei-haps,  beneath  mili- 
tary requirements,  production  figures,  and  lend- 
lease  shipments.  One  must,  however,  understand 
two  facts  that  are  backed  up  by  law :  first,  that  any 
shipment  of  arms,  ammunition,  and  implements  of 
war  which  are  so  designated  by  presidential  proc- 
lamation, not  consigned  to  our  armed  forces  or 
consigned  as  lend-lease  aid,  requires  an  export 
license  issued  by  the  Department ;  and,  second,  that 
everyone  who  manufactures,  imports,  or  exports 
any  arms,  ammunition,  and  implements  of  war 
must  register  with  the  Department.  Thus,  the 
administrative  system  which  was  established  in 


1935  in  an  effort  to  keep  this  Nation  out  of  war  is 
now  assisting  the  war  effort,  and  under  virtually 
the  same  laws  and  regulations. 

The  year  1935  may  now  seem  remarkably  remote, 
but  in  considering  the  origin  of  the  control  of  the 
international  traffic  in  arms  one  must  recall  briefly 
the  prevailing  ideas  of  that  time.  A  Senate  com- 
mittee under  the  chairmanship  of  Senator  Gerald 
P.  Nye  of  North  Dakota  had  just  completed  a 
searching  investigation  of  the  Nation's  munitions 
industry ;  books  like  Merchants  of  Death  by  Engel- 
brecht  and  Hanighen  and  Iron,  Blood,  and  Profits 
by  Seldes  were  receiving  wide  circulation;  the 
theses  that  this  country  had  been  dragged  into  the 
last  war  by  munitions-makers,  international  bank- 
ers, and  "freedom  of  the  seas"  were  generally 
acceptable  ones;  and  there  were  under  considera- 
tion a  dozen  House  and  Senate  resolutions  which 
sought  to  control,  curtail,  or  prohibit  the  exporta- 
tion of  munitions  in  time  of  war.    One  of  these 


'  The  author  of  this  article  is  Eegistration  and  Liaison 
Officer  iu  the  Munitions  Control  Unit,  Supply  and  Re- 
sources Division,  Office  of  Wartime  Economic  Affairs,  De- 
partment of  State. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


577 


proposed  measures  (H.R.  8788,  74th  Con,g.,  1st 
sess.)  called  for  the  establishment  of  a  National 
Munitions  Control  Board,  the  administrative  func- 
tions of  which  would  be  under  the  direction  of  the 
Secretary  of  State.  This  resolution  made  no  pro- 
vision for  embargoes ;  it  merely  intended  to  provide 
for  an  agency  which  would  register,  license,  and 
publicize  the  international  traffic  in  arms.  This 
proposed  law  was  never  reported  out  of  committee, 
but  its  ideas  were  incorporated  in  the  joint  resolu- 
tion drafted  by  Senator  Pittman  of  Nevada  which 
was  enacted  as  the  Neutrality  Act  of  August  31, 
1935.^  This  law  outlined  an  inflexible  position 
whereby,  if  the  President  recognized  a  state  of  war 
to  exist  anywhere,  shipments  of  arms,  ammunition, 
and  implements  of  war  were  prohibited  to  all  des- 
ignated belligerents. 

The  Neutrality  Acts  of  1935,  May  1,  1937,^  and 
November  4, 1939  ^  and  the  Spanish  Embargo  Act 
of  January  8, 1937  "*  left  no  discretion  to  the  Presi- 
dent or  to  the  Secretary  of  State  in  the  matter  of 
issuing  or  rejecting  export-license  applications. 
If  no  embargo  prevailed,  all  applications  had  to  be 
gra nted.  If  an  embargo  prevailed,  no  applications 
could  be  granted.  An  appreciation  of  this  fact 
will  help  one  to  understand  the  policy  that  the 
President  and  the  Department  pursued  in  refusing 
to  issue  export  licenses  for  shipments  of  arms  to 
both  factions  in  the  Spanish  Civil  War  and  in  re- 
fusing to  declare  an  embargo  against  shipments 
to  China  and  Japan.  Such  an  embargo  would 
have  been  far  more  damaging  to  China's  defenses 
than  to  Japan's  offensives.  Authority  to  reject 
license  applications  in  individual  cases  has  existed 
only  since  the  enactment  of  the  Export  Control 
Act  of  July  2,  1940.^5  Today  that  authority  is 
vested  in  the  Office  of  Foreign  Economic  Admin- 
istration, not  in  the  Department  of  State. 

The  law  under  the  authority  of  which  the  De- 
partment administers  the  control  of  the  interna- 
tional arms  traffic  was  enacted  on  November  4, 
1939  as  the  result  of  a  special  session  of  Congress 
called  by  the  President  after  the  outbreak  of  the 
war.  "WTiile  eliminating  the  embargo  provisions, 
it  maintained  the  National  Munitions  Control 
Board  and  reassigned  the  administrative  functions 
of  the  Board  to  the  Secretary  of  State.  These 
functions  may  be  designated  as  the  registration  of 
manufacturers,  importers,  and  exporters  of  arms, 


ammunition,  and  implements  of  war;  the  licensing 
of  exportations  or  importations  of  this  war  mate- 
riel; the  supervision  over  and  the  preparation  of 
reports  on  the  international  arms  traffic;  and  the 
regulation  and  clearance  of  military  secrets  for 
use  by  foreign  governments,  corporations,  or  na- 
tionals. At  present  the  Munitions  Control  Unit, 
headed  by  Frederick  Exton,  performs  these  func- 
tions in  the  Department  for  the  Secretary  of  State. 
The  Munitions  Control  Unit  is  a  part  of  the  Office 
of  Wartime  Economic  Affairs,  of  which  Charles 
P.  Taf  t  is  Director. 

Registration 

Registration  as  a  manufacturer,  importer,  or 
exporter  of  any  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  or  imple- 
ments of  war  cited  in  the  President's  proclamation 
is  a  relatively  simple  procedure.  Any  person  who 
wishes  to  engage  or  who  is  already  engaged  in  the 
munitions  business  must  apply  to  the  Dejaartment 
for  registration.  He  receives  an  aj^plication  blank 
which  requests  certain  necessary  information  by 
which  the  Department  can  determine  whether  the 
applicant  is  subject  to  registration  and  by  which 
it  can  understand  his  relationship  to  the  entire 
munitions  industry  and  to  the  international  traffic 
in  arms.  In  general,  this  required  information 
includes  names  and  locations  of  all  places  of  busi- 
ness ;  the  names  of  the  officers  or  business  associates 
of  the  applicant;  the  names  of  the  major  stock- 
holders, subsidiaries,  and  parent  companies,  and 
foreign  agents  and  affiliates,  if  any;  the  usual 
nature  of  business  engaged  in,  if  not  regularly  in 
the  munitions  business;  and  a  statement  of  the 
articles  listed  in  the  President's  proclamation 
which  the  applicant  proposes  to  or  does  manufac- 
ture, import,  and  export.  The  applicant  attests  to 
the  truth  of  the  statements  made  in  the  application 
by  so  swearing  before  a  notary  public. 

If  the  application  is  found  to  be  in  order  and  is 
accompanied  by  the  registration  fee  of  $100,  the 
applicant  receives  a  certificate  of  registration, 
which  is  valid  for  five  years  from  the  date  of 
issuance. 

If  at  any  time  during  the  five  years  the  appli- 
cant wishes  to  have  the  certificate  amended  by 


'  49  Stat.  1081. 
=  50  Stat.  121. 
=  54  Stat.  4. 


*  50  Stat.  3. 
"  04  Stat.  714. 


578 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


changing  his  name,  his  business  location,  or  the 
description  of  his  activities,  or  by  adding  or  delet- 
ing any  of  the  articles  listed  in  the  President's 
pi-oclamation,  he  merely  has  to  submit  an  applica- 
tion for  an  amended  certificate  of  registration.  If 
his  application  is  found  to  be  in  order,  he  will 
receive  an  amended  certificate,  which  will  be  valid 
for  the  unexpired  portion  of  the  original  certifi- 
cate. The  amendment  or  replacement  of  a  certifi- 
cate does  not  require  the  payment  of  another  fee. 

From  time  to  time  in  the  past  considerable  con- 
fusion has  existed  in  the  minds  of  some  of  the  reg- 
istrants as  to  the  exact  nature  and  purpose  of  the 
certificate  of  registration.  There  have  been  sev- 
eral instances  which  have  come  to  the  attention  of 
the  Department  where  the  registrants  have  inter- 
preted the  possession  of  a  certificate  as  approval  by 
the  Department  of  their  efforts  to  promote  the  sale 
of  and  the  traffic  in  munitions.  Such  an  impres- 
sion, however  acquired,  is  incorrect.  The  certifi- 
cate is  merely  evidence  of  the  fact  that  the  posses- 
sor has  complied  with  the  law  and  with  the  regula- 
tions which  required  him  to  register. 

Another  matter  which  has  caused  many  in- 
quiries, and  in  a  few  cases  much  heat,  has  been  that 
of  requiring  registration,  now  that  we  are  at  war, 
under  the  provisions  of  the  Neutrality  Act.  This 
misunderstanding  is  natural,  for  the  title  of  the  act 
is  certainly  incongruous  today — especially  since 
nearly  all  the  law  has  been  repealed.  The  confu- 
sion is  lessened,  however,  if  one  bears  in  mind  that 
the  purpose  of  controlling  the  international  traffic 
in  arms  through  registration  and  licenses  has  been 
to  supervise  the  traffic :  the  p-urpose  of  neutrality 
was,  basically,  to  stop  the  traffic.  Today  the  De- 
partment finds  that  by  referring  to  the  act  as  the 
joint  resolution  approved  November  4,  1939,  no 
occasion  for  confusion  arises.  It  is  well  to  point 
out,  however,  that  under  section  12(g)  of  this  act 
the  Government  is  barred  from  contracting  for  the 
purchase  of  any  arms,  ammunition,  or  implements 
of  war  with  any  person  who  has  not  registered  with 
the  Department.  Hence  the  name  of  the  act 
should  not  and  generally  does  not  mislead  those 
who  contract  for  the  manufacture  of  arms  for  the 
Government. 

Today  there  are  nearly  1,500  registrants,  of 
whom  well  over  900  are  registered  solely  as  manu- 


facturers. It  is  not  startling  to  learn  that, 
although  the  laws  requiring  registration  have  been 
in  effect  since  August  1935,  about  1,100  persons  and 
concerns  have  registered  only  since  the  outbreak  of 
the  war.  Nearly  400  persons  are  registered  to 
manufacture,  import,  and  export;  about  70  regis- 
trants are  engaged  solely  in  the  import-export 
trade,  of  whom  a  number  are  foreign  purchasing 
commissions ;  and  about  30  persons  are  registered 
only  to  export.  Formerly  one  was  registered 
solely  to  import.  Many  of  the  older  registrants, 
especially  the  aviation  companies  who  manufac- 
ture munitions,  have  also  registered  to  import  and 
exjDort  their  own  commodities. 

In  tribute  to  American  industrial  ingenuity,  it 
is  worth  noting  that  the  major  portion  of  the  1,100 
are  normally  engaged  only  in  peacetime  manufac- 
turing activities,  and  many  have  had  to  do  a  re- 
markable conversion  job  in  order  to  produce  war 
materiel.  Thus,  a  maker  of  refrigerators  is  mak- 
ing aircraft  engines ;  a  casket-maker  is  turning  out 
cartridges  and  shells;  a  baby's  crib  manufacturer 
is  making  bomb-release  mechanisms ;  a  producer  of 
dustpans  and  mailboxes  is  making  fragmentation 
bombs ;  and  a  maker  of  church  pews  is  manufac- 
turing anti-tank  mines.  One  can  reasonably  sup- 
pose, in  view  of  this  fact,  that  should  the  war  be 
over  by  the  time  their  certificates  expire,  many  of 
the  manufacturers  will  not  re-register. 

Licensing 

The  licensing  procedure  is,  naturally,  a  much 
more  complicated  pi'ocess  than  that  of  registra- 
tion. This  fact  has  become  particularly  true  since 
the  outbreak  of  the  war.  From  the  formal  advent 
of  the  licensing  system  in  1935  to  November  4, 
1939  the  chief  concern  of  the  Department  upon  re- 
ceiving an  export  application  was  to  ascertain  to 
its  satisfaction  that  the  arms  or  munitions  to  be  ex- 
ported were  not  ultimately  destined  for  a  govern- 
ment or  for  an  area  to  which  the  shipment  was 
embargoed  by  a  presidential  proclamation. 

The  act  of  November  4,  1939,  by  putting  the 
traffic  on  a  so-called  cash-and-carry  basis,  changed 
the  legal  restrictions  on  the  shipments  of  arms  to 
belligerents.  This  act  reduced  somewhat  the  im- 
portance of  the  matter  of  the  ultimate  destination 
of  the  munitions,  although  it  did  not  alter  the  fact 


JUNE    24,    1944 


579 


that  it  was  illegal  to  cloak  the  true  destination  of 
the  shipment.  The  Export  Control  Act  of  July  2, 
1940,  which  empowered  the  President  to  prevent 
any  shipment  which  he  might  deem  contrary  to 
the  interests  of  the  national  defense,  was  applied 
to  the  shipment  of  arms  and  munitions,  with  the 
result  that  certain  destinations  were  again  pro- 
scribed. 

Today,  when  an  export  application  is  received 
by  the  Department  it  must  usually  go  through  con- 
siderable processing  before  it  is  ready  for  issuance. 
The  War  Department  must  give  its  approval  or 
disapproval,  generally  on  the  grounds  of  supply 
and  availability  of  the  particular  commodity,  for 
all  articles  to  be  exported  as  arms,  ammunition, 
explosives,  or  gases.  The  Navy  Department,  of 
course,  must  pass  on  the  applications  for  articles 
listed  as  naval  supplies.  When  necessary  the  ap- 
propriate agency  of  the  Government  is  consulted 
by  the  Department  concerning  priority  ratings 
and  clearances  for  articles  that  are  new  or  are  in 
the  process  of  manufacture. 

If  the  items  on  the  application  are  aircraft  or 
aircraft  parts,  they  too  must  be  checked  for  clear- 
ance. The  Munitions  Assignment  Committee, 
Air,  must  formally  allocate  a  new  airplane  for  ex- 
port before  the  Department  will  act  on  the  appli- 
cation. The  Joint  Aircraft  Committee  must  clear 
aircraft  parts  that  are  involved  or  that  are  new. 
Normallj',  if  an  airplane  or  the  aircraft  parts  are 
used,  no  processing  is  necessary.  Instead,  in  the 
case  of  the  airplane,  its  identity  is  checked  in  the 
records  of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Authority. 

Simultaneous  with  clearing  an  export  applica- 
tion with  the  other  interested  agencies  of  the  Gov- 
ernment, the  Department  investigates  the  desira- 
bility of  the  consignee  by  noting  whether  or  not 
the  consignee  is  on  the  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain 
Blocked  Xationals.  It  must  consider  also  the  po- 
litical implications  of  such  an  exportation  in  terms 
of  its  benefit  to  the  war  effort.  Furthermore,  if 
the  proposed  shipment  is  destined  for  certain  coun- 
tries, including  all  the  neutral  countries  of  Europe, 
the  Department  must  consult  with  the  OflSce  of 
Foreign  Economic  Administration  and  in  some 
cases  must  secure  a  blockade-control  clearance  for 
the  exportation. 

If  all  these  barriers  can  be  successfully  hurdled, 
the  Department  issues  the  application.    Actually, 

595745 — 44 2 


regardless  of  all  the  apparently  complex  steps  in- 
volved, the  processing  time  of  an  application  may 
be  only  three  or  four  days.  Many  applications 
have  been  granted  within  a  few  hours  after  re- 
ceipt. The  length  of  the  processing  time  is  de- 
pendent entirely  upon  the  nature  of  the  proposed 
shipment,  its  destination,  and  the  amount  of  clear 
and  accurate  information  which  the  applicant  fur- 
nishes the  Department  with  his  application.  It 
has  been  the  Department's  experience  that  some 
applicants,  having  familiarized  themselves  with 
what  is  necessary  in  the  way  of  a  properly  executed 
application  and  of  supplementary  information, 
may  always  be  relied  upon  to  supply  all  the  data 
necessary  on  clearances,  priorities,  the  end  use  of 
the  materiel  involved,  and  such  other  details. 
Other  applicants,  unfortunately,  invariably  mis- 
understand the  entire  process  of  licensing,  which, 
of  course,  results  in  delays  and  requests  for  further 
information,  which  are,  frankly,  just  as  unpleas- 
ant for  the  Department  as  for  the  applicant. 

In  this  connection,  it  may  be  pointed  out  that 
one  difficulty  experienced  by  many  people  in  mak- 
ing export  applications  is  deciding  whether  the 
commodity  they  wish  to  export  takes  a  Depart- 
ment of  State  license  or  an  FEA  license.  This 
dilennna  can  be  resolved  if  it  is  borne  in  mind  that 
only  those  persons  who  have  registered  with  the 
Department  may  apply  for  a  license,  and  only 
those  items  listed  in  the  President's  proclamation 
may  be  put  on  a  Department  of  State  license  appli- 
cation. 

The  proclamation  at  present  in  effect,  promul- 
gated by  the  President  on  April  9,  1942,^  lists  the 
arms,  ammunition,  and  implements  of  war  in  seven 
categories,  which  may  be  briefly  described  as  fol- 
lows: major  weapons  of  war  such  as  guns,  ma- 
chine-guns, cannons,  their  ammunition,  bombs, 
torpedoes,  mines,  tanks,  and  armored  vehicles;  ves- 
sels of  war ;  military  aircraft ;  side-arms  and  their 
ammunition;  all  other  aircraft  and  major  com- 
ponent jjarts  such  as  engines,  propellers,  fuselages, 
and  wings;  flame-throwers  and  war  gases;  and 
certain  explosives. 

Anyone  may  apply  for  an  FEA  license,  and 
everything  else  which  may  require  an  export  li- 
cense goes  on  an  FEA  license.     Ordinarily,  any 


'  7  Federal  Register  2769  (."56  Stat.  1948). 


580 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


collector  of  customs  can  inform  a  person  what  goes 
on  which  license,  but  inquiries  may  alxvaj's  be  made 
directly  to  the  Department  or  to  the  Office  of  For- 
eign Economic  Administration. 

At  tlie  outbreak  of  the  war,  the  Department  of 
State  import  or  export  license  covered  all  ship- 
ments of  arms,  ammunition,  and  implements  of 
war;  but  within  a  short  time  it  was  evident  that 
some  special  systems  would  have  to  be  set  up  to 
handle  and  expedite  such  exportations  as  lend- 
lease  goods  and  cash-purchase  items  to  be  used  by 
the  Allied  governments.  Therefore,  in  September 
1941  the  Office  of  Lend-Lease  Administration  un- 
dei'took  to  authorize  shipments  for  its  own  account. 
On  April  6,  1942,  at  the  request  of  the  British 
authorities  and  the  British  Ministry  of  Supply 
Mission,  the  Department  issued  an  "unlimited 
license"  called  UAB,  which  it  granted  to  the  Sup- 
ply Mission  to  cover  war  materiel  shipped  in 
transit  through  this  country  from  Canada  destined 
for  any  country  in  the  British  Empire,  for  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  or  for  the 
British  Armed  Forces  anywhere  in  the  world,  or 
destined  for  Canada  from  the  British  Armed 
Forces.  The  Supply  Mission  arranges  for  the  ex- 
portation of  each  shipment  through  the  prepara- 
tion of  a  release  certificate,  the  original  of  which 
is  sent  to  the  collector  of  customs  at  the  intended 
port  of  exit.  The  duplicate  is  sent  to  the  Depart- 
ment. In  this  way  the  Department  has  been  able 
to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  law  which  stipu- 
late that  before  an  exportation  is  made  the  name 
of  the  purchaser  and  the  terms  of  sale  must  be  made 
known  to  the  Secretary  of  State. 

A  short  time  thereafter  another  unlimited  li- 
cense, known  as  UMB,  was  issued  to  the  Supply 
Mission  to  cover  the  transfer  of  defensive  arma- 
ment from  one  British  armed  merchant  ship  to 
another  while  the  ships  were  in  an  American  port. 

A  special  type  of  import  licensing  arrangement 
has  been  effected  with  the  Supply  Mission  to  take 
care  of  repair  work  being  done  at  the  various 
American  shipyards  on  British  warships.  Under 
this  arrangement  the  British  Admiralty  Delega- 
tion may  import,  on  a  monthly  basis,  into  this 
country  a  certain  value  of  unspecified  naval  arma- 
ment for  repair  purposes. 

By  now  the  best-known  special  license  which  the 
Department  has  issued  since  the  country's  entry 


into  the  war  is  Unlimited  License  UAC,  which  was 
issued  on  January  15,  1943  to  all  registered  im- 
porters and  exporters  to  cover  all  arms,  ammuni- 
tion, and  implements  of  war  passing  to  and  from 
this  country  through  Canadian-American  cus- 
toms. This  license  differs  from  the  UAB  or  UMB 
in  that  the  original  as  well  as  the  duplicate  of  the 
release  certificate  is  sent  to  the  Department.  The 
former  notifies  the  Department  of  the  purchaser 
and  the  terms  of  sale,  and  the  latter  informs  it  of 
the  date  of  exportation  and  the  quantity  and  value 
of  the  goods  actually  exported. 

Two  other  licensing  functions  should  receive 
mention,  although  the  war  has  drastically  cur- 
tailed them:  the  regulation  of  the  exportation  of 
tin-plate  scrap,  pursuant  to  the  act  of  February  15, 
1936^  and  Executive  Order  7297,  issued  by  the 
President  on  February  16,  1936 ;  and  the  licensing 
of  the  exi:)ortation  of  helium  gas  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  the  Act  of  September  1, 
1937.^ 

Since  December  1940,  no  exportation  of  tin-plate 
scrap  has  been  permitted.  The  purpose  underlying 
the  act  of  Congress  setting  up  the  controls  was  to 
make  available  to  the  domestic  detinning  compa- 
nies a  sufficient  annual  quantity  of  tin-plate  scrap 
for  them  to  be  able  to  operate  their  plants  satis- 
factorily. In  offering  far  higher  prices  than  those 
of  the  American  detinning  companies,  the  Japa- 
nese for  a  number  of  years  successfully  drained 
the  supply  of  tin-plate  scrap  from  this  country. 
Under  the  licensing  jDrocedure  set  up  to  prevent 
any  further  such  drain  of  tin-plate  scrap,  dealers 
in  this  country  were  required  to  submit  estimates 
at  the  beginning  of  each  year  on  how  much  they 
anticipated  having  for  exportation  for  the  follow- 
ing year.  At  the  same  time,  the  detinning  com- 
panies submitted  estimates  on  the  amount  of  tin- 
plate  scrap  they  could  use  in  their  plants.  After 
these  estimates  had  been  received,  quotas  were 
established  for  each  tin-plate-scrap  exporter. 
Licenses  normally  were  issued  which  permitted 
the  exportation  of  these  allotments.  Even  with 
the  licensing  system,  however,  all  authorized  ex- 
portations went  to  Jajoan. 

Any  person  desiring  to  make  an  exportation  of 
helium  gas  may  apply  to  the  Department  for  a 


M9  Stat.  1140, 


■  50  Stat.  8S6. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


581 


license  application,  upon  which  he  must  state  the 
end  use  of  the  helium— that  is,  whether  it  is  to  be 
used  for  military,  medical,  scientific,  or  commercial 
purposes.  He  must  attest  also  to  the  fact  that 
reasonable  safeguards  have  been  adopted  by  which 
there  is  no  unnecessary  waste  of  helium  gas. 
These  licenses  are  valid  only  for  the  calendar  year 
in  which  issued. 

SupEK^^SION 

Possibly  the  most  interesting,  but  not  always  the 
most  pleasing  function  of  the  Department  in  the 
control  of  the  international  traffic  in  arms  is  that 
of  acquiring  and  maintaining  information  con- 
cerning who  gets  what  and  how  much  in  the  way 
of  munitions,  and  that  of  attempting  to  prevent 
violations  of  tlie  law  and  the  regulations  governing 
the  traffic.  There  have  been  but  few  violations  ot 
the  law  and  regulations,  for  the  Department  knows 
whom  it  may  trust  and  wliom  it  must  watch  care- 
fully. The  overwhelming  majoritj'  of  those  en- 
gaged in  the  munitions  industry  want  it  to  remain 
what  it  should  be — a  legitimate  business.  Unfor- 
tunately, however,  a  few  persons  and  concerns  have 
shown  that  they  cannot  be  trusted,  and  the  Depart- 
ment accordingly  is  forced  to  be  ever-vigilant  in 
watching  their  activities. 

The  most  famous  conviction  resulting  from  a 
violation  of  the  law  has  been  that  against  the  Cur- 
tiss-Wright  Export  Corporation,  for  it  was  an 
appeal  of  this  case  to  the  Supreme  Court  which 
produced  the  well-known  decision  given  by  Justice 
Sutherland  on  the  powers  of  the  President  in  the 
conduct  of  foreign  policy  (United  States  v.  Cur- 
tiss-Wriffht  Export  Corporation'^) .  In  this  case 
the  Curtiss-AVright  Export  Corporation  at- 
tempted, through  a  dummy  consignee,  to  circum- 
vent the  embargo  against  the  shipment  of  muni- 
tions to  either  of  the  belligerents  in  the  Chaco 
War.  At  the  same  time  anotlier  concern,  the 
American  Armament  Corporation,  was  convicted 
for  the  same  ofl'ense.  Its  president,  A.  J.  Miranda, 
Jr.,  and  vice  president,  I.  J.  Miranda,  were 
sentenced  to  jail. 

Not  all  munitions  transactions  which  cause  con- 
cern to  the  Department  are  possible  export  viola- 
tions.    Over    the    years    the    Department    has 


acquired  an  extensive  knowledge  of  the  quality  of 
the  arms  produced  in  this  countrj',  and  for  reasons 
of  diplomacy  and  of  commercial  policy  it  has  no 
desire  to  permit  occasions  to  arise  where  foreign 
purchasers  may  actually  be,  or  even  feel,  defrauded 
by  their  acquisition  of  inferior  arms.  Such  sales 
can  produce  only  acrimony,  claims,  and  possible 
representations,  and  can  always  lessen  the  chances 
of  future  purchases  of  the  normally  superior 
American  munitions.  There  have  been  several 
instances,  especially  since  this  country's  entry  into 
the  war,  where  the  Department  has  had  to  take  an 
active  interest  in  the  efforts  of  various  individuals 
to  sell  faulty  or  nonexistent  munitions  in  order  to 
prevent  occasions  conducive  to  international  ill- 
will. 

In  one  of  these  instances  a  number  of  enterpris- 
ing persons  attempted  to  recondition  a  large  num- 
ber of  machine-guns,  dating  from  World  War  I, 
which  had  been  declared  obsolete,  had  been  muti- 
lated, and  then  had  been  sold  for  scrap  metal. 
These  ,guns,  numbering  over  3,000,  together  with 
their  mountings,  had  been  purchased  by  a  scrap 
dealer  for  about  $1,500.  Some  few  of  these  guns 
were  sold  to  American  Legion  Posts,  schools, 
museums,  parks,  and  cemeteries  for  $7.75  apiece  as 
trophies  of  the  war.  When  the  Chaco  War  broke 
out,  however,  several  individuals  decided  that  the 
guns  could  be  reconditioned  and  sold  to  the  bellig- 
erents. The  dealer  started  selling  the  guns  at  $50 
apiece.  Those  who  undertook  to  recondition  the 
guns  asked  and  in  some  cases  received  prices  rang- 
ing from  $265  to  over  $900  a  gun.  In  one  instance 
a  friendly  government  made  a  down-payment  of 
$71,500  for  some  guns,  which  were  represented  to 
it  as  being  a  satisfactory  substitute  for  the  .50  cali- 
ber Browning  aircraft  macliine-gun.  One  gun 
was  finally  turned  over  to  the  purchasing  govern- 
ment and  that  gun  was  unable  to  fire  satisfactorily. 

Another  person  organized  a  company  which 
bought  some  of  the  old  guns  at  $50  apiece.  He 
had  them  reworked  and  sold  them  at  $700  apiece  to 
the  Netherlands  Purchasing  Commission  for  use  in 
the  Dutch  East  Indies.  Since  most  of  the  guns 
arrived  in  time  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  Japa- 
nese, there  is  no  adequate  report  of  how  satisfac- 
torily they  worked. 

"209  U.S.  304. 


582 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


The  Department,  then,  was  confronted  with 
these  and  other  instances  of  sales  and  attempted 
sales  of  the  old  machine-guns  to  a  number  of  the 
United  Nations.  It  realized  that  these  transac- 
tions could  result,  in  most  cases,  in  nothing  but 
complaints  and  possible  ill-will  from  the  purchas- 
ing governments  involved.  Accordingly,  it  re- 
quested certain  interested  Government  agencies  to 
consider  what  could  be  done  to  prevent  further 
injury,  through  the  sale  of  these  guns,  to  the  com- 
bined war  efforts  of  the  United  Nations.  The 
armed  forces  pointed  out  that  they  had  no  use  for 
the  guns  since  they  had  long  a,go  declared  them 
obsolete  and  that  new  Browning  machine-guns 
were  being  manufactured  for  them  at  only  a  frac- 
tion of  what  was  being  asked  for  the  old  machine- 
guns.  It  was  decided  that  the  guns  would  make 
better  scrap  metal  than  anything  else.  Therefore, 
on  November  16, 1942,  representatives  of  the  Metals 
Keserve  Corporation  visited  approximately  20 
places  in  and  about  New  York  City  and  Philadel- 
phia. They  oifered  $80  for  every  operable 
machine-gun  and  the  highest  scrap  prices  for 
everythin,g  else.  In  most  instances  the  possessors 
of  the  guns  refused  to  sell,  and  the  guns  accord- 
ingly were  requisitioned  under  the  authority  of  the 
Second  War  Powers  Act.  In  all,  some  3,000 
machine-guns  and  13,000  machine-gun  barrels  wei'e 
taken,  together  with  1,000  obsolete  aerial  bombs, 
3,000  obsolete  hand  grenades,  and  innumerable 
boxes  of  spare  parts.  In  accordance  with  pre- 
viously made  plans,  the  articles  requisitioned  were 
shortly  thereafter  melted  down.  Nothing  remains 
today  exceij't  claims  amounting  to  nearly  three 
quarters  of  a  million  dollars  which  have  been  filed 
against  the  Government  for  the  guns  which  10 
years  before  had  netted  it  $1,500  when  they  were 
sold  as  scrap. 

Another  problem  which  has  confronted  the  De- 
partment in  recent  years  has  been  the  persistent 
efforts  on  the  part  of  a  legion  of  promoters  to  sell 
one  million  Lee-Enfield  rifles,  complete  with  bay- 
onet, scabbard,  and  sling,  and  1,000  rounds  of  cart- 
ridges for  each  rifle.  The  sheer  fantasy  of  the 
entire  scheme  and  the  efforts  to  stamp  out  the  pro- 
motional activities  have  not  entirely  deterred 
those  who  see  in  any  possible  sale  of  such  a  quan- 


tity of  arms  the  lifelong  opportunitj^  for  a  finan- 
cial "killing".  Nearly  all  the  persons  involved, 
when  questioned,  have  shown  little  concern  over 
the  damage  that  such  activities  can  cause  to  our 
international  relations.  They  have  seldom  been 
impressed  by  the  fact  that  many  times  when  it  has 
been  necessary  to  refuse  requests  for  arms  from 
other  membei's  of  the  United  Nations,  on  the 
grounds  that  this  country  did  not  have  them  for 
allocation,  extremely  difficult  situations  have 
arisen  when  an  offer  was  made  by  private  persons 
of  such  a  quantity  of  munitions. 

The  germ  of  the  scheme  to  sell  these  munitions, 
which  not  one  of  the  persons  involved  has  seen  or 
has  been  able  to  produce,  is  a  memorandum  from 
the  War  Department  which  was  written  some  time 
after  the  outbreak  of  the  war.  It  stated  that  a 
quantity  of  rifles  was  owned  by  this  Government 
and  that  they  could  be  sold  to  a  friendly  govern- 
ment, but  not  to  a  private  individual,  for  approxi- 
mately $12.50  a  gun.  One  of  the  persons  who  saw 
the  letter  apparently  decided  that  by  finding  a 
purchaser  for  the  Government  he  could  earn  some 
easy  money.  He  promised  commissions  to  indi- 
viduals who  would  help  him;  these  persons,  in 
turn,  appointed  their  own  agents.  Thus,  the  sales 
efforts  mushroomed,  and,  needless  to  say,  the  sales 
price  sky-rocketed  from  $17.50  to  the  present  pre- 
vailing quotation  of  $70. ,50.  Of  course,  in  fairness 
to  the  latter  price,  it  must  be  pointed  out  that  some- 
where along  the  line  the  one  billion  cartridges 
were  added,  apparently  to  make  the  transaction 
more  attractive.  One  has  to  overlook  the  mere 
fact  that  this  quantity  of  cartridges  represents 
roughly  10  percent  of  all  the  .30-caliber  ball  cart- 
ridges produced  in  this  country  during  the  i^ast 
three  years. 

Although  nearly  all  the  known  quantity  of  Lee- 
Enfield  rifles  in  this  country  were  shipped  to 
Great  Britain  and  to  Canada  in  1910,  after  the  fall 
of  Dunkerque,  these  promoters  have  approached 
nearly  every  foreign  mission  and  purchasing  com- 
mission in  this  country  with  offers  which  rashly 
include  inspection  of  the  munitions  before  full 
payment,  delivery  within  48  hours,  and  the  secur- 
ing of  the  necessary  export  licenses.  When  asked 
why  they  persist  in  such  a  scheme,  these  persons 


JUNE   24,    1944 


583 


invariably  replj',  "Well,  why  don't  you  let  the  deal 
go  through,  and  let's  see  -what  happens?" 

Despite  the  fact  that  in  accordance  with  an  act 
of  Congress  of  January  26, 1942  ^  no  reports  on  the 
international  traffic  in  arms  need  be  made  avail- 
able for  the  duration  of  the  state  of  war,  an  an- 
nual report  to  Congress  has  been  regularly  pre- 
pared ;  it  has  not,  however,  been  circulated.  Week- 
ly and  monthly  informational  reports  are  pre- 
pared, and  these  are  confidentially  distributed  to 
certain  offices  in  the  War  Department  and  in  .the 
Office  of  Foreign  Economic  Administration. 

IVIiUTART  Secrets 

The  clearance  for  foreign  use  of  articles  and 
data  involving  military  secrets  and  rights  to  nego- 
tiate for  the  manufacture  abroad  of  articles  con- 
taining these  military  secrets  is  likewise  a  func- 
tion that  the  Department  performs  under  the  pro- 
visions of  the  Espionage  Act  of  June  15,  1917,- 
since  certain  matters  of  foreign  policy  are  in- 
volved. This  function  has  proved  especially  dur- 
ing the  war  to  be  an  important  activity. 

Basically,  this  responsibility  has  two  adminis- 
trative aspects:  the  handling  of  requests  for  re- 
leases of  items  involving  military  secrets ;  and  the 
processing  of  inventions  sent  from  citizens  of  this 
country  and  from  persons  abroad  to  the  President, 
any  of  the  agencies  of  the  Government,  and  the 
various  American  missions. 

In  the  first  procedure,  the  request  for  a  military- 
secrets  release  may  come  either  from  the  person, 
concern,  or  agency  in  this  country  having  de- 
veloped the  article,  or  the  request  may  come  from 
a  foreign  somxe.  In  either  event,  the  aim  of  such 
an  inquiry  is  the  eventual  use  abroad  of  the  article 
or  data  containing  the  military  secret.  Wlien  the 
Department  receives  the  request,  it  transmits  it  to 
the  proper  authorities  in  the  War  and  Navy  De- 
partments for  their  statement  of  consent  or  objec- 
tion. After  a  coordinated  opinion  has  been  re- 
ceived from  the  interested  departments,  the  per- 
son making  the  request  is  notified  of  the  decision. 
If  the  request  has  come  from  a  foreign  source,  the 
manufacturer  or  owner  of  the  item  involving  mili- 
tary secrecy  is  notified  of  the  decision  as  well. 

595T45 — 44 3 


The  handling  of  inventions  submitted  to  this 
Government,  and  matters  pertaining  thereto,  is 
never  a  dull  process.  Every  suggestion,  inven- 
tion, plan,  and  idea  which  is  submitted  from  what- 
ever source  receives  the  same  careful  consider- 
ation. It  is  noteworthy  that  many  of  these  have 
come  through  our  American  missions  abroad  from 
European  scientists  and  inventors  who  have  de- 
sired to  hasten  the  downfall  of  the  Axis.  The  ma- 
jority of  these  inventions  come  to  the  Department, 
often  by  reference  from  the  Wliite  House,  through 
correspondence,  but  frequently  drawings,  models, 
elaborately  detailed  booklets,  and  printed  pam- 
phlets are  sent  for  consideration.  These  inven- 
tions may  range  from  an  astonishingly  simple  de- 
vice, or  a  brilliant  and  highly  complicated  ma- 
chine, to  such  things  as  flying  submarines,  invisible 
airplanes  made  of  blue  cellophane,  and  post-war 
social  orders.  Many  of  these  ideas  are  offered  for 
the  war  effort  without  thought  of  remuneration, 
but  occasionally  someone  requests  money  for  fur- 
ther experimentation  or  for  traveling  expenses  to 
come  from  abroad  or  to  Washington  to  see  the 
President. 

The  Department  forwards  the  suggestions  to  the 
National  Inventors'  Council,  which  carefully  in- 
vestigates evei'y  proposal  and  evaluates  it  in  terms 
of  its  use  in  the  war  effort.  After  the  Council  has 
reached  a  decision,  the  Department  informs  the 
person  submitting  the  invention  or  idea  of  the  na- 
ture of  the  decision. 

Biographies  are  no  longer  biographies  when 
they  attempt  to  discourse  on  the  future  of  their 
subjects;  they  are  mere  prophesies.  This,  then, 
is  not  the  place  to  discuss  the  possible  future  of  the 
Department's  administration  of  the  control  of  the 
arms  traffic.  Relative  to  the  general  subject  of  the 
international  traffic  in  munitions  it  can  be  observed 
now,  especially  since  the  problem  is  already  aris- 
ing, that  when  the  war  has  been  won  there  are  go- 
ing to  be  enormous  quantities  of  surplus  munitions 
and  aircraft  upon  the  disposition  of  which  may 
hang  peace  or  war.  How  these  surpluses  are  han- 
dled may  be  another  chapter  in  the  biogi-aphy. 


'56  Stat.  19. 
=  40  Stat.  217. 


American  Republics 


RECOGNITION  BY  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  THE  NEW  GOVERNMENT  OF  BOLIVIA 


[Released  to  the  press  June  23] 

The  United  States  Embassy  in  La  Paz  on  June 
23,  under  instructions,  presented  a  note  to  the  For- 
eign Minister  of  Bolivia  renewing  relations  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  Bolivia. 

Between  January  24  and  January  28,  1944,  19 
American  republics,  after  full  exchange  of  infor- 
mation and  consultation  with  one  another,  declared 
their  intention  to  withhold  recognition  from  the 
Bolivian  Junta,  which  came  into  power  on  De- 
cember 20, 1943.  They  concluded  that  recognition 
of  the  new  Bolivian  regime  would  not  be  in  the 
interest  of  the  security  of  the  hemisphere  and  the 
success  of  the  Allied  cause.  This  was  the  crite- 
rion, and  the  only  criterion,  which  they  consid- 
ered in  passing  upon  the  status  of  the  Bolivian 
regime. 


Since  last  January  the  Provisional  Government 
of  Bolivia  has  carried  out  a  number  of  decisive  and 
affirmative  acts  in  support  of  hemisphere  security 
and  the  cause  of  the  United  Nations.  Accord- 
ingly, the  American  governments  have  reviewed 
the  situation  again  by  exchanging  information 
and  consulting  with  one  another.  The  consensus 
of  this  consultation  is  that  there  is  no  longer  rea- 
son for  withholding  recognition. 

The  exchange  of  information  and  consultation 
which  led  to  the  decision  by  the  sovereign  states 
concerned  that  the  Bolivian  Government  should 
bo  recognized  took  place  pursuant  to  resolutions 
22  and  23  ^  of  the  Inter- American  Emergency  Ad- 
visory Committee  for  Political  Defense,  located  at 
Montevideo,  which  has  now  been  apprised  of  the 
decision  of  this  Government. 


FELLOWSHIPS   FOR   CITIZENS   FROM  THE   OTHER  AMERICAN  REPUBLICS 


The  following  regulations,  pursuant  to  statutory 
authority  and  official  recommendations  and  subject 
to  appropriations  available,  have  been  issued  with 
respect  to  fellowships  for  qualified  applicants 
from  the  other  American  republics:  the  Director 
of  the  United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey 
will  award  fellowships  for  training  in  geodetic 
surveying,  map  and  chart  production,  and  hydro- 
graphic  surveying ;  the  Director  of  the  Bureau  of 
the  Census  will  award  fellowships  in  public  health 
and  demographic  statistics ;  and  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce  will 
award  fellowships  for  the  study  of  foreign-trade 
statistics.  All  of  the  fellowships  will  be  awarded 
with  the  approval  of  the  Secretary  of  Commerce 
and  the  Secretary  of  State.  The  fellowshii^s  will 
be  of  the  intern-training  and  training-in-research 
type  and  may  include  advance  instruction  at  col- 
leges and  universities  and  practical  training  and 
observation  in  Government  departments  and  agen- 

584 


cies.  Each  application  shall  be  transmitted  to 
the  Secretary  of  State  by  the  government  of  the 
American  republic  of  which  the  applicant  is  a 
citizen  through  the  American  diplomatic  mission 
accredited  to  that  government. 

Each  applicant  awarded  a  fellowship  may  be 
granted,  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Director 
of  the  appropriate  bureau,  monthly  allowances  for 
quarters  and  subsistence  during  the  entire  period 
spent  in  the  United  States  or  its  territories  or  pos- 
sessions, certain  transportation  expenses,  a  per 
diem  in  lieu  of  subsistence  while  in  travel  status 
(except  that  no  per  diem  will  be  allowed  concur- 
rently with  monthly  allowances),  and  other  ex- 
penses. Each  applicant  shall  submit  written  re- 
ports of  progress  in  studies  and  research  at  such 
intervals  as  the  various  Directors  may  specify. 

•  BuiXETiN  of  Dec.  12,  1942,  p.  999,  Jan.  1,  1914,  p.  20, 
and  Jan.  8,  1944,  p.  28. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


585 


Fellowships  in  geodetic  surveying,  map  and 
chart  production,  and  hydrographic  surveying  may 
be  awarded  for  periods  varying  in  accordance  with 
the  field  of  studies  in  which  application  for  fel- 
lowship is  made.  Fellowships  in  public  health  and 
demographic  statistics  may  be  awarded  for  periods 
not  exceeding  12  months  of  actual  training  and 
research  and  may  be  extended  for  not  exceeding 
the  same  periods;  and  those  in  foreign-trade  sta- 
tistics may  be  awarded  for  periods  not  exceeding 
6  months  of  actual  study  and  may  be  extended  for 
not  exceeding  the  same  period.  Fellowships  may 
be  canceled  for  cause  by  the  Director,  with  the 
approval  of  the  Secretary  of  Commerce  and  the 
Secretary  of  State. 

The  full  texts  of  the  regulations  appear  in  the 
Federal  Register  of  June  24,  1944,  page  6984. 

INTERDEPARTMENTAL  COMMITTEE  ON  CO- 
OPERATION WITH  THE  AMERICAN  RE- 
PUBLICS 

(Keleased  to  the  press  June  221 

Dr.  Raymund  L.  Zwemer  has  been  appointed 
Chairman  of  the  Interdepartmental  Committee  on 
Cooperation  with  the  American  Republics.  The 
Committee  of  the  whole  met  on  June  22  in  the 
Department  of  State  to  discuss  the  present  coop- 
erative program  and  to  outline  plans  for  the 
coming  year. 

Dr.  Zwemer's  international  reputation  as  a  scien- 
tist is  especially  strong  in  Latin  American  coun- 
tries, where  he  has  both  lectured  before  their 
learned  societies  and  carried  on  cooperative  re- 
search in  their  laboratories.  Several  of  his  discov- 
eries have  been  published  in  Spanish  or  Portuguese 
in  the  scientific  journals  of  Brazil,  Argentina,  Uru- 
guay, and  Paraguay. 

Dr.  Zwemer  was  born  in  the  Bahrein  Islands  in 
the  Persian  Gulf,  March  30,  1902,  of  American 
parents;  he  attended  schools  in  the  United  States, 
and  English  and  German  schools  in  Cairo,  Egypt, 
from  1912-18.  He  received  an  A.B.  from  Hope 
College,  Holland,  Mich.,  in  1923  and  a  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  in  Zoology  and  Anatomy  from  Yale 
University  in  1926;  he  then  spent  two  years  at 


Harvard  University  before  going  to  Columbia 
University,  where  he  has  been  on  the  staff  of  the 
Medical  Center  for  16  years. 

VISIT  OF  HONDURAN  ARCHITECT 

[Released  to  the  press  June  19] 

The  distinguished  Central  American  architect, 
Hector  Bustillo  Oliva,  of  San  Pedro  Sula,  Hon- 
duras, is  visiting  the  United  States  as  a  guest  of 
the  Department  of  State.  Senor  Bustillo  Oliva  is 
spending  several  days  in  Washington  before  be- 
ginning a  more  extended  tour  of  the  United  States 
during  which  he  will  observe  low-cost  housing 
developments. 

In  San  Pedro  Sula,  Senor  Bustillo  has  built  a 
number  of  low-cost  houses  in  which  the  function- 
ally distinctive  features  are  small  open  inner 
patios — modeled  on  the  traditional  patio  of  large 
colonial  houses — and  living-  and  dining-rooms  that 
are  in  reality  roomy  porches  with  sufficient  over- 
hang to  offer  protection  against  sun  and  rain. 


Europe 


ARRANGEMENTS  FOR  DEPARTURE  OF 
FORMER  MINISTER  OF  FINLAND 

[Released  to  the  press  June  21] 

The  Department  of  State  has  completed  ar- 
rangements for  the  departure  from  the  United 
States  of  Mr.  Hjalmar  J.  Procope,  lately  Minister 
of  Finland,  and  of  Messrs.  Vahervuori  and  So- 
lanko,  lately  Counselors  of  the  Finni.sh  Legation, 
with  the  families  of  the  latter  two  officers. 

The  Department  has  been  informed  by  Mr. 
Procope  that  it  is  his  desire  to  proceed  unaccom- 
panied by  his  family,  and  he  has  not  acted  on  the 
suggestion  made  by  the  Department  that,  if  he  so 
desired,  he  could  remain  in  the  United  States  with 
Madame  Procope  and  their  children  pending  the 
restoration  of  her  health. 

The  Department  has  received  a  request  from  Mr. 
Urlio  Toivola,  lately  a  Counselor  of  the  Finnish 


586 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


Legation,  who  liad  been  expected  to  depart  from 
the  United  States  with  Mr.  Procope  and  Messrs. 
Vahervuori  and  Solanko,  that  he  be  permitted  to 
remain  in  this  country  owing  to  the  serious  ilhiess 
of  Madame  Toivola.  This  request  has  been 
granted. 


The  Far  East 


FLOYD  TAYLOR  RETURNS  FROM  CHINA 

[Released  to  the  press  June  19] 

Mr.  Floyd  Taylor,  former  assistant  city  editor 
of  the  New  York  World-Tehgram,  has  returned 
from  China.  Since  last  October  he  has  served, 
under  the  cultural-relations  progi-am  of  the  De- 
partment of  State,  as  a  specialist  to  the  Chinese 
Ministry  of  Information  and  as  chief  editor  under 
the  International  Department  of  the  Chinese  Min- 
istry of  Information. 

The  Department  of  State  sent  Mr.  Taylor  to 
China  in  response  to  a  request  from  the  Chinese 
Government  for  aid  in  the  preparation  of  war  news 
and  in  the  training  of  Chinese  news  editors. 

Before  he  left  Chungking,  early  this  month,  Mr. 
Taylor  was  received  by  Generalissimo  Chiang  Kai- 
shek  who  thanked  him  for  his  services  to  China. 
At  the  request  of  the  Generalissimo,  he  submitted 
a  report  on  what  the  Cliinese  Government  could 
do  to  improve  its  handling  of  news. 

Mr.  Taylor  is  the  eleventh  specialist  to  complete 
his  assignment  in  China  under  the  Department  of 
State. 

GIFTS  FROM  UNITED  STATES  TO 
CHINESE  INSTITUTIONS 

[Released  to  the  press  June  20] 

Vice  President  Wallace  took  with  him  on  his 
trip  to  China  numerous  packages  of  scientific 
instruments,  books,  educational  films,  and  agricul- 
tural seed  as  gifts  to  China. 

The  materials  were  assembled  in  Washington  by 
the  Department  of  State,  as  part  of  a  program  of 
cultural  relations  with  China,  at  the  request  of  over 


40  Chinese  universities  and  technical  centers  which 
had  been  unable  to  obtain  American  equipment 
since  1941. 

A  number  of  packages  contained  machine-shop 
tools  for  the  National  Central  University  of 
Chengtu,  which  is  manufacturing  scientific  instru- 
ments for  other  Chinese  universities. 

The  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture 
sent  to  the  Chinese  Ministry  of  Agriculture  a  col- 
lection of  43  samples  of  grass  seed  and  19  kinds  of 
animal-forage  seed.  These  seeds  were  collected  in 
the  western  part  of  the  United  States  where  cli- 
matic conditions  are  similar  to  China's  northwest 
provinces. 

Three  packages  contained  sample  equipment  to 
be  used  in  experimental  demonstrations  for  soil 
and  water  conservation,  assembled  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture  and  supplied  by  the  State 
Department  as  a  measure  of  collaboration  with  the 
Chinese  Government. 

A  large  package  addressed  to  the  Chinese  Minis- 
try of  Education  contained  the  college  catalogs  of 
the  leading  animal-husbandry  schools  in  the 
United  States.  The  Ministry  had  requested  these 
catalogs  for  use  in  studying  their  curricula. 

For  the  Chinese  Industrial  Cooperatives  there 
was  a  package  containing  technical  data  on  how  to 
make  scrap  iron  into  steel,  how  to  make  sulphuric 
acid,  how  to  build  a  community  refrigerator,  and 
information  pertaining  to  more  than  30  other 
problems  of  small-scale  industry. 

The  numerous  packages  of  books  included  a 
selection  of  political  reference  volumes  for  the 
National  Library  of  Peiping,  new  titles  on  library 
science  for  the  Boone  Library  School  at  Chengtu, 
and  books  on  economic  planning  for  the  National 
Central  Library,  Chungking. 

Other  packages  of  books  went  to  National 
Southwest  Associated  University,  National 
Chekiang,  Fukien  Christian,  Nanking,  West  China 
Union,  and  other  universities. 

A  special  selection  of  books  on  American  archi- 
tecture was  sent  to  the  Institute  for  Research  in 
Chinese  Architecture  at  Lichuang,  Szechwan. 
Ajiother  package  containing  recent  American 
drama  was  addressed  to  the  Cultural  Work  Com- 


JUNE    24,    1944 


587 


mittee    of    the    Military    Affairs    Commission, 
Chungking. 

The  governors  of  Ninghsia,  Sikong,  and  Ching- 
hai  each  received  reports  on  animal-husbandry 
problems  in  their  respective  provinces,  as  observed 
by  Prof.  Ray  G.  Johnson,  an  American  who  visited 
China  last  year. 

A  strange  story  in  book  migrations  lay  behind 
a  shipment  of  English  texts  to  Yenching  Univer- 
sity. When  the  university  moved  from  Peiping 
to  Chengtu  it  was  found  that  no  copies  were  avail- 
able of  some  of  the  English  texts  which  were 
formerly  published  in  Peiping.  The  United 
States  Government  obtained  copies  of  these  books 
in  the  United  States  from  former  Yenching  teach- 
ers and  sent  them  back  with  Mr.  Wallace. 

The  American  Radio  Relay  League,  a  private 
society  in  the  United  States,  sent  to  the  China 
Amateur  Radio  League  in  Chungking  an  exhibit 
of  wartime  manuals  and  publications  on  radio 
operations  in  the  United  States. 

The  American  College  of  Surgeons  sent  14  reels 
of  educational  films  which  represent  the  begin- 
ning of  a  film  library  for  the  Chinese  National 
Listitute  of  Health.  These  films  show  the  latest 
investigations  in  the  treatment  of  fractures,  of 


cataracts,  and  of  venereal  disease.  One  film  on 
the  care  of  nursery  children  was  donated  by  the 
famous  orphanage.  The  Cradle,  at  Evanston,  111. 
The  American  College  of  Surgeons  expects  to  ship 
in  the  future  more  than  50  medical  films  to  China. 

Another  shipment  of  14  educational  films,  deal- 
ing principally  with  American  agriculture  and 
engineering,  was  sent  to  Nanking  University  at  the 
request  of  that  school's  department  of  educational 
cinematography.  These  films  all  contained  Chi- 
nese sound  tracks  which  had  been  prepared  in  New 
York  under  the  auspices  of  the  Department  of 
State. 

The  China  Philharmonic  Orchestra  at  Chung- 
king, which  had  requested  American  musical 
scores,  received  sheet  music  for  six  symphonic 
pieces,  including  MacDowell's  Second  Indian 
Suite  and  Gershwin's  Rhajjsody  in  Blue. 

AH  told,  Mr.  AVallace  carriecl  nearly  a  hundred 
packages  addressed  to  Chinese  institutions.  Each 
package  contained  the  notation,  "The  contents  of 
this  package  are  sent  to  you  under  the  program  of 
cultural  relations  of  the  Department  of  State  of 
the  United  States  as  a  small  evidence  of  the  con- 
tinuance of  the  longtime  cultural  exchanges  be- 
tween our  two  countries." 


International  Conferences,  Commissions,  Etc. 


UNITED  NATIONS  MONETARY  AND  FINANCIAL  CONFERENCE 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  23] 

The  President  on  June  23  announced  the  names 
of  the  American  delegates  to  the  United  Nations 
Monetary  and  Financial  Conference,  which  will 
open  at  Mount  Washington  Hotel,  Bretton  Woods, 
N.  H.,  on  July  1,  1944.^  The  names  of  the  dele- 
gates follow : 

Henr.v  Morgenthau,  Jr.,  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  chair- 
man 

Fred  M.  Vinson,  Director,  Office  of  Economic  Stabilization, 
vice  chairman 

Dean  Acheson,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State 

Edward  E.  Brown,  President,  First  National  Bank  of 
Chicago 


Leo  T.  Crowley,  Administrator,  Foreign  Economic  Admin- 
istration 

Marriner  S.  Eccles,  Chairman,  Board  of  Governors  of  the 
Federal  Reserve  System 

Miss  Mabel  Newcomer,  Professor  of  Economics,  Vassar 
College 

Brent  Spence,  House  of  Representatives,  Chairman,  Com- 
mittee on  Banking  and  Currency 

Charles  W.  Tobey,  United  States  Senate,  Member,  Com- 
mittee on  Banking  and  Currency 

Robert  F.  Wagner,  United  States  Senate,  Chairman,  Com- 
mittee on  Banking  and  Currency 

Harry  D.  White,  Assistant  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury 

Jesse  P.  Wolcott,  House  of  Representatives,  Member,  Com- 
mittee on  Banking  and  Currency 


■  Bulletin  of  May  27,  1944,  p.  498. 


588 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE   BULLETIN 


UNITED  STATES  COMMISSION  OF  THE  PER- 
MANENT AMERICAN  AERONAUTICAL  COM- 
MISSION 

Statement  by  Oswald  Ryan  ^ 

The  newly  appointed  United  States  Commission 
of  the  Permanent  American  Aeronautical  Com- 
mission, popularly  called  "C.A.P.A.",  held  its  first 
meeting  June  21  and  took  steps  to  prepare  for 
United  States  participation  in  the  initial  meeting 
of  C.A.P.A.= 

The  Permanent  American  Aeronautical  Com- 
mission was  established  pursuant  to  a  resolution 
adopted  at  the  inter- American  conference  held  at 
Lima,  Peru,  in  September  1937.'  It  was  contem- 
plated that  those  governments  which  would  ap- 
prove the  establishment  of  the  new  organization 
would  set  up  national  commissions  to  be  affiliated 
with  and  to  cooperate  with  C.A.P.A.  Thirteen 
republics  have  already  approved  and  set  up  their 
national  commissions  thus  far. 

The  Lima  resolution  provided  the  following 
objectives  for  C.A.P.A. :  The  unification  of  inter- 
national public  and  private  air  law  and  regulation ; 
the  coordination  and  development  of  mutual  in- 
terests in  technical  subjects  relating  to  aircraft, 
pilots,  airways,  and  facilities  for  air  navigation; 
and  the  organization  and  the  marking  of  inter- 
American  air  routes  and  the  coordination  of 
national  with  international  air  services. 

As  soon  as  the  proposals  of  the  United  States 
Commission  are  drawn  up,  they  will  be  transmit- 
ted to  the  member  Governments  for  the  considera- 
tion of  their  own  national  commissions  and  with  a 
view  to  the  eventual  drawing  up  of  an  agenda  for 
C.A.P.A. 

The  Lima  resolution  provided  that  the  first 
meeting  of  C.A.P.A.  would  take  place  as  soon  as 
possible  after  a  sufficient  number  of  the  interested 
governments  had  approved  the  new  organization. 


'  Member  of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board  and  Chairman 
of  the  United  States  Commission  of  the  Permanent  Ameri- 
can Aeronautical  Commission. 

^  For  members  of  the  new  Commission  see  Bulletin  of 
May  27,  1944,  p.  499. 

"Not  printed. 


The  members  of  the  United  States  Commission  feel 
that  the  first  meeting  of  C.A.P.A.  should  be  held 
as  soon  as  it  may  be  possible  for  the  necessary 
arrangements  to  be  made  through  diplomatic 
channels. 

It  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States  Commis- 
sion to  do  everything  possible  to  make  C.A.P.A. 
a  going  concern. 

BRITISH  COLONIES  SUPPLY  MISSION 

[Released  to  the  press  June  19] 

The  United  States  Section  of  the  Anglo-Ameri- 
can Caribbean  Commission  announced  on  June  19 
that  the  British  Colonies  Supply  Mission  has  made 
arrangements  to  hold  a  meeting  in  New  York,  June 
20-24,  to  discuss  supply  and  shipping  problems 
affecting  the  British  colonies  in  the  Caribbean  and 
Bermuda. 

Supply  officers  from  Jamaica,  Trinidad,  British 
Guiana,  British  Honduras,  the  Windward  Islands, 
the  LecM'ard  Islands,  Barbados,  the  Bahamas,  and 
Bermuda  will  attend,  as  well  as  representatives  of 
the  Colonial  Office  at  London,  the  Government  of 
Canada,  the  British  Food  Mission,  the  British 
Merchant  Shippin.g  Mission,  the  Foreign  Eco- 
nomic Administration,  and  the  United  States  Sec- 
tion of  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean  Com- 
mission. 

The  Supply  Mission  will  study  requirements  of 
the  colonics  in  relation  to  the  existing  stock  posi- 
tion in  the  Caribbean  and  the  supply  position  in 
the  United  States  and  Canada.  It  will  consider 
also  shipping  problems,  including  an  examination 
of  the  operation  of  the  successful  West  Indies 
Schooner  Pool  ^  organized  with  the  encouragement 
and  assistance  of  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean 
Commission. 

The  object  of  the  meeting  is  to  afford  an  oppor- 
tunity for  discussion  of  common  problems  with  a 
view  to  insuring  that  the  essential  needs  of  the 
colonies  concerned  continiie  to  be  met  with  the 
least  possible  drain  on  the  resources  of  the  United 
Nations  in  regard  to  suj)plies  and  shijDping. 


*  Bulletin  of  Mar.  18,  1944,  p.  263. 


The  Foreign  Service 


THE  JOINT  SURVEY  GROUP 
The  Foreign  Service  Prepares  To  Meet  Its  Expanding  Responsibilities 

By  AUin  N.  Steyne  ^ 


During  the  transitional  months  following  the 
war  and  in  the  post-war  period  the  demands  that 
will  be  made  upon  the  Foreign  Service  of  the 
United  States  will  be  heavy.  These  demands  will 
not  only  be  far  wider  in  scope  than  those  of  the 
pre-war  era  but  also  they  will  be  difl'erent,  in  many 
waj's,  from  those  carried  on  in  the  recent  years  of 
intense  activity.  The  global  conflict  has  broad- 
ened the  interests  of  the  American  Government  in 
all  quarters  of  the  world  to  such  an  extent  that 
almost  any  political,  economic,  financial,  agricul- 
tural, industrial,  labor,  or  social  development 
which  occurs  abroad  is  of  immediate  interest  to 
one  or  more  branches  of  the  Federal  Government 
and  to  many  sectors  of  the  American  public. 
Despite  the  fact  that  air  travel  will  bring  about 
frequent  personal  meetings  between  high  Ameri- 
can and  foreign  Government  officials,  the  formula- 
tion of  the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States  in 
all  its  many  aspects  will  continue  to  depend  largely 
upon  the  constant  flow  of  full  and  timely  intelli- 
gence from  abroad. 

Reporting,  a  primary  function  of  the  Foreign 
Service,  will  thus  continue  to  play  an  indispensable 
role  in  the  conduct  of  foreign  relations.  In  order 
to  discharge  fully  this  function,  the  Department  of 
State  and  the  other  Federal  agencies  will  I'equire  a 
reporting  service  from  abroad  wider  in  scope  than 
heretofore.  Foreign  Service  reporting  officers 
will,  in  turn,  be  comi:)elled  to  bear  in  mind  more 
than  ever  the  necessity  for  a  critical  appraisal  of 
source  material,  a  carefid  evaluation  of  significant 
data,  and  timely  presentation  accompanied  by  in- 
terpretative comments  that  will  indicate  the  trend 
implicit  in  developments  abroad. 

The  Department  clearly  recognizes  also  that  if 
this  post-war  work  of  the  Foreign  Service  is  to  be 
executed  effectively,  the  diplomatic  and  consular 
offices  in  each  country  must  operate  as  a  team 


and  that  the  fullest  possible  utilization  must  be 
made  of  each  individual's  talents.  On  the  home 
front,  the  Department  must  take  step's  to  furnish 
improved  direction  to  the  Foreign  Service,  not 
only  in  its  instructions  to  the  field  and  in  the 
assignment  of  competent  and  qualified  personnel 
but  also  in  the  distribution  and  use  of  the  intelli- 
gence flowing  from  the  field. 

What  steps  have  been  taken  by  the  Department 
of  State  to  prepare  the  Foreign  Service  to  carry 
this  burden  of  expanded  responsibilities?  In  this 
connection  it  should  be  recalled,  first  of  all,  that 
the  President  recommended  and  the  Congress 
approved  the  principle  of  a  single  Foreign  Service 
to  perform  the  work  abroad,  including  reporting 
for  all  the  departments  and  agencies  of  the  Goy- 
ernment.2  Thus  the  Foreign  Service  functions  as 
the  eyes  and  ears  of  the  American  people  in  other 
countries  and  is  assisted  during  the  war  by  a  large 
number  of  siJecialists  and  technicians  from  many 
of  tlie  war  agencies. 

The  entry  of  the  United  States  into  the  conflict 
found  the  Foreign  Service  faced  with  the  urgent 
need  for  a  rapid  increase  in  personnel.  To  meet 
this  emergency,  the  Department  of  State  created  a 
wartime  Auxiliary  Foreign  Service  to  augment 
the  permanent  corps  of  officers.  These  men  and  a 
few  women  were  cai-efully  selected.  They  consti- 
tute a  capable  group  that  has  been  of  outstanding 
assistance  to  the  Foreign  Service  in  handling  its 
many  new  wartime  tasks.  There  still  remain, 
however,  certain  highly  specialized  technical  and 
operational  functions  to  be  performed  abroad,  con- 
nected with  the  war  effort,  wliich  are  outside  the 
appropriate  sphere  of  the  Department  of  State 

'  Tlie  author  of  this  article  is  a  Foreign  Service  Officer 
detailed  to  the  planning  staff  of  the  Office  of  the  Foreign 
Service. 

=  5U.S.C.  §  133. 

689 


590 


DEPARTMENT   OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


and  the  Foreign  Service.  Tliese  wartime  func- 
tions relate  to  lend-lease  transactions,  procure- 
ment of  strategic  commodities,  erection  of  emer- 
gency war  plants  in  other  countries,  establishment 
of  news  facilities  abroad,  and  similar  matters. 
The  President,  therefore,  on  May  20,  1942,  in  a 
clarifying  statement  which  related  to  the  responsi- 
bilities of  certain  wartime  agencies,  declared  that 
all  functions  that  were  being  or  that  could  be  per- 
formed through  the  regular  or  Auxiliary  Foreign 
Service  should  be  so  performed.  The  persons  and 
missions  that  might  be  sent  to  the  field  by  these 
wartime  agencies  would  accordingly  be  limited  to 
those  needed  for  the  aforementioned  specialized 
teclxnical  and  operational  tasks.^ 

On  the  home-front  the  constantly  increasing 
load  of  new  wartime  responsibilities  brought 
about  a  reorganization  of  the  Department  of  State 
which  became  effective  last  January.  Among  the 
many  other  changes,  the  administration  of  the 
Foreign  Service  was  improved  by  the  establish- 
ment of  an  Office  of  the  Foreign  Service  with  Mr. 
John  G.  Erhardt,  a  Foreign  Service  officer,  as  its 
first  Director.^  Mr.  Erhardt  promptly  formed  a 
Planning  Staff,  under  the  direction  of  the  Deputy 
Director,  Mr.  Monnet  B.  Davis,  within  the  Office 
to  study  and  anticipate  the  needs  of  the  Foreign 
Service;  to  review  and  evaluate  projects,  pro- 
grams, and  surveys  to  be  undertaken  by  the  For- 
eign Service;  to  prepare  an  integrated  program 
of  reforms;  and  to  make  recommendations  for  con- 
tinual adjustment  and  improvement  both  in  the 
over-all  administration  of  the  Foreign  Service  and 
in  the  assistance  it  is  to  give  to  American  agricul- 
tural, commercial,  shipping,  industrial,  and  other 
interests. 

This  Planning  Staff  has  recently  initiated,  as 
one  of  its  fii-st  projects,  the  organization  of  a 
miique  cooperative  enterprise,  the  Joint  Survey 
Group,  to  study  and  recommend  measures  to  bring 
the  reporting  of  the  Foreign  Service  to  a  max- 
imum efficiency.  This  organization  comprises  of- 
ficials who  make  use  of  the  reports  from  the  field 
and  who  prepare  the  instructions  that  request  in- 
formation from  the  missions  and  consulates 
abroad.  It  will  make  reconnnendations  to  assure 
that,  in  the  immediate  future  and  after  the  cessa- 
tion of  hostilities,  the  reporting  of  the  Foreign 
Service  meets  the  needs  of  the  Department  of  State 


and  of  all  the  many  other  interested  Federal  agen- 
cies dependent  ujJon  the  Foreign  Service  for  their 
reporting  from  abroad.  It  will  suggest  also  any 
appropriate  informational  measures  that  may  be 
necessary  to  aid  American  business  interests  in 
foreign  countries. 

The  composition  of  the  Joint  Survey  Group  is, 
in  some  respects,  new  in  the  Federal  civil  service. 
The  actual  personnel  of  the  Group  consists  of  26 
officers,  of  whom  12  are  Foreign  Service  officers, 
designated  from  the  various  offices  and  divisions  in 
the  Department.  Associated  with  them  are  45 
other  officers  from  both  the  Department  of  State 
and  the  other  Governmental  establishments  that 
daily  utilize  the  material  emanating  from  the  field. 
An  official  from  the  Division  of  Administrative 
Management  of  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget  is  on 
loan  to  the  Department  to  assist  in  the  project  and 
to  observe  the  working  techniques  emj^loyed. 

The  71  members  and  associates  of  the  Joint 
Survej'  Group  operate  as  members  of  one  or  more 
of  the  following  six  working  committees  which 
deal  with  specific  aspects  of  re^Jorting  from  the 
field : 


1. 

Political 

5.  Cultural  and 

2. 

Economic 

Informational 

3. 

Requirements 

6.  Evaluation  and 

(i.  e.  Economic 

Grading  of 

Warfare) 

Reports 

4. 

Technical 

A  temporary  subcommittee  has  also  been  desig- 
nated to  translate  into  the  field  instructions  certain 
proposals  of  an  inter-departmental  committee 
which  recently  reviewed  chapter  XIV  of  the  For- 
eign Service  Regulations  relating  to  the  protec- 
tion and  the  promotion  of  American  economic 
interests  abroad. 

A  Program  Committee,  the  members  of  which 
are  the  chairmen  and  vice  chairmen  of  the  six  sub- 
committees and  the  temporary  subcommittee, 
reviews  and  coordinates  the  efforts  of  all  the 
groups  and  insures  that  the  various  recommenda- 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  18,  1&12,  p.  337  and  May  23,  1942,  p. 
475. 

=  Departmental  Order  1218,  effective  Jan.  15,  1944, 
established  a  new  Office  of  Foi-eign  Service  Administra- 
tion. The  name  of  this  unit  was  changed  by  Departmental 
Order  1273  of  May  6,  1944,  to  the  Office  of  the  Foreign 
Service. 


JUKE   24,    1944 


591 


tions  result  in  an  orderly  pattern  of  directives.  A 
small  Steering  Committee  has  general  supervision 
over  the  entire  project. 

The  scope  of  each  Committee's  terms  of  refer- 
ence has  been  left  as  wide  as  possible,  consistent 
with  the  program  of  the  Group.  The  committees 
have  been  urged  to  consider  any  conditions  that 
may  affect,  directly  or  indirectly,  the  reporting  of 
the  Foreign  Service,  and  to  key  their  recommen- 
dations so  that  the  optimum  conditions  may  be 
obtained.  The  initiative  and  the  opportunity  are 
theirs. 

"Wlien  matters  of  policy  are  involved,  the  Direc- 
tor of  the  Office  of  the  Foreign  Service  will  sponsor 
the  recommendations  before  the  appropriate  offi- 
cials of  the  Department.  He  will  review,  in  col- 
laboration with  the  other  appropriate  Offices  and 
Divisions  of  the  Department,  the  Group's  instruc- 
tions before  they  are  sent  to  the  field. 

The  several  committees  of  the  Joint  Survey 
Group,  during  their  first  weeks  of  work,  have 
drafted  a  number  of  urgently  needed  circular  in- 
structions to  be  sent  immediately  to  the  missions 
and  consulates  abroad.  These  initial  instructions 
are  already  on  their  way  to  the  field.  Over  a  dozen 
other  similar  instructions  are  now  under  prepara- 
tion. These  further  instructions  relate  to  pressing 
current  problems  facing  the  Department  and  the 
other  agencies  that  create  a  need  to  revise  old  in- 
structions or  a  demand  for  new  types  of  informa- 
tion in  the  form  of  regular  periodic  reports. 
Many  of  these  instructions  will  later  be  incorpo- 
rated in  a  revised  edition  of  the  Foreign  Service 
Regulations. 

As  soon  as  these  immediate  tasks  have  been  com- 
pleted, the  committees  intend  to  consider  certain 
basic  long-term  problems  which  affect  reporting  in 
the  field  and  its  use  by  the  Department.  They 
propose  to  make  any  necessary  recommendations 
to  accomplish  the  changes  needed  to  bring  about 
the  most  effective  reporting  from  the  officers 
abroad  and  the  most  efficient  use  of  the  material  in 
Washington.  The  committees  have  already  con- 
sulted several  outstanding  authorities  that  are  not 
associated  with  the  Group.  Plans  are  now  under 
way  for  some  of  America's  leading  economists, 
historians,  industrialists,  and  public-relations  ex- 
perts to  lend  their  assistance. 

The  significance  of  the  project,  both  to  the  De- 
partment and  to  the  Foreign  Service,  is  obvious. 


The  Joint  Survey  Group  has  requested  suggestions 
and  comments  from  all  officers  in  the  field  associ- 
ated with  the  work  of  the  Foreign  Service.  It 
expects  to  obtain  from  this  source  valuable  help 
and  information  which  the  appropriate  commit- 
tees will  be  able  to  incorporate  in  their  respective 
i-ecommendations. 

The  final  definitive  proposals  will  thus  reflect 
the  considered  judgment  of  71  officials  who  com- 
prise experts  within  the  Department  of  State, 
from  other  Federal  agencies,  and  the  Foreign 
Service  personnel  abroad.  These  men  and  women 
constitute,  on  the  whole,  an  outstanding  assembly 
of  talent  intimately  acquainted  with  the  many 
thorny  problems  involved  and  their  wide  ramifi- 
cations. The  conclusions  reached  will  have  been 
tempered  and  matured  after  the  consultations 
with  the  best  outside  advice  obtainable.  The  rec- 
ommendations of  this  Joint  Survey  Group  should 
therefore  be  of  real  assistance  to  the  higher  offi- 
cials of  the  Department  as  they  complete  plans  to 
establish  the  necessary  organization  at  home  and 
abroad  to  cope  with  the  difficult  and  trying  prob- 
lems that  lie  ahead. 

DEATH  OF  JULIAN  B.  FOSTER 

[Released  to  the  press  June  19] 

The  Department  of  State  regrets  to  announce 
that  Julian  B.  Foster,  a  Foreign  Service  officer, 
died  at  the  Bethesda  Naval  Hospital  on  June  17. 


Mr.  Foster  was  born  in  Colorado  Springs  on 
July  20,  1897.  Following  his  graduation  from 
Georgetown  University  in  1923,  he  did  graduate 
work  at  Columbia  University  and  at  New  York 
University.  During  his  varied  career,  he  served 
as  newspaper  reporter,  Civil  Service  Commis- 
sioner, special  agent  with  the  Bureau  of  Foreign 
and  Domestic  Commerce  in  New  York,  trade  com- 
missioner in  Australia  and  New  Zealand  and  at 
Singapore,  and  as  Commercial  Attache  at  Copen- 
hagen. 

After  Mr.  Foster  became  a  Foreign  Service  of- 
ficer on  July  1, 1939,  he  continued  to  serve  as  Com- 
mercial Attache  at  Copenhagen  imtil  December  12. 
1941.  At  the  outbreak  of  the  war  in  Europe  he 
returned  to  the  Department.  On  July  14, 1942  he 
was  detailed  to  special  duty  with  the  Maritime 
Commission  in  Washington. 


Treaty  Information 


PROTOCOL  ON  PELAGIC  \^TLVLING 


On  June  22,  1944  the  President  of  the  United 
States  ratified  the  protocol  on  pelagic  whaling 
signed  at  London  on  Februai'y  7,  1944. 

The  text  of  the  protocol  follows : 

The  Governments  of  the  Union  of  South  Africa, 
the  United  States  of  America,  the  Commonwealth 
of  Australia,  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Brit- 
ain and  Northern  Ireland,  Canada,  Eire,  New 
Zealand  and  Norway, 

Being  i:)arties  or  signatories  to  the  International 
Agreement  for  the  Regulation  of  ^Vlialing  signed 
at  London  on  the  8th  June,  1937  (hereinafter  re- 
ferred to  as  the  Agreement  of  1937) ,  and  to  the 
Protocol  signed  at  London  on  the  24th  June,  1938, 
introducing  certain  amendments  into  the  Agree- 
ment of  1937  (hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  Proto- 
col of  1938) ;  and 

Desiring,  in  view  of  the  fact  that  pelagic  whal- 
ing operations  in  the  area  to  which  Article  7  of 
the  1937  Agreement  applies  have  been  interrupted 
for  a  considerable  period  by  the  existence  of  hos- 
tilities and  in  order  to  meet  the  present  emergency 
without  prejudicing  the  conservation  of  stocks  of 
whales,  to  put  into  force  by  agreement  such  pro- 
visions as  may  be  necessary  with  regard  to  pelagic 
whaling  in  this  area  when  whaling  operations  are 
resumed  there: 

Have  agreed  as  follows : — 

Article  1. 

(i)  The  period  fixed  by  Article  7  of  the  Agree- 
ment of  1937,  during  which  factory  ships  or  a 
whale  catcher  attached  thereto  may  be  used  for  the 
purpose  of  taking  or  treating  baleen  whales,  shall 
be  extended  for  the  first  season  in  which  whaling 
operations  are  resumed  in  the  area  referred  to  in 
the  said  Article  7,  so  as  to  cover  the  period  from 
the  24th  November  to  the  24th  March,  both  dates 
inclusive. 
592 


(ii)  Each  Government  party  to  the  present 
protocol  shall  give  notice  to  the  Government  of  the 
United  Kingdom  when  whale  factory  ships  regis- 
tered under  the  law  of  any  territory  under  its  au- 
thority or  otherwise  under  its  jurisdiction  engage 
in  whaling  operations  in  the  area  defined  in  Ar- 
ticle 7  of  the  Agreement  of  1937.  The  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  Kingdom  will  inform  the  other 
Governments  party  to  the  present  protocol  of  all 
notices  received  under  this  jDaragraph  and  shall 
itself  similarly  give  notice  to  the  other  contracting 
Governments  if  whale  factory  ships  registered  un- 
der the  law  of  any  territory  under  its  authority  or 
otherwise  under  its  jurisdiction  engage  in  whaling 
operations  in  the  said  area. 

(iii)  For  the  purposes  of  paragraph  (i)  of  this 
article  the  first  season  in  respect  of  which  any  no- 
tice has  been  given  under  paragraph  (ii)  above, 
shall  be  deemed  to  be  the  first  season  in  which 
whaling  operations  are  resumed.  This  season  is 
hereinafter  referred  to  as  "the  first  season." 

Aeticle  2. 

The  provisions  of  Article  1  of  the  Protocol  of 
1938  relating  to  the  taking  of  humpback  whales  in 
any  waters  south  of  40  degrees  south  latitude  shall 
apply  during  the  first  season. 

Article  3. 

(i)  During  the  first  season,  the  number  of  baleen 
whales  caught  in  the  area  referred  to  in  Article  7 
of  the  1937  Agreement  shall  not  exceed  16,000  blue 
whale  units. 

(ii)  For  the  purposes  of  paragraph  (i)  of  this 
article,  blue  whale  units  shall  be  calculated  on  the 
basis  that  one  blue  whale  equals — 

(a)  2  fin  whales,  or 

(&)  21/^  humpback  whales,  or 

((?)  6  sei  whales. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


593 


(iii)  The  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom 
shall  consult  all  the  Governments  who  have  given 
notice  under  Article  1  (ii)  of  this  agreement  in 
order  to  arrange  by  co-operation  and  agreement 
the  measures  necessary  to  ensure  that  the  total 
number  of  baleen  whales  caught  during  the  first 
season  does  not  exceed  the  number  specified  in 
paragraph  (i)  of  this  article. 

Article  4. 

In  the  absence  of  agreement  to  the  contrary  none 
of  the  provisions  of  the  present  protocol  shall  oper- 
ate except  in  the  first  season. 

Article  5. 

The  present  protocol  shall  be  ratified  and  the 
instruments  of  ratification  deiDosited  as  soon  as 
possible  with  the  Government  of  the  United 
Kingdom. 

Abticle  6. 

(i)  The  present  protocol  shall  be  open  to  acces- 
sion on  behalf  of  any  Government  which  was  a 
party  to  the  1937  Agreement  and  has  not  signed 
the  present  jiTotocol. 

(ii)  Accession  shall  be  effected  by  means  of  a 
notification  addressed  to  the  Government  of  the 
United  Kingdom. 

Article  7. 

(i)  The  Goverimient  of  the  United  Kingdom 
shall  inform  the  Governments  of  the  United  States 
of  America,  Canada,  Eire,  Mexico,  New  Zealand 
and  Norway  of  all  ratifications  of  this  protocol  or 
accessions  thereto. 

(ii)  The  present  protocol  shall  come  into  force 
as  soon  as  ratifications  or  accessions  have  been 
deposited  on  behalf  of  all  Governments  referred  to 
in  paragraph  (i)  of  this  aiticle  and  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  Kingdom. 

(iii)  The  ratification  of  or  accession  to  the  pres- 
ent protocol  by  a  Government  which  is  a  signatory 
but  not  a  party  to  the  Agreement  of  1937  shall  not 
become  effective  until  such  Government  becomes  a 
party  to  that  agreement  by  ratification. 

In  witness  whereof  the  undersigned  plenipoten- 
tiaries, being  duly  authorised  to  this  effect  by  their 
respective  Governments,  have  signed  the  present 
protocol  and  affixed  thereto  their  seals. 


Done  at  London  this  7th  day  of  February,  1944, 
in  a  single  copy  which  shall  remain  deposited  in 
the  archives  of  the  Government  of  the  United 
Kingdom  by  whom  certified  copies  will  be  trans- 
mitted to  all  the  Governments  referred  to  in  Ar- 
ticle 7  (i). 

For  the  Government  of  the  Union  of  South 
Africa : 

Denets  Reitz. 
A.  P.  VAN  DER  Post. 
For  the  Government  of  the  United  States  of 
America : 

LoTD  V.  Steere. 
For  the  Government  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Australia : 

S.  M.  Bruce. 
For  the  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  of 
Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland : 
A.  T.  A.  DoBSON. 

J.   E.  DE  WATTE^'ILUE. 

For  the  Government  of  Canada : 

Vincent  Massey. 
For  the  Government  of  Eire : 

For  the  Government  of  New  Zealand : 

W.  J.  Jordan. 
For  the  Government  of  Norway : 

BiRGER  BeRGERSEN. 

MILITARY-SERVICE  AGREEMENT 
WITH  CHINA 

An  agi-eement  between  the  United  States  and 
China  regarding  military  service  by  nationals  of 
either  country  residing  in  the  other  has  been 
effected  by  an  exchange  of  notes  signed  in  Wash- 
ington on  November  6,  1943,  May  11,  1944,  and 
June  13, 1944. 

INTER-AMERICAN  INSTITUTE  OF 
AGRICULTURAL  SCIENCES 

On  June  22, 1944  the  Senate  gave  its  advice  and 
consent  to  ratification  of  the  Convention  on  the 
Inter-American  Institute  of  Agricultural  Sciences, 
which  was  opened  for  signature  at  the  Pan  Ameri- 
can Union  on  January  15, 1944. 


594 


DEPARTMENT   OF  STATE   BULLETIN 


CONVENTION  OF  COMMERCE  AND 
NAVIGATION,  CHILE  AND  CUBA 

The  American  Embassy  at  Habana  informed  the 
Department  of  State,  by  a  despatch  of  May  31, 
1944,  of  certain  modifications  in  the  Convention 
of  Commerce  and  Navigation  between  the  Govern- 
ments of  Chile  and  Cuba  which  was  signed  at 
Habana  on  March  13,  1937.  The  modifications 
were  effected  by  an  exchange  of  notes  between  the 


two  Governments  signed  at  Santiago  on  December 
3,  1942,  ratifications  of  which  were  exchanged  in 
Habana  on  May  17, 1944. 

Tlie  texts  of  tlie  notes  exchanged  on  December 
3,  1942  are  publislied  in  tlie  Cuban  Gaceta  Oficial 
no.  298  of  May  29, 1944,  pages  8769-70.  The  text  of 
the  Convention  of  Commerce  and  Navigation 
signed  on  March  13,  1937  is  published  in  the  Chil- 
ean Diario  Oficial  no.  18,001  of  February  24, 1938, 
pages  461-63. 


Publications 


Departjient  of  State 

During  the  quarter  beginning  April  1, 1944,  the 
following  publications  have  been  released  by  the 
Department :  ^ 

2062.  Papers  Relating  to  the  Foreign  Relations  of  the 
United  States,  1929,  vol.  III.  cxiii,  885  pp.  $2 
(buckram). 

2079.  Foreign  Service  List,  January  31,  1944.  iv,  132  pp. 
Subscription,  50^  a  year  (G50  foreign)  ;  single  copy, 
20^. 

2080.  Health  and  Sanitation  Program  :  Agreement  Between 
the  United  States  of  America  and  Colombia— Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Bogota  October  23,  1942. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  369.     5  pp.     50. 

2081.  The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals : 
Revision  VII,  March  23,  1944,  Promulgated  Pursuant  to 
Proclamation  2497  of  the  President  of  July  17,  1941. 
374  pp.     Free. 

2082.  Boundaries  of  the  Latin  American  Republics:  An 
Annotated  List  of  Documents,  1493-1943  (Tentative  Ver- 
sion). By  Alexander  Marchant,  Office  of  the  Geogra- 
pher, Department  of  State.  Inter-American  Series  24. 
V,  386  pp.     500. 

2084.  Military  Mission:  Agreement  Between  the  United 
States  of  America  and  Iran— Signed  at  Tehran  Novem- 
ber 27,  1043.  Executive  Agi-eement  Series  361.  16  pp. 
100. 

2085.  Plantation  Rubber  Investigations:  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Nicaragua 
Continuing  in  Force  an  Agreement  of  January  11,  1941, 
and  Text  of  Agreement  of  January  11,  1941— Effected 
by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Managua  June  23  and  26, 
1943 ;  effective  July  1, 1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series 
357.     8  pp.     50. 


2086.  Plantation  Rubber  Investigations:  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Honduras 
Continuing  in  Force  an  Agreement  of  February  28, 
1941,  and  Text  of  Agreement  of  Februai-y  28,  1941— 
Agreement  effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at 
Tegucigalpa  June  18  and  28,  1943 ;  effective  July  1,  1943. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  358.    14  pp.    50. 

2087.  Index  to  the  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  IX, 
nos.  210-235,  July  3-December  25,  1943.     19  pp.     Free. 

2089.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  248, 
March  25,  1944.     24  pi).     100.' 

2090.  Jurisdiction  Over  Criminal  Offenses  Committed  by 
the  Armed  Forces  of  the  United  States  in  Egypt :  Agree- 
ment Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Egypt 
and  Proces-Verbal — Agreement  effected  by  exchanges  of 
notes  signed  at  Cairo  March  2,  1943 ;  effective  March  2, 
1943.    Executive  Agreement  Series  ZV\Q.    17  pp.    100. 

2091.  Mobilizatiou  of  Productive  Resources  of  Brazil: 
Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
Brazil — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Wash- 
ington March  3,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  370. 
5  pp.    50. 

2092.  Foreign  Consular  Offices  in  the  United  States. 
March  1,  1944.    iv,  49  pp.    150. 

2093.  The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals: 
Cumulative  Supplement  No.  1,  April  7,  1944,  to  Revision 
VII  of  March  23,  1944.    16  pp.    Free. 

2094.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  249, 
April  1,  1944.    12  pp.    100. 

2095.  Diplomatic  List,  April  1944.  ii,  123  pp.  Subscrip- 
tion, $1  a  year;  single  copy,  100. 


'  Serial  numbers  which  do  not  appear  in  this  list  have 
appeared  previously  or  will  appear  in  subsequent  lists. 
"  Subscription,  $2.75  a  year. 


JUNE   24,    1944 


595 


2096.  Foreign  Policy  of  tlie  Uuited  States  uf  America: 
Address  by  Cordell  Hull,  Secretary  of  State,  over  the 
network  of  the  Columbia  Broadcasting  System  April  9, 
1944.    16  pp.    5«(. 

2097.  Counseling  and  Guidance  for  the  Foreign  Student. 
By  William  H.  Dennis,  Division  of  Science,  Education, 
and  Art,  Department  of  State,     ii,  8  pp.     Free. 

2098.  Project  To  Increase  the  Production  of  Rubber  in 
Brazil :  Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Brazil — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes 
signed  at  Washington  March  3,  1942.  Executive  Agree- 
ment Series  371.    5  pp.    5^ 

2099.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  250, 
April  8,  1944.    24  pp.    10^. 

2100.  Digest  of  International  Law.  By  Green  Haywood 
Hackworth,  Legal  Adviser  of  the  Department  of  State. 
Vol.  VIII,  general  index,  list  of  cases.    384  pp.    $1.50. 

2101.  Temporary  Raising  of  Level  of  Lake  St.  Francis 
During  Low-Water  Periods :  Agreement  Between  the 
Uuited  States  of  America  and  Canada  Continuing  in 
Effect  the  Agreement  of  November  10,  1941  as  Continued 
by  the  Agreement  of  October  5  and  9,  1942 — Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington  October  5  and 
9,  1&J3.    Executive  Agreement  Series  377.    2  pp.    5<f. 

2102.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  251, 
April  15,  1944.    35  pp.     10«;. 

2103.  Treaties  in  Force :  A  List  of  Treaties  and  Other  In- 
ternational Acts  of  the  United  States  in  Force  on  De- 
cember 31,  1941.    viii,  275  pp.    400. 

2104.  The  Importance  of  International  Commerce  to  Pros- 
perity. Radio  broadcast  by  Harry  C.  Hawkins.  Com- 
mercial Policy  Series  74.    8  pp.     50. 

2105.  Plantation  Rubber  Investigations :  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Mexico  Con- 
tinuing in  Force  an  Agreement  of  April  11,  1941  as  Sup- 
plemented by  an  Agreement  of  July  14,  1942  and  an 
Agreement  of  March  3,  4,  and  29  and  April  3,  1943,  and 
Texts  of  Above-Cited  Agreements — Effected  by  exchange 
of  notes  signed  at  Mexico  City  July  10  and  September  20, 
1943 ;  effective  July  1,  1943.  Executive  Agreement 
Series  3(>4.    20  pp.    100. 

2107.  Haitian  Finances :  Supplementary  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Haiti — Signed 
at  Port-au-Prince  August  28,  1943.  Executive  Agree- 
ment Series  378.    2  pp.    50. 

2108.  Recruiting  of  Mexican  Non-Agricultural  Workers : 
Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
Mexico — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Mexico 
City  April  29,  1943 ;  effective  April  29,  1943.  Executive 
Agreement  Series  376.     14  pp.     50. 

2109.  Health  and  Sanitation  Program:  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Ecuador — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington 
February  24,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  379. 
3  pp.     60. 


2110.  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  United  States  in  Wartime  and 
After :  Address  by  Breckinridge  Long,  Assistant  Secre- 
tary of  State,  before  the  American  Federation  of  Labor 
Forum  on  Labor  and  the  Post-War  World,  New  York, 
N.  Y.,  April  12,  1944.     9  pp.     50. 

2111.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  252, 
April  22,  1944.     20  pp.     100. 

2112.  Flight  Strii)s  Along  Alaska  Highway:  Agreement 
Between  the  Uuited  States  of  America  and  Canada — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  August 
26  and  September  10, 1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series 
381.     2  pp.     50. 

2113.  The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals: 
Cumulative  Supplement  No.  2,  May  5,  1944,  to  Revision 
VII  of  March  23,  1944.     25  pp.     Free. 

2114.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  253, 
April  29,  1944.     16  pp.     100. 

2115.  Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Between 
the  United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Signed  at  Rio 
de  Janeiro  July  17,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series 
373.     8  pp.     50. 

2116.  Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Signed 
at  Rio  de  Janeiro  February  10,  1943 ;  Executive  Agree- 
ment Series  374.    7  pp.    50. 

2117.  Diplomatic  List,  May  1944.  il,  122  pp.  Subscrip- 
tion, $1  a  year ;  single  copy,  100. 

2118.  Status  of  Countries  in  Relation  t,o  the  War  April  22, 
1944 :  Compiled  by  Katharine  Elizabeth  Crane,  Division 
of  Research  and  Publication,  Department  of  State — 
Reprinted  from  the  Bulletin  of  April  22,  1944.     10  pp. 

100. 

2119.  Health  and  Sanitation  Program :  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Brazil — Agree- 
ment signed  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  November  25,  1943, 
effective  January  1, 1944;  and  Exchange  of  Notes  signed 
November  9  and  25,  1943.  Executive  Agreement  Series 
375.    17  pp.    100. 

2120.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  254, 
May  6,  1944.    20  pp.    100. 

2121.  Foreign  Service  List  (Abridged),  April  1,  1944.  iv, 
60  pp.  Subscription,  500  a  year  (650  foreign)  ;  single 
copy,  150. 

2122.  Southern  Terminus  of  Alaska  Highway :  Agreement 
Between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Canada — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  May 
4  and  9,  1942.  Executive  Agreement  Series  380.  2  pp. 
50. 

2123.  Haines-Champagne  Section  of  Alaslia  Highway: 
Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of  America  and 
Canada— Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa 
November  28  and  December  7,  1942.  Executive  Agree- 
ment Series  382.    2  pp.    50. 


596 


DEPARTMENT  OF   STATE  BULLETIN 


2124.  Importation  Privileges  for  Government  Officials  and 
Employees :  Agreement  Between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Canada — Effected  by  exchanges  of  notes 
signed  at  Ottawa  July  21,  October  29,  and  November  9, 
1942.    Executive  Agreement  Series  383.    3  pp.    50. 

2125.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  255, 
May  13,  1944.    40  pp.    100. 

2126.  Canol  Project :  Agreement  Between  the  United  States 
of  America  and  Canada — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes 
signed  at  Ottawa  June  27  and  29, 1942 ;  effective  June  29, 
1942.    Executive  Agreement  Series  386.    3  pp.    50. 

2127.  Canol  Project  Pipeline :  Agreement  Between  the 
United  States  of  America  and  Canada — Effected  by  ex- 
change of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  August  14  and  15, 1942. 
Executive  Agreement  Series  387.    2  pp.    50. 

2128.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  256, 
May  20,  1944.    28  pp.    100. 

2129.  The  Personnel  Program  of  the  Department  of  State : 
Principles  and  Policies.     8  pp.     50. 

2130.  Cultural-Cooperation  Program  of  the  Department  of 
State:  Address  by  G.  Howland  Shaw,  Assistant  Sec- 
retary of  State,  at  the  Loyola  University  Forum,  New 
Orleans,  La.,  May  8,  1944.     14  pp.     50. 

2132.  The  Proclaimed  List  of  Certain  Blocked  Nationals : 
Cumulative  Supplement  No.  3,  June  2,  1944,  to  Revision 
VII  of  March  23,  1944.     36  pp.     Free. 

2133.  Canol  Project  Exploratory  Wells:  Agreement  Be- 
tween the  United  States  of  America  and  Canada — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ottawa  De- 
cember 28,  1942  and  January  13,  1943.  Executive 
Agreement  Series  388.     2  pp.     50. 

2134.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  257, 
May  27,  1044.     16  pp.     100. 

2138.  Diplomatic  List,  June  1944.  ii,  121  pp.  Subscrip- 
tion, $1  a  year ;  single  copy,  100. 

2139.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  258, 
June  3,  1944.     16  pp.     100. 

2144.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  2.j9, 
June  10,  1944.     23  pp.     100. 

2145.  The  Department  of  State  Bulletin,  vol.  X,  no.  200, 
June  17,  1944.     23  pp.     100. 

The  Dep-artment  of  State  also  publishes  the  slip 
laws  and  Statutes  at  Large.  Laws  are  issued  in 
a  special  series  and  are  numbered  in  the  order 
in  which  they  are  signed.  Treaties  also  are  issued 
in  a  special  series  and  are  numbered  in  the  order  in 
which  they  are  proclaimed.  Spanish,  Portuguese, 
and  French  translations,  prepared  by  the  Depart- 
ment's Central  Translating  Division,  have  their 
own  publication  numbers  running  consecutively 
from  1.  All  other  publications  of  the  Department 
since  October  1,  1929  are  numbered  consecutively 
in  the  order  in  which  they  are  sent  to  pi-ess;  in 


addition,  some  of  them  are  subdivided  into  series 
according  to  general  subject. 

To  avoid  delay,  requests  for  publications  of  the 
Department  of  State  should  be  addressed  direct 
to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.C.,  except  in 
the  case  of  free  publications,  which  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Department.  The  Superintendent 
of  Documents  will  accept  deposits  against  which 
the  cost  of  publications  ordered  may  be  charged 
and  will  notify  the  depositor  when  the  deposit  is 
exhausted.  The  cost  to  depositors  of  a  complete 
set  of  the  publications  of  the  Department  for  a  | 
year  will  probably  be  somewhat  in  excess  of  $15.  " 
Orders  may  be  placed,  however,  with  the  Superin- 
tendent of  Documents  for  single  publications  or 
for  one  or  more  series. 

The  Superintendent  of  Documents  also  has,  for 
free  distribution,  the  following  price  lists  which 
may  be  of  interest:  Foreign  Relations  of  the 
United  States;  American  History  and  Biography; 
Tariff;  Immigration;  Alaska  and  Hawaii;  Insular 
Possessions;  Laws;  Commerce  and  Manufactures; 
Political  Science;  and  Maps.  A  list  of  publica- 
tions of  the  Bureau  of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Com- 
merce may  be  obtained  from  the  Department  of 
Commerce. 


Legislation 


^ 


Assisting  in  the  Internal  Development  of  the  Virgin 
Islands  by  tlie  Undertaking  of  Useful  Projects  Therein, 
and  for  Other  Purposes.  H.  Kept.  1673,  78th  Cong., 
on  H.R.  5029.     9  pp. 

Conditions  in  Puerto  Rico.  H.  Rept.  1676,  78th  Cong., 
on  H.  Res.  159.     6  pp. 

Departments  of  State,  Justice,  and  Commerce  Appropria- 
tion Bill,  1945.  H.  Rept.  1687,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4204. 
2  pp. 

Authorizing  the  Admission  of  Alexander  Firouz,  a  Citizen 
of  Iran,  to  the  United  States  Military  Academy.  H.  Rept. 
1703,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.J.  Res.  228.    1  p. 

Foreign  Economic  Administration  Appropriation  Bill,  1945. 
H.  Rept.  1721,  78th  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4937.     3  pp. 

National  War  Agencies  Appropriation  Bill,  1945.  H.  Rept. 
1722,  7Sth  Cong.,  on  H.R.  4879.    4  pp. 

Providing  for  the  Loss  of  United  States  Nationality  Under 
Certain  Circumstances.  S.  Rept.  1029,  7Sth  Cong.,  on 
H.R.  4103.     [Favorable  report.]     2  pp. 


2-. 


BOSTON  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


3  9999  06352  731  9